Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 26, 2024

File Nos. 333-62695; 811-5343

 

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

 

FORM N-4

 

Registration Statement Under The Securities Act of 1933

   

Pre-Effective Amendment No.

   

Post-Effective Amendment No. 51

   

and/or

 

Registration Statement Under the Investment Company Act of 1940

   

Amendment No. 359

   

(Check Appropriate Box or Boxes)

 

 

Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1

(Exact Name of Registrant)

 

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

(Name of Depositor)

 

11011 West Broad Street Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

(Address of Depositor’s Principal Executive Office, Zip Code)

 

(804) 281-6000

(Depositor’s Telephone Number, Including Area Code)

 

Michael D. Pappas, Esq.

Associate General Counsel

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

(Name and Complete Address of Agent for Service)

 

 

 

Approximate Date of Proposed Public Offering: Upon the effective date of this Post-Effective Amendment to this Registration Statement

 

It is proposed that this filing will become effective (check appropriate box)

 

☐ immediately upon filing pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485

 

☒ on May 1, 2024 pursuant to paragraph (b) of Rule 485

 

☐ 60 days after filing pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485

 

☐ on (date) pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of Rule 485

 

If appropriate check the following box:

 

☐ This post-effective amendment designates a new effective date for a previously filed post-effective amendment.

 

Title of Securities Being Registered: Flexible Premium Variable Deferred Annuity Contracts

 

 

 


Table of Contents

Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1

Prospectus For

Flexible Premium Variable Deferred Annuity Contracts

Form P1152 1/99

 

Issued by:

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

Telephone: (800) 352-9910

 

 

 

This prospectus, dated May 1, 2024, describes an individual flexible premium variable deferred annuity contract (the “contract” or “contracts”) offered to individuals and qualified and nonqualified retirement plans. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company (the “Company,” “we,” “us,” or “our”) issues the contract. This contract may be referred to as “RetireReadySM Extra” in our marketing materials. This contract (RetireReadySM Extra) is no longer offered or sold.

 

This prospectus describes all material features and benefits of the contract and provides details about Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1 (the “Separate Account”) and the Guarantee Account that you should know before investing. Please read this prospectus carefully before investing and keep it for future reference.

 

The contract offers you the opportunity to accumulate Contract Value and provides for the payment of periodic annuity benefits. We may pay these annuity benefits on a variable or fixed basis.

 

You may allocate your premium payments and automatic bonus credits we provide you to the Separate Account, the Guarantee Account (if available), or both. If we apply bonus credits to your contract, we will apply them with your premium payment to your Contract Value, and allocate the credits on a pro-rata basis to the investment options you select in the same ratio as the applicable premium payment. You should know that over time and under certain circumstances (such as an extended period of poor market performance), the costs associated with the bonus credit may exceed the sum of the bonus credit and any related earnings. You should consider this possibility before purchasing the contract. The bonus credit is referred to as an “enhanced premium amount” in your contract. Each Subaccount of the Separate Account invests in shares of Portfolios of the Funds listed in Appendix A of this prospectus.

 

The Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) has not approved or disapproved these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

 

Additional information about certain investment products, including variable annuities, has been prepared by the SEC’s staff and is available at investor.gov.

 

This contract:

 

    Is NOT a bank deposit

 

    Is NOT FDIC insured

 

    Is NOT insured or endorsed by a bank or any federal government agency

 

    Is NOT available in every state

 

    MAY go down in value.

 

Except for amounts in the Guarantee Account, both the value of a contract before the Maturity Date and the amount of monthly income afterwards will depend upon the investment performance of the Portfolio(s) you select. You bear the investment risk of investing in the Portfolios.

 

This contract has optional benefits that were made available to contract owners at the time they purchased the contract. Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the optional benefits are no longer available to purchase under the contract. Please note that some optional benefits may have requirements that differ from or are in addition to the base contract. Please refer to your contract or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the specific options you have elected.

 

We may offer other contracts with features that are substantially similar to those offered in this contract and in this prospectus. These other contracts may be priced differently and may have been offered exclusively to customers of one or more particular financial institutions or brokerage firms.

 

1


Table of Contents

The contract is also offered to customers of various financial institutions and brokerage firms. No financial institution or brokerage firm is responsible for the guarantees under the contract. Guarantees under the contract are the sole responsibility of the Company.

 

In the future, additional portfolios managed by certain financial institutions or brokerage firms may be added to the Separate Account. These portfolios may be offered exclusively to purchasing customers of the particular financial institution or brokerage firm.

 

This contract may be used with certain tax qualified retirement plans. The contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit; the purchase of this contract does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. Please consult a tax adviser for information specific to your circumstances.

 

To contact our Home Office, call us at (800) 352-9910, or write us at:

 

or write us at:

 

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

 

This prospectus does not constitute an offering in any jurisdiction in which such offering may not lawfully be made.

 

2


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

 

Definitions

     6  

Important Information You Should Consider About the Contract

     8  

Overview of the Contract

     13  

Fee Tables

     16  

Example

     21  

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

     21  

The Company

     23  

Financial Condition of the Company

     23  

The Separate Account

     24  

The Portfolios

     24  

Subaccounts

     25  

Voting Rights

     27  

Asset Allocation Program

     27  

The Guarantee Account

     37  

Charges and Other Deductions

     38  

Transaction Expenses

     38  

Surrender Charge

     38  

Exceptions to the Surrender Charge

     39  

Deductions from the Separate Account

     39  

Charges for the Living Benefit Rider Options

     40  

Charges for the Death Benefit Rider Options

     43  

Other Charges

     44  

The Contract

     45  

Ownership

     46  

Assignment

     46  

Premium Payments

     47  

Valuation Day and Valuation Period

     47  

Allocation of Premium Payments

     47  

Bonus Credits

     48  

Valuation of Accumulation Units

     48  

Benefits Available Under the Contract

     49  

Transfers

     56  

Transfers Before the Maturity Date

     56  

Transfers from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts

     57  

Transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account

     57  

Transfers Among the Subaccounts

     57  

Telephone/Internet Transactions

     58  

Confirmation of Transactions

     58  

Special Note on Reliability

     58  

Transfers by Third Parties

     59  

Special Note on Frequent Transfers

     59  

 

3


Table of Contents

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

     61  

Defined Dollar Cost Averaging Program

     61  

Portfolio Rebalancing Program

     62  

Guarantee Account Interest Sweep Program

     63  

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders

     63  

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders

     63  

Restrictions on Distributions From Certain Contracts

     64  

Systematic Withdrawal Program

     64  

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders

     65  

Lifetime Income Plus Solution

     65  

Lifetime Income Plus 2008

     79  

Lifetime Income Plus 2007

     92  

Lifetime Income Plus

     100  

Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus and Lifetime Income Plus 2007

     108  

Death of Owner and/or Annuitant (for contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date of state insurance department approval)

     109  

Distribution Provisions Upon Death of Owner or Joint Owner

     109  

Death Benefit at Death of Any Annuitant Before the Maturity Date

     109  

Basic Death Benefit

     109  

Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option

     109  

5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option

     110  

Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option

     111  

The Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option

     112  

Termination of Death Benefit Rider Options When Contract Assigned or Sold

     112  

How to Claim Proceeds and/or Death Benefit Payments

     112  

Distribution Rules

     114  

Death of Owner and/or Annuitant (for contracts issued prior to May 1, 2003, or prior to the date of state insurance department approval)

     115  

Death Benefit at Death of Any Annuitant Before the Maturity Date

     115  

Basic Death Benefit

     115  

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

     117  

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit

     117  

When We Calculate the Death Benefit

     118  

Death of an Owner or Joint Owner Before the Maturity Date

     118  

Death of an Owner, Joint Owner, or Annuitant On or After the Maturity Date

     121  

Income Payments

     121  

Optional Payment Plans

     122  

Variable Income Payments

     123  

Transfers After the Maturity Date

     124  

Guaranteed Income Advantage

     124  

Payment Optimizer Plus

     131  

Tax Matters

     140  

Introduction

     140  

Taxation of Non-Qualified Contracts

     140  

Section 1035 Exchanges

     142  

Qualified Retirement Plans

     143  

Federal Income Tax Withholding

     147  

State Income Tax Withholding

     147  

Tax Status of the Company

     147  

 

4


Table of Contents

Federal Estate, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

     147  

Definition of Spouse Under Federal Law

     148  

Annuity Purchases by Residents of Puerto Rico

     148  

Annuity Purchases by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

     148  

Foreign Tax Credits

     148  

Changes in the Law

     148  

Requesting Payments

     148  

Sales of the Contracts

     149  

Additional Information

     150  

Owner Questions

     150  

State Regulation

     150  

Evidence of Death, Age, Gender, Marital Status or Survival

     150  

Records and Reports

     150  

Other Information

     151  

Exemption to File Periodic Reports

     151  

Unclaimed Property

     151  

Legal Proceedings

     151  

Appendix A

     A-1  

Portfolios Available Under the Contract

     A-1  

Appendix B

     B-1  

Examples—Death Benefit Calculations

     B-1  

 

5


Table of Contents

DEFINITIONS

 

The following terms are used throughout the prospectus:

 

Accumulation Unit — An accounting unit of measure we use to calculate the value in the Separate Account before income payments commence.

 

Annuitant — The person named in the contract upon whose age and, where appropriate gender, we determine monthly income benefits.

 

Annuity Unit — An accounting unit of measure we use to calculate the amount of the second and each subsequent variable income payment.

 

Asset Allocation Model — A component of the Investment Strategy for the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders and Payment Optimizer Plus.

 

Benefit Date — For the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit Riders (except for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and Lifetime Income Plus Solution), the date that will be the later of the Contract Date and the Valuation Day of the most recent reset.

 

Benefit Year — For the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit Riders (except for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and Lifetime Income Plus Solution), each one-year period following the Benefit Date and each anniversary of that date. For Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and Lifetime Income Plus Solution, each one-year period following the Contract Date and each anniversary of that date.

 

Bonus Credit — The “enhanced premium amount” described in your contract. For contracts that qualify, it is the amount we will add to each premium payment we receive. The Bonus Credit is not considered a “premium payment” under the contract.

 

Code — The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

Contract Date — The date we issue your contract and your contract becomes effective. Your Contract Date is shown in your contract. We use the Contract Date to determine contract years and anniversaries.

 

Contract Value — The total value of all your Accumulation Units in the Subaccounts and any amounts you hold in the Guarantee Account.

 

Designated Subaccounts — The Subaccounts available under the Investment Strategy for the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders and Payment Optimizer Plus.

 

Fund — Any open-end management investment company or any unit investment trust in which the Separate Account invests.

 

General Account — Assets of the Company other than those allocated to the Separate Account or any other segregated asset account of the Company.

 

GIS Subaccount — A division of the Separate Account that invests exclusively in shares of the State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund. This Subaccount is only available when Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected at the time of application. Premium payments may not be made directly to the GIS Subaccount. Allocations must be made pursuant to scheduled transfers from all other Subaccounts in which you have allocated assets.

 

Gross Withdrawal — For the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders, an amount withdrawn from Contract Value, including any surrender charge, any taxes withheld and any premium taxes assessed.

 

Guarantee Account — Part of our General Account that provides a guaranteed interest rate for a specified interest rate guarantee period. The General Account is not part of and does not depend on the investment performance of the Separate Account.

 

Guaranteed Income Advantage — The marketing name for the Guaranteed Income Rider. This rider may be referred to by either name in this prospectus.

 

Home Office — Our office located at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

 

Income Start Date — For Guaranteed Income Advantage, the date income payments begin from one or more segments pursuant to the terms of Guaranteed Income Advantage.

 

Investment Strategy — The Designated Subaccounts and/or Asset Allocation Model required for the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders and Payment Optimizer Plus. The Investment Strategy is required in order to receive the full benefits available under these rider options.

 

Joint Annuitant — For the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders, the additional life on which monthly income is based. For Payment Optimizer Plus, the additional life on which the Withdrawal Factor may be based.

 

Lifetime Income Plus — The marketing name for one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders discussed in this prospectus.

 

6


Table of Contents

Lifetime Income Plus 2007 — The marketing name for one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders discussed in this prospectus.

 

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 — The marketing name for one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders discussed in the prospectus. The rider may be issued with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit. For purposes of this prospectus, references to Lifetime Income Plus 2008 include a rider issued with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit, as applicable, unless stated otherwise.

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution — The marketing name for one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders discussed in the prospectus. The rider may be issued with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit. For purposes of this prospectus, references to Lifetime Income Plus Solution include a rider issued with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit, as applicable, unless stated otherwise.

 

Maturity Date — The date on which your income payments will commence, provided the Annuitant is living on that date. The Maturity Date is stated in your contract, unless changed by you in writing in a form acceptable to us. The owner selects the contract’s initial Maturity Date at issue. The latest Maturity Date we currently permit may not be a date beyond the younger Annuitant’s 90th birthday, unless we consent to a later date.

 

Maximum Anniversary Value — For Lifetime Income Plus Solution, an amount used to calculate the benefit base for benefits provided under the rider.

 

Payment Optimizer Plus — The marketing name for the Payment Protection with Commutation Immediate and Deferred Variable Annuity Rider.

 

Portfolio — A division of a Fund, the assets of which are separate from other Portfolios that may be available in the Fund. Each Portfolio has its own investment objective.

 

Principal Protection Death Benefit — The death benefit provided under Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and Lifetime Income Plus Solution, if elected at the time of application, for an additional charge.

 

Purchase Payment Benefit Amount — For Lifetime Income Plus Solution, an amount used to calculate the benefit base for benefits provided under the rider.

 

Rider Death Benefit — The death benefit payable under Lifetime Income Plus and Lifetime Income Plus 2007

 

Roll-Up Value — An amount used to calculate the Withdrawal Limit for benefits provided under Lifetime Income Plus 2007 and Lifetime Income Plus 2008. For Lifetime Income Plus Solution, the Roll-Up Value is an amount used to calculate the benefit base for benefits provided under the rider.

 

Separate Account — Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, a separate account we established to receive Subaccount allocations. The Separate Account is divided into Subaccounts, each of which invests in shares of a separate Portfolio.

 

Subaccount — A division of the Separate Account which invests exclusively in shares of a designated Portfolio. A Subaccount may be referred to as an Investment Subdivision in the contract and/or marketing materials.

 

Surrender Value — The value of the contract as of the date we receive your written request to surrender at our Home Office, less any applicable surrender charge, premium tax, any optional death benefit charge and contract charge.

 

Valuation Day — Each day on which the New York Stock Exchange is open for regular trading, except for days that the Subaccount’s corresponding Portfolio does not value its shares.

 

Valuation Period — The period that starts at the close of regular trading on the New York Stock Exchange on any Valuation Day and ends at the close of regular trading on the next succeeding Valuation Day.

 

Withdrawal Base — An amount used to establish the Withdrawal Limit for benefits provided under the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders (except for Lifetime Income Plus Solution).

 

Withdrawal Factor — The percentage used to establish the Withdrawal Limit for benefits provided under the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders.

 

Withdrawal Limit — The total amount that you may withdraw in a Benefit Year without reducing the benefit provided under the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders.

 

7


Table of Contents

IMPORTANT INFORMATION YOU SHOULD CONSIDER ABOUT THE CONTRACT

 

   
Fees and Expenses   Location in Prospectus
Charges for Early Withdrawals  

If you withdraw money from your contract within eight years following your last premium payment, you may be assessed a surrender charge of up to 8% of the value of the premium payment withdrawn.

 

For example, if you purchased the contract and withdrew a $100,000 initial premium payment sooner than one complete year after making the payment, you could be assessed a surrender charge of up to $8,000 on the premium payment withdrawn.

 

Fee Tables

 

Charges and Other Deductions — Surrender Charge

Transaction Charges   In addition to surrender charges, you may also be charged for other transactions. We currently do not assess a transfer charge. However, we reserve the right to assess a transfer charge of $10 for each transfer among the Subaccounts after the first transfer in the calendar month.  

Fee Tables

 

Charges and Other Deductions — Other Charges

Ongoing Fees and Expenses
(annual charges)
  The table below describes the fees and expenses that you may pay each year, depending on the options you choose. Please refer to your contract data page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.  

Fee Tables

 

Charges and Other Deductions

 

     

Annual Fee

   Minimum    Maximum

Base contract1

   1.55%     1.55%

Investment options (Portfolio fees and expenses)2

   0.31%    2.375%

Optional benefits available for an additional charge (for a single optional benefit, if elected)3

   0.20%     1.75%

 

1    The base contract expense consists of the mortality and expense risk charge and administrative expense charge, each of which is expressed as an annual percentage charge that is assessed as a percentage of average daily net assets in the Separate Account.

 

2    As a percentage of Portfolio assets. These expenses are as of December 31, 2023, and will vary from year to year.

 

3    The minimum fee is for the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit and is a percentage of Contract Value at the time the charge is taken. The maximum fee is the current fee for Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit (Annuitant Age 71-85) (consisting of 1.25% of benefit base plus 0.50% of the value of Principal Protection Death Benefit).

 

8


Table of Contents

Because your contract is customizable, the choices you make affect how much you will pay. To help you understand the cost of owning your contract, the following table shows the lowest and highest cost you could pay each year, based on current charges. This estimate assumes that you do not take withdrawals from the contract, which could add surrender charges that substantially increase costs.

 

 

   
Lowest Annual Cost:    Highest Annual Cost:

$1,746

   $5,685

Assumes:

  

Assumes:

•  Investment of $100,000

•  5% annual appreciation

•  Least expensive combination of contract classes and Portfolio fees and expenses

•  No optional benefits

•  No sales charges

•  No additional premium payments, transfers, or withdrawals

 

  

•  Investment of $100,000

•  5% annual appreciation

•  Most expensive combination of contract classes, optional benefits and Portfolio fees and expenses

•  No sales charges

•  No additional premium payments, transfers, or withdrawals

 

     
Risks        Location in Prospectus

Risk of Loss

 

•  You can lose money by investing in this contract.

 

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

The Contract — Valuation of Accumulation Units

Not a Short-Term Investment

 

•  This contract is not a short-term investment and is not appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash.

 

•  A surrender charge can apply whenever you make a withdrawal of premium payments less than eight completed years after we received the premium payment.

 

•  The benefits of tax deferral mean that the contract is more beneficial to investors with a long time horizon.

 

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

Charges and Other Deductions

Risks Associated with Investment Options

 

•  An investment in this contract is subject to the risk of poor investment performance, which can vary depending on the performance of the investment options available under the contract (i.e., the Portfolios).

 

•  Each Portfolio (and the Guarantee Account) has its own unique risks.

 

•  You should review the prospectuses for the Portfolios and the section of this prospectus concerning the Guarantee Account before making an investment decision.

 

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

The Guarantee Account

 

Appendix A — Portfolios Available Under the Contract

 

9


Table of Contents
     
Risks         Location in Prospectus

Insurance Company Risks

 

•  An investment in the contract is subject to the risks related to the Company, including that any obligations (including under the Guarantee Account), guarantees, or benefits are subject to the claims-paying ability of the Company. More information about the Company, including its financial strength ratings, can be obtained by calling our Home Office at (800) 352-9910 or writing to us at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

  

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

The Company

     
Restrictions         Location in Prospectus

Investments

 

•  We reserve the right, subject to applicable law, to make additions, deletions, and substitutions for the Portfolios of the Funds.

 

•  For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation.

 

•  We reserve the right to limit transfers if frequent or large transfers occur, and to limit transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account.

 

•  Under certain of the optional riders, we require you to invest only in an Investment Strategy.

  

The Separate Account — Subaccounts

 

The Separate Account — Asset Allocation Program

 

The Guarantee Account

 

Transfers

Optional Benefits

 

•  Under certain of our optional Living Benefit Riders (i.e., the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit rider options, Guaranteed Income Advantage, and Payment Optimizer Plus), we require you to allocate Contract Value to a prescribed Investment Strategy or, for Guaranteed Income Advantage, to the GIS Subaccount, in order to receive the full benefits provided under the applicable rider.

  

The Separate Account — Asset Allocation Program

 

Transfers

 

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders — Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders

 

Death of Owner and/or Annuitant

 

Income Payments — Guaranteed Income Advantage

 

 

10


Table of Contents
     
Restrictions         Location in Prospectus
   

•  Our optional benefits also are subject to various other restrictions or limitations. Certain riders, for example, such as the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider, may not be terminated after elected. As another example, under certain guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit riders, the amount that can determine the guaranteed withdrawals you can take can stop increasing when the older annuitant reaches a certain age.

 

•  We reserve the right to modify certain of our optional benefits. For example, we reserve the right to discontinue new Dollar Cost Averaging programs or to modify such programs at any time and for any reason.

 

•  Under our guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit riders, “excess withdrawals” (i.e., withdrawals in excess of the Withdrawal Limit for a Benefit Year) can reduce the amount we use to determine your future Withdrawal Limit by an amount that is more than the dollar amount of the withdrawal. Excess withdrawals also could terminate the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit.

 

  

Income Payments — Payment Optimizer Plus

Taxes         Location in Prospectus

Tax Implications

 

•  You should consult with a tax professional to determine the tax implications of an investment in and payments received under the contract.

 

•  If you purchase the contract through a qualified retirement plan or individual retirement account (IRA), you do not receive any additional tax benefit.

 

•  Withdrawals will be subject to ordinary income tax and may be subject to tax penalties.

 

  

Tax Matters

Conflicts of Interest         Location in Prospectus

Investment Professional Compensation

 

•  Your registered representative may receive compensation for selling and servicing this contract to you in the form of cash compensation (e.g., commissions), non-cash compensation (e.g., conferences, trips, prizes, and awards), and special marketing allowances.

 

  

Sales of the Contracts

 

11


Table of Contents
Conflicts of Interest         Location in Prospectus
   

 

•  The prospect of receiving such compensation may create an incentive for selling firms and/or their registered representative to sell you this contract versus another product with respect with which a selling firm does not receive additional compensation, or a lower level of additional compensation. You may wish to take such compensation arrangements into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the contracts.

 

    

Exchanges

 

•  Some investment professionals may have a financial incentive to offer you the contract in place of the one you own. Similarly, some investment professionals may have a financial incentive to offer you a different contract in place of this one. You should only exchange your current contract if you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the new contract rather than continue to own your existing contract.

  

Sales of the Contracts

 

12


Table of Contents

OVERVIEW OF THE CONTRACT

 

The following is intended as a summary. Please read each section of this prospectus for additional detail.

 

This annuity is a contract between you, as the owner of the contract, and the Company. The contract is designed for retirement savings and/or other long-term investment purposes. You should consider the contract in conjunction with any other annuity contract or life insurance policy you own.

 

What are the phases of the contract?The contract has two phases — the accumulation phase and the annuity phase.

 

During the accumulation phase you can apply premium payments to the investment options available under your contract, and we provide the basic death benefit at no additional cost. The accumulation phase is the “savings” phase of the contract, in that premium payments you have made can grow on a tax-deferred basis during this phase.

 

The annuity phase is also known as the “income” phase of the contract, because it is during that phase that the Contract Value you have accumulated is applied to an annuity payment option under which you receive regular payments (generally monthly). You can choose fixed or variable income payments, unless you are taking income payments from the GIS Subaccount(s) pursuant to the election of Guaranteed Income Advantage or you are taking income payments pursuant to Payment Optimizer Plus. All income payments made from the GIS Subaccount(s) will be made in accordance with the terms of Guaranteed Income Advantage. All income payments made from Payment Optimizer Plus will be made in accordance with the terms of Payment Optimizer Plus. If you choose variable income payments, we will base each periodic income payment upon the number of Annuity Units to which you become entitled at the time you decide to annuitize and on the value of each unit on the date the payment is determined.

 

Once you begin taking annuity payments under the contract, you receive a stream of income payments. However, you will be unable to make withdrawals (other than being able to receive commuted value under Payment Optimizer Plus) and any guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit that you have will terminate. Death benefits also will terminate, except as provided for under the Guaranteed Income Advantage and Payment Optimizer Plus riders.

 

Who is the contract appropriate for? The contract is designed for investors who intend to accumulate funds for retirement or other long-term financial planning purposes, and thus is best suited for those with a long investment horizon. Although you have the ability to make partial surrenders and/or surrender the contract at any time during the accumulation phase, the contract should not be viewed as a highly liquid investment. In that regard, withdrawals taken in the near term can result in you being assessed a surrender charge, which can be a significant amount. In addition, if you participate in a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit, withdrawals can markedly reduce the benefit’s value. Failure to hold the contract for the long-term would mean that you lose the opportunity for the performance of your chosen investment options to grow on a tax-deferred basis. Thus, the contract’s features are appropriate for an investor who does not have significant liquidity needs with respect to money dedicated to the contract, has a long investment horizon, and has purchased the contract for retirement purposes or other long-term financial planning purposes. The contract is not intended for those who intend to engage in frequent trading among the Subaccounts.

 

What type of contract is this? The contract is an individual flexible premium variable deferred annuity contract. We may issue it as a contract qualified under the Code (“Qualified Contract”), or as a contract that is not qualified under the Code (“Non-Qualified Contract”). This prospectus only provides disclosure about the contract. Certain features described in this prospectus may vary from your particular contract. See “The Contract” provision of this prospectus.

 

What is a Bonus Credit? The Bonus Credit is an amount we add to each premium payment we receive. For contracts issued on or after the later of October 29, 2002 or the date on which state insurance authorities approve the applicable contract modifications, and if the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 5% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. For contracts issued prior to October 29, 2002 or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve the applicable contract modifications, and if the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 4% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. If the Annuitant is age 81 or older at the time the contract is issued, we will not pay any Bonus Credits. (The Annuitant cannot be age 81 or older at the time of application unless we approve an Annuitant of an older age.) Bonus Credits are not considered “premium payments” for purposes of the contract. In addition, please note that any applicable Bonus Credit will not be included in the Withdrawal Base, Rider Death Benefit, Principal Protection Death Benefit or Roll-Up Value, if applicable, if you elected Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007 or Lifetime Income Plus 2008; the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Roll-Up Value, Maximum Anniversary Value or Principal Protection Death Benefit if you elected Lifetime Income Plus Solution; or the benefit base if you elected Payment Optimizer Plus. You will have to reset your benefit under the terms of the applicable rider to capture the Bonus Credit or any related earnings in the Withdrawal

 

13


Table of Contents

Base, Maximum Anniversary Value or benefit base. See the “Bonus Credits” provision of this prospectus.

 

What are my variable investment choices? Through its Subaccounts, the Separate Account uses your premium payments to purchase shares, at your direction, in one or more Portfolios. In turn, each Portfolio holds securities consistent with its own particular investment objective. See “The Separate Account” provision of this prospectus and Appendix A (which provides certain information about the underlying Portfolios corresponding to each Subaccount). Additional information about each Portfolio is provided in Appendix A to this prospectus, entitled “Portfolios Available Under the Contract.”

 

What is the Guarantee Account? The Guarantee Account is part of our General Account and pays interest at declared rates we guarantee for selected periods of time. We also guarantee the principal, after any deductions of applicable contract charges. Since the Guarantee Account is part of the General Account, we assume the risk of investment gain or loss on amounts allocated to it.

 

The Guarantee Account is not part of and does not depend on the investment performance of the Separate Account. Generally, you may transfer assets between the Guarantee Account and the Separate Account subject to certain restrictions. For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 to confirm whether the Guarantee Account is available under your contract. See “The Guarantee Account” and the “Transfers” provisions of this prospectus.

 

May I surrender the contract or take partial surrenders? Yes, subject to contract requirements and restrictions imposed under certain retirement plans. If you surrender the contract or take a partial surrender, we may assess a surrender charge. In addition, you will ordinarily be subject to income tax (except for qualified distributions from a Roth IRA or Roth account in an employer-sponsored retirement plan) and, if you are younger than age 5912 at the time of the surrender or partial surrender, a 10% IRS penalty tax. A surrender or a partial surrender may also be subject to tax withholding. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus. Certain withdrawals, depending on the amount and timing, may negatively impact the benefits and guarantees provided by your contract. For example, a partial surrender may reduce the death benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and premium tax) reduces your Contract Value. See the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus. In addition, if you elect Guaranteed Income Advantage and you take a withdrawal from the GIS Subaccount(s), you will lose your right to make any additional scheduled transfers to that segment and your guaranteed income floor will be adjusted to reflect the withdrawal made. See the “Income Payments — Guaranteed Income Advantage” provision of this prospectus. If you elect one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders or Payment Optimizer Plus, partial surrenders may affect the benefit you receive under that rider. See the “Surrenders and Partial Surrenders — Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders” and “Income Payments — Payment Optimizer Plus” provisions of this prospectus. You should carefully consider whether a withdrawal under a particular circumstance will have any negative impact to your benefits or guarantees. The impact of withdrawals generally on your benefits and guarantees is discussed in the corresponding sections of the prospectus describing such benefits and guarantees.

 

What optional benefits are available under this contract? We offer several optional benefits by rider under this prospectus. Because this contract is no longer offered or sold, these optional riders are no longer available to be purchased or added under the contract.

 

The Living Benefit Rider Options. Four Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders are discussed in this prospectus: Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and Lifetime Income Plus Solution. These living benefit riders provide guaranteed withdrawals until the last death of an Annuitant, with upside potential, provided you meet certain conditions. To receive the full benefit provided by each of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders, you must allocate all premium payments and Contract Value in accordance with the Investment Strategy prescribed by the particular rider. Under certain circumstances, the benefit provided under the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders may be reduced or lost. In addition, if you terminate the contract or rider, you will lose your benefit. Please see the “Surrenders and Partial Surrenders — Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders” provision of this prospectus for more information about the riders and their features.

 

Guaranteed Income Advantage provides a guaranteed income benefit that is based on the amount of assets you invest in the GIS Subaccount(s). You may not allocate premium payments or assets in your contract directly into the GIS Subaccount(s). Rather, allocations to the GIS Subaccount(s) must be made

 

14


Table of Contents

through a series of scheduled transfers from other Subaccounts in which you have allocated assets. If income payments have not begun and you terminate the contract, you will lose your benefit. Please see the “Income Payments — Guaranteed Income Advantage” provision of this prospectus for more information about the rider and its features.

 

Payment Optimizer Plus provides for a guaranteed income benefit that is based on the amount of premium payments you make to your contract. To receive the full benefit provided by Payment Optimizer Plus, you must allocate all premium payments and assets in your contract in accordance with the Investment Strategy prescribed by the rider. If income payments have not begun and you terminate the contract, you will lose your benefit. Please see the “Income Payments — Payment Optimizer Plus” provision of this prospectus for more information about the rider and its features. Each of the riders offered in this prospectus is available at an additional charge if elected when you apply for the contract.

 

The Death Benefit Rider Options. For contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or after the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we offer the following four optional death benefits by rider in addition to the Basic Death Benefit provided under the contract: (i) the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider; (ii) the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider; (iii) the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider; and (iv) the Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider.

 

For contracts issued prior to May 1, 2003, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we offer the following optional death benefits by rider in addition to the Basic Death Benefit provided under the contract: (i) the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit; and (ii) the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

 

Each of these optional death benefit riders is available at an additional charge if elected when you apply for the contract. The Basic Death Benefit is provided to you automatically and at no additional charge.

 

Please see the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus for more information about these optional death benefit riders and their features.

 

Will I pay taxes on my contract earnings? The Code has certain rules that apply to the contract. These tax treatments apply to earnings included in the contract’s withdrawals, death benefits, and annuity options. You are generally not taxed on

contract earnings until you take money from your contract. This is known as tax deferral. Tax deferral is automatically provided by tax-qualified retirement plans. There is no additional tax deferral provided when a variable annuity contract is used to fund a tax-qualified retirement plan. Investors should only consider buying the contract to fund a qualified plan for the contract’s other features, such as the optional guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus.

 

15


Table of Contents

FEE TABLES

 

The following tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering or making withdrawals from the contract. Please refer to your contract data page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.

 

The first table describes the fees and expenses that you will pay at the time that you buy the contract, surrender or make withdrawals from the contract, or transfer Contract Value between investment options. State premium taxes may also be deducted.

 

Transaction Expenses
Maximum Surrender Charge (as a percentage of premium payments withdrawn or
surrendered
):
  6%
Schedule of Surrender Charges (as a percentage of premium payments withdrawn or
surrendered
):
  Number of Completed Years
Since We Received the
Premium Payment
  Surrender Charge
as a Percentage of the
Premium Payment
Surrendered1
  0   8%
  1   8%
  2   7%
  3   6%
  4   5%
  5   4%
  6   3%
  7   2%
    8 or more   0%

Transfer Charge

  $10.002

 

1    A surrender charge is not assessed on any amounts representing gain. In addition, you may partially surrender the greater of 10% of your total premium payments or any amount surrendered to meet minimum distribution requirements under the Code each contract year without incurring a surrender charge. If you are making a withdrawal from this contract to meet annual minimum distribution requirements under the Code, and the minimum distribution amount attributable to this contract for the calendar year ending at or before the last day of the contract year exceeds the free withdrawal amount, you may withdraw the difference free of surrender charges. The free withdrawal amount is not cumulative from contract year to contract year. The surrender charge will be assessed from the amount surrendered unless otherwise requested.

 

If you purchased Payment Optimizer Plus, after the Maturity Date you may request to terminate your contract and the rider and receive the commuted value of your income payments in a lump sum (the “commutation value”). In calculating the commutation value, we assess a commutation charge. The amount of the commutation charge will be the surrender charge that would otherwise apply under the contract, in accordance with the surrender charge schedule.

 

2    We currently do not assess a transfer charge. However, we reserve the right to assess a transfer charge for each transfer among the Subaccounts.

 

16


Table of Contents

The next tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay each year during the time you own the contract, not including underlying Portfolio fees and expenses.

 

If you choose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional charges, as shown below.

 

Annual Contract Expenses

         

Administrative Expenses

   $25

An annual contract charge is taken on each contract anniversary and at the time the contract is surrendered. We will not assess this charge if your Contract Value is more than $10,000 at the time the charge is assessed.

Base Contract Expenses
(as a percentage of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account):

   1.55%

The 1.55% base contract expense applies to all contracts (i.e., those issued in any of the time periods identified in these Fee Tables). The base contract expense is the sum of a mortality and expense risk charge of 1.30% and an administrative expense charge of 0.25%.

Optional Benefit Expenses
(as a percentage of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account or as otherwise indicated)

    

The optional benefits offered, and their associated charges, varied depending on the time period during which the contract was issued. We address each of those time periods, and the associated optional benefit charges, in reverse chronological order (i.e., most recent time periods first) below.

 

The following optional benefit charges apply to contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications:

 

Living Benefit Rider Options1
(as a percentage of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account)

    
     Maximum Charge2    Current Charge

Lifetime Income Plus3

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00%    1.25%

Lifetime Income Plus 20074

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00%    1.25%

Guaranteed Income Advantage

   0.50%    0.50%

Payment Optimizer Plus5

     

Single Annuitant Contract

   1.25%    0.50%

Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25%    0.65%

Living Benefit Rider Options1,6

    
     Maximum Charge2,7    Current Charge7

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00% of benefit base    1.25% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

     Maximum Charge2,8    Current Charge8

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00% of benefit base    1.25% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.20% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

17


Table of Contents
     Maximum Charge2,8    Current Charge8

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Death Benefit Rider Options9
(as a percentage of your Contract Value at the time the charge is taken)10

    
     Maximum Charge2    Current Charge

Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option

   0.20%    0.20%

5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option

   0.30%    0.30%

Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option

   0.30%    0.30%

Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option

   0.70%    0.70%

 

1    None of the living benefit rider options may be elected together or in any combination. Only one may be elected and it must be elected at the time of application. Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the optional benefits are no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

2    The maximum charge reflects the charge that the rider is guaranteed never to exceed.

 

3    Lifetime Income Plus is not available for contracts issued on or after May 1, 2008. The current and maximum charges reflected in the fee table for Lifetime Income Plus are for those contracts that reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019. The current and maximum charges for Lifetime Income Plus for those contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 are as follows:

 

     Maximum Charge    Current Charge

Lifetime Income Plus (as a percentage of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account)

     

Single Annuitant Contract

   2.00%    0.60%

Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00%    0.75%

 

4    Lifetime Income Plus 2007 is not available for contracts issued on or after September 8, 2008. The current and maximum charges reflected in the fee table for Lifetime Income Plus 2007 are for those contracts that reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019. The current and maximum charges for Lifetime Income Plus 2007 for those contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 are as follows:

 

     Maximum Charge    Current Charge

Lifetime Income Plus 2007 (as a percentage of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account)

     

Single Annuitant Contract

   2.00%    0.75%

Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00%    0.85%

 

 

5    Payment Optimizer Plus is not available for contracts issued after October 17, 2008.

 

6    You may purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit. We assess a charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided by each rider. The charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the benefit base, as defined and determined under each rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. On the Contract Date, the benefit base equals the initial premium payment. The benefit base will change and may be higher than the Contract Value on any given day.

 

  If you purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, another charge will be assessed for the Principal Protection Death Benefit. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit, as defined and determined under each rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. On the Contract Date, the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit equals the initial premium payment. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is higher if any Annuitant is age 71 or older at the time of application or when an Annuitant is added to the contract.

 

18


Table of Contents
7    The current and maximum charges reflected in the fee table for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 are for those contracts that reset their Withdrawal Base on or after December 3, 2012. The current and maximum charges for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 for those contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after December 3, 2012 are as follows:

 

     Maximum Charge2    Current Charge

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

     

Single Annuitant Contract

   2.00% of benefit base    0.75% of benefit base

Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00% of benefit base    0.85% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

     

Single Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

0.75% of benefit base plus

0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

         

Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

0.85% of benefit base plus

0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

     

Single Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

0.75% of benefit base plus

0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

         

Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

0.85% of benefit base plus

0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

8    The current and maximum charges reflected in the fee table for Lifetime Income Plus Solution are for contracts issued on or after January 5, 2009 and that have reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012. The current and maximum charges for Lifetime Income Plus Solution for contracts issued on or after January 5, 2009 and that have not reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012 are as follows:

 

     Maximum Charge2    Current Charge

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00% of benefit base    0.95% of benefit base
Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70      

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

0.95% of benefit base plus

0.20% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

0.95% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

  The current and maximum charges for Lifetime Income Plus Solution for contracts issued before January 5, 2009 and that have reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012 are as follows:

 

     Maximum Charge2    Current Charge

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00% of benefit base    1.25% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

     

 

19


Table of Contents
     Maximum Charge2    Current Charge

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

  The current and maximum charges for Lifetime Income Plus Solution for contracts issued before January 5, 2009 and that have not reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012 are as follows:

 

     Maximum Charge2    Current Charge

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

     

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   2.00% of benefit base    0.85% of benefit base
Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70      

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

0.85% of benefit base plus

0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85      

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

2.00% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

  

0.85% of benefit base plus

0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

9    The Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider may be elected with Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution at the time of application. None of the other death benefit rider options are available with Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution.

 

  You may purchase the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider with either the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider or the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider. You may not, however, purchase the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider and the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider together or in any combination. The Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider may not be purchased with any other death benefit rider option.

 

10   All charges for the death benefit rider options are taken in arrears on each contract anniversary and at the time the contract is surrendered.

 

The following optional benefit charges apply to contracts issued prior to May 1, 2003, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications:

 

     Maximum Charge      Current Charge  

Optional Benefits1

                 

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Rider2

     0.35%        0.25%  

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit Rider3

     0.35%        0.20%  

 

1    The charges for the optional death benefits are taken in arrears on each contract anniversary and at the time of surrender.

 

2    This charge is a percentage of your average benefit amount for the prior contract year.

 

3    This charge is a percentage of your average Contract Value for the prior contract year.

 

The next item shows the minimum and maximum total operating expenses charged by the Portfolios that you may pay periodically during the time that you own the contract. A complete list of Portfolios available under the contract, including their annual expenses, may be found in Appendix A.

 

Annual Portfolio Expenses              

These are expenses that are deducted from Portfolio assets, including management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, and other expenses as of December 31, 2023.1

     
     Minimum      Maximum  

Before fee waivers and expense reimbursements

     0.31%        2.375%  

 

1    Shown as a percentage of average net assets for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2023.

 

20


Table of Contents

Example

 

This Example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include transaction expenses, annual contract expenses, and annual Portfolio expenses.

 

The Example assumes that you invest $100,000 in the contract for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year and assumes the most expensive combination of annual Portfolio expenses and optional benefits available for an additional charge. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be as follows, assuming maximum expenses:

 

     1 Year     3 Years     5 Years     10 Years  
If you surrender
your contract at
the end of the
applicable time
period:
    $13,890       $26,472       $38,525       $70,588  
If you annuitize
at the end of the
applicable time
period:
    $5,931       $19,617       $33,530       $69,408  
If you do not
surrender your
contract:
    $6,789       $20,533       $34,512       $70,588  

 

The above Example assumes the following maximum expenses:

 

    Separate Account charges of 1.55% (deducted daily at an effective annual rate of the assets in the Separate Account);

 

    for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit or Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, a charge of 2.00% of benefit base plus a charge of 0.50% of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit (deducted quarterly from Contract Value); and

 

    a charge of 0.20% for the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider (deducted annually as a percentage of Contract Value).

 

If the optional riders are not elected, the expense figures shown above would be lower.

 

PRINCIPAL RISKS OF INVESTING IN THE CONTRACT

 

There are risks associated with investing in the contract. You can lose money in a variable annuity, including potentially the loss of your original investment. The value of your investment and any returns will depend on the performance of the Portfolios you select (and the Guarantee Account, if you select that option). Each Portfolio has its own unique risks.

 

Variable annuities are not short-term investment vehicles. The surrender charge applies for several years, and therefore the contract should be purchased only for the long-term. In addition, full or partial surrenders are subject to income tax to the extent they consist of earnings, and may be subject to a 10% income tax penalty if taken before age 5912. Accordingly, you should carefully consider your income and liquidity needs before purchasing a contract.

 

Investment Risk. You bear the risk of any decline in the Contract Value caused by the performance of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. Those Portfolios could decline in value very significantly, and there is a risk of loss of your entire amount invested. The risk of loss varies with each Portfolio. This risk could have a significant negative impact on the value under a Living Benefit Rider. The investment risks are described in the prospectuses for the Portfolios.

 

Investment Restrictions — Opportunity Risks. Certain of the Living Benefit Riders restrict your choice of available Portfolios. These restrictions are intended to protect us financially, in that they reduce the likelihood that we will have to pay guaranteed benefits under the rider from our own assets. These restrictions could result in an opportunity cost — in the form of Portfolios that you did not invest in that ultimately might generate superior investment performance. Thus, you should consider these restrictions when deciding whether to elect such an optional rider.

 

Risk Associated With Election of Optional Benefits. Certain of the optional benefits include requirements that must be followed in order to preserve and maximize the guarantees we offer under the benefit. If you fail to adhere to these requirements, that may diminish the value of the benefit and even possibly cause termination of the benefit. In addition, it is possible that you will pay fees for the optional benefit without fully realizing the guarantees available under the benefit. For example, such would be the case if you were to participate in a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit for many years yet die sooner than anticipated, without having taken a significant number of withdrawals.

 

Insurance Company Insolvency. It is possible that we could experience financial difficulty in the future and even become insolvent, and therefore unable to provide all of the guarantees

 

21


Table of Contents

and benefits that we promise that exceed the value of the assets in the Separate Account. Similarly, our experiencing financial difficulty could interfere with our ability to fulfill our obligations under the Guarantee Account.

 

Tax Consequences. Withdrawals are generally taxable to the extent of any earnings in the contract, and prior to age 5912 a tax penalty may apply. In addition, even if the contract is held for years before any withdrawal is made, withdrawals are taxable as ordinary income rather than capital gains.

 

Cybersecurity and Certain Business Continuity Risks. Our operations support complex transactions and are highly dependent on the proper functioning of information technology and communication systems. Any failure of or gap in the systems and processes necessary to support complex transactions and avoid systems failure, fraud, information security failures, processing errors, cyber intrusion, loss of data and breaches of regulation may lead to a materially adverse effect on our results of operations and corporate reputation. In addition, we must commit significant resources to maintain and enhance our existing systems in order to keep pace with applicable regulatory requirements, industry standards and customer preferences. If we fail to maintain secure and well-functioning information systems, we may not be able to rely on information for product pricing, compliance obligations, risk management and underwriting decisions. In addition, we cannot assure investors or consumers that interruptions, failures or breaches in security of these processes and systems will not occur, or if they do occur, that they can be timely detected and remediated. The occurrence of any of these events may have a materially adverse effect on our businesses, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Because our variable product business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners, our business is vulnerable to disruptions from utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g., hardware and software malfunctions), and cyberattacks. These risks include, among other things, the theft, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, interference with or denial of service, attacks on websites and other operational disruption and unauthorized release of confidential customer information. Such systems failures and cyberattacks affecting us, any third party administrator, the Funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service providers may adversely affect us and your Contract Value. For instance, systems failures and cyberattacks may interfere with our processing of contract transactions, including the processing of orders from our website or with the Funds, impact our ability to calculate Accumulation Unit values, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information, impede order processing, subject us and/or our service providers and intermediaries to regulatory fines and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. Cybersecurity risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the Funds invest, which may cause the Funds underlying your contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that we or the Funds or our service providers will avoid losses affecting your contract due to cyberattacks or information security breaches in the future. There may be an increased risk of cyberattacks during periods of geo-political or military conflict (such as Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and the Israel-Hamas conflict).

 

Natural and Man-Made Disasters. We are also exposed to risks related to natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes, such as (but not limited to) storms, fires, floods, earthquakes, public health crises, malicious acts, geopolitical disputes, military actions, and terrorist acts, any of which could adversely affect our ability to conduct business. A natural or man-made disaster or catastrophe, including a pandemic (such as COVID-19), could affect the ability or willingness of our employees or the employees of our service providers to perform their job responsibilities. Even if our employees and the employees of our service providers are able to work remotely, those remote work arrangements could result in our business operations being less efficient than under normal circumstances and could lead to delays in our processing of contract-related transactions, including orders from contract owners. Catastrophic events may negatively affect the computer and other systems on which we rely, may interfere with our ability to receive, pick up and process mail, may interfere with our ability to calculate Contract Value, or may have other possible negative impacts. These events may also impact the issuers of securities in which the Portfolios invest, which may cause the Portfolios underlying your contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that we or the Portfolios or our service providers will be able to successfully avoid negative impacts associated with natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes.

 

We outsource certain critical business functions to third parties and, in the event of a natural or man-made disaster, rely upon the successful implementation and execution of the business continuity planning of such entities. While we monitor the business continuity activities of these third parties, successful implementation and execution of their business continuity strategies are largely beyond our control. If one or more of the third parties to whom we outsource such critical business functions experience operational failures, our ability to administer the contract could be impaired.

 

Unknown Risks and Uncertainties Associated With Artificial Intelligence. Our inability to anticipate and leverage new technology developments, such as artificial intelligence, could adversely affect the future success of our

 

22


Table of Contents

business. We may not be successful in anticipating or responding to these developments on a timely and cost-effective basis, and our investments in these capabilities may not deliver the benefits anticipated or perform as expected. Poor implementation of new technologies, including artificial intelligence, by us or our third-party service providers, could subject us to additional risks we cannot adequately mitigate, which could have a material adverse impact to our business, results of operations, and financial condition.

 

THE COMPANY

 

We are a stock life insurance company operating under a charter granted by the Commonwealth of Virginia on March 21, 1871. We principally offer life insurance policies and annuity contracts. We do business in 49 states, the District of Columbia and Bermuda. Our principal offices are at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. We are obligated to pay all amounts promised under the contract.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation serves as principal underwriter for the contracts and is a broker/dealer registered with the SEC. Genworth North America Corporation (formerly, GNA Corporation) directly owns the stock of Capital Brokerage Corporation and the Company. Genworth North America Corporation is indirectly owned by Genworth Financial, Inc., a public company.

 

FINANCIAL CONDITION OF THE COMPANY

 

Many factors, such as investment performance, interest rates, and equity market conditions, can affect an insurance company’s financial condition. We know it is important for you to understand how this market environment may impact your Contract Value and our ability to meet the guarantees under your contract.

 

Assets in the Separate Account. You assume all of the investment risk for Contract Value allocated to the Subaccounts. Your Contract Value in the Subaccounts is part of the assets of the Separate Account. These assets may not be charged with liabilities arising from any other business that we may conduct. The assets of the Separate Account will, however, be available to cover the liabilities of our General Account to the extent that the Separate Account assets exceed the Separate Account liabilities arising under the contracts supported by it. This means that, with very limited exceptions, all assets in the Separate Account attributable to your Contract Value and that of all other contract owners would receive a priority of payment status over other claims in the event of an insolvency or receivership. See “The Separate Account” provision of this prospectus.

 

Assets in the General Account. You also may be permitted to make allocations to the Guarantee Account, which is part of our General Account. In addition, any guarantees under the contract that exceed your Contract Value, such as the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits and guaranteed income benefits associated with the living benefit rider options or the guaranteed minimum death benefits associated with the death benefit rider options, are paid from our General Account (not the Separate Account). Therefore, any amounts that we may pay under the contract in excess of your value in the Separate Account are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability and our long-term ability to make such payments. We issue (or have issued) other types of insurance policies and financial products as well, and we also pay our obligations under these products from our assets in the General Account. In the event of an insolvency or receivership, payments we make from our General Account to satisfy claims under the contract would generally receive the same priority as our other policy holder obligations. This means that in the event of an insolvency or receivership, you may receive only a portion, or none, of the payments you are due under the contract. See “The Guarantee Account” provision of this prospectus.

 

Our Financial Condition. As an insurance company, we are required by state insurance regulation to hold a specified amount of reserves in order to meet all the contractual obligations of our General Account to our contract owners. In order to meet our claims-paying obligations, we regularly monitor our reserves to ensure we hold sufficient amounts to cover actual or expected contract and claims payments. In addition, we actively hedge our investments in our General Account, while also requiring contract owners to allocate premium payments to an Investment Strategy if a living benefit rider option has been elected. However, it is important to note that there is no guarantee that we will always be able to meet our claims paying obligations, and that there are risks to purchasing any insurance product.

 

State insurance regulators also require insurance companies to maintain a minimum amount of capital, which acts as a cushion in the event that the insurer suffers a financial impairment, based on the inherent risks in the insurer’s operations. These risks include those associated with losses that we may incur as the result of defaults on the payment of interest or principal on our General Account assets, which include, but are not limited to, bonds, mortgages, general real estate investments, and stocks, as well as the loss in value of these investments resulting from a loss in their market value.

 

The market effects on our investment portfolio have caused us to re-evaluate product offerings. We continue to evaluate our investment portfolio to mitigate market risk and actively manage the investments in the portfolio.

 

23


Table of Contents

How to Obtain More Information. We encourage both existing and prospective contract owners to read and understand our financial statements. We prepare our financial statements on a statutory basis. Our audited financial statements, as well as the financial statements of the Separate Account, are located in the Statement of Additional Information. If you would like a free copy of the Statement of Additional Information, call (800) 352-9910 or write to our Home Office at the address listed on page 1 of this prospectus. In addition, the Statement of Additional Information is available on our website at www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra or on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. You may obtain our audited statutory financial statements and any unaudited statutory financial statements that may be available by visiting our website at www.genworth.com.

 

You also will find on our website information on ratings assigned to us by one or more independent rating organizations. These ratings are opinions of an operating insurance company’s financial capacity to meet the obligations of its insurance and annuity contracts based on its financial strength and/or claims-paying ability.

 

THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

 

We established the Separate Account as a separate investment account on August 19, 1987. The Separate Account may invest in mutual funds, unit investment trusts, managed separate accounts, and other portfolios. We use the Separate Account to support the contract as well as for other purposes permitted by law.

 

Currently, there are multiple Subaccounts of the Separate Account available under the contract. Each Subaccount invests exclusively in shares representing an interest in a separate corresponding Portfolio of the Funds.

 

The assets of the Separate Account belong to us. Nonetheless, we do not charge the assets in the Separate Account attributable to the contracts with liabilities arising out of any other business which we may conduct. The assets of the Separate Account will, however, be available to cover the liabilities of our General Account to the extent that the assets of the Separate Account exceed its liabilities arising under the contracts supported by it. Income and both realized and unrealized gains or losses from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to the income, gains, or losses arising out of any other business we may conduct. The Company is obligated to pay all amounts promised to contract owners under the contracts. Guarantees made under the contract, including any rider options, are based on the claims paying ability of the Company to the extent that the amount of the guarantee exceeds the assets available in the Separate Account.

 

We registered the Separate Account with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (“1940 Act”). The Separate Account meets the definition of a separate account under the Federal securities laws. Registration with the SEC does not involve supervision of the management or investment practices or policies of the Separate Account by the SEC. You assume the full investment risk for all amounts you allocate to the Separate Account.

 

If permitted by law, we may deregister the Separate Account under the 1940 Act in the event registration is no longer required; manage the Separate Account under the direction of a committee; or combine the Separate Account with one of our other separate accounts. Further, to the extent permitted by applicable law, we may transfer the assets of the Separate Account to another separate account.

 

The Portfolios

 

There is a separate Subaccount which corresponds to each Portfolio of a Fund offered in this contract. You select the Subaccounts to which you allocate premium payments and Contract Value. In addition, you currently may change your future premium payment allocation without penalty or charges. If you elect Payment Optimizer Plus, Lifetime Income Plus or Lifetime Income Plus 2007, however, the benefits you receive under the rider may be reduced if your assets are not allocated in accordance with the Investment Strategy outlined in each rider. Contract owners that own Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution must always allocate assets in accordance with the Investment Strategy. In addition, there are limitations on the number of transfers that may be made each calendar year. See the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus for additional information.

 

Each Fund is registered with the SEC as an open-end management investment company under the 1940 Act. The assets of each Portfolio are separate from other portfolios of a Fund and each Portfolio has separate investment objectives and policies. As a result, each Portfolio operates as a separate Portfolio and the investment performance of one Portfolio has no effect on the investment performance of any other Portfolio.

 

Certain Portfolios may invest substantially all of their assets in portfolios of other funds. As a result, you will pay fees and expenses at both portfolio levels. This will reduce your investment return. These arrangements are referred to as “funds of funds” or “master-feeder funds.” Funds of funds or master-feeder structures may have higher expenses than Portfolios that invest directly in debt or equity securities.

 

Certain Portfolios may employ hedging strategies to provide for downside protection during sharp downward movements in

 

24


Table of Contents

equity markets. The cost of these hedging strategies could limit the upside participation of the Portfolio in rising equity markets relative to other Portfolios. You should consult with your registered representative to determine which combination of investment choices is appropriate for you.

 

Information regarding each Portfolio, including (i) its name; (ii) its type (e.g., money market fund, bond fund, balanced fund, etc.); (iii) its investment adviser and any sub-adviser; (iv) current expenses; and (v) performance is available in Appendix A to this prospectus. Each Portfolio has issued a prospectus that contains more detailed information about the Portfolio. Before choosing a Subaccount to which you will allocate your premium payments and Contract Value, carefully read the prospectus for each Portfolio, along with this prospectus. You may obtain the most recent prospectus for each Portfolio by calling us at (800) 352-9910, or writing us at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. You may also obtain copies of the prospectus for each Portfolio on our website at www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra. There is no assurance that any of the Portfolios will meet these objectives. We do not guarantee any minimum value for the amounts you allocate to the Separate Account. You bear the investment risk of investing in the Portfolios.

 

The investment objectives and policies of certain Portfolios are similar to the investment objectives and policies of other portfolios that may be managed by the same investment adviser or manager. The investment results of the Portfolios, however, may be higher or lower than the results of such other portfolios. There can be no assurance, and no representation is made, that the investment results of any of the Portfolios will be comparable to the investment results of any other Portfolio, even if the other Portfolio has the same investment adviser or manager, or if the other Portfolio has a similar name.

 

Subaccounts

 

You may allocate premium payments and Contract Value to Subaccounts that invest in the Portfolios in addition to the Guarantee Account (if available) at any one time. For contract owners that have elected Guaranteed Income Advantage, you may not allocate premium payments directly to the GIS Subaccount(s). Such allocations must be made pursuant to scheduled transfers from all other Subaccounts in which you have allocated assets. See the “Income Payments — Guaranteed Income Advantage” provision of this prospectus. If you elect Payment Optimizer Plus, Lifetime Income Plus or Lifetime Income Plus 2007, the benefits you receive under the rider may be reduced if your assets are not allocated in accordance with the Investment Strategy outlined in each rider. Contract owners that own Lifetime Income Plus 2008 must always allocate assets in accordance with the Investment Strategy. See the “Surrenders and Partial Surrenders —  Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders” and “Income Payments — Payment Optimizer Plus,” provisions of this prospectus.

 

We will purchase shares of the Portfolios at net asset value and direct them to the appropriate Subaccounts. We will redeem sufficient shares of the appropriate Portfolios at net asset value to pay death benefits and surrender or partial surrender proceeds; to make income payments; or for other purposes described in the contract. We automatically reinvest all dividend and capital gain distributions of the Portfolios in shares of the distributing Portfolios at their net asset value on the date of distribution. In other words, we do not pay Portfolio dividends or Portfolio distributions out to owners as additional units, but instead reflect them in unit values.

 

Shares of the Portfolios are not sold directly to the general public. They are sold to us, and they may also be sold to other insurance companies that issue variable annuity contracts and variable life insurance policies. In addition, they may be sold to retirement plans.

 

When a Fund sells shares in any of its Portfolios both to variable annuity and to variable life insurance separate accounts, it engages in mixed funding. When a Fund sells shares in any of its Portfolios to separate accounts of unaffiliated life insurance companies, it engages in shared funding.

 

Each Fund may engage in mixed and shared funding. Therefore, due to differences in redemption rates or tax treatment, or other considerations, the interests of various shareholders participating in a Fund could conflict. A Fund’s Board of Directors will monitor for the existence of any material conflicts, and determine what action, if any, should be taken. See the prospectuses for the Portfolios for additional information.

 

We reserve the right, subject to applicable law, to make additions, deletions and substitutions for the Portfolios of the Funds. We may substitute shares of other portfolios for shares already purchased, or to be purchased in the future, under the contract. This substitution might occur if shares of a Portfolio should no longer be available, or if investment in any Portfolio’s shares should become inappropriate for the purposes of the contract in the judgment of our management. In addition, the new Portfolios may have higher fees and charges than the ones they replaced. No substitution or deletion will be made without prior notice to you and before approval of the SEC, in accordance with the 1940 Act.

 

We also reserve the right to establish additional Subaccounts, each of which would invest in a separate Portfolio of a Fund, or in shares of another investment company, with a specified investment objective. We may also eliminate one or more

 

25


Table of Contents

Subaccounts if, in our sole discretion, marketing, tax, or investment conditions warrant. We will not eliminate a Subaccount without prior notice to you and before approval of the SEC. Not all Subaccounts may be available to all classes of contracts.

 

There are a number of factors that are considered when deciding what Portfolios are made available in your variable annuity contract. Such factors include:

 

  (1)   the investment objective of the Portfolio;

 

  (2)   the Portfolio’s performance history;

 

  (3)   the Portfolio’s holdings and strategies it uses to try and meet its objectives; and

 

  (4)   the Portfolio’s servicing agreement.

 

The investment objective is critical because we want to have Portfolios with diverse objectives so that an investor may diversify his or her investment holdings, from a conservative to an aggressive investment portfolio, depending on the advice of his or her investment adviser and risk assessment. There is no assurance, however, that a Portfolio will achieve its stated investment objective. When selecting a Portfolio for our products, we also consider the Portfolio’s performance history compared to its peers and whether its holdings and strategies are consistent with its objectives. Please keep in mind that past performance does not guarantee future results. Finally, it is important for us to be able to provide you with a wide array of the services that facilitate your investment program relating to your allocation in Subaccounts that invest in the Portfolios. The Company does not provide investment advice and does not recommend or endorse any particular Subaccount or Portfolio. You bear the entire risk of any decline in your Contract Value resulting from the investment performance of the Subaccounts you have chosen.

 

Payments from Funds and Fund Affiliates. We have entered into agreements with either the investment adviser or distributor of each of the Funds and/or, in certain cases, a Portfolio, under which the Portfolio, the adviser or distributor may make payments to us and/or to certain of our affiliates. We consider these payments and fees among a number of factors when deciding to add or keep a Portfolio on the menu of Portfolios that we offer through the contract. These payments may be made in connection with certain administrative and other services we provide relating to the Portfolios. Such administrative services we provide or obtain include but are not limited to: accounting transactions for variable owners and then providing one daily purchase and sale order on behalf of each Portfolio; providing copies of Portfolio prospectuses, Statements of Additional Information and any supplements thereto; forwarding proxy voting information, gathering the information and providing vote totals to the Portfolio on behalf of our owners; and providing customer service on behalf of the Portfolios, including the provision of teleservicing support in connection with the Portfolios and the provision of office space, equipment, facilities and personnel as may be reasonably required or beneficial in order to provide these services to contract owners. The amount of the payments is based on a percentage of the average annual aggregate net amount we have invested in the Portfolio on behalf of the Separate Account and other separate accounts funding certain variable insurance contracts that we and our affiliates issue. These percentages differ, and some Portfolios, investment advisers or distributors pay us a greater percentage than other Portfolios, advisers or distributors based on the level of administrative and other services provided. The availability of these types of arrangements may create an incentive for us to seek and to add as an investment option under the contract funds or portfolios (and classes of shares of such portfolios) that pay us higher amounts. Other funds or portfolios (or available classes of shares of such portfolios) with substantially similar investment objectives may have lower fees and better overall investment performance than the Funds and Portfolios offered through your contract.

 

We may realize a profit from payments received from a Portfolio or from the adviser and/or the distributor. We may use the proceeds of such payment to pay for the services described above or for any corporate purpose, including payment of expenses (i) that we and/or our affiliates incur in promoting, marketing and administering the contracts, and (ii) that we incur, in our role as intermediary, in maintaining the Portfolios as investment options and facilitating the Subaccounts’ investment in the Portfolios

 

The amount received from certain Portfolios for the assets allocated to the Portfolios from the Separate Account during 2023 ranged from 0.10% to 0.25% of annualized average daily net assets. The Portfolios that pay a service fee to us are:

 

Allspring Variable Trust:

Allspring VT Discovery All Cap Growth Fund - Class 2

 

Eaton Vance Variable Trust:

VT Floating-Rate Income Fund

 

PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust:

All Asset Portfolio — Advisor Class Shares

High Yield Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

International Bond Portfolio (U.S. Dollar Hedged) — Administrative Class Shares

Long-Term U.S. Government Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Low Duration Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Total Return Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

 

26


Table of Contents

The Prudential Series Fund:

PSF Natural Resources Portfolio — Class II Shares

PSF PGIM Jennison Blend Portfolio — Class II Shares (formerly, PSF PGIM Jennison Focused Blend Portfolio — Class II Shares)

PSF PGIM Jennison Growth Portfolio — Class II Shares

 

State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc.:

Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 3 Shares

 

As noted above, an investment adviser or distributor of a Portfolio, or its affiliates, may make payments to us and/or certain of our affiliates. These payments may be derived, in whole or in part, from the profits the investment adviser or sub-adviser receives on the advisory fee deducted from Portfolio assets. Contract owners, through their indirect investment in the Portfolios, bear the costs of these advisory fees (see the prospectuses for the Portfolios for more information). The amount received from the adviser and/or the distributor for the assets allocated to the Portfolios from the Separate Account during 2023 ranged from 0.05% to 0.50%. Payment of these amounts is not an additional charge to you by the Funds or by us, but comes from the Fund’s investment adviser or distributor. These payments may vary by Portfolio. Therefore, the amount of such payments paid to us may be greater or smaller based on the Portfolios you select.

 

In addition to the asset-based payments for administrative and other services described above, the investment adviser or the distributor of the Fund may also pay us or our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation, to participate in periodic sales meetings, for expenses relating to the production of promotional sales literature and for other expenses or services. The amount paid to us, or our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation, may be significant. Payments to participate in sales meetings may provide a Fund’s investment adviser or distributor with greater access to our internal and external wholesalers to provide training, marketing support and educational presentations.

 

In consideration of services provided and expenses incurred by Capital Brokerage Corporation in distributing shares of the Funds, Capital Brokerage Corporation also receives Rule 12b-1 fees from AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc., AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds), Allspring Variable Trust, BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc., Columbia Funds Variable Series Trust II, Eaton Vance Variable Trust, Federated Hermes Insurance Series, Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund, Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust, Janus Aspen Series, Legg Mason Partners Variable Equity Trust, Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust, MFS® Variable Insurance Trust, MFS® Variable Insurance Trust II, PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, The Prudential Series Fund, and State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. See the prospectuses for the Portfolios for additional information. These payments range up to 0.25% of Separate Account assets invested in the particular Portfolio. Certain Portfolios may accrue Rule 12b-1 fees at a higher rate (as disclosed in the prospectus for the Portfolio), but payments to us and/or Capital Brokerage Corporation may be made in a lower amount. Not all of the Portfolios may pay the same amount of Rule 12b-1 fees or shareholder servicing fees. Therefore, the amount of such fees paid to us and/or Capital Brokerage Corporation may be greater or smaller based on the Portfolios you select.

 

Voting Rights

 

As required by law, we will vote the shares of the Portfolios held in the Separate Account at special shareholder meetings based on instructions from you. However, if the law changes and we are permitted to vote in our own right, we may elect to do so. Further, in certain limited circumstances, we may override a contract owner’s voting instructions consistent with SEC order.

 

Whenever a Fund calls a shareholder meeting, owners with voting interests in a Portfolio will be notified of issues requiring the shareholders’ vote as soon as possible before the shareholder meeting. Persons having a voting interest in the Portfolio will be provided with proxy voting materials, reports, other materials, and a form with which to give voting instructions.

 

We will determine the number of votes which you have the right to cast by applying your percentage interest in a Subaccount to the total number of votes attributable to the Subaccount. In determining the number of votes, we will recognize fractional shares.

 

We will vote Portfolio shares for which no instructions are received (or instructions are not received timely), as well as shares of the Portfolio that the Company itself owns, in the same proportion to those that are received. Therefore, because of proportional voting, a small number of contract owners may control the outcome of a vote. We will apply voting instructions to abstain on any item to be voted on a pro-rata basis to reduce the number of votes eligible to be cast.

 

Asset Allocation Program

 

The following is a general description of the Asset Allocation Program available under the contract. A complete description is available in the brochure for the program. The program may be referred to as “Efficient Edge” in the brochure or other materials.

 

27


Table of Contents

General

 

The Asset Allocation Program is an asset allocation service that we make available at no additional charge for use within the contract. Asset allocation is an investment strategy for distributing assets among asset classes to help attain an investment goal. For your contract, the Asset Allocation Program can help with decisions you need to make about how to allocate your Contract Value among available Subaccounts (and their corresponding Portfolios). The theory behind an asset allocation strategy is that diversification among asset classes can help reduce volatility over the long term.

 

AssetMark, Inc. provides investment advice for the Asset Allocation Program. AssetMark is an investment adviser that is registered under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940. We may compensate AssetMark for services it provides related to the Asset Allocation Program. As part of the Asset Allocation Program, AssetMark has developed five asset allocation models (“Asset Allocation Models” or “Models”), each based on different profiles of an investor’s investment time horizon and willingness to accept investment risk. Another Asset Allocation Model is a “build your own” Asset Allocation Model. We will refer to this Asset Allocation Model as the “Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model” when necessary to distinguish it from the other Asset Allocation Models. The distinguishing features of the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model are discussed in the “Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model” provision below. The Asset Allocation Models are designed for use in two different circumstances, as discussed below.

 

    Certain of the optional riders available for purchase under the contract are designed to provide protection against market downturns. To ensure that contract owners’ assets protected under one of these riders are invested in accordance with an investment strategy involving an appropriate level of risk, we require the assets to be invested only in an Investment Strategy. For contract owners that purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution, the contract owner may elect Asset Allocation Model A, B, C, or D or the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model (or invest in one or more of the Designated Subaccounts) as the Investment Strategy. A contract owner, however, may not elect Asset Allocation Model E. For contract owners that purchase one of the other Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders or Payment Optimizer Plus, the contract owner may elect only Asset Allocation Model C (or invest in one or more of the Designated Subaccounts). Asset Allocation Model A, B, D, and E and the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model are not available as Investment Strategies for these contract owners.

 

    Contract owners that do not purchase Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders may also elect to participate in the Asset Allocation Program. These contract owners may choose Asset Allocation Model A, B, C, D or E. The Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model, however, is not available to these contract owners.

 

The Asset Allocation Program is not available to contract owners who have elected Guaranteed Income Advantage.

 

If you elect to participate in the Asset Allocation Program, your initial premium payment will be allocated to the Subaccounts corresponding to the Portfolios in the Asset Allocation Model you select. Any subsequent premium payments you make will also be allocated accordingly, unless you instruct us otherwise in writing. The Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model works a little differently, as discussed in the “Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model” provision below.

 

If you participate in the Asset Allocation Program, AssetMark will serve as your investment adviser solely for the purposes of the development of the Asset Allocation Models (except for the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model) and periodic updates of the Models. The Asset Allocation Models are updated on a periodic basis (generally annually), as discussed below. If you elect to participate in the Asset Allocation Program, we will reallocate your Contract Value or premium payments, as applicable, in accordance with the Model you select as it is updated from time to time based on limited discretionary authority that you grant to us, unless you instruct us otherwise. For more information on AssetMark’s role as investment adviser for the Asset Allocation Program, you may review AssetMark’s disclosure brochure, which will be delivered to you at the time you apply for a contract. Please contact us if you would like to receive a copy of this brochure. We may change the investment adviser that we use to develop and periodically update the Asset Allocation Models, or to the extent permissible under applicable law, use no investment adviser at all. We may perform certain administrative functions on behalf of AssetMark. However, we are not registered as an investment adviser and are not providing any investment advice in making the Asset Allocation Program available to contract owners.

 

The Asset Allocation Models

 

There are six Asset Allocation Models, each comprised of a carefully selected combination of Portfolios offered under the contract. Development of the Asset Allocation Models involves a multi-step process designed to optimize the selection of Portfolios, for a given level of risk tolerance, in an effort to maximize returns and limit the effects of market volatility. The

 

28


Table of Contents

discussion in this section generally applies to all of the Asset Allocation Models, although certain distinguishing features of the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model are discussed in the “Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model” provision below.

 

Asset allocation strategies reflect the theory that diversification among asset classes can help reduce volatility and potentially enhance returns over the long term. An asset class may be a category of investments having similar characteristics, such as stocks and other equity investments and bonds and other fixed income investments. There also may be further divisions within asset classes, such as divisions according to the size of the issuer (e.g., large cap, mid cap, or small cap), the type of issuer (e.g., government, municipal, or corporate), or the location of the issuer (e.g., domestic or foreign). AssetMark has identified target allocations, between equities and fixed income investments, for the level of risk, investment time horizon and investment objective specified for Asset Allocation Model A, B, C, D and E.

 

To provide further diversification benefits beyond the broad asset class allocations, AssetMark conducts an optimization analysis to determine the appropriate allocations to sub-asset classes for each Asset Allocation Model. While, generally, AssetMark exercises its own broad discretion in allocating to sub-asset classes, we may require AssetMark to target certain levels of sub-asset class allocations in order to achieve a level of risk consistent with certain of our optional riders that require assets to be invested in an Investment Strategy, which may include one or more of the Asset Allocation Models.

 

After the asset class and sub-asset class exposures have been identified for each Asset Allocation Model, a determination is made as to how available Portfolios can be used to implement the asset class allocations. Part of the allocation process used by AssetMark in determining the allocation to Portfolios in the Asset Allocation Models is an evaluation of the asset and/or sub-asset class(es) exposures presented by each Portfolio in order to combine Portfolios to arrive at the desired asset and sub-asset class allocation levels. The Portfolios considered by AssetMark are all those currently available for contributions of new premium payments by all contract owners.

 

AssetMark considers various factors in determining allocations to each Portfolio for each Asset Allocation Model, which may include historical style analysis and asset performance and multiple regression analyses, as well as qualitative assessments of a Portfolio’s portfolio manager and expected future market and economic conditions. While Portfolios are not required to report their current securities holdings directly to AssetMark, this analysis is generally made based on the historic security holdings of the Portfolios as described in public documents.

 

In addition, AssetMark may consider (but is not obligated to follow) recommendations we may make regarding what Portfolios to use. These recommendations may be based on various factors, including whether the investment adviser or distributor of a Portfolio pays us a fee in connection with certain administrative and other services we provide relating to the Portfolio, and whether our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation receives Rule 12b-1 fees from the Portfolio. Based on this analysis, Portfolios are selected in a manner that is intended to optimize potential returns of each Model, given a particular level of risk tolerance. This process could, in some cases, result in the inclusion of a Portfolio in a Model based on its specific asset class exposure or other specific optimization factors, even when another Portfolio may have better investment performance. In addition, this may also result in the inclusion of Portfolios with higher fees that may adversely affect performance.

 

Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model. The Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model allows for more flexibility than the other five Asset Allocation Models, enabling you, in consultation with your registered representative, to construct your own asset allocation that you believe best meets your individual investment objectives. We have constructed the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model to require that you invest between 20% and 80% of your assets in the “Core” asset class, between 20% and 60% of your assets in the “Fixed Income” asset class, and no more than 20% of your assets in the “Specialty” asset class, for a total of 100% of assets invested in accordance with the Model. In constructing the parameters for the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model, we defined the asset classes among which assets should be allocated, and determined an appropriate percentage range for each asset class. In making these determinations, our goal is to permit any asset allocation that is appropriate for contract owners with moderately conservative to moderately aggressive risk tolerance levels.

 

AssetMark’s role for the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model is to make determinations as to how available Portfolios fit within each asset class. AssetMark considers various factors in assigning Portfolios to an asset class, which may include historical style analysis and asset performance and multiple regression analyses.

 

As with the other Asset Allocation Models, AssetMark may be subject to certain conflicts of interests in categorizing the Portfolios for the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model, including recommendations from us on which Portfolios to include in the Model or a specific asset class based on the fees we receive in connection with a Portfolio (see the discussion in “The Asset Allocation Models” provision above) and the need by certain Portfolios for additional assets (see the discussion in

 

29


Table of Contents

the “Risks” provision below). It is possible that such conflicts of interest could affect, among other matters, AssetMark’s decisions as to which asset class to categorize a Portfolio.

 

Periodic Updates of Asset Allocation Models and Notices of Updates

 

Each of the Asset Allocation Models is evaluated periodically (generally annually) to assess whether the combination of Portfolios within each Model should be changed to better seek to optimize the potential return for the level of risk tolerance intended for the Model. As a result of such periodic analysis, each Model may change, such as by receiving the percentages allocated to each Portfolio. In addition, Portfolios may be added to a Model (including Portfolios not currently available in the contract), or Portfolios may be deleted from a Model.

 

We evaluate the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model periodically to assess whether the asset allocation parameters should be changed to better ensure that resulting asset allocations are in an appropriate risk tolerance range. If, as a result of such periodic analysis, we determine that the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model must change (for example by adding, removing or modifying asset classes or by changing the percentage range of investments allocable to an asset class), then we will make a new Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model available for new contract owners.

 

AssetMark will also evaluate the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model to assess whether the Portfolios are appropriately categorized within each asset class. As a result of this evaluation, AssetMark may determine that certain Portfolios should be placed in a different asset class or, perhaps, removed from the Model, or that other Portfolios should be added to the Model (including Portfolios not currently available in the contract).

 

When your Asset Allocation Model is updated (as described below), we will reallocate your Contract Value (and subsequent premium payments, if applicable) in accordance with any changes to the Model you have selected. This means the allocation of your Contract Value, and potentially the Portfolios in which you are invested, will change and your Contract Value (and subsequent premium payments, if applicable) will be reallocated among the Portfolios in your updated Model (independently of monthly rebalancing, as discussed below). As discussed below, in the case of the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model, it is possible that a change may be made to the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model that will require a contract owner to provide us with new allocation instructions.

 

When Asset Allocation Models are to be updated, we will send you written notice of the updates to the Models at least 30 days in advance of the date the updated version of the Model is intended to be effective. Contract owners purchasing contracts who elect to participate in the Asset Allocation Program within the two week period prior to a date that Asset Allocation Models are to be updated, will be provided with information regarding the composition of both the current Asset Allocation Model as well as the proposed changes to the Model. You should carefully review these notices. If you wish to accept the changes to your selected Model, you will not need to take any action, as your Contract Value (and subsequent premium payments, if applicable) will be reallocated in accordance with the updated Model. If you do not wish to accept the changes to your selected Model, you have the following alternatives. If you elected Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders (except for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and Lifetime Income Plus Solution, as discussed below) you can transfer your Contract Value to one or more of the Designated Subaccounts (as described in the sections of this prospectus discussing the riders), or you can notify us in writing that you have elected to reject the change. If you reject the change and, as a result, your total Contract Value is no longer invested in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy, your benefits under the applicable rider will be reduced by 50%. If you elected Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution, you must transfer your Contract Value to one or more of the Designated Subaccounts (as described in the sections of this prospectus discussing the riders), or one of the other available Asset Allocation Models. Contract owners that own Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution must always allocate assets in accordance with the Investment Strategy, and any attempt to allocate assets otherwise will be considered not in good order and rejected.

 

Please note, also, that changes may be made to the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model that will require contract owners whose existing allocations will not meet the parameters of the revised Model to provide us with new allocation instructions. For example, a Portfolio may be moved from one asset class to another or shares of a Portfolio may become unavailable under the contract or in the Model. If we do not receive new allocation instructions from the contract owner in these circumstances in a timely manner after we request such new instructions, the contract owner’s assets will be re-allocated to Asset Allocation Model C until we receive new instructions.

 

When a Portfolio in which your assets are invested is closed to new investments but remains in your contract, your investment in that Portfolio at the time of the closing will remain, and you will not be re-allocated to Asset Allocation Model C. However, any subsequent premium payments or transfers requesting an allocation to such a Portfolio will be considered not in good order, and you will be asked to provide us with updated allocation instructions.

 

30


Table of Contents

If you did not elect Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders, you may change to a different Asset Allocation Model or reject the change.

 

If you choose to reject a change in an Asset Allocation Model in accordance with the procedures described above, you create your own portfolio (a “self-directed portfolio”), you have terminated your advisory relationship with AssetMark and AssetMark provides no investment advice related to the creation of a self-directed portfolio. Further, once you have rejected a change in a Model, you are considered to have elected to reject all future changes in the Model. Therefore, if you reject a Model change and thereby create a self-directed portfolio, you will not receive a periodic review of or changes to your portfolio, as would be provided by AssetMark with respect to the Asset Allocation Models. You will, however, continue to receive a quarterly statement with information about your Contract Value, as well as written materials from AssetMark about any changes proposed to be made to the Models, and you can notify us in writing to allocate your Contract Value in accordance with such changes.

 

Selecting an Asset Allocation Model

 

For contract owners who have not elected Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders.

 

If you purchase Payment Optimizer Plus, or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders (except for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and Lifetime Income Plus Solution, as discussed below) and elect to participate in the Asset Allocation Program, you are required to allocate your Contract Value (and subsequent premium payments, if applicable) to Asset Allocation Model C. If you purchased Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution and elect to participate in the Asset Allocation Program, you must allocate your Contract Value (and subsequent premium payments, if applicable) to Asset Allocation Model A, B, C, or D or the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model. If you elect to participate in the Asset Allocation Program and you have not purchased Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders, you must choose Asset Allocation Model A, B, C, D or E for your allocations. We will not make this decision, nor will AssetMark. The following paragraphs provide some information you may want to consider in making this decision.

 

You should consult with your registered representative and/or your financial adviser on your decision regarding which Asset Allocation Model to select. Your registered representative can assist you in determining which Model may be best suited to your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk, and can help you complete the proper forms to participate in the Asset Allocation Program. You should also periodically review these factors with your registered representative to consider whether you should change Models (or, if you have purchased Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders, whether you should transfer your Contract Value to one or more of the Designated Subaccounts) to reflect any changes in your personal circumstances. Your registered representative can help you complete the proper forms to change to a different Model or transfer to Designated Subaccounts.

 

In light of our potential payment obligations under the riders, we will not permit contract owners who have selected a rider to allocate their assets in either a highly aggressive or highly conservative manner. In deciding whether to purchase a rider, you and your registered representative should consider whether an asset allocation not permitted under the rider would best meet your investment objectives.

 

You may, in consultation with your registered representative, utilize an investor profile questionnaire we make available, which asks questions intended to help you or your registered representative assess your financial needs, investment time horizon, and willingness to accept investment risk. However, even if you utilize the investor profile questionnaire, it is your decision, in consultation with your registered representative, which Model to choose initially or whether to change to a different Model or transfer to Designated Subaccounts, as the case may be, at a later time. Neither we nor AssetMark bear any responsibility for this decision. You may change to a different Model or transfer to Designated Subaccounts, as the case may be, at any time with a proper written request or by telephone or electronic instructions, provided a valid telephone/electronic authorization is on file with us.

 

Monthly Rebalancing

 

Each calendar month (on the “monthly anniversary” of your Contract Date), and on any Valuation Day after any transaction involving a withdrawal, receipt of a premium payment or a transfer of Contract Value, we rebalance your Contract Value to maintain the Subaccounts and their corresponding Portfolios, and the relative percentages of the Subaccounts, for your selected Asset Allocation Model. This monthly rebalancing takes account of:

 

    increases and decreases in Contract Value in each Subaccount due to Subaccount performance; and

 

   

increases and decreases in Contract Value in each Subaccount due to Subaccount transfers, withdrawals (particularly if taken from specific Subaccounts you

 

31


Table of Contents
 

have designated), and premium payments (particularly if allocated to specific Subaccounts you have designated).

 

The first monthly rebalancing will occur on the first “monthly anniversary” of the Contract Date.

 

We will not rebalance self-directed portfolios (discussed above) unless the contract owner elects the Portfolio Rebalancing program. For self-directed portfolios, future premium payments for which no specific allocation instructions are received will be allocated in accordance with the last allocation instructions we received, which may have been a prior version of their Asset Allocation Model. Accordingly, if you have a self-directed portfolio you should consider providing specific allocation instructions with each premium payment or contacting us to update your default allocation instructions.

 

Quarterly Reports

 

If you elect to participate in the Asset Allocation Program, you will be sent quarterly reports that provide information about the Subaccounts within your Model, as part of your usual quarterly statement. Information concerning the current Models is provided below.

 

Risks

 

Although the Asset Allocation Models are designed to optimize returns given the various levels of risk, there is no assurance that a Model portfolio will not lose money or not experience volatility. Investment performance of your Contract Value could be better or worse by participating in an Asset Allocation Model than if you had not participated. A Model may perform better or worse than any single Portfolio, Subaccount or asset class or other combinations of Portfolios, Subaccounts or asset classes. Model performance is dependent upon the performance of the component Portfolios. Your Contract Value will fluctuate, and when redeemed, may be worth more or less than the original cost.

 

An Asset Allocation Model may not perform as intended. Although the Models are intended to optimize returns given various levels of risk tolerance, portfolio, market and asset class performance may differ in the future from the historical performance and assumptions upon which the Models are based, which could cause the Models to be ineffective or less effective in reducing volatility.

 

Periodic updating of the Asset Allocation Models can cause the underlying Portfolios to incur transactional expenses to raise cash for money flowing out of the Portfolios or to buy securities with money flowing into the Portfolios. These expenses can adversely affect performance of the related Portfolios and the Models.

 

AssetMark may be subject to competing interests that have the potential to influence its decision making with regard to the Asset Allocation Program. For example, the Company may believe that certain Portfolios could benefit from additional assets or could be harmed by redemptions.

 

In addition, the Portfolios underlying the Subaccounts may invest, depending upon their investment objective and decisions by their investment managers, in securities issued by Genworth Financial, Inc. or its affiliates. AssetMark will not have any role in determining whether a Portfolio should purchase or sell Genworth securities. AssetMark may allocate portions of the Asset Allocation Models to Portfolios which have held, hold or may hold Genworth securities. AssetMark’s decision to allocate a percentage of a Model to such a Portfolio will be based on the merits of investing in such a Portfolio and a determination that such an investment is appropriate for the Model.

 

32


Table of Contents

The Models

 

Information concerning the Asset Allocation Models is provided on the following pages. Effective close of business July 26, 2024, Asset Allocation Models A, B, C, D and E will be updated. Tables disclosing the Model percentage allocations and Portfolio selections for Asset Allocation Models A, B, C, D and E, before and after the update, are provided on the next two pages. You should review this information carefully before selecting or changing a Model.

 

Conservative

Allocation

“Model A”

 

Moderately

Conservative

Allocation

“Model B”

 

Moderate

Allocation

“Model C”

 

Moderately

Aggressive

Allocation

“Model D”

 

Aggressive

Allocation

“Model E”

Investor Profile
Investor is willing to accept a low level of risk, has a short term (less than five years) investment time horizon and is looking for an investment that is relatively stable in value.   Investor is willing to accept a low to moderate level of risk, has a moderately short term (less than ten years) investment time horizon and is looking for an investment to keep pace with inflation.   Investor is willing to accept a moderate level of risk, has a moderately long term (10 to 20 years) investment time horizon and is looking for an investment with the opportunity for long term moderate growth.   Investor is willing to accept a moderate to high level of risk, has a long term (15 to 20 years) investment time horizon and is looking for a growth oriented investment.   Investor is willing to accept a high level of risk, has a long term (more than 15 years) investment time horizon and has the temperament to ride out market swings.

Investor Objective
High level of current income with preservation of capital. Target allocation mix is 20% equities and 80% fixed income.   Growth and current income. Target allocation mix is 40% equities and 60% fixed income.   Growth of capital with a low to moderate level of current income. Target allocation mix is 60% equities and 40% fixed income.   Growth of capital but without the price swings of an all equity portfolio. Target allocation mix is 80% equities and 20% fixed income.   Growth of capital. Target allocation mix is 100% equities. 


Build Your Own

Asset Allocation Model

The Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model is constructed, generally, to allow for the creation of an equity to fixed income allocation that ranges between 40% equities/60% fixed income to 80% equities/20% fixed income. These ranges generally fall within the Investor Profile and Investor Objective for Asset Allocation Model B (Moderately Conservative Allocation) on one end of the spectrum and for Asset Allocation Model D (Moderately Aggressive Allocation) on the other. Of course, the Investor Profile and Investor Objective that your allocation will most closely correspond to will depend on your actual allocation.

 

33


Table of Contents

MODEL PERCENTAGE ALLOCATIONS AND PORTFOLIO SELECTIONS

 

Current through July 26, 2024

 

     Portfolios    Model A      Model B      Model C      Model D      Model E  

Equities

                                                
Large Cap Blend   Columbia Variable Portfolio — Overseas Core Fund — Class 2      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
    PSF Natural Resource Portfolio — Class II Shares      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
Large Cap Growth   CTIVP® — Principal Blue Chip Growth Fund — Class 1      6.0%        9.0%        15.0%        21.0%        24.0%  
  Fidelity® VIP Contrafund® Portfolio — Service Class 2      5.0%        10.0%        15.0%        20.0%        25.0%  
    Janus Henderson Forty Portfolio — Service Shares      1.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%        7.0%  
Large Cap Value   AB VPS International Value Portfolio — Class B      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
  BlackRock Basic Value V.I. Fund — Class III Shares      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
  Franklin Mutual Shares VIP Fund — Class 2 Shares      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
    Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund — Series II shares      1.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%        7.0%  
Mid Cap Growth   State Street Real Estate Securities V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares      2.0%        5.0%        7.0%        9.0%        12.0%  

Total % Equities

         20%        40%        60%        80%        100%  
Fixed Income                                                 
Medium Duration   Fidelity VIP Investment Grade Bond Portfolio — Service Class 2      6.0%        5.0%        3.0%        2.0%        0.0%  
    PIMCO VIT Total Return Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares      20.0%        14.0%        10.0%        4.0%        0.0%  
High Yield   PIMCO VIT High Yield Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares      6.0%        5.0%        3.0%        2.0%        0.0%  
Treasury Inflation Protected Securities   LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund — Service Class      6.0%        5.0%        3.0%        2.0%        0.0%  
Short Duration   PIMCO VIT Low Duration Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares      14.0%        10.0%        7.0%        3.0%        0.0%  
Long Duration   PIMCO VIT Long-Term U.S. Government Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares      22.0%        16.0%        11.0%        5.0%        0.0%  
Floating Rate   Eaton Vance VT Floating-Rate Income Fund      6.0%        5.0%        3.0%        2.0%        0.0%  

Total % Fixed Income

         80%        60%        40%        20%        0%  

 

34


Table of Contents

MODEL PERCENTAGE ALLOCATIONS AND PORTFOLIO SELECTIONS

 

Effective after the close of business on July 26, 2024

 

     Portfolios    Model A      Model B      Model C      Model D      Model E  

Equities

                                                
Large Cap Blend   Invesco V.I. Core Equity Fund — Series I shares      4.0%        8.0%        12.0%        16.0%        20.0%  
    Invesco V.I. Main Street Fund® — Series II shares      5.0%        10.0%        15.0%        20.0%        25.0%  
Large Cap Growth   Fidelity VIP Contrafund® Portfolio — Service Class 2      5.0%        10.0%        15.0%        20.0%        25.0%  
    Invesco V.I. EQV International Equity Fund — Series II shares      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
Large Cap Value   Franklin Mutual Shares VIP Fund — Class 2 Shares      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
    Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund — Service II shares      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
Mid Cap Blend   Fidelity VIP Mid Cap Portfolio — Service Class 2      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
Mid Cap Growth   Federated Hermes Kaufmann Fund II — Service Shares      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  
Small Cap Blend   Invesco V.I. Main Street Small Cap Fund® — Service II shares      1.0%        2.0%        3.0%        4.0%        5.0%  

Total % Equities

         20%        40%        60%        80%        100%  
Fixed Income                                                 
Medium Duration   Fidelity VIP Investment Grade Bond Portfolio — Service Class 2      22.0%        16.0%        11.0%        5.0%        0.0%  
    PIMCO VIT Total Return Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares      24.0%        17.0%        12.0%        5.0%        0.0%  
High Yield   PIMCO VIT High Yield Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares      6.0%        5.0%        3.0%        2.0%        0.0%  
Treasury Inflation Protected Securities   LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund — Service Class      6.0%        5.0%        3.0%        2.0%        0.0%  
Short Duration   PIMCO VIT Low Duration Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares      6.0%        5.0%        3.0%        2.0%        0.0%  
Long Duration   PIMCO VIT Long-Term U.S. Government Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares      10.0%        7.0%        5.0%        2.0%        0.0%  
Floating Rate   Eaton Vance VT Floating-Rate Income Fund      6.0%        5.0%        3.0%        2.0%        0.0%  

Total % Fixed Income

         80%        60%        40%        20%        0%  

 

35


Table of Contents

MODEL PERCENTAGE ALLOCATIONS AND PORTFOLIO SELECTIONS

BUILD YOUR OWN ASSET ALLOCATION MODEL

 

Core Asset Class
(20% to 80%)
   Specialty Asset Class
(0% to 20%)
   Fixed Income Asset Class
(20% to 60%)

AB VPS Balanced Hedged Allocation Portfolio — Class B

AB VPS Relative Value Portfolio — Class B

BlackRock Basic Value V.I. Fund — Class III Shares

BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund — Class III Shares

CTIVP® — Principal Blue Chip Growth Fund — Class 1

Fidelity VIP Balanced Portfolio — Service Class 2

Fidelity VIP Contrafund® Portfolio — Service Class 2

Fidelity VIP Equity-Income PortfolioSM — Service Class 2

Fidelity VIP Growth & Income Portfolio — Service Class 2

Franklin Mutual Shares VIP Fund — Class 2 Shares

Templeton Growth VIP Fund — Class 2 Shares

Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund — Series I shares

Invesco V.I. Capital Appreciation Fund — Series II shares

Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund — Series II shares

Invesco V.I. Core Equity Fund — Series I shares

Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series II shares

Invesco V.I. EQV International Equity Fund — Series II shares

Invesco V.I. Global Fund — Series II shares

Invesco V.I. Main Street Fund® — Series II shares

Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Service Shares

MFS® Total Return Series — Service Class Shares

State Street Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 3 Shares

State Street U.S. Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

  

AB VPS International Value Portfolio — Class B

AB VPS Small Cap Growth Portfolio — Class B

AB VPS Sustainable Global Thematic Portfolio — Class B

Allspring VT Discovery All Cap Fund — Class 2

BlackRock Advantage SMID Cap V.I. Fund — Class III Shares

Columbia Variable Portfolio — Overseas Core Fund — Class 2

Eaton Vance VT Floating-Rate Income Fund

Federated Hermes High Income Bond Fund II — Service Shares

Federated Hermes Kaufmann Fund II — Service Shares

Fidelity VIP Dynamic Capital Appreciation Portfolio — Service Class 2

Fidelity VIP Growth Portfolio — Service Class 2

Fidelity VIP Growth Opportunities Portfolio — Service Class 2

Fidelity VIP Mid Cap Portfolio — Service Class 2

Fidelity VIP Value Strategies Portfolio — Service Class 2

Invesco V.I. Main Street Small Cap Fund® — Series II shares

Janus Henderson Forty Portfolio — Service Shares

LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund — Service Class

MFS® Utilities Series — Service Class Shares

PIMCO VIT All Asset Portfolio — Advisor Class Shares

PIMCO VIT High Yield Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

PSF Natural Resources Portfolio — Class II Shares

PSF PGIM Jennison Blend Portfolio — Class II Shares

PSF PGIM Jennison Growth Portfolio — Class II Shares

State Street Real Estate Securities V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

State Street Small-Cap Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

 

  

Fidelity VIP Investment Grade Bond Portfolio — Service Class 2

PIMCO VIT Long-Term U.S. Government Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

PIMCO VIT Low Duration Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

PIMCO VIT Total Return Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

 

36


Table of Contents

THE GUARANTEE ACCOUNT

 

Amounts in the Guarantee Account are held in, and are part of, our General Account. The General Account consists of our assets other than those allocated to this and other Separate Accounts. Subject to statutory authority, we have sole discretion over the investment of assets of the General Account. The assets of the General Account are chargeable with liabilities arising out of any business we may conduct.

 

Due to certain exemptive and exclusionary provisions of the federal securities laws, we have not registered interests in the Guarantee Account under the Securities Act of 1933 (the “1933 Act”), and we have not registered either the Guarantee Account or our General Account as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Accordingly, neither the interests in the Guarantee Account nor our General Account are generally subject to regulation under the 1933 Act and the 1940 Act. Disclosures relating to the interests in the Guarantee Account and the General Account, may however, be subject to certain generally applicable provisions of the federal securities laws relating to the accuracy of statements made in a registration statement. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or markets.

 

Generally, you may allocate your premium payments and/or transfer assets to the Guarantee Account. For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation. We generally exercise our right to limit or refuse allocations to the Guarantee Account when interest rate periods are low for prolonged periods of time. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the Guarantee Account available under your contract. Amounts allocated to the Guarantee Account are credited interest (as described below). Assets in the Guarantee Account are subject to some, but not all, of the charges we assess in connection with your contract. See the “Charges and Other Deductions” provision of this prospectus. The Guarantee Account is not available for contract owners who have elected Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008, Lifetime Income Plus Solution or Payment Optimizer Plus for as long as the rider is in effect.

 

Each time you allocate premium payments or transfer assets to the Guarantee Account, we establish an interest rate guarantee period. For each interest rate guarantee period, we guarantee an interest rate for a specified period of time. At the end of an interest rate guarantee period, a new interest rate will become effective, and a new interest rate guarantee period for one year will commence for the remaining portion of that particular allocation.

 

We determine the interest rates at our sole discretion. The determination made will be influenced by, but not necessarily correspond to, interest rates available on fixed income investments which we may acquire with the amounts we receive as premium payments or transfers of assets under the contracts. You will have no direct or indirect interest in these investments. We also will consider other factors in determining interest rates for a guarantee period including, but not limited to, regulatory and tax requirements, sales commissions, and administrative expenses borne by us, general economic trends, and competitive factors. Amounts you allocate to the Guarantee Account (if available) will not share in the investment performance of our General Account. We cannot predict or guarantee the level of interest rates in future guarantee periods. However, the interest rates for any interest rate guarantee period will be at least the guaranteed interest rate shown in your contract.

 

We will notify you in writing at least 5 days prior to the expiration date of any interest rate guarantee period about the then currently available interest rate guarantee periods and the guaranteed interest rates applicable to such interest rate guarantee periods. A new one year interest rate guarantee period will commence automatically unless we receive written notice prior to the end of the 30-day period following the expiration of the interest rate guarantee period (“30-day window”) of your election of a different interest rate guarantee period from among those being offered by us at that time, or instructions to transfer all or a portion of the remaining amount to one or more Subaccounts subject to certain restrictions. See the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus. During the 30-day window, the allocation will accrue interest at the new interest rate guarantee period’s interest rate.

 

To the extent permitted by law, we reserve the right at any time to offer interest rate guarantee periods that differ than those available when we issued the contract, and to credit a higher rate of interest on premium payments allocated to the Guarantee Account participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program than would otherwise be credited if not participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program. See the “Dollar Cost Averaging Program” provision of this prospectus. Such a program may not be available to all contracts. We also reserve the right, at any time, to stop accepting premium payments or transfers of assets to a particular interest rate guarantee period. Since the specific interest rate guarantee periods available may change periodically, please contact our Home Office at the address listed on page 1 of this prospectus to determine the interest rate guarantee periods currently being offered.

 

37


Table of Contents

CHARGES AND OTHER DEDUCTIONS

 

We sell the contracts through registered representatives of broker-dealers. These registered representatives are also appointed and licensed as insurance agents of the Company. We pay commissions to the broker-dealers for selling the contracts. We intend to recover commissions, marketing, administrative and other expenses and costs of contract benefits, and other incentives we pay, through fees and charges imposed under the contracts and other corporate revenue. See the “Sales of the Contracts” provision of this prospectus for more information.

 

All of the charges described in this section apply to assets allocated to the Separate Account. Assets in the Guarantee Account are subject to all of the charges described in this section except for the mortality and expense risk charge and the administrative expense charge.

 

We will deduct the charges described below to cover our costs and expenses, services provided, and risks assumed under the contracts. We incur certain costs and expenses for the distribution and administration of the contracts and for providing the benefits payable thereunder. Our administrative services include:

 

    processing applications for and issuing the contracts;

 

    maintaining records;

 

    administering income payments;

 

    furnishing accounting and valuation services (including the calculation and monitoring of daily Subaccount values);

 

    reconciling and depositing cash receipts;

 

    providing tax forms;

 

    providing contract confirmations and periodic statements;

 

    providing toll-free inquiry services; and

 

    furnishing telephone and internet transaction services.

 

The risks we assume include:

 

    the risk that the death benefit will be greater than the Surrender Value;

 

    the risk that withdrawals taken pursuant to a living benefit rider will be greater than the Surrender Value;

 

    the risk that the actual life-span of persons receiving income payments under the contract will exceed the assumptions reflected in our guaranteed rates (these rates are incorporated in the contract and cannot be changed);

 

    the risk that more owners than expected will qualify for waivers of the surrender charges; and

 

    the risk that our costs in providing the services will exceed our revenues from contract charges (which cannot be changed by us).

 

We designed the Bonus Credit as part of the overall sales load structure for the contracts. When the contracts were designed, we set the Bonus Credit level and the level of the surrender charge to reflect the overall level of sales load and distribution expenses associated with the contracts. Although there is no specific charge for the Bonus Credit, we may use a portion of the surrender charge and mortality and expense risk charge to help recover the cost of providing the Bonus Credit under the contract. We may realize a profit from this feature.

 

The amount of the charges may not necessarily correspond to the costs associated with providing the services or benefits indicated by the designation of the charge. For example, the surrender charge we collect may not fully cover all of the sales and distribution expenses we actually incur. We also may realize a profit on one or more of the charges. We may use any such profits for any corporate purpose, including the payment of sales expenses.

 

Transaction Expenses

 

Surrender Charge

 

We assess a surrender charge on partial and total surrenders of each premium payment taken within the first eight years after receipt, unless you meet the exceptions as described below. You pay this charge to compensate us for the losses we experience on contract distribution costs.

 

We calculate the surrender charge separately for each premium payment. For purposes of calculating this charge, we assume that you withdraw premium payments on a first-in, first-out basis. We deduct the surrender charge proportionately from the Subaccounts (excluding the GIS Subaccount(s) if Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected at the time of application). However, if there are insufficient assets in the Subaccounts (excluding the GIS Subaccount(s) if Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected), we will deduct the charge from all assets in the Guarantee Account. Charges taken from the Guarantee Account will be taken first from assets that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time (and, if Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected, any remaining

 

38


Table of Contents

withdrawals will then be deducted from the GIS Subaccount(s) from the segment that has been in effect for the shortest period of time). The surrender charge is as follows:

 

Number of Completed

Years Since We

Received the

Premium Payment

  Surrender Charge
as a Percentage of
the Premium Payment
Surrendered
0   8%
1   8%
2   7%
3   6%
4   5%
5   4%
6   3%
7   2%
8 or more   0%

 

Exceptions to the Surrender Charge

 

We do not assess the surrender charge:

 

    of amounts of Contract Value representing gain (as defined below) or Bonus Credits;

 

    of free withdrawal amounts (as defined below);

 

    on total or partial surrenders taken under Optional Payment Plan 1, Optional Payment Plan 2 (for a period of 5 or more years), or Optional Payment Plan 5; or

 

    if a waiver of surrender charge provision applies.

 

You may surrender any gain in your contract (including any Bonus Credits) free of any surrender charge. We calculate gain in the contract as: (a) plus (b) minus (c) minus (d), but not less than zero where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day we receive your partial or total surrender request;

 

  (b)   is the total of any partial surrenders previously taken, including surrender charges;

 

  (c)   is the total of premium payments made; and

 

  (d)   is the total of any gain previously surrendered.

 

In addition to any gain, you may partially surrender an amount equal to the greater of 10% of your total premium payments or any amount surrendered to meet minimum distribution requirements under the Code each contract year without a surrender charge (the “free withdrawal amount”). If you are making a withdrawal from this contract to meet annual minimum distribution requirements under the Code, and the minimum distribution amount attributable to this contract for the calendar year ending at or before the last day of the contract year exceeds the free withdrawal amount, you may withdraw the difference free of surrender charges. We will deduct amounts surrendered first from any gain in the contract and then from premiums paid. The free withdrawal amount is not cumulative from contract year to contract year. (For tax purposes, a surrender is usually treated as a withdrawal of earnings first.) The free withdrawal amount will not apply to commutation value taken under Payment Optimizer Plus.

 

Further, we will waive the surrender charge if you annuitize the contract under Optional Payment Plan 1 (Life Income with Period Certain), Optional Payment Plan 2 (Income for a Fixed Period) provided that you select a fixed period of 5 years or more, or Optional Payment Plan 5 (Joint Life and Survivor Income). See the “Optional Payment Plans” provision of this prospectus. In addition, we will waive the surrender charges if you take income payments from the GIS Subaccount(s) pursuant to the terms of Guaranteed Income Advantage or if you take income payments pursuant to the terms of Payment Optimizer Plus. We may also waive surrender charges for certain withdrawals made pursuant to Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution. See the “Optional Payment Plans,” “Surrenders and Partial Surrenders — Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders,” “Income Payments — Guaranteed Income Advantage” and “Income Payments — Payment Optimizer Plus” provisions of this prospectus.

 

We also will waive surrender charges arising from a surrender occurring before income payments begin if, at the time we receive the surrender request, we have received due proof that the Annuitant has a qualifying terminal illness, or has a qualifying confinement to a state licensed or legally operated hospital or inpatient nursing facility for a minimum period as set forth in the contract (provided the confinement began, or the illness was diagnosed, at least one year after the contract was issued). If you surrender the contract under the terminal illness waiver, please remember that we will pay your Contract Value, which could be less than the death benefit otherwise available. All Annuitants must be age 80 or younger on the Contract Date to be eligible for this waiver. The terms and conditions of the waivers are set forth in your contract.

 

Deductions from the Separate Account

 

We deduct from the Separate Account an amount, computed daily, at an annual rate of 1.55% of the daily net assets of the Separate Account. The charge consists of an administrative expense charge at an effective annual rate of 0.25% and a mortality and expense risk charge at an effective annual rate of 1.30%. These deductions from the Separate Account are reflected in your Contract Value.

 

39


Table of Contents

Charges for the Living Benefit Rider Options

 

Charge for Guaranteed Income Advantage

 

We charge you for expenses related to Guaranteed Income Advantage, if you elect this rider at the time of application. This charge is deducted daily from the Separate Account currently at an annual rate of 0.50% of the daily net assets of the Separate Account. The deduction from the Separate Account is reflected in your Contract Value. You may elect to receive monthly income under this rider or you may elect to transfer the value in the GIS Subaccount(s) to another investment option under your contract and receive income payments. If you elect to transfer the value in the GIS Subaccount(s) to another investment option and receive income payments, the rider charge will end. Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Guaranteed Income Advantage is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Charge for Lifetime Income Plus Solution

 

You may purchase Lifetime Income Plus Solution with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit. We assess a charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided by the rider. The charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the benefit base, as defined and determined under the rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. On the Contract Date, the benefit base equals the initial premium payment. The benefit base will change and may be higher than the Contract Value on any given day.

 

If you purchase Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, then you will be assessed a charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit that is in addition to the charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit under the rider. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit, as defined and determined under the rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. On the Contract Date, the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit equals the initial premium payment. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is higher if any Annuitant is age 71 or older at the time of application.

 

If you reset your benefits under the rider, we will reset the charges for the rider, which may be higher than your previous charges.

 

For contracts issued with Lifetime Income Plus Solution on or after January 5, 2009 and that have reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012, we currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above:

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.20% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

For contracts issued with Lifetime Income Plus Solution on or after January 5, 2009 and that have not reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012, we currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above:

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.95% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

0.95% of benefit base plus

0.20% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

0.95% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

For contracts issued with Lifetime Income Plus Solution before January 5, 2009 and that have reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012, we currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above:

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

40


Table of Contents

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

For contracts issued with Lifetime Income Plus Solution before January 5, 2009 and that have not reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012, we currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above:

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.85% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

0.85% of benefit base plus

0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

0.85% of benefit base plus

0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

The charges for Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit will never exceed 2.00% of benefit base. The charges for Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit will never exceed 2.00% of benefit base plus 0.50% of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit.

 

On the day the rider and/or the contract terminates, the charges for this rider will be calculated, pro rata, and deducted.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Lifetime Income Plus Solution and the Principal Protection Death Benefit are no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Charge for Lifetime Income Plus 2008

 

You may purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit. We assess a charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided by the rider. The charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the benefit base, as defined and determined under the rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. On the Contract Date, the benefit base equals the initial premium payment. The benefit base will change and may be higher than the Contract Value on any given day.

 

If you purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, then you will be assessed a charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit that is in addition to the charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit under the rider. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit, as defined and determined under the rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. On the Contract Date, the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit equals the initial premium payment. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is higher if any Annuitant is age 71 or older at the time of application.

 

For contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after December 3, 2012, we also apply different charges for the rider for a single Annuitant contract and a Joint Annuitant contract. Once a contract is a Joint Annuitant contract and the Joint Annuitant rider charge is applied, the Joint Annuitant rider charge will continue while the rider is in effect. If a spouse is added as Joint Annuitant after the contract is issued, new charges may apply. These new charges may be higher than the charges previously applicable to your contract.

 

If you reset your benefits under the rider, we will reset the charges for the rider, which may be higher than your previous charges.

 

We currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above, for those contracts that have reset their Withdrawal Base on or after December 3, 2012:

 

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25% of benefit base plus
0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25% of benefit base plus
0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

We currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above, for those contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after December 3, 2012:

 

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.75% of benefit base

Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.85% of benefit base

 

41


Table of Contents

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

Single Annuitant Contract

   0.75% of benefit base plus
0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.85% of benefit base plus
0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

Single Annuitant Contract

   0.75% of benefit base plus
0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.85% of benefit base plus
0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

The charges for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit will never exceed 2.00% of benefit base. The charges for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit will never exceed 2.00% of benefit base plus 0.50% of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit.

 

On the day the rider and/or the contract terminates, the charges for this rider will be calculated, pro rata, and deducted.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and the Principal Protection Death Benefit are no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Charge for Lifetime Income Plus 2007

 

The charge for Lifetime Income Plus 2007 for those contracts that reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 is equal to 1.25% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for both single Annuitant and Joint Annuitant contracts. The charge for Lifetime Income Plus 2007 for those contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 is equal to 0.75% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for single Annuitant contracts and 0.85% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for Joint Annuitant contracts. Once a contract is a Joint Annuitant contract, and the Joint Annuitant rider charge is applied, the Joint Annuitant rider charge will continue while the rider is in effect.

 

The deduction for the rider charge from the Separate Account is reflected in your Contract Value. The charge for this rider continues even if you do not allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy and the benefits you are eligible to receive are reduced. If you reset your benefit and allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy available at that time, we will reset the charge for the rider, which may be higher than your previous charge, but will never exceed an annualized rate of 2.00% of your daily net assets in the Separate Account. As disclosed above, if you reset your benefit on or after July 15, 2019, the charge for the rider is 1.25% of your daily net assets in the Separate Account.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Lifetime Income Plus 2007 is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Charge for Lifetime Income Plus

 

We charge you for expenses related to Lifetime Income Plus, if you elect this rider at the time of application. The charge for Lifetime Income Plus for those contracts that reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 is equal to 1.25% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for both single Annuitant and Joint Annuitant contracts. The charge for Lifetime Income Plus for those contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 is equal to 0.60% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for single Annuitant contracts and 0.75% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for Joint Annuitant contracts. For purposes of this rider, once a contract is a Joint Annuitant contract, and the higher rider charge is applied, the higher rider charge will continue while the rider is in effect, even if the contract becomes a single Annuitant contract. The rider charge for a Joint Annuitant contract is in addition to the Joint Annuitant charge that is applicable and charged on the contract.

 

The deduction for the rider charge from the Separate Account is reflected in your Contract Value. The charge for this rider continues even if you do not allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy and the benefits you are eligible to receive are reduced. If you reset your benefit and allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy available at that time, we will reset the charge for the rider, which may be higher than your previous charge, but will never exceed an annualized rate of 2.00% of your daily net assets in the Separate Account. As disclosed above, if you reset your benefit on or after July 15, 2019, the charge for the rider is 1.25% of your daily net assets in the Separate Account.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Lifetime Income Plus is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Charge for Payment Optimizer Plus

 

We assess a charge for Payment Optimizer Plus currently equal to an annualized rate of 0.50% of the daily net assets of the Separate Account for single Annuitant contracts and 0.65% of the daily net assets of the Separate Account for Joint Annuitant

 

42


Table of Contents

contracts. For purposes of this rider, once a contract is a Joint Annuitant contract, and the higher rider charge is applied, the higher rider charge will continue while the rider is in effect, even if the contract becomes a single Annuitant contract. The rider charge for a Joint Annuitant contract is in addition to the Joint Annuitant charge that is applicable and charged on the contract.

 

The deduction for the rider charge from the Separate Account is reflected in your Contract Value and the value of your Annuity Units. The charge for this rider continues even if you do not allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy and the benefits you are eligible to receive are reduced. If you reset your benefit and allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy available at that time, we will reset the charge for the rider, which may be higher than your previous charge, but will never exceed an annual rate of 1.25%.

 

If you purchase Payment Optimizer Plus, after the Maturity Date you may request to terminate your contract and the rider and (assuming the right to cancel period has ended) receive the commuted value of your income payments in a lump sum (the “commutation value”). In calculating the commutation value, we assess a commutation charge. The amount of the commutation charge will be the surrender charge that would otherwise apply under the contract, in accordance with the surrender charge schedule.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Payment Optimizer Plus is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Charges for the Death Benefit Rider Options

 

For contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve the applicable contract modifications, the following provisions apply:

 

Charge for the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option

 

We charge you for expenses related to the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option if you elect this option at the time of application. We deduct this charge against your assets in the Separate Account at each contract anniversary and at surrender to compensate us for the increased risks and expenses associated with providing this death benefit rider. We will allocate the charge for the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in the Separate Account at the time we take the charge. If your assets in the Separate Account are not sufficient to cover the charge, we will deduct the charge first from your assets in the Separate Account, if any, and then from your assets in the Guarantee Account (from the amounts that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time). At surrender, we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge. The charge for the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option is an annual rate of 0.20% of your Contract Value at the time of the deduction.

 

Charge for the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option

 

We charge you for expenses related to the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option if you elect this option at the time of application. We deduct this charge against your assets in the Separate Account at each contract anniversary and at surrender to compensate us for the increased risks and expenses associated with providing this death benefit rider. We will allocate the charge for the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in the Separate Account at the time we take the charge. If your assets in the Separate Account are not sufficient to cover the charge, we will deduct the charge first from your assets in the Separate Account, if any, and then from your assets in the Guarantee Account (from the amounts that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time). At surrender, we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge. The charge for the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option is an annual rate of 0.30% of your Contract Value at the time of the deduction.

 

Charge for the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option

 

We charge you for expenses related to the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option if you elect this option at the time of application. We deduct this charge against your assets in the Separate Account on each contract anniversary and at surrender to compensate us for the increased risks and expenses associated with providing this death benefit rider. We will allocate the charge for the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in the Separate Account at the time we take the charge. If your assets in your Separate Account are not sufficient to cover the charge, we will deduct the charge first from your assets in the Separate Account, if any, and then from your assets in the Guarantee Account (from the amounts that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time). At surrender we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge. The

 

43


Table of Contents

charge for the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option is 0.30% of your Contract Value at the time of the deduction.

 

Charge for Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option

 

We charge you for expenses related to the Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option if you elect this option at the time of application. We deduct this charge against your assets in the Separate Account on each contract anniversary and at surrender to compensate us for the increased risks and expenses associated with providing this death benefit rider. We will allocate the charge for the Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider option among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in the Separate Account at the time we take the charge. If your assets in the Separate Account are not sufficient to cover the charge, we will deduct the charge first from your assets in the Separate Account, if any, and then from your assets in the Guarantee Account (from the amounts that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time). At surrender, we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge. The charge for the Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option is an annual rate of 0.70% of your Contract Value at the time of the deduction.

 

For contracts issued prior to May 1, 2003, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, the following provision applies:

 

Charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

 

We charge you for expenses related to the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We deduct this charge against the Contract Value at each contract anniversary and at the time you fully surrender the contract. This charge is assessed in order to compensate us for the increased risks and expenses associated with providing the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We will allocate the annual charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in the Separate Account at the time we take the charge. If the assets in the Separate Account are not sufficient to cover the charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, we will deduct the charge first from your assets in the Separate Account, if any, and then from your assets in the Guarantee Account (from the amounts that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time). At full surrender, we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge.

 

We guarantee that this charge will never exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your prior contract year’s average benefit amount (we currently charge 0.25%). The rate that applies to your contract is fixed at issue.

 

Charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit

 

We charge you for expenses related to the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit. At the beginning of each contract year after the first contract year, we deduct a charge against the average of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value at the beginning of the previous contract year; and

 

  (2)   the Contract Value at the end of the previous contract year.

 

At surrender, the charge is made against the average of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value at the beginning of the current contract year; and

 

  (2)   the Contract Value at surrender.

 

The charge at surrender will be a pro rata portion of the annual charge.

 

We currently charge an annual rate of 0.20% of your average Contract Value as described above. However, we guarantee that this charge will never exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your prior contract year’s average Contract Value. The rate that applies to your contract will be fixed at issue. We will allocate the annual charge among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in all Subaccounts at the time we take the charge. If there are not sufficient assets in the Subaccounts to cover the charge, we will deduct the charge first from your assets in the Separate Account, if any, and then from your assets in the Guarantee Account. Deductions from the Guarantee Account will be taken first from the amounts (including any interest earned) that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time.

 

The following provisions apply to all contracts:

 

Other Charges

 

Annual Contract Charge

 

We will deduct an annual contract charge of $25 from your Contract Value to compensate us for certain administrative expenses incurred in connection with the contract. We will deduct the charge on each contract anniversary and at full surrender. We will waive this charge if your Contract Value at the time of deduction is $10,000 or more.

 

We will allocate the annual contract charge among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each

 

44


Table of Contents

Subaccount bear to your total assets in the Separate Account at the time the charge is taken. If there are insufficient assets allocated to the Separate Account, we will deduct any remaining portion of the charge from the Guarantee Account proportionally from all assets in the Guarantee Account.

 

Deductions for Premium Taxes

 

We will deduct charges for any premium tax or other tax levied by any governmental entity from premium payments or Contract Value when the premium tax is incurred or when we pay proceeds under the contract (proceeds include surrenders, partial surrenders, income payments and death benefit payments).

 

The applicable premium tax rates that states and other governmental entities impose on the purchase of an annuity are subject to change by legislation, by administrative interpretation, or by judicial action. These premium taxes generally depend upon the law of your state of residence. The tax generally ranges from 0.0% to 3.5%.

 

Portfolio Charges

 

Each Portfolio incurs certain fees and expenses. These include management fees and other expenses associated with the daily operation of each Portfolio, as well as Rule 12b-1 fees and/or service share fees, if applicable. To pay for these expenses, the Portfolio makes deductions from its assets. A Portfolio may also impose a redemption charge on Subaccount assets that are redeemed from the Portfolio. Portfolio expenses, including any redemption charges, are more fully described in the prospectus for each Portfolio. Portfolio expenses are the responsibility of the Portfolio or Fund. They are not fixed or specified under the terms of the contract and are not the responsibility of the Company.

 

Transfer Charges

 

We reserve the right to impose a charge of up to $10 per transfer. This charge represents the costs we incur for effecting any such transfer. We will not realize a profit from imposing this charge.

 

THE CONTRACT

 

The contract is an individual flexible deferred variable annuity contract. Your rights and benefits are described below and in the contract. There may be differences in your contract (such as differences in fees, charges, and benefits) because of requirements of the state where we issued your contract. We will include any such differences in your contract.

 

This contract is no longer offered and sold and, therefore, the optional benefits and features described in this prospectus are no longer available to purchase under the contract. Please refer to your contract and your contract data pages to determine the benefits and features available under your contract.

 

Even though this contract is no longer available for new sales, additional premium payments may be made in accordance with the terms of the contract and as described in the “Premium Payments” provision.

 

Generally, you must maintain a minimum amount of Contract Value after a partial surrender to keep your contract in effect. For example, if your partial surrender request would reduce your Contract Value to less than $1,000, we will surrender your contract in full. If you have elected a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit rider and you take a withdrawal that reduces your Contract Value under the amount required to keep your contract in effect, or if your Contract Value otherwise drops below a certain amount (e.g., $100), the payment we make will be calculated under the rider and will usually either be (a) the greater of a lump sum that equals the (i) Contract Value, (ii) present value of future lifetime payments, or (iii) value of the optional rider death benefit, or (b) lifetime payments as calculated under the rider. See the “Surrenders and Partial Withdrawals - Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders” provision of this prospectus for more information.

 

This contract may be used with certain tax qualified retirement plans. The contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit; the purchase of this contract does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. Accordingly, if this contract is purchased as a Qualified Contract, you should consider purchasing the contract for its death benefit, income benefits, and other non-tax-related benefits. Please consult a tax adviser for information specific to your circumstances in order to determine whether this contract is an appropriate investment for you.

 

Purchasing the contract through a tax-free “Section 1035” exchange. Section 1035 of the Code generally permits you to exchange one annuity contract for another in a “tax-free exchange.” Therefore, you can use the proceeds from another annuity contract to make premium payments for this contract. Before making an exchange, you should carefully compare this contract to your current contract. You may have to pay a surrender charge under your current contract to exchange it for this contract, and this contract has its own surrender charges which would apply to you. The fees and charges under this contract may be higher (or lower), and the benefits may be different, than those of your current contract. In addition, you may have to pay federal income and penalty taxes on the exchange if it does not qualify for Section 1035 treatment. You

 

45


Table of Contents

should not exchange another contract for this contract unless you determine, after evaluating all of the facts, that the exchange is in your best interest. Please note that the person who sells you this contract generally will earn a commission on the sale.

 

Ownership

 

As owner, you have all rights under the contract, subject to the rights of any irrevocable beneficiary. Two persons may apply for a contract as joint owners. Joint owners have equal undivided interests in their contract. A joint owner may not be named for a Qualified Contract. That means that each may exercise any ownership rights on behalf of the other, except for ownership changes. Joint owners also have the right of survivorship. This means if a joint owner dies, his or her interest in the contract passes to the surviving owner. You must have our approval to add a joint owner after we issue the contract. We may require additional information if joint ownership is requested after the contract is issued.

 

Subject to certain restrictions imposed by electable rider options and as otherwise stated below, before the Maturity Date, you may change:

 

    your Maturity Date to any date at least ten years after your last premium payment;

 

    your Optional Payment Plan;

 

    the allocation of your investments among the Subaccounts and/or the Guarantee Account (subject to certain restrictions listed in your contract and in the “Transfers” provision); and

 

    the owner, joint owner, primary beneficiary, contingent beneficiary (unless the primary beneficiary or contingent beneficiary is named as an irrevocable beneficiary), and contingent Annuitant upon written notice to our Home Office, and provided the Annuitant is living at the time of the request. If you change a beneficiary, your plan selection will no longer be in effect unless you request that it continue. In addition, you may change any non-natural owner to another non-natural owner. Changing the owner or joint owner may have tax consequences and you should consult a tax adviser before doing so.

 

We must receive your request for a change at our Home Office in a form satisfactory to us. The change will take effect as of the date you sign the request. The change will be subject to any payment made before we recorded the change. Please note that if you elect Guaranteed Income Advantage at the time of application, you may not change your scheduled income start date or your Optional Payment Plan. In addition, partial surrenders and/or transfers from the GIS Subaccount(s) will lower your guaranteed income floor and cause you to lose your right to continue to make scheduled transfers into the segment from which the partial surrender and/or transfer was made. If you elect Payment Optimizer Plus, Lifetime Income Plus or Lifetime Income Plus 2007 at the time of application, the benefits you receive under such rider may be reduced if your assets are not allocated in accordance with the Investment Strategy prescribed by your rider. Contract owners that own Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution must always allocate assets in accordance with the Investment Strategy. You may not however, change the Optional Payment Plan once elected at the time of application.

 

Assignment

 

An owner of a Non-Qualified Contract may assign some or all of his or her rights under the contract with our consent. However, an assignment may terminate certain death benefits provided by rider option. An assignment must occur before the Maturity Date and while the Annuitant is still living. Once proper notice of the assignment is recorded by our Home Office, the assignment will become effective as of the date the written request was signed.

 

Qualified Contracts, IRAs and Tax Sheltered Annuities may not be assigned, pledged or otherwise transferred except where allowed by law.

 

If you elect Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders, our Home Office must approve any assignment, unless such assignment was made pursuant to a court order.

 

Guaranteed Income Advantage will terminate upon assignment of the contract unless such assignment is a result of legal process. Upon termination of Guaranteed Income Advantage, all assets in the GIS Subaccount(s) will be transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund as of the Valuation Day the assignment is received. If the assignment is received on a non-Valuation Day, the assets will be transferred on the next Valuation Day.

 

We are not responsible for the validity or tax consequences of any assignment. We are not liable for any payment or settlement made before the assignment is recorded. Assignments will not be recorded until our Home Office receives sufficient direction from the owner and the assignee regarding the proper allocation of contract rights.

 

Amounts pledged or assigned will be treated as distributions and will be included in gross income to the extent that the Contract Value exceeds the investment in the contract for the taxable year in which it was pledged or assigned.

 

46


Table of Contents

Assignment of the entire Contract Value may cause the portion of the contract exceeding the total investment in the contract and previously taxed amounts to be included in gross income for federal income tax purposes each year that the assignment is in effect.

 

Amounts assigned may be subject to an IRS tax penalty equal to 10% of the amount included in gross income.

 

Premium Payments

 

You may make premium payments at any frequency and in the amount you select, subject to certain limitations. You must obtain our approval before you make total premium payments for an Annuitant age 79 or younger that exceed $2,000,000 in the aggregate in any variable annuity contracts issued by the Company or any of its affiliates. If the Annuitant is age 80 or older at the time of payment, the total amount not subject to prior approval is $1,000,000 in the aggregate in any variable annuity contracts issued by the Company or any of its affiliates. Premium payments may be made at any time prior to the Maturity Date, the surrender of the contract, or the death of the owner (or joint owner, if applicable), whichever comes first.

 

The minimum initial premium payment is $10,000. We may accept a lower initial premium payment in the case of certain group sales. Each additional premium payment must be at least $1,000 for Non-Qualified Contracts ($200 if paid by electronic fund transfers), $50 for IRA Contracts, and $100 for other Qualified Contracts.

 

We reserve the right to refuse to accept a premium payment for any lawful reason and in a manner that does not unfairly discriminate against similarly situated purchasers. If you have one or more guaranteed benefits and we exercise our right to discontinue the acceptance of, and/or place additional limitations on, contributions to the contract and/or contributions and/or transfers into the Subaccounts, you may no longer be able to fund your guaranteed benefit(s). This means that if you have already funded your guaranteed benefit(s) by allocating amounts according to the prescribed Investment Strategy for the rider(s), you may no longer be able to increase your Contract Value and the benefit base(s) associated with your guaranteed benefit(s) through contributions and transfers. (For more information about the potential impact of limitations on your ability to make subsequent premium payments, see “Important Note” under “Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders” and “Payment Optimizer Plus.”)

 

Valuation Day and Valuation Period

 

We will value Accumulation and Annuity Units once daily as of the close of regular trading (currently 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time) for each day the New York Stock Exchange is open except for days on which a Portfolio does not value its shares. If a Valuation Period contains more than one day, the unit values will be the same for each day in the Valuation Period. Premium payments are credited to a contract on the basis of accumulation unit value next determined after receipt of a premium payment.

 

Allocation of Premium Payments

 

We place premium payments into the Subaccounts, each of which invests in shares of a corresponding Portfolio, and/or the Guarantee Account, according to your instructions. You may allocate premium payments in the Subaccounts plus the Guarantee Account at any one time. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or in all markets. The percentage of premium payment which you can put into any one Subaccount or guarantee period must equal a whole percentage and cannot be less than $100. In addition, for contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account.

 

If you have elected Guaranteed Income Advantage, you may not allocate premium payments directly to the GIS Subaccount(s); allocations to the GIS Subaccount(s) must be made by scheduled transfers pursuant to pro rata scheduled transfers from all other Subaccounts in which you have assets. If you have elected the Payment Optimizer Plus, Lifetime Income Plus or Lifetime Income Plus 2007, you must allocate all premium payments in accordance with the Investment Strategy prescribed by the rider in order to obtain the full benefit of the rider. The benefits you receive under the rider may be reduced if your premium payments are not allocated in accordance with the Investment Strategy. Contract owners that own Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution must always allocate assets in accordance with the Investment Strategy. See the “Surrenders and Partial Surrenders — Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders,” “Income Payments — Guaranteed Income Advantage” and “Income Payments — Payment Optimizer Plus,” provisions of the prospectus.

 

Upon allocation to the appropriate Subaccounts, we convert premium payments into Accumulation Units. We determine the number of Accumulation Units credited by dividing the amount allocated to each Subaccount by the value of an Accumulation Unit for that Subaccount on the Valuation Day on which we receive any additional premium payment at our Home Office. The number of Accumulation Units determined in this way is not changed by any subsequent change in the value of an Accumulation Unit. However, the dollar value of an

 

47


Table of Contents

Accumulation Unit will vary depending not only upon how well the Portfolio’s investments perform, but also upon the expenses of the Separate Account and the Portfolios.

 

We allocate any premium payments we receive that are not accompanied with new instructions in accordance with any prior valid instructions. You may change the allocation of subsequent premium payments at any time, without charge, by sending us acceptable notice. The new allocation will apply to any new premium payments made after we receive notice of the change at our Home Office.

 

Bonus Credits

 

The Bonus Credit is an amount we add to each premium payment we receive.

 

For contracts issued on or after the later of October 29, 2002 or the date on which state insurance authorities approve the applicable contract modifications, and if the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 5% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. For contracts issued prior to October 29, 2002 or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve the applicable contract modifications, and if the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 4% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. If the Annuitant is age 81 or older at the time of issue, we will not pay any Bonus Credits. The Annuitant cannot be age 81 or older at the time of application, unless we approve an Annuitant of an older age. We fund the Bonus Credits from our General Account. We apply the Bonus Credits when we apply your premium payment to your Contract Value, and allocate the credits on a pro-rata basis to the investment options you select in the same ratio as the applicable premium payment. We do not consider Bonus Credits as “premium payments” for purposes of the contract. In addition, please note that any applicable Bonus Credit will not be included in the Withdrawal Base, Rider Death Benefit, Principal Protection Death Benefit or Roll-Up Value, if applicable, if you elected Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007 or Lifetime Income Plus 2008; the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Roll-Up Value, Maximum Anniversary Value or Principal Protection Death Benefit if you elected Lifetime Income Plus Solution; or the benefit base if you elected the Payment Optimizer Plus. You will have to reset your benefit under the terms of the applicable rider to capture the Bonus Credit or any related earnings in the Withdrawal Base, Maximum Anniversary Value or benefit base. You should know that over time and under certain circumstances (such as an extended period of poor market performance), the costs associated with the Bonus Credit may exceed the sum of the Bonus Credit and any related earnings. You should consider this possibility before purchasing the contract. The Bonus Credit is referred to as an “enhanced premium amount” in your contract.

 

Valuation of Accumulation Units

 

Partial surrenders, surrenders and payment of a death benefit all result in the cancellation of an appropriate number of Accumulation Units. We cancel Accumulation Units as of the end of the Valuation Period on which we receive notice or instructions with regard to the surrender, partial surrender or payment of a death benefit. We value Accumulation Units for each Subaccount separately. The Accumulation Unit value at the end of every Valuation Day equals the Accumulation Unit value at the end of the preceding Valuation Day multiplied by the net investment factor (described below). We arbitrarily set the Accumulation Unit value at the inception of the Subaccount at $10. On any Valuation Day, we determine your Subaccount value by multiplying the number of Accumulation Units attributable to your contract by the Accumulation Unit value for that day.

 

The net investment factor is an index used to measure the investment performance of a Subaccount from one Valuation Period to the next. The net investment factor for any Subaccount for any Valuation Period reflects the change in the net asset value per share of the Portfolio held in the Subaccount from one Valuation Period to the next, adjusted for the daily deduction of the administrative expense charges, mortality and expense risk charges, and any applicable optional rider charges (but not any optional death benefit rider charges) from assets in the Subaccount. The charges for Lifetime Income Plus 2008, Lifetime Income Plus Solution and the Death Benefit Rider Options, however, are deducted from your Contract Value. If any “ex-dividend” date occurs during the Valuation Period, we take into account the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distribution so that the unit value is not impacted. Also, if we need to reserve money for taxes, we take into account a per share charge or credit for any taxes reserved for which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount.

 

The value of an Accumulation Unit may increase or decrease based on the net investment factor. Changes in the net investment factor may not be directly proportional to changes in the net asset value of the Portfolio because of the deduction of Separate Account charges. Though the number of Accumulation Units will not change as a result of investment experience, the value of an Accumulation Unit may increase or decrease from Valuation Period to Valuation Period.

 

48


Table of Contents

BENEFITS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT

 

The following table summarizes information about the benefits available under the contract.

 

Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
Lifetime Income Plus Solution    Provides guaranteed withdrawals for the life of the Annuitant(s), with upside potential, provided you meet certain conditions. You may purchase Lifetime Income Plus Solution with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit. The Principal Protection Death Benefit is used to determine the death benefit, if any, payable under the contract and rider.    Optional    2.00% of benefit base (without Principal Protection Death Benefit); 2.00% of benefit base plus 0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit (if elected)   

•  The benefits provided under the rider may be reduced or even lost based on the level of withdrawals you take from the contract.

 

•  We reserve the right to exclude additional premium payments from being applied to the benefit provided under the rider.

 

•  You will lose the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract or if you elect to terminate the rider on any contract anniversary on or after the fifth contract anniversary.

 

•  In order to receive the full benefit provided by the rider, you must invest all premium payments and allocations in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy.

Lifetime Income Plus 2008    Provides guaranteed withdrawals for the life of the Annuitant(s), with upside potential, provided you meet certain conditions. You may purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit. The Principal Protection Death Benefit is used to determine the death benefit, if any, payable under the contract and rider.    Optional    2.00% of benefit base (without Principal Protection Death Benefit); 2.00% of benefit base plus 0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit (if elected)   

•  The benefits provided under the rider may be reduced or even lost based on the level of withdrawals you take from the contract.

 

•  We reserve the right to exclude additional premium payments from being applied to the benefit provided under the rider.

 

•  You will lose the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract or if you elect to terminate the rider on any contract anniversary on or after the fifth contract anniversary.

 

•  In order to receive the full benefit provided by the rider, you must invest all premium payments and allocations in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy.

Lifetime Income Plus 2007    Provides guaranteed withdrawals for the life of the Annuitant(s), with upside potential, provided you meet certain conditions. This rider provides for a death benefit.    Optional    2.00% of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account   

•  The benefits provided under the rider may be reduced or even lost based on the level of withdrawals you take from the contract.

 

•  Your benefit will be reduced if you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy.

 

•  We reserve the right to exclude additional premium payments from being applied to the benefit provided under the rider.

 

 

49


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
                   

 

•  You will lose the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract.

Lifetime Income Plus    Provides guaranteed withdrawals for the life of the Annuitant(s), with upside potential, provided you meet certain conditions. This rider provides for a death benefit.    Optional    2.00% of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account   

•  The benefits provided under the rider may be reduced or even lost based on the level of withdrawals you take from the contract.

 

•  Your benefit will be reduced if you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy.

 

•  We reserve the right to exclude additional premium payments from being applied to the benefit provided under the rider.

 

•  You will lose the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract.

 

Guaranteed Income Advantage    Provides a guaranteed income benefit that is based on the amount of assets you invest in the GIS Subaccount(s).    Optional    0.50% of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account   

•  You may not allocate premium payments or assets in your contract directly to the GIS Subaccount(s). Payments to the GIS Subaccount(s) must be made through a series of scheduled transfers.

 

•  We reserve the right to exclude additional premium payments from being applied to the benefit provided under the rider.

 

•  Once you take a withdrawal or make a transfer from a segment, you will not be permitted to make any additional scheduled transfers to that segment

 

•  On the date that the contract is assigned or sold, unless under an involuntary assignment effected by legal process, all amounts in the GIS Subaccount(s) will be transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and any segments will be terminated.

Payment Optimizer Plus    Provides for a guaranteed income benefit that is based on the amount of premium payments you make to your contract.    Optional    1.25% of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account   

•  You must invest all premium payments and allocations in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy.

 

•  We reserve the right to exclude additional premium payments from being applied to the benefit provided under the rider.

 

•  The longer you wait before beginning to take income payments, the more opportunities

 

 

50


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
                   

you may have to reset the benefit and thereby potentially increase the amount of income payments. If you delay starting to take income payments too long, however, you may limit the number of years available for you to take income payments in the future (due to life expectancy) and you may be paying for a benefit you are not using.

 

•  If you do not allocate all assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy, your benefit will be reduced by 50%. Even if your benefit is reduced, you will continue to pay the full amount charged for the rider.

Basic Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

   Provides a death benefit equal to the greater of: (a) premium payments adjusted for any partial surrenders (including any applicable surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) calculated as of the Valuation Day we receive due proof of death; and (b) the Contract Value on the Valuation Day we receive due proof of death.    Standard    No additional fee   

•  Partial surrenders (including any withdrawals taken pursuant to the terms of a Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders) reduce the death benefit proportionally by the same percentage that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

•  The death benefit is terminated upon annuitization.

Annual Step-Up Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

   Under the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider, the amount of death benefit proceeds we will pay upon receipt of due proof of death of any Annuitant will be the greater of: (a) the Basic Death Benefit; and (b) the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option.    Optional    0.20% of your Contract Value at the time the charge is taken   

•  Partial surrenders (including any withdrawals taken pursuant to the terms of a Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Rider) reduce the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit proportionally by the same percentage that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charges and any applicable premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

•  Once elected, this death benefit may not be terminated and it will remain in effect while the contract is in force or until income payments begin.

 

•  On the Maturity Date, this rider and its corresponding charge will terminate.

5% Roll-Up Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities

   Under the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider, the amount of death benefit proceeds we will pay upon receipt of due proof of death of any Annuitant will be the    Optional    0.30% of your Contract Value at the time the charge is taken   

•  If partial surrenders greater than 5% of premium payments are taken in any contract year, the 5% Rollup Death Benefit is reduced proportionally for that partial

 

 

51


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
approve applicable contract modifications)    greater of: (a) the Basic Death Benefit; and (b) the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option.             

surrender and all future partial surrenders by the same percentage that the partial surrender, including any surrender charges and premium tax paid, reduces the Contract Value.

 

•  Once elected, this benefit may not be terminated and it will remain in effect while this contract is in force or until income payments begin.

 

•  On the Maturity Date, this rider and its corresponding charge will terminate.

Earnings Protector Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

   Adds a death benefit amount that is equal to a percentage of earnings under the contract.    Optional    0.30% of your Contract Value at the time the charge is taken   

•  The Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option does not guarantee that any amounts under the benefit will become payable at death. Market declines resulting in your Contract Value being less than your premium payments paid and not previously withdrawn may result in no additional amount being payable.

 

•  Once you elect the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option, you cannot terminate it. This means that regardless of any changes in your circumstances, we will continue to assess a charge for the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option.

 

•  Once elected, this benefit may not be terminated and it will remain in effect while this contract is in force or until income payments begin.

 

•  On the Maturity Date, this rider and its corresponding charge will terminate.

Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Roll-Up Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

   Combines the Greater of the Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option plus the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option. Under this rider option, the amount of death benefit proceeds we will pay upon receipt of due proof of death of any Annuitant will be the greatest of: (a) the Basic Death Benefit; (b) the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option; and (c) the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option; plus the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option.    Optional    0.70% of your Contract Value at the time the charge is taken   

•  Once elected, this benefit may not be terminated and it will remain in effect while this contract is in force or until income payments begin.

 

•  On the Maturity Date, this rider and its corresponding charge will terminate.

 

52


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations

Basic Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued on or after the later of May 15, 2001, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, but prior to May 1, 2003, or prior to the date state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

  

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the Basic Death Benefit will be equal to the greater of: (1) the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and (2) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the death benefit will be equal to the greatest of: (1) the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where: (a) is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and (b) is premium payments received after such contract anniversary. The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary. (2) the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and (3) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death.

   Standard    No additional fee   

•  We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

Basic Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued prior to May 15, 2001, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

  

The death benefit equals the sum of (a) and (b) where: (a) the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and (b) is the excess, if any, of the unadjusted death benefit as of the date of the Annuitant’s death over the Contract Value as of the date of the Annuitant’s death, with interest credited on that excess from the date of the Annuitant’s death to the date of distribution.

 

   Standard    No additional fee   

•  We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

•  The unadjusted death benefit varies based on the Annuitant’s age at the

 

53


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
    

The rate credited may depend on applicable law or regulation. Otherwise, we will set it.

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greater of: (1) the Contract Value as of the date of death; and (2) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greatest of: (1) the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where: (a) is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and (b) is premium payments received after such contract anniversary. The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment for any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary. (2) the Contract Value as of the date of death; and (3) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date of death.

            

time we issued the contract and on the Annuitant’s age at the time of death.

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued prior to May 1, 2003 or prior to the date state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

  

Adds an extra feature to the Basic Death Benefit. Under the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, the amount we pay as of the date we receive due proof of death of any Annuitant will be the greater of: (a) the Basic Death Benefit and (b) the

 

   Optional    0.35% of the Contract Value at the time the charge is taken   

•  We will adjust the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes

 

54


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
     Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit as calculated under the rider.             

assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued prior to May 1, 2003 or prior to the date state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

   Adds an extra feature to our Basic Death Benefit and, if applicable, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, in the form of an additional death benefit amount equal to a percentage of earnings under the contract.    Optional    0.35% of your average Contract Value for the prior contract year   

•  Once you purchase the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit, you cannot terminate it. This means that regardless of any changes in your circumstances, we will continue to assess a charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit.

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

   Permits you to systematically transfer on a monthly or quarterly basis a set dollar amount from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or the Guarantee Account, if available, to any combination of other available Subaccounts (as long as the total number of Subaccounts used does not exceed the maximum number allowed under the contract).    Optional    No additional fee   

•  You may not transfer from one interest rate guarantee period under the Guarantee Account to another

 

•  Dollar Cost Averaging is not available if you have elected Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders and you are allocating assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy.

 

•  We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the program at any time and for any reason.

Defined Dollar Cost Averaging Program    Permits you to systematically transfer a fixed dollar amount on a monthly basis for twelve months from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to an Asset Allocation Model or, if you have elected Lifetime Income Plus 2008, Lifetime Income Plus Solution or Payment Optimizer Plus, from the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to one of the other available Investment Strategy options.    Optional    No additional fee   

•  You may participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program only if you elect it when you apply for the contract.

 

•  To use the program, you must transfer at least $100 from the Subaccount (or Designated Subaccount) investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund.

 

•  We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the program at any time and for any reason.

Portfolio Rebalancing Program    Automatically rebalances your assets on a quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis to return to the percentages specified in your allocation instructions.    Optional    No additional fee   

•  The program does not include allocations to the Guarantee Account

 

•  You may not participate in the Portfolio Rebalancing program if you have elected Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders and you are allocating assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy.

 

 

55


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
                   

 

•  We reserve the right to exclude specific Subaccounts from Portfolio Rebalancing.

 

•  We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the program at any time and for any reason.

Guarantee Account Interest Sweep Program    Under the program, you could instruct us to transfer interest earned on your assets in the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts to which you are allocating premium payments, in accordance with your allocation instructions in effect on the date of the transfer any time before the Maturity Date.    Optional    No additional fee   

•  The minimum amount in the Guarantee Account required to elect this option is $1,000, but may be reduced at our discretion.

 

•  You can participate in the interest sweep program at the same time you participate in either the Dollar Cost Averaging program or the Portfolio Rebalancing program. If any interest sweep transfer is scheduled for the same day as a Portfolio Rebalancing transfer, the interest sweep transfer will be processed first.

 

•  We may limit the amount you may transfer from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts for any particular allocation. We will not process an interest sweep transfer if that transfer would exceed the amount permitted to be transferred.

 

Systematic Withdrawal Program    Allows you to take Systematic Withdrawals of a specified dollar amount (in equal installments of at least $100) on a monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual basis.    Optional    No additional fee   

•  To participate in the program, your Contract Value initially must be at least $10,000

 

•  Your Systematic Withdrawals in a contract year may not exceed the amount which is not subject to a surrender charge.

 

•  A Systematic Withdrawal program will terminate automatically when a Systematic Withdrawal would cause the remaining Contract Value to be less than $1,000.

 

 

TRANSFERS

 

Transfers Before the Maturity Date

 

All owners may transfer all or a portion of their assets between and among the Subaccounts of the Separate Account and the Guarantee Account (if available) on any Valuation Day prior to the Maturity Date, subject to certain conditions imposed by the contract and as stated below. Owners may not, however, transfer assets in the Guarantee Account from one interest rate guarantee period to another interest rate guarantee period. If you elect Guaranteed Income Advantage, once you make a transfer from a segment that corresponds to a GIS Subaccount, you may not make subsequent transfers to that segment corresponding to that GIS Subaccount. If you elect Payment Optimizer Plus, Lifetime Income Plus or Lifetime Income Plus 2007, the benefits you receive under such rider may be reduced if, after a transfer, your assets are not allocated in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy. Contract owners that own Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution must always allocate assets in accordance with the Investment Strategy.

 

We process transfers among the Subaccounts and between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account as of the end of the Valuation Period that we receive the transfer request in good order at our Home Office. There may be limitations placed on multiple transfer requests made at different times during the same Valuation Period involving the same Subaccounts or the Guarantee Account. We may postpone transfers to, from, or among the Subaccounts and/or the Guarantee Account under

 

56


Table of Contents

certain circumstances. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus.

 

Transfers from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts

 

We may limit and/or restrict transfers from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or in all markets. For any allocation from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts, the limited amount will not be less than any accrued interest on that allocation plus 25% of the original amount of that allocation. Unless you are participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program (see the “Dollar Cost Averaging Program” provision), you may make such transfers only during the 30 day period beginning with the end of the preceding interest rate guarantee period applicable to that particular allocation. We may also limit the amount that you may transfer to the Subaccount.

 

Transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account

 

We may restrict certain transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or in all markets. For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may also limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation. We generally exercise our right to limit or refuse allocations to the Guarantee Account when interest rate periods are low for prolonged periods of time. In addition, we reserve the right to prohibit or limit transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account during the six month period following the transfer of any amount from the Guarantee Account to any Subaccount. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the Guarantee Account available under your contract.

 

Transfers Among the Subaccounts

 

All owners may submit 12 Subaccount transfers each calendar year by voice response, Internet, telephone, facsimile, U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service. Once such 12 Subaccount transfers have been executed, a letter will be sent notifying owners that they may submit additional transfers only in writing by U.S. Mail or by overnight delivery service, and transfer requests sent by the Internet, same day mail, courier service, telephone or facsimile will not be accepted under any circumstances. Once we receive your mailed transfer request at our Home Office, such transfer cannot be cancelled. We also will not cancel transfer requests that have not yet been received, i.e., you may not call to cancel a transfer request sent by U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service. If you wish to change a transfer request sent by U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service, such change must also be sent in writing by U.S. Mail or by overnight delivery service. We will process that transfer request as of the Valuation Day the new transfer request is received at our Home Office.

 

Currently, we do not charge for transfers. However, we reserve the right to assess a charge of up to $10 per transfer. The minimum transfer amount is $100 or the entire balance in the Subaccount or interest rate guarantee period if the transfer will leave a balance of less than $100.

 

We also reserve the right to not honor your transfer request if your transfer is a result of more than one trade involving the same Subaccount within a 30 day period. We will generally invoke this right when either the Portfolio(s) or we see a pattern of frequent transfers between the same Portfolios within a short period of time (i.e., transfers among the same Subaccounts occur within five to 15 days of each other).

 

In addition, we may not honor transfers made by third parties. See the “Transfer by Third Parties” provision of this prospectus.

 

If a transfer request is not processed, a letter will be sent notifying you that your transfer request was not honored. If we do not honor a transfer request, we will not count that request as a transfer for purposes of the 12 transfers allowed each calendar year as described in the previous paragraphs.

 

When thinking about a transfer of assets, you should consider the inherent risks involved. Frequent transfers based on short-term expectations may increase the risk that you will make a transfer at an inopportune time. Also, because certain restrictions on transfers are applied at the discretion of the Portfolios in which the Subaccount invests, it is possible that owners will be treated differently and there could be inequitable treatment among owners if a Portfolio does not apply equal treatment to all shareholders. See the “Special Note on Frequent Transfers” provision of this prospectus.

 

These restrictions will apply to all owners and their designated third party(ies), unless such transfer is being made pursuant to:

 

  (1)   a Dollar Cost Averaging program;

 

  (2)   a Portfolio Rebalancing program;

 

57


Table of Contents
  (3)   the terms of an approved Fund substitution or Fund liquidation; or

 

  (4)   a Portfolio’s refusal to allow the purchase of shares, either on behalf of an individual owner or on the entire Separate Account, in which case, the Portfolio’s refusal to allow the purchase of shares will not be considered a transfer for calculation of the 12 transfers allowed per calendar year by voice response, Internet, telephone, facsimile, U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service.

 

In addition, the restrictions and charges listed above do not apply to any:

 

  (1)   scheduled transfers made to the GIS Subaccount(s) pursuant to the terms of Guaranteed Income Advantage; or

 

  (2)   transfers made among the Subaccounts pursuant to automatic rebalancing of assets made under the terms of Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders.

 

Sometimes, we will not honor transfer requests. We will not honor a transfer request if:

 

  (1)   any Subaccount that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or to redeem shares of the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests; or

 

  (2)   the transfer would adversely affect Unit Values.

 

The affected Portfolio(s) determine whether items (1) or (2) above apply.

 

We will treat all owners equally with respect to transfer requests.

 

Telephone/Internet Transactions

 

All owners may make their first 12 transfers in any calendar year among the Subaccounts or between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account by calling or electronically contacting us. Transactions that can be conducted over the telephone and Internet include, but are not necessarily limited to:

 

  (1)   the first 12 transfers of assets among the Subaccounts or between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account in any calendar year (this includes any changes in premium payment allocations when such changes include a transfer of assets);

 

  (2)   Dollar Cost Averaging; and

 

  (3)   Portfolio Rebalancing.

 

We will employ reasonable procedures to confirm that instructions we receive are genuine. Such procedures may include, but are not limited to:

 

  (1)   requiring you or a third party you authorized to provide some form of personal identification before we act on the telephone and/or Internet instructions;

 

  (2)   confirming the telephone/Internet transaction in writing to you or a third party you authorized; and/or

 

  (3)   tape recording telephone instructions or retaining a record of your electronic request.

 

We reserve the right to limit or prohibit telephone and Internet transactions.

 

We will delay making a payment or processing a transfer request if:

 

  (1)   the disposal or valuation of the Separate Account’s assets is not reasonably practicable because the New York Stock Exchange is closed;

 

  (2)   on nationally recognized holidays, trading is restricted by the New York Stock Exchange;

 

  (3)   an emergency exists making the disposal or valuation of securities held in the Separate Account impracticable; or

 

  (4)   the SEC by order permits postponement to protect our owners.

 

Rules and regulations of the SEC will govern as to when the conditions described in (3) and (4) above exist. If we are closed on days when the New York Stock Exchange is open, Contract Value may be affected since owners will not have access to their account.

 

Confirmation of Transactions

 

We will not be liable for following instructions that we reasonably determine to be genuine. We will send you a confirmation of any transfer we process. Systematic transactions, such as those related to portfolio rebalancing or dollar cost averaging, generally will be reported in quarterly statements. You are responsible for verifying transfer confirmations and notifying us of any errors within 30 days of receiving the confirmation statement or, for systematic transactions not reported on a trade confirmation, the quarterly statement.

 

Special Note on Reliability

 

Please note that the Internet or our telephone system may not always be available. Any computer or telephone system,

 

58


Table of Contents

whether it is ours, yours, your service provider’s, or your registered representative’s, can experience unscheduled outages or slowdowns for a variety of reasons. These outages or slowdowns may delay or prevent our processing your request. Although we have taken precautions to help our systems handle heavy use, we cannot promise complete reliability under all circumstances. If you are experiencing problems, you can make your transaction request by writing our Home Office.

 

Transfers by Third Parties

 

As a general rule and as a convenience to you, we allow you to give third parties the right to conduct transfers on your behalf. However, when the same third party possesses this ability on behalf of many owners, the result can be simultaneous transfers involving large amounts of assets. Such transfers can disrupt the orderly management of the Portfolios underlying the contract, can result in higher costs to owners, and are generally not compatible with the long-range goals of owners. We believe that such simultaneous transfers effected by such third parties are not in the best interests of all beneficial shareholders of the Portfolios underlying the contracts, and the management of the Portfolios share this position.

 

We have instituted procedures to assure that the transfer requests that we receive have, in fact, been made by the owners in whose names they are submitted.

 

Consequently, we may refuse transfers made by third parties on behalf of an owner in a number of circumstances, which include but are not limited to:

 

  (1)   transfers made on behalf of many owners by one third party (or several third parties who belong to the same firm) where the transfer involves the same Subaccounts and large amounts of assets;

 

  (2)   when we have not received adequate authorization from the owner allowing a third party to make transfers on his or her behalf; and

 

  (3)   when we believe, under all facts and circumstances received, that the owner or his or her authorized agent is not making the transfer.

 

We require documentation to provide sufficient proof that the third party making the trade is in fact duly authorized by the owner. This information includes, but is not limited to:

 

  (1)   documentation signed by the owner or a court authorizing a third party to act on the owner’s behalf;

 

  (2)   passwords and encrypted information;

 

  (3)   additional owner verification when appropriate; and

 

  (4)   recorded conversations.

 

We will not be held liable for refusing a transfer made by a third party when we have a reasonable basis for believing such third party is not authorized to make a transfer on the owner’s behalf or we have a reasonable basis for believing the third party is acting in a fraudulent manner.

 

Special Note on Frequent Transfers

 

The Separate Account does not accommodate frequent transfers of Contract Value among Subaccounts. When owners or someone on their behalf submit requests to transfer all or a portion of their assets between Subaccounts, the requests result in the purchase and redemption of shares of the Portfolios in which the Subaccounts invest. Frequent Subaccount transfers, therefore, cause corresponding frequent purchases and redemptions of shares of the Portfolios.

 

Frequent purchases and redemptions of shares of the Portfolios can dilute the value of a Portfolio’s shares, disrupt the management of the Portfolio’s investment portfolio, and increase brokerage and administrative costs. Accordingly, when an owner or someone on their behalf engages in frequent Subaccount transfers, other owners and persons with rights under the contracts (such as Annuitants and beneficiaries) may be harmed.

 

The Separate Account discourages frequent transfers, purchases and redemptions. To discourage frequent Subaccount transfers, we adopted the policy described in the “Transfers Among the Subaccounts” section. This policy requires owners who request more than 12 Subaccount transfers in a calendar year to submit such requests in writing by U.S. Mail or by overnight delivery service (the “U.S. Mail requirement”). The U.S. Mail requirement creates a delay of at least one day between the time transfer decisions are made and the time such transfers are processed. This delay is intended to discourage frequent Subaccount transfers by limiting the effectiveness of abusive “market timing” strategies (in particular, “time-zone” arbitrage) that rely on “same-day” processing of transfer requests.

 

In addition, we will not honor transfer requests if any Subaccount that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or redeem shares of the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests or if the transfer would adversely affect Accumulation Unit values. Whether these restrictions apply is determined by the affected Portfolio(s), and although we apply the restrictions uniformly when we receive information from the Portfolio(s), we cannot guarantee that the Portfolio(s) will apply their policies and procedures in a uniform basis.

 

There can be no assurance that the U.S. Mail requirement will be effective in limiting frequent Subaccount transfers or that we can prevent all frequent Subaccount transfer activity that may

 

59


Table of Contents

adversely affect owners, other persons with material rights under the contract, or Portfolio shareholders generally. For instance, imposing the U.S. Mail requirement after 12 Subaccount transfers may not be restrictive enough to deter an owner seeking to engage in abusing market timing strategies.

 

We may revise our frequent Subaccount transfer policy and related procedures, at our sole discretion, at any time and without prior notice, as we deem necessary or appropriate to better detect and deter frequent transfer activity that may adversely affect owners, other persons with material rights under the Policies, or Portfolio shareholders generally, to comply with state or federal regulatory requirements, or to impose additional or alternative restrictions on owners engaging in frequent Subaccount transfers. For example, we may invoke our right to refuse transfers if the transfer involves the same Subaccount within a 30 day period and/or we may change our procedures to monitor for a different number of transfers within a specified time period or to impose a minimum time period between each transfer.

 

There are inherent risks that changing our policies and procedures in the future may not be effective in limiting frequent Subaccount transfers. We will not implement any policy and procedure at the contract level that discriminates among owners, however, we may be compelled to adopt policies and procedures adopted by the Portfolios on behalf of the Portfolios and we will do so unless we cannot service such policies and procedures or we believe such policies and procedures contradict state or federal regulations or such policies and procedures contradict with the terms of your contract.

 

As stated in the previous paragraph, each of the Portfolios in which the Subaccounts invest may have its own policies and procedures with respect to frequent purchases and redemption of Portfolio shares. The prospectuses for the Portfolios describe any such policies and procedures. For example, a Portfolio may assess redemption fees (which we reserve the right to collect) on shares held for a relatively short period of time. The frequent trading policies and procedures of a Portfolio may be different, and more or less restrictive, than the frequent trading policies and procedures of other Portfolios and the policies and procedures we have adopted to discourage frequent Subaccount transfers. Owners should be aware that we may not have the operational capability to monitor owners’ Subaccount transfer requests and apply the frequent trading policies and procedures of the respective Portfolios that would be affected by the transfers. Accordingly, owners and other persons who have material rights under the contracts should assume that the sole protection they may have against potential harm from frequent Subaccount transfers is the protection, if any, provided by the policies and procedures we have adopted to discourage frequent Subaccount transfers.

 

Under SEC rules, we are required to enter into a written agreement with each Portfolio or its principal underwriter that will obligate us to provide promptly, upon request by the Portfolio, certain information to the Portfolio about the trading activity of individual contract owners. Under these circumstances, we may be required to provide your tax identification number or social security number to the Fund and/or its manager. We must then execute any instructions from the Portfolio to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers by a specific contract owner of Accumulation Units or Annuity Units of the Subaccount that invests in that Portfolio, where such contract owner has been identified by the Portfolio as having engaged in transactions (indirectly through such Subaccount) that violate policies established for that Portfolio for the purpose of eliminating or reducing any dilution of the value of the outstanding shares of the Portfolio. We will inform any contract owners whose future purchases and transfers of a Subaccount’s units have been restricted or prohibited by a Portfolio.

 

Owners and other persons with material rights under the contracts also should be aware that the purchase and redemption orders received by the Portfolios generally are “omnibus” orders from intermediaries such as broker-dealers, retirement plans or separate accounts funding variable insurance contracts. These omnibus orders reflect the aggregation and netting of multiple orders from individual retirement plan participants and/or individual owners of variable insurance contracts. The omnibus nature of these orders may limit the Portfolios’ ability to apply their respective frequent trading policies and procedures. We cannot guarantee that the Portfolios will not be harmed by transfer activity relating to the retirement plans and/or other insurance companies that may invest in the Portfolios. In addition, if a Portfolio believes an omnibus order we submit may reflect one or more Subaccount transfer requests from owners engaged in frequent transfer activity, the Portfolio may reject a portion of or the entire omnibus order. If a Portfolio rejects part of an omnibus order it believes is attributable to transfers that exceed its market timing policies and procedures, it will return the amount to us and we will credit the amount to the contract owner as of the Valuation Day of our receipt of that amount. You may realize a loss if the unit value on the Valuation Day we credit the amount back to your account has increased since the original date of your transfer.

 

We apply our policies and procedures without exception, waiver, or special arrangement.

 

60


Table of Contents

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

 

The Dollar Cost Averaging program permits you to systematically transfer on a monthly or quarterly basis a set dollar amount from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or the Guarantee Account (if available) to any combination of other available Subaccounts (as long as the total number of Subaccounts used does not exceed the maximum number allowed under the contract). The Dollar Cost Averaging method of investment is designed to reduce the risk of making purchases only when the price of units is high, but you should carefully consider your financial ability to continue the program over a long enough period of time to purchase Accumulation Units when their value is low as well as when it is high. Dollar Cost Averaging does not assure a profit or protect against a loss.

 

You may participate in the Dollar Cost Averaging program by:

 

  (1)   electing it on your application; or

 

  (2)   contacting an authorized sales representative; or

 

  (3)   contacting us at (800) 352-9910.

 

To use the program, you must transfer at least $100 from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or interest rate guarantee period with each transfer.

 

The Dollar Cost Averaging program will begin 30 days after we receive all required forms with your instructions and any necessary premium payment unless we allow an earlier date. We will discontinue your participation in the Dollar Cost Averaging program:

 

    on the business day we receive your request to discontinue the program in writing or by telephone (assuming we have your telephone authorization form on file); or

 

    when the assets of the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust —  Government Money Market Fund and/or interest rate guarantee period from which transfers are being made are depleted.

 

If you Dollar Cost Average from the Guarantee Account, we reserve the right to determine the amount of each automatic transfer. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the availability of the Guarantee Account under your contract. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining portion of an allocation used for Dollar Cost Averaging to a new guarantee period upon termination of the Dollar Cost Averaging program for that allocation. You may not transfer from one interest rate guarantee period to another interest rate guarantee period.

 

We also reserve the right to credit a higher rate of interest on premium payments allocated to the Guarantee Account that participate in the Dollar Cost Averaging program. We refer to this higher rate of interest as Enhanced Dollar Cost Averaging. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the availability of the Dollar Cost Averaging program or the Enhanced Dollar Cost Averaging program under your contract. If you terminate the Dollar Cost Averaging program prior to the depletion of assets from the Guarantee Account, we have the right to credit the remaining assets in the Guarantee Account the current interest rate being credited to all other Guarantee Account assets not participating in the Enhanced Dollar Cost Averaging program as of that Valuation Day. In addition, for contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, if you terminate your Dollar Cost Averaging program prior to the depletion of assets in the Guarantee Account, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. If we exercise this right, we guarantee the amount limited will be the same as the amount limited for those contracts not participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program as of the date you terminate your Dollar Cost Averaging program.

 

There is no additional charge for Dollar Cost Averaging. A transfer under this program is not a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or calculating the maximum number of transfers we may allow in a calendar year via the Internet, telephone or facsimile.

 

We may, from time to time, offer various Dollar Cost Averaging programs. We reserve the right to discontinue new Dollar Cost Averaging programs or to modify such programs at any time and for any reason. We also reserve the right to prohibit simultaneous participation in the Dollar Cost Averaging program and Systematic Withdrawal program.

 

Dollar Cost Averaging is not available if you have elected Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders and you are allocating assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy. If you have elected Lifetime Income Plus 2008, Lifetime Income Plus Solution or Payment Optimizer Plus, you can, however, participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, as described below.

 

Owners considering participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program should call (800) 352-9910 to verify the availability of Dollar Cost Averaging.

 

Defined Dollar Cost Averaging Program

 

The Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program permits you to systematically transfer a fixed dollar amount on a monthly basis

 

61


Table of Contents

for twelve months from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to an Asset Allocation Model or, if you have elected Lifetime Income Plus 2008, Lifetime Income Plus Solution or Payment Optimizer Plus, from the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to one of the other available Investment Strategy options. The Dollar Cost Averaging method of investment is designed to reduce the risk of making purchases only when the price of units is high, but you should carefully consider your financial ability to continue the program over a long enough period of time to purchase Accumulation Units when their value is low as well as when it is high. Dollar Cost Averaging does not assure a profit or protect against a loss.

 

You may participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program only if you elect it when you apply for the contract. To use the program, you must transfer at least $100 from the Subaccount (or Designated Subaccount) investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund. If elected at application, the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program will begin 30 days after the Contract Date. You may accelerate the amount you transfer. You may also terminate the program at any time.

 

We will discontinue your participation in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program at the first instance of one of the following events:

 

  (1)   on the business day we receive your request to discontinue the program in writing or by telephone (assuming we have your telephone authorization form on file);

 

  (2)   when the assets in the Subaccount (or Designated Subaccount) investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund are depleted; or

 

  (3)   at the end of the twelfth month following the Contract Date.

 

Upon termination of the program, any remaining assets in the Subaccount (or Designated Subaccount) investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund will be transferred to the specified Asset Allocation Model or Investment Strategy option.

 

There is no additional charge to participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program. A transfer under this program is not a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or for calculating the maximum number of transfers we may allow in a calendar year. Any withdrawals taken from your contract while the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program is in effect will be applied on a pro rata basis from all investments, including the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund. If you request a withdrawal from a specific Portfolio, however, we will terminate your Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program and treat the transfer as a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or for calculating the maximum number of transfers we may allow in a calendar year.

 

We reserve the right to discontinue the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program or to modify the program at any time and for any reason.

 

Portfolio Rebalancing Program

 

Once your premium payment has been allocated among the Subaccounts, the performance of each Subaccount may cause your allocation to shift. You may instruct us to automatically rebalance on a quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis your assets among the Subaccounts to return to the percentages specified in your allocation instructions. Your percentage allocations must be in whole percentages. The program does not include allocations to the Guarantee Account. You may elect to participate in the Portfolio Rebalancing program at any time by submitting the completed Portfolio Rebalancing form to our Home Office. You may not participate in the Portfolio Rebalancing program if you have elected Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders and you are allocating assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy.

 

Subsequent changes to your percentage allocations may be made at any time by written or telephone instructions to the Home Office. Once elected, Portfolio Rebalancing remains in effect from the date we receive your written request until you instruct us to discontinue Portfolio Rebalancing. There is no additional charge for using Portfolio Rebalancing, and we do not consider a Portfolio Rebalancing transfer a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or calculating the maximum number of transfers permitted in a calendar year via the Internet, telephone or facsimile. We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the Portfolio Rebalancing program at any time and for any reason. We also reserve the right to exclude specific Subaccounts from Portfolio Rebalancing. We will discontinue your participation in Portfolio Rebalancing if:

 

    you elected Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders at the time of application; and

 

    you reset your benefit by reallocating assets in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy following a period of allocating assets outside of the prescribed Investment Strategy.

 

62


Table of Contents

We will discontinue your participation as of the Valuation Day the reset occurs. Portfolio Rebalancing does not guarantee a profit or protect against a loss.

 

Guarantee Account Interest Sweep Program

 

You may instruct us to transfer interest earned on your assets in the Guarantee Account (if available) to the Subaccounts to which you are allocating premium payments, in accordance with your allocation instructions in effect on the date of the transfer any time before the Maturity Date. You must specify the frequency of the transfers (either monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually).

 

The minimum amount in the Guarantee Account required to elect this option is $1,000, but may be reduced at our discretion. The transfers under this program will take place on the last calendar day of each period.

 

You may participate in the interest sweep program at the same time you participate in either the Dollar Cost Averaging program or the Portfolio Rebalancing program. If any interest sweep transfer is scheduled for the same day as a Portfolio Rebalancing transfer, we will process the interest sweep transfer first.

 

We limit the amount you may transfer from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts for any particular allocation. See the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus. We will not process an interest sweep transfer if that transfer would exceed the amount permitted to be transferred.

 

You may cancel your participation in the interest sweep program at any time by writing or calling our Home Office at the address or telephone number listed on page 1 of this prospectus. We will automatically cancel your participation in the program if your assets in the Guarantee Account are less than $1,000 or such lower amount as we may determine. There is no additional charge for the interest sweep program. We do not consider interest sweep transfers a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or for calculating the maximum number of transfers permitted in a calendar year. The interest sweep program does not assure a profit or protect against a loss.

 

SURRENDERS AND PARTIAL SURRENDERS

 

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders

 

We will allow you to surrender your contract or to partially surrender a portion of your Contract Value at any time before the Maturity Date upon your written request, subject to the conditions discussed below.

 

We will not permit a partial surrender that is less than $100 or a partial surrender which would reduce your Contract Value to less than $1,000. If your partial surrender request would reduce your Contract Value to less than $1,000, we will surrender your contract in full. Other restrictions may apply to Qualified Contracts.

 

The amount payable on surrender of the contract is the Surrender Value at the end of the Valuation Period during which we receive the request. The Surrender Value equals:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value (after deduction of any charge for the optional rider(s) and the annual contract charge, if applicable) on the Valuation Day we receive a request for surrender; less

 

  (2)   any applicable surrender charge; less

 

  (3)   any applicable premium tax.

 

We may pay the Surrender Value in a lump sum or under one of the Optional Payment Plans specified in the contract, based on your instructions.

 

If you are taking a partial surrender, you may indicate in writing, electronically, or by calling our Home Office, from which Subaccounts or interest rate guarantee periods we are to take your partial surrender. If you do not so specify, we will deduct the amount of the partial surrender first from the Subaccounts (excluding the GIS Subaccount(s) if Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected at the time of application) on a pro rata basis in proportion to your assets allocated to the Separate Account. If you elect the Payment Optimizer Plus or one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders and take a partial surrender, we will rebalance Contract Value to the Subaccounts in accordance with the allocation of Contract Value in effect prior to the partial surrender, unless you instruct us otherwise. If, after a partial surrender and such instructions, your Contract Value is not allocated in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy, the benefit you receive under the rider may be reduced. Contract owners that own Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution must always allocate assets in accordance with the Investment Strategy. We will deduct any remaining amount from the Guarantee Account. We will take deductions from the Guarantee Account from the amounts (including any interest credited to such amounts) which have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time. If Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected at the time of application, partial surrenders will then be deducted from the GIS Subaccount(s) from the segment that has been in effect for the shortest period of time.

 

A Portfolio may impose a redemption charge. The charge is retained by or paid to the Portfolio. The charge is not retained by or paid to us. The redemption charge may affect the number and/or value of Accumulation Units withdrawn from the

 

63


Table of Contents

Subaccount that invests in that Portfolio and may affect Contract Value. When taking a partial surrender, any applicable surrender charges and/or applicable premium tax will be taken from the amount surrendered, unless otherwise requested.

 

We will delay making a payment if:

 

  (1)   the disposal or valuation of the Separate Account’s assets is not reasonably practicable because the New York Stock Exchange is closed;

 

  (2)   on nationally recognized holidays, trading is restricted by the New York Stock Exchange;

 

  (3)   an emergency exists making the disposal or valuation of securities held in the Separate Account impracticable; or

 

  (4)   the SEC by order permits postponement of payment to protect our owners.

 

Rules and regulations of the SEC will govern as to when the conditions described in (3) and (4) above exist. If we are closed on days when the New York Stock Exchange is open, Contract Value may be affected since owners will not have access to their account.

 

For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, partial surrenders from the Subaccounts may further reduce or restrict the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account (see the “Guarantee Account” provision of this prospectus).

 

Please remember that partial surrenders (including partial withdrawals taken pursuant to the terms of Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution) will reduce your death benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and applicable premium tax) reduces your Contract Value. See the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus.

 

Partial surrenders and surrenders may also be subject to income tax and, if taken prior to age 5912, an additional 10% penalty tax. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus.

 

Restrictions on Distributions from Certain Contracts

 

Under Code Section 403(b) tax sheltered annuities, distributions of (1) salary reduction contributions made in years beginning after December 31, 1988; (2) earnings on those contributions; and (3) earnings on amounts held as of the last year beginning before January 1, 1989, are not allowed prior to age 5912, severance from employment, death or disability. Salary reduction contributions (and, effective for plan years beginning in January 1, 2024, qualified nonelective contributions, qualified matching contributions, and earnings attributable to such amounts) may also be distributed upon hardship, but would generally be subject to penalties. For contracts issued after 2008, amounts attributable to nonelective contributions may be subject to distribution restrictions specified in the employer’s Section 403(b) plan.

 

If your contract was issued pursuant to a 403(b) plan, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance. We will defer such payments you request until all information required under the tax law has been received. By requesting a surrender or transfer, you consent to the sharing of confidential information about you, the contract, and transactions under the contract and any other 403(b) contracts or accounts you have under the 403(b) plan among us, your employer or plan sponsor, any plan administrator or recordkeeper, and other product providers.

 

Section 830.105 of the Texas Government Code permits participants in the Texas Optional Retirement Program to surrender their interest in a variable annuity contract issued under the Texas Optional Retirement Program only upon:

 

  (1)   termination of employment in the Texas public institutions of higher education;

 

  (2)   retirement;

 

  (3)   death; or

 

  (4)   the participant’s attainment of age 7012.

 

If your contract is issued to a Texas Optional Retirement Program, you must furnish us proof that one of these four events has occurred before we distribute any amounts from your contract.

 

Systematic Withdrawal Program

 

The Systematic Withdrawal program allows you to take Systematic Withdrawals of a specified amount (in equal installments of at least $100) on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis. Your payments can begin at any time after 30 days from the date your contract is issued (unless we allow an earlier date). To participate in the program, your Contract Value initially must be at least $10,000 and you must submit a completed Systematic Withdrawal form to our Home Office. You can obtain the form from our Home Office.

 

Your Systematic Withdrawals in a contract year may not exceed the amount which is not subject to a surrender charge. See the “Surrender Charge” provision of this prospectus. We will

 

64


Table of Contents

deduct the Systematic Withdrawal amounts first from any gain in the contract and then from premiums paid. You may provide specific instructions as to which Subaccounts (excluding the GIS Subaccount(s) if Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected at the time of application) and/or interest rate guarantee periods from which we are to take Systematic Withdrawals. If you have not provided specific instructions, or if your specific instructions cannot be carried out, we will process the withdrawals by cancelling Accumulation Units on a pro-rata basis from all of the Subaccounts (excluding the GIS Subaccount(s) of Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected at the time of application) in which you have an interest. To the extent that your assets in the Separate Account are not sufficient to accomplish this withdrawal, we will take the remaining amount of the withdrawal from any assets you have in the Guarantee Account. We will take deductions from the Guarantee Account from the amounts (including any interest credited to such amounts) that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time. If Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected at the time of application, any remaining amounts will be taken from the GIS Subaccount(s) from the segment that has been in effect for the shortest period of time.

 

After your Systematic Withdrawals begin, you may change the frequency and/or amount of your payments, subject to the following:

 

    you may request only one such change in a calendar quarter; and

 

    if you did not elect the maximum amount you could withdraw under this program at the time you elected the current series of Systematic Withdrawals, then you may increase the remaining payments up to the maximum amount.

 

A Systematic Withdrawal program will terminate automatically when a Systematic Withdrawal would cause the remaining Contract Value to be less than $1,000. If a Systematic Withdrawal would cause the Contract Value to be less than $1,000, then we will not process that Systematic Withdrawal transaction. If any of your Systematic Withdrawals would be or become less than $100, we reserve the right to reduce the frequency of payments to an interval that would result in each payment being at least $100. You may discontinue Systematic Withdrawals at any time by notifying us in writing at our Home Office or by telephone. You may request that we pay any remaining payments in a lump sum. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus.

 

Each Systematic Withdrawal is subject to Federal income taxes on any portion considered gain for tax purposes. In addition, you may be assessed a 10% IRS penalty tax on Systematic Withdrawals if you are under age 5912 at the time of the withdrawal.

 

Both partial surrenders at your specific request and partial surrenders under a Systematic Withdrawal program will count toward the limit of the free amount that you may surrender in any contract year under the free withdrawal privilege. See the “Surrender Charge” provision of this prospectus. Partial surrenders under a Systematic Withdrawal program may also reduce your death benefit. See the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus. Your Systematic Withdrawal amount could be affected if you take an additional partial surrender.

 

For contracts issued on or after September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, taking Systematic Withdrawals from the Subaccounts may further reduce or restrict the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. See the “Guarantee Account” provision of this prospectus.

 

If you elect Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007 or Lifetime Income Plus 2008, surrenders and partial surrenders under a Systematic Withdrawal program may reduce the amount of the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit you are eligible to receive under the terms of the rider. See the “Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders” provision below.

 

There is no charge for participation in the Systematic Withdrawal program, however, we reserve the right to prohibit participation in Systematic Withdrawal and Dollar Cost Averaging programs at the same time. We also reserve the right to discontinue and/or modify the Systematic Withdrawal program upon 30 days written notice to owners.

 

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders

 

We designed the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders to protect you from outliving your Contract Value by providing for a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit that is not affected by the market performance of the Subaccounts in which your assets are allocated. Prior to the Maturity Date, if you meet the conditions of the respective rider, as discussed more fully below, you will be eligible to make these guaranteed withdrawals for the life of your contract. These Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders are discussed in separate sections below.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, none of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders are available to purchase under the contract.

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution provides guaranteed withdrawals for the life of the Annuitant(s), with upside

 

65


Table of Contents

potential, provided you meet certain conditions. First, you must allocate all premium payments and Contract Value to the prescribed Investment Strategy. You must also limit total Gross Withdrawals in each Benefit Year to an amount no greater than the Withdrawal Limit. Then, you will be eligible to receive total Gross Withdrawals in each Benefit Year equal to the Withdrawal Limit until the last death of an Annuitant.

 

You may purchase Lifetime Income Plus Solution with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit. The Principal Protection Death Benefit is a feature available only with Lifetime Income Plus Solution. It cannot be elected separately from Lifetime Income Plus Solution. We assess a charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided by the rider. If you purchase Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, a charge will be assessed for the Principal Protection Death Benefit that is in addition to the charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit under the rider.

 

The guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided under the rider may be reduced or lost based on the withdrawals you take from the contract. For example, your guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit will be reduced if you take excess withdrawals in a Benefit Year. See the “Impact of Withdrawals” provision below. You will also lose the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract or if you elect to terminate the rider on any contract anniversary on or after the fifth contract anniversary. In addition, you will no longer receive lifetime payments of your guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if (i)(a) after a withdrawal, your Contract Value is less than the amount required to keep your contract in effect or (b) your Contract Value is reduced to $100 and (ii) your Withdrawal Limit is less than $100. Instead, you could receive, at least, a lump sum equal to the present value of future lifetime payments in the amount of the Withdrawal Limit.

 

The Principal Protection Death Benefit provided under the rider, if elected, will be reduced and may be lost based on withdrawals you take from the contract. You will also lose the Principal Protection Death Benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract or if you elect to terminate the rider.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Lifetime Income Plus Solution and the Principal Protection Death Benefit are no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

References to Lifetime Income Plus Solution include a rider issued with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit, as applicable, unless stated otherwise.

 

Effective May 1, 2014, you may request to terminate this rider (without terminating the contract) on any business day.

 

Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus Solution. In order to receive the full benefit provided by Lifetime Income Plus Solution, you must invest all premium payments and allocations in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy.

 

Investment Strategies may change from time to time. You may allocate your assets in accordance with your Investment Strategy prescribed at the time the contract was issued, or in accordance with the Investment Strategy in effect at the time you reset your benefit. Therefore, you may have assets allocated to an Investment Strategy that is different than the Investment Strategy described in this prospectus. Your ability to choose different Investment Strategies is limited, as described below.

 

The Investment Strategy includes Designated Subaccounts and five of the Asset Allocation Models (Asset Allocation Models A, B, C and D and the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model). Under this Investment Strategy, contract owners may allocate assets to either one of the four available Asset Allocation Models or to one or more Designated Subaccounts or to the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model. Contract owners, however, may elect to participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, which permits the owner to systematically transfer a fixed dollar amount on a monthly basis for twelve months from the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to one of the available Investment Strategy options. The Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund is only available as part of the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program. For more information about the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, the Asset Allocation Models and the Subaccounts comprising each of the Asset Allocation Models and the Designated Subaccounts, please see the “Defined Dollar Cost Averaging Program,” “Subaccounts” and “Asset Allocation Program” provisions of this prospectus.

 

On a monthly basis, we will rebalance your Contract Value to the Subaccounts in accordance with the percentages that you have chosen to invest in the Designated Subaccounts or the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model or in accordance with the allocations that comprise the applicable Asset Allocation Model. In addition, we will also rebalance your Contract Value on any Valuation Day after any transaction involving a withdrawal, receipt of a premium payment or a transfer of Contract Value, unless you instruct us otherwise. If you are participating in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, rebalancing will not affect the assets allocated to the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund. Your allocation instructions must always comply with the Investment Strategy.

 

66


Table of Contents

Shares of a Portfolio may become unavailable under the contract for new premium payments, transfers and asset rebalancing. As a result, shares of a Portfolio may also become unavailable under your Investment Strategy. Investment Strategies may be modified to respond to such events by removing unavailable Portfolios and adding new Portfolios as appropriate. Because such changes may affect your allocation instructions, you will need to provide updated allocation instructions to comply with the modified Investment Strategy. If you do not provide updated allocation instructions, any subsequent premium payments or transfers requesting payment to an unavailable Portfolio will be considered not in good order. Assets will remain invested as allocated at the time the Portfolio became unavailable, except in a situation where the affected Portfolio is removed. In that case, the assets that were invested in the removed Portfolio will be invested in a new Portfolio consistent with SEC precedent (appropriate no-action relief, substitution order, etc.), unless you are invested in the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model. If you are invested in the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model, all of the assets you have invested in the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model will be moved from the Model to Asset Allocation Model C. Your assets will remain in Asset Allocation Model C, and any subsequent premium payments or transfer requests will be applied accordingly. You will need to provide us with updated allocation instructions if you want to invest in the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model or another available Investment Strategy option.

 

Periodic rebalancing to unavailable Portfolios will cease until we receive updated allocation instructions that comply with the modified Investment Strategy.

 

The current Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus Solution is as follows:

 

  (1)   owners may allocate assets to the following Designated Subaccounts:

 

AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. — AB VPS Balanced Hedged Allocation Portfolio — Class B;

 

AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) — Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series II shares;

 

BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. — BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund — Class III Shares;

 

Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund — VIP Balanced Portfolio — Service Class 2;

 

Janus Aspen Series — Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Service Shares;

 

MFS® Variable Insurance Trust — MFS® Total Return Series — Service Class Shares; and/or

 

State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 3 Shares;

 

OR

 

  (2)   owners may allocate assets to Asset Allocation Model A, B, C or D;

 

OR

 

  (3)   owners may allocate assets to the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model.

 

Contract owners may elect to participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program when they apply for the contract. Defined Dollar Cost Averaging permits the owner to systematically transfer a fixed dollar amount on a monthly basis for twelve months from the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to one of the available Investment Strategy options. The Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund is only available as part of the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program.

 

Withdrawal Limit. The Withdrawal Limit is calculated on each Valuation Day. The Withdrawal Limit is the benefit base multiplied by the Withdrawal Factor. The Withdrawal Factor percentages will be provided in your contract.

 

The Withdrawal Factor is based on the age of the younger Annuitant. The Withdrawal Factor will be fixed on the earlier of the Valuation Day of the first withdrawal and the Valuation Day when the Contract Value is reduced to $100.

 

Benefit Base. The benefit base is an amount used to establish the Withdrawal Limit. The benefit base on the Contract Date is equal to the initial premium payment. On each Valuation Day, the benefit base is the greatest of the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, the Roll-Up Value and the Maximum Anniversary Value. The benefit base may change as a result of a premium payment, withdrawal, or reset as described below.

 

Premium Payments. Any premium payment applied to your contract will adjust your Purchase Payment Benefit Amount and Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), and may adjust your Roll-Up Value as described in the “Roll-Up Value” provision below. Please note that Bonus Credits are not considered “premium payments” for purposes of the contract and this rider. Therefore any applicable Bonus Credits will not be included as a premium payment when calculating the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Roll-Up Value, Maximum Anniversary Value or Principal Protection Death Benefit. You will have to reset your Maximum Anniversary Value to capture the Bonus Credit or any related earnings, since the Bonus Credit and any related earnings will be reflected in the Contract Value.

 

67


Table of Contents

You must allocate all premium payments and Contract Value to the Investment Strategy at all times.

 

We reserve the right to not adjust the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), and/or the Roll-Up Value for any subsequent premium payments. Please see the “Important Note” provision below.

 

Purchase Payment Benefit Amount. The Purchase Payment Benefit Amount will equal your premium payments unless adjusted as described in this provision.

 

If no withdrawals are taken prior to the later of the tenth anniversary of the Contract Date and the date the older Annuitant turns age 65, your Purchase Payment Benefit Amount will equal the sum of (a) plus (b), where:

 

  (a)   is 200% of premium payments made in the first contract year; and

 

  (b)   is premium payments received after the first contract year.

 

On any Valuation Day you make a Gross Withdrawal, if that Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals within that Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Purchase Payments Benefit Amount will be reduced on a pro-rata basis by the excess amount as described in the “Impact of Withdrawals” provision below.

 

Roll-Up Value. Your Roll-Up Value on the Contract Date is equal to the amount of your initial premium payment. We will increase your Roll-Up Value on each day. The new Roll-Up Value is equal to the sum of (a) and (b), multiplied by (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the Roll-Up Value on the prior day;

 

  (b)   is any premium payment(s) made on the prior Valuation Day; and

 

  (c)   is the daily roll-up factor, as shown in your contract.

 

On each contract anniversary, if the Maximum Anniversary Value is greater than the current Roll-Up Value, the Roll-Up Value will be increased to the Maximum Anniversary Value. If this day is not a Valuation Day, this adjustment will occur on the next Valuation Day. The Roll-Up Value will continue to increase until the date of the first withdrawal or the later of the tenth anniversary of the Contract Date and the date the older Annuitant turns age 65. The Roll-Up Value will not increase after this date.

 

On any Valuation Day you make a Gross Withdrawal, if that Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals within that Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Roll-Up Value will be reduced on a pro-rata basis by the excess amount as described in the “Impact of Withdrawals” provision below. The Roll-Up Value will not increase after this date.

 

Maximum Anniversary Value and Reset. The Maximum Anniversary Value on the Contract Date is equal to the initial premium payment. On each contract anniversary, if the Contract Value is greater than the current Maximum Anniversary Value, the Maximum Anniversary Value will be increased to the Contract Value. If this day is not a Valuation Day, this reset will occur on the next Valuation Day.

 

On any Valuation Day you make a Gross Withdrawal, if that Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals within that Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Maximum Anniversary Value will be reduced on a pro-rata basis by the excess amount as described in the “Impact of Withdrawals” provision below.

 

On the Valuation Day we reset your Maximum Anniversary Value, we will reset the Investment Strategy to the current Investment Strategy and reset the charges for this rider. Effective on and after December 3, 2012, the charge for Lifetime Income Plus Solution increased, on an annual basis, to 1.25% upon reset of the Maximum Anniversary Value. The rider charge increase applies to both single and joint annuitant contracts regardless of the date the contract was issued. If you are potentially impacted, you will receive written notice in advance of your contract anniversary informing you of your options as well as a discussion of certain circumstances in which a reset would not be in your best interest. If your rider is scheduled to automatically reset, you will have the opportunity to opt-out of the automatic reset and resulting rider charge increase. If you have to request a manual reset, you will have the opportunity to reset and, if you reset, incur the higher rider charge. We reserve the right to discontinue sending written notice of the potential impact of a reset after we send you the first notice.

 

As noted, if there is an automatic reset, your Maximum Anniversary Value will be increased to your Contract Value. However, the Maximum Anniversary Value is just one element used to determine your Benefit Base which is in turn used to calculate your Withdrawal Limit. The Benefit Base is the greatest of the Maximum Anniversary Value, Purchase Payment Benefit Amount and the Roll-Up Value. If your Maximum Anniversary Value resets but your Roll-Up Value or Purchase Payment Benefit Amount is higher than your Maximum Anniversary Value on the date of reset, the Roll-Up Value or Purchase Payment Benefit Amount will be used to determine your Benefit Base, but you will be assessed a rider charge of 1.25% because of the reset of the Maximum Anniversary Value. In this circumstance, if your rider fee was less than 1.25% before the reset, you will pay a higher rider fee for a benefit that you would have received even without the reset.

 

68


Table of Contents

For Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit, the new charges, which may be higher than your previous charges, will never exceed 2.00% of the benefit base. For Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, the new charges, which may be higher than your previous charges, will never exceed 2.00% of the benefit base plus 0.50% of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit. Resets will occur automatically unless such automatic resets are or have been terminated.

 

Any change to the charges or to the required Investment Strategy for this rider will be communicated to you in writing prior to the contract anniversary date. Upon reset, these changes will apply. The reset provision is not available on or after the latest permitted Maturity Date.

 

Automatic resets will continue until and unless:

 

  (a)   the owner (or owners) submits a written request to our Home Office to terminate automatic resets (such a request must be received at least 15 days prior to the contract anniversary date);

 

  (b)   the Investment Strategy changes, allocations are affected, and we do not receive confirmation of new allocations from you at our Home Office;

 

  (c)   income payments begin via annuitization; or

 

  (d)   ownership of the contract changes.

 

If automatic resets have terminated, you may later reinstate automatic resets for any future contract anniversary by submitting a written request to do so; provided you are following the Investment Strategy and income payments have not begun.

 

Please note that an automatic reset will occur on a contract anniversary if Contract Value is even nominally higher than the Maximum Anniversary Value (e.g., as little as $1.00 or even $0.01 higher) and, therefore, an automatic reset may not be in your best interest because: (i) the charges for this rider may be higher than your previous charges and (ii) the Investment Strategy will be reset to the current Investment Strategy (the Investment Strategy offered on the reset date). Please carefully consider the impact of automatic resets when you elect Lifetime Income Plus Solution and while the rider is in effect. As indicated above, you may terminate the automatic reset feature of the rider at any time by submitting a written request to us at our Home Office at least 15 days prior to the contract anniversary date.

 

Important Note.We reserve the right to not adjust the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), and/or Roll-Up Value for any subsequent premium payments received. As a result, it is possible that you would not be able to make subsequent premium payments after the initial premium payment to take advantage of the benefits provided by Lifetime Income Plus Solution that would be associated with such additional premium payments. Before making premium payments that do not increase the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) or Roll-Up Value, you should consider that: (i) the guaranteed amounts provided by the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) and Roll-Up Value will not include such premium payments or Bonus Credits; and (ii) this rider may not make sense for you if you intend to make subsequent premium payments that will not increase the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) and Roll-Up Value.

 

Impact of Withdrawals. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals within a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), Roll-Up Value, and Maximum Anniversary Value will be recalculated to reflect a pro-rata reduction for each dollar that is in excess of your Withdrawal Limit. Your new Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), Roll-Up Value and Maximum Anniversary Value after such a withdrawal will be calculated by multiplying each of (a) by (b), divided by (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), Roll-Up Value and Maximum Anniversary Value before the Gross Withdrawal;

 

  (b)   is the Contract Value after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

  (c)   is the Contract Value before the Gross Withdrawal reduced by any remaining Withdrawal Limit.

 

For purposes of (c) above, “any remaining Withdrawal Limit” is the Gross Withdrawal that could have been taken without exceeding the Withdrawal Limit.

 

When requesting an excess withdrawal, we will attempt to contact you or your representative to confirm that you understand the implications of the excess withdrawal and would like to proceed with the request.

 

If the total Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year are less than or equal to the Withdrawal Limit, we will waive any surrender charge on the Gross Withdrawal.

 

The Withdrawal Limit will be increased for any Benefit Year to the extent necessary to meet any minimum distribution requirements based on life expectancy under federal tax law. This increase applies only to the required minimum distribution based on the Contract Value for the calendar year ending within the Benefit Year.

 

69


Table of Contents

You should carefully manage withdrawals because excess withdrawals will have adverse consequences on the benefits provided under Lifetime Income Plus Solution, particularly in down markets. Over the period of time during which you take withdrawals, there is the risk that you may need funds in excess of the Withdrawal Limit and, if you do not have other sources of income available, you may need to take (excess) withdrawals that will reduce your Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), Maximum Anniversary Value and Roll-Up Value (and, consequently, your Withdrawal Limit).

 

You also should carefully consider when to begin taking withdrawals if you elected Lifetime Income Plus Solution. The longer you wait before beginning to take withdrawals, the higher the Withdrawal Factor will be, which is one of the components used to determine the amount of your Withdrawal Limit. If you delay taking withdrawals too long, however, you may limit the number of years available for you to take withdrawals in the future (due to life expectancy) and you may be paying for a benefit you are not using.

 

Your Contract Value after taking a withdrawal may be less than the amount required to keep your contract in effect. In this event, or if your Contract Value is reduced to $100, the following will occur:

 

    If the Withdrawal Limit is less than $100, we will pay you the greatest of the following:

 

  (a)   the Contract Value;

 

  (b)   a lump sum equal to the present value of future lifetime payments in the amount of the Withdrawal Limit calculated using the 2000 Annuity Mortality Table and an interest rate of 3%; and

 

  (c)   the Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable).

 

    If the Withdrawal Limit is greater than or equal to $100, we will begin income payments. We will make payments of a fixed amount for the life of the Annuitant or, if there are Joint Annuitants, the last surviving Annuitant. The fixed amount payable annually will equal the most recently calculated Withdrawal Limit. We will make payments monthly or on another periodic basis agreed by us. If the monthly amount is less than $100, we will reduce the frequency so that the payment will be at least $100. The Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) will continue under this provision. The Principal Protection Death Benefit will be reduced by each payment. The Principal Protection Death Benefit, if any, will be payable on the death of the last surviving Annuitant.

 

Principal Protection Death Benefit. You may purchase Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit. The Principal Protection Death Benefit is a feature available only with Lifetime Income Plus Solution. It cannot be elected separately from Lifetime Income Plus Solution.

 

The Principal Protection Death Benefit is used to determine the death benefit, if any, payable under the contract and rider as described in the “Death Provisions” section below. The Principal Protection Death Benefit on the Contract Date is equal to the initial premium payment. Premium payments in a Benefit Year increase the Principal Protection Death Benefit. The Principal Protection Death Benefit, if any, will be payable on the death of the last surviving Annuitant.

 

Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year decrease the Principal Protection Death Benefit. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals within a Benefit Year is less than or equal to the Withdrawal Limit, the Principal Protection Death Benefit will be reduced by the Gross Withdrawal. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals within a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Principal Protection Death Benefit will be reduced on a pro-rata basis for each dollar that is in excess of your Withdrawal Limit, as described in the “Impact of Withdrawals” provision above.

 

At the death of the last surviving Annuitant, a death benefit may be payable under this contract and rider. The amount of any death benefit payable will be the greatest of (a), (b) and (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the death benefit as calculated under the base contract;

 

  (b)   is the Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable); and

 

  (c)   is any amount payable by any other optional death benefit rider (if applicable).

 

Death Provisions. At the death of any Annuitant, a death benefit may be payable under the contract. The death benefit payable, if any, will be paid according to the distribution rules under the contract.

 

If the designated beneficiary is a surviving spouse who is not an Annuitant, whose age is 45 through 85, and who elects to continue the contract as the new owner, this rider will continue. The Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), Roll-Up Value and Maximum Anniversary Value for the new owner will be the death benefit determined as of the first Valuation Day we receive at our Home Office due proof of death and all required forms. The

 

70


Table of Contents

Withdrawal Factor for the new owner will be based on the age of that owner on the date of the first Gross Withdrawal for that owner.

 

If the designated beneficiary is a surviving spouse who is an Annuitant and who elects to continue the contract as the owner, this rider will continue. The Purchase Payment Benefit Amount, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), Roll-Up Value and Maximum Anniversary Value will be the same as it was under the contract for the deceased owner. If no withdrawals were taken prior to the first Valuation Day we receive due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office, the Withdrawal Factor for the surviving spouse will be established based on the age of the surviving spouse on the date of the first Gross Withdrawal for the surviving spouse. Otherwise, the Withdrawal Factor will continue as it was under the contract for the deceased owner.

 

If the surviving spouse cannot continue the rider, the rider and the rider charges will terminate. The charges for this rider will be calculated, pro rata, and deducted.

 

Proceeds that were transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund upon the death of the owner will be reallocated to the Investment Strategy and the asset percentages then in effect at the time of the death of the owner. Such reallocations will not be counted as a transfer for the purpose of the number of transfers allowed under the contract in a calendar year.

 

Considerations. While the rider is designed to provide life-time withdrawal benefits, these benefits are only guaranteed to the extent you comply with the limits, conditions and restrictions set forth in the contract.

 

Rider Charge. We assess a charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided by the rider. The charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the benefit base, as defined and determined under the rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. Please note that, if your benefit base increases, the amount deducted from your Contract Value will increase.

 

If you purchase Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, a charge will be assessed for the Principal Protection Death Benefit that is in addition to the charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit under the rider. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit, as defined and determined under the rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. Please note that, if the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit increases through additional premium payments, the amount deducted from your Contract Value will increase. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is higher if any annuitant is age 71 or older at the time of application.

 

If you reset your benefits under the rider, we will reset the charges for the rider, which may be higher than your previous charges.

 

For contracts issued with Lifetime Income Plus Solution on or after January 5, 2009 and that have reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012, we currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above:

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit
    

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

    

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.20% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

    

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

For contracts issued with Lifetime Income Plus Solution on or after January 5, 2009 and that have not reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012, we currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above:

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit
    

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.95% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

    

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

0.95% of benefit base plus

0.20% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

    

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

0.95% of benefit base plus

0.50% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

For contracts issued with Lifetime Income Plus Solution before January 5, 2009 and that have reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012, we currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above:

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

     Single or Joint Annuitant Contract    1.25% of benefit base

 

71


Table of Contents

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

     Single or Joint Annuitant Contract   

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

     Single or Joint Annuitant Contract   

1.25% of benefit base plus

0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

For contracts issued with Lifetime Income Plus Solution before January 5, 2009 and that have not reset their Maximum Anniversary Value on or after December 3, 2012, we currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above:

 

Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.85% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit —
Annuitant Age 45-70

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

0.85% of benefit base plus

0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit —
Annuitant Age 71-85

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

  

0.85% of benefit base plus

0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

The charges for Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit will never exceed 2.00% of benefit base. The charges for Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit will never exceed 2.00% of benefit base plus 0.50% of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit.

 

On the day the rider and/or the contract terminates, the charges for this rider will be calculated, pro rata, and deducted.

 

Please note that you will begin paying the rider charge (including the applicable charge associated with the Principal Protection Death Benefit if you have elected that option) as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals under the rider for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider; nor will we refund charges if the Principal Protection Death Benefit feature under a contract does not pay out.

 

When the Rider is Effective

 

If available, Lifetime Income Plus Solution and the Principal Protection Death Benefit must be elected at application. The rider will remain in effect while the contract is in force and before the Maturity Date. Effective May 1, 2014, you may request to terminate this rider (without terminating the contract) on any business day. The rider will terminate on the first day of the next quarter as measured from the contract anniversary (i.e., not a calendar quarter). Rider charges will continue from the date of the request to terminate until the date of termination. On the day the rider and/or the contract terminates, the charges for this rider will be calculated, pro rata, and deducted. We are waiving the provision in the rider that limits the ability to terminate the rider to any contract anniversary on or after the fifth contract anniversary. Otherwise this rider and the corresponding charges will terminate on the Maturity Date. Please note that, upon termination of this rider, you will lose all of the benefits for which you are eligible under the rider, including any guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits provided by the rider.

 

At any time before the Maturity Date, you can elect to annuitize under current annuity rates in lieu of continuing Lifetime Income Plus Solution. This may provide a higher income amount and/or more favorable tax treatment than payments made under this rider.

 

Change of Ownership

 

We must approve any assignment or sale of this contract unless the assignment is a court ordered assignment.

 

General Provisions

 

For purposes of this rider:

 

    A non-natural entity owner must name an Annuitant and may name the Annuitant’s spouse as a Joint Annuitant.

 

    An individual owner must also be an Annuitant and may name his or her spouse as a Joint Annuitant at issue.

 

    A joint owner must be the owner’s spouse.

 

    If you marry after issue, you may add your spouse as a joint owner and Joint Annuitant or as a Joint Annuitant only, subject to our approval.

 

   

Under federal tax law, all contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for

 

72


Table of Contents
 

federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

 

Civil union partners are not permitted to continue the contract without taking required distributions upon the death of an owner. Therefore, even if named a joint owner/Joint Annuitant, a civil union partner will have to take required distributions upon the death of the other joint owner/Joint Annuitant. See the “Distribution Rules” provision of this prospectus. If this situation applies to you, you should consult a tax adviser.

 

73


Table of Contents

Examples

 

The following examples show how Lifetime Income Plus Solution works based on hypothetical values. The examples are for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to depict investment performance of the contract and, therefore, should not be relied upon in making a decision to invest in the rider or contract. The examples assume current rider charges for all periods shown. If an owner resets the benefits under the rider, we reset the charges for the rider, which may be higher than the previous charges. Higher rider charges would produce lower values in the examples.

 

This example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract with $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 55 at issue, waits until after reaching age 65 before taking a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases until age 65 and the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount after the owner turns age 65 equals $200,000 (200% of premium payments made in the first contract year);

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of -2% before rider charges are deducted; and

 

  (6)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Purchase
Payment
Benefit
Amount –
End of Year
    Maximum
Anniversary
Value –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  55     $ 105,000     $ 0     $ 101,613     $ 100,000     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 101,613  
  56       101,613       0       98,217       100,000       101,613       112,360       112,360       100,000  
  57       98,217       0       94,806       100,000       101,613       119,102       119,102       100,000  
  58       94,806       0       91,378       100,000       101,613       126,248       126,248       100,000  
  59       91,378       0       87,925       100,000       101,613       133,823       133,823       100,000  
  60       87,925       0       84,445       100,000       101,613       141,852       141,852       100,000  
  61       84,445       0       80,930       100,000       101,613       150,363       150,363       100,000  
  62       80,930       0       77,377       100,000       101,613       159,385       159,385       100,000  
  63       77,377       0       73,778       100,000       101,613       168,948       168,948       100,000  
  64       73,778       0       70,128       100,000       101,613       179,085       179,085       100,000  
  65       70,128       11,000       55,389       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       83,431  
  66       55,389       11,000       40,800       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       65,714  
  67       40,800       11,000       26,503       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       46,440  
  68       26,503       11,000       12,492       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       24,695  
  69       12,492       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  70       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  71       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  72       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  73       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  74       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  75       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  76       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  77       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  78       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  79       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  80       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  81       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  82       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  83       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  84       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  85       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  86       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  87       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  88       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  89       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  
  90       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,613       189,830       200,000       0  

 

74


Table of Contents

This example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract with $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 55 at issue, waits until after reaching age 65 before taking a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases until age 65 and the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount after the owner turns age 65 equals $200,000 (200% of premium payments made in the first contract year);

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of -2% before rider charges are deducted; and

 

  (6)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Purchase
Payment
Benefit
Amount –
End of Year
    Maximum
Anniversary
Value –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  55     $ 105,000     $ 0     $ 101,415     $ 100,000     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 101,415  
  56       101,415       0       97,824       100,000       101,415       112,360       112,360       100,000  
  57       97,824       0       94,223       100,000       101,415       119,102       119,102       100,000  
  58       94,223       0       90,607       100,000       101,415       126,248       126,248       100,000  
  59       90,607       0       86,972       100,000       101,415       133,823       133,823       100,000  
  60       86,972       0       83,312       100,000       101,415       141,852       141,852       100,000  
  61       83,312       0       79,622       100,000       101,415       150,363       150,363       100,000  
  62       79,622       0       75,896       100,000       101,415       159,385       159,385       100,000  
  63       75,896       0       72,128       100,000       101,415       168,948       168,948       100,000  
  64       72,128       0       68,313       100,000       101,415       179,085       179,085       100,000  
  65       68,313       11,000       53,412       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       89,000  
  66       53,412       11,000       38,686       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       78,000  
  67       38,686       11,000       24,276       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       67,000  
  68       24,276       11,000       10,176       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       56,000  
  69       10,176       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       45,000  
  70       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       34,000  
  71       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       23,000  
  72       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       12,000  
  73       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       1,000  
  74       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  75       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  76       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  77       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  78       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  79       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  80       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  81       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  82       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  83       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  84       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  85       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  86       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  87       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  88       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  89       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  
  90       0       11,000       0       200,000       101,415       189,830       200,000       0  

 

75


Table of Contents

This example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract with $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 52 at issue, waits until after reaching age 65 before taking a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases until age 65 and the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount after the owner turns age 65 equals $200,000 (200% of premium payments made in the first contract year);

 

  (5)   at age 70, the owner takes an excess withdrawal of $10,000;

 

  (6)   the contract earns a net return of 8% before rider charges are deducted; and

 

  (7)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –

End of Year

    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
   

Withdrawals
Taken –

End of Year

    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Purchase
Payment
Benefit
Amount –
End of Year
   

Maximum
Anniversary
Value –

End of Year

    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  52     $ 105,000     $ 0     $ 112,066     $ 100,000     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 112,066  
  53       112,066       0       119,536       100,000       112,066       118,790       118,790       119,536  
  54       119,536       0       127,503       100,000       119,536       126,708       126,708       127,503  
  55       127,503       0       136,002       100,000       127,503       135,154       135,154       136,002  
  56       136,002       0       145,068       100,000       136,002       144,163       144,163       145,068  
  57       145,068       0       154,738       100,000       145,068       153,772       153,772       154,738  
  58       154,738       0       165,052       100,000       154,738       164,022       164,022       165,052  
  59       165,052       0       176,054       100,000       165,052       174,955       174,955       176,054  
  60       176,054       0       187,789       100,000       176,054       186,617       186,617       187,789  
  61       187,789       0       200,306       100,000       187,789       199,056       199,056       200,306  
  62       200,306       0       213,658       100,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       213,658  
  63       213,658       0       227,900       100,000       213,658       226,477       226,477       227,900  
  64       227,900       0       243,091       100,000       227,900       241,574       241,574       243,091  
  65       243,091       14,172       245,122       200,000       243,091       257,676       257,676       245,122  
  66       245,122       14,172       247,244       200,000       245,122       257,676       257,676       247,244  
  67       247,244       14,172       249,535       200,000       247,244       257,676       257,676       249,535  
  68       249,535       14,172       252,009       200,000       249,535       257,676       257,676       252,009  
  69       252,009       14,172       254,682       200,000       252,009       257,676       257,676       254,682  
  70       254,682       24,172       247,568       200,000       254,682       257,676       257,676       247,568  
  71       247,568       13,622       250,565       192,235       244,794       247,672       247,672       250,565  
  72       250,565       13,781       256,829       192,235       250,565       247,672       250,565       256,829  
  73       256,829       14,126       263,249       192,235       256,829       247,672       256,829       263,249  
  74       263,249       14,479       269,831       192,235       263,249       247,672       263,249       269,831  
  75       269,831       14,841       276,576       192,235       269,831       247,672       269,831       276,576  
  76       276,576       15,212       283,491       192,235       276,576       247,672       276,576       283,491  
  77       283,491       15,592       290,578       192,235       283,491       247,672       283,491       290,578  
  78       290,578       15,982       297,842       192,235       290,578       247,672       290,578       297,842  
  79       297,842       16,381       305,289       192,235       297,842       247,672       297,842       305,289  
  80       305,289       16,791       312,921       192,235       305,289       247,672       305,289       312,921  
  81       312,921       17,211       320,744       192,235       312,921       247,672       312,921       320,744  
  82       320,744       17,641       328,762       192,235       320,744       247,672       320,744       328,762  
  83       328,762       18,082       336,981       192,235       328,762       247,672       328,762       336,981  
  84       336,981       18,534       345,406       192,235       336,981       247,672       336,981       345,406  
  85       345,406       18,997       354,041       192,235       345,406       247,672       345,406       354,041  
  86       354,041       19,472       362,892       192,235       354,041       247,672       354,041       362,892  
  87       362,892       19,959       371,964       192,235       362,892       247,672       362,892       371,964  
  88       371,964       20,458       381,264       192,235       371,964       247,672       371,964       381,264  
  89       381,264       20,969       390,795       192,235       381,264       247,672       381,264       390,795  
  90       390,795       21,494       400,565       192,235       390,795       247,672       390,795       400,565  

 

76


Table of Contents

This example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract with $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus Solution without the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 72 at issue, waits ten years before taking a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 7%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases for ten years and the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount at the end of ten years equals $200,000 (200% of premium payments made in the first contract year);

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of 8% before rider charges are deducted; and

 

  (6)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Purchase
Payment
Benefit
Amount –
End of Year
    Maximum
Anniversary
Value –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  72     $ 105,000     $ 0     $ 112,066     $ 100,000     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 112,066  
  73       112,066       0       119,536       100,000       112,066       118,790       118,790       119,536  
  74       119,536       0       127,503       100,000       119,536       126,708       126,708       127,503  
  75       127,503       0       136,002       100,000       127,503       135,154       135,154       136,002  
  76       136,002       0       145,068       100,000       136,002       144,163       144,163       145,068  
  77       145,068       0       154,738       100,000       145,068       153,772       153,772       154,738  
  78       154,738       0       165,052       100,000       154,738       164,022       164,022       165,052  
  79       165,052       0       176,054       100,000       165,052       174,955       174,955       176,054  
  80       176,054       0       187,789       100,000       176,054       186,617       186,617       187,789  
  81       187,789       0       200,306       100,000       187,789       199,056       199,056       200,306  
  82       200,306       14,863       198,795       200,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       198,795  
  83       198,795       14,863       197,104       200,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       197,104  
  84       197,104       14,863       195,277       200,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       195,277  
  85       195,277       14,863       193,304       200,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       193,304  
  86       193,304       14,863       191,173       200,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       191,173  
  87       191,173       14,863       188,872       200,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       188,872  
  88       188,872       14,863       186,386       200,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       186,386  
  89       186,386       14,863       183,702       200,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       183,702  
  90       183,702       14,863       180,803       200,000       200,306       212,324       212,324       180,803  

 

77


Table of Contents

This example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract with $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus Solution with the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 72 at issue, waits ten years before taking a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 7%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases for ten years and the Purchase Payment Benefit Amount at the end of ten years equals $200,000 (200% of premium payments made in the first contract year);

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of 8% before rider charges are deducted; and

 

  (6)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Purchase
Payment
Benefit
Amount –
End of Year
    Maximum
Anniversary
Value –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  72     $ 105,000     $ 0     $ 111,551     $ 100,000     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 111,551  
  73       111,551       0       118,472       100,000       111,551       118,244       118,244       118,472  
  74       118,472       0       125,854       100,000       118,472       125,580       125,580       125,854  
  75       125,854       0       133,728       100,000       125,854       133,405       133,405       133,728  
  76       133,728       0       142,127       100,000       133,728       141,752       141,752       142,127  
  77       142,127       0       151,086       100,000       142,127       150,655       150,655       151,086  
  78       151,086       0       160,642       100,000       151,086       160,151       160,151       160,642  
  79       160,642       0       170,835       100,000       160,642       170,281       170,281       170,835  
  80       170,835       0       181,708       100,000       170,835       181,086       181,086       181,708  
  81       181,708       0       193,305       100,000       181,708       192,611       192,611       193,305  
  82       193,305       14,343       191,332       200,000       193,305       204,904       204,904       191,332  
  83       191,332       14,343       189,218       200,000       193,305       204,904       204,904       189,218  
  84       189,218       14,343       187,008       200,000       193,305       204,904       204,904       187,008  
  85       187,008       14,343       184,695       200,000       193,305       204,904       204,904       184,695  
  86       184,695       14,343       182,271       200,000       193,305       204,904       204,904       182,271  
  87       182,271       14,343       179,727       200,000       193,305       204,904       204,904       179,727  
  88       179,727       14,343       177,054       200,000       193,305       204,904       204,904       177,054  
  89       177,054       14,343       174,238       200,000       193,305       204,904       204,904       174,238  
  90       174,238       14,343       171,197       200,000       193,305       204,904       204,904       171,197  

 

78


Table of Contents

Lifetime Income Plus 2008

 

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 provides guaranteed withdrawals for the life of the Annuitant(s), with upside potential, provided you meet certain conditions. First, you must allocate all Contract Value to the prescribed Investment Strategy. You must also limit total Gross Withdrawals in each Benefit Year to an amount no greater than the Withdrawal Limit. Then, you will be eligible to receive total Gross Withdrawals in each Benefit Year equal to the Withdrawal Limit until the last death of an Annuitant.

 

You may purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit. The Principal Protection Death Benefit is a feature available only with Lifetime Income Plus 2008. It cannot be elected separately from Lifetime Income Plus 2008. We assess a charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided by the rider. If you purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, a charge will be assessed for the Principal Protection Death Benefit that is in addition to the charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit under the rider.

 

The guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided under the rider may be reduced or lost based on the withdrawals you take from the contract. For example, your guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit will be reduced if you take excess withdrawals in a Benefit Year. See the “Impact of Withdrawals” provision below. You will also lose the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract or if you elect to terminate the rider on any contract anniversary on or after the fifth contract anniversary. In addition, you will no longer receive lifetime payments of your guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if (i)(a) after a withdrawal, your Contract Value is less than the amount required to keep your contract in effect or (b) your Contract Value is reduced to $100 and (ii) your Withdrawal Limit is less than $100. Instead, you could receive, at least, a lump sum equal to the present value of future lifetime payments in the amount of the Withdrawal Limit.

 

The Principal Protection Death Benefit provided under the rider, if elected, will be reduced and may be lost based on withdrawals you take from the contract. You will also lose the Principal Protection Death Benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract or if you elect to terminate the rider.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and the Principal Protection Death Benefit are no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

References to Lifetime Income Plus 2008 include a rider issued with or without the Principal Protection Death Benefit, as applicable, unless stated otherwise.

 

Effective May 1, 2014, you may request to terminate this rider (without terminating the contract) on any business day.

 

Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus 2008. In order to receive the full benefit provided by Lifetime Income Plus 2008, you must invest all premium payments and allocations in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy.

 

Investment Strategies may change from time to time. You may allocate your assets in accordance with your Investment Strategy prescribed at the time the contract was issued, or in accordance with the Investment Strategy in effect at the time you reset your benefit. Therefore, you may have assets allocated to an Investment Strategy that is different than the Investment Strategy described in this prospectus. Your ability to choose different Investment Strategies is limited, as described below.

 

The Investment Strategy includes Designated Subaccounts and five of the Asset Allocation Models (Asset Allocation Models A, B, C and D and the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model). Under this Investment Strategy, contract owners may allocate assets to either one of the four available Asset Allocation Models or to one or more Designated Subaccounts or to the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model. Contract owners, however, may elect to participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, which permits the owner to systematically transfer a fixed dollar amount on a monthly basis for twelve months from the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to one of the available Investment Strategy options. The Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund is only available as part of the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program. For more information about the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, the Asset Allocation Models and the Subaccounts comprising each of the Asset Allocation Models and the Designated Subaccounts, please see the “Defined Dollar Cost Averaging Program,” “Subaccounts” and “Asset Allocation Program” provisions of this prospectus.

 

On a monthly basis, we will rebalance your Contract Value to the Subaccounts in accordance with the percentages that you have chosen to invest in the Designated Subaccounts or the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model or in accordance with the allocations that comprise the applicable Asset Allocation Model. In addition, we will also rebalance your Contract Value on any Valuation Day after any transaction involving a withdrawal, receipt of a premium payment or a transfer of Contract Value, unless you instruct us otherwise. If you are participating in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, rebalancing will not affect the assets allocated to the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund. Your allocation instructions must always comply with the Investment Strategy.

 

79


Table of Contents

Shares of a Portfolio may become unavailable under the contract for new premium payments, transfers and asset rebalancing. As a result, shares of a Portfolio may also become unavailable under your Investment Strategy. Investment Strategies may be modified to respond to such events by removing unavailable Portfolios and adding new Portfolios as appropriate. Because such changes may affect your allocation instructions, you will need to provide updated allocation instructions to comply with the modified Investment Strategy. If you do not provide updated allocation instructions, any subsequent premium payments or transfers requesting payment to an unavailable Portfolio will be considered not in good order. Assets will remain invested as allocated at the time the Portfolio became unavailable, except in a situation where the affected Portfolio is removed. In that case, the assets that were invested in the removed Portfolio will be invested in a new Portfolio consistent with SEC precedent (appropriate no-action relief, substitution order, etc.), unless you are invested in the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model. If you are invested in the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model, all of the assets you have invested in the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model will be moved from the Model to Asset Allocation Model C. Your assets will remain in Asset Allocation Model C, and any subsequent premium payments or transfer requests will be applied accordingly. You will need to provide us with updated allocation instructions if you want to invest in the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model or another available Investment Strategy option.

 

Periodic rebalancing to unavailable Portfolios will cease until we receive updated allocation instructions that comply with the modified Investment Strategy.

 

The current Investment Strategy is as follows:

 

  (1)   owners may allocate assets to the following Designated Subaccounts:

 

AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. — AB VPS Balanced Hedged Allocation Portfolio — Class B;

 

AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) — Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series II shares;

 

BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. — BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund — Class III Shares;

 

Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund — VIP Balanced Portfolio — Service Class 2;

 

Janus Aspen Series — Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Service Shares;

 

MFS® Variable Insurance Trust — MFS® Total Return Series — Service Class Shares; and/or

 

State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 3 Shares;

 

OR

 

  (2)   owners may allocate assets to Asset Allocation Model A, B, C or D.

 

OR

 

  (3)   owners may allocate assets to the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model.

 

Contract owners may elect to participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program when they apply for the contract. Defined Dollar Cost Averaging permits the owner to systematically transfer a fixed dollar amount on a monthly basis for twelve months from the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to one of the available Investment Strategy options. The Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund is only available as part of the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program.

 

Withdrawal Limit. The Withdrawal Limit is calculated on each Valuation Day. The Withdrawal Limit is the benefit base multiplied by the Withdrawal Factor. On each Valuation Day, the benefit base is the greatest of the Contract Value on the prior contract anniversary, the Withdrawal Base, and the Roll-Up Value.

 

The Withdrawal Factor is established based on the age of the younger Annuitant on the earlier of the Valuation Day of the first Gross Withdrawal and the Valuation Day when the Contract Value is reduced to $100. The Withdrawal Factor percentages will be provided in your contract.

 

Withdrawal Base. Your initial Withdrawal Base is equal to your initial premium payment received and is adjusted when any subsequent premium payment is received, as described in the “Premium Payments” provision. It may also change as a result of a withdrawal or reset, as described below.

 

Roll-Up Value. Your initial Roll-Up Value is equal to your initial premium payment received. We will increase your Roll-Up Value on each day. The new Roll-Up Value is equal to the sum of (a) and (b), multiplied by (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the Roll-Up Value on the prior day;

 

  (b)   is any premium payment(s) made on the prior Valuation Day; and

 

  (c)   is the daily roll-up factor, as shown in your contract.

 

On each contract anniversary, if the Withdrawal Base is greater than the current Roll-Up Value, the Roll-Up Value will be increased to the Withdrawal Base. The Roll-Up Value will continue to increase until the date of the first withdrawal or the

 

80


Table of Contents

later of the tenth anniversary of the Contract Date and the date the older Annuitant turns age 65. The Roll-Up Value will not increase after this date.

 

On any Valuation Day you make a Gross Withdrawal, if that Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Roll-Up Value will be reduced to zero. The Roll-Up Value will not increase after this date. When requesting an excess withdrawal, you will be asked if you understand the implications of the excess withdrawal and if you would like to proceed with the request.

 

Premium Payments. Any premium payment applied to your contract will be added to your Withdrawal Base and your Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), and may be added to your Roll-Up Value as described in the “Roll-Up Value” provision above. Please note that we do not consider Bonus Credits as “premium payments” for purposes of the contract and this rider. Therefore, any applicable Bonus Credit will not be included in the Withdrawal Base, Principal Protection Death Benefit or Roll Up Value, if applicable. You will have to reset your benefit under the terms of the rider to capture the Bonus Credit or any related earnings in the Withdrawal Base. You must allocate all assets to the prescribed Investment Strategy.

 

Important Note.We reserve the right to not adjust the Withdrawal Base, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), and/or Roll-Up Value for any subsequent premium payments received. As a result, it is possible that you would not be able to make subsequent premium payments after the initial premium payment to take advantage of the benefits provided by Lifetime Income Plus 2008 that would be associated with such additional premium payments. Before making premium payments that do not increase the Withdrawal Base, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) or Roll-Up Value, you should consider that: (i) the guaranteed amounts provided by the Withdrawal Base, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) and Roll-Up Value will not include such premium payments or Bonus Credits; and (ii) this rider may not make sense for you if you intend to make premium payments that will not increase the Withdrawal Base, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) and Roll-Up Value.

 

Reset of the Benefit. You may reset your Withdrawal Base on an annual anniversary of the Contract Date when your Contract Value is higher than the Withdrawal Base. If such contract anniversary is not a Valuation Day, the reset will occur on the next Valuation Day. On the Valuation Day you reset your benefit, we will reset the Investment Strategy to the current Investment Strategy and reset the charges for this rider.

 

Effective on and after December 3, 2012, the charge for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 increased, on an annual basis, to 1.25% upon reset of the Withdrawal Base. The rider charge increase applies to both single and joint annuitant contracts regardless of the date the contract was issued. If you are potentially impacted, you will receive written notice in advance of your contract anniversary informing you of your options as well as a discussion of certain circumstances in which a reset would not be in your best interest. If your rider is scheduled to automatically reset, you will have the opportunity to opt-out of the automatic reset and resulting rider charge increase. If you have to request a manual reset, you will have the opportunity to reset and, if you reset, incur the higher rider charge. We reserve the right to discontinue sending written notice of the potential impact of a reset after we send you the first notice.

 

As noted, if there is an automatic reset, your Withdrawal Base will be increased to your Contract Value. However, the Withdrawal Base is just one element used to determine your Benefit Base which is in turn used to calculate your Withdrawal Limit. The Benefit Base is the greatest of the Withdrawal Base, Contract Value on the prior contract anniversary and the Roll-Up Value. If your Withdrawal Base resets but your Roll-Up Value is higher than your Withdrawal Base on the date of reset, the Roll-Up Value will be used to determine your Benefit Base, but you will be assessed a rider charge of 1.25% because of the reset of the Withdrawal Base. In this circumstance, if your rider fee was less than 1.25% before the reset, you will pay a higher rider fee for a benefit that you would have received even without the reset.

 

For Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit, the new charges, which may be higher than your previous charges, will never exceed 2.00% of the benefit base. For Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, the new charges, which may be higher than your previous charges, will never exceed 2.00% of the benefit base plus 0.50% of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit. The reset date must be at least 12 months after the later of the Contract Date and the last reset date. Resets will occur automatically unless such automatic resets are or have been terminated.

 

Any change to the charges or to the required Investment Strategy for this rider will be communicated to you in writing prior to the contract anniversary date. Upon reset, these changes will apply. The reset provision is not available on or after the latest permitted Maturity Date.

 

Automatic resets will continue until and unless:

 

  (a)   the owner (or owners) submits a written request to our Home Office to terminate automatic resets (such a request must be received at least 15 days prior to the contract anniversary date);

 

81


Table of Contents
  (b)   the Investment Strategy changes, allocations are affected, and we do not receive confirmation of new allocations from you at our Home Office;

 

  (c)   income payments begin via annuitization; or

 

  (d)   ownership of the contract changes.

 

If automatic resets have terminated, you may later reinstate automatic resets for any future contract anniversary by submitting a written request to do so; provided you are following the Investment Strategy and income payments have not begun.

 

Please note that an automatic reset will occur on a contract anniversary if Contract Value is even nominally higher than the Withdrawal Base (e.g., as little as $1.00 or even $0.01 higher) and, therefore, an automatic reset may not be in your best interest because: (i) the charges for this rider may be higher than your previous charges and (ii) the Investment Strategy will be reset to the current Investment Strategy (the Investment Strategy offered on the reset date). Please carefully consider the impact of automatic resets when you elect Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and while the rider is in effect.

 

Impact of Withdrawals. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Withdrawal Base, Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) and Roll-Up Value are reduced. The new Withdrawal Base equals the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

  (b)   is the prior Withdrawal Base minus the Gross Withdrawal.

 

The new Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) equals the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

  (b)   is the prior Principal Protection Death Benefit minus the Gross Withdrawal.

 

The new Roll-Up Value will be zero. Additional premium payments will not increase the Roll-Up Value.

 

If the total Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year are less than or equal to the Withdrawal Limit, we will waive any surrender charge on the Gross Withdrawal.

 

The Withdrawal Limit will be increased for any Benefit Year to the extent necessary to meet any minimum distribution requirements based on life expectancy under federal tax law. This increase applies only to the required minimum distribution based on the Contract Value for the calendar year ending within the Benefit Year.

 

You should carefully manage withdrawals because excess withdrawals will have adverse consequences on the benefits provided under Lifetime Income Plus 2008, particularly in down markets. Over the period of time during which you take withdrawals, there is the risk that you may need funds in excess of the Withdrawal Limit and, if you do not have other sources of income available, you may need to take (excess) withdrawals that will reduce your Withdrawal Base (and, consequently, your Withdrawal Limit), the Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable), and your Roll-Up Value.

 

You also should carefully consider when to begin taking withdrawals if you elected Lifetime Income Plus 2008. The longer you wait before beginning to take withdrawals, the higher the Withdrawal Factor will be, which is one of the components used to determine the amount of your Withdrawal Limit. If you delay taking withdrawals too long, however, you may limit the number of years available for you to take withdrawals in the future (due to life expectancy) and you may be paying for a benefit you are not using.

 

Your Contract Value after taking a withdrawal may be less than the amount required to keep your contract in effect. In this event, or if your Contract Value is reduced to $100, the following will occur:

 

    If the Withdrawal Limit is less than $100, we will pay you the greatest of the following:

 

  (a)   the Contract Value;

 

  (b)   a lump sum equal to the present value of future lifetime payments in the amount of the Withdrawal Limit calculated using the 2000 Annuity Mortality Table and an interest rate of 3%; and

 

  (c)   the Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable).

 

   

If the Withdrawal Limit is greater than or equal to $100, we will begin income payments. We will make payments of a fixed amount for the life of the Annuitant or, if there are Joint Annuitants, the last surviving Annuitant. The fixed amount payable annually will equal the most recently calculated Withdrawal Limit. We will make payments monthly or on another periodic basis agreed by us. If the monthly amount is less than $100, we will reduce the frequency so that the payment will be at least $100.

 

82


Table of Contents
 

The Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable) will continue under this provision. The Principal Protection Death Benefit will be reduced by each payment. The Principal Protection Death Benefit, if any, will be payable on the death of the last surviving Annuitant.

 

Principal Protection Death Benefit. You may purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit. The Principal Protection Death Benefit is a feature available only with Lifetime Income Plus 2008. It cannot be elected separately from Lifetime Income Plus 2008.

 

The Principal Protection Death Benefit is used to determine the death benefit, if any, payable under the contract and rider as described in the “Death Provisions” section below. The Principal Protection Death Benefit on the Contract Date is equal to the initial premium payment. Premium payments in a Benefit Year increase the Principal Protection Death Benefit.

 

Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year decrease the Principal Protection Death Benefit. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is less than or equal to the Withdrawal Limit, the Principal Protection Death Benefit will be reduced by the Gross Withdrawal. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Principal Protection Death Benefit will equal the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

  (b)   is the prior Principal Protection Death Benefit minus the Gross Withdrawal.

 

Death Provisions. At the death of the last surviving Annuitant, a death benefit may be payable under this contract and rider. The amount of any death benefit payable will be the greatest of (a), (b) and (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the death benefit as calculated under the base contract;

 

  (b)   is the Principal Protection Death Benefit (if applicable); and

 

  (c)   is any amount payable by any other optional death benefit rider (if applicable).

 

The death benefit payable will be paid according to the distribution rules under the contract.

 

If the designated beneficiary is a surviving spouse who is not an Annuitant, whose age is 45 through 85, and who elects to continue the contract as the new owner, this rider will continue. The Withdrawal Base and Roll-Up Value for the new owner will be the death benefit determined as of the first Valuation Day we receive at our Home Office due proof of death and all required forms. The Withdrawal Factor for the new owner will be based on the age of that owner on the date of the first Gross Withdrawal for that owner.

 

If the designated beneficiary is a surviving spouse who is an Annuitant and who elects to continue the contract as the owner, this rider will continue. The Withdrawal Base and Roll-Up Value will be the same as it was under the contract for the deceased owner. If no withdrawals were taken prior to the first Valuation Day we receive due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office, the Withdrawal Factor for the surviving spouse will be established based on the attained age of the surviving spouse on the date of the first Gross Withdrawal for the surviving spouse. Otherwise, the Withdrawal Factor will continue as it was under the contract for the deceased owner.

 

If the surviving spouse cannot continue the rider, the rider and the rider charges will terminate. The charges for this rider will be calculated, pro rata, and deducted.

 

Proceeds that were transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund upon the death of the owner will be reallocated to the Investment Strategy and the asset percentages then in effect at the time of the death of the owner. Such reallocations will not be counted as a transfer for the purpose of the number of transfers allowed under the contract in a calendar year.

 

Considerations. While the rider is designed to provide life-time withdrawal benefits, these benefits are only guaranteed to the extent you comply with the limits, conditions and restrictions set forth in the contract.

 

Rider Charge. We assess a charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided by the rider. The charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the benefit base, as defined and determined under the rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. Please note that, if your benefit base increases, the amount deducted from your Contract Value will increase.

 

If you purchase Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit, a charge will be assessed for the Principal Protection Death Benefit that is in addition to the charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit under the rider. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is calculated quarterly as a percentage of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit, as defined and determined under the rider, and deducted quarterly from the Contract Value. Please note that, if the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit increases through additional premium payments, the amount deducted from your Contract Value will increase. The charge for the Principal Protection Death Benefit is higher if any annuitant is age 71 or older at the time of application.

 

83


Table of Contents

For contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after December 3, 2012, we also apply different charges for the rider for a single Annuitant contract and a Joint Annuitant contract. Once a contract is a Joint Annuitant contract and the Joint Annuitant rider charge is applied, the Joint Annuitant rider charge will continue while the rider is in effect. If a spouse is added as Joint Annuitant after the contract is issued, new charges may apply. These new charges may be higher than the charges previously applicable to your contract.

 

If you reset your benefits under the rider, we will reset the charges for the rider, which may be higher than your previous charges.

 

We currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above, for those contracts that have reset their Withdrawal Base on or after December 3, 2012:

 

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25% of benefit base plus 0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

Single or Joint Annuitant Contract

   1.25% of benefit base plus 0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

We currently assess the following charges for the rider, calculated and deducted as described above, for those contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after December 3, 2012:

 

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit

Single Annuitant Contract

   0.75% of benefit base

Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.85% of benefit base

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 45-70

Single Annuitant Contract

   0.75% of benefit base plus
0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.85% of benefit base plus
0.15% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit — Annuitant Age 71-85

Single Annuitant Contract

   0.75% of benefit base plus
0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

Joint Annuitant Contract

   0.85% of benefit base plus
0.40% of value of Principal Protection Death Benefit

 

The charges for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit will never exceed 2.00% of benefit base. The charges for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit will never exceed 2.00% of benefit base plus 0.50% of the value of the Principal Protection Death Benefit.

 

On the day the rider and/or the contract terminates, the charges for this rider will be calculated, pro rata, and deducted.

 

Please note that you will begin paying the rider charge (including the applicable charge associated with the Principal Protection Death Benefit if you have elected that option) as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals under the rider for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider; nor will we refund charges if the Principal Protection Death Benefit feature under a contract does not pay out.

 

When the Rider is Effective

 

If available, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and the Principal Protection Death Benefit must be elected at application. The rider will remain in effect while the contract is in force and before the Maturity Date. Effective May 1, 2014, you may request to terminate this rider (without terminating the contract) on any business day. The rider will terminate on the first day of the next quarter as measured from the contract anniversary (i.e., not a calendar quarter). Rider charges will continue from the date of the request to terminate until the date of termination. On the day the rider and/or the contract terminates, the charges for this rider will be calculated, pro rata, and deducted. We are waiving the provision in the rider that limits the ability to terminate the rider to any contract anniversary on or after the fifth contract anniversary. Otherwise this rider and the corresponding charges will terminate on the Maturity Date. Please note that, upon termination of this rider, you will lose all of the benefits for which you are eligible under the rider, including any guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits provided by the rider.

 

At any time before the Maturity Date, you can elect to annuitize under current annuity rates in lieu of continuing Lifetime Income Plus 2008. This may provide a higher income amount and/or more favorable tax treatment than payments made under this rider.

 

84


Table of Contents

Change of Ownership

 

We must approve any assignment or sale of this contract unless the assignment is a court ordered assignment.

 

General Provisions

 

For purposes of this rider:

 

    A non-natural entity owner must name an Annuitant and may name the Annuitant’s spouse as a Joint Annuitant.

 

    An individual owner must also be an Annuitant and may name his or her spouse as a Joint Annuitant at issue.

 

    A joint owner must be the owner’s spouse.

 

    If you marry after issue, you may add your spouse as a joint owner and Joint Annuitant or as a Joint Annuitant only, subject to our approval.

 

    Under federal tax law, all contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

 

Civil union partners are not permitted to continue the contract without taking required distributions upon the death of an owner. Therefore, even if named a joint owner/Joint Annuitant, a civil union partner will have to take required distributions upon the death of the other joint owner/Joint Annuitant. See the “Distribution Rules” provision of this prospectus. If this situation applies to you, you should consult a tax adviser.

 

85


Table of Contents

Examples

 

The following examples show how Lifetime Income Plus 2008 works based on hypothetical values. The examples are for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to depict investment performance of the contract and, therefore, should not be relied upon in making a decision to invest in the rider or contract. The examples assume current rider charges for all periods shown. If an owner resets the benefits under the rider, we reset the charges for the rider, which may be higher than the previous charges. Higher rider charges would produce lower values in the examples.

 

This example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 52 at issue, waits 13 years to take a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases until age 65;

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of -2%, before rider charges are deducted;

 

  (6)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the benefit base) for the rest of the owner’s life;

 

  (7)   The Withdrawal Base is reset annually on the contract anniversary; and

 

  (8)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Withdrawal
Base –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  53     $ 105,000       —      $ 101,575     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 101,575  
  54       101,575       —        98,139       101,575       112,360       112,360       100,000  
  55       98,139       —        94,687       101,575       119,102       119,102       100,000  
  56       94,687       —        91,216       101,575       126,248       126,248       100,000  
  57       91,216       —        87,719       101,575       133,823       133,823       100,000  
  58       87,719       —        84,191       101,575       141,852       141,852       100,000  
  59       84,191       —        80,628       101,575       150,363       150,363       100,000  
  60       80,628       —        77,023       101,575       159,385       159,385       100,000  
  61       77,023       —        73,370       101,575       168,948       168,948       100,000  
  62       73,370       —        69,664       101,575       179,085       179,085       100,000  
  63       69,664       —        65,898       101,575       189,830       189,830       100,000  
  64       65,898       —        62,065       101,575       201,220       201,220       100,000  
  65       62,065     $ 11,731       46,427       101,575       213,293       213,293       79,829  
  66       46,427       11,731       31,101       101,575       213,293       213,293       57,965  
  67       31,101       11,731       16,081       101,575       213,293       213,293       33,516  
  68       16,081       11,731       1,338       101,575       213,293       213,293       3,430  
  69       1,338       11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  70       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  71       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  72       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  73       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  74       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  75       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  76       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  77       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  78       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  79       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  80       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  81       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  82       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  83       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  84       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  85       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  86       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  87       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  88       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  89       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   
  90       —        11,731       —        101,575       213,293       213,293       —   

 

86


Table of Contents

This example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 52 at issue, waits 13 years to take a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases until age 65;

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of -2%, before rider charges are deducted;

 

  (6)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the benefit base) for the rest of the owner’s life;

 

  (7)   The Withdrawal Base is reset annually on the contract anniversary; and

 

  (8)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Withdrawal
Base –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  53     $ 105,000       —      $ 101,425     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 101,425  
  54       101,425       —        97,842       101,425       112,360       112,360       100,000  
  55       97,842       —        94,246       101,425       119,102       119,102       100,000  
  56       94,246       —        90,633       101,425       126,248       126,248       100,000  
  57       90,633       —        86,998       101,425       133,823       133,823       100,000  
  58       86,998       —        83,335       101,425       141,852       141,852       100,000  
  59       83,335       —        79,639       101,425       150,363       150,363       100,000  
  60       79,639       —        75,903       101,425       159,385       159,385       100,000  
  61       75,903       —        72,124       101,425       168,948       168,948       100,000  
  62       72,124       —        68,293       101,425       179,085       179,085       100,000  
  63       68,293       —        64,404       101,425       189,830       189,830       100,000  
  64       64,404       —        60,450       101,425       201,220       201,220       100,000  
  65       60,450     $ 11,731       44,712       101,425       213,293       213,293       79,216  
  66       44,712       11,731       29,306       101,425       213,293       213,293       56,571  
  67       29,306       11,731       14,225       101,425       213,293       213,293       31,003  
  68       14,225       11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  69       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  70       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  71       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  72       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  73       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  74       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  75       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  76       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  77       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  78       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  79       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  80       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  81       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  82       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  83       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  84       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  85       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  86       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  87       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  88       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  89       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   
  90       —        11,731       —        101,425       213,293       213,293       —   

 

87


Table of Contents

This next example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 72 at issue, waits 10 years to take a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 7%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases for 10 years;

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of -2%, before rider charges are deducted;

 

  (6)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the benefit base) for the rest of the owner’s life;

 

  (7)   The Withdrawal Base is reset annually on the contract anniversary; and

 

  (8)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Withdrawal
Base –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  73     $ 105,000       —      $ 101,575     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 101,575  
  74       101,575       —        98,139       101,575       112,360       112,360       100,000  
  75       98,139       —        94,687       101,575       119,102       119,102       100,000  
  76       94,687       —        91,216       101,575       126,248       126,248       100,000  
  77       91,216       —        87,719       101,575       133,823       133,823       100,000  
  78       87,719       —        84,191       101,575       141,852       141,852       100,000  
  79       84,191       —        80,628       101,575       150,363       150,363       100,000  
  80       80,628       —        77,023       101,575       159,385       159,385       100,000  
  81       77,023       —        73,370       101,575       168,948       168,948       100,000  
  82       73,370     $ 12,536       57,129       101,575       179,085       179,085       82,005  
  83       57,129       12,536       41,211       101,575       179,085       179,085       62,879  
  84       41,211       12,536       25,613       101,575       179,085       179,085       42,216  
  85       25,613       12,536       10,326       101,575       179,085       179,085       19,068  
  86       10,326       12,536       —        101,575       179,085       179,085       —   
  87       —        12,536       —        101,575       179,085       179,085       —   
  88       —        12,536       —        101,575       179,085       179,085       —   
  89       —        12,536       —        101,575       179,085       179,085       —   
  90       —        12,536       —        101,575       179,085       179,085       —   

 

88


Table of Contents

This next example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 72 at issue, waits 10 years to take a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 7%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases for 10 years;

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of -2%, before rider charges are deducted;

 

  (6)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the benefit base) for the rest of the owner’s life;

 

  (7)   The Withdrawal Base is reset annually on the contract anniversary; and

 

  (8)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Withdrawal
Base –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  73     $ 105,000       —      $ 101,175     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 101,175  
  74       101,175       —        97,347       101,175       112,360       112,360       100,000  
  75       97,347       —        93,511       101,175       119,102       119,102       100,000  
  76       93,511       —        89,663       101,175       126,248       126,248       100,000  
  77       89,663       —        85,797       101,175       133,823       133,823       100,000  
  78       85,797       —        81,908       101,175       141,852       141,852       100,000  
  79       81,908       —        77,990       101,175       150,363       150,363       100,000  
  80       77,990       —        74,038       101,175       159,385       159,385       100,000  
  81       74,038       —        70,045       101,175       168,948       168,948       100,000  
  82       70,045     $ 12,536       53,520       101,175       179,085       179,085       81,022  
  83       53,520       12,536       37,376       101,175       179,085       179,085       60,672  
  84       37,376       12,536       21,604       101,175       179,085       179,085       38,394  
  85       21,604       12,536       6,173       101,175       179,085       179,085       12,668  
  86       6,173       12,536       —        101,175       179,085       179,085       —   
  87       —        12,536       —        101,175       179,085       179,085       —   
  88       —        12,536       —        101,175       179,085       179,085       —   
  89       —        12,536       —        101,175       179,085       179,085       —   
  90       —        12,536       —        101,175       179,085       179,085       —   

 

89


Table of Contents

This next example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus 2008 without the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 65 at issue and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases for 1 year;

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of 8%, before rider charges are deducted;

 

  (6)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the benefit base) for the rest of the owner’s life;

 

  (7)   the Withdrawal Base is reset annually on the contract anniversary; and

 

  (8)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Withdrawal
Base –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  66     $ 105,000     $ 5,830     $ 106,245     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,245  
  67       106,245       5,843       107,573       106,245       106,000       106,245       107,573  
  68       107,573       5,917       108,918       107,573       106,000       107,573       108,918  
  69       108,918       5,990       110,279       108,918       106,000       108,918       110,279  
  70       110,279       6,065       111,658       110,279       106,000       110,279       111,658  
  71       111,658       6,141       113,053       111,658       106,000       111,658       113,053  
  72       113,053       6,218       114,467       113,053       106,000       113,053       114,467  
  73       114,467       6,296       115,897       114,467       106,000       114,467       115,897  
  74       115,897       6,374       117,346       115,897       106,000       115,897       117,346  
  75       117,346       6,454       118,813       117,346       106,000       117,346       118,813  
  76       118,813       6,535       120,298       118,813       106,000       118,813       120,298  
  77       120,298       6,616       121,802       120,298       106,000       120,298       121,802  
  78       121,802       6,699       123,324       121,802       106,000       121,802       123,324  
  79       123,324       6,783       124,866       123,324       106,000       123,324       124,866  
  80       124,866       6,868       126,427       124,866       106,000       124,866       126,427  
  81       126,427       6,953       128,007       126,427       106,000       126,427       128,007  
  82       128,007       7,040       129,607       128,007       106,000       128,007       129,607  
  83       129,607       7,128       131,227       129,607       106,000       129,607       131,227  
  84       131,227       7,217       132,868       131,227       106,000       131,227       132,868  
  85       132,868       7,308       134,528       132,868       106,000       132,868       134,528  
  86       134,528       7,399       136,210       134,528       106,000       134,528       136,210  
  87       136,210       7,492       137,913       136,210       106,000       136,210       137,913  
  88       137,913       7,585       139,637       137,913       106,000       137,913       139,637  
  89       139,637       7,680       141,382       139,637       106,000       139,637       141,382  
  90       141,382       7,776       143,149       141,382       106,000       141,382       143,149  

 

90


Table of Contents

This next example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000 and elects Lifetime Income Plus 2008 with the Principal Protection Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner is age 65 at issue and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (4)   the Roll-Up Value increases for 1 year;

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of 8%, before rider charges are deducted;

 

  (6)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the benefit base) for the rest of the owner’s life;

 

  (7)   the Withdrawal Base is reset annually on the contract anniversary; and

 

  (8)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year –
After Rider
Charges
    Withdrawal
Base –
End of Year
    Roll-Up
Value –
End of Year
    Benefit Base –
End of Year
    Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  66     $ 105,000     $ 5,830     $ 106,093     $ 100,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,000     $ 106,093  
  67       106,093       5,835       107,265       106,093       106,000       106,093       107,265  
  68       107,265       5,900       108,449       107,265       106,000       107,265       108,449  
  69       108,449       5,965       109,645       108,449       106,000       108,449       109,645  
  70       109,645       6,030       110,854       109,645       106,000       109,645       110,854  
  71       110,854       6,097       112,074       110,854       106,000       110,854       112,074  
  72       112,074       6,164       113,308       112,074       106,000       112,074       113,308  
  73       113,308       6,232       114,553       113,308       106,000       113,308       114,553  
  74       114,553       6,300       115,811       114,553       106,000       114,553       115,811  
  75       115,811       6,370       117,082       115,811       106,000       115,811       117,082  
  76       117,082       6,440       118,366       117,082       106,000       117,082       118,366  
  77       118,366       6,510       119,663       118,366       106,000       118,366       119,663  
  78       119,663       6,581       120,972       119,663       106,000       119,663       120,972  
  79       120,972       6,653       122,295       120,972       106,000       120,972       122,295  
  80       122,295       6,726       123,631       122,295       106,000       122,295       123,631  
  81       123,631       6,800       124,980       123,631       106,000       123,631       124,980  
  82       124,980       6,874       126,343       124,980       106,000       124,980       126,343  
  83       126,343       6,949       127,719       126,343       106,000       126,343       127,719  
  84       127,719       7,025       129,109       127,719       106,000       127,719       129,109  
  85       129,109       7,101       130,512       129,109       106,000       129,109       130,512  
  86       130,512       7,178       131,930       130,512       106,000       130,512       131,930  
  87       131,930       7,256       133,361       131,930       106,000       131,930       133,361  
  88       133,361       7,335       134,807       133,361       106,000       133,361       134,807  
  89       134,807       7,414       136,266       134,807       106,000       134,807       136,266  
  90       136,266       7,495       137,740       136,266       106,000       136,266       137,740  

 

91


Table of Contents

Lifetime Income Plus 2007

 

Lifetime Income Plus 2007 provides guaranteed withdrawals for the life of the Annuitant(s), with upside potential, provided you meet certain conditions. If you:

 

    allocate all Contract Value to the prescribed Investment Strategy; and

 

    limit total Gross Withdrawals in each Benefit Year to an amount no greater than the Withdrawal Limit;

 

then you will be eligible to receive total Gross Withdrawals in each Benefit Year equal to the Withdrawal Limit until the last death of an Annuitant.

 

For important information about the Investment Strategy, please see the “Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus and Lifetime Income Plus 2007” provision below.

 

The guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided under the rider may be reduced or lost based on the withdrawals you take from the contract. For example, your guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit will be reduced if you take excess withdrawals in a Benefit Year. See the “Withdrawals” provision below. Your benefit will also be reduced if you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy. See the “Impact of Violating the Investment Strategy on the Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit” provision below. You will also lose the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract. In addition, you will no longer receive lifetime payments of your guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if (i)(a) after a withdrawal, your Contract Value is less than the amount required to keep your contract in effect or (b) your Contract Value is reduced to $100 and (ii) your Withdrawal Limit is less than $100. Instead, you could receive, at least, a lump sum equal to the present value of future lifetime payments in the amount of the Withdrawal Limit.

 

The Rider Death Benefit provided under the rider, if elected, will be reduced and may be lost based on withdrawals you take from the contract. Your benefit will also be reduced if you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy. See the “Impact of Violating the Investment Strategy on the Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit” provision below. You will also lose the Rider Death Benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Lifetime Income Plus 2007 is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Withdrawal Limit. The Withdrawal Limit is calculated on each Valuation Day. The Withdrawal Limit is (a) multiplied by (b) where:

 

  (a)   is the greatest of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value on the prior contract anniversary;

 

  (2)   the Withdrawal Base; and

 

  (3)   the Roll-Up Value; and

 

  (b)   is the Withdrawal Factor.

 

The Withdrawal Base and the Roll-Up Value are amounts used to calculate and establish the Withdrawal Limit. The Withdrawal Factor is established based on the age of the younger Annuitant on the earlier of the Valuation Day of the first Gross Withdrawal and the Valuation Day when the Contract Value is reduced to $100.

 

Withdrawal Base. Your initial Withdrawal Base is equal to your initial premium payment received and is adjusted when any subsequent premium payment is received, as described in the “Premium Payments” provision.

 

Roll-Up Value. Your initial Roll-Up Value is equal to your initial premium payment received. On each Valuation Day your Roll-Up Value will be adjusted. The new Roll-Up Value will equal (a) plus (b) plus (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the Roll-Up Value on the prior Valuation Day;

 

  (b)   is any premium payment made on the current Valuation Day;

 

  (c)   is the daily roll-up rate, as shown in your contract, multiplied by the cumulative premium payments.

 

The Roll-Up Value will continue to increase until the earlier of (i) the “last roll-up date” or (ii) the date of the first withdrawal. The “last roll-up date” is the later of the fifth contract anniversary or the first contract anniversary on or after the day the older Annuitant turns 70 years old. On the last roll-up date or the date of the first withdrawal, whichever comes first, the Roll-Up Value will equal the Roll-Up Value on the prior Valuation Day. After this date, additional premium payments will not increase the Roll-Up Value.

 

On any Valuation Day you make a Gross Withdrawal, if that Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Roll-Up Value will be reduced to zero. After this date, additional premium payments will not increase the Roll-Up Value.

 

Premium Payments.Any premium payment applied to your contract will adjust your Withdrawal Base and your Rider

 

92


Table of Contents

Death Benefit, and may adjust your Roll-Up Value as described in the “Roll-Up Value” provision above. Please note that we do not consider Bonus Credits as “premium payments” for purposes of the contract and this rider. Therefore, any applicable Bonus Credit will not be included in the Withdrawal Base, Rider Death Benefit or Roll-Up Value, if applicable. You will have to reset your benefit under the terms of the rider to capture the Bonus Credit or any related earnings in the Withdrawal Base.

 

In order to obtain the full benefit provided by this rider, you must allocate all assets to the prescribed Investment Strategy from the Benefit Date. Except as noted below, if you have allocated all assets to the Investment Strategy from the Benefit Date, any subsequent premium payment will be added to the Roll-Up Value. If you have not allocated all assets to the Investment Strategy, the premium payment will be added to the Withdrawal Base and, if applicable, the Roll-Up Value, but the Rider Death Benefit will be increased only by 50% of the premium payment.

 

Important Note.We reserve the right to not adjust the Withdrawal Base, Rider Death Benefit, and/or Roll-Up Value for any subsequent premium payments received. As a result, it is possible that you would not be able to make subsequent premium payments after the initial premium payment to take advantage of the benefits provided by Lifetime Income Plus 2007 that would be associated with such additional premium payments. Before making premium payments that do not increase the Withdrawal Base, Rider Death Benefit or Roll-Up Value, you should consider that: (i) the guaranteed amounts provided by the Withdrawal Base, Rider Death Benefit and Roll-Up Value will not include such premium payments or Bonus Credits; and (ii) this rider may not make sense for you if you intend to make premium payments that will not increase the Withdrawal Base, Rider Death Benefit and Roll-Up Value.

 

Impact of Violating the Investment Strategy on the Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit. Beginning on the first Valuation Day after you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy, your Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit will be reduced by 50%.

 

You may elect to resume participation in the Investment Strategy, as described in the “Restoration or Reset of the Benefit” provision below, provided we receive notice of your election in a form acceptable to us.

 

We will not reduce your Withdrawal Factor or Rider Death Benefit if you are not following the Investment Strategy due to a Portfolio liquidation or a Portfolio dissolution and the assets are transferred from the liquidated or dissolved Portfolio to another Portfolio.

 

Restoration or Reset of the Benefit

 

Restoration. If your Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit have been reduced because you have not allocated all assets to the prescribed Investment Strategy, you will have a one-time opportunity to restore your Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit on a contract anniversary. If such contract anniversary is not a Valuation Day, the restoration will occur on the next Valuation Day. The restore feature under this rider may be used only once and is not available on or after the latest permitted Maturity Date.

 

On the Valuation Day we restore your benefit, we will:

 

  (a)   restore the Withdrawal Factor to 100% of the Withdrawal Factor established as of the date of the first withdrawal;

 

  (b)   calculate your Rider Death Benefit to equal the lesser of (i) the total premium payments less Gross Withdrawals and (ii) current Contract Value;

 

  (c)   calculate your Withdrawal Base to equal the lesser of (i) the Withdrawal Base as of the date of the restore, determined as if you have not allocated outside of the prescribed Investment Strategy and (ii) the current Contract Value;

 

  (d)   allocate your assets to the Investment Strategy in effect as of the last Benefit Date prior to the reduction in benefits, in accordance to your instructions; and

 

  (e)   assess a rider charge equal to the charge that was in effect as of your last Benefit Date prior to the reduction in benefits.

 

If you want to restore your benefit, we must receive notice of your election at our Home Office in a form acceptable to us at least 15 days prior to your next contract anniversary.

 

Reset. You may reset your Withdrawal Base on an annual anniversary of the Contract Date when your Contract Value is higher than the Withdrawal Base. If such contract anniversary is not a Valuation Day, the reset will occur on the next Valuation Day. The reset date must be at least 12 months after the later of the Contract Date and the last reset date. Resets will occur automatically unless such automatic resets are or have been terminated.

 

On the Valuation Day we reset your benefit, we will:

 

  (a)   reset the Withdrawal Factor to 100% of the Withdrawal Factor established as of the date of first withdrawal;

 

  (b)   reset the Rider Death Benefit to the lesser of (i) the total premium payments less Gross Withdrawals and (ii) current Contract Value;

 

93


Table of Contents
  (c)   reset the Withdrawal Base to your Contract Value;

 

  (d)   reset the Investment Strategy to the current Investment Strategy; and

 

  (e)   reset the charge for this rider (the new charge, which may be higher than your previous charge, will never exceed 2.00%).

 

Effective on and after July 15, 2019, the charge for Lifetime Income Plus 2007 increased, on an annual basis, to 1.25% upon reset of the Withdrawal Base. The rider charge increase applies to both single Annuitant and Joint Annuitant contracts regardless of the date the contract was issued. If you are potentially impacted, you will receive written notice in advance of your contract anniversary informing you of your options as well as a discussion of certain circumstances in which a reset would not be in your best interest. If your rider is scheduled to automatically reset, you will have the opportunity to opt-out of the automatic reset and resulting rider charge increase. If you have to request a manual reset, you will have the opportunity to reset and, if you reset, incur the higher rider charge. We reserve the right to discontinue sending written notice of the potential impact of a reset after we send you the first notice.

 

As noted above, if there is an automatic reset, your Withdrawal Base will be increased to your Contract Value. The Withdrawal Base, however, is just one element used to calculate your Withdrawal Limit. If your Withdrawal Base resets but your Roll-Up Value is higher than your Withdrawal Base on the date of reset, the Roll-Up Value will be used to determine your Withdrawal Limit, but you will be assessed a rider charge of 1.25% because of the reset of the Withdrawal Base. In this circumstance, if your rider fee was less than 1.25% before the reset, you will pay a higher rider fee for a benefit that you would have received even without the reset.

 

Any change to the charge or to the required Investment Strategy for this rider will be communicated to you in writing prior to the contract anniversary date. Upon reset, these changes will apply. The reset provision is not available on or after the latest permitted Maturity Date.

 

Automatic resets will continue until and unless:

 

  (a)   the owner (or owners) submits a written request to our Home Office to terminate automatic resets (such a request must be received at least 15 days prior to the contract anniversary date);

 

  (b)   the Investment Strategy is violated;

 

  (c)   the Investment Strategy changes, allocations are affected, and we do not receive confirmation of new allocations from you at our Home Office;

 

  (d)   income payments begin via annuitization; or

 

  (e)   ownership of the contract changes.

 

If automatic resets have terminated, you may later reinstate automatic resets for any future contract anniversary by submitting a written request to our Home Office to do so; provided you are following the Investment Strategy and income payments have not begun.

 

Please note that an automatic reset will occur on a contract anniversary if contract value is even nominally higher than the Withdrawal Base (e.g., as little as $1.00 or even $0.01 higher) and, therefore, an automatic reset may not be in your best interest because: (i) the charge for this rider may be higher than your previous charge and (ii) the Investment Strategy will be reset to the current Investment Strategy (the Investment Strategy offered on the reset date). Please carefully consider the impact of automatic resets when you elect Lifetime Income Plus 2007 and while the rider is in effect.

 

Withdrawals. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Withdrawal Base, Rider Death Benefit and Roll-Up Value are reduced. The new Withdrawal Base equals the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

  (b)   is the prior Withdrawal Base minus the Gross Withdrawal.

 

The new Rider Death Benefit equals the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

  (b)   is the prior Rider Death Benefit minus the Gross Withdrawal.

 

The new Roll-Up Value will be zero. Additional premium payments will not increase the Roll-Up Value.

 

If the total Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year are less than or equal to the Withdrawal Limit, we will waive any surrender charge on such total Gross Withdrawals.

 

If all Contract Value is allocated to the Investment Strategy, the Withdrawal Limit will be increased for any Benefit Year to the extent necessary to meet any minimum distribution requirements based on life expectancy under federal tax law. This increase applies only to the required minimum distribution based on the Contract Value.

 

You should carefully consider when to begin taking withdrawals if you elected Lifetime Income Plus 2007. The

 

94


Table of Contents

longer you wait before beginning to take withdrawals, the higher the Withdrawal Factor will be, which is one of the components used to determine the amount of your Withdrawal Limit. If you delay taking withdrawals too long, however, you may limit the number of years available for you to take withdrawals in the future (due to life expectancy) and you may be paying for a benefit you are not using.

 

Your Contract Value after taking a withdrawal may be less than the amount required to keep your contract in effect. In this event, or if your Contract Value is reduced to $100, the following will occur:

 

    If the Withdrawal Limit is less than $100, we will pay you the greatest of the Rider Death Benefit, the Contract Value and the present value of the Withdrawal Limit in a lump sum, calculated using the Annuity 2000 Mortality Table and an interest rate of 3%.

 

    If the Withdrawal Limit is greater than or equal to $100, we will begin income payments. We will make payments of a fixed amount for the life of the Annuitant or, if there are Joint Annuitants, the last surviving Annuitant. The fixed amount payable annually will equal the most recently calculated Withdrawal Limit. We will make payments monthly or on another periodic basis agreed by us. If the monthly amount is less than $100, we will reduce the frequency so that the payment will be at least $100. The Rider Death Benefit will continue under this provision. The Rider Death Benefit will be reduced by each payment. The Rider Death Benefit, if any, will be payable on the death of the last surviving Annuitant.

 

Death Provisions. At the death of the last surviving Annuitant, a death benefit may be payable under this contract and rider. The amount of any death benefit payable will be the greatest of (a), (b) and (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the death benefit as calculated under the base Contract;

 

  (b)   is the Rider Death Benefit; and

 

  (c)   is any amount payable by any other optional death benefit rider.

 

The death benefit payable will be paid according to the distribution rules under the contract.

 

If the designated beneficiary is a surviving spouse who is not an Annuitant, whose age is 45 through 80, and who elects to continue the contract as the new owner, this rider will continue. The Withdrawal Base and Roll-Up Value for the new owner will be the death benefit determined as of the first Valuation Day we receive at our Home Office due proof of death and all required forms. The Withdrawal Factor for the new owner will be based on the age of that owner on the date of the first Gross Withdrawal for that owner.

 

If the designated beneficiary is a surviving spouse who is an Annuitant and who elects to continue the contract as the owner, this rider will continue. The Withdrawal Base and Roll-Up Value will be the same as it was under the contract for the deceased owner. If no withdrawals were taken prior to the first Valuation Day we receive due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office, the Withdrawal Factor for the surviving spouse will be established based on the attained age of the surviving spouse on the date of the first Gross Withdrawal for the surviving spouse. Otherwise, the Withdrawal Factor will continue as it was under the contract for the deceased Owner.

 

If the surviving spouse cannot continue the rider, the rider and the rider charge will terminate on the next contract anniversary.

 

Proceeds that were transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund upon the death of the owner will be reallocated to the Investment Strategy, if applicable, and the asset percentages then in effect at the time of the death of the owner. Such reallocations will not be counted as a transfer for the purpose of the number of transfers allowed under the contract in a calendar year.

 

Rider Death Benefit. This rider provides for a death benefit (the “Rider Death Benefit”) that, on the Contract Date, is equal to the initial premium payment. The Rider Death Benefit is used to determine the death benefit, if any, payable upon the death of the last surviving Annuitant as described in the “Death Provisions” section above.

 

Premium payments applied to your contract in a Benefit Year increase the Rider Death Benefit. If you have allocated all assets to the Investment Strategy from the Benefit Date, any subsequent premium payment will be added to the Rider Death Benefit. Otherwise, the Rider Death Benefit will be increased only by 50% of the premium payment.

 

Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year decrease the Rider Death Benefit. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is less than or equal to the Withdrawal Limit, the Rider Death Benefit will be reduced by the Gross Withdrawal. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Rider Death Benefit will equal the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

95


Table of Contents
  (b)   is the prior Rider Death Benefit minus the Gross Withdrawal.

 

If you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy, your Rider Death Benefit will be reduced as described in the “Impact of Violating the Investment Strategy on the Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit” provision above.

 

Considerations. While the rider is designed to provide life-time withdrawal benefits, these benefits are only guaranteed to the extent you comply with the limits, conditions and restrictions set forth in the contract.

 

Rider Charge. We assess a charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided by the rider. The charge for Lifetime Income Plus 2007 for those contracts that reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 is equal to 1.25% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for both single Annuitant and Joint Annuitant contracts. The charge for Lifetime Income Plus 2007 for those contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 is equal to 0.75% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for single Annuitant contracts and 0.85% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for Joint Annuitant contracts. Once a contract is a Joint Annuitant contract, and the Joint Annuitant charge is applied, the Joint Annuitant rider charge will continue while the rider is in effect.

 

The deduction for the rider charge from the Separate Account is reflected in your Contract Value. The charge for this rider continues even if you do not allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy and the benefits you are eligible to receive are reduced. If you reset your benefit and allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy available at that time, we will reset the charge for the rider, which may be higher than your previous charge, but will never exceed an annualized rate of 2.00% of your daily net assets in the Separate Account.

 

Please note that you will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals under the rider for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

 

When the Rider is Effective

 

If available, Lifetime Income Plus 2007 must be elected at application. The rider will remain in effect while the contract is in force and before the Maturity Date. The rider may not be terminated prior to the Maturity Date. On the Maturity Date, the rider, and the benefits you are eligible to receive thereunder, will terminate.

 

At any time before the Maturity Date, you can elect to annuitize under current annuity rates in lieu of continuing Lifetime Income Plus 2007. This may provide a higher income amount and/or more favorable tax treatment than payments made under this rider.

 

Change of Ownership

 

We must approve any assignment or sale of this contract unless the assignment is a court ordered assignment.

 

General Provisions

 

For purposes of this rider:

 

    A non-natural entity owner must name an Annuitant and may name the Annuitant’s spouse as a Joint Annuitant.

 

    An individual owner must also be an Annuitant and may name his or her spouse as a Joint Annuitant at issue.

 

    A joint owner must be the owner’s spouse.

 

    If you marry after issue, you may add your spouse as a joint owner and Joint Annuitant or as a Joint Annuitant only, subject to our approval.

 

    Under federal tax law, all contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

 

Civil union partners are not permitted to continue the contract without taking required distributions upon the death of an owner. Therefore, even if named a joint owner/Joint Annuitant, a civil union partner will have to take required distributions upon the death of the other joint owner/Joint Annuitant. See the “Distribution Rules” provision of this prospectus. If this situation applies to you, you should consult a tax adviser.

 

96


Table of Contents

Examples

 

The following examples show how Lifetime Income Plus 2007 works based on hypothetical values. The examples are for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to depict investment performance of the contract and, therefore, should not be relied upon in making a decision to invest in the rider or contract.

 

This example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $5,000 (5% of $100,000) is applied to the contract;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (4)   all Contract Value is allocated in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy at all times;

 

  (5)   the owner is age 62 at issue, waits 8 years to take a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 6%;

 

  (6)   the Roll-Up Value increases until age 70;

 

  (7)   the contract earns a net return of -2%;

 

  (8)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the greater of the Contract Value as of the prior contract anniversary, the Withdrawal Base and the Rollup Value) for the rest of the owner's life; and

 

  (9)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –

End of Year

   

Contract Value –

Beginning of Year

   

Withdrawals

Taken –

End of Year

   

Contract Value –

End of Year

   

Withdrawal

Base –

End of Year

   

Roll-Up Value –

End of Year

   

Rider Death

Benefit –

End of Year

 
  63     $ 105,000       —      $ 102,900     $ 100,000     $ 105,000     $ 102,900  
  64       102,900       —        100,842       102,900       110,000       100,842  
  65       100,842       —        98,825       102,900       115,000       100,000  
  66       98,825       —        96,849       102,900       120,000       100,000  
  67       96,849       —        94,912       102,900       125,000       100,000  
  68       94,912       —        93,013       102,900       130,000       100,000  
  69       93,013       —        91,153       102,900       135,000       100,000  
  70       91,153     $ 8,400       80,930       102,900       140,000       90,597  
  71       80,930       8,400       70,912       102,900       140,000       81,001  
  72       70,912       8,400       61,093       102,900       140,000       71,210  
  73       61,093       8,400       51,471       102,900       140,000       61,220  
  74       51,471       8,400       42,042       102,900       140,000       51,025  
  75       42,042       8,400       32,801       102,900       140,000       40,622  
  76       32,801       8,400       23,745       102,900       140,000       30,007  
  77       23,745       8,400       14,870       102,900       140,000       19,175  
  78       14,870       8,400       6,148       102,900       140,000       8,103  
  79       6,148       8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  80       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  81       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  82       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  83       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  84       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  85       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  86       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  87       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  88       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  89       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   
  90       —        8,400       —        102,900       140,000       —   

 

97


Table of Contents

This next example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $5,000 (5% of $100,000) is applied to the contract;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (4)   all Contract Value is allocated in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy at all times;

 

  (5)   the owner is age 77 at issue, waits 5 years to take a withdrawal, and has a Withdrawal Factor of 7%;

 

  (6)   the Roll-Up Value increases for 5 years;

 

  (7)   the contract earns a net return of -2%;

 

  (8)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the greater of the Contract Value as of the prior contract anniversary, the Withdrawal Base and the Rollup Value) for the rest of the owner's life; and

 

  (9)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –

End of Year

   

Contract Value –

Beginning of Year

   

Withdrawals

Taken –

End of Year

   

Contract Value –

End of Year

   

Withdrawal

Base –

End of Year

   

Roll-Up Value –

End of Year

   

Rider Death
Benefit –

End of Year

 
  78     $ 105,000       —      $ 102,900     $ 100,000     $ 105,000     $ 102,900  
  79       102,900       —        100,842       102,900       110,000       100,842  
  80       100,842       —        98,825       102,900       115,000       100,000  
  81       98,825       —        96,849       102,900       120,000       100,000  
  82       96,849     $ 8,750       86,162       102,900       125,000       90,781  
  83       86,162       8,750       75,688       102,900       125,000       81,374  
  84       75,688       8,750       65,425       102,900       125,000       71,774  
  85       65,425       8,750       55,366       102,900       125,000       61,979  
  86       55,366       8,750       45,509       102,900       125,000       51,984  
  87       45,509       8,750       35,849       102,900       125,000       41,785  
  88       35,849       8,750       26,382       102,900       125,000       31,378  
  89       26,382       8,750       17,104       102,900       125,000       20,759  
  90       17,104       8,750       7,987       102,900       125,000       9,906  

 

98


Table of Contents

This next example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $5,000 (5% of $100,000) is applied to the contract;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (4)   all Contract Value is allocated in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy at all times;

 

  (5)   the owner is age 65 at issue and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (6)   the Roll-Up Value increases for 1 year;

 

  (7)   the contract earns a net return of 8%;

 

  (8)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the greater of the Contract Value as of the prior contract anniversary, the Withdrawal Base and the Rollup Value) for the rest of the owner's life;

 

  (9)   the Withdrawal Base is systematically reset annually on the contract anniversary; and

 

  (10)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age –

End of Year

   

Contract Value –

Beginning of Year

   

Withdrawals

Taken –

End of Year

   

Contract Value –

End of Year

   

Withdrawal

Base –

End of Year

   

Roll-Up Value –

End of Year

   

Rider Death

Benefit –

End of Year

 
  66     $ 105,000     $ 5,775     $ 107,625     $ 100,000     $ 105,000     $ 107,625  
  67       107,625       5,919       110,316       107,625       105,000       110,316  
  68       110,316       6,067       113,074       110,316       105,000       113,074  
  69       113,074       6,219       115,900       113,074       105,000       115,900  
  70       115,900       6,375       118,798       115,900       105,000       118,798  
  71       118,798       6,534       121,768       118,798       105,000       121,768  
  72       121,768       6,697       124,812       121,768       105,000       124,812  
  73       124,812       6,865       127,932       124,812       105,000       127,932  
  74       127,932       7,036       131,131       127,932       105,000       131,131  
  75       131,131       7,212       134,409       131,131       105,000       134,409  
  76       134,409       7,392       137,769       134,409       105,000       137,769  
  77       137,769       7,577       141,213       137,769       105,000       141,213  
  78       141,213       7,767       144,744       141,213       105,000       144,744  
  79       144,744       7,961       148,362       144,744       105,000       148,362  
  80       148,362       8,160       152,071       148,362       105,000       152,071  
  81       152,071       8,364       155,873       152,071       105,000       155,873  
  82       155,873       8,573       159,770       155,873       105,000       159,770  
  83       159,770       8,787       163,764       159,770       105,000       163,764  
  84       163,764       9,007       167,858       163,764       105,000       167,858  
  85       167,858       9,232       172,055       167,858       105,000       172,055  
  86       172,055       9,463       176,356       172,055       105,000       176,356  
  87       176,356       9,700       180,765       176,356       105,000       180,765  
  88       180,765       9,942       185,284       180,765       105,000       185,284  
  89       185,284       10,191       189,916       185,284       105,000       189,916  
  90       189,916       10,445       194,664       189,916       105,000       194,664  

 

99


Table of Contents

Lifetime Income Plus

 

Lifetime Income Plus provides guaranteed withdrawals for the life of the Annuitant(s), at least equal to premium payments, with upside potential, provided you meet certain conditions. If you:

 

    allocate all Contract Value to the prescribed Investment Strategy; and

 

    limit total Gross Withdrawals in each Benefit Year to an amount no greater than the Withdrawal Limit;

 

then you will be eligible to receive total Gross Withdrawals in each Benefit Year equal to the Withdrawal Limit until the last death of an Annuitant.

 

For important information about the Investment Strategy, please see the “Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus and Lifetime Income Plus 2007” provision below.

 

The guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided under the rider may be reduced or lost based on the withdrawals you take from the contract. For example, your guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit will be reduced if you take excess withdrawals in a Benefit Year. See the “Withdrawals” provision below. Your benefit will also be reduced if you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy. See the “Impact of Violating the Investment Strategy on the Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit” provision below. You will also lose the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract. In addition, you will no longer receive lifetime payments of your guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit if (i)(a) after a withdrawal, your Contract Value is less than the amount required to keep your contract in effect or (b) your Contract Value is reduced to $0 and (ii) your Withdrawal Limit is less than $100. Instead, you could receive, at least, a lump sum equal to the present value of future lifetime payments in the amount of the Withdrawal Limit.

 

The Rider Death Benefit provided under the rider, if elected, will be reduced and may be lost based on withdrawals you take from the contract. Your benefit will also be reduced if you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy. See the “Impact of Violating the Investment Strategy on the Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit” provision below. You will also lose the Rider Death Benefit if you annuitize or surrender the contract.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Lifetime Income Plus is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Withdrawal Limit. The Withdrawal Limit is calculated on each Valuation Day. The Withdrawal Limit is (a) multiplied by (b) where:

 

  (a)   is the greater of the Contract Value on the prior contract anniversary and the Withdrawal Base; and

 

  (b)   is the Withdrawal Factor.

 

Withdrawal Base. The Withdrawal Base is an amount used to establish the Withdrawal Limit. The Withdrawal Factor is established based on the attained age of the younger Annuitant on the earlier of the Valuation Day of the first Gross Withdrawal and the Valuation Day when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

 

Your initial Withdrawal Base is equal to your initial premium payment received and is adjusted when any subsequent premium payment is received, as described in the “Premium Payments” provision.

 

Premium Payments. Any premium payment applied to your contract will adjust your Withdrawal Base and your Rider Death Benefit. Please note that we do not consider Bonus Credits as “premium payments” for purposes of the contract and this rider. Therefore, any applicable Bonus Credit will not be included in the Withdrawal Base or the Rider Death Benefit. You will have to reset your benefit under the terms of the rider to capture the Bonus Credit or any related earnings in the Withdrawal Base.

 

In order to obtain the full benefit provided by this rider, you must allocate all assets to the prescribed Investment Strategy since the Benefit Date. If you have allocated all assets to the prescribed Investment Strategy since the Benefit Date, any subsequent premium payment will be added to the Withdrawal Base and the Rider Death Benefit. If you have not allocated all assets to the prescribed Investment Strategy, the Withdrawal Base still will be increased by the amount of the premium payment, but the Rider Death Benefit will be increased only by 50% of the premium payment.

 

Important Note.We reserve the right to not adjust the Withdrawal Base and/or the Rider Death Benefit for any subsequent premium payments received. As a result, it is possible that you would not be able to make subsequent premium payments after the initial premium payment to take advantage of the benefits provided by Lifetime Income Plus that would be associated with such additional premium payments. For example, if you make premium payments that are not included in the calculation of your Withdrawal Base or the Rider Death Benefit, you will pay a higher rider charge to the extent that the premium payments increase the Contract Value upon which the charge is imposed. Also, to the extent your Contract Value is increased by such premium payments, you

 

100


Table of Contents

are less likely to realize any benefit under Lifetime Income Plus, because it is less likely that your Contract Value will be less than the Withdrawal Base. Bonus Credits will have a similar effect on your contract because they increase Contract Value but do not adjust the Withdrawal Base or the Rider Death Benefit when they are applied to the contract. Before making premium payments that do not increase the Withdrawal Base or Rider Death Benefit, you should consider that: (i) the guaranteed amounts provided by the Withdrawal Base and the Rider Death Benefit will not include such premium payments or Bonus Credits; (ii) any such premium payments or Bonus Credits make it less likely that you will receive a benefit in the form of an additional amount even if your Contract Value has declined; and (iii) this rider may not make sense for you if you intend to make premium payments that will not increase the Withdrawal Base and the Rider Death Benefit.

 

Impact of Violating the Investment Strategy on the Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit. Beginning on the first Valuation Day after you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy, your Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit will be reduced by 50%.

 

You may elect to resume participation in the Investment Strategy, as described in the “Restoration or Reset of the Benefit” provision below, provided we receive notice of your election at our Home Office in a form acceptable to us.

 

We will not reduce your Withdrawal Factor or Rider Death Benefit if you are not following the Investment Strategy due to a Portfolio liquidation or a Portfolio dissolution and the assets are transferred from the liquidated or dissolved Portfolio to another Portfolio.

 

Restoration or Reset of the Benefit

 

Restoration. If your Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit have been reduced because you have not allocated all assets to the prescribed Investment Strategy, you will have a one-time opportunity to restore your Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit.

 

Reset. If all of the Annuitants are ages 50 through 80, you may choose to reset your Withdrawal Base on an annual anniversary of the Contract Date that is at least 12 months after the later of the Contract Date and the last reset date.

 

If you do reset your Withdrawal Base, as of that date, we will:

 

    reset the Withdrawal Base to your Contract Value;

 

    reset the charge for this rider. The new charge, which may be higher than your previous charge, will never exceed 2.00% annually; and

 

    reset the Investment Strategy to the current Investment Strategy.

 

Effective on and after July 15, 2019, the charge for Lifetime Income Plus increased, on an annual basis, to 1.25% upon reset of the Withdrawal Base. The rider charge increase applies to both single Annuitant and Joint Annuitant contracts regardless of the date the contract was issued. If you are potentially impacted, you will receive written notice in advance of your contract anniversary informing you of your options as well as a discussion of certain circumstances in which a reset would not be in your best interest. If your rider is scheduled to systematically reset, you will have the opportunity to opt-out of the systematic reset and resulting rider charge increase. If you have to request a manual reset, you will have the opportunity to reset and, if you reset, incur the higher rider charge. We reserve the right to discontinue sending written notice of the potential impact of a reset after we send you the first notice.

 

101


Table of Contents

There are similarities as well as distinct differences between restoring your Withdrawal Factor and resetting your Withdrawal Base and Withdrawal Factor. The following provides a comparison of those similarities and differences:

 

Restore Provision   Reset Provision
You may restore on a contract anniversary once during the life of this rider.   You may reset on a contract anniversary periodically after your Benefit Date.
You must allocate all assets to the prescribed Investment Strategy in effect as of the last Benefit Date prior to the reduction in benefits.   You must allocate all assets to the prescribed Investment Strategy available as of the date of the reset.
Your rider charge assessed will remain the same as the charge that was in effect as of your last Benefit Date prior to the reduction in benefits.   Your rider charge may increase, not to exceed an annualized rate of 2.00% of assets in the Separate Account, calculated on a daily basis.
Your Withdrawal Base will be the lesser of the current Contract Value and your prior Withdrawal Base.   Your Withdrawal Base will be reset to equal your Contract Value as of the date you reset your benefit.
The Withdrawal Factor will be restored to 100% of the original age Withdrawal Factor.   The Withdrawal Factor will be reset to 100% of the original age Withdrawal Factor.
The Rider Death Benefit will be the lesser of Contract Value and total premium payments less Gross Withdrawals.   The Rider Death Benefit will be the lesser of Contract Value and total premium payments less Gross Withdrawals.

 

For either a restoration of your Withdrawal Factor, or a reset of your Withdrawal Base, we must receive notice of your election in writing at our Home Office, at least 15 days prior to your next contract anniversary. You may restore your Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit once during the life of your contract.

 

You may not use the restore or reset provision if any Annuitant is older than age 80 on the contract anniversary. We reserve the right to limit the restoration date to a contract anniversary on or after three complete years from the Benefit Date.

 

Systematic Resets. You may elect to reset your Withdrawal Base automatically on an available contract anniversary (a “systematic reset”). If you have not previously elected to systematically reset your benefit, or if your election has terminated, we must receive written notice of your election to systematically reset your benefit at our Home Office at least 15 days prior to your next contract anniversary.

 

A systematic reset of your Withdrawal Base will occur when your contract value is higher than the Withdrawal Base as of the available contract anniversary or, if the contract anniversary is not a Valuation Day, as of the next Valuation Day. By “available contract anniversary” we mean a contract anniversary on which you are eligible to reset your benefit, as such requirements (age and otherwise) are described herein.

 

Systematic resets will continue until and unless:

 

  (a)   the Investment Strategy is violated;

 

  (b)   the owner (or owners) submits a written request to our Home Office to terminate systematic resets;

 

  (c)   income payments begin via annuitization;

 

  (d)   the Investment Strategy changes, allocations are affected, and we do not receive confirmation from you at our Home Office of new allocations; or

 

  (e)   ownership changes.

 

Please note that a systematic reset will occur on an available contract anniversary if contract value is even nominally higher than the Withdrawal Base (e.g., as little as $1.00 or even $0.01 higher) and, therefore, a systematic reset may not be in your best interest because: (i) the charge for this rider may be higher than your previous charge; and (ii) the Investment Strategy will be reset to the current Investment Strategy (the Investment Strategy offered on the reset date). Please carefully consider whether it is in your best interest to elect to systematically reset your Withdrawal Base.

 

Withdrawals. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Withdrawal Base and Rider Death Benefit are reduced. The new Withdrawal Base equals the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

  (b)   is the prior Withdrawal Base minus the Gross Withdrawal.

 

The new Rider Death Benefit equals the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

102


Table of Contents
  (b)   is the prior Rider Death Benefit minus the Gross Withdrawal.

 

If the total Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year are less than or equal to the Withdrawal Limit, we will waive any surrender charge on such total Gross Withdrawals.

 

If all Contract Value is allocated to the Investment Strategy, the Withdrawal Limit will be increased for any Benefit Year to the extent necessary to meet any minimum distribution requirements based on life expectancy under federal tax law. This increase applies only to the required minimum distribution based on the Contract Value.

 

You should carefully consider when to begin taking withdrawals if you elected Lifetime Income Plus. The longer you wait before beginning to take withdrawals, the higher the Withdrawal Factor will be, which is one of the components used to determine the amount of your Withdrawal Limit. If you delay taking withdrawals too long, however, you may limit the number of years available for you to take withdrawals in the future (due to life expectancy) and you may be paying for a benefit you are not using.

 

Your Contract Value after taking a withdrawal may be less than the amount required to keep your contract in effect. In this event, or if your Contract Value becomes zero, your contract, all riders and endorsements, including this rider, will terminate and the following will occur:

 

    If the Withdrawal Limit is less than $100, we will pay you the greatest of the Rider Death Benefit, the Contract Value and the present value of the Withdrawal Limit in a lump sum calculated using the Annuity 2000 Mortality Table and an interest rate of 3%.

 

    If the Withdrawal Limit is greater than or equal to $100, we will issue you a supplemental contract. We will continue to pay you the Withdrawal Limit until the last death of an Annuitant. We will make payments monthly or on another periodic basis agreed to by us. If the monthly amount is less than $100, we will reduce the frequency, to no less than annually, so that the payment will be at least $100. The Rider Death Benefit will continue under the supplemental contract. The Rider Death Benefit will be reduced by each payment made under the supplemental contract. The Rider Death Benefit, if any, will be payable on the last death of an Annuitant.

 

Rider Death Benefit. This rider provides for a death benefit (the “Rider Death Benefit”) that, on the Contract Date, is equal to the initial premium payment. The Rider Death Benefit is used to determine the death benefit payable upon the death of the last Annuitant as described in the “Death Provisions” section below.

 

Premium payments applied to your contract in a Benefit Year increase the Rider Death Benefit. If you have allocated all assets to the Investment Strategy since the Benefit Date, any subsequent premium payment will be added to the Rider Death Benefit. Otherwise, the Rider Death Benefit will be increased only by 50% of the premium payment.

 

Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year decrease the Rider Death Benefit. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is less than or equal to the Withdrawal Limit, the Rider Death Benefit will be reduced by the Gross Withdrawal. If a Gross Withdrawal plus all prior Gross Withdrawals in a Benefit Year is in excess of the Withdrawal Limit, your Rider Death Benefit will equal the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day after the Gross Withdrawal; and

 

  (b)   is the prior Rider Death Benefit minus the Gross Withdrawal.

 

If you choose not to follow the Investment Strategy, your Rider Death Benefit will be reduced as described in the “Impact of Violating the Investment Strategy on the Withdrawal Factor and Rider Death Benefit” provision above.

 

Rider Charge. We assess a charge for the guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit provided by the rider. The charge for Lifetime Income Plus for those contracts that reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 is equal to 1.25% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for both single Annuitant and Joint Annuitant contracts. The charge for Lifetime Income Plus for those contracts that have not reset their Withdrawal Base on or after July 15, 2019 is equal to 0.60% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for single Annuitant contracts and 0.75% of the daily net assets in the Separate Account for Joint Annuitant contracts. Once a contract is a Joint Annuitant contract, and the Joint Annuitant charge is applied, the Joint Annuitant rider charge will continue while the rider is in effect.

 

The deduction for the rider charge from the Separate Account is reflected in your Contract Value. The charge for this rider continues even if you do not allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy and the benefits you are eligible to receive are reduced. If you reset your benefit and allocate assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy available at that time, we will reset the charge for the rider, which may be higher than your previous charge, but will never exceed an annualized rate of 2.00% of your daily net assets in the Separate Account.

 

103


Table of Contents

Please note that you will begin paying the rider charge as of the date the rider takes effect, even if you do not begin taking withdrawals under the rider for many years, or ever. We will not refund the charges you have paid under the rider if you never choose to take withdrawals and/or if you never receive any payments under the rider.

 

Considerations. While the rider is designed to provide life-time withdrawal benefits, these benefits are only guaranteed to the extent you comply with the limits, conditions and restrictions set forth in the contract.

 

When the Rider is Effective

 

Lifetime Income Plus must be elected at application. Lifetime Income Plus is not available for contracts issued on or after May 1, 2008. The rider will remain in effect while the contract is in force and before the Maturity Date. The rider may not be terminated prior to the Maturity Date. On the Maturity Date, the rider, and the benefits you are eligible to receive thereunder, will terminate.

 

At any time before the Maturity Date, you can elect to annuitize under current annuity rates in lieu of continuing Lifetime Income Plus. This may provide a higher income amount and/or more favorable tax treatment than payments made under this rider.

 

Change of Ownership

 

We must approve any assignment or sale of this contract unless the assignment is a court ordered assignment.

 

General Provisions

 

For purposes of this rider:

 

    A non-natural entity owner must name an Annuitant and may name the Annuitant’s spouse as a Joint Annuitant.

 

    An individual owner must also be an Annuitant.

 

    You may name only your spouse as a joint owner.

 

    If there is only one owner, that owner may name only his or her spouse as a Joint Annuitant at issue.

 

    If you marry after issue, you may add your spouse as a joint owner and Joint Annuitant or as a Joint Annuitant only, subject to our approval.

 

    Under federal tax law, all contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

 

Civil union partners are not permitted to continue the contract without taking required distributions upon the death of an owner. Therefore, even if named a joint owner/Joint Annuitant, a civil union partner will have to take required distributions upon the death of the other joint owner/Joint Annuitant. See the “Distribution Rules” provision of this prospectus. If this situation applies to you, you should consult a tax adviser.

 

Death Provisions

 

At the death of the last Annuitant, a death benefit may be payable under this contract and rider. The amount of any death benefit payable will be the greatest of (a), (b) and (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the death benefit as calculated under the base Contract;

 

  (b)   is the Rider Death Benefit; and

 

  (c)   is any amount payable by any other optional death benefit rider.

 

The death benefit payable will be paid according to the distribution rules under the contract.

 

If the designated beneficiary is a surviving spouse who is not an Annuitant, whose age is 50 through 80, and who elects to continue the contract as the new owner, this rider will continue. The Withdrawal Base for the new owner will be the death benefit determined as of the first Valuation Day we have receipt of due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office. The Withdrawal Factor for the new owner will be based on the age of that owner on the date of the first Gross Withdrawal for that owner.

 

If the designated beneficiary is a surviving spouse who is an Annuitant and who elects to continue the contract as the owner, this rider will continue. The Withdrawal Base will be the same as it was under the contract for the deceased owner. If no withdrawals were taken prior to the first Valuation Day we receive due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office, the Withdrawal Factor for the surviving spouse will be established based on the attained age of the surviving spouse on the date of the first Gross Withdrawal for the surviving spouse. Otherwise, the Withdrawal Factor will continue as it was under the contract for the deceased Owner.

 

If the surviving spouse cannot continue the rider, the rider and the rider charge will terminate on the next contract anniversary.

 

Proceeds that were transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund upon the death of the owner will be reallocated to the Investment Strategy, if applicable, and the asset percentages then in effect at the time of the death of the owner. Such reallocations will not be counted as a transfer for the purpose of the number of transfers allowed under the contract in a calendar year.

 

104


Table of Contents

Examples

 

The following examples show how Lifetime Income Plus works based on hypothetical values. The examples are for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to depict investment performance of the contract and, therefore, should not be relied upon in making a decision to invest in the rider or contract.

 

This example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $5,000 (5% of $100,000) is applied to the contract;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (4)   all Contract Value is allocated in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy at all times;

 

  (5)   the owner is age 65 at issue and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (6)   the contract earns a net return of -2%;

 

  (7)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the greater of the Contract Value as of the prior contract anniversary and the Withdrawal Base) until the Contract Value reduces to zero, at which time a supplemental contract is issued which pays the Withdrawal Limit for the rest of the owner’s life; and

 

  (8)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age     Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year
    Withdrawal
Base –
End of Year
    Rider Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  65     $ 105,000     $ 5,500     $ 97,400     $ 100,000     $ 94,500  
  66       97,400       5,500       89,952       100,000       89,000  
  67       89,952       5,500       82,653       100,000       83,500  
  68       82,653       5,500       75,500       100,000       78,000  
  69       75,500       5,500       68,490       100,000       72,500  
  70       68,490       5,500       61,620       100,000       67,000  
  71       61,620       5,500       54,888       100,000       61,500  
  72       54,888       5,500       48,290       100,000       56,000  
  73       48,290       5,500       41,824       100,000       50,500  
  74       41,824       5,500       35,488       100,000       45,000  
  75       35,488       5,500       29,278       100,000       39,500  
  76       29,278       5,500       23,192       100,000       34,000  
  77       23,192       5,500       17,229       100,000       28,500  
  78       17,229       5,500       11,384       100,000       23,000  
  79       11,384       5,500       5,631       100,000       17,500  
  80       5,631       5,500       0       100,000       12,000  
  81       0       5,500       0       100,000       6,500  
  82       0       5,500       0       100,000       1,000  
  83       0       5,500       0       100,000       0  
  84       0       5,500       0       100,000       0  
  85       0       5,500       0       100,000       0  
  86       0       5,500       0       100,000       0  
  87       0       5,500       0       100,000       0  
  88       0       5,500       0       100,000       0  
  89       0       5,500       0       100,000       0  

 

105


Table of Contents

This next example assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $5,000 (5% of $100,000) is applied to the contract;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (4)   all Contract Value is allocated in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy at all times;

 

  (5)   the owner is age 65 at issue and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (6)   the contract earns a net return of 8%;

 

  (7)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to the Withdrawal Limit (which is the Withdrawal Factor multiplied by the greater of the Contract Value as of the prior contract anniversary and the Withdrawal Base) for the rest of the owner’s life;

 

  (8)   the owner resets the Withdrawal Base on each contract anniversary; and

 

  (9)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age     Contract Value –
Beginning of Year
    Withdrawals
Taken –
End of Year
    Contract Value –
End of Year
    Withdrawal
Base –
End of Year
    Rider Death
Benefit –
End of Year
 
  65     $ 105,000     $ 5,500     $ 107,900     $ 100,000     $ 94,500  
  66       107,900       5,935       110,598       107,900       88,566  
  67       110,598       6,083       113,362       110,598       82,483  
  68       113,362       6,235       116,196       113,362       76,248  
  69       116,196       6,391       119,101       116,196       69,857  
  70       119,101       6,551       122,079       119,101       63,306  
  71       122,079       6,714       125,131       122,079       56,592  
  72       125,131       6,882       128,259       125,131       49,710  
  73       128,259       7,054       131,466       128,259       42,656  
  74       131,466       7,231       134,752       131,466       35,425  
  75       134,752       7,411       138,121       134,752       28,014  
  76       138,121       7,597       141,574       138,121       20,417  
  77       141,574       7,787       145,114       141,574       12,630  
  78       145,114       7,981       148,741       145,114       4,649  
  79       148,741       8,181       152,460       148,741       0  
  80       152,460       8,385       156,271       152,460       0  
  81       156,271       8,595       160,178       156,271       0  
  82       160,178       8,810       164,183       160,178       0  
  83       164,183       9,030       168,287       164,183       0  
  84       168,287       9,256       172,494       168,287       0  
  85       172,494       9,487       176,807       172,494       0  
  86       176,807       9,724       181,227       176,807       0  
  87       181,227       9,967       185,758       181,227       0  
  88       185,758       10,217       190,401       185,758       0  
  89       190,401       10,472       195,162       190,401       0  

 

106


Table of Contents

This next example demonstrates the effect of withdrawals exceeding the Withdrawal Limit. It assumes:

 

  (1)   the owner, who is also the Annuitant, purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $5,000 (5% of $100,000) is applied to the contract;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (4)   all Contract Value is allocated in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy at all times;

 

  (5)   the owner is age 65 at issue and has a Withdrawal Factor of 5.5%;

 

  (6)   the contract earns a net return of 8%;

 

  (7)   the owner takes partial withdrawals equal to $7,000 each year for the rest of the owner’s life;

 

  (8)   the owner resets his Withdrawal Base on each contract anniversary; and

 

  (9)   the owner dies upon reaching age 90.

 

Age    

Contract Value –

Beginning of Year

   

Withdrawals

Taken –

End of Year

   

Contract Value –

End of Year

   

Withdrawal

Limit –

Before Withdrawal

   

Withdrawal

Base –

End of Year

   

Rider Death

Benefit –

End of Year

 
  65     $ 105,000     $ 7,000     $ 106,400     $ 5,500     $ 93,000     $ 93,000  
  66       106,400       7,000       107,912       5,852       99,400       86,000  
  67       107,912       7,000       109,545       5,935       100,912       79,000  
  68       109,545       7,000       111,309       6,025       102,545       72,000  
  69       111,309       7,000       113,213       6,122       104,309       65,000  
  70       113,213       7,000       115,270       6,227       106,213       58,000  
  71       115,270       7,000       117,492       6,340       108,270       51,000  
  72       117,492       7,000       119,891       6,462       110,492       44,000  
  73       119,891       7,000       122,483       6,594       112,891       37,000  
  74       122,483       7,000       125,281       6,737       115,483       30,000  
  75       125,281       7,000       128,304       6,890       118,281       23,000  
  76       128,304       7,000       131,568       7,057       121,304       16,000  
  77       131,568       7,000       135,093       7,236       124,568       9,000  
  78       135,093       7,000       138,901       7,430       128,093       2,000  
  79       138,901       7,000       143,013       7,640       131,901       0  
  80       143,013       7,000       147,454       7,866       136,013       0  
  81       147,454       7,000       152,250       8,110       140,454       0  
  82       152,250       7,000       157,430       8,374       145,250       0  
  83       157,430       7,000       163,025       8,659       150,430       0  
  84       163,025       7,000       169,067       8,966       156,025       0  
  85       169,067       7,000       175,592       9,299       162,067       0  
  86       175,592       7,000       182,639       9,658       168,592       0  
  87       182,639       7,000       190,251       10,045       175,639       0  
  88       190,251       7,000       198,471       10,464       183,251       0  
  89       198,471       7,000       207,348       10,916       191,471       0  

 

107


Table of Contents

Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus and Lifetime Income Plus 2007

 

In order to receive the full benefit provided by Lifetime Income Plus and Lifetime Income Plus 2007, you must invest all premium payments and allocations in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy. If you do not allocate all assets in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy, your benefit under the rider will be reduced by 50%. Even if your benefit is reduced, you will continue to pay the full amount charged for the rider.

 

Contract owners that own Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution must always allocate assets in accordance with the Investment Strategy. The Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 is discussed above in the “Lifetime Income Plus 2008” provision of this prospectus. The Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus Solution is discussed above in the “Lifetime Income Plus Solution” provision of this prospectus.

 

Investment Strategies may change from time to time. You may allocate your assets in accordance with your Investment Strategy prescribed at the time the contract was issued, or in accordance with the Investment Strategy in effect at the time you reset your benefit. Therefore, you may have assets allocated to an Investment Strategy that is different than the Investment Strategy described in this prospectus. Your ability to choose different Investment Strategies is limited, as described below.

 

The Investment Strategy includes Designated Subaccounts and Asset Allocation Model C. Under this Investment Strategy, contract owners may allocate assets to either Asset Allocation Model C or to one or more Designated Subaccounts. Contract owners may not allocate assets to Asset Allocation Model C and one or more Designated Subaccounts. For more information about Asset Allocation Model C and the Subaccounts comprising Asset Allocation Model C and the Designated Subaccounts, please see the “Subaccounts” and “Asset Allocation Program” provisions of this prospectus.

 

On a monthly basis, we will rebalance your Contract Value to the Subaccounts in accordance with the percentages that you have chosen to invest in the Designated Subaccounts or in accordance with the allocations that comprise Asset Allocation Model C. In addition, we will also rebalance your Contract Value on any Valuation Day after any transaction involving a withdrawal, receipt of a premium payment or a transfer of Contract Value, unless you instruct us otherwise.

 

Shares of a Portfolio may become unavailable under the contract for new premium payments, transfers and asset rebalancing. As a result, shares of a Portfolio may also become unavailable under your Investment Strategy. Investment Strategies may be modified to respond to such events by removing unavailable Portfolios and adding new Portfolios as appropriate. Because such changes may affect your allocation instructions, you will need to provide updated allocation instructions to comply with the modified Investment Strategy. If you do not provide updated allocation instructions, any subsequent premium payments or transfers requesting payment to an unavailable Portfolio will be considered not in good order. Periodic rebalancing to unavailable Portfolios will cease and any imbalances in percentages due to lack of asset rebalancing will not cause a reduction in your benefit.

 

If you request a transfer or send a subsequent premium payment with allocation instructions to a Portfolio that is not part of the prescribed Investment Strategy, we will honor your instructions. Please be aware, however, that your total Contract Value will not be invested in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy and the guaranteed amount available for withdrawal will be reduced by 50%, resulting in a reduction in your benefit. You may reset your benefit on the next available reset date as described in the “Restoration or Reset of the Benefit” provision for the applicable Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit Rider Option.

 

The current Investment Strategy is as follows:

 

  (1)   owners may allocate assets to the following Designated Subaccounts:

 

AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. — AB VPS Balanced Hedged Allocation Portfolio — Class B;

 

AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) — Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series II shares;

 

BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. — BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund — Class III;

 

Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund — VIP Balanced Portfolio — Service Class 2;

 

Janus Aspen Series — Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Service Shares;

 

MFS® Variable Insurance Trust — MFS® Total Return Series — Service Class Shares; and/or

 

State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. —Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 3 Shares;

 

OR

 

  (2)   owners may allocate assets to Asset Allocation Model C.

 

108


Table of Contents

DEATH OF OWNER AND/OR ANNUITANT

 

For contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, the following provisions apply:

 

Distribution Provisions Upon Death of Owner or Joint Owner

 

In certain circumstances, federal tax law requires that distributions be made under this contract upon an individual’s death. Except as described below in the “Distribution Rules” provisions, a distribution is required upon the death of:

 

  (1)   an owner or joint owner; or

 

  (2)   the Annuitant or Contingent Annuitant if any owner or joint owner is a non-natural entity.

 

The amount of proceeds payable upon the death of an owner or joint owner (or the Annuitant or Contingent Annuitant if an owner or joint owner is a non-natural entity) and the methods available for distributing such proceeds are described below.

 

If any owner or joint owner who is not also an Annuitant dies prior to the Maturity Date, the amount of proceeds payable will be the Contract Value as of the first Valuation Day we have receipt of the request for surrender or choice of applicable payment choice, due proof of death and any required forms at our Home Office.

 

Death Benefit at Death of Any Annuitant Before the Maturity Date

 

If the Annuitant dies before the Maturity Date, regardless of whether the Annuitant is also an owner or joint owner, the amount of proceeds payable is the death benefit. Upon receipt at our Home Office of due proof of the Annuitant’s death and all required forms (generally, due proof of death is a certified copy of the death certificate or a certified copy of the decree of a court of competent jurisdiction as to the finding of death), a death benefit will be paid in accordance with your instructions, subject to distribution rules and termination of contract provisions discussed in the contract and elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

The death benefit choices we offer are:

 

  (1)   the Basic Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option;

 

  (3)   the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option;

 

  (4)   the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option; and

 

  (5)   the Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option.

 

We automatically provide the Basic Death Benefit to you. The death benefit rider options are available to you for an additional charge and the death benefit options must be elected at the time of application. You may elect the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider with Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution at the time of application. You may not elect any of the other optional death benefit riders with Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution. You may elect the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider with either the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider or the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider. You may not, however, elect the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider and the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider together or in any combination. The Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider may not be elected with any other death benefit rider.

 

The death benefit varies based on:

 

  (1)   the Annuitant’s age on the date the contract is issued;

 

  (2)   the Annuitant’s age on the date of his or her death;

 

  (3)   the number of contract years that elapse from the date the contract is issued until the date of the Annuitant’s death; and

 

  (4)   whether any premium taxes are due at the time the death benefit is paid.

 

Basic Death Benefit

 

The Basic Death Benefit available for all contracts issued is equal to the greater of:

 

  (a)   premium payments adjusted for any partial surrenders and any applicable premium taxes; and

 

  (b)   the Contract Value on the Valuation Day upon receipt of due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office.

 

Partial surrenders (including partial surrenders taken pursuant to the terms of Lifetime Income Plus or Lifetime Income Plus 2007) will reduce the death benefit proportionally by the same percentage that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

Please refer to Appendix B for an example of the calculation of the Basic Death Benefit.

 

Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option

 

The Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider adds an extra feature to the Basic Death Benefit. Under the Annual Step-Up Death

 

109


Table of Contents

Benefit Rider, the amount of death benefit proceeds we will pay upon receipt of due proof of death of the Annuitant and all required forms at our Home Office will be the greater of:

 

    the Basic Death Benefit; and

 

    the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option described below.

 

The following is the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit if the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued:

 

The Annual Step-Up Death Benefit on the Contract Date is the initial premium payment. The Annual Step-Up Death Benefit will be reset on each contract anniversary, up to and including the later of the fifth contract anniversary and the contract anniversary next following or coincident with the 80th birthday of the Annuitant and on the Valuation Day that we receive due proof of death and all require forms at our Home Office. At each reset date, the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit equals the greater of (a) and (b) where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value; and

 

  (b)   is the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit on the last reset date plus premium payments made since the last reset date, adjusted for any partial surrenders made and premium taxes paid since the last reset date.

 

Partial surrenders (including partial surrenders taken pursuant to the terms of a Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Rider) reduce the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit proportionally by the same percentage that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

The following is the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit if the Annuitant is older than age 80 on the date the contract is issued:

 

The Annual Step-Up Death Benefit on the Contract Date is the initial premium payment. The Annual Step-Up Death Benefit will be reset on each contract anniversary, up to and including the contract anniversary next following or coincident with the 85th birthday of the Annuitant and on the Valuation Day that we receive due proof of death and all require forms at our Home Office. At each reset date, the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit equals the greater of (a) and (b) where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value; and

 

  (b)   is the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit on the last reset date plus premium payments made since the last reset date, adjusted for any partial surrenders made and premium taxes paid since the last reset date.

 

Partial surrenders (including partial surrenders taken pursuant to the terms of a Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Rider) reduce the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit proportionally by the same percentage that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

You may only elect the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Option Rider at the time of application. Once elected, it may not be terminated and it will remain in effect while this contract is in force until income payments begin. On the Maturity Date, this rider and its corresponding charge will terminate.

 

We charge an additional amount for this benefit. This charge will not exceed an annual rate of 0.20% of your Contract Value at the time of the deduction. See the “Fee Tables” provision of this prospectus for additional information.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Please refer to Appendix B for an example of the calculation of the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option.

 

5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option

 

The 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider adds an extra feature to the Basic Death Benefit. Under the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider, the amount of death benefit proceeds we will pay upon receipt of due proof of death of the Annuitant and all required forms at our Home Office will be the greater of:

 

    the Basic Death Benefit; and

 

    the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option described below.

 

The 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option is available only to contracts where the Annuitant is age 75 or younger on the date the contract is issued.

 

The 5% Rollup Death Benefit on the Contract Date is the initial premium payment. At the end of each Valuation Period after the Contract Date, the 5% Rollup Death Benefit is equal to the lesser of (a) and (b) where:

 

  (a)   is 200% of premium payments; and

 

  (b)   is the Rollup Death Benefit at the end of the last Valuation Period increased by a daily interest factor, equivalent to a 5% annual effective interest rate, plus premium payments made during the current Valuation Period and adjusted for any partial surrenders and premium taxes paid during the current Valuation Period.

 

110


Table of Contents

Partial surrenders taken each contract year, up to 5% of premium payments, calculated at the time of the partial surrender, reduce the 5% Rollup Death Benefit by the same amount that the partial surrender, including any surrender charges any premium taxes paid, reduces the Contract Value. If partial surrenders greater than 5% of premium payments are taken in any contract year, the 5% Rollup Death Benefit is reduced proportionally for that partial surrender and all future partial surrenders by the same percentage that the partial surrender, including any surrender charges and any premium taxes paid, reduces the Contract Value.

 

Partial surrenders may have unintended consequences to your 5% Rollup Death Benefit. This benefit increases daily at a compounded rate of 5%. Because of this, any partial surrenders in a contract year that exceed the accumulated rollup interest, up to an amount equal to 5% of premium payments, will reduce the death benefit amount below the value at the start of the contract year.

 

You may only elect the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Option Rider at the time of application. Once elected, it may not be terminated and it will remain in effect while this contract is in force until income payments begin. On the Maturity Date, this rider and its corresponding charge will terminate.

 

We charge an additional amount for this benefit. This charge will not exceed an annual rate of 0.30% of your Contract Value at the time of the deduction. See the “Fee Tables” provision of this prospectus for additional information.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Please refer to Appendix B for an example of the calculation of the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option.

 

Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option

 

The Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider adds an extra feature to your death benefit. The Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider is available only to contracts where the Annuitant is age 75 or younger on the date the contract is issued.

 

The following is the Earnings Protector Death Benefit if the Annuitant is age 70 or younger on the date the contract is issued:

 

The Earnings Protector Death Benefit is equal to 40% of earnings which are defined as (a) minus (b) where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value as of the first Valuation Day we have receipt of due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office; and

 

  (b)   is the sum of all premium payments paid and not previously surrendered.

 

The Earnings Protector Death Benefit cannot exceed 70% of premium payments adjusted for partial surrenders. Premium payments, other than the initial premium payment, paid within 12 months of the date of the Annuitant’s death, are not included in this calculation. The Earnings Protector Death Benefit will never be less than zero.

 

The following is the Earnings Protector Death Benefit if the Annuitant is older than age 70 on the date the contract is issued:

 

The Earnings Protector Death Benefit is equal to 25% of earnings which are defined as (a) minus (b) where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value as of the first Valuation Day we have receipt of due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office; and

 

  (b)   is the sum of all premium payments paid and not previously surrendered.

 

The Earnings Protector Death Benefit cannot exceed 40% of premium payments paid as adjusted for partial surrenders. Premium payments, other than the initial premium payment, paid within 12 months of the date of the Annuitant’s death, are not included in this calculation. The Earnings Protector Death Benefit will never be less than zero.

 

Under both age scenarios listed above, partial surrenders are taken first from gain and then from premium payments made. For purposes of this rider, gain is calculated as (a) plus (b) minus (c) minus (d), but not less than zero, where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day we receive your partial surrender or total surrender request;

 

  (b)   is the total of any partial surrenders;

 

  (c)   is the total of premium payments paid; and

 

  (d)   is the total of any gain previously surrendered.

 

You may only elect the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option at the time of application. Once elected, it may not be terminated and it will remain in effect while the contract is in force until income payments begin. On the Maturity Date, this rider and its corresponding charge will terminate.

 

This charge will not exceed an annual rate of 0.30% of your Contract Value at the time of the deduction. See the “Fee Tables” provision of this prospectus for additional information.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

111


Table of Contents

Please refer to Appendix B for an example of the calculation of the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option.

 

There are important things you should consider before you purchase the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option. These include:

 

    The Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option does not guarantee that any amounts under the benefit will become payable at death. Market declines resulting in your Contract Value being less than your premium payments paid and not previously surrendered may result in no additional amount being payable.

 

    Once you purchase the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option, you cannot terminate it. This means that regardless of any changes in your circumstances, we will continue to assess a charge for the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option.

 

    Please take advantage of the guidance of a qualified financial adviser in evaluating the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option, as well as the other aspects of the contract.

 

The Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option

 

The Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option combines the Greater of the Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option plus the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option. Under this rider option, the amount of death benefit proceeds we will pay upon receipt of due proof of death of the Annuitant and all required forms at our Home Office will be the greatest of:

 

    the Basic Death Benefit;

 

    the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option described above; and

 

    the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option described above; plus

 

    the Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option described above.

 

You may only elect the Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option at the time of application. Once elected, it may not be terminated and it will remain in effect while this contract is in force until income payments begin. On the Maturity Date, this rider and its corresponding charge will terminate.

 

We charge an additional amount for this benefit. This charge will not exceed an annual rate of 0.70% of your Contract Value at the time of the deduction. See the “Fee Tables” provision of this prospectus for additional information.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the Earnings Protector and Greater of Annual Step-Up and 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Termination of Death Benefit Rider Options When Contract Assigned or Sold

 

Your death benefit rider options will terminate in the event that you assign or sell this contract, unless your contract is assigned or sold pursuant to a court order.

 

How to Claim Proceeds and/or Death Benefit Payments

 

At the death of:

 

  (1)   an owner or joint owner (or the Annuitant if any owner or joint owner is a non-natural entity); or

 

  (2)   the Annuitant;

 

the person or entity first listed below who is alive or in existence on the date of that death will become the designated beneficiary:

 

  (1)   owner or joint owner;

 

  (2)   primary beneficiary;

 

  (3)   contingent beneficiary;

 

  (4)   owner or joint owner’s estate.

 

The designated beneficiary will be treated thereafter as the sole owner of the contract. The designated beneficiary may choose one of the Payment Choices described below, or a default Payment Choice will apply if no such election is made. For purposes of this provision, if there is more than one primary beneficiary named, each one will be treated separately with respect to their portion of the contract. Thus, in cases where there are multiple designated beneficiaries, once all required information is received, each designated beneficiary will be allocated their share of the proceeds in accordance with the terms of the contract and as specified by the owner. Then, each designated beneficiary may elect one of the Payment Choices below or have the default Payment Choice apply. If there is no primary beneficiary(ies) alive or in existence at the time of the death, all proceeds will be then payable to any named contingent beneficiary(ies).

 

We should be notified immediately by telephone or in writing upon the death of an owner, joint owner or Annuitant. We have the right to request that any notification of death given by telephone be immediately followed by written notification. Upon notification, no additional premium payments will be accepted (unless the designated beneficiary is the spouse of the

 

112


Table of Contents

deceased and that spousal designated beneficiary has elected to continue the contract). Upon such notification of death, we will transfer all assets in the Separate Account to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund until receipt of due proof of death and any required forms. Due proof of death consists of a death certificate issued by a government jurisdiction or a court of law. Any required forms can consist of information necessary in order to pay any named designated beneficiary(ies) and any other information necessary to process applicable proceeds.

 

Payment Choices: The designated beneficiary may elect the form in which the proceeds will be paid from the following Payment Choices (and if no election is made, the default Payment Choice described below will apply):

 

  (1)   receive the proceeds in a lump sum;

 

  (2)   receive the proceeds over a period of five years following the date of death. At the end of the five year period, any remaining amount will be distributed in a lump sum (if the designated beneficiary dies before all payments have been distributed, the remaining proceeds will be paid to the person or entity named by the designated beneficiary or his or her estate if no person or entity is named);

 

  (3)   elect Optional Payment Plan (1) or (2) as described in the “Optional Payment Plans” provision of this prospectus. If elected, payments must commence no later than one year after the date of death. In addition, if Optional Payment Plan (1) is chosen, the period certain cannot exceed the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy, and if Optional Payment Plan (2) is chosen, the fixed period cannot exceed the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy;

 

  (4)   elect a “stretch” payment choice, as described in the “Stretch Payment Choices” provision below;

 

  (5)   if the designated beneficiary is the spouse of a deceased owner, he or she may continue the contract as stated in the “Distribution Rules” provision; or

 

  (6)   if the designated beneficiary is an owner or joint owner who is a natural person, he or she may continue the contract as stated in the “Distribution Rules” provision.

 

If a designated beneficiary makes no election within 60 days following receipt of due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office, payments will default to Payment Choice (2).

 

If your contract is a Qualified Contract, not all elections will satisfy required minimum distribution rules. Note that effective for owners who die on or after January 1, 2020, subject to certain exceptions, most non-spouse designated beneficiaries must now complete death benefit distributions within ten years of the owner’s death in order to satisfy required minimum distribution rules. Consult a tax adviser before making an election.

 

Stretch Payment Choices

 

The following payment choice is available to designated beneficiaries of Non-Qualified Contracts:

 

A designated beneficiary of a Non-Qualified Contract may apply the death proceeds of the contract to provide for an annual payment equal to the Minimum Annual Income, described below, for the life expectancy of the designated beneficiary. The first income payment must be made no later than 350 days after the original owner’s date of death. The income payment period must be a period not exceeding the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy. Payments will continue annually on the distribution date until the death of the designated beneficiary or the Contract Value is reduced to $0. Upon death of the designated beneficiary, the person or entity named by the designated beneficiary or, if no one is named, the designated beneficiary’s estate may receive the remaining Contract Value. The recipient may take the Contract Value as a lump sum or continue to receive the annual payment on the distribution date equal to the Minimum Annual Income, or until the Contract Value is reduced to $0.

 

The Minimum Annual Income is the amount withdrawn each year to satisfy Section 72(s)(2)(B) of the Code. The Minimum Annual Income will be re-determined each year for the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy using the Single Life Table in Section 1.401(a)(9)-9(b) of the Income Tax Regulations, as amended. After death, the Minimum Annual Income is calculated using the designated beneficiary’s remaining life expectancy. We may offer alternative calculations of Minimum Annual Income based on amortization or annuitization calculations methods described in guidance published by the Internal Revenue Service.

 

Special rules for this payment choice only:

 

    This payment choice cannot be selected if the Minimum Annual Income would be less than $100.

 

    The designated beneficiary must elect a distribution date on which payments will be made. The first distribution date must be no later than 350 days after the owner’s date of death.

 

    Amounts paid to satisfy the Minimum Annual Income will not be subject to surrender charges. Surrender charges will apply to amounts withdrawn above the Minimum Annual Income.

 

    Optional living benefit and death benefit riders are not available with this payment choice.

 

    Additional premium payments may not be added with this payment choice.

 

113


Table of Contents

Under this payment choice, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Contract Value.

 

The following payment choice is available to designated beneficiaries of Qualified Contracts or any beneficiary receiving death proceeds from any other individual retirement plan:

 

An inherited owner may apply death proceeds to provide for an annual payment equal to the Minimum Annual Income, described below. For purposes of this provision, an inherited owner is any designated beneficiary receiving death proceeds from a Qualified Contract or any beneficiary receiving death proceeds from any other individual retirement plan. A surviving spouse may elect to be treated as an inherited owner in lieu of exercising spousal continuation. The inherited owner will be named the Annuitant at election of the payment choice.

 

Payments under this payment choice will continue annually on the distribution date selected by the inherited owner, subject to the special rules stated below, until the death of the inherited owner or the Contract Value is reduced to $0. Upon death of the inherited owner, the person or entity named by the inherited owner or, if no one is named, the inherited owner’s estate may receive the remaining Contract Value. The recipient may take the Contract Value as a lump sum or continue to receive the annual payment on the distribution date equal to the Minimum Annual Income until the Contract Value is reduced to $0.

 

The Minimum Annual Income is the amount withdrawn each year to satisfy Section 408(b)(3) of the Code. The Minimum Annual Income will be based on the applicable distribution period for required minimum distributions after death, as provided in Section 1.401(a)(9)-5 A-5 of the Income Tax Regulations.

 

Special rules for this payment choice only:

 

    This payment choice cannot be selected if the Minimum Annual Income would be less than $100.

 

    The inherited owner must elect a distribution date on which payments will be made. If the inherited owner is the surviving spouse of the original IRA owner within the meaning of Section 401(a)(9)(B)(iv) of the Code, then the first distribution date elected must be the later of either: (i) December 15th of the year in which the deceased would have reached their required beginning date (as described under the “Qualified Retirement Plans” provision) or (ii) December 15th of the year following the original IRA owner’s death. If the inherited owner is not the surviving spouse of the original IRA owner, then the first distribution date elected must be within 350 days from the date of death. If the surviving spouse dies before the first distribution date, the first distribution date under this rider will be determined by treating death of the surviving spouse as death of the original IRA owner and the surviving spouse’s designated beneficiary as the inherited owner.

 

    Amounts paid to satisfy the Minimum Annual Income will not be subject to surrender charges. Surrender charges will apply to amounts withdrawn above the Minimum Annual Income.

 

    Optional living benefit and death benefit riders are not available with this payment choice.

 

    Additional premium payments may not be added with this payment choice

 

This payment choice will not satisfy required minimum distribution rules for designated beneficiaries other than “eligible designated beneficiaries” as defined in Section 401(a)(9)(H) of the Code. Consult a tax adviser before making this payment choice.

 

Under this payment choice, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Contract Value.

 

Spendthrift Provision. An owner may, by providing written notice to our Home Office in a manner acceptable to the Company, choose the method of payment of death proceeds under the contract by selecting any payment choice, including any Optional Payment Plan, that a designated beneficiary may have chosen. A designated beneficiary (other than the surviving spouse) cannot change the payment choice that the owner has selected. The owner may also specify at the time of electing an income payment option that any payments remaining to be made at the owner’s death cannot be commuted or assigned. While living, the owner may revoke any such limitations on the rights of the designated beneficiary by providing written notice of such revocation to our Home Office in a manner acceptable to the Company. If the payment choice selected by the owner does not apply to a designated beneficiary, the limitations imposed by this paragraph shall not apply to such designated beneficiary. For example, a payment choice based on an individual’s life does not apply to the owner’s estate and the estate would be free to make its own payment choice as designated beneficiary after the owner’s death.

 

Distribution Rules

 

When Death Occurs Before the Maturity Date

 

The distribution rules below apply to Non-Qualified Contracts that are generally treated as annuity contracts under the Code. These rules also apply where federal tax law does not provide alternative distribution rules. These rules do not apply to Qualified Contracts and, if alternative distribution rules apply, contracts that do not qualify as annuity contracts under federal tax law, and may not apply to contracts held by certain entities. For Qualified Contracts, the required minimum distribution

 

114


Table of Contents

provisions of the Code apply. The required minimum distribution rules are generally specified in the endorsement, plan document, or other writing establishing the plan or individual retirement arrangement. Note that effective for owners who die on or after January 1, 2020, subject to certain exceptions, most non-spouse designated beneficiaries must now complete death benefit distributions within ten years of the owner’s death in order to satisfy required minimum distribution rules. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus.

 

If the sole designated beneficiary is the spouse of the deceased, the spouse may continue the contract as the new owner. If the deceased was also an Annuitant, the spouse will automatically become the new sole Annuitant. As the new named owner and Annuitant, the spouse may exercise all rights as stated in the contract. Should the spouse remarry, the new spouse may not exercise this provision at the death of the surviving spouse. If the spouse is one of multiple designated beneficiaries, the spouse may only continue the contract with the proportion allocated to him or her by the owner as stated on the application or later in writing in a form acceptable to us.

 

If the designated beneficiary(ies) is not the spouse of the deceased, the designated beneficiary(ies) may not continue the contract indefinitely. If payment choice 1 or 2 is elected, the proceeds from the contract must be distributed within five years of the date of death. If payment choice 3 is elected (within 60 days following receipt of due proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office), payments will begin within one year of the date of the deceased owner’s death and extend over the designated beneficiary’s life or a period not longer than the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy.

 

If the designated beneficiary is an owner or joint owner, the owner (if the owner is a natural person) may continue the contract. Contract Value for the continued contract will be equal to the death benefit proceeds. If there is no Joint Annuitant, the Owner will become the new sole Annuitant. If there is a Joint Annuitant, the Joint Annuitant will become the sole Annuitant. The owner may exercise all rights as stated in the contract before an Annuitant’s death.

 

When Death Occurs On or After the Maturity Date

 

On or after the Maturity Date, if an owner, joint owner, Annuitant, or designated beneficiary dies while the contract is in force, payments that are already being made under the contract will be made at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution in effect at the time of death, notwithstanding any other provision of the contract.

 

DEATH OF OWNER AND/OR ANNUITANT

 

The following death benefit provisions apply to contracts issued prior to May 1, 2003, or prior to the date state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, unless noted otherwise.

 

Death Benefit at Death of Any Annuitant Before the Maturity Date

 

If the Annuitant dies before the Maturity Date, regardless of whether the Annuitant is also an owner or joint owner of the contract, the amount of proceeds available for the designated beneficiary (as defined below) is the death benefit. This death benefit may be referred to as the “Annual Estate ProtectorSM” in our marketing materials. Upon receipt of due proof of the Annuitant’s death (generally, due proof is a certified copy of the death certificate or a certified copy of the decree of a court of competent jurisdiction as to the finding of death), a death benefit will be paid in accordance with your instructions, subject to distribution rules and termination of contract provisions discussed in the contract and elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

The death benefit choices we offer are:

 

  (1)   the Basic Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit; and

 

  (3)   the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit.

 

We automatically provide the Basic Death Benefit to you. The Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit and the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit are available to you for an additional charge.

 

The death benefit varies based on:

 

  (1)   the Annuitant’s age on the date the contract is issued;

 

  (2)   the Annuitant’s age on the date of his or her death;

 

  (3)   the number of contract years that elapse from the date the contract is issued until the date of the Annuitant’s death; and

 

  (4)   whether any premium taxes are due at the time the death benefit is paid.

 

Basic Death Benefit

 

For contracts issued on or after the later of May 15, 2001, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, but prior to May 1, 2003, or prior to the date state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, the Basic Death Benefit will be as follows:

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract

 

115


Table of Contents

anniversary, the Basic Death Benefit will be equal to the greater of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (2)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the death benefit will be equal to the greatest of:

 

  (1)   the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and

 

  (b)   is premium payments received after such contract anniversary.

 

The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary.

 

  (2)   the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (3)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death.

 

We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

Please refer to Appendix B in this prospectus for an example of the Basic Death Benefit calculation.

 

For contracts issued prior to May 15, 2001, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, the Basic Death Benefit will be as follows:

 

The death benefit equals the sum of (a) and (b) where:

 

  (a)   the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (b)   is the excess, if any, of the unadjusted death benefit as of the date of the Annuitant’s death over the Contract Value as of the date of the Annuitant’s death, with interest credited on that excess from the date of the Annuitant’s death to the date of distribution. The rate credited may depend on applicable law or regulation. Otherwise, we will set it.

 

The unadjusted death benefit varies based on the Annuitant’s age at the time we issued the contract and on the Annuitant’s age at the time of death.

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greater of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value as of the date of death; and

 

  (2)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greatest of:

 

  (1)   the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and

 

  (b)   is premium payments received after such contract anniversary.

 

The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment for any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary.

 

  (2)   the Contract Value as of the date of death; and

 

  (3)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date of death.

 

We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders in (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

Please refer to Appendix B in this prospectus for an example of the Basic Death Benefit calculation.

 

116


Table of Contents

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

 

The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is available to contracts with Annuitants age 75 or younger at the time the contract is issued. If the owner elects the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit at the time of application, upon the death of the Annuitant, we will pay to the designated beneficiary, the greater of:

 

  (1)   the Basic Death Benefit; and

 

  (2)   the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

 

The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit may also be referenced in our marketing materials as the “Six Percent EstateProtectorSM.”

 

If the Annuitant dies on the first Valuation Day, the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit will be equal to the premium payments received.

 

If the Annuitant dies after the first Valuation Day, then at the end of each Valuation Period until the contract anniversary on which the Annuitant attains age 80, the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit equals the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the total of all premium payments we receive, multiplied by two, adjusted for any partial surrenders taken prior to or during that Valuation Period; and

 

  (b)   is the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit of the preceding Valuation Period, with assets in the Subaccounts increased by an effective annual rate of 6% (an “increase factor”); this does not include assets allocated to the Subaccount investing in the available Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund, plus any additional premium payments we received during the current Valuation Period, adjusted for any partial surrenders taken during the current Valuation period.

 

We will adjust the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit for partial surrenders proportionally by the same percentage that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

For assets in the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund, the increase factor is equal to the lesser of:

 

  (1)   the net investment factor of the Subaccount for Valuation Period, minus one; and

 

  (2)   a factor for the Valuation Period equivalent to an effective annual rate of 6%.

 

For assets allocated to the Guarantee Account, the increase factor is equal to the lesser of:

 

  (1)   the factor for the Valuation Period equivalent to the credited rate(s) applicable to such allocations; and

 

  (2)   a factor for the Valuation Period equivalent to an effective annual rate of 6%.

 

After the Annuitant attains age 80, the increase factor will be zero (0). The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is effective on the Contract Date (unless another effective date is shown on the contract data page) and will remain in effect while the contract is in force and before income payments begin, or until the contract anniversary following the date we receive your written request to terminate the benefit. If we receive your request to terminate the benefit within 30 days following any contract anniversary, we will terminate the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit as of that contract anniversary.

 

We charge you for the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We deduct this charge against the Contract Value at each contract anniversary after the first and at the time you fully surrender the contract. At full surrender, we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge. Currently, this charge is equal to an annual rate of 0.25% of your prior contract year’s average Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We guarantee that this charge will not exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your prior contract year’s average Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. The rate charged to your contract will be fixed at the time your contract is issued. See the “Charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit” provision of this prospectus.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Please refer to Appendix B for an example of the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit calculation.

 

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit

 

The Optional Enhanced Death Benefit (which may be referred to as “Earnings Protector” in our marketing materials) adds an extra feature to our Basic Death Benefit and, if applicable, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

 

You may only elect the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit at the time of application. Once elected, the benefit will remain in effect while your contract is in force until income payments begin. You cannot otherwise terminate this benefit.

 

We charge you an additional amount for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit. Currently, this amount is an annual rate of 0.20% of the average of:

 

  (1)   your Contract Value at the beginning of the previous contract year; and

 

  (2)   your Contract Value at the end of the previous contract year.

 

The charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit is taken on each contract anniversary. We guarantee that this charge will not exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your average Contract

 

117


Table of Contents

Value, as described above. The rate that applies to your contract will be fixed at issue. See the “Charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit” provision of this prospectus.

 

In addition, to be eligible for this rider, the Annuitant cannot be older than age 75 at the time the contract is issued unless we approve a different age. Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

The Optional Enhanced Death Benefit varies based on the age of the Annuitant at issue. Your optional Enhanced Death Benefit will never be less than zero.

 

If the Annuitant is age 70 or younger at the date the contract is issued, the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit equals 40% of (a) minus (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (b)   premiums paid, not previously surrendered.

 

This death benefit cannot exceed 70% of premiums paid adjusted for partial surrenders. Premiums, other than the initial premium, paid within 12 months of death are not included in this calculation.

 

If the Annuitant is older than age 70 at the time the contract is issued, the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit equals 25% of (a) minus (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (b)   premiums paid, not previously surrendered.

 

This death benefit cannot exceed 40% of premiums paid, adjusted for partial surrenders. Premiums, other than the initial premium, paid within 12 months of death are not included in this calculation.

 

Under both age scenarios listed above, we take partial surrenders first from gain and then from premiums paid. For purposes of this benefit, we calculate gain as (a) plus (b) minus (c) minus (d), but not less than zero, where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the date we receive your partial surrender request;

 

  (b)   is the total of any partial surrenders, excluding surrender charges, previously taken;

 

  (c)   is the total of premiums paid; and

 

  (d)   is the total of any gain previously surrendered.

 

Please refer to Appendix B for an example of the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit calculation.

 

There are important things you should consider before you purchase the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit. These include:

 

    The Optional Enhanced Death Benefit does not guarantee that any amounts under the benefit will become payable at death. Market declines resulting in your Contract Value being less than your premiums paid and not previously surrendered may result in no Enhanced Death Benefit being payable.

 

    Once you purchase the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit, you cannot terminate it. This means that regardless of any changes in your circumstances, we will continue to assess a charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit.

 

    Please take advantage of the guidance of a qualified financial adviser in evaluating the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit option, as well as the other aspects of the contract.

 

When We Calculate the Death Benefit

 

We will calculate the Basic Death Benefit, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, and Optional Enhanced Death Benefit on the date we receive due proof of death at our Home Office. Until we receive complete written instructions satisfactory to us from the beneficiary, the assets will remain allocated to the Separate Account and/or the Guarantee Account, according to your last instructions. This means that the calculated death benefit will fluctuate with the performance of the Subaccounts in which you are invested.

 

Death of an Owner or Joint Owner Before the Maturity Date

 

In certain circumstances, federal tax law requires that distributions be made under this contract upon the first death of:

 

    an owner or joint owner (or the Annuitant if any owner is a non-natural entity); or

 

    the Annuitant.

 

The discussion below describes the methods available for distributing the value of the contract upon death.

 

At the death of any owner (or Annuitant, if the owner is a non-natural entity), the person or entity first listed below who is alive or in existence on the date of that death will become the designated beneficiary:

 

  (1)   owner or joint owner;

 

  (2)   primary beneficiary;

 

  (3)   contingent beneficiary; or

 

  (4)   owner’s estate.

 

118


Table of Contents

We then will treat the designated beneficiary as the sole owner of the contract. If there is more than one designated beneficiary, we will treat each one separately in applying the tax law’s rules described below.

 

Distribution Rules: Distributions required by federal tax law differ depending on whether the designated beneficiary is the spouse of the deceased owner (or the spouse of the deceased Annuitant, if the contract is owned by a non-natural entity).

 

    Spouses — If the designated beneficiary is the spouse of the deceased, the spouse may continue the contract as the new owner. If the deceased was the Annuitant, and there was no surviving contingent Annuitant, the spouse will automatically become the new Annuitant. At the death of the spouse, this provision may not be used again, even if the spouse remarries. In such case, the entire interest in the contract will be paid within 5 years of such spouse’s death to the beneficiary named by the spouse. If no beneficiary is named, such payment will be made to the spouse’s estate. The amount payable will be equal to the death benefit on the date we receive due proof of the Annuitant’s death. Any increase in the Contract Value will be allocated to the Subaccounts and/or the Guarantee Account using the premium allocation in effect at that time. Any death benefit payable subsequently (at the death of the new Annuitant) will be calculated as if the spouse had purchased a contract for the new Contract Value on the date we received due proof of death. Any death benefit will be based on the new Annuitant’s age as of the date we receive due proof of death of the original owner, rather than the age of the previously deceased Annuitant. All other provisions will continue as if the spouse had purchased the contract on the original Contract Date.

 

    Non-Spouses — If the designated beneficiary is not the spouse of the deceased person, this contract cannot be continued in force indefinitely. Instead, upon the death of any owner (or Annuitant, if the owner is a non-natural entity), payments must be made to (or for the benefit of) the designated beneficiary under one of the following payment choices:

 

  (1)   receive the Surrender Value in one lump sum payment upon receipt of due proof of death (see the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus);

 

  (2)   receive the Surrender Value at any time during the five year period following the date of death. At the end of the five year period, we will pay in a lump sum payment any Surrender Value still remaining;

 

  (3)   apply the Surrender Value to provide a monthly income benefit under Optional Payment Plan 1 or 2. The first monthly income benefit payment must be made no later than one year after the date of death. Also, the monthly income benefit payment period must be either the lifetime of the designated beneficiary or a period not exceeding the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy; or.

 

  (4)   elect a “stretch” payment choice, as described in the “Stretch Payment Choices” provision below.

 

If your contract is a Qualified Contract, not all elections will satisfy required minimum distribution rules. Note that effective for owners who die on or after January 1, 2020, subject to certain exceptions, most non-spouse designated beneficiaries must now complete death benefit distributions within ten years of the owner’s death in order to satisfy required minimum distribution rules. Consult a tax adviser before making an election.

 

Stretch Payment Choices

 

The following payment choice is available to designated beneficiaries of Non-Qualified Contracts:

 

A designated beneficiary of a Non-Qualified Contract may apply the death proceeds of the contract to provide for an annual payment equal to the Minimum Annual Income, described below, for the life expectancy of the designated beneficiary. The first income payment must be made no later than 350 days after the original owner’s date of death. The income payment period must be a period not exceeding the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy. Payments will continue annually on the distribution date until the death of the designated beneficiary or the Contract Value is reduced to $0. Upon death of the designated beneficiary, the person or entity named by the designated beneficiary or, if no one is named, the designated beneficiary’s estate may receive the remaining Contract Value. The recipient may take the Contract Value as a lump sum or continue to receive the annual payment on the distribution date equal to the Minimum Annual Income, or until the Contract Value is reduced to $0.

 

The Minimum Annual Income is the amount withdrawn each year to satisfy Section 72(s)(2)(B) of the Code. The Minimum Annual Income will be re-determined each year for the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy using the Single Life Table in Section 1.401(a)(9)-9(b) of the Income Tax Regulations, as amended. After death, the Minimum Annual Income is calculated using the designated beneficiary’s remaining life expectancy. We may offer alternative calculations of Minimum Annual Income based on amortization or annuitization calculations methods described in guidance published by the Internal Revenue Service.

 

Special rules for this payment choice only:

 

    This payment choice cannot be selected if the Minimum Annual Income would be less than $100.

 

119


Table of Contents
    The designated beneficiary must elect a distribution date on which payments will be made. The first distribution date must be no later than 350 days after the owner’s date of death.

 

    Amounts paid to satisfy the Minimum Annual Income will not be subject to surrender charges. Surrender charges will apply to amounts withdrawn above the Minimum Annual Income.

 

    Optional living benefit and death benefit riders are not available with this payment choice.

 

    Additional premium payments may not be added with this payment choice.

 

Under this payment choice, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Contract Value.

 

The following payment choice is available to designated beneficiaries of Qualified Contracts or any beneficiary receiving death proceeds from any other individual retirement plan:

 

An inherited owner may apply death proceeds to provide for an annual payment equal to the Minimum Annual Income, described below. For purposes of this provision, an inherited owner is any designated beneficiary receiving death proceeds from a Qualified Contract or any beneficiary receiving death proceeds from any other individual retirement plan. A surviving spouse may elect to be treated as an inherited owner in lieu of exercising spousal continuation. The inherited owner will be named the Annuitant at election of the payment choice.

 

Payments under this payment choice will continue annually on the distribution date selected by the inherited owner, subject to the special rules stated below, until the death of the inherited owner or the Contract Value is reduced to $0. Upon death of the inherited owner, the person or entity named by the inherited owner or, if no one is named, the inherited owner’s estate may receive the remaining Contract Value. The recipient may take the Contract Value as a lump sum or continue to receive the annual payment on the distribution date equal to the Minimum Annual Income until the Contract Value is reduced to $0.

 

The Minimum Annual Income is the amount withdrawn each year to satisfy Section 408(b)(3) of the Code. The Minimum Annual Income will be based on the applicable distribution period for required minimum distributions after death, as provided in Section 1.401(a)(9)-5 A-5 of the Income Tax Regulations.

 

Special rules for this payment choice only:

 

    This payment choice cannot be selected if the Minimum Annual Income would be less than $100.

 

    The inherited owner must elect a distribution date on which payments will be made. If the inherited owner is the surviving spouse of the original IRA owner within the meaning of Section 401(a)(9)(B)(iv) of the Code, then the first distribution date elected must be the later of either: (i) December 15th of the year in which the deceased would have reached their required beginning date (as described under the “Qualified Retirement Plans” provision) or (ii) December 15th of the year following the original IRA owner’s death. If the inherited owner is not the surviving spouse of the original IRA owner, then the first distribution date elected must be within 350 days from the date of death. If the surviving spouse dies before the first distribution date, the first distribution date under this rider will be determined by treating death of the surviving spouse as death of the original IRA owner and the surviving spouse’s designated beneficiary as the inherited owner.

 

    Amounts paid to satisfy the Minimum Annual Income will not be subject to surrender charges. Surrender charges will apply to amounts withdrawn above the Minimum Annual Income.

 

    Optional living benefit and death benefit riders are not available with this payment choice.

 

    Additional premium payments may not be added with this payment choice

 

This payment choice will not satisfy required minimum distribution rules for designated beneficiaries other than “eligible designated beneficiaries” as defined in Section 401(a)(9)(H) of the Code. Consult a tax adviser before making this payment choice.

 

Under this payment choice, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Contract Value.

 

If no choice is made by the designated beneficiary within 30 days following receipt of due proof of death, we will pay the Surrender Value within 5 years of the date of death. Due proof of death must be provided within 90 days of the date of death. We will not accept any premium payments after the non-spouse’s death. If the designated beneficiary dies before we distributed the entire Surrender Value, we will pay in a lump sum payment of any Surrender Value still remaining to the person named by the designated beneficiary. If no person is so named, we will pay the designated beneficiary’s estate.

 

Under payment choices 1 or 2, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Surrender Value. Under payment choice 3, this contract will terminate when we apply the Surrender Value to provide a monthly income benefit.

 

Spendthrift Provision. An owner may, by providing written notice to our Home Office in a manner acceptable to the Company, choose the method of payment of death proceeds under the contract by selecting any payment choice, including any Optional Payment Plan, that a designated beneficiary may

 

120


Table of Contents

have chosen. A designated beneficiary (other than the surviving spouse) cannot change the payment choice that the owner has selected. The owner may also specify at the time of electing an income payment option that any payments remaining to be made at the owner’s death cannot be commuted or assigned.

 

While living, the owner may revoke any such limitations on the rights of the designated beneficiary by providing written notice of such revocation to our Home Office in a manner acceptable to the Company. If the payment choice selected by the owner does not apply to a designated beneficiary, the limitations imposed by this paragraph shall not apply to such designated beneficiary. For example, a payment choice based on an individual’s life does not apply to the owner’s estate and the estate would be free to make its own payment choice as designated beneficiary after the owner’s death.

 

Amount of the proceeds: The amount of proceeds we will pay will, in part, vary based on the person who dies, as shown below:

 

Person who died   Amount of
Proceeds Paid
Owner or Joint Owner
(who is not the Annuitant)
  Surrender Value
Owner or Joint Owner (who is the Annuitant)   Death Benefit
Annuitant   Death Benefit

 

Upon receipt of due proof of death, the designated beneficiary will instruct us how to treat the proceeds subject to the distribution rules discussed above.

 

Death of an Owner, Joint Owner, or Annuitant On or After the Maturity Date

 

On or after the Maturity Date, if an owner, joint owner, Annuitant or designated beneficiary dies while the contract is in force, payments that are already being made under the contract will be made at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution in effect at the time of death, notwithstanding any other provision in the contract.

 

INCOME PAYMENTS

 

The Maturity Date is the date income payments begin under the contract, provided the Annuitant is still living on that date. The Maturity Date must be a date at least thirteen months from the date the contract is issued, unless you elect to take income payments pursuant to Payment Optimizer Plus. If Guaranteed Income Advantage is elected, income payments may begin on a different date under the terms of the rider. See the “Guaranteed Income Advantage” and “Payment Optimizer Plus” sections of this provision.

 

The owner selects the contract’s initial Maturity Date at issue. Thereafter, until income payments begin, the owner may elect to extend the Maturity Date in one-year increments, so long as the new Maturity Date is not a date beyond the latest permitted Maturity Date. The latest Maturity Date we currently permit may not be a date beyond the younger Annuitant’s 90th birthday, unless we consent to a later date. We reserve the right to discontinue to allow the deferral of the Maturity Date at any time and without prior notice. Any consent for a new Maturity Date will be provided on a non-discriminatory basis.

 

An owner may request to change the Maturity Date by sending written notice to our Home Office prior to the Maturity Date then in effect. If you change the Maturity Date, the Maturity Date will mean the new Maturity Date selected, provided such Maturity Date is not a date beyond the latest permitted Maturity Date. If income payments have not commenced upon reaching the latest permitted Maturity Date, we will begin making payments to the named payee. In this circumstance: (i) if Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution applies, income payments will be made pursuant to Optional Payment Plan 6, Fixed Income for Life; (ii) if Guaranteed Income Advantage applies, income payments will be made in the form of Life Income with a 10 Year Period Certain; or (iii) if Payment Optimizer Plus applies, income payments will be made in the form of a Life Income. If, however, at the latest permitted Maturity Date these riders do not apply, income payments will be made in the form of a Life Income with a 10 Year Period Certain.

 

A Maturity Date that occurs or is scheduled to occur at an advanced age (e.g., past age 85) may, in certain circumstances, have adverse income tax consequences. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus. Contracts issued to qualified retirement plans provide for income payments to start on the date and under the option specified by the plan.

 

We will pay a monthly income benefit to the owner beginning on the Maturity Date provided the Annuitant is still living. Unless you have elected Payment Optimizer Plus, we will pay the monthly income benefit in the form of Life Income with 10 Years Certain plan with variable payments, using the gender (where appropriate) and settlement age of the Annuitant instead of the payee, unless you make another election as described below. Payments made pursuant to one of these plans are not redeemable. If you elected Payment Optimizer Plus, we will pay monthly income over the life of the Annuitant(s). As described in your contract, the settlement age may be less than the Annuitant’s age. This means payments may be lower than they would have been without the adjustment. You may also choose to receive Surrender Value of your contract on the date immediately preceding the Maturity Date in a lump sum, in which case we will cancel the contract. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus.

 

121


Table of Contents

Once the contract reaches the Maturity Date, the contract owner will no longer be able to withdraw any Contract Value from the contract.

 

Payments will continue for the life of the Annuitant under the Life Income with 10 Years Certain plan, if he or she lives longer than 10 years. If the Annuitant dies before the end of 10 years, we will discount the remaining payments for the 10 year period at the same rate used to calculate the monthly income payment. If the remaining payments are variable income payments, we will assume the amount of each payment that we discount equals the payment amount on the date we receive due proof of death. We will pay this discounted amount in a lump sum.

 

The contract provides optional forms of annuity payments (“Optional Payment Plans”), each of which is payable on a fixed basis. Optional Payment Plan 1 and Optional Payment Plan 5 also are available on a variable basis.

 

If you elect fixed income payments, the guaranteed amount payable will earn interest at a minimum rate of 3% compounded yearly. We may increase the interest rate which will increase the amount we pay to you or the payee.

 

If you elect variable income payments, the dollar amount of the first variable income payment will depend on the annuity purchase rates described in your contract for the Optional Payment Plan you choose. These rates vary based on the Annuitant’s settlement age and if applicable, gender, upon the settlement age and gender of a second person you designate (if applicable). Under such tables, the longer the life expectancy of the Annuitant or the longer the period for which we guarantee to make payments under the option, the smaller the amount the first variable income payment will be. After your first income payment, the dollar amount of your income payments will vary based on the investment performance of the Subaccount(s) in which you invest and the contract’s assumed interest rate.

 

The assumed interest rate is an assumption we make regarding the investment performance of the Portfolios you select. This rate is simply the total return, after expenses, you need to keep your variable income payments level. We assume an effective annual rate of 3%. This means that if the annualized investment performance, after expenses, of your Subaccounts, measured between the day that the last payment was made and the day on which we are calculating the new payment, is less than 3%, then the dollar amount of your variable income payment will decrease. Conversely, if the annualized investment performance, after expenses, of your Subaccounts, measured between the day that the last payment was made and the day on which we are calculating the new payment, is greater than 3%, then the dollar amount of your income payment will increase.

 

We will make income payments monthly unless you elect to receive payments quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. Under the monthly income benefit and all of the Optional Payment Plans, if any payment made more frequently than annually would be or becomes less than $100, we reserve the right to reduce the frequency of payments to an interval that would result in each payment being at least $100. If the annual payment payable at maturity is less than $20, we will pay the Surrender Value in a lump sum. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus. Upon making such a payment, we will have no future obligation under the contract.

 

The amount of your income payments will depend on four things:

 

    your Surrender Value on the Valuation Day immediately preceding the Maturity Date;

 

    the settlement age on the Maturity Date, and if applicable, the gender of the Annuitant;

 

    the specific payment plan you choose; and

 

    if you elect variable income payments, the investment performance of the Portfolios selected.

 

As provided in your contract, we may adjust the age used to determine income payments, and we may deduct premium taxes from your payments.

 

Optional Payment Plans

 

The following Optional Payment Plans are available under the contract, unless you have fully annuitized under Guaranteed Income Advantage or Payment Optimizer Plus:

 

Optional Payment Plan 1 — Life Income with Period Certain. This option guarantees periodic monthly payments for the lifetime of the payee with a minimum number of years of payments. If the payee lives longer than the minimum period, payments will continue for his or her life. The minimum period can be 10, 15, or 20 years. The payee selects the designated period. If the payee dies during the minimum period, we will discount the amount of the remaining guaranteed payments at the same rate used in calculating income payments. We will pay the discounted amount in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

Optional Payment Plan 2 — Income for a Fixed Period. This option provides for periodic payments to be made for a fixed period not longer than 30 years. Payments can be made annually, semi-annually, quarterly, or monthly. If the payee dies, we will discount the amount of the remaining guaranteed payments to the date of the payee’s death at the same rate used in calculating income payments. We will pay the discounted amount in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

122


Table of Contents

Optional Payment Plan 3 — Income of a Definite Amount. This option provides periodic payments of a definite amount to be paid. Payments can be made annually, semi-annually, quarterly, or monthly. The amount paid each year must be at least $120 for each $1,000 of proceeds. Payments will continue until the proceeds are exhausted. The last payment will equal the amount of any unpaid proceeds. If the payee dies, we will pay the amount of the remaining proceeds with earned interest in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

Optional Payment Plan 4 — Interest Income. This option provides for periodic payments of interest earned from the proceeds left with us. Payments can be made annually, semi-annually, quarterly, or monthly. If the payee dies, we will pay the amount of remaining proceeds and any earned but unpaid interest, in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided. This plan is not available to contracts issued as Qualified Contracts.

 

Optional Payment Plan 5 — Joint Life and Survivor Income. This option provides for us to make monthly payments to two payees for a guaranteed minimum of 10 years. Each payee must be at least 35 years old when payments begin. Payments will continue as long as either payee is living. If both payees die before the end of the minimum period, we will discount the amount of the remaining payments for the 10 year period at the same rate used in calculating income payments. We will pay the discounted amount in a lump sum to the survivor’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

Optional Payment Plan 6 — Fixed Income for Life. This option provides for us to make monthly payments of a fixed amount for the life of the Annuitant or, if there are Joint Annuitants, the last surviving Annuitant. If Lifetime Income Plus, Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution has been elected and the contract has reached the latest permitted Maturity Date, the fixed amount payable annually will be greater than or equal to the most recently calculated Withdrawal Limit. If the last surviving Annuitant dies before the first annuity payment, no amount will be payable under this option. Only one annuity payment will be received if the last surviving annuitant dies after the first payment.

 

If the payee is not a natural person, our consent must be obtained before selecting an Optional Payment Plan. Fixed income payments, if selected, will begin on the date we receive due proof of the Annuitant’s death, or on the Maturity Date. Variable income payments will begin within seven days after the date payments would begin under the corresponding fixed option. Payments under Optional Payment Plan 4 (Interest Income) will begin at the end of the first interest period after the date proceeds are otherwise payable.

 

All payments under Option Payment Plan 2 (Income for a Fixed Period), Optional Payment Plan 3 (Income of a Definite Amount) and Optional Payment Plan 4 (Interest Income) may be redeemed by the payee upon written request to our Home Office. Payments made under Optional Payment Plan 1 (Life Income with Period Certain), Optional Payment Plan 5 (Joint Life and Survivor Income) and Optional Payment Plan 6 (Fixed Income for Life) are not redeemable. If payments under Optional Payment Plans 2, 3 or 4 are variable income payments, and a request for redemption is received in good order, the payment will be made within seven days in accordance with the “Surrenders and Partial Surrenders” provision. If payments under Optional Payment Plan 2, Optional Payment Plan 3 or Optional Payment 4 are fixed income payments, and a request for redemption is received in good order, the payment will generally be made within seven days, however, some states require us to reserve the right to defer payments from the Guarantee Account for up to six months from the date we receive the request for payment.

 

If your contract is a Qualified Contract, Optional Payment Plans 2 and 3 may not satisfy minimum required distribution rules. Optional Payment Plan 4 is not available to contracts issued as Qualified Contracts. Optional Payment Plan 5 may not satisfy required distribution rules for all designated beneficiaries. Consult a tax adviser before electing one of these options.

 

Variable Income Payments

 

The monthly amount of your first variable income payment will equal your Contract Value as of the Maturity Date, less any premium taxes, multiplied by the monthly payment rate for the payment plan you choose (at an assumed interest rate of 3%), divided by 1,000. We determine subsequent payments based on Annuity Units.

 

On the Maturity Date, we determine the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount. This number will not change unless you make a transfer. On the Maturity Date, the number of Annuity Units for a Subaccount is the portion of the first payment from that Subaccount divided by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount on the day the first payment is due. Each subsequent variable income payment will equal the sum of payments for each Subaccount. The payment for a Subaccount is the number of Annuity Units for that Subaccount multiplied by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount seven days before the monthly anniversary of the Maturity Date.

 

Following the Maturity Date, the Annuity Unit value of each Subaccount for any Valuation Period will equal the Annuity

 

123


Table of Contents

Unit value for the preceding Valuation Period multiplied by the product of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the net investment factor for the Valuation Period for which we are calculating the Annuity Unit value; and

 

  (b)   is an assumed interest rate factor equal to .99991902 raised to a power equal to the number of days in the Valuation Period.

 

The assumed interest rate factor in (b) above is the daily equivalent of dividing by one plus the assumed investment interest rate of 3%. We may offer a plan that has a different assumed investment interest rate. If we do, the assumed interest rate factor we use in (b) above would change.

 

If you have elected Payment Optimizer Plus, the assumed interest rate will be 4% and the assumed interest rate factor in (b) will equal .99989255 raised to a power equal to the number of days in the Valuation Period.

 

Transfers After the Maturity Date

 

If we are making variable income payments, the payee may change the Subaccounts from which we are making the payments three times each calendar year. If you elect Payment Optimizer Plus, the benefits you receive under such rider may be reduced if, after a transfer, your assets (Annuity Units) are not allocated in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy. Transfers may not be made if income payments are being received pursuant to the terms of Guaranteed Income Advantage. The transfer will be effective as of the end of the Valuation Period during which we receive written request at our Home Office. We reserve the right to limit the number of transfers, if necessary, for the contract to continue to be treated as an annuity under the Code. We also reserve the right to refuse to execute any transfer if any of the Subaccounts that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or redeem shares of the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests or if the transfer would adversely affect Annuity Unit values. If the number of Annuity Units remaining in a Subaccount after a transfer is less than 1, we will transfer the remaining balance in addition to the amount requested for the transfer. We will not allow a transfer into any Subaccount unless the number of Annuity Units of that Subaccount after the transfer is at least 1. The amount of the income payments as of the date of the transfer will not be affected by the transfer. We will not charge for transfers made after the Maturity Date.

 

We do not permit transfers between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account after the Maturity Date. We also do not permit transfers in the Guarantee Account from one interest rate guarantee period to another interest rate guarantee period.

 

Guaranteed Income Advantage

 

Guaranteed Income Advantage provides a guaranteed income benefit that is based on the amount of assets you invest in the GIS Subaccount(s). Under the rider, you will receive a series of monthly income payments determined on the earlier of the date you designate payments from the GIS Subaccount(s) to begin (the “Income Start Date”) or the date you annuitize the contract (the “Maturity Date”). Each series of monthly income payments is referred to as a segment. The guaranteed income benefit may be comprised of one or more segments. If you meet the conditions of the rider, as discussed more fully below, the amount of your monthly income payment, for each segment, will have a guaranteed income floor, and the guaranteed income floor will not vary based on the market performance of the Subaccounts in which your assets are allocated. There is an extra charge for this rider.

 

You may not allocate premium payments or assets in your contract directly to the GIS Subaccount(s). Payments to the GIS Subaccount(s) must be made through a series of scheduled transfers. As discussed in the “Scheduled Transfers” section below, scheduled transfers may be made in advance of their due date. In other words, you will have the ability to “pre-pay” transfers into the GIS Subaccount(s).

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Guaranteed Income Advantage is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Each segment has its own effective date, Income Start Date, series of scheduled transfers, monthly income plan and guaranteed annual income factor. If you wish to elect this rider, you must do so at the time of application. You may add additional segments on any contract monthly anniversary for a maximum of five segments, provided the Annuitant is age 70 or younger at the time the segment is elected. We reserve the right to allow additional segments in the future.

 

Scheduled Transfers

 

The first scheduled transfer is made to the GIS Subaccount(s) as of the effective date of the segment. Scheduled transfers if due will continue to be made on each monthly anniversary of that date until the earlier of the Income Start Date or the Maturity Date. Scheduled transfers may be made in advance of the monthly anniversaries on which they become due. If any month ends before the monthly anniversary or on a day that is not a Valuation Day, the next Valuation Day will be treated as the monthly anniversary for that month.

 

Only scheduled transfers can be made into the GIS Subaccount(s). Premium payments may not be made directly to the GIS Subaccount(s). Scheduled transfers are made first to the

 

124


Table of Contents

GIS Subaccount(s) of the segment that has been in effect for the longest period of time.

 

Scheduled transfers will first be made on a prorata basis from the Subaccounts to which you have allocated assets, excluding the GIS Subaccount(s).

 

There is a minimum scheduled transfer of $100. If amounts available for transfer on the date of the scheduled transfer are not enough to make the scheduled transfer, that scheduled transfer and any future scheduled transfers will not be made with respect to that segment. Your guaranteed income floor for that segment will be based upon scheduled transfers made to that date.

 

Partial Surrenders and Transfers

 

You may take a partial surrender or make transfers from the GIS Subaccount(s) at any time prior to the earlier of the Income Start Date or the Maturity Date. Except for the annual contract maintenance charge and any transfer charge (if applicable), any rider charge and contract charge not taken as an asset based charge from the GIS Subaccount(s) will be treated as partial surrenders for purposes of calculating the guaranteed income floor and scheduled transfers made.

 

Once you take a partial surrender or make a transfer from a segment, you will not be permitted to make any additional scheduled transfers to that segment. Your guaranteed income floor will be adjusted to reflect the amount partially surrendered or transferred by using a recalculation of scheduled transfers made as described below.

 

After such partial surrender or transfer, the scheduled transfers made will equal (a) multiplied by (b) divided by (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the scheduled transfers made prior to such partial surrender or transfer;

 

  (b)   is the value of the applicable GIS Subaccount(s) after such partial surrender or transfer; and

 

  (c)   is the value of the applicable GIS Subaccount(s) before such partial surrender or transfer.

 

Unless you instruct otherwise, partial surrenders will first be deducted from the Subaccounts in which you have allocated assets, excluding the GIS Subaccount(s). These deductions will be taken on a prorata basis. Partial surrenders will then be deducted from the GIS Subaccount(s) from the segment that has been in effect for the shortest period of time.

 

Transfers from the GIS Subaccount(s) will be subject to the provisions stated in the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus.

 

Monthly Income

 

You may elect to receive monthly income under this rider or you may elect to transfer the value in the GIS Subaccount(s) to another investment option under your contract and receive income payments. If you elect to transfer the value in the GIS Subaccount(s) to another investment option, you will lose the guaranteed income benefit for that segment.

 

On the Income Start Date, we will begin making monthly income payments in accordance with the monthly income plan chosen by you. The Income Start Date for the first segment is determined at application. The Income Start Date for each additional segment is determined at the time that segment is added to the contract. Once established, these Income Start Dates cannot be changed. For a single Annuitant, monthly income will be based on a Life Income with a 10 Year Period Certain plan. For Joint Annuitants, monthly income will be based on a Joint Life and Survivor Income with a 10 Year Period Certain plan. Different options may be elected prior to the effective date of the segment and must be approved by us. Please note that all Optional Payment Plans listed may not be available. See “Optional Payment Plans” in the “Income Payments” provision of this prospectus for additional information on available payment options.

 

Once monthly income payments begin, we will allocate payments to the investment options in which you have allocated assets at that time, excluding the GIS Subaccount(s), unless you choose to have monthly income payments made directly to you.

 

Monthly income is calculated as of the first Valuation Day of each annuity year. If the first day of the annuity year does not begin on a Valuation Day, payments will be calculated on the next succeeding Valuation Day. Monthly income from the segment will not change from month to month during an annuity year; however, if another segment begins monthly payments after payments have already begun from other segments, your total monthly payments may increase due to the fact payments are being made from multiple segments.

 

How Income Payments
are Calculated

 

Initial Income
Payment.
 The initial annual income amount under any applicable payment plan is calculated by taking (a) multiplied by (b), divided by (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the annual income rate per $1,000 in the contract for the income payment plan elected and the gender(s) and settlement age(s) of the Annuitant(s) as shown in the rider as of the Income Start Date;

 

  (b)   is the value in the applicable GIS Subaccount(s) as of the Income Start Date, less any applicable premium tax; and

 

125


Table of Contents
  (c)   is $1,000.

 

Income rates, for purposes of Guaranteed Income Advantage, are based on the Annuity 2000 Mortality Tables, using an assumed interest rate of 3.5%.

 

The initial monthly income is the greater of the level income amount and the guaranteed income floor. We determine the level income amount by applying the annual income amount to a 12 month, period certain, single payment immediate annuity.

 

The guaranteed income floor is equal to (a) multiplied by (b) multiplied by (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the scheduled transfer;

 

  (b)   is the guaranteed annual income factor divided by 12; and

 

  (c)   is the number of scheduled transfers made, adjusted for partial surrenders and transfers.

 

The guaranteed income floor is equal to (a) multiplied by (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the scheduled transfers made into the GIS Subaccount(s), adjusted for partial surrenders and transfers; and

 

  (b)   is the guaranteed annual income factor divided by 12.

 

Subsequent Income Payments. Subsequent income payments are determined by Annuity Units. The amount of any subsequent annual income amount may be greater or less than the initial amount.

 

The number of Annuity Units is determined by dividing the dollar amount of the initial annual income amount by the Annuity Unit values as of the Income Start Date. Your number of Annuity Units under a particular segment remains fixed. The dollar amount of each subsequent annual income amount is determined by multiplying your number of Annuity Units by the Annuity Unit value as of the Valuation Day each annuity year begins.

 

The number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount is determined by dividing the portion of the initial annual income amount attributable to that Subaccount by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount as of the Income Start Date. The dollar amount of each subsequent annual income amount is the sum of the amounts from each Subaccount. The amount is determined by multiplying your number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount as of the Valuation Day each annuity year begins.

 

An adjustment account is established on the Income Start Date. The adjustment account tracks the difference between the level income amount and the guaranteed income floor when the level income amount is less than the guaranteed income floor. You will not receive monthly income above the guaranteed income floor unless future performance of the underlying Subaccount(s) is sufficient to reduce the adjustment account to zero. Therefore, poor long-term performance of the underlying Subaccount(s) may result in monthly income equal to the guaranteed income floor, even if the underlying Subaccount(s) performs well in a particular year. The value of the adjustment account will be the greater of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is zero; and

 

  (b)   is 12 multiplied by the guaranteed income floor minus 12 multiplied by the initial level income amount.

 

The actual monthly income in subsequent annuity years is the greater of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the subsequent level income amount minus any value in the adjustment account as of the date the last monthly income was made divided by 12; and

 

  (b)   is the guaranteed income floor.

 

For monthly income in subsequent annuity years, the value of the adjustment account will be the greater of (a) and (b) where:

 

  (a)   is zero; and

 

  (b)   is the value of the adjustment account as of the date that the last monthly income was made, plus 12 multiplied by the actual subsequent monthly income, minus 12 multiplied by the subsequent level income amount.

 

On the Income Start Date, if any monthly income payment would be $100 or less, we reserve the right to reduce the frequency of transfers or payments to an interval that would result in each amount being at least $100. If the annual amount is less than $100, we will pay you the value in the applicable GIS Subaccount as of the Income Start Date and that segment will terminate.

 

On the Maturity Date, no further scheduled transfers can be added to the GIS Subaccount(s). On this date, monthly income will be included as part of income payments in accordance with your income payment plan selected.

 

Death Provisions

 

The following provisions apply to any and all segments with regard to the death of any Annuitant.

 

Special Distribution Rules When Death Occurs Before Income Start Date and Maturity Date. For a surviving

 

126


Table of Contents

spouse who is an Annuitant and a designated beneficiary, the following will apply:

 

  (1)   Upon notification of death:

 

  (a)   the value of all Subaccounts, excluding the value of the GIS Subaccount(s), will be transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund; and

 

  (b)   scheduled transfers if due will continue to be made.

 

  (2)   If the surviving spouse elects to continue the contract, on receipt of proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office:

 

  (a)   the death benefit under the contract will be allocated on a prorata basis to the investment options in which assets are then allocated;

 

  (b)   all current segments will continue; and

 

  (c)   the surviving spouse may elect to fund new segments on a contract monthly anniversary, if then eligible.

 

For a surviving spouse, who is the designated beneficiary of any portion of the contract but not an Annuitant, the following will apply:

 

  (1)   Upon notification of death:

 

  (a)   the value of all Subaccounts, including the GIS Subaccount(s), will be transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund; and

 

  (b)   all existing segments will terminate.

 

  (2)   If the surviving spouse elects to continue the contract, on receipt of proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office:

 

  (a)   we will allocate the death benefit under the contract on a prorata basis to the investment options in which assets are then allocated; and

 

  (b)   the surviving spouse may elect to fund new segments on a contract monthly anniversary, if then eligible.

 

Special Distribution Rules When Death Occurs On or After Income Start Date and Before Maturity Date. If any Annuitant dies on the Income Start Date, the death benefit is reduced prorata by the same proportion that the value in the GIS Subaccount(s) is to the total Contract Value.

 

If any Annuitant dies after the Income Start Date but before the Maturity Date, proceeds will be paid under this rider, unless the surviving spouse continues the contract. The amount of proceeds payable under this rider will be the greater of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the commuted value of the remaining period certain of the guaranteed income floor; and

 

  (b)   is the commuted value of the remaining period certain of the annual income amount.

 

Commuted values will be calculated at a rate not greater than 1% above the rate at which the payments and Annuity Units were calculated. We will calculate the commuted values on the date that we receive proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office.

 

For a surviving spouse who is an Annuitant and designated beneficiary, the following will apply:

 

  (1)   Upon notification of death:

 

  (a)   the value of all Subaccounts, excluding the value of the GIS Subaccount(s), will be transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund; and

 

  (b)   scheduled transfers if due will continue to be made.

 

  (2)   If the surviving spouse elects to continue the contract, on receipt of proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office:

 

  (a)   the death benefit will be allocated on a prorata basis to the investment options in which assets are then allocated including any rider segments that are in effect prior to the Income Start Date;

 

  (b)   all current segments will continue; and

 

  (c)   the surviving spouse may elect to fund new segments on any contract monthly anniversary, provided he or she meets the eligibility requirements.

 

For a surviving spouse, who is the designated beneficiary of any portion of the contract but not an Annuitant, the following will apply;

 

  (1)   Upon notification of death;

 

  (a)   all value of the Subaccounts will be transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund; and

 

  (b)   all existing segments not past the Income Start Date will terminate.

 

127


Table of Contents
  (2)   If the surviving spouse elects to continue the contract, on receipt of proof of death and all required forms at our Home Office:

 

  (a)   the death benefit will be allocated on a prorata basis to the investment options in which assets are then allocated;

 

  (b)   any segment past its Income Start Date will continue any remaining period certain payments; and

 

  (c)   the surviving spouse may elect to fund new segments on any contract monthly anniversary, provided he or she meets the eligibility requirements.

 

The surviving spouse will become the named designated Annuitant.

 

Other Contract Charges

 

Any rider and contract charges not taken on a daily basis will first be deducted on a prorata basis from all Subaccounts, excluding the GIS Subaccount(s). Any remaining charges will be deducted from the GIS Subaccount(s) of the segments beginning with the segment that has been in effect for the shortest period of time and that has not reached its Income Start Date. Except for the annual contract maintenance charge and any transfer charge (if applicable), any rider charge and contract charge not taken as an asset based charge from the GIS Subaccount(s) will be treated as partial surrenders for purposes of calculating the guaranteed income floor and scheduled transfers made.

 

Termination of Rider

 

This rider will terminate on the contract anniversary following the first date that there are no segments, unless you are eligible to buy a segment on that date.

 

Ownership and Change of Ownership

 

On the date that the contract is assigned or sold, unless under an involuntary assignment effected by legal process, all amounts in the GIS Subaccount(s) will be transferred to the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund.

 

If you marry after the Contract Date, you may add your spouse as a Joint Owner and Joint Annuitant or as a Joint Annuitant only, subject to our approval.

 

For purposes of this rider:

 

    a non-natural owner must name an Annuitant and may name a Joint Annuitant;

 

    a natural individual owner must also be an Annuitant;

 

    if there is only one natural owner, that owner may name his or her spouse as a Joint Annuitant.

 

    Under federal tax law, all contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

 

Civil union partners are not permitted to continue the contract without taking required distributions upon the death of an owner. Therefore, even if named a joint owner/Joint Annuitant, a civil union partner will have to take required distributions upon the death of the other joint owner/Joint Annuitant. See the “Distribution Rules” provision of this prospectus. If this situation applies to you, you should consult a tax adviser.

 

128


Table of Contents

Examples

 

The following example shows how Guaranteed Income Advantage works based on hypothetical values. The example is for illustrative purposes only and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract and, therefore, should not be relied upon in making a decision to invest in the rider or contract.

 

The example assumes that an owner purchases a contract with a male Annuitant age 60 at the time of issue and has elected a Life Income with 10 Years Certain payment plan. In addition, the example assumes that:

 

  (1)   the owner purchases the contract for $96,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $4,800 (5% of $96,000) is applied to the contract;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (4)   the owner purchases only one segment;

 

  (5)   the contract, including the GIS Subaccount investing in shares of the State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund, earns a net return of 5%;

 

  (6)   the owner makes scheduled transfers of $840 at the first of every month (for a total of $10,080 per year) for 10 years; and

 

  (7)   the owner annuitizes the GIS Subaccount at the end of the 10th year.

 

Year     Value of
Subaccounts
at Beginning
of Year
    Scheduled
Transfers
Made
    Value of
Subaccounts
at End
of Year
    Value of
GIS
Subaccount
at Beginning
of Year
    Scheduled
Transfers
Made
    Value of
GIS
Subaccount
at End
of Year
    Guaranteed
Minimum
Annual
Payment
Accrued
 
   1     $ 100,800     $ 10,080     $ 100,781     $ 0     $ 10,080     $ 10,351     $ 1,004  
   2       100,781       10,080       95,469       10,351       10,080       21,219       2,008  
   3       95,469       10,080       89,892       21,219       10,080       32,631       3,012  
   4       89,892       10,080       84,035       32,631       10,080       44,614       4,016  
   5       84,035       10,080       77,886       44,614       10,080       57,196       5,020  
   6       77,886       10,080       71,429       57,196       10,080       70,406       6,024  
   7       71,429       10,080       64,650       70,406       10,080       84,278       7,029  
   8       64,650       10,080       57,531       84,278       10,080       98,842       8,033  
   9       57,531       10,080       50,057       98,842       10,080       114,136       9,037  
  10       50,057       10,080       42,209       114,136       10,080       130,193       10,041  

 

Assuming the above, we will make guaranteed payments of $10,041 (annually) to the owner for the life of the Annuitant or for 10 years, whichever is longer. The table below shows how calculated payments and the adjustment account may vary and affect the payment to the owner.

 

Year     Calculated
Payment
    Guaranteed
Payment
    Payment
to Owner
    Adjustment
Account
Balance
 
  11     $  9,977     $ 10,041     $ 10,041     $ 64  
  12       10,121       10,041       10,057       0  
  13       10,268       10,041       10,268       0  
  14       10,417       10,041       10,417       0  
  15       10,568       10,041       10,568       0  
  16       10,721       10,041       10,721       0  
  17       10,876       10,041       10,876       0  
  18       11,034       10,041       11,034       0  
  19       11,194       10,041       11,194       0  
  20       11,356       10,041       11,356       0  

 

129


Table of Contents

The following example shows how Guaranteed Income Advantage works based on hypothetical values. The example is for illustrative purposes only and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract and, therefore, should not be relied upon in making a decision to invest in the rider or contract.

 

The example assumes that an owner purchases a contract with a male Annuitant age 60 at the time of issue and has elected a Life Income with 10 Years Certain payment plan. In addition, the example assumes that:

 

  (1)   the owner purchases the contract for $96,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $4,800 (5% of $96,000) is applied to the contract;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (4)   the owner purchases only one segment;

 

  (5)   the contract, including the GIS Subaccount investing in shares of the State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund, earns a net return of 5%;

 

  (6)   the owner transfers the entire $100,800 ($96,000 + $4,800) into the GIS Subaccount at the beginning of year 1; and

 

  (7)   the owner annuitizes the GIS Subaccount at the end of the 10th year.

 

Year    

Value of

Subaccounts

at Beginning
of Year

   

Scheduled

Transfers
Made

   

Value of

Subaccounts

at End
of Year

   

Value of
GIS

Subaccount
at Beginning
of Year

   

Scheduled

Transfers

Made

    Value of
GIS
Subaccount
at End
of Year
   

Guaranteed

Minimum
Annual

Payment
Accrued

 
  1     $ 100,800     $ 100,800     $ 0     $ 0     $ 100,800     $ 111,132     $ 10,543  
  2       0       0       0       111,132       0       116,689       10,543  
  3       0       0       0       116,689       0       122,523       10,543  
  4       0       0       0       122,523       0       128,649       10,543  
  5       0       0       0       128,649       0       135,082       10,543  
  6       0       0       0       135,082       0       141,836       10,543  
  7       0       0       0       141,836       0       148,928       10,543  
  8       0       0       0       148,928       0       156,374       10,543  
  9       0       0       0       156,374       0       164,193       10,543  
  10       0       0       0       164,193       0       172,402       10,543  

 

Assuming the above, we will make guaranteed payments of $10,543 (annually) to the owner for the life of the Annuitant or for 10 years, whichever is longer. The table below shows how calculated payments and the adjustment account may vary and affect the payment to the owner.

 

Year    

Calculated

Payment

   

Guaranteed

Payment

   

Payment

to Owner

   

Adjustment

Account

Balance

 
  11     $ 13,211     $ 10,543     $ 13,211     $ 0  
  12       13,403       10,543       13,403       0  
  13       13,597       10,543       13,597       0  
  14       13,794       10,543       13,794       0  
  15       13,994       10,543       13,994       0  
  16       14,197       10,543       14,197       0  
  17       14,402       10,543       14,402       0  
  18       14,611       10,543       14,611       0  
  19       14,823       10,543       14,823       0  
  20       15,038       10,543       15,038       0  

 

130


Table of Contents

Tax Treatment of Guaranteed Income Advantage

 

Monthly income payments allocated to investment options under the contract and other transfers to investment options are generally not subject to tax. However, for purposes of reporting the taxable amount of withdrawals, income on the contract is determined using the entire contract value, including the value of any annuitized segment allocating monthly income payments to investment options. You may not elect to have monthly income payments paid to you and then later direct that they be allocated to investment options under the contract.

 

Monthly income payments from less than the entire Contract Value will not be treated as withdrawals for federal income tax purposes, if certain conditions are satisfied. To be treated as monthly income payments (instead of as a series of withdrawals), income payments from less than the entire Contract Value must be taken for one or more lives or a fixed period of at least 10 years. Lifetime income with a period certain of any duration would qualify. In that case, a pro-rata portion of your “investment in the contract” will be allocated to the income payments. The tax treatment of such income payments is the same as that for income payments received on or after the Maturity Date, as described below. If monthly income payments are taken from less than the entire Contract Value and you subsequently direct that they be allocated to investment options under the contract, the tax treatment of payments before or after such allocation is uncertain.

 

Monthly income payments you receive on or after the Maturity Date (i.e., from the entire Contract Value) will be subject to tax as income payments. A portion of each payment will be treated as nontaxable recovery of your “investment in the contract” (see above) and the remainder will be taxed at ordinary income tax rates. We will notify you annually of the taxable amount of your income payments. If income payments cease because of the death of the Annuitant(s) and before the total amount of the “investment in the contract” has been recovered, the unrecovered amount generally will be deductible.

 

Persons intending to purchase Guaranteed Income Advantage in connection with a qualified retirement plan should obtain advice from a tax adviser.

 

For further information on the tax treatment of partial surrenders and income payments, see the “Tax Matters” provision below.

 

Payment Optimizer Plus

 

Payment Optimizer Plus provides for a guaranteed income benefit that is based on the amount of premium payments you make to your contract. Please note that we do not consider Bonus Credits as “premium payments” for purposes of the contract and this rider. Therefore, any applicable Bonus Credit will not be included in the benefit base. You will have to reset your benefit under the terms of the rider to capture the Bonus Credit or any related earnings in the benefit base. Under the rider, you will receive a series of monthly income payments determined on the Maturity Date. If you meet the conditions of the rider, as discussed more fully below, the amount of your monthly income payment will have a guaranteed payment floor, and the guaranteed payment floor will not vary based on the market performance of the Subaccounts in which your assets are allocated. In addition, you will be eligible to receive at least the value of your premium payments in monthly income or additional death proceeds, even if your Contract Value reduces to zero. The rider includes an “immediate annuitization” feature that provides you the opportunity to receive monthly income payments within the first year of the contract. Under the rider, you also may request to terminate your contract and rider at any time after the Maturity Date and receive the commuted value of your income payments, minus a commutation charge, in a lump sum, so long as the termination is after the right to cancel period under your contract. These and other features of the rider are more fully discussed below.

 

Please note that the commutation feature in Payment Optimizer Plus may not be available in all states. Please review the features of Payment Optimizer Plus available in the contract issued in your state before making a decision to elect the rider.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, Payment Optimizer Plus is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

There is an extra charge for this rider.

 

Investment Strategy

 

In order to receive the full benefit provided by this rider, you must invest all premium payments and allocations in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy. If you do not allocate all assets in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy, your benefit will be reduced by 50%. Even if your benefit is reduced, you will continue to pay the full amount charged for the rider.

 

Investment Strategies may change from time to time. You may allocate your assets in accordance with your Investment Strategy prescribed at the time the contract was issued, or in accordance with the Investment Strategy in effect at the time you reset your benefit. Therefore, you may have assets allocated to an Investment Strategy that is different than the Investment Strategy described in this prospectus. Your ability to choose different Investment Strategies is limited, as described below.

 

131


Table of Contents

The Investment Strategy includes Designated Subaccounts and Asset Allocation Model C. Under this Investment Strategy, contract owners may allocate assets to either Asset Allocation Model C or to one or more Designated Subaccounts. Contract owners may not allocate assets to Asset Allocation Model C and one or more Designated Subaccounts. Contract owners, however, may elect to participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, which permits the owner to systematically transfer a fixed dollar amount on a monthly basis for twelve months from the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to one of the available Investment Strategy options. The Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund is only available as part of the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging Program. For more information about Asset Allocation Model C, the Subaccounts comprising Asset Allocation Model C and the Designated Subaccounts, and the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, please see the “Subaccounts” and “Asset Allocation Program” and “Defined Dollar Cost Averaging Program” provisions of this prospectus.

 

On a monthly basis, we will rebalance your Contract Value to the Subaccounts in accordance with the percentages that you have chosen to invest in the Designated Subaccounts or in accordance with the allocations that comprise Asset Allocation Model C. In addition, we will also rebalance your Contract Value on any Valuation Day after any transaction involving a withdrawal, receipt of a premium payment or a transfer of Contract Value, unless you instruct us otherwise. If you are participating in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, rebalancing will not affect the assets allocated to the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund.

 

Shares of a Portfolio may become unavailable under the contract for new premium payments, transfers, and asset rebalancing. As a result, shares of a Portfolio may also become unavailable under your Investment Strategy. Investment Strategies may be modified to respond to such events by removing unavailable Portfolios and adding new Portfolios as appropriate. Because such changes may affect your allocation instructions, you will need to provide updated allocation instructions to comply with the modified Investment Strategy. If you do not provide updated allocation instructions, any subsequent premium payments or transfers requesting payment to an unavailable Portfolio will be considered not in good order. Periodic rebalancing to unavailable Portfolios will cease and any imbalances in percentages due to lack of asset rebalancing will not cause a reduction in your benefit.

 

If you request a transfer or send a subsequent premium payment with allocation instructions to a Portfolio that is not part of the prescribed Investment Strategy, we will honor your instructions. Please be aware, however, that your total Contract Value will not be invested in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy, and your benefit base will be reduced by 50%, resulting in a reduction in your benefit.

 

You may elect to resume participation in the prescribed Investment Strategy at your next available reset date, as described in the “Reset of Benefit Base” provision below, provided we receive written notice of your election at our Home Office at least 15 days prior to that date. If you elect to participate in the Investment Strategy, your benefit base will be reset to your Contract Value as of that date. At that time, the charge for this rider will also be reset. The new charge, which may be higher than your previous charge, is guaranteed not to exceed an annual rate of 1.25%.

 

The current Investment Strategy is as follows:

 

  (1)   owners may allocate assets to the following Designated Subaccounts:

 

AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. — AB VPS Balanced Hedged Allocation Portfolio — Class B;

 

AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) — Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series II shares;

 

BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. — BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund — Class III;

 

Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund — VIP Balanced Portfolio — Service Class 2;

 

Janus Aspen Series — Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Service Shares;

 

MFS® Variable Insurance Trust — MFS® Total Return Series — Service Class Shares; and/or

 

State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 3 Shares;

 

OR

 

  (2)   owners may allocate assets to Asset Allocation Model C.

 

Contract owners may elect to participate in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program when they apply for the contract. Defined Dollar Cost Averaging permits the owner to systematically transfer a fixed dollar amount on a monthly basis for twelve months from the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund to one of the available Investment Strategy options. The Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund is only available as part of the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program.

 

132


Table of Contents

If, on the Maturity Date, you are allocating assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy and you later choose to allocate the value of Annuity Units without following the Investment Strategy, your income base will be reduced by 50% and the benefits you are eligible to receive under the rider will be reduced. However, if your benefit base was reduced due to not following the Investment Strategy and then not reset before your Maturity Date, this adjustment does not apply.

 

On a monthly basis, we will rebalance the value of Annuity Units to the Subaccounts in accordance with the percentages that you have chosen for the Designated Subaccounts or in accordance with the allocations that comprises Asset Allocation Model C. If you are participating in the Defined Dollar Cost Averaging program, rebalancing will not affect the assets allocated to the Designated Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund.

 

We will not reduce your benefit base or income base if you are not following the Investment Strategy due to a Portfolio liquidation or a Portfolio dissolution and the assets are transferred from the liquidated or dissolved Portfolio to another Portfolio.

 

Benefit Base and Income Base

 

Benefit base is used to calculate income base. Income base is used to calculate the guaranteed amount of monthly income. Income base is also used to calculate any additional death proceeds. If benefit base or income base is reduced, the benefits you are eligible for under this rider also will be reduced.

 

The initial benefit base is equal to the sum of all premium payments received on the Contract Date. The benefit base remains in effect until adjusted as described below.

 

If you have allocated assets in accordance with the prescribed Investment Strategy from the later of the Contract Date and the date on which benefit base was reset, as described in the “Reset of Benefit Base” provision below, any additional premium payments applied will be added to the benefit base as of the prior Valuation Day.

 

Important Note.We reserve the right to exclude additional premium payments from being applied to the benefit base. As a result, it is possible that you would not be able to make subsequent premium payments after the initial premium payment to take advantage of the benefits provided by Payment Optimizer Plus that would be associated with such additional premium payments. For example, since your benefit base would not be increased for such subsequent premium payments, the monthly income payments associated with such premium payments would not have a guaranteed payment floor and such premium payments would not increase the income base for purposes of calculating the amount of any additional death proceeds. In addition, if you make premium payments that are not included in the calculation of your benefit base, you will pay a higher rider charge to the extent that the premium payments increase the Contract Value upon which the charge is imposed. Also, to the extent your Contract Value is increased by such premium payments, you are less likely to realize any benefit under Payment Optimizer Plus, because it is less likely that your Contract Value will be less than the benefit base or income base, as applicable. Bonus Credits will have a similar effect on your contract because they increase Contract Value but do not adjust the benefit base when they are applied to the contract. Before making premium payments that do not increase the benefit base, you should consider that: (i) the guaranteed payment floor, additional death proceeds, and other guarantees provided by this rider will not reflect such premium payments or Bonus Credits; (ii) any such premium payments or Bonus Credits make it less likely that you will receive any such benefits even if your Contract Value has declined; and (iii) this rider may not make sense for you if you intend to make premium payments that will not increase the benefit amount.

 

If your benefit base was reduced due to not following the Investment Strategy and then not reset, any additional premium payments applied will increase the benefit base on the prior Valuation Day by 50% of the premium payment.

 

All withdrawals, including any surrender charges, reduce the benefit base. The new benefit base is equal to (a) multiplied by (b) divided by (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the benefit base as of the prior Valuation Day, adjusted for any additional premium payments received;

 

  (b)   is the Contract Value following the withdrawal; and

 

  (c)   is the Contract Value before the withdrawal.

 

On the Maturity Date, the income base is set equal to the benefit base. Any withdrawal that occurs on the Maturity Date will be processed before benefit base is converted to income base.

 

Reset of Benefit Base. If all of the Annuitants are ages 50 through 80, you may choose to reset your benefit base on an annual anniversary of the Contract Date that is at least 12 months after the later of the Contract Date and the last reset date.

 

We must receive written notice of your election to reset your benefit base at our Home Office at least 15 days prior to the reset date. If you do reset your benefit base, as of that date, we will:

 

    reset the benefit base to your Contract Value;

 

    reset the charge for this rider. The new charge, which may be higher than your previous charge, will never exceed 1.25% annually; and

 

133


Table of Contents
    reset the Investment Strategy to the current Investment Strategy.

 

You may not reset your benefit base after the Maturity Date. If on any contract anniversary any Annuitant is older than age 80, you may not reset your benefit base. Because the Maturity Date is determined by when you begin taking income payments, you should carefully consider when to start taking income payments if you elected Payment Optimizer Plus. The longer you wait before beginning to take income payments, the more opportunities you may have to reset the benefit base and thereby potentially increase the amount of income payments. If you delay starting to take income payments too long, however, you may limit the number of years available for you to take income payments in the future (due to life expectancy) and you may be paying for a benefit you are not using.

 

Systematic Resets. You may elect to reset your benefit base automatically on an available contract anniversary (a “systematic reset”). If you have not previously elected to systematically reset your benefit, or if your election has terminated, we must receive written notice of your election to systematically reset your benefit at our Home Office at least 15 days prior to your next contract anniversary.

 

A systematic reset of your benefit base will occur when your contract value is higher than the benefit base as of the available contract anniversary or, if the contract anniversary is not a Valuation Day, as of the next Valuation Day. By “available contract anniversary” we mean a contract anniversary on which you are eligible to reset your benefit, as such requirements (age and otherwise) are described herein.

 

Systematic resets will continue until and unless:

 

  (a)   the Investment Strategy is violated;

 

  (b)   the owner (or owners) submits a written request to our Home Office to terminate systematic resets;

 

  (c)   income payments begin via annuitization;

 

  (d)   the Investment Strategy changes, allocations are affected, and we do not receive confirmation from you to our Home Office of new allocations; or

 

  (e)   ownership changes.

 

Please note that a systematic reset will occur on an available contract anniversary if contract value is even nominally higher than the benefit base (e.g., as little as $1.00 higher) and, therefore, a systematic reset may not be in your best interest because: (i) the charge for this rider may be higher than your previous charge; and (ii) the Investment Strategy will be reset to the current Investment Strategy (the Investment Strategy offered on the reset date). Please carefully consider whether it is in your best interest to elect to systematically reset your benefit base.

 

Monthly Income

 

The Maturity Date under this rider may be any Valuation Day after the first Valuation Day under the Contract. Prior to the date that monthly income begins, the Maturity Date may be changed to any Valuation Day after the first Valuation Day under the Contract. On the Maturity Date, we will begin the payment process for your monthly income payments. Monthly income will be paid to you over the life of the Annuitant(s), unless you elect otherwise. Beginning on the Maturity Date, monthly income will be calculated annually as of the first Valuation Day of each annuity year. An annuity year is the one-year period beginning on the Maturity Date or on the annual anniversary of the Maturity Date. If the first day of an annuity year does not begin on a Valuation Day, the next Valuation Day will be used in calculating the monthly income for that annuity year. Monthly income will not vary during an annuity year. The amount may increase or decrease from annuity year to annuity year.

 

How Income Payments are Calculated

 

Guaranteed Payment Floor. The guaranteed payment floor is the guaranteed amount of each monthly income payment. The guaranteed payment floor is equal to (a) multiplied by (b) divided by (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the income base;

 

  (b)   is the guaranteed payment floor percentage for the attained age of the Annuitant for a single Annuitant contract or the attained age for younger living Annuitant for a Joint Annuitant contract on the Maturity Date (as specified in the contract); and

 

  (c)   is 12.

 

For purposes of this rider, the benefits provided under this rider, and the rider change, once a contract is a Joint Annuitant contract, it will remain a Joint Annuitant contract while the contract and rider are in effect.

 

Initial Monthly Income. The initial monthly income is the greater of the level income amount and the guaranteed payment floor. The annual income amount is used to determine the level income amount. We determine the level income amount by applying the annual income amount to a 12 month, period certain, single payment immediate annuity.

 

The initial annual income amount is equal to (a) multiplied by (b), where:

 

  (a)  

is the payment rate based upon the gender(s), when applicable, and settlement age(s) of the Annuitant(s)

 

134


Table of Contents
 

as shown in the rider, the Contract Value on the Valuation Day prior to the Maturity Date and the income base as of the Maturity Date; and

 

  (b)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day prior to the Maturity Date less any premium tax.

 

For purposes of this rider only, the payment rates are based on the Annuity 2000 Mortality Table, using an assumed interest rate of 4%. These annuity rates may not be as favorable as the current rates we would use to calculate payments under the “Life Income with Period Certain” annuity payment option available under this contract on the Maturity Date, and your Contract Value on the Maturity Date would be higher than under this rider because there would be no associated rider charge. Accordingly, payments under such an annuity payment option may be greater than payments under this rider. However, payments under such an annuity payment option would not have a guaranteed payment floor. In addition, you would not be guaranteed to be eligible to receive at least the value of your premium payments in monthly income payments or additional death proceeds even if your Contract Value reduces to zero, although payments under life income with period certain annuity payment options may also provide certain death proceeds. You should carefully consider which annuity payment option is right for you.

 

Monthly Age Adjustment: The settlement age(s) is the Annuitant(s)’s age last birthday on the date monthly income begins, minus an age adjustment from the table below. The actual age adjustment may be less than the numbers shown.

 

Year Payments Begin    

Maximum
Age

Adjustment

 
After     Prior To  
  2005       2011       5  
  2010       2026       10  
  2025       —        15  

 

On the Maturity Date, if any monthly income payment would be $100 or less, we reserve the right to reduce the frequency of payments to an interval that would result in each amount being at least $100. If the annual payment would be less than $100, we will pay the Contract Value on the Valuation Day prior to the Maturity Date and the contract will terminate on the Maturity Date.

 

Subsequent Monthly Income. Subsequent annual income amounts are determined by means of Annuity Units. The amount of any subsequent annual income amount may be greater or less than the initial payment. We guarantee that each subsequent payment will not be affected by variations in mortality experience from the mortality assumptions on which the first payment is based. The number of Annuity Units will be determined on the Maturity Date. The number will not change unless a transfer is made. The number of Annuity Units for a Subaccount is determined by dividing the initial annual income amount attributable to that Subaccount by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount as of the Maturity Date. The dollar amount of each subsequent annual income amount is the sum of the payments from each Subaccount. The payment is determined by multiplying your number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount as of the Valuation Day each annuity year starts.

 

An adjustment account is established on the Maturity Date. The adjustment account tracks the difference between the level income amount and the guaranteed payment floor when the level income amount is less than the guaranteed payment floor. You will not receive monthly income above the guaranteed payment floor unless future performance of the underlying Subaccount(s) is sufficient to reduce the adjustment account to zero. Therefore, poor long-term performance of the underlying Subaccount(s) may result in monthly income equal to the guaranteed payment floor, even if the underlying Subaccount(s) performs well in a particular year. The value of the adjustment account on the Maturity Date will be the greater of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is zero; and

 

  (b)   is 12 multiplied by the guaranteed payment floor, minus 12 multiplied by the initial level income amount.

 

Monthly income in subsequent annuity years will be calculated annually as of the first Valuation Day of each annuity year. The actual monthly income in subsequent annuity years is the greater of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the subsequent level income amount, minus any value in the adjustment account as of the date the last monthly income was paid divided by 12; and

 

  (b)   is the guaranteed payment floor.

 

For monthly income in subsequent annuity years, the value of the adjustment account will be the greater of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is zero; and

 

  (b)   is the value of the adjustment account as of the prior annuity year, plus 12 multiplied by the actual subsequent monthly income for the current annuity year, minus 12 multiplied by the subsequent level income amount for the current annuity year.

 

Commutation Provision

 

After the Maturity Date, you may request to terminate your contract and this rider. If the free look period as defined under

 

135


Table of Contents

the contract has ended, you will receive the commuted value of your income payments in a lump sum, calculated as described below (the “commutation value”). After this lump sum payment, income payments will end.

 

Please note that the commutation feature in Payment Optimizer Plus may not be available in all states. Please review the features of Payment Optimizer Plus available in the contract issued in your state before making a decision to elect the rider.

 

Commutation Value: The commutation value will be the lesser of (a) and (b) but not less than zero, where:

 

  (a)   is (i) minus (ii) minus (iii), where:

 

  (i)   is the income base less any premium tax;

 

  (ii)   is the commutation charge; and

 

  (iii)   is the sum of all monthly income paid;

 

  (b)   is (i) minus (ii) minus (iii) plus (iv), where:

 

  (i)   is the commutation base, which is described below, less any premium tax;

 

  (ii)   is the commutation charge;

 

  (iii)   is the adjustment account value; and

 

  (iv)   is the level income amount multiplied by the number of months remaining in the current annuity year.

 

The amount of the commutation charge will be the surrender charge that would otherwise apply under the contract, in accordance with the surrender charge schedule.

 

Commutation Base: On any day that is a Valuation Day, the commutation base in a Subaccount is determined by multiplying the number of commutation units in that Subaccount by the value of the commutation unit for that Subaccount. The commutation base is equal to the sum of the commutation base amounts for each Subaccount.

 

Commutation Units: On the Valuation Day prior to the Maturity Date, the commutation units in a Subaccount will be equal to the number of Accumulation Units for that Subaccount.

 

The number of commutation units is reduced at the beginning of each annuity year. The reduction for each Subaccount equals (a) divided by (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the annual income amount for the Subaccount; and

 

  (b)   is the value of the commutation unit for the Subaccount on the first Valuation Day of the annuity year.

 

Other events that will reduce the number of commutation units of a Subaccount are as follows:

 

  (1)   transfers out of the Subaccount;

 

  (2)   payment of commutation proceeds;

 

  (3)   payment of death proceeds; and

 

  (4)   deduction of applicable contract charges.

 

Commutation units are canceled as of the end of the Valuation Period in which we receive notice in a form acceptable to us regarding an event that reduces commutation units.

 

Transfers: When we perform Subaccount transfers after the Maturity Date, we will redeem the commutation units from the current Subaccount and purchase commutation units from the new Subaccount. The commutation base on the date of the transfer will not be affected by the transfer. The number of commutation units added to the new Subaccount is (a) multiplied by (b), divided by (c), where:

 

  (a)   is the number of commutation units transferred out of the current Subaccount;

 

  (b)   is the value of a commutation unit of the current Subaccount; and

 

  (c)   is the value of a commutation unit of the new Subaccount.

 

Value of Commutation Units: The initial value of a commutation unit for each Subaccount is the initial value of the Accumulation Unit for that Subaccount. Thereafter, the value of a commutation unit at the end of every Valuation Day is the value of the commutation unit at the end of the previous Valuation Day multiplied by the net investment factor, as described in the contract. The value of a commutation unit may change from one Valuation Period to the next.

 

Note on Calculation of Commutation Value: If you elect to terminate your contract and the rider and receive the commutation value, the commutation value is based on the commuted value of your income payments in a lump sum. The amount of income payments on which the commutation value is based on either (a) income base, which is a measure of premium payments (and Contract Value, if there is a reset) applied under the contract, and is used to calculate the guaranteed payment floor; and (b) commutation base, which is a measure of Contract Value had the contract not been “annuitized,” and reflects the effect of market performance. In addition, the commutation value reflects the deduction of any applicable commutation charge.

 

If you elect to terminate your contract after income payments have begun and receive the commutation value, you will receive

 

136


Table of Contents

the lesser of the adjusted income base and the adjusted commutation base (but not less than zero), as described in the calculation provided above. You should be aware that income base will not reflect any positive investment performance unless, on or before the Maturity Date, there was a reset of benefit base capturing such performance. As a result, the commutation value you receive will always be less than the income base (adjusted for any premium tax, commutation charge and monthly income paid) and will never reflect any of the positive investment performance experienced after a reset or after the Maturity Date. This rider is primarily designed to provide a guaranteed income payment with upside potential and, therefore, this rider may not make sense for you if you believe you may elect to terminate the contract and receive the commutation value after your contract has experienced positive investment performance. Accordingly, the total amount of commuted income payments you receive if you terminate the contract may be less than the total amount of income payments and additional death proceeds you would be guaranteed to receive if you did not terminate the contract.

 

Death Provisions

 

The following provisions apply to the rider.

 

Special Distribution Rules When Death Occurs Before Monthly Income Starts. If the designated beneficiary is a surviving spouse who elects to continue the contract as the new owner, this rider will continue.

 

Special Distribution Rules When the Last Annuitant Dies On or After Monthly Income Starts. If the last Annuitant dies after the Maturity Date, there may be additional death proceeds paid under this rider to the designated beneficiary in a lump sum. The amount of any additional death proceeds will be the greater of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is (i) minus (ii), where:

 

  (i)   is the income base;

 

  (ii)   is the sum of all monthly income paid; and

 

  (b)   is zero.

 

When this Rider is Effective

 

The effective date of the rider is the Contract Date. This rider may be terminated only when the contract is terminated.

 

Change of Ownership

 

We must approve any assignment or sale of this contract unless the assignment is made pursuant to a court order.

 

General Provisions

 

For purposes of this rider:

 

    a non-natural owner must name an Annuitant and may name the Annuitant’s spouse as a Joint Annuitant;

 

    an individual owner must also be an Annuitant;

 

    if there is only one owner, that owner may name only his or her spouse as a Joint Annuitant — at issue; and

 

    If you marry after issue, but prior to the Maturity Date, you may add your spouse as a joint owner and Joint Annuitant or as a Joint Annuitant only, subject to Home Office approval.

 

    Under federal tax law, all contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

 

Civil union partners are not permitted to continue the contract without taking required distributions upon the death of an owner. Therefore, even if named a joint owner/Joint Annuitant, a civil union partner will have to take required distributions upon the death of the other joint owner/Joint Annuitant. See the “Distribution Rules” provision of this prospectus. If this situation applies to you, you should consult a tax adviser.

 

137


Table of Contents

Examples

 

The following examples show how Payment Optimizer Plus works based on hypothetical values. The examples are for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to depict investment performance of the contract and, therefore, should not be relied upon in making a decision to invest in the rider or contract. The examples assume that an owner purchases the contract with a male Annuitant, age 65, at the time of issue.

 

The first example assumes that:

 

  (1)   the owner purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $5,000 (5% of $100,000) is applied to the contract but is not applied to the benefit base at issue;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments or partial withdrawals;

 

  (4)   all Contract Value is allocated to the prescribed Investment Strategy at all times;

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of 0%;

 

  (6)   the benefit base is reset on each contract anniversary;

 

  (7)   the Maturity Date is the third contract anniversary;

 

  (8)   the guaranteed payment floor percentage is 7%;

 

  (9)   the 12 month, period certain, single payment immediate annuity rate is 0%; and

 

  (10)    there is no premium tax.

 

On the Maturity Date, the income base is set equal to the benefit base.

 

 

Annuity
Year
    Annual
Income
Amount
    Monthly
Level
Income
Amount
    Guaranteed
Payment
Floor
    Monthly
Income
    Adjustment
Account
(End of Year)
    Additional
Death
Proceeds –
Beginning
of Year
 
  1     $ 6,843     $ 570     $ 613     $ 613     $ 507     $ 105,000  
  2       6,580       548       613       613       1,277       97,650  
  3       6,327       527       613       613       2,301       90,300  
  4       6,083       507       613       613       3,568       82,950  
  5       5,849       487       613       613       5,068       75,600  

 

The annual income amount for annuity year 1 is determined by multiplying the Contract Value by a payment rate (in this example, $105,000 x .06517 = $6,843). The level income amount is determined by dividing the annual income amount by 12. In this example, for annuity year 1, the level income amount is $570 ($6,843 / 12). The guaranteed payment floor is determined by multiplying the income base by the guaranteed payment floor percentage and dividing that product by 12 (in this example, ($105,000 x .07) / 12 = $613). Monthly income is the greater of the guaranteed payment floor and the level income amount, which, for annuity year 1, is the greater of $613 and $570. The additional death proceeds equal the income base minus the sum of all monthly income paid.

 

138


Table of Contents

This next example assumes that:

 

  (1)   the owner purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   a bonus credit of $5,000 (5% of $100,000) is applied to the contract but is not applied to the benefit base at issue;

 

  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments or withdrawals;

 

  (4)   all Contract Value is allocated to the prescribed Investment Strategy at all times;

 

  (5)   the contract earns a net return of 8%;

 

  (6)   the benefit base is reset on the first contract anniversary;

 

  (7)   the Contract Value at the end of the first contract year is $113,400;

 

  (8)   the Maturity Date is the first contract anniversary;

 

  (9)   the guaranteed payment floor percentage is 7%; and

 

  (10)    there is no premium tax.

 

Annuity

Year

   

Annual

Income

Amount

   

Monthly

Income
Paid

   

Commutation

Base –

End of Year

   

Adjustment

Account –

End of Year

   

Income
Base, Less
Commutation

Charge,

Less Monthly

Income Paid –

End of Year

   

Commutation
Value –

End of Year

 
  1     $ 7,146     $ 7,938     $ 114,754     $ 792     $ 97,462     $ 97,462  
  2       7,421       7,938       115,919       1,308       90,524       90,524  
  3       7,707       7,938       116,869       1,539       83,586       83,586  
  4       8,003       7,938       117,575       1,474       76,648       76,648  
  5       8,311       7,938       118,006       1,101       69,710       69,710  
  6       8,631       7,938       118,125       409       62,772       62,772  
  7       8,963       8,554       117,895       0       55,218       55,218  

 

The commutation base at the end of annuity year 1 (contract year 2) is determined by multiplying the Contract Value at the end of the first contract year less the annual income amount for annuity year 1 by 1.08 (($113,400 - $7,146) x 1.08 = $114,754). The commutation value at the end of annuity year 1 is equal to the lesser of (i) the income base, less the commutation charge, less monthly income paid ($113,400 - 8% x $100,000 – $7,938 = $97,462) and (ii) the commutation base, less the commutation charge, less the value of the adjustment account ($114,754 – 8% x $100,000 – $0 = $106,754). The commutation base at the end of annuity year 2 (contract year 3) is determined by multiplying the commutation base at the end of annuity year 1 less the annual income amount for annuity year 2 by 1.08 (($114,754 – $7,421) x 1.08 = $115,919).

 

139


Table of Contents

TAX MATTERS

 

Introduction

 

This part of the prospectus discusses the federal income tax treatment of the contract. The federal income tax treatment of the contract is complex and sometimes uncertain. The federal income tax rules may vary with your particular circumstances.

 

This discussion is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. It does not address all of the federal income tax rules that may affect you and your contract. This discussion also does not address other federal tax consequences, or state or local tax consequences, associated with a contract. As a result, you should always consult a tax adviser about the application of tax rules to your individual situation.

 

Taxation of Non-Qualified Contracts

 

This part of the discussion describes some of the federal income tax rules applicable to Non-Qualified Contracts. A Non-Qualified Contract is a contract not issued in connection with a qualified retirement plan receiving special tax treatment under the Code, such as an individual retirement annuity or a Section 401(k) plan.

 

Tax deferral on earnings. The federal income tax law generally does not tax any increase in an owner’s Contract Value until there is a distribution from the contract. However, certain requirements must be satisfied in order for this general rule to apply, including:

 

    an individual must own the contract (or the tax law must treat the contract as owned by an individual);

 

    the investments of the Separate Account must be “adequately diversified” in accordance with Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) regulations;

 

    the owner’s right to choose particular investments for a contract must be limited; and

 

    the contract’s Maturity Date must not occur near the end of the Annuitant’s life expectancy.

 

Contracts not owned by an individual — no tax deferral and loss of interest deduction. As a general rule, the Code does not treat a contract that is owned by an entity (rather than an individual) as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. The entity owning the contract generally pays tax each year on the annual increase in Contract Value. Contracts issued to a corporation or a trust are examples of contracts where the owner is taxed on the contract’s earnings.

 

There are several exceptions to this rule. For example, the Code treats a contract as owned by an individual if the nominal owner is a trust or other entity that holds the contract as an agent for an individual. However, this non-qualified exception does not apply in the case of any employer that owns a contract to provide deferred compensation for its employees.

 

In the case of a contract issued after June 8, 1997 to a taxpayer that is not an individual, or a contract held for the benefit of an entity, the entity will lose its deduction for a portion of its otherwise deductible interest expenses. This disallowance does not apply if the nonnatural owner pays tax on the annual increase in the Contract Value. Entities that are considering purchasing the contract, or entities that will benefit from someone else’s ownership of a contract, should consult a tax adviser.

 

Investments in the Separate Account must be diversified. For a contract to be treated as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes, the investments of the Separate Account must be “adequately diversified.” The IRS has issued regulations that prescribe standards for determining whether the investments of the Separate Account, including the assets of each Portfolio in which the Separate Account invests, are adequately diversified. If the Separate Account fails to comply with these diversification standards, the owner could be required to pay tax for the year of such failure and each subsequent year on the untaxed income accumulated in the contract.

 

Although we do not control the investments of all of the Funds, we expect that the Funds will comply with the IRS regulations so that the Separate Account will be considered “adequately diversified.”

 

Restrictions on the extent to which an owner can direct the investment of assets. In some circumstances, owners of variable contracts who possess excessive control over the investment of the underlying separate account assets may be treated as the owners of those assets and may be subject to tax currently on income and gains produced by those assets. Although published guidance in this area does not address certain aspects of the contract, we believe that the owner of a contract should not be treated as the owner of the Separate Account assets. We reserve the right to modify the contract to bring it into conformity with applicable standards should such modification be necessary to prevent an owner of the contract from being treated as the owner of the underlying Separate Account assets. However, there is no assurance such efforts would be successful.

 

Age at which income payments must begin. Federal income tax rules do not expressly identify a particular age by which income payments must begin. However, those rules do require that an annuity contract provide for amortization, through income payments of the contract’s premiums paid and earnings.

 

140


Table of Contents

We believe that these rules are satisfied by providing guaranteed annuity purchase rates in the contract that the owner may exercise at any time after the first policy year. If income payments begin or are scheduled to begin at a date that the IRS determines does not satisfy these rules, interest and gains under the contract could be taxable each year as they accrue.

 

No guarantees regarding tax treatment. We make no guarantees regarding the tax treatment of any contract or of any transaction involving a contract. However, the remainder of this discussion assumes that your contract will be treated as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes and that the tax law will not impose tax on any increase in your Contract Value until there is a distribution from your contract.

 

Partial and total surrenders. A partial surrender occurs when you receive less than the total amount of the contract’s Surrender Value. In the case of a partial surrender, you will pay tax on the amount you receive to the extent your Contract Value before the partial surrender exceeds your “investment in the contract.” (This term is explained below.) This income (and all other income from your contract) is ordinary income. The Code imposes a higher rate of tax on ordinary income than it does on capital gains.

 

A surrender occurs when you receive the total amount of the contract’s Surrender Value. In the case of a surrender, you will generally pay tax on the amount you receive to the extent it exceeds your “investment in the contract.”

 

Your “investment in the contract” generally equals the total of your premium payments under the contract, reduced by any amounts you previously received from the contract that you did not include in your income.

 

Your contract imposes charges relating to the death benefit, including any death benefit provided under an optional rider. It is possible that all or a portion of these charges could be treated as partial surrenders from the contract.

 

In the case of Systematic Withdrawals, the amount of each Systematic Withdrawal should be considered a distribution and taxed in the same manner as a partial surrender from the contract.

 

Any withdrawals taken pursuant to one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders are subject to tax as partial withdrawals.

 

Distributions received before the Maturity Date pursuant to Guaranteed Income Advantage may be subject to tax as partial withdrawals. See the “Tax Treatment of Guaranteed Income Advantage” provision in the “Guaranteed Income Advantage” section of the prospectus.

 

Assignments and pledges. The Code treats any assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) any portion of your Contract Value as a partial surrender of such amount or portion.

 

Gifting a contract. If you transfer ownership of your contract — without receiving full and adequate consideration — to a person other than your spouse (or to your former spouse incident to divorce), you will pay tax on your Contract Value to the extent it exceeds your “investment in the contract.” In such a case, the new owner’s “investment in the contract” will be increased to reflect the amount included in your income.

 

Taxation of income payments. The Code imposes tax on a portion of each income payment (at ordinary income tax rates) and treats a portion as a nontaxable return of your “investment in the contract.” Withdrawals taken pursuant to one of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Riders are generally not taxed as income payments for federal income tax purposes. As discussed above, these payments should be considered distributions and taxed in the same manner as a partial withdrawal from the contract. We will notify you annually of the taxable amount of your income payment.

 

Pursuant to the Code, you will pay tax on the full amount of your income payments once you have recovered the total amount of the “investment in the contract.” If income payments cease because of the death of the Annuitant(s) and before the total amount of the “investment in the contract” has been recovered, the unrecovered amount generally will be deductible.

 

If proceeds are left with us (Optional Payment Plan 4), they are taxed in the same manner as a surrender. The owner must pay tax currently on the interest credited on these proceeds. This treatment could also apply to Optional Payment Plan 3 depending on the relationship of the amount of the periodic payments to the period over which they are paid.

 

Taxation of the death benefit. We may distribute amounts from your contract because of the death of an owner, a joint owner, or an Annuitant. The tax treatment of these amounts depends on whether the owner, joint owner, or Annuitant dies before or after the Maturity Date.

 

Taxation of Death Benefit if Paid Before the Maturity Date:

 

    the death benefit is taxed to the designated beneficiary in the same manner as an income payment would have been taxed to the owner if received under an Optional Payment Plan;

 

    if not received under an Optional Payment Plan, the death benefit is taxed to the designated beneficiary in the same manner as a surrender or a partial surrender would have been taxed to the owner, depending on the manner in which the death benefit is paid.

 

141


Table of Contents

Taxation of Death Benefit if Paid After the Maturity Date:

 

    The death benefit is includible in income to the extent it exceeds the unrecovered “investment in the contract.”

 

Penalty taxes payable on surrenders, partial surrenders or income payments. The Code may impose a penalty tax equal to 10% of the amount of any payment from your contract that is included in your gross income. The Code does not impose the 10% penalty tax if one of several exceptions applies. These exceptions include partial and total surrenders or income payments that:

 

    you receive on or after you reach age 5912;

 

    you receive because you became disabled (as defined in the tax law);

 

    are received on or after the death of an owner; or

 

    you receive as a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the taxpayer.

 

Systematic Withdrawals may qualify for this last exception if structured in accordance with IRS guidelines. If they do, any modification of the Systematic Withdrawals, including additional partial surrenders apart from the Systematic Withdrawals, could result in certain adverse tax consequences. In addition, premium payments or a transfer between the Subaccounts may result in payments not qualifying for this exception.

 

Other exceptions may be applicable under certain circumstances and special rules may be applicable in connection with the exceptions enumerated above. You should consult a tax adviser with regard to exceptions from the penalty tax.

 

Medicare Tax. Distributions from Non-Qualified Contracts will be considered “investment income” for purposes of the Medicare tax on investment income. Thus, in certain circumstances, a 3.8% tax may be applied to some or all of the taxable portion of distributions (e.g. earnings) to individuals whose income exceeds certain threshold amounts. Please consult a tax adviser for more information.

 

Special rules if you own more than one contract. In certain circumstances, you may have to combine some or all of the Non-Qualified Contracts you own in order to determine the amount of an income payment, a total surrender, or a partial surrender that you must include in income. For example:

 

    if you purchase a contract described by this prospectus and also purchase at approximately the same time an immediate annuity, the IRS may treat the two contracts as one contract;

 

    if you purchase two or more deferred annuity contracts from the same life insurance company (or its affiliates) during any calendar year, the Code treats all such contracts as one contract for certain purposes.

 

The effects of such aggregation are not clear. However, it could affect:

 

    the amount of a surrender, a partial surrender or an income payment that you must include in income; and

 

    the amount that might be subject to a penalty tax.

 

Section 1035 Exchanges

 

Under Section 1035 of the Code, the exchange of one annuity contract for another annuity contract generally is not taxed (unless cash is distributed). To qualify as a nontaxable exchange however, certain conditions must be satisfied, e.g., the obligee(s) under the new annuity contract must be the same obligee(s) as under the original contract. We do not permit an owner to partially exchange this contract for another annuity contract.

 

If this contract has been purchased in whole or part by exchanging part of a life insurance or annuity contract, certain subsequent transactions may cause the IRS to retrospectively treat the partial Section 1035 exchange as taxable. We intend to administer the contract without regard to the partially exchanged funding contract and disclaim any responsibility for monitoring events that could cause the IRS to examine the completed partial Section 1035 exchange. Owners contemplating any transaction, involving this contract or a partially exchanged contract funding this contract, within 180 days of a partial Section 1035 exchange are strongly advised to consult a tax adviser.

 

Upon the death of a non-spousal joint owner, the contract provides the surviving joint owner with the option of using the proceeds of this contract to purchase a separate annuity contract with terms and values that are substantially similar to those of this contract. Exercise of this option will not qualify as a tax-free exchange under Section 1035.

 

Beginning in 2010, the owner may exchange the contract under Section 1035 of the Code for a long-term care contract. We believe that the provisions of the Pension Protection Act of 2006 establishing annuity to long-term care Section 1035 exchanges would permit the owner to exchange a portion of the contract to pay the annual or other periodic premium for a long-term care contract issued by us or another insurance company. The IRS has issued limited guidance on such transactions, including on the allocation of basis that would be required to effect them. It is possible that the IRS could take a narrow view of the 2006 legislation and under certain circumstances treat partial Section 1035 exchanges to pay long-term care premiums as taxable withdrawals from the contract. Currently, we do not

 

142


Table of Contents

permit an owner to partially exchange this contract to purchase a long-term care contract or pay long-term care premiums. If all or a portion of the contract is used to purchase long-term care insurance in a Section 1035 exchange, the amount so used representing income on the contract would not be tax-deductible as a medical expense and the amount so used representing investment in the contract may not be tax-deductible as a medical expense. Any owner contemplating the use of the contract to fund long-term care insurance or long-term care expenses should consult a tax adviser.

 

Qualified Retirement Plans

 

We also designed the contracts for use in connection with certain types of retirement plans that receive favorable treatment under the Code. Contracts issued to or in connection with retirement plans that receive special tax treatment are called “Qualified Contracts.” We may not offer all of the types of Qualified Contracts described herein in the future. Prospective purchasers should contact our Home Office for information on the availability of Qualified Contracts at any given time.

 

The federal income tax rules applicable to qualified retirement plans are complex and varied. As a result, this prospectus makes no attempt to provide more than general information about use of the contract with the various types of qualified retirement plans. Persons intending to use the contract in connection with a qualified retirement plan should obtain advice from a tax adviser.

 

The contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit. The purchase of this contract as an investment of a qualified retirement plan does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. If you are purchasing this contract as a Qualified Contract, you should consider purchasing this contract for its death benefits, income benefits and other non-tax benefits. Please consult a tax adviser for information specific to your circumstances in order to determine whether this contract is an appropriate investment for you.

 

Types of Qualified Contracts. The types of Qualified Contracts currently being offered include:

 

    Traditional Individual Retirement Annuities (IRAs) permit individuals to make annual contributions of up to the lesser of a specified dollar amount for the year or the amount of compensation includible in the individual’s gross income for the year. Certain employers may establish Simplified Employee Pensions (SEPs), which have higher contribution limits, on behalf of their employees. The Internal Revenue Service has not reviewed the contract for qualification as an IRA, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether death benefits such as those in the contract comport with IRA qualification requirements.

 

    Roth IRAs permit certain eligible individuals to make non-deductible contributions to a Roth IRA. Distributions from a Roth IRA generally are not taxed, except that, once aggregate distributions exceed contributions to the Roth IRA, income tax and a 10% IRS penalty tax may apply to distributions made: (1) before age 5912 (subject to certain exceptions); or (2) during the five taxable years starting with the year in which the first contribution is made to any Roth IRA. A 10% penalty may apply to amounts attributable to a conversion from an IRA if they are distributed during the five taxable years beginning with the year in which the conversion was made.

 

    Traditional individual retirement accounts and Roth individual retirement accounts have the same contribution limits and tax treatment of distributions as the corresponding type of individual retirement annuity, discussed above. The contract may be owned by the custodian or trustee of an individual retirement account established for the benefit of the Annuitant. Only the owner, acting through its authorized representative(s), may exercise contract rights. When held by an individual retirement account, the contract is not issued as an individual retirement annuity or administered as such by us. Annuitants must look to the custodian or trustee, as contract owner, for satisfaction of their rights to benefits under the terms of the individual retirement account.

 

    Corporate pension and profit-sharing plans under Section 401(a) of the Code allow corporate employers to establish various types of retirement plans for employees, and self-employed individuals to establish qualified plans (“H.R. 10 or Keough plans”) for themselves and their employees.

 

   

403(b) Plans allow employees of certain tax-exempt organizations and public schools to exclude from their gross income the premium payments made, within certain limits, to a contract that will provide an annuity for the employee’s retirement. Distributions of: (1) salary reduction contributions made in years beginning after December 31, 1988; (2) earnings on those contributions; and (3) earnings on amounts held as of the last year beginning before January 1, 1989, are not allowed prior to age 5912, severance from employment, death or disability. Salary reduction contributions (and, effective for plan years beginning in January 1, 2024, qualified nonelective contributions,

 

143


Table of Contents
 

qualified matching contributions, and earnings attributable to such amounts) may also be distributed upon hardship, but would generally be subject to a 10% IRS penalty tax. For contracts issued after 2008, amounts attributable to nonelective contributions may be subject to distribution restrictions specified in the employer’s 403(b) Plan. Under recent IRS regulations we are obligated to share information concerning certain contract transactions with the employer sponsoring the 403(b) plan in which the owner is participating and possibly other product providers. We generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that these transactions comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance.

 

Terms of qualified retirement plans and Qualified Contracts. The terms of a qualified retirement plan may affect your rights under a Qualified Contract. When issued in connection with a qualified retirement plan, we will amend a contract as generally necessary to conform to the requirements of the type of plan. However, the rights of any person to any benefits under qualified retirement plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the plans themselves, regardless of the terms and conditions of the contract. In addition, we are not bound by the terms and conditions of qualified retirement plans to the extent such terms and conditions contradict the contract, unless we consent.

 

Employer qualified plans. Qualified plans sponsored by an employer or employee organization are governed by the provisions of the Code and the Employee Retirement Income Security Act, as amended (“ERISA”). ERISA is administered primarily by the U.S. Department of Labor. The Code and ERISA include requirements that various features be contained in an employer qualified plan with respect to: participation; vesting; funding; nondiscrimination; limits on contributions and benefits; distributions; penalties; duties of fiduciaries; prohibited transactions; withholding; reporting and disclosure.

 

In the case of certain qualified plans, if a participant is married at the time benefits become payable, unless the participant elects otherwise with written consent of the spouse, the benefits must be paid in the form of a qualified joint and survivor annuity. A qualified joint and survivor annuity is an annuity payable for the life of the participant with a survivor annuity for the life of the spouse in an amount that is not less than one-half of the amount payable to the participant during his or her lifetime. In addition, a married participant’s beneficiary must be the spouse, unless the spouse consents in writing to the designation of a different beneficiary. There is much uncertainty regarding the application of these rules in the context of guaranteed withdrawal benefits such as those offered in optional riders to the contract. Consult a tax or legal adviser regarding these issues if an optional guaranteed withdrawal rider is being considered under a 401(a) or 403(b) plan.

 

If this contract is purchased as an investment of a qualified plan, the owner will be either an employee benefit trust or the plan sponsor. Plan participants and beneficiaries will have no ownership rights in the contract. Only the owner, acting through its authorized representative(s) may exercise contract rights. Participants and beneficiaries must look to the plan fiduciaries for satisfaction of their rights to benefits under the terms of the qualified plan.

 

Where a contract is purchased by an employer-qualified plan, we assume no responsibility regarding whether the contract’s terms and benefits are consistent with the requirements of the Code and ERISA. It is the responsibility of the employer, plan trustee, plan administrator and/or other plan fiduciaries to satisfy the requirements of the Code and ERISA applicable to the qualified plan. This prospectus does not provide detailed tax or ERISA information. Various tax disadvantages, including penalties, may result from actions that conflict with requirements of the Code or ERISA, and the regulations pertaining to those laws. Federal tax laws and ERISA are continually under review by Congress. Any changes in the laws or in the regulations pertaining to the laws may affect the tax treatment of amounts contributed to employer qualified plans and the fiduciary actions required by ERISA.

 

IRAs and Roth IRAs. The Code permits individuals to make annual contributions to IRAs of up to the lesser of a specified dollar amount for the year or the amount of compensation includible in the individual’s gross income for the year. The contributions may be deductible in whole or in part, depending on the individual’s income. The Code also permits certain eligible individuals to make non-deductible contributions to a Roth IRA in cash or as a rollover or transfer from another Roth IRA or other IRA. A rollover from or conversion of an IRA to a Roth IRA is generally subject to tax. You should consult a tax adviser before combining any converted amounts with any other Roth IRA contributions, including any other conversion amounts from other tax years.

 

The Internal Revenue Service has not reviewed the contract for qualification as an IRA, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether a death benefit provision such as the provision in this contract comports with IRA qualification requirements. We may, however, endorse the contract to satisfy the IRA or Roth IRA qualification rules and submit the endorsement to the IRS for approval as to form. If you purchased the contract with such an endorsement, the accompanying disclosure statement will indicate the status of the endorsement’s approval under the IRS IRA Prototype Program.

 

144


Table of Contents

You will be the owner of a contract issued as an IRA or Roth IRA, and will be responsible for exercising your rights as owner in accordance with applicable tax rules, including limitations for contributions and distributions. The contract may also be held in an IRA custodial account or trust as an investment. In that event the custodian or trustee, with your cooperation, is responsible for satisfaction of the IRA qualification requirements. We have no responsibility beyond that pertaining to nonqualified contracts for contracts held in an IRA account or trust.

 

The death benefit and Qualified Contracts. Pursuant to IRS regulations, IRAs and 403(b) Plans may not invest in life insurance contracts. We do not believe that these regulations prohibit the death benefit, including that provided by any death benefit rider option, from being provided under the contracts when we issue the contracts as Traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, SEPs or 403(b) Plans. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that the presence of the death benefit under a contract issued as a Traditional IRA, a Roth IRA, a SEP or 403(b) Plan could disqualify a contract and result in increased taxes to the owner.

 

It is also possible that the death benefit could be characterized as an incidental death benefit. If the death benefit were so characterized, this could result in currently taxable income to purchasers. In addition, there are limitations on the amount of incidental death benefits that may be provided under qualified retirement plans, such as in connection with a Section 403(b) plan.

 

Treatment of Qualified Contracts compared with Non-Qualified Contracts. Although some of the federal income tax rules are the same for both Qualified and Non-Qualified Contracts, many of the rules are different. For example:

 

    the Code generally does not impose tax on the earnings under either Qualified or Non-Qualified Contracts until the earnings are distributed;

 

    the Code does not limit the amount of premium payments and the time at which premium payments can be made under Non-Qualified Contracts. However, the Code does limit both the amount and frequency of premium payments made to Qualified Contracts;

 

    the Code does not allow a deduction for premium payments made for Non-Qualified Contracts, but sometimes allows a deduction or exclusion from income for premium payments made to a Qualified Contract;

 

    Under most qualified retirement plans, the owner must begin receiving payments from the contract in certain minimum amounts by a certain date, generally April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the owner attains their applicable age for Traditional IRAs and SEPs and April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the calendar year in which the employee (except for a 5 percent owner) retires or attains their applicable age for other Qualified Contracts (referred to as the “required beginning date”). If the owner attains age 72 before or during 2022, the applicable age is 72. If the owner attains age 72 after 2022 and age 73 before 2033, the applicable age is 73. If the owner attains age 74 after 2032, the applicable age is 75. The actuarial value of certain benefit guarantees, such as guaranteed withdrawal benefits, and certain death benefits may be included with the contract’s cash value in determining the required minimum distribution amount. The presence of such living benefits and death benefits may require the owner to withdraw a larger amount each year than would be required based only on the contract value. We are required to annually determine and report to the owner the fair market value for traditional individual retirement annuities while the owner is alive. This computation is based in part on future economic performance and conditions and is made under the guidance of our actuarial department in accordance with income tax regulations and guidelines published by the Society of Actuaries. It is possible that, using different assumptions or methodologies, the amount required to be withdrawn would be more or less than the amount we report to you as the required minimum distribution. Roth IRAs do not require any distributions during the owner’s lifetime. The death benefit under your contract and certain other benefits provided by the living benefit riders may increase the amount of the minimum required distribution that must be taken from your contract.

 

The federal income tax rules applicable to qualified retirement plans and Qualified Contracts vary with the type of plan and contract. For example, federal tax rules limit the amount of premium payments that can be made, and the tax deduction or exclusion that may be allowed for the premium payments. These limits vary depending on the type of qualified retirement plan and the circumstances of the plan participant, e.g., the participant’s compensation.

 

Amounts received under Qualified Contracts. Federal income tax rules generally include distributions from a Qualified Contract in your income as ordinary income. Premium payments that are deductible or excludible from income do not create “investment in the contract.” Thus, under many Qualified Contracts there will be no “investment in the contract” and you include the total amount you receive in your income. There are exceptions. For example, you do not include amounts received from a Roth IRA if certain conditions are satisfied. In addition, failure to comply with the minimum

 

145


Table of Contents

distribution rules applicable to certain qualified retirement plans, will result in the imposition of an excise tax. This excise tax generally equals 25% of the amount by which a minimum required distribution exceeds the actual distribution from the qualified retirement plan. The excise tax is reduced to 10% if a distribution of the shortfall is made within two years and to the date the excise tax is imposed. Please note important changes to the required minimum distribution rules. Under IRAs and defined contribution retirement plans, most non-spouse beneficiaries will no longer be able to satisfy these rules by “stretching” payouts over life. Instead, those beneficiaries will have to take their post-death distributions within ten years. Certain exceptions apply to “eligible designated beneficiaries,” which include disabled and chronically ill individuals, individuals who are ten or less years younger than the deceased individual, and children who have not reached the age of majority. This change applies to distributions to designated beneficiaries of individuals who die on and after January 1, 2020. Consult a tax adviser if you are affected by these new rules.

 

Federal penalty taxes payable on distributions. The Code may impose a penalty tax equal to 10% of the amount of any payment from your Qualified Contract that is includible in your income. The Code does not impose the penalty tax if one of several exceptions apply. The exceptions vary depending on the type of Qualified Contract you purchase. For example, in the case of an IRA, exceptions provide that the penalty tax does not apply to a partial surrender, surrender, or annuity payment:

 

    received on or after the owner reaches age 5912;

 

    received on or after the owner’s death or because of the owner’s disability (as defined in the tax law);

 

    received as a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the taxpayer; or

 

    received as reimbursement for certain amounts paid for medical care.

 

These exceptions, as well as certain others not described here, generally apply to taxable distributions from other qualified retirement plans. However, the specific requirements of the exception may vary.

 

Moving money from one Qualified Contract or qualified retirement plan to another.Rollovers and transfers: In many circumstances you may move money between Qualified Contracts and qualified retirement plans by means of a rollover or a transfer. Special rules apply to such rollovers and transfers.

 

An IRA owner may make only one rollover in a 12 month period to avoid being taxed on distributions received during that period from all of his or her IRAs (including Roth IRAs). The rule does not apply to direct transfers between IRA issuers or custodians. If you have received an IRA distribution and are contemplating making a rollover contribution, you should consult a tax adviser.

 

If you do not follow the applicable rules, you may suffer adverse federal income tax consequences, including paying taxes which you might not otherwise have had to pay. You should always consult a qualified tax adviser before you move or attempt to move assets between any Qualified Contract or plan and another Qualified Contract or plan. If your contract was issued pursuant to a 403(b) plan, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance.

 

Direct rollovers: The direct rollover rules apply to certain payments (called “eligible rollover distributions”) from Section 401(a) plans, Section 403(b) plans, H.R. 10 plans, and Qualified Contracts used in connection with these types of plans. The direct rollover rules do not apply to distributions from IRAs. The direct rollover rules require federal income tax equal to 20% of the taxable portion of an eligible rollover distribution to be withheld from the amount of the distribution, unless the owner elects to have the amount directly transferred to certain Qualified Contracts or plans. Certain restrictions apply to the ability to rollover any after-tax amounts.

 

Prior to receiving an eligible rollover distribution from us, we will provide you with a notice explaining these requirements and the procedure for avoiding 20% withholding by electing a direct rollover.

 

IRA conversions: If this contract is issued as an IRA, you may convert the contract to a Roth IRA. If you do so, the fair market value of your contract will be treated as a distribution from your IRA. This fair market value will include the contract’s cash value together with the actuarial value of certain benefit guarantees, such as guaranteed withdrawal benefits, and certain death benefits. This computation is based in part on future economic performance and conditions and is made under the guidance of our actuarial department in accordance with income tax regulations. The methodology followed is similar to that used to determine the actuarial value of such benefit guarantees for required minimum distribution purposes, as described above in the “Treatment of Qualified Contracts compared with Non-Qualified Contracts” section. We will determine and report the fair market value of your contract to you and the Internal Revenue Service to satisfy our reporting obligations using assumptions and calculation methodologies based on our interpretation of the Code. It is possible that, using different assumptions or methodologies, your actual tax liability would be more or less than the income reported by us. You should always consult a tax adviser before you convert an IRA to a Roth IRA.

 

146


Table of Contents

Disclosure Pursuant to Code and ERISA Requirements. The ongoing fees and expenses of the contracts and the charges you may pay when you surrender or take withdrawals from your contract, as well as the range of fees and expenses of the Portfolios that you will pay indirectly when your assets are allocated to the Portfolios, are discussed in the “Fee Tables” provision of the prospectus. More detail concerning each Portfolio’s fees and expenses is included in the prospectus for each Portfolio.

 

AssetMark is the investment adviser under the Asset Allocation Program and a former affiliate of the Company. There is no direct fee for participation in the Asset Allocation Program. The Company may compensate AssetMark for services it provides related to the Asset Allocation Program. However, the Company may receive fees from the investment adviser or distributor of a Portfolio for certain administrative and other services we provide to you or to the Portfolio relating to the allocation of your assets to the Portfolio, and the amount of these fees may vary from Portfolio to Portfolio. Furthermore, the Company or our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation may receive Rule 12b-1 fees in varying amounts from the Portfolios or their distributors for distribution and related services. Additional information on the fees payable to the Company and Capital Brokerage Corporation by the Portfolios and their advisers and distributors, including the range of such fees, is included in the “Subaccounts” provision of the prospectus. Additional information regarding the Asset Allocation Program and the potential conflicts of interest to which AssetMark is subject is included in the “Asset Allocation Program” provision of the prospectus.

 

When you purchase a contract through a broker-dealer, the broker-dealer is paid a commission and may be paid a separate marketing allowance. The maximum aggregate amount of such compensation is 6.5% of a contract owner’s aggregate premium payments. The broker-dealer firm generally pays a portion of such commission to its representative who assisted you with the purchase, and that amount will vary depending on the broker-dealer and the individual representative. The Company has no agreement with any broker-dealer and any representative of a broker-dealer that limits the insurance and investment products or other securities they offer to those issued by the Company.

 

By signing the application for the contract, you acknowledge receipt of these disclosures and approve the purchase of the contract, the Asset Allocation Program, and the investments made pursuant to the Asset Allocation Program.

 

Federal Income Tax Withholding

 

We will withhold and remit to the IRS a part of the taxable portion of each distribution made under a contract unless the distributee notifies us at or before the time of the distribution that he or she elects not to have any amounts withheld. In certain circumstances, federal income tax rules may require us to withhold tax. At the time you request a partial or total surrender, or income payment, we will send you forms that explain the withholding requirements.

 

See the “Annuity Purchases by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations” section below for special withholding rules applicable to payees other than U.S. citizens or residents and to payments made overseas.

 

State Income Tax Withholding

 

If required by the law of your state, we will also withhold state income tax from the taxable portion of each distribution made under the contract, unless you make an available election to avoid withholding. If permitted under state law, we will honor your request for voluntary state withholding.

 

Tax Status of the Company

 

Under existing federal income tax laws, we do not pay tax on investment income and realized capital gains of the Separate Account. We do not anticipate that we will incur any federal income tax liability on the income and gains earned by the Separate Account. We, therefore, do not impose a charge for federal income taxes. If federal income tax law changes and we must pay tax on some or all of the income and gains earned by the Separate Account, we may impose a charge against the Separate Account to pay the taxes.

 

Federal Estate, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

 

While no attempt is being made to discuss in detail the Federal estate tax implications of the contract, a purchaser should keep in mind that the value of an annuity contract owned by a decedent and payable to a beneficiary who survives the decedent is included in the decedent’s gross estate. Depending on the terms of the annuity contract, the value of the annuity included in the gross estate may be the value of the lump sum payment payable to the designated beneficiary or the actuarial value of the payments to be received by the beneficiary. Consult an estate planning advisor for more information.

 

Under certain circumstances, the Code may impose a generation-skipping (“GST”) tax when all or part of an annuity contract is transferred to, or a death benefit is paid to, an individual two or more generations younger than the Owner. Regulations issued under the Code may require us to deduct the tax from your Contract, or from any applicable payment, and pay it directly to the IRS.

 

The potential application of these taxes underscores the importance of seeking guidance from a qualified adviser to help ensure that your estate plan adequately addresses your needs and those of your beneficiaries under all possible scenarios.

 

147


Table of Contents

Definition of Spouse Under Federal Law

 

The contract provides that upon your death, a surviving spouse may have certain continuation rights that he or she may elect to exercise for the contract’s death benefit. All contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

 

Annuity Purchases by Residents of Puerto Rico

 

The IRS has announced that income received by residents of Puerto Rico under life insurance or annuity contracts issued by a Puerto Rico branch of a United States life insurance company is U.S. — source income that is generally subject to United States federal income tax.

 

Annuity Purchases by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

 

The discussion above provides general information regarding U.S. federal income tax consequences to annuity purchasers that are U.S. citizens or residents. Purchasers (and beneficiaries) that are not U.S. citizens or residents will generally be subject to U.S. federal withholding tax on taxable distributions from annuity contracts at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. In addition, such purchasers may be subject to state and/or municipal taxes and taxes that may be imposed by the purchaser’s country of citizenship or residence. Special withholding rules apply to entity purchasers (including foreign corporations, partnerships, and trusts) that are not U.S. residents. We reserve the right to make all payments due to owners or beneficiaries directly to such persons and shall not be obligated to pay any foreign financial institution on behalf of any individual. Prospective purchasers are advised to consult with a qualified tax adviser regarding U.S., state, and foreign taxation with respect to an annuity contract purchase.

 

Foreign Tax Credits

 

We may benefit from any foreign tax credits attributable to taxes paid by certain funds to foreign jurisdictions to the extent permitted under federal tax law.

 

Changes in the Law

 

This discussion is based on the Code, IRS regulations, and interpretations existing on the date of this prospectus. Congress, the IRS, and the courts may modify these authorities, however, sometimes retroactively.

 

REQUESTING PAYMENTS

 

To request a payment, you must provide us with notice in a form satisfactory to us. We will ordinarily pay any partial surrender or total surrender proceeds from the Separate Account within seven days after receipt at our Home Office of a request in good order. We will also ordinarily make payment of lump sum death benefit proceeds from the Separate Account within seven days from the receipt of due proof of death and all required forms. We will determine the amount of the payment as of the end of the Valuation Period during which our Home Office receives the payment request or due proof of death and all required forms.

 

In most cases, when we pay the death benefit in a lump sum, we will pay these proceeds to your designated beneficiary directly in the form of a check. We may also provide your designated beneficiary the option to establish an interest bearing draft account, called the “Secure Access Account,” in the amount of the death benefit.

 

When establishing the Secure Access Account we will send the designated beneficiary a draft account book within seven days after we receive all the required documents, and the designated beneficiary will have immediate access to the account simply by writing a draft for all or any part of the amount of the death benefit payment. Any interest credited to amounts in the Secure Access Account is currently taxable to the designated beneficiary.

 

The Secure Access Account is part of our General Account. It is not a bank account and it is not insured by the FDIC or any other government agency. As part of our General Account, it is subject to the claims of our creditors. We receive a benefit from all amounts left in the Secure Access Account.

 

We require a positive election from the designated beneficiary to establish the Secure Access Account for the designated beneficiary. The Secure Access Account is not available in all states. We may discontinue offering the Secure Access Account at any time, for any reason and without notice.

 

We will delay making a payment from the Subaccount or applying Subaccount value to a payment plan if:

 

  (1)   the disposal or valuation of the Subaccount is not reasonably practicable because:

 

    the SEC declares that an emergency exists (due to the emergency the disposal or valuation of the Separate Account’s assets is not reasonably practicable);

 

148


Table of Contents
    the New York Stock Exchange is closed for other than a regular holiday or weekend;

 

    trading is restricted by the SEC; or

 

  (2)   the SEC, by order, permits postponement of payment to protect our owners.

 

In addition, if, pursuant to SEC rules, a money market fund that a subaccount invests in suspends payment of redemption proceeds in connection with a liquidation of that fund, we will delay payment of any transfer, partial withdrawal, surrender, loan, or death benefit from the subaccount until the fund is liquidated.

 

State law requires that we reserve the right to defer payments from the Guarantee Account for a partial or total surrender for up to six months from the date we receive your request at our Home Office. We also may defer making any payments attributable to a check or draft that has not cleared until we are satisfied that the check or draft has been paid by the bank on which it is drawn.

 

If mandated under applicable law, we may be required to reject a premium payment and/or block an owner’s account and thereby refuse to pay any requests for transfers, partial surrenders, or death benefits until instructions are received from the appropriate regulators. We may also be required to provide additional information about you or your account to government regulators.

 

SALES OF THE CONTRACTS

 

This contract is no longer offered or sold. However, the following section provides detail concerning the manner in which contracts were sold and the compensation arrangements applicable to those sales. Although certain compensation practices no longer apply (e.g., no commissions are paid in connection with new contract sales because such sales have been suspended), certain of the compensation practices remain relevant to in-force contracts. Most notably, selling firms continue to be compensated with respect to subsequent premium payments made under the in-force contracts.

 

We have entered into an underwriting agreement with Capital Brokerage Corporation for the distribution and sale of the contracts. Pursuant to this agreement, Capital Brokerage Corporation serves as principal underwriter for the contracts, offering them on a continuous basis. Capital Brokerage Corporation is located at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. Capital Brokerage Corporation will use its best efforts to sell the contracts, but is not required to sell any specific number or dollar amount of contracts.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation was organized as a corporation under the laws of the state of Washington in 1981 and is an affiliate of ours. Capital Brokerage Corporation is registered as a broker-dealer with the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as well as with the securities commissions in the states in which it operates, and is a member of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”) (formerly, NASD, Inc.).

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation offers the contracts through its registered representatives who are registered with FINRA and with the states in which they do business. More information about Capital Brokerage Corporation and the registered representatives is available at http://www.finra.org or by calling (800) 289-9999. You also can obtain an investor brochure from FINRA describing its Public Disclosure Program. Registered representatives with Capital Brokerage Corporation are also licensed as insurance agents in the states in which they do business and are appointed with the Company.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation also enters into selling agreements with an affiliated broker-dealer and unaffiliated broker-dealers to sell the contracts. The registered representatives of these selling firms are registered with FINRA and with the states in which they do business, are licensed as insurance agents in the states in which they do business and are appointed with us.

 

We pay compensation to Capital Brokerage Corporation for promotion and sales of the contracts by its registered representatives as well as by affiliated and unaffiliated selling firms. This compensation consists of sales commissions and other cash and non-cash compensation. The maximum commission we may pay for the sale of a contract is 7.0% of a contract owner’s aggregate premium payments.

 

The maximum commission consists of three parts — commissions paid to internal and external wholesalers of Capital Brokerage Corporation (“wholesalers” are individuals employed by the Company and registered with Capital Brokerage Corporation that promote the offer and sale of the contracts), commissions paid to the affiliated and unaffiliated brokerage firms (“selling firms”) that employ the registered representative who sold your contract, and an amount paid to the selling firm for marketing and other payments related to the sale of the contract. Wholesalers with Capital Brokerage Corporation each may receive a maximum commission of 0.5% of your aggregate premium payments.

 

After commission is paid to the wholesalers of Capital Brokerage Corporation, a commission is then paid to the selling firm. A maximum commission of 5.5% of your aggregate premium payments. The exact amount of commission paid to the registered representative who sold you your contract is determined by the brokerage firm that employs the representative is employed.

 

149


Table of Contents

All selling firms receive commissions as described above based on the sale of, and receipt of premium payments, on the contract. Unaffiliated selling firms receive additional compensation, including marketing allowances and other payments. The maximum marketing allowance paid to a selling firm on the sale of a contract is 1.0% of premium payments received. At times, Capital Brokerage Corporation may make other cash and non-cash payments to selling firms, (as well as receive payments from selling firms) for expenses relating to the recruitment and training of personnel, periodic sales meetings, the production of promotional sales literature and similar expenses. These expenses may also relate to the synchronization of technology between the Company, Capital Brokerage Corporation and the selling firm in order to coordinate data for the sale and maintenance of the contract. In addition, registered representatives may be eligible for non-cash compensation programs offered by Capital Brokerage Corporation or an affiliated company, such as conferences, trips, prizes and awards. The amount of other cash and non-cash compensation paid by Capital Brokerage Corporation or its affiliated companies ranges significantly among the selling firms. Likewise, the amount received by Capital Brokerage Corporation from the selling firms ranges significantly.

 

The commissions listed above are maximum commissions paid, and reflect situations where we pay a higher commission for a short period of time for a special promotion.

 

No specific charge is assessed directly to contract owners or the Separate Account to cover commissions and other incentives or payments described above. We do, however, intend to recoup commissions and other sales expenses and incentives we pay through fees and charges deducted under the contract and any other corporate revenue.

 

All commissions, special marketing allowances and other payments made or received by Capital Brokerage Corporation to or from selling firms come from or are allocated to the general assets of Capital Brokerage Corporation or one of its affiliated companies. Therefore, regardless of the amount paid or received by Capital Brokerage Corporation or one of its affiliated companies, the amount of expenses you pay under the contract does not vary because of such payments to or from such selling firms.

 

Even though your contract costs are not determined based on amounts paid to or received from Capital Brokerage Corporation or the selling firm, the prospect of receiving, or the receipt of, additional cash or non-cash compensation as described above may create an incentive for selling firms and/or their registered representative to sell you this product versus a product with respect to which a selling firm does not receive additional compensation, or a lower level of additional compensation. You may wish to take such compensation arrangements, which may be referred to as “revenue sharing arrangements,” into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the contracts.

 

During 2023, 2022, and 2021, $23.1 million, $26.3 million, and $32.2 million was paid to Capital Brokerage Corporation for new purchase payments received. In 2023, 2022, and 2021, no underwriting commissions were paid to Capital Brokerage Corporation. This contract (RetireReadySM Extra) is no longer offered or sold.

 

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

 

Owner Questions

 

The obligations to owners under the contracts are ours. Please direct your questions and concerns to us at our Home Office.

 

State Regulation

 

As a life insurance company organized and operated under the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia, we are subject to provisions governing life insurers and to regulation by the Virginia Commissioner of Insurance.

 

Our books and accounts are subject to review and examination by the State Corporation Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia at all times. That Commission conducts a full examination of our operations at least every five years.

 

Evidence of Death, Age, Gender, Marital Status or Survival

 

We may require proof of the age, gender, marital status or survival of any person or persons before actions on any applicable contract provision.

 

Records and Reports

 

As presently required by the 1940 Act and applicable regulations, we are responsible for maintaining all records and accounts relating to the Separate Account. At least once each year, we will send you a report showing information about your contract for the period covered by the report. The report will show the total Contract Value and a break-down of the assets of each Subaccount and the Guarantee Account. The report also will show premium payments and charges made during the statement period. We will no longer send you paper copies of shareholder reports for the Portfolios of the Funds offered under the contract (“Reports”) unless you specifically request paper copies from us, and instead we will make the Reports available on a website. In addition, you will receive a written confirmation when you make premium payments, transfers, or take partial surrenders.

 

150


Table of Contents

Other Information

 

We have filed a Registration Statement with the SEC, under the Securities Act of 1933 as amended, for the contracts being offered by this prospectus. This prospectus does not contain all the information in the Registration Statement, its amendments and exhibits. Please refer to the Registration Statement for further information about the Separate Account, the Company, and the contracts offered. Statements in this prospectus about the content of contracts and other legal instruments are summaries. For the complete text of those contracts and instruments, please refer to those documents as filed with the SEC and available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov.

 

Exemption to File Periodic Reports

 

The Company does not intend to file periodic reports required under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 in reliance on the exemption provided by Rule 12h-7 thereunder.

 

Unclaimed Property

 

Every state has unclaimed property laws which generally declare annuity contracts to be abandoned after a period of inactivity of three to five years from the contract’s maturity date or date the death benefit is due and payable. For example, if the payment of a death benefit has been triggered, but, if after a thorough search, we are still unable to locate the beneficiary of the death benefit, or the beneficiary does not come forward to claim the death benefit in a timely manner, the death benefit will be paid to the abandoned property division or unclaimed property office of the state in which the beneficiary or the contract owner last resided, as shown on our books and records, or to our state of domicile. This “escheatment” is revocable, however, and the state is obligated to pay the death benefit if your beneficiary steps forward to claim it with the proper documentation. To prevent such escheatment, it is important that you update your beneficiary designations, including full names and complete addresses, if and as they change.

 

Legal Proceedings

 

We face the risk of litigation and regulatory investigations and actions in the ordinary course of operating our businesses, including the risk of class action lawsuits. Our pending legal and regulatory actions include proceedings specific to us and others generally applicable to business practices in the industries in which we operate. In our insurance operations, we are, have been, or may become subject to class actions and individual suits alleging, among other things, issues relating to sales or underwriting practices, payment of contingent or other sales commissions, claims payments and procedures, product design, product disclosure, administration, additional premium charges for premiums paid on a periodic basis, denial or delay of benefits, charging excessive or impermissible fees on products and recommending unsuitable products to customers. Plaintiffs in class action and other lawsuits against us may seek very large or indeterminate amounts, which may remain unknown for substantial periods of time. In our investment-related operations, we are subject to litigation involving commercial disputes with counterparties. We are also subject to litigation arising out of our general business activities such as our contractual and employment relationships and securities lawsuits. In addition, we are also subject to various regulatory inquiries, such as information requests, subpoenas, books and record examinations and market conduct and financial examinations from state, federal and international regulators and other authorities. A substantial legal liability or a significant regulatory action against us could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Moreover, even if we ultimately prevail in the litigation, regulatory action or investigation, we could suffer significant reputational harm, which could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

Cost of Insurance Litigation

 

TVPX ARX INC., et al. In September 2018, we were named as a defendant in a putative class action lawsuit pending in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Virginia captioned TVPX ARX INC., et al v. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Plaintiff alleges unlawful and excessive cost of insurance (“COI”) charges were imposed on policyholders. The complaint asserts claims for breach of contract, alleging that we improperly considered non-mortality factors when calculating COI rates and failed to decrease COI charges in light of improved expectations of future mortality, and seeks unspecified compensatory damages, costs, and equitable relief.

 

On October 29, 2018, we filed a Motion to Enjoin in the Middle District of Georgia, and a Motion to Dismiss and Motion to Stay in the Eastern District of Virginia. We moved to enjoin the prosecution of the Eastern District of Virginia action on the basis that it involves claims released in a prior nationwide class action settlement (the “McBride settlement”) that was approved by the Middle District of Georgia. Plaintiff filed an amended complaint on November 13, 2018. On December 6, 2018, we moved the Middle District of Georgia for leave to file our counterclaim, which alleges that plaintiff breached the covenant not to sue contained in the prior settlement agreement by filing its current action. On March 15, 2019, the Middle District of Georgia granted our Motion to Enjoin and denied our Motion for Leave to file our counterclaim. As such, plaintiff is enjoined from pursuing its COI class action in the Eastern District of Virginia.

 

151


Table of Contents

On March 29, 2019, plaintiff filed a Notice of Appeal in the Middle District of Georgia, notifying the Court of its appeal to the United States Court of Appeals for the Eleventh Circuit from the Order granting our Motion to Enjoin. On March 29, 2019, we filed our Notice of Cross-Appeal in the Middle District of Georgia, notifying the Court of our cross-appeal to the Eleventh Circuit from the portion of the order denying our Motion for Leave to file our counterclaim. On April 8, 2019, the Eastern District of Virginia dismissed the case without prejudice, with leave for plaintiff to refile an amended complaint only if a final appellate court decision vacates the injunction and reverses the Middle District of Georgia’s opinion. On May 21, 2019, plaintiff filed its appeal and memorandum in support in the Eleventh Circuit. We filed our response to plaintiff’s appeal memorandum on July 3, 2019. The Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals heard oral argument on plaintiff’s appeal and our cross-appeal on April 21, 2020. On May 26, 2020, the Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals vacated the Middle District of Georgia’s order enjoining plaintiff’s class action and remanded the case back to the Middle District of Georgia for further factual development as to whether we had altered how we calculate or charge COI since the McBride settlement. The Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals did not reach a decision on our counterclaim.

 

On June 30, 2021, after the completion of discovery, we filed our renewed motion to enforce the class action settlement and release, and renewed our motion for leave to file a counterclaim in the Middle District of Georgia. On March 24, 2022, the Court denied our motions. On April 11, 2022, we appealed the Court’s denial to the United States Court of Appeals for the Eleventh Circuit. On June 22, 2022, we filed our opening brief in the Eleventh Circuit. Plaintiff filed its respondent’s brief on September 20, 2022, and our reply brief was filed on November 10, 2022. The appeal was orally argued on August 17, 2023, and we are awaiting a decision from the Eleventh Circuit. We intend to continue to vigorously defend this action.

 

North Carolina Audit

 

On May 31, 2019, the Company and certain affiliates received draft audit reports from the North Carolina Department of Revenue that examined tax credits received for investing in certain renewal energy projects from the period beginning January 1, 2014 and ending December 31, 2016. The Department of Revenue alleges that these tax credits were improper transactions because the Genworth entities were not bona fide partners of the investor/promotor Stonehenge Capital Company, LLC. On July 15, 2019, we responded to the Department of Revenue, stating that we intend to contest the disallowance of the credits. On July 17, 2019, the Department of Revenue replied that their position regarding their audit conclusions has not changed and that they will proceed with finalizing the audit. On July 24, 2019, we received Notices of Proposed Adjustments and tax assessments for the Company and certain of the affiliates totaling $4.4 million from the Department of Revenue. On August 27, 2019, we submitted our NC-Form 242 Objection to these tax assessments. On December 5, 2019, we received Notices of Proposed Adjustments and tax assessments for the Company and Genworth Life Insurance Company totaling approximately $600,000. On January 14, 2020, we submitted our NC-Form 242 Objection to these tax assessments. We intend to continue to vigorously defend our position and any legal proceedings that may arise.

 

PBI Data Breach Litigation

 

Starting in June 2023, various Genworth entities (including the Company) have been named as defendants in certain putative class action lawsuits in the United States District Courts for the Eastern District of Virginia and the District of Massachusetts. These cases include Burkett, Jr. v. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. The actions relate to the data security events involving the MOVEit file transfer system (“MOVEit Cybersecurity Incident”), which PBI Research Services (“PBI”), a third-party vendor, uses in the performance of its services. Our life insurance companies use PBI to, among other things, satisfy applicable regulatory obligations to search various databases to identify the deaths of insured persons under life insurance policies, and to identify the deaths of long-term care insurance and annuity policies which can impact premium payment obligations and benefit eligibility. Plaintiffs seek to represent various classes and subclasses of Genworth policyholders and agents whose data was accessed or potentially accessed by the MOVEit Cybersecurity Incident, alleging that Genworth breached its purported duty to safeguard their sensitive data from cybercriminals. The complaints assert claims for, inter alia, negligence, negligence per se, breach of contract, unjust enrichment, and violations of various consumer protection and privacy statutes, and they seek, inter alia, declaratory and injunctive relief, compensatory and punitive damages, restitution, attorneys’ fees and costs. On October 4, 2023, the Joint Panel on Multidistrict Litigation issued an order consolidating all actions relating to the MOVEit Cybersecurity Incident before a single federal judge in the United States District Court for the District of Massachusetts. We intend to vigorously defend these actions.

 

McHugh Litigation

 

In February 2024, the Company was named as defendant in a putative class action lawsuit in the Superior Court of the State of California, Sacramento County, captioned James Fox, individually and on behalf of the class v. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Co. Plaintiff, the holder of a lapsed

 

152


Table of Contents

California life insurance policy, seeks to represent a class of current and former California policyholders and beneficiaries whose policies were allegedly wrongfully terminated. The complaint alleges that the Company wrongfully terminated hundreds of California life insurance policies by failing to provide the policyholders with the notices and grace periods mandated by the contract and by the California Insurance Code as interpreted by the California Supreme Court in McHugh v Protective Life Ins. Co. The complaint asserts causes of action for breach of contract, violation of the California Insurance Code, unfair competition, and bad faith, and it seeks, inter alia, declaratory and injunctive relief, compensatory damages, restitution, attorneys’ fees, and costs. We intend to vigorously defend this action.

 

At this time, we cannot determine or predict the ultimate outcome of any of the pending legal and regulatory matters specifically identified above or the likelihood of potential future legal and regulatory matters against us. Except as disclosed above, we also are not able to provide an estimate or range of reasonably possible losses related to these matters. Therefore, we cannot ensure that the current investigations and proceedings will not have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations. In addition, it is possible that related investigations and proceedings may be commenced in the future, and we could become subject to additional unrelated investigations and lawsuits. Increased regulatory scrutiny and any resulting investigations or proceedings could result in new legal precedents and industry-wide regulations or practices that could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

The Company shall, and may through insurance coverage, indemnify any directors or officers who are a party to any proceeding by reason of the fact that he or she was or is a director or officer of the Company against any liability incurred by him or her in connection with such proceeding unless he or she engaged in willful misconduct or a knowing violation of the criminal law or any federal or state securities law. Such indemnification covers all judgments, settlements, penalties, fines and reasonable expenses incurred with respect to such proceeding. If the person involved is not a director or officer of the Company, the Company may indemnify, or contract to indemnify, to the same extent allowed for its directors and officers, such person who was, is or may become a party to any proceeding, by reason of the fact that he or she is or was an employee or agent of the Company, or is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation is not in any pending or threatened lawsuits that are reasonably likely to have a material adverse impact on us or on the Separate Account.

 

Although it is not anticipated that these developments will have a material adverse impact on the Separate Account, on our ability to meet our obligations under the contracts, or on the ability of Capital Brokerage Corporation to perform under its principal underwriting agreement, there can be no assurance at this time.

 

153


Table of Contents

Appendix A — Portfolios Available Under the Contract

 

The following is a list of Portfolios currently available under the contract. More information about the Portfolios is available in the prospectuses for the Portfolios, which may be amended from time to time and can be found online at www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra. You can also request this information at no cost by calling (800) 352-9910. Depending on the optional benefits you choose, you may not be able to invest in certain Portfolios.

 

The current expenses and performance information below reflects fees and expenses of the Portfolios, but does not reflect the other fees and expenses that your contract may charge. Expenses would be higher and performance would be lower if these charges were included. Each Portfolio’s past performance is not necessarily an indication of future performance. You may obtain updated Portfolio performance information by calling (800) 352-9910.

 

           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
Moderate Allocation  

AB VPS Balanced Hedged Allocation Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

0.98%*

 

12.66%

 

5.92%

 

5.04%

Global Equity Large Cap
 

AB VPS International Value Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

1.15%

 

14.83%

 

5.55%

 

1.83%

US Equity Large Cap Growth
 

AB VPS Large Cap Growth Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

0.91%*

 

34.78%

 

17.56%

 

14.60%

US Equity Large Cap Value  

AB VPS Relative Value Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

0.86%*

 

11.72%

 

11.57%

 

9.05%

US Equity Small Cap
 

AB VPS Small Cap Growth Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

1.15%*

 

17.72%

 

10.29%

 

8.26%

Global Equity Large Cap

 

AB VPS Sustainable Global Thematic Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

1.17%*

 

15.70%

 

13.27%

 

9.33%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund — Series I shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

0.86%

 

40.93%

 

16.16%

 

11.70%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Invesco V.I. Capital Appreciation Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.05%*

 

35.03%

 

16.10%

 

11.28%

US Equity Large Cap Value  

Invesco V.I. Comstock Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.00%

 

12.10%

 

13.20%

 

8.65%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

Invesco V.I. Core Equity Fund — Series I shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

0.80%

 

23.36%

 

12.95%

 

7.79%

Moderate Allocation  

Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series II shares1

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

0.82%

 

10.24%

 

9.64%

 

6.78%

Global Equity Large Cap  

Invesco V.I. EQV International Equity Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.15%

 

17.86%

 

8.15%

 

4.07%

  1    The Invesco V.I. Conservative Balanced Fund — Series II shares merged into the Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series II shares effective on or about April 29, 2024.

 

A-1


Table of Contents
           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
Global Equity Large Cap  

Invesco V.I. Global Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.07%  

 

34.45%

 

12.02%

 

8.21%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

Invesco V.I. Main Street Fund® — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.05%*

 

22.83%

 

13.28%

 

9.74%

US Equity Small Cap  

Invesco V.I. Main Street Small Cap Fund® —Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.13%  

 

17.82%

 

12.79%

 

8.66%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Allspring VT Discovery All Cap Growth Fund — Class 2

Allspring Funds Management, LLC (subadvised by Allspring Global Investments, LLC)

 

1.00%*

 

33.17%

 

13.54%

 

10.42%

US Fixed Income  

LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund — Service Class (formerly, VP Inflation Protection Fund — Class II)1

American Century Investment Management, Inc.

 

0.77%*

 

3.40%

 

2.65%

 

1.90%

US Equity Mid Cap  

BlackRock Advantage SMID Cap V.I. Fund — Class III Shares

BlackRock Advisors, LLC

 

0.80%*

 

18.63%

 

11.52%

 

8.28%

US Equity Large Cap Value  

BlackRock Basic Value V.I. Fund — Class III Shares

BlackRock Advisors, LLC

 

1.01%*

 

16.24%

 

11.26%

 

7.44%

Global Allocation  

BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund — Class III Shares

BlackRock Advisors, LLC (subadvised by BlackRock (Singapore) Limited)

 

1.00%*

 

12.49%

 

7.39%

 

4.63%

Global Equity Large Cap  

Columbia Variable Portfolio — Overseas Core Fund — Class 2

Columbia Management Investment Advisers, LLC

 

1.04%  

 

15.32%

 

7.96%

 

3.37%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

CTIVP® — Principal Blue Chip Growth Fund — Class 1

Columbia Management Investment Advisers, LLC (subadvised by Principal Global Investors, LLC)

 

0.70%  

 

39.54%

 

15.67%

 

13.48%

US Fixed Income  

VT Floating-Rate Income Fund

Eaton Vance Management

 

1.17%  

 

11.21%

 

4.13%

 

3.22%

US Fixed Income  

Federated Hermes High Income Bond Fund II — Service Shares

Federated Investment Management Company

 

1.06%*

 

12.47%

 

4.49%

 

3.87%

US Equity Mid Cap

 

Federated Hermes Kaufmann Fund II — Service Shares

Federated Equity Management Company of Pennsylvania (subadvised by Federated Global Investment Management Corp.)

 

1.80%*

 

14.86%

 

7.04%

 

8.39%

  1    VP Inflation Protection Fund — Class II reorganized into LVIP American Century Inflation Protection Fund — Service Class effective on or about April 26, 2024.

 

A-2


Table of Contents
           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year

Moderate Allocation

 

VIP Balanced Portfolio — Service Class 2

Fidelity Management & Research Company (FMR) (subadvised by FMR Investment Management (UK) Limited (FMR UK), Fidelity Management & Research (Hong Kong) Limited (FMR HK), and Fidelity Management & Research (Japan) Limited (FMR Japan))

 

0.53%

 

12.94%

 

7.48%

 

5.40%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

VIP Contrafund® Portfolio — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.81%

 

33.12%

 

16.36%

 

11.33%

US Equity Large Cap Growth

 

VIP Dynamic Capital Appreciation Portfolio —Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.87%

 

28.72%

 

16.93%

 

11.38%

US Equity Large Cap Value

 

VIP Equity-Income Portfolio —

Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.72%

 

10.38%

 

12.01%

 

8.31%

US Equity Large Cap Growth

 

VIP Growth Portfolio — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.83%

 

35.89%

 

19.34%

 

14.51%

US Equity Large Cap Value

 

VIP Growth & Income Portfolio — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.74%

 

18.41%

 

14.50%

 

10.00%

US Equity Large Cap Growth

 

VIP Growth Opportunities Portfolio — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.84%

 

45.30%

 

18.79%

 

15.44%

US Fixed Income

 

VIP Investment Grade Bond Portfolio — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.63%

 

6.00%

 

1.72%

 

2.08%

US Equity Mid Cap

 

VIP Mid Cap Portfolio —Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.82%

 

14.80%

 

12.17%

 

7.85%

US Equity Mid Cap

 

VIP Value Strategies Portfolio — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.85%

 

20.61%

 

16.63%

 

9.10%

Aggressive Allocation  

Franklin Mutual Shares VIP Fund — Class 2 Shares

Franklin Mutual Advisers, LLC

 

0.93%

 

13.46%

 

7.82%

 

5.43%

Global Equity Large Cap  

Templeton Growth VIP Fund — Class 2 Shares

Templeton Global Advisors Limited (subadvised by Templeton Asset Management Ltd)

 

1.12%*

 

21.01%

 

6.47%

 

3.24%

US Money Market  

Goldman Sachs Government Money Market Fund — Service Shares

Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.

 

0.43%*

 

4.79%

 

1.64%

 

1.02%

Moderate Allocation  

Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.87%

 

15.13%

 

9.37%

 

7.73%

 

A-3


Table of Contents
           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Janus Henderson Forty Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.80%

 

39.65%

 

16.64%

 

13.45%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

MFS® Massachusetts Investors Growth Stock Portfolio — Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

 

0.98%*

 

23.70%

 

16.39%

 

12.44%

Moderate Allocation  

MFS® Total Return Series — Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

 

0.86%*

 

10.22%

 

8.27%

 

6.27%

Utilities Sector Equity  

MFS® Utilities Series — Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

 

1.04%*

 

-2.33%

 

8.05%

 

6.13%

Moderate Allocation

 

All Asset Portfolio — Advisor Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC (subadvised by Research Affiliates)

 

2.285%*

 

8.02%

 

5.90%

 

3.93%

US Fixed Income

 

High Yield Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

 

0.77%

 

12.22%

 

4.83%

 

4.15%

US Fixed Income

 

Long-Term U.S. Government Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

 

2.005%

 

3.99%

 

-1.30%

 

2.06%

US Fixed Income

 

Low Duration Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

 

0.69%

 

4.97%

 

0.99%

 

0.92%

US Fixed Income

 

Total Return Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

 

0.75%

 

5.93%

 

1.08%

 

1.71%

Natural Resources Sector Equity  
 

PSF Natural Resources Portfolio — Class II Shares

PGIM Investments LLC (subadvised by T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.)

 

0.91%

 

1.58%

 

13.73%

 

0.96%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  
 

PSF PGIM Jennison Blend Portfolio — Class II Shares (formerly, PSF PGIM Jennison Focused Blend Portfolio — Class II Shares)1

PGIM Investments LLC (subadvised by Jennison Associates LLC)

 

0.86%

 

31.98%

 

14.25%

 

10.08%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  
 

PSF PGIM Jennison Growth Portfolio — Class II Shares

PGIM Investments LLC (subadvised by Jennison Associates LLC)

 

1.02%

 

52.89%

 

17.81%

 

13.87%

Real Estate Sector Equity

 

Real Estate Securities V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc. (subadvised by CenterSquare Investment Management LLC)

 

1.00%

 

13.50%

 

7.63%

 

7.94%

US Equity Small Cap

 

Small-Cap Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc. (sub-advised by Champlain Investment Partners, LLC, Kennedy Capital Management LLC, Palisade Capital Management, LP, SouthernSun Asset Management, LLC, and Westfield Capital Management, L.P.)

 

1.28%

 

13.55%

 

10.84%

 

7.68%

  1    The PSF PGIM Jennison Focused Blend Portfolio — Class II Shares merged into the PSF PGIM Jennison Blend Portfolio — Class II Shares effective December 8, 2023.

 

A-4


Table of Contents
           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
Moderate Allocation  

Total Return V.I.S. Fund1 — Class 3 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.90%

 

15.21%

 

5.90%

 

4.66%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

U.S. Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.91%

 

27.91%

 

16.03%

 

11.37%

 

  1    For contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, only Class 3 Shares of the Total Return V.I.S. Fund will be available. If your contract was issued prior to May 1, 2006, Class 1 Shares of the Total Return V.I.S. Fund are available.

 

The following Portfolios are not available to contracts issued on or after May 1, 2003.

 

           

Average Annual Total
Returns
(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
US Equity Large Cap Blend  

BNY Mellon Sustainable U.S. Equity Portfolio, Inc. — Initial Shares

BNY Mellon Investment Adviser, Inc. (subadvised by Newton Investment Management Limited)

 

0.67%

 

23.82%

 

15.13%

 

10.46%

US Equity Mid Cap  

Janus Henderson Enterprise Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.97%

 

17.78%

 

13.14%

 

11.82%

Global Equity Large Cap  

Janus Henderson Global Research Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.86%

 

26.47%

 

13.05%

 

8.74%

Technology Sector Equity  

Janus Henderson Global Technology and Innovation Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.97%*

 

54.27%

 

20.05%

 

16.86%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Janus Henderson Research Portfolio - Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.82%

 

42.81%

 

16.54%

 

12.21%

Global Fixed Income  

International Bond Portfolio (U.S. Dollar Hedged) — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

 

1.28%

 

9.02%

 

1.64%

 

3.06%

 

The following Portfolio is not available for new purchase payments or transfers or for new contracts issued on or after November 15, 2004:

 

           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
Global Equity Large Cap  

Janus Henderson Overseas Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

1.14%

 

10.58%

 

10.92%

 

3.38%

 

A-5


Table of Contents

The following Portfolios are not available to contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006:

 

           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
Moderate Allocation  

VIP Asset Manager Portfolio —Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR H.K., and FMR Japan)

 

0.78%

 

12.65%

 

7.22%

 

5.14%

US Equity Mid Cap  

Goldman Sachs Mid Cap Value Fund — Institutional Shares

Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.

 

0.84%*

 

11.42%

 

13.36%

 

8.10%

US Equity Small Cap  

MFS® New Discovery Series —

Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

 

1.12%*

 

14.25%

 

10.81%

 

7.41%

Moderate Allocation  

Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.65%

 

15.48%

 

6.16%

 

4.92%

 

The following Portfolios are not available to contracts issued on or after May 1, 2007:

 

           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.11%

 

40.60%

 

15.88%

 

11.42%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

ClearBridge Variable Dividend Strategy Portfolio — Class II

Franklin Templeton Fund Advisor, LLC (subadvised by ClearBridge Investments, LLC)

 

1.00%

 

14.01%

 

13.35%

 

10.17%

 

The following Portfolios are not available to contracts issued on or after September 8, 2008:

 

           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
US Equity Mid Cap  

Invesco V.I. American Value Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.14%

 

15.29%

 

12.45%

 

6.98%

US Equity Mid Cap  

Invesco V.I. Discovery Mid Cap Growth Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.12%

 

12.85%

 

12.47%

 

9.52%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

BlackRock Large Cap Focus Growth V.I. Fund — Class III Shares

BlackRock Advisors, LLC

 

1.04%*

 

52.47%

 

16.05%

 

13.38%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

ClearBridge Variable Growth Portfolio — Class II (formerly, ClearBridge Variable Aggressive Growth Portfolio — Class II)

Franklin Templeton Fund Advisor, LLC (subadvised by ClearBridge Investments, LLC)

 

1.10%

 

24.13%

 

8.05%

 

6.38%

 

A-6


Table of Contents
           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
US Equity Large Cap Value  

ClearBridge Variable Large Cap Value Portfolio — Class I

Franklin Templeton Fund Advisor, LLC (subadvised by ClearBridge Investments, LLC)

 

0.72%

 

15.09%

 

13.02%

 

8.99%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

MFS® Investors Trust Series — Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

 

1.03%*

 

18.66%

 

13.27%

 

10.00%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

NASDAQ — 100® Fund

Security Investors, LLC known as Guggenheim Investments

 

1.77%*

 

53.22%

 

20.24%

 

15.86%

US Fixed Income  

Income V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

1.38%*

 

4.68%

 

0.46%

 

1.16%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Premier Growth Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.91%

 

46.28%

 

18.47%

 

13.41%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

S&P 500® Index V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.31%

 

25.96%

 

15.32%

 

11.68%

 

The following Portfolios are not available to contracts issued on or after January 5, 2009:

 

           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2022)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
Moderate Allocation  

Franklin Allocation VIP Fund — Class 2 Shares

Franklin Advisers, Inc. (subadvised by Franklin Templeton Institutional, LLC, Templeton Global Advisors Limited, Brandywine Global Investment Management, LLC, ClearBridge Investments, LLC, Western Asset Management Company, LLC, and Western Asset Management Company Limited)

 

0.82%*

 

14.61%

 

7.57%

 

4.75%

Cautious Allocation  

Franklin Income VIP Fund — Class 2 Shares

Franklin Advisers, Inc.

 

0.71%*

 

8.62%

 

6.98%

 

5.01%

*   The Portfolio is subject to an expense reimbursement or fee waiver arrangement. The annual expenses shown reflect temporary fee reductions.

 

A-7


Table of Contents

Availability of Certain Portfolios Varies Based on Optional Riders Elected Under the Contract:

 

Certain of the optional benefit riders require allocation of Contract Value to a prescribed Investment Strategy or, in the case of Guaranteed Income Advantage, to the GIS Subaccount, to receive the full benefits provided under such riders. Specifically, the following optional Living Benefit Riders require such an allocation:

 

  Ø   Lifetime Income Plus Solution
  Ø   Lifetime Income Plus 2008
  Ø   Lifetime Income Plus 2007
  Ø   Lifetime Income Plus
  Ø   Guaranteed Income Advantage
  Ø   Payment Optimizer Plus

 

Guaranteed Income Advantage provides a guaranteed income benefit that is based on the amount of assets you invest in the GIS Subaccount. The GIS Subaccount invests exclusively in shares of the State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund. You may not allocate premium payments or assets in your contract directly into the GIS Subaccount. Rather, allocations to the GIS Subaccount must be made through a series of scheduled transfers from other Subaccounts in which you have allocated assets.

 

In order to receive the full benefit provided by each of the Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit Rider Options and Payment Optimizer Plus, you must invest all premium payments and allocations in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy. Except for Lifetime Income Plus 2008 and Lifetime Income Plus Solution, if you do not allocate all assets in accordance with a prescribed Investment Strategy, your benefit under the rider will be reduced by 50%. Contract owners that own Lifetime Income Plus 2008 or Lifetime Income Plus Solution must always allocate assets in accordance with the Investment Strategy.

 

The current Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus Solution and Lifetime Income Plus 2008 is as follows:

 

  (1)   owners may allocate assets to the following Designated Subaccounts:

 

AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. — AB VPS Balanced Hedged Allocation Portfolio — Class B;

 

AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) — Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series II shares;

 

BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. — BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund — Class III Shares;

 

Fidelity® Variable Insurance Products Fund — VIP Balanced Portfolio — Service Class 2;

 

Janus Aspen Series — Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Service Shares;

 

MFS® Variable Insurance Trust — MFS® Total Return Series — Service Class Shares; and/or

 

State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 3 Shares;

 

OR

 

  (2)   owners may allocate assets to Asset Allocation Model A, B, C or D;

 

OR

 

  (3)   owners may allocate assets to the Build Your Own Asset Allocation Model.

 

A-8


Table of Contents

The current Investment Strategy for Lifetime Income Plus 2007, Lifetime Income Plus, and Payment Optimizer Plus is as follows:

 

  (1)   owners may allocate assets to the following Designated Subaccounts:

 

AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. — AB VPS Balanced Hedged Allocation Portfolio — Class B;

 

AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) — Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series II shares;

 

BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. — BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund — Class III Shares;

 

Fidelity® Variable Insurance Products Fund — VIP Balanced Portfolio — Service Class 2;

 

Janus Aspen Series — Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Service Shares;

 

MFS® Variable Insurance Trust — MFS® Total Return Series — Service Class Shares; and/or

 

State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 3 Shares;

 

OR

 

  (2)   owners may allocate assets to Asset Allocation Model C.

 

See the prospectus sections above concerning each such optional benefit for additional detail.

 

A-9


Table of Contents

APPENDIX B

 

Examples — Death Benefit Calculations

 

Basic Death Benefit

 

The following examples are for contracts issued on or after the later of May 1, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications.

 

The purpose of this example is to show how the Basic Death Benefit works based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

Example: Assuming an owner:

 

  (1)   purchases a contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   makes no additional premium payments and takes no partial surrenders;

 

  (3)   is not subject to premium taxes; and

 

  (4)   the Annuitant is age 75 on the Contract Date then:

 

Annuitant’s
Age
    End of
Year
    Contract
Value
    Basic
Death Benefit
 
  76       1     $ 103,000     $ 103,000  
  77       2       112,000       112,000  
  78       3       90,000       100,000  
  79       4       135,000       135,000  
  80       5       130,000       130,000  
  81       6       150,000       150,000  
  82       7       125,000       125,000  
  83       8       145,000       145,000  

 

Partial surrenders (including partial surrenders taken pursuant to the terms of a Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Rider) will reduce the Basic Death Benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and any premium tax assessed) reduces your Contract Value. For example:

 

Date     Premium
Payment
    Contract
Value
    Basic
Death Benefit
 
  3/31/09     $ 20,000     $ 20,000     $ 20,000  
  3/31/17         20,000       20,000  
  3/31/18               14,000       20,000  

 

If a partial surrender of $7,000 is taken on March 31, 2018, the Basic Death Benefit immediately after the partial surrender will be $10,000 ($20,000 to $10,000) since the Contract Value is reduced 50% by the partial surrender ($14,000 to $7,000).

 

This is true only if the Basic Death Benefit immediately prior to the partial surrender (as calculated above) is not the Contract Value on the date we receive due proof of the Annuitant’s death. It also assumes that no surrender charge applies, and that no premium tax applies to the partial surrender. This example is based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider Option

 

The following example shows how the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit works based on hypothetical values. It is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract. The example assumes that an owner purchases a contract with an Annuitant age 75 at the time of issue. In addition, the example assumes that:

 

  (1)   the owner purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (3)   the owner takes no partial surrenders; then

 

End of

Year

    Annuitant’s
Age
    Contract
Value
   

Death

Benefit Amount

 
  1       76     $ 103,000     $ 103,000  
  2       77       112,000       112,000  
  3       78       90,000       112,000  
  4       79       135,000       135,000  
  5       80       130,000       135,000  
  6       81       150,000       135,000  
  7       82       125,000       135,000  
  8       83       145,000       135,000  

 

Partial surrenders (including partial surrenders taken pursuant to the terms of a Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Rider) will reduce the Annual Step-Up Death Benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any surrender charge and any premium tax assessed) reduces your Contract Value.

 

5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option

 

The following example shows how the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option works based on hypothetical values. It is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract. The example assumes that an owner purchases a contract with an Annuitant age 70 at the time of issue. In addition, the example assumes that:

 

  (1)   the owner purchases the contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   the contract earns a 0% net return (-3.05% net of fees for the mortality and expense risk charge, administrative expense charge, underlying mutual fund expenses and the 5% Rollup Death Benefit Rider Option);

 

B-1


Table of Contents
  (3)   the owner makes no additional premium payments;

 

  (4)   the owner takes annual partial surrenders equal to 5% of premium payments at end of the contract year; and

 

  (5)   the contract is not subject to premium taxes.

 

End of
Year
    Annuitant’s
Age
    Partial
Withdrawal
Amount
    Contract
Value
    5% Rollup
Death Benefit
 
  0       70     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 100,000  
  1       71       5,000       95,000       100,000  
  2       72       5,000       90,000       100,000  
  3       73       5,000       85,000       100,000  
  4       74       5,000       80,000       100,000  
  5       75       5,000       75,000       100,000  
  6       76       5,000       70,000       100,000  
  7       77       5,000       65,000       100,000  
  8       78       5,000       60,000       100,000  
  9       79       5,000       55,000       100,000  

 

Partial surrenders amounting to 5% or less of premium payments annually will reduce the 5% Rollup Death Benefit on a non pro-rata (dollar-for-dollar) basis. Therefore, in the example above, though a $5,000 partial surrender is taken at the end of year 1, the 5% Rollup Death Benefit immediately after the partial surrender is still equal to $100,000 since the benefit is reduced only by the same dollar amount of the partial surrender.

 

Partial surrenders exceeding 5% of premium payments in any year will reduce the 5% Rollup Death Benefit on a pro-rata basis (by the proportion that the partial surrender, including any surrender charges, and any premium taxes assessed, reduces your Contract Value). All partial surrenders that exceed the 5% threshold will reduce the 5% Rollup Death Benefit on a pro-rata basis. For example:

 

Date     Premium
Payment
    Partial
Withdrawal
    Contract
Value
    5% Rollup
Death Benefit
Option
Before Any
Partial
Withdrawals
    5% Rollup
Death
Benefit
Option After
the Partial
Withdrawals
 
  3/31/2009     $ 10,000     $ 0     $ 10,000     $ 10,000     $ 10,000  
  3/31/2017         0       20,000       14,775       14,775  
  3/31/2018               7,000       14,000       15,513       7,785  

 

Therefore, if a $7,000 partial withdrawal is taken on March 31, 2018, $500 (5% of $10,000) will reduce the 5% Rollup Death Benefit on a non pro-rata (dollar-for-dollar) basis, to $15,013 ($15,513-$500). The remaining $6,500 of the partial withdrawal will reduce the 5% Rollup Death Benefit immediately after the partial withdrawal to $7,785 ($15,013 — the 5% Rollup Death Benefit, multiplied by 51.85% — 1 minus the ratio of the partial withdrawal ($6,500) to the Contract Value ($13,500), after reducing each by $500).

 

Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider Option

 

The following example shows how the Earnings Protector Death Benefit works based on purely hypothetical values. It is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract. This example assumes an owner purchases a contract with an Annuitant age 65 at the time of issue, and that he or she takes no partial surrenders before the Annuitant’s death.

 

Date     Premium
Payment
    Contract
Value
    Gain     Death
Benefit
    Earnings Protector
Death Benefit
 
  8/01/09     $ 100,000     $ 100,000     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 0  
  8/01/24               300,000       200,000       300,000       70,000  

 

The Annuitant’s death and notification of the death occurs on 8/01/24. At that time, 40% of the earnings or “gain” ($200,000) is $80,000. However, since the Earnings Protector Death Benefit under this age scenario cannot exceed 70% of the premium payments ($100,000) under this age scenario, the Earnings Protector Death Benefit in this example will be $70,000.

 

The following examples are for contracts issued on or after the later of May 15, 2001, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable state modifications and prior to May 1, 2003, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications.

 

Basic Death Benefit

 

The purpose of this example is to show how the Basic Death Benefit works based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

Example: Assuming an owner:

 

  (1)   purchases a contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   makes no additional premium payments and takes no partial surrenders;

 

  (3)   is not subject to premium taxes; and

 

B-2


Table of Contents
  (4)   the Annuitant is age 70 on the Contract Date then:

 

Annuitant’s
Age
    End of
Year
    Contract
Value
    Basic
Death Benefit
 
  71       1     $ 103,000     $ 103,000  
  72       2       110,000       110,000  
  73       3       80,000       110,000  
  74       4       120,000       120,000  
  75       5       130,000       130,000  
  76       6       150,000       150,000  
  77       7       160,000       160,000  
  78       8       130,000       160,000  
  79       9       90,000       160,000  
  80       10       170,000       170,000  
  81       11       140,000       170,000  
  82       12       190,000       190,000  
  83       13       150,000       170,000  

 

Partial surrenders will reduce the Basic Death Benefit by the proportion the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and any premium tax assessed) reduces the Contract Value. For example:

 

Date     Premium
Payment
    Contract
Value
    Basic
Death Benefit
 
  3/31/09     $ 50,000     $ 50,000     $ 50,000  
  3/31/17         50,000       50,000  
  3/31/18               35,000       50,000  

 

If a partial surrender of $17,500 is taken on March 31, 2018, the Basic Death Benefit immediately after the partial surrender will be $25,000 ($50,000 to $25,000) since the Contract Value is reduced 50% by the partial surrender ($35,000 to $17,500). This is true only if the Basic Death Benefit immediately prior to the partial surrender (as calculated above) is not the Contract Value on the date we receive due proof of the Annuitant’s death. It also assumes that surrender charge applies, and that no premium tax applies to the partial surrender. This example is based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

The following examples are for contracts issued prior to May 15, 2001, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications.

 

Basic Death Benefit

 

The purpose of this example is to show how the Basic Death Benefit works based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

Example: Assuming an owner:

 

  (1)   purchases a contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   makes no additional premium payments and takes no partial surrenders;

 

  (3)   is not subject to premium taxes; and

 

  (4)   the Annuitant’s age is 70 on the Contract Date then:

 

Annuitant’s
Age
    End of
Year
    Contract
Value
    Unadjusted
Death Benefit
 
  71       1     $ 103,000     $ 103,000  
  72       2       110,000       110,000  
  73       3       80,000       110,000  
  74       4       120,000       120,000  
  75       5       130,000       130,000  
  76       6       150,000       150,000  
  77       7       160,000       160,000  
  78       8       130,000       160,000  
  79       9       90,000       160,000  
  80       10       170,000       170,000  
  81       11       140,000       170,000  
  82       12       190,000       190,000  
  83       13       150,000       170,000  

 

Partial surrenders will reduce the unadjusted death benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and any premium tax assessed) reduces the Contract Value. For example:

 

Date     Premium
Payment
    Contract
Value
    Unadjusted
Death Benefit
 
  3/31/09     $ 50,000     $ 50,000     $ 50,000  
  3/31/17         50,000       50,000  
  3/31/18               35,000       50,000  

 

If a partial surrender of $17,500 is taken on March 31, 2018, the unadjusted death benefit immediately after the partial surrender will be $25,000 ($50,000 to $25,000) since the Contract Value is reduced 50% by the partial surrender ($35,000 to $17,500). This is true only if the unadjusted death benefit immediately prior to the partial surrender (as calculated above) is not the Contract Value on the date of the Annuitant’s death. It also assumes that no premium tax applies to the partial surrender. This example is based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

B-3


Table of Contents

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit

 

The following example shows how the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit works based on purely hypothetical values. It is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

This example assumes an owner purchases a contract with an Annuitant age 65 at the time of issue, and that he takes no partial surrenders before the Annuitant’s death.

 

Date     Premium     Contract
Value
    Gain     Death
Benefit
   

Optional Enhanced

Death Benefit

 
  8/01/09     $ 100,000     $ 100,000     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 0  
  8/01/24               300,000       200,000       300,000       70,000  

 

The Annuitant’s death and notification of the death occur on 8/01/24. At that time, 40% of the earnings or “gain” ($200,000) is $80,000. However, since the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit cannot exceed 70% of the premiums paid ($100,000) under this age scenario, the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit in this example will be $70,000.

 

B-4


Table of Contents

A Statement of Additional Information containing more detailed information about the contract and the Separate Account can be found online at www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra, and is available free by writing us at the address below or by calling (800) 352-9910.

 

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

Annuity New Business

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

 

The Statement of Additional Information is incorporated by reference into this prospectus.

 

Reports and other information about Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1 are available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov, and copies of this information may be obtained, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by electronic request at publicinfo@sec.gov.

 

EDGAR contract identifier number C000026719.


Table of Contents

Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1

Prospectus For

Flexible Premium Variable Deferred Annuity Contracts

Form P1152 1/99

 

Issued by:

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

Telephone: (800) 352-9910

 

 

 

This prospectus, dated May 1, 2024, describes an individual flexible premium variable deferred annuity contract (the “contract” or “contracts”) offered to individuals and qualified and nonqualified retirement plans. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company (the “Company,” “we,” “us,” or “our”) issues the contract. This contract may be referred to as “Commonwealth Extra” in our marketing materials. This contract (Commonwealth Extra) is no longer offered or sold.

 

This prospectus describes all material features and benefits of the contract and provides details about Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1 (the “Separate Account”) and the Guarantee Account that you should know before investing. Please read this prospectus carefully before investing and keep it for future reference.

 

The contract offers you the opportunity to accumulate Contract Value and provides for the payment of periodic annuity benefits. We may pay these annuity benefits on a variable or fixed basis.

 

You may allocate your premium payments and automatic bonus credits we provide you to the Separate Account, the Guarantee Account, or both. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states. If we apply bonus credits to your contract, we will apply them with your premium payment to your Contract Value, and allocate the credits on a pro-rata basis to the investment options you select in the same ratio as the applicable premium payment. You should know that over time and under certain circumstances (such as an extended period of poor market performance), the costs associated with the bonus credit may exceed the sum of the bonus credit and any related earnings. You should consider this possibility before purchasing the contract. The bonus credit is referred to as an “enhanced premium amount” in your contract. Each Subaccount of the Separate Account invests in shares of Portfolios of the Funds listed in Appendix A of this prospectus.

 

The Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) has not approved or disapproved these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

 

Additional information about certain investment products, including variable annuities, has been prepared by the SEC’s staff and is available at investor.gov.

 

This contract:

 

    Is NOT a bank deposit

 

    Is NOT FDIC insured

 

    Is NOT insured or endorsed by a bank or any federal government agency

 

    Is NOT available in every state

 

    MAY go down in value.

 

Except for amounts in the Guarantee Account, both the value of a contract before the Maturity Date and the amount of monthly income afterwards will depend upon the investment performance of the Portfolio(s) you select. You bear the investment risk of investing in the Portfolios.

 

This contract has optional benefits that were made available to contract owners at the time they purchased the contract. Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the optional benefits are no longer available to purchase under the contract. Please note that some optional benefits may have requirements that differ from or are in addition to the base contract. Please refer to your contract or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the specific options you have elected.

 

We may offer other contracts with features that are substantially similar to those offered in this contract and in this prospectus. These other contracts may be priced differently and may have been offered exclusively to customers of one or more particular financial institutions or brokerage firms.

 

1


Table of Contents

The contract was offered to customers of various financial institutions and brokerage firms. No financial institution or brokerage firm is responsible for the guarantees under the contract. Guarantees under the contract are the sole responsibility of the Company.

 

In the future, additional portfolios managed by certain financial institutions or brokerage firms may be added to the Separate Account. These portfolios may be offered exclusively to purchasing customers of the particular financial institution or brokerage firm.

 

This contract may be used with certain tax qualified retirement plans. The contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit; the purchase of this contract does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. Please consult a tax adviser for information specific to your circumstances.

 

To contact our Home Office, call us at (800) 352-9910, or write us at:

 

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

 

This prospectus does not constitute an offering in any jurisdiction in which such offering may not lawfully be made.

 

2


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

 

Definitions

     5  

Important Information You Should Consider About the Contract

     6  

Overview of the Contract

     10  

Fee Tables

     12  

Example

     14  

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

     14  

The Company

     15  

Financial Condition of the Company

     15  

The Separate Account

     16  

The Portfolios

     17  

Subaccounts

     17  

Voting Rights

     19  

The Guarantee Account

     20  

Charges and Other Deductions

     21  

Transaction Expenses

     21  

Surrender Charge

     21  

Exceptions to the Surrender Charge

     22  

Deductions from the Separate Account

     22  

Charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

     22  

Other Charges

     23  

The Contract

     23  

Ownership

     24  

Assignment

     24  

Premium Payments

     25  

Valuation Day and Valuation Period

     25  

Allocation of Premium Payments

     25  

Bonus Credits

     25  

Valuation of Accumulation Units

     25  

Benefits Available Under the Contract

     27  

Transfers

     30  

Transfers Before the Maturity Date

     30  

Transfers from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts

     30  

Transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account

     30  

Transfers Among the Subaccounts

     30  

Telephone/Internet Transactions

     31  

Confirmation of Transactions

     32  

Special Note on Reliability

     32  

Transfers by Third Parties

     32  

Special Note on Frequent Transfers

     32  

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

     34  

Portfolio Rebalancing Program

     35  

Guarantee Account Interest Sweep Program

     35  

 

3


Table of Contents

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders

     35  

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders

     35  

Restrictions on Distributions From Certain Contracts

     36  

Systematic Withdrawal Program

     37  

Death of Owner and/or Annuitant

     37  

Death Benefit at Death of Any Annuitant Before the Maturity Date

     37  

Basic Death Benefit

     38  

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

     39  

When We Calculate the Death Benefit

     40  

Death of an Owner or Joint Owner Before the Maturity Date

     40  

Death of an Owner, Joint Owner, or Annuitant On or After the Maturity Date

     42  

Income Payments

     43  

Optional Payment Plans

     44  

Variable Income Payments

     45  

Transfers After the Maturity Date

     45  

Tax Matters

     45  

Introduction

     45  

Taxation of Non-Qualified Contracts

     45  

Section 1035 Exchanges

     48  

Qualified Retirement Plans

     48  

Federal Income Tax Withholding

     53  

State Income Tax Withholding

     53  

Tax Status of the Company

     53  

Federal Estate, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

     53  

Definition of Spouse Under Federal Law

     53  

Annuity Purchases by Residents of Puerto Rico

     53  

Annuity Purchases by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

     53  

Foreign Tax Credits

     54  

Changes in the Law

     54  

Requesting Payments

     54  

Sales of the Contracts

     54  

Additional Information

     56  

Owner Questions

     56  

State Regulation

     56  

Evidence of Death, Age, Gender, Marital Status or Survival

     56  

Records and Reports

     56  

Other Information

     56  

Unclaimed Property

     56  

Legal Proceedings

     57  

Appendix A

     A-1  

Portfolios Available Under the Contract

     A-1  

Appendix B

     B-1  

Examples — Death Benefit Calculations

     B-1  

 

4


Table of Contents

DEFINITIONS

 

The following terms are used throughout the prospectus:

 

Accumulation Unit — An accounting unit of measure we use to calculate the value in the Separate Account before income payments commence.

 

Annuitant — The person named in the contract upon whose age and, where appropriate gender, we determine monthly income benefits.

 

Annuity Unit — An accounting unit of measure we use to calculate the amount of the second and each subsequent variable income payment.

 

Bonus Credit — The “enhanced premium amount” described in your contract. For contracts that qualify, it is the amount we will add to each premium payment we receive. The Bonus Credit is not considered a “premium payment” under the contract.

 

Code — The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

Contract Date — The date we issue your contract and your contract becomes effective. Your Contract Date is shown in your contract. We use the Contract Date to determine contract years and anniversaries.

 

Contract Value — The total value of all your Accumulation Units in the Subaccounts and any amounts you hold in the Guarantee Account.

 

Fund — Any open-end management investment company or any unit investment trust in which the Separate Account invests.

 

General Account — Assets of the Company other than those allocated to the Separate Account or any other segregated asset account of the Company.

 

Guarantee Account — Part of our General Account that provides a guaranteed interest rate for a specified interest rate guarantee period. The General Account is not part of and does not depend on the investment performance of the Separate Account.

 

Home Office — Our office located at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

 

Maturity Date — The date on which your income payments will commence, provided the Annuitant is living on that date. The Maturity Date is stated in your contract, unless changed by you in writing in a form acceptable to us. The owner selects the contract’s initial Maturity Date at issue. The latest Maturity Date we currently permit may not be a date beyond the younger Annuitant’s 90th birthday, unless we consent to a later date.

 

Portfolio — A division of a Fund, the assets of which are separate from other Portfolios that may be available in the Fund. Each Portfolio has its own investment objective.

 

Separate Account — Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, a separate account we established to receive Subaccount allocations. The Separate Account is divided into Subaccounts, each of which invests in shares of a separate Portfolio.

 

Subaccount — A division of the Separate Account which invests exclusively in shares of a designated Portfolio. A Subaccount may be referred to as an Investment Subdivision in the contract and/or marketing materials.

 

Surrender Value — The value of the contract as of the date we receive your written request to surrender at our Home Office, less any applicable surrender charge, premium tax, any optional death benefit charge and contract charge.

 

Valuation Day — Each day on which the New York Stock Exchange is open for regular trading, except for days that the Subaccount’s corresponding Portfolio does not value its shares.

 

Valuation Period — The period that starts at the close of regular trading on the New York Stock Exchange on any Valuation Day and ends at the close of regular trading on the next succeeding Valuation Day.

 

5


Table of Contents

IMPORTANT INFORMATION YOU SHOULD CONSIDER ABOUT THE CONTRACT

 

   
Fees and Expenses   Location in Prospectus
Charges for Early Withdrawals  

If you withdraw money from your contract within eight years following your last premium payment, you may be assessed a surrender charge of up to 8% of the value of the premium payment withdrawn.

 

For example, if you purchased the contract and withdrew a $100,000 initial premium payment sooner than one complete year after making the payment, you could be assessed a surrender charge of up to $8,000 on the premium payment withdrawn.

 

Fee Tables

 

Charges and Other Deductions — Surrender Charge

Transaction Charges   In addition to surrender charges, you may also be charged for other transactions. We currently do not assess a transfer charge. However, we reserve the right to assess a transfer charge of $10 for each transfer among the Subaccounts after the first transfer in the calendar month.  

Fee Tables

 

Charges and Other Deductions — Other Charges

Ongoing Fees and Expenses
(annual charges)
  The table below describes the fees and expenses that you may pay each year, depending on the options you choose. Please refer to your contract data page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.  

Fee Tables

 

Charges and Other Deductions

 

     

Annual Fee

   Minimum    Maximum

Base contract1

   1.55%    1.55%

Investment options (Portfolio fees and expenses)2

   0.31%    1.39%

Optional benefits available for an additional charge (for a single optional benefit, if elected)3

   0.25%    0.25%

 

1    The base contract expense consists of the mortality and expense risk charge and administrative expense charge, each of which is expressed as an annual percentage charge that is assessed as a percentage of average daily net assets in the Separate Account.

 

2    As a percentage of Portfolio assets. These expenses are as of December 31, 2023, and will vary from year to year.

 

3    The minimum and maximum fee is the current fee for the Optional Guaranteed minimum Death Benefit Rider, which is assessed as a percentage of the average benefit amount for the prior contract year.

 

6


Table of Contents

Because your contract is customizable, the choices you make affect how much you will pay. To help you understand the cost of owning your contract, the following table shows the lowest and highest cost you could pay each year, based on current charges. This estimate assumes that you do not take withdrawals from the contract, which could add surrender charges that substantially increase costs.

 

 

   
Lowest Annual Cost:    Highest Annual Cost:

$1,746

  

$2,895

Assumes:

  

Assumes:

•  Investment of $100,000

•  5% annual appreciation

•  Least expensive combination of contract classes and Portfolio fees and expenses

•  No optional benefits

•  No sales charges

•  No additional premium payments, transfers, or withdrawals

 

  

•  Investment of $100,000

•  5% annual appreciation

•  Most expensive combination of contract classes, optional benefits and Portfolio fees and expenses

•  No sales charges

•  No additional premium payments, transfers, or withdrawals

 

     
Risks        Location in Prospectus

Risk of Loss

 

•  You can lose money by investing in this contract.

 

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

The Contract — Valuation of Accumulation Units

Not a Short-Term Investment

 

•  This contract is not a short-term investment and is not appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash.

 

•  A surrender charge can apply whenever you make a withdrawal of premium payments less than eight completed years after we received the premium payment.

 

•  The benefits of tax deferral mean that the contract is more beneficial to investors with a long time horizon.

 

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

Charges and Other Deductions

Risks Associated with Investment Options

 

•  An investment in this contract is subject to the risk of poor investment performance, which can vary depending on the performance of the investment options available under the contract (i.e., the Portfolios).

 

•  Each Portfolio (and the Guarantee Account) has its own unique risks.

 

•  You should review the prospectuses for the Portfolios and the section of this prospectus concerning the Guarantee Account before making an investment decision.

 

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

The Guarantee Account

 

Appendix A — Portfolios Available Under the Contract

 

7


Table of Contents
     
Risks         Location in Prospectus

Insurance Company Risks

 

•  An investment in the contract is subject to the risks related to the Company, including that any obligations (including under the Guarantee Account), guarantees, or benefits are subject to the claims-paying ability of the Company. More information about the Company, including its financial strength ratings, can be obtained by calling our Home Office at (800) 352-9910 or writing to us at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

  

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

The Company

     
Restrictions         Location in Prospectus

Investments

 

•  We reserve the right, subject to applicable law, to make additions, deletions, and substitutions for the Portfolios of the Funds.

 

•  For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation.

 

•  We reserve the right to limit transfers if frequent or large transfers occur, and to limit transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account.

  

The Separate Account — Subaccounts

 

The Guarantee Account

 

Transfers

Optional Benefits

 

•  We reserve the right to modify certain of our optional benefits. For example, we reserve the right to discontinue new Dollar Cost Averaging programs or to modify such programs at any time and for any reason.

 

  

Transfers

 

 

8


Table of Contents
Taxes         Location in Prospectus

Tax Implications

 

•  You should consult with a tax professional to determine the tax implications of an investment in and payments received under the contract.

 

•  If you purchase the contract through a qualified retirement plan or individual retirement account (IRA), you do not receive any additional tax benefit.

 

•  Withdrawals will be subject to ordinary income tax and may be subject to tax penalties.

 

  

Tax Matters

Conflicts of Interest         Location in Prospectus

Investment Professional Compensation

 

•  Your registered representative may receive compensation for selling and servicing this contract to you in the form of cash compensation (e.g., commissions), non-cash compensation (e.g., conferences, trips, prizes, and awards), and special marketing allowances.

 

•  The prospect of receiving such compensation may create an incentive for selling firms and/or their registered representative to sell you this contract versus another product with respect with which a selling firm does not receive additional compensation, or a lower level of additional compensation. You may wish to take such compensation arrangements into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the contracts.

 

  

Sales of the Contracts

Exchanges

 

•  Some investment professionals may have a financial incentive to offer you the contract in place of the one you own. Similarly, some investment professionals may have a financial incentive to offer you a different contract in place of this one. You should only exchange your current contract if you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the new contract rather than continue to own your existing contract.

  

Sales of the Contracts

 

9


Table of Contents

OVERVIEW OF THE CONTRACT

 

The following is intended as a summary. Please read each section of this prospectus for additional detail.

 

This annuity is a contract between you, as the owner of the contract, and the Company. The contract is designed for retirement savings and/or other long-term investment purposes. You should consider the contract in conjunction with any other annuity contract or life insurance policy you own.

 

What are the phases of the contract?The contract has two phases — the accumulation phase and the annuity phase.

 

During the accumulation phase you can apply premium payments to the investment options available under your contract, and we provide the basic death benefit at no additional cost. The accumulation phase is the “savings” phase of the contract, in that premium payments you have made can grow on a tax-deferred basis during this phase.

 

The annuity phase is also known as the “income” phase of the contract, because it is during that phase that the Contract Value you have accumulated is applied to an annuity payment option under which you receive regular payments (generally monthly). You can choose fixed or variable income payments. If you choose variable income payments, we will base each periodic income payment upon the number of Annuity Units to which you become entitled at the time you decide to annuitize and on the value of each unit on the date the payment is determined. Once you begin taking annuity payments under the contract, you receive a stream of income payments. You will no longer have Contract Value in the contract, and you will be unable to make withdrawals.

 

Who is the contract appropriate for? The contract is designed for investors who intend to accumulate funds for retirement or other long-term financial planning purposes, and thus is best suited for those with a long investment horizon. Although you have the ability to make partial surrenders and/or surrender the contract at any time during the accumulation phase, the contract should not be viewed as a highly liquid investment. In that regard, withdrawals taken in the near term can result in you being assessed a surrender charge, which can be a significant amount. In addition, if you participate in a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit, withdrawals can markedly reduce the benefit’s value. Failure to hold the contract for the long-term would mean that you lose the opportunity for the performance of your chosen investment options to grow on a tax-deferred basis. Thus, the contract’s features are appropriate for an investor who does not have significant liquidity needs with respect to money dedicated to the contract, has a long investment horizon, and has purchased the contract for retirement purposes or other long-term financial planning purposes. The contract is not intended for those who intend to engage in frequent trading among the Subaccounts.

 

What type of contract is this? The contract is an individual flexible premium variable deferred annuity contract. We may issue it as a contract qualified under the Code (“Qualified Contract”), or as a contract that is not qualified under the Code (“Non-Qualified Contract”). This prospectus only provides disclosure about the contract. Certain features described in this prospectus may vary from your particular contract. See “The Contract” provision of this prospectus.

 

What is a Bonus Credit? The Bonus Credit is an amount we add to each premium payment we receive. If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 4% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. If the Annuitant is age 81 or older at the time the contract is issued, we will not pay any Bonus Credits. (The Annuitant cannot be age 81 or older at the time of application unless we approve an Annuitant of an older age.) Bonus Credits are not considered “premium payments” for purposes of the contract. See the “Bonus Credits” provision of this prospectus.

 

What are my variable investment choices? Through its Subaccounts, the Separate Account uses your premium payments to purchase shares, at your direction, in one or more Portfolios. In turn, each Portfolio holds securities consistent with its own particular investment objective. See “The Separate Account” provision of this prospectus and Appendix A (which provides certain information about the underlying Portfolios corresponding to each Subaccount). Additional information about each Portfolio is provided in Appendix A to this prospectus, entitled “Portfolios Available Under the Contract.”

 

What is the Guarantee Account? The Guarantee Account is part of our General Account and pays interest at declared rates we guarantee for selected periods of time. We also guarantee the principal, after any deductions of applicable contract charges. Since the Guarantee Account is part of the General Account, we assume the risk of investment gain or loss on amounts allocated to it.

 

The Guarantee Account is not part of and does not depend on the investment performance of the Separate Account. Generally, you may transfer assets between the Guarantee Account and the Separate Account subject to certain restrictions. For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account.

 

10


Table of Contents

In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 to confirm whether the Guarantee Account is available under your contract. See “The Guarantee Account” and the “Transfers” provisions of this prospectus.

 

May I surrender the contract or take partial surrenders? Yes, subject to contract requirements and restrictions imposed under certain retirement plans. If you surrender the contract or take a partial surrender, we may assess a surrender charge. In addition, you will ordinarily be subject to income tax (except for qualified distributions from a Roth IRA or Roth account in an employer-sponsored retirement plan) and, if you are younger than age 5912 at the time of the surrender or partial surrender, a 10% IRS penalty tax. A surrender or a partial surrender may also be subject to tax withholding. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus. Certain withdrawals, depending on the amount and timing, may negatively impact the benefits and guarantees provided by your contract. For example, a partial surrender may reduce the death benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and premium tax) reduces your Contract Value. See the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus. You should carefully consider whether a withdrawal under a particular circumstance will have any negative impact to your benefits or guarantees. The impact of withdrawals generally on your benefits and guarantees is discussed in the corresponding sections of the prospectus describing such benefits and guarantees.

 

What optional benefits are available under this contract? The Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Rider was available by rider in addition to the Basic Death Benefit provided under the contract. The rider was available for an additional charge if elected when the owner applied for the contract. Because this contract is no longer offered or sold, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Rider is no longer available to be purchased or added under the contract. Please see the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus for more information about the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Rider and its features.

 

Will I pay taxes on my contract earnings? The Code has certain rules that apply to the contract. These tax treatments apply to earnings included in the contract’s withdrawals, death benefits, and annuity options. You are generally not taxed on

contract earnings until you take money from your contract. This is known as tax deferral. Tax deferral is automatically provided by tax-qualified retirement plans. There is no additional tax deferral provided when a variable annuity contract is used to fund a tax-qualified retirement plan. Investors should only consider buying the contract to fund a qualified plan for the contract’s other features, such as the optional guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus.

 

11


Table of Contents

FEE TABLES

 

The following tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering or making withdrawals from the contract. Please refer to your contract data page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.

 

The first table describes the fees and expenses that you will pay at the time that you buy the contract, surrender or make withdrawals from the contract, or transfer Contract Value between investment options. State premium taxes may also be deducted.

 

Transaction Expenses
Maximum Surrender Charge (as a percentage of premium payments withdrawn or
surrendered
):
  6%
Schedule of Surrender Charges (as a percentage of premium payments withdrawn or
surrendered
):
  Number of Completed Years
Since We Received the
Premium Payment
  Surrender Charge
as a Percentage of the
Premium Payment
Surrendered1
  0   8%
  1   8%
  2   7%
  3   6%
  4   5%
  5   4%
  6   3%
  7   2%
    8 or more   0%

Transfer Charge

  $10.002

 

1    A surrender charge is not assessed on any amounts representing gain. In addition, you may partially surrender the greater of 10% of your total premium payments or any amount surrendered to meet minimum distribution requirements under the Code each contract year without incurring a surrender charge. If you are making a withdrawal from this contract to meet annual minimum distribution requirements under the Code, and the minimum distribution amount attributable to this contract for the calendar year ending at or before the last day of the contract year exceeds the free withdrawal amount, you may withdraw the difference free of surrender charges. The free withdrawal amount is not cumulative from contract year to contract year. The surrender charge will be assessed from the amount surrendered unless otherwise requested.

 

2    We currently do not assess a transfer charge. However, we reserve the right to assess a transfer charge for each transfer among the Subaccounts.

 

12


Table of Contents

The next tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay each year during the time you own the contract, not including underlying Portfolio fees and expenses.

 

If you choose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional charges, as shown below.

 

Annual Contract Expenses

         

Administrative Expenses

   $25

An annual contract charge is taken on each contract anniversary and at the time the contract is surrendered. We will not assess this charge if your Contract Value is more than $10,000 at the time the charge is assessed.

Base Contract Expenses
(as a percentage of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account):

   1.55%

The 1.55% base contract expense is the sum of a mortality and expense risk charge of 1.30% and an administrative expense charge of 0.25%.

Optional Benefit Expenses

    
     Maximum Charge      Current Charge  
                   

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Rider1

     0.35%        0.25%  

 

1    The charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is taken in arrears on each contract anniversary and at the time of surrender. This charge is a percentage of your average benefit amount for the prior contract year.

 

The next item shows the minimum and maximum total operating expenses charged by the Portfolios that you may pay periodically during the time that you own the contract. A complete list of Portfolios available under the contract, including their annual expenses, may be found in Appendix A.

 

Annual Portfolio Expenses              

These are expenses that are deducted from Portfolio assets, including management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, and other expenses as of December 31, 2023.1

     
     Minimum      Maximum  

Before fee waivers and expense reimbursements

     0.31      1.39

 

1    Shown as a percentage of average net assets for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2023.

 

13


Table of Contents

Example

 

This Example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include transaction expenses, annual contract expenses, and annual Portfolio expenses.

 

The Example assumes that you invest $100,000 in the contract for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year and assumes the most expensive combination of annual Portfolio expenses and optional benefits available for an additional charge. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be as follows, assuming maximum expenses:

 

     1 Year     3 Years     5 Years     10 Years  
If you surrender
your contract at
the end of the
applicable time
period:
    $10,661       $16,860       $22,402       $37,382  
If you annuitize
at the end of the
applicable time
period:
    $3,089       $10,175       $17,505       $36,949  
If you do not
surrender your
contract:
    $3,461       $10,560       $17,902       $37,382  

 

The above Example assumes the following maximum expenses:

 

    Separate Account charges of 1.55% (deducted daily at an effective annual rate of the assets in the Separate Account); and

 

    a charge of 0.35% for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Rider (an annual rate as a percentage of the prior contract year’s average benefit amount).

 

If the optional riders are not elected, the expense figures shown above would be lower.

 

PRINCIPAL RISKS OF INVESTING IN THE CONTRACT

 

There are risks associated with investing in the contract. You can lose money in a variable annuity, including potentially the loss of your original investment. The value of your investment and any returns will depend on the performance of the Portfolios you select (and the Guarantee Account, if you select that option). Each Portfolio has its own unique risks.

 

Variable annuities are not short-term investment vehicles. The surrender charge applies for several years, and therefore the contract should be purchased only for the long-term. In addition, full or partial surrenders are subject to income tax to the extent they consist of earnings, and may be subject to a 10% income tax penalty if taken before age 5912. Accordingly, you should carefully consider your income and liquidity needs before purchasing a contract.

 

Investment Risk. You bear the risk of any decline in the Contract Value caused by the performance of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. Those Portfolios could decline in value very significantly, and there is a risk of loss of your entire amount invested. The risk of loss varies with each Portfolio. The investment risks are described in the prospectuses for the Portfolios.

 

Insurance Company Insolvency. It is possible that we could experience financial difficulty in the future and even become insolvent, and therefore unable to provide all of the guarantees and benefits that we promise that exceed the value of the assets in the Separate Account. Similarly, our experiencing financial difficulty could interfere with our ability to fulfill our obligations under the Guarantee Account.

 

Tax Consequences. Withdrawals are generally taxable to the extent of any earnings in the contract, and prior to age 5912 a tax penalty may apply. In addition, even if the contract is held for years before any withdrawal is made, withdrawals are taxable as ordinary income rather than capital gains.

 

Cybersecurity and Certain Business Continuity Risks. Our operations support complex transactions and are highly dependent on the proper functioning of information technology and communication systems. Any failure of or gap in the systems and processes necessary to support complex transactions and avoid systems failure, fraud, information security failures, processing errors, cyber intrusion, loss of data and breaches of regulation may lead to a materially adverse effect on our results of operations and corporate reputation. In addition, we must commit significant resources to maintain and enhance our existing systems in order to keep pace with applicable regulatory requirements, industry standards and customer preferences. If we fail to maintain secure and well-functioning information systems, we may not be able to rely on information for product pricing, compliance obligations, risk management and underwriting decisions. In addition, we cannot assure investors or consumers that interruptions, failures or breaches in security of these processes and systems will not occur, or if they do occur, that they can be timely detected and remediated. The occurrence of any of these events may have a materially adverse effect on our businesses, results of operations and financial condition.

 

14


Table of Contents

Because our variable product business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners, our business is vulnerable to disruptions from utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g., hardware and software malfunctions), and cyberattacks. These risks include, among other things, the theft, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, interference with or denial of service, attacks on websites and other operational disruption and unauthorized release of confidential customer information. Such systems failures and cyberattacks affecting us, any third party administrator, the Funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service providers may adversely affect us and your Contract Value. For instance, systems failures and cyberattacks may interfere with our processing of contract transactions, including the processing of orders from our website or with the Funds, impact our ability to calculate Accumulation Unit values, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information, impede order processing, subject us and/or our service providers and intermediaries to regulatory fines and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. Cybersecurity risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the Funds invest, which may cause the Funds underlying your contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that we or the Funds or our service providers will avoid losses affecting your contract due to cyberattacks or information security breaches in the future. There may be an increased risk of cyberattacks during periods of geo-political or military conflict (such as Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and the Israel-Hamas conflict).

 

Natural and Man-Made Disasters. We are also exposed to risks related to natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes, such as (but not limited to) storms, fires, floods, earthquakes, public health crises, malicious acts, geopolitical disputes, military actions, and terrorist acts, any of which could adversely affect our ability to conduct business. A natural or man-made disaster or catastrophe, including a pandemic (such as COVID-19), could affect the ability or willingness of our employees or the employees of our service providers to perform their job responsibilities. Even if our employees and the employees of our service providers are able to work remotely, those remote work arrangements could result in our business operations being less efficient than under normal circumstances and could lead to delays in our processing of contract-related transactions, including orders from contract owners. Catastrophic events may negatively affect the computer and other systems on which we rely, may interfere with our ability to receive, pick up and process mail, may interfere with our ability to calculate Contract Value, or may have other possible negative impacts. These events may also impact the issuers of securities in which the Portfolios invest, which may cause the Portfolios underlying your contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that we or the Portfolios or our service providers will be able to successfully avoid negative impacts associated with natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes.

 

We outsource certain critical business functions to third parties and, in the event of a natural or man-made disaster, rely upon the successful implementation and execution of the business continuity planning of such entities. While we monitor the business continuity activities of these third parties, successful implementation and execution of their business continuity strategies are largely beyond our control. If one or more of the third parties to whom we outsource such critical business functions experience operational failures, our ability to administer the contract could be impaired.

 

Unknown Risks and Uncertainties Associated With Artificial Intelligence. Our inability to anticipate and leverage new technology developments, such as artificial intelligence, could adversely affect the future success of our business. We may not be successful in anticipating or responding to these developments on a timely and cost-effective basis, and our investments in these capabilities may not deliver the benefits anticipated or perform as expected. Poor implementation of new technologies, including artificial intelligence, by us or our third-party service providers, could subject us to additional risks we cannot adequately mitigate, which could have a material adverse impact to our business, results of operations, and financial condition.

 

THE COMPANY

 

We are a stock life insurance company operating under a charter granted by the Commonwealth of Virginia on March 21, 1871. We principally offer life insurance policies and annuity contracts. We do business in 49 states, the District of Columbia and Bermuda. Our principal offices are at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. We are obligated to pay all amounts promised under the contract.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation serves as principal underwriter for the contracts and is a broker/dealer registered with the SEC. Genworth North America Corporation (formerly, GNA Corporation) directly owns the stock of Capital Brokerage Corporation and the Company. Genworth North America Corporation is indirectly owned by Genworth Financial, Inc., a public company.

 

FINANCIAL CONDITION OF THE COMPANY

 

Many factors, such as investment performance, interest rates, and equity market conditions, can affect an insurance

 

15


Table of Contents

company’s financial condition. We know it is important for you to understand how this market environment may impact your Contract Value and our ability to meet the guarantees under your contract.

 

Assets in the Separate Account. You assume all of the investment risk for Contract Value allocated to the Subaccounts. Your Contract Value in the Subaccounts is part of the assets of the Separate Account. These assets may not be charged with liabilities arising from any other business that we may conduct. The assets of the Separate Account will, however, be available to cover the liabilities of our General Account to the extent that the Separate Account assets exceed the Separate Account liabilities arising under the contracts supported by it. This means that, with very limited exceptions, all assets in the Separate Account attributable to your Contract Value and that of all other contract owners would receive a priority of payment status over other claims in the event of an insolvency or receivership. See “The Separate Account” provision of this prospectus.

 

Assets in the General Account. You also may be permitted to make allocations to the Guarantee Account, which is part of our General Account. In addition, any guarantees under the contract that exceed your Contract Value, such as the guaranteed minimum death benefits associated with the death benefit rider options, are paid from our General Account (not the Separate Account). Therefore, any amounts that we may pay under the contract in excess of your value in the Separate Account are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability and our long-term ability to make such payments. We issue (or have issued) other types of insurance policies and financial products as well, and we also pay our obligations under these products from our assets in the General Account. In the event of an insolvency or receivership, payments we make from our General Account to satisfy claims under the contract would generally receive the same priority as our other policy holder obligations. This means that in the event of an insolvency or receivership, you may receive only a portion, or none, of the payments you are due under the contract. See “The Guarantee Account” provision of this prospectus.

 

Our Financial Condition. As an insurance company, we are required by state insurance regulation to hold a specified amount of reserves in order to meet all the contractual obligations of our General Account to our contract owners. In order to meet our claims-paying obligations, we regularly monitor our reserves to ensure we hold sufficient amounts to cover actual or expected contract and claims payments. In addition, we actively hedge our investments in our General Account. However, it is important to note that there is no guarantee that we will always be able to meet our claims paying obligations, and that there are risks to purchasing any insurance product.

 

State insurance regulators also require insurance companies to maintain a minimum amount of capital, which acts as a cushion in the event that the insurer suffers a financial impairment, based on the inherent risks in the insurer’s operations. These risks include those associated with losses that we may incur as the result of defaults on the payment of interest or principal on our General Account assets, which include, but are not limited to, bonds, mortgages, general real estate investments, and stocks, as well as the loss in value of these investments resulting from a loss in their market value.

 

The market effects on our investment portfolio have caused us to re-evaluate product offerings. We continue to evaluate our investment portfolio to mitigate market risk and actively manage the investments in the portfolio.

 

How to Obtain More Information. We encourage both existing and prospective contract owners to read and understand our financial statements. We prepare our financial statements on a statutory basis. Our audited financial statements, as well as the financial statements of the Separate Account, are located in the Statement of Additional Information. If you would like a free copy of the Statement of Additional Information, call (800) 352-9910 or write to our Home Office at the address listed on page 1 of this prospectus. In addition, the Statement of Additional Information is available on our website at www.genworth.com/CommonwealthExtra or on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. You may obtain our audited statutory financial statements and any unaudited statutory financial statements that may be available by visiting our website at www.genworth.com.

 

You also will find on our website information on ratings assigned to us by one or more independent rating organizations. These ratings are opinions of an operating insurance company’s financial capacity to meet the obligations of its insurance and annuity contracts based on its financial strength and/or claims-paying ability.

 

THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

 

We established the Separate Account as a separate investment account on August 19, 1987. The Separate Account may invest in mutual funds, unit investment trusts, managed separate accounts, and other portfolios. We use the Separate Account to support the contract as well as for other purposes permitted by law.

 

Currently, there are multiple Subaccounts of the Separate Account available under the contract. Each Subaccount invests exclusively in shares representing an interest in a separate corresponding Portfolio of the Funds.

 

16


Table of Contents

The assets of the Separate Account belong to us. Nonetheless, we do not charge the assets in the Separate Account attributable to the contracts with liabilities arising out of any other business which we may conduct. The assets of the Separate Account will, however, be available to cover the liabilities of our General Account to the extent that the assets of the Separate Account exceed its liabilities arising under the contracts supported by it. Income and both realized and unrealized gains or losses from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to the income, gains, or losses arising out of any other business we may conduct. The Company is obligated to pay all amounts promised to contract owners under the contracts. Guarantees made under the contract, including any rider options, are based on the claims paying ability of the Company to the extent that the amount of the guarantee exceeds the assets available in the Separate Account.

 

We registered the Separate Account with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (“1940 Act”). The Separate Account meets the definition of a separate account under the Federal securities laws. Registration with the SEC does not involve supervision of the management or investment practices or policies of the Separate Account by the SEC. You assume the full investment risk for all amounts you allocate to the Separate Account.

 

If permitted by law, we may deregister the Separate Account under the 1940 Act in the event registration is no longer required; manage the Separate Account under the direction of a committee; or combine the Separate Account with one of our other separate accounts. Further, to the extent permitted by applicable law, we may transfer the assets of the Separate Account to another separate account.

 

The Portfolios

 

There is a separate Subaccount which corresponds to each Portfolio of a Fund offered in this contract. You select the Subaccounts to which you allocate premium payments and Contract Value. In addition, you currently may change your future premium payment allocation without penalty or charges. In addition, there are limitations on the number of transfers that may be made each calendar year. See the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus for additional information.

 

Each Fund is registered with the SEC as an open-end management investment company under the 1940 Act. The assets of each Portfolio are separate from other portfolios of a Fund and each Portfolio has separate investment objectives and policies. As a result, each Portfolio operates as a separate Portfolio and the investment performance of one Portfolio has no effect on the investment performance of any other Portfolio.

 

Certain Portfolios may invest substantially all of their assets in portfolios of other funds. As a result, you will pay fees and expenses at both portfolio levels. This will reduce your investment return. These arrangements are referred to as “funds of funds” or “master-feeder funds.” Funds of funds or master-feeder structures may have higher expenses than Portfolios that invest directly in debt or equity securities.

 

Certain Portfolios may employ hedging strategies to provide for downside protection during sharp downward movements in equity markets. The cost of these hedging strategies could limit the upside participation of the Portfolio in rising equity markets relative to other Portfolios. You should consult with your registered representative to determine which combination of investment choices is appropriate for you.

 

Information regarding each Portfolio, including (i) its name; (ii) its type (e.g., money market fund, bond fund, balanced fund, etc.); (iii) its investment adviser and any sub-adviser; (iv) current expenses; and (v) performance is available in Appendix A to this prospectus. Each Portfolio has issued a prospectus that contains more detailed information about the Portfolio. Before choosing a Subaccount to which you will allocate your premium payments and Contract Value, carefully read the prospectus for each Portfolio, along with this prospectus. You may obtain the most recent prospectus for each Portfolio by calling us at (800) 352-9910, or writing us at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. You may also obtain copies of the prospectus for each Portfolio on our website at www.genworth.com/CommonwealthExtra. There is no assurance that any of the Portfolios will meet these objectives. We do not guarantee any minimum value for the amounts you allocate to the Separate Account. You bear the investment risk of investing in the Portfolios.

 

The investment objectives and policies of certain Portfolios are similar to the investment objectives and policies of other portfolios that may be managed by the same investment adviser or manager. The investment results of the Portfolios, however, may be higher or lower than the results of such other portfolios. There can be no assurance, and no representation is made, that the investment results of any of the Portfolios will be comparable to the investment results of any other Portfolio, even if the other Portfolio has the same investment adviser or manager, or if the other Portfolio has a similar name.

 

Subaccounts

 

You may allocate premium payments and Contract Value to Subaccounts that invest in the Portfolios in addition to the Guarantee Account (if available) at any one time. We will purchase shares of the Portfolios at net asset value and direct

 

17


Table of Contents

them to the appropriate Subaccounts. We will redeem sufficient shares of the appropriate Portfolios at net asset value to pay death benefits and surrender or partial surrender proceeds; to make income payments; or for other purposes described in the contract. We automatically reinvest all dividend and capital gain distributions of the Portfolios in shares of the distributing Portfolios at their net asset value on the date of distribution. In other words, we do not pay Portfolio dividends or Portfolio distributions out to owners as additional units, but instead reflect them in unit values.

 

Shares of the Portfolios are not sold directly to the general public. They are sold to us, and they may also be sold to other insurance companies that issue variable annuity contracts and variable life insurance policies. In addition, they may be sold to retirement plans.

 

When a Fund sells shares in any of its Portfolios both to variable annuity and to variable life insurance separate accounts, it engages in mixed funding. When a Fund sells shares in any of its Portfolios to separate accounts of unaffiliated life insurance companies, it engages in shared funding.

 

Each Fund may engage in mixed and shared funding. Therefore, due to differences in redemption rates or tax treatment, or other considerations, the interests of various shareholders participating in a Fund could conflict. A Fund’s Board of Directors will monitor for the existence of any material conflicts, and determine what action, if any, should be taken. See the prospectuses for the Portfolios for additional information.

 

We reserve the right, subject to applicable law, to make additions, deletions and substitutions for the Portfolios of the Funds. We may substitute shares of other portfolios for shares already purchased, or to be purchased in the future, under the contract. This substitution might occur if shares of a Portfolio should no longer be available, or if investment in any Portfolio’s shares should become inappropriate for the purposes of the contract in the judgment of our management. In addition, the new Portfolios may have higher fees and charges than the ones they replaced. No substitution or deletion will be made without prior notice to you and before approval of the SEC, in accordance with the 1940 Act.

 

We also reserve the right to establish additional Subaccounts, each of which would invest in a separate Portfolio of a Fund, or in shares of another investment company, with a specified investment objective. We may also eliminate one or more Subaccounts if, in our sole discretion, marketing, tax, or investment conditions warrant. We will not eliminate a Subaccount without prior notice to you and before approval of the SEC. Not all Subaccounts may be available to all classes of contracts.

 

There are a number of factors that are considered when deciding what Portfolios are made available in your variable annuity contract. Such factors include:

 

  (1)   the investment objective of the Portfolio;

 

  (2)   the Portfolio’s performance history;

 

  (3)   the Portfolio’s holdings and strategies it uses to try and meet its objectives; and

 

  (4)   the Portfolio’s servicing agreement.

 

The investment objective is critical because we want to have Portfolios with diverse objectives so that an investor may diversify his or her investment holdings, from a conservative to an aggressive investment portfolio, depending on the advice of his or her investment adviser and risk assessment. There is no assurance, however, that a Portfolio will achieve its stated investment objective. When selecting a Portfolio for our products, we also consider the Portfolio’s performance history compared to its peers and whether its holdings and strategies are consistent with its objectives. Please keep in mind that past performance does not guarantee future results. Finally, it is important for us to be able to provide you with a wide array of the services that facilitate your investment program relating to your allocation in Subaccounts that invest in the Portfolios. The Company does not provide investment advice and does not recommend or endorse any particular Subaccount or Portfolio. You bear the entire risk of any decline in your Contract Value resulting from the investment performance of the Subaccounts you have chosen.

 

Payments from Funds and Fund Affiliates. We have entered into agreements with either the investment adviser or distributor of each of the Funds and/or, in certain cases, a Portfolio, under which the Portfolio, the adviser or distributor may make payments to us and/or to certain of our affiliates. We consider these payments and fees among a number of factors when deciding to add or keep a Portfolio on the menu of Portfolios that we offer through the contract. These payments may be made in connection with certain administrative and other services we provide relating to the Portfolios. Such administrative services we provide or obtain include but are not limited to: accounting transactions for variable owners and then providing one daily purchase and sale order on behalf of each Portfolio; providing copies of Portfolio prospectuses, Statements of Additional Information and any supplements thereto; forwarding proxy voting information, gathering the information and providing vote totals to the Portfolio on behalf of our owners; and providing customer service on behalf of the Portfolios, including the provision of teleservicing support in connection with the Portfolios and the provision of office space, equipment, facilities and personnel as may be reasonably required or beneficial in

 

18


Table of Contents

order to provide these services to contract owners. The amount of the payments is based on a percentage of the average annual aggregate net amount we have invested in the Portfolio on behalf of the Separate Account and other separate accounts funding certain variable insurance contracts that we and our affiliates issue. These percentages differ, and some Portfolios, investment advisers or distributors pay us a greater percentage than other Portfolios, advisers or distributors based on the level of administrative and other services provided. The availability of these types of arrangements may create an incentive for us to seek and to add as an investment option under the contract funds or portfolios (and classes of shares of such portfolios) that pay us higher amounts. Other funds or portfolios (or available classes of shares of such portfolios) with substantially similar investment objectives may have lower fees and better overall investment performance than the Funds and Portfolios offered through your contract.

 

We may realize a profit from payments received from a Portfolio or from the adviser and/or the distributor. We may use the proceeds of such payment to pay for the services described above or for any corporate purpose, including payment of expenses (i) that we and/or our affiliates incur in promoting, marketing and administering the contracts, and (ii) that we incur, in our role as intermediary, in maintaining the Portfolios as investment options and facilitating the Subaccounts’ investment in the Portfolios

 

The amount received from certain Portfolios for the assets allocated to the Portfolios from the Separate Account during 2023 ranged from 0.15% to 0.20% of annualized average daily net assets. The Portfolios that pay a service fee to us are PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust — Total Return Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares and State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. — Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares.

 

As noted above, an investment adviser or distributor of a Portfolio, or its affiliates, may make payments to us and/or certain of our affiliates. These payments may be derived, in whole or in part, from the profits the investment adviser or sub-adviser receives on the advisory fee deducted from Portfolio assets. Contract owners, through their indirect investment in the Portfolios, bear the costs of these advisory fees (see the prospectuses for the Portfolios for more information). The amount received from the adviser and/or the distributor for the assets allocated to the Portfolios from the Separate Account during 2023 ranged from 0.076% to 0.35%. Payment of these amounts is not an additional charge to you by the Funds or by us, but comes from the Fund’s investment adviser or distributor. These payments may vary by Portfolio. Therefore, the amount of such payments paid to us may be greater or smaller based on the Portfolios you select.

 

In addition to the asset-based payments for administrative and other services described above, the investment adviser or the distributor of the Fund may also pay us or our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation, to participate in periodic sales meetings, for expenses relating to the production of promotional sales literature and for other expenses or services. The amount paid to us, or our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation, may be significant. Payments to participate in sales meetings may provide a Fund’s investment adviser or distributor with greater access to our internal and external wholesalers to provide training, marketing support and educational presentations.

 

In consideration of services provided and expenses incurred by Capital Brokerage Corporation in distributing shares of the Funds, Capital Brokerage Corporation also receives Rule 12b-1 fees from AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc., Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund, Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust, Janus Aspen Series and MFS® Variable Insurance Trust. See the prospectuses for the Portfolios for additional information. These payments range up to 0.25% of Separate Account assets invested in the particular Portfolio. Certain Portfolios may accrue Rule 12b-1 fees at a higher rate (as disclosed in the prospectus for the Portfolio), but payments to us and/or Capital Brokerage Corporation may be made in a lower amount. Not all of the Portfolios may pay the same amount of Rule 12b-1 fees or shareholder servicing fees. Therefore, the amount of such fees paid to us and/or Capital Brokerage Corporation may be greater or smaller based on the Portfolios you select.

 

Voting Rights

 

As required by law, we will vote the shares of the Portfolios held in the Separate Account at special shareholder meetings based on instructions from you. However, if the law changes and we are permitted to vote in our own right, we may elect to do so. Further, in certain limited circumstances, we may override a contract owner’s voting instructions consistent with SEC order.

 

Whenever a Fund calls a shareholder meeting, owners with voting interests in a Portfolio will be notified of issues requiring the shareholders’ vote as soon as possible before the shareholder meeting. Persons having a voting interest in the Portfolio will be provided with proxy voting materials, reports, other materials, and a form with which to give voting instructions.

 

We will determine the number of votes which you have the right to cast by applying your percentage interest in a Subaccount to the total number of votes attributable to the Subaccount. In determining the number of votes, we will recognize fractional shares.

 

19


Table of Contents

We will vote Portfolio shares for which no instructions are received (or instructions are not received timely), as well as shares of the Portfolio that the Company itself owns, in the same proportion to those that are received. Therefore, because of proportional voting, a small number of contract owners may control the outcome of a vote. We will apply voting instructions to abstain on any item to be voted on a pro-rata basis to reduce the number of votes eligible to be cast.

 

THE GUARANTEE ACCOUNT

 

Amounts in the Guarantee Account are held in, and are part of, our General Account. The General Account consists of our assets other than those allocated to this and other Separate Accounts. Subject to statutory authority, we have sole discretion over the investment of assets of the General Account. The assets of the General Account are chargeable with liabilities arising out of any business we may conduct.

 

Due to certain exemptive and exclusionary provisions of the federal securities laws, we have not registered interests in the Guarantee Account under the Securities Act of 1933 (the “1933 Act”), and we have not registered either the Guarantee Account or our General Account as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Accordingly, neither the interests in the Guarantee Account nor our General Account are generally subject to regulation under the 1933 Act and the 1940 Act. Disclosures relating to the interests in the Guarantee Account and the General Account, may however, be subject to certain generally applicable provisions of the federal securities laws relating to the accuracy of statements made in a registration statement. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or markets.

 

Generally, you may allocate your premium payments and/or transfer assets to the Guarantee Account. For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation. We generally exercise our right to limit or refuse allocations to the Guarantee Account when interest rate periods are low for prolonged periods of time. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the Guarantee Account available under your contract. Amounts allocated to the Guarantee Account are credited interest (as described below). Assets in the Guarantee Account are subject to some, but not all, of the charges we assess in connection with your contract. See the “Charges and Other Deductions” provision of this prospectus.

 

Each time you allocate premium payments or transfer assets to the Guarantee Account, we establish an interest rate guarantee period. For each interest rate guarantee period, we guarantee an interest rate for a specified period of time. At the end of an interest rate guarantee period, a new interest rate will become effective, and a new interest rate guarantee period for one year will commence for the remaining portion of that particular allocation.

 

We determine the interest rates at our sole discretion. The determination made will be influenced by, but not necessarily correspond to, interest rates available on fixed income investments which we may acquire with the amounts we receive as premium payments or transfers of assets under the contracts. You will have no direct or indirect interest in these investments. We also will consider other factors in determining interest rates for a guarantee period including, but not limited to, regulatory and tax requirements, sales commissions, and administrative expenses borne by us, general economic trends, and competitive factors. Amounts you allocate to the Guarantee Account (if available) will not share in the investment performance of our General Account. We cannot predict or guarantee the level of interest rates in future guarantee periods. However, the interest rates for any interest rate guarantee period will be at least the guaranteed interest rate shown in your contract.

 

We will notify you in writing at least 5 days prior to the expiration date of any interest rate guarantee period about the then currently available interest rate guarantee periods and the guaranteed interest rates applicable to such interest rate guarantee periods. A new one year interest rate guarantee period will commence automatically unless we receive written notice prior to the end of the 30-day period following the expiration of the interest rate guarantee period (“30-day window”) of your election of a different interest rate guarantee period from among those being offered by us at that time, or instructions to transfer all or a portion of the remaining amount to one or more Subaccounts subject to certain restrictions. See the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus. During the 30-day window, the allocation will accrue interest at the new interest rate guarantee period’s interest rate.

 

To the extent permitted by law, we reserve the right at any time to offer interest rate guarantee periods that differ than those available when we issued the contract, and to credit a higher rate of interest on premium payments allocated to the Guarantee Account participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program than would otherwise be credited if not participating in a Dollar Cost

 

20


Table of Contents

Averaging program. See the “Dollar Cost Averaging Program” provision of this prospectus. Such a program may not be available to all contracts. We also reserve the right, at any time, to stop accepting premium payments or transfers of assets to a particular interest rate guarantee period. Since the specific interest rate guarantee periods available may change periodically, please contact our Home Office at the address listed on page 1 of this prospectus to determine the interest rate guarantee periods currently being offered.

 

CHARGES AND OTHER DEDUCTIONS

 

We sell the contracts through registered representatives of broker-dealers. These registered representatives are also appointed and licensed as insurance agents of the Company. We pay commissions to the broker-dealers for selling the contracts. We intend to recover commissions, marketing, administrative and other expenses and costs of contract benefits, and other incentives we pay, through fees and charges imposed under the contracts and other corporate revenue. See the “Sales of the Contracts” provision of this prospectus for more information.

 

All of the charges described in this section apply to assets allocated to the Separate Account. Assets in the Guarantee Account are subject to all of the charges described in this section except for the mortality and expense risk charge and the administrative expense charge.

 

We will deduct the charges described below to cover our costs and expenses, services provided, and risks assumed under the contracts. We incur certain costs and expenses for the distribution and administration of the contracts and for providing the benefits payable thereunder. Our administrative services include:

 

    processing applications for and issuing the contracts;

 

    maintaining records;

 

    administering income payments;

 

    furnishing accounting and valuation services (including the calculation and monitoring of daily Subaccount values);

 

    reconciling and depositing cash receipts;

 

    providing tax forms;

 

    providing contract confirmations and periodic statements;

 

    providing toll-free inquiry services; and

 

    furnishing telephone and internet transaction services.

 

The risks we assume include:

 

    the risk that the death benefit will be greater than the Surrender Value;

 

    the risk that the actual life-span of persons receiving income payments under the contract will exceed the assumptions reflected in our guaranteed rates (these rates are incorporated in the contract and cannot be changed);

 

    the risk that more owners than expected will qualify for waivers of the surrender charges; and

 

    the risk that our costs in providing the services will exceed our revenues from contract charges (which cannot be changed by us).

 

We designed the Bonus Credit as part of the overall sales load structure for the contracts. When the contracts were designed, we set the Bonus Credit level and the level of the surrender charge to reflect the overall level of sales load and distribution expenses associated with the contracts. Although there is no specific charge for the Bonus Credit, we may use a portion of the surrender charge and mortality and expense risk charge to help recover the cost of providing the Bonus Credit under the contract. We may realize a profit from this feature.

 

The amount of the charges may not necessarily correspond to the costs associated with providing the services or benefits indicated by the designation of the charge. For example, the surrender charge we collect may not fully cover all of the sales and distribution expenses we actually incur. We also may realize a profit on one or more of the charges. We may use any such profits for any corporate purpose, including the payment of sales expenses.

 

Transaction Expenses

 

Surrender Charge

 

We assess a surrender charge on partial and total surrenders of each premium payment taken within the first eight years after receipt, unless you meet the exceptions as described below. You pay this charge to compensate us for the losses we experience on contract distribution costs.

 

We calculate the surrender charge separately for each premium payment. For purposes of calculating this charge, we assume that you withdraw premium payments on a first-in, first-out basis. We deduct the surrender charge proportionately from the Subaccounts. However, if there are insufficient assets in the Subaccounts, we will deduct the charge from all assets in the Guarantee Account. Charges taken from the Guarantee Account

 

21


Table of Contents

will be taken first from assets that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time. The surrender charge is as follows:

 

Number of Completed

Years Since We

Received the

Premium Payment

  Surrender Charge
as a Percentage of
the Premium Payment
Surrendered
0   8%
1   8%
2   7%
3   6%
4   5%
5   4%
6   3%
7   2%
8 or more   0%

 

Exceptions to the Surrender Charge

 

We do not assess the surrender charge:

 

    of amounts of Contract Value representing gain (as defined below) or Bonus Credits;

 

    of free withdrawal amounts (as defined below);

 

    on total or partial surrenders taken under Optional Payment Plan 1, Optional Payment Plan 2 (for a period of 5 or more years), or Optional Payment Plan 5; or

 

    if a waiver of surrender charge provision applies.

 

You may surrender any gain in your contract (including any Bonus Credits) free of any surrender charge. We calculate gain in the contract as: (a) plus (b) minus (c) minus (d), but not less than zero where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day we receive your partial or total surrender request;

 

  (b)   is the total of any partial surrenders previously taken, including surrender charges;

 

  (c)   is the total of premium payments made; and

 

  (d)   is the total of any gain previously surrendered.

 

In addition to any gain, you may partially surrender an amount equal to the greater of 10% of your total premium payments or any amount surrendered to meet minimum distribution requirements under the Code each contract year without a surrender charge (the “free withdrawal amount”). If you are making a withdrawal from this contract to meet annual minimum distribution requirements under the Code, and the minimum distribution amount attributable to this contract for the calendar year ending at or before the last day of the contract year exceeds the free withdrawal amount, you may withdraw the difference free of surrender charges. We will deduct amounts surrendered first from any gain in the contract and then from premiums paid. The free withdrawal amount is not cumulative from contract year to contract year. (For tax purposes, a surrender is usually treated as a withdrawal of earnings first.).

 

Further, we will waive the surrender charge if you annuitize the contract under Optional Payment Plan 1 (Life Income with Period Certain), Optional Payment Plan 2 (Income for a Fixed Period) provided that you select a fixed period of 5 years or more, or Optional Payment Plan 5 (Joint Life and Survivor Income). See the “Optional Payment Plans” provision of this prospectus.

 

We also will waive surrender charges arising from a surrender occurring before income payments begin if, at the time we receive the surrender request, we have received due proof that the Annuitant has a qualifying terminal illness, or has a qualifying confinement to a state licensed or legally operated hospital or inpatient nursing facility for a minimum period as set forth in the contract (provided the confinement began, or the illness was diagnosed, at least one year after the contract was issued). If you surrender the contract under the terminal illness waiver, please remember that we will pay your Contract Value, which could be less than the death benefit otherwise available. All Annuitants must be age 80 or younger on the Contract Date to be eligible for this waiver. The terms and conditions of the waivers are set forth in your contract.

 

Deductions from the Separate Account

 

We deduct from the Separate Account an amount, computed daily, at an annual rate of 1.55% of the daily net assets of the Separate Account. The charge consists of an administrative expense charge at an effective annual rate of 0.25% and a mortality and expense risk charge at an effective annual rate of 1.30%. These deductions from the Separate Account are reflected in your Contract Value.

 

Charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

 

We charge you for expenses related to the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We deduct this charge against the Contract Value at each contract anniversary and at the time you fully surrender the contract. This charge is assessed in order to compensate us for the increased risks and expenses associated with providing the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We will allocate the annual charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total

 

22


Table of Contents

assets in the Separate Account at the time we take the charge. If the assets in the Separate Account are not sufficient to cover the charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, we will deduct the charge first from your assets in the Separate Account, if any, and then from your assets in the Guarantee Account (from the amounts that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time). At full surrender, we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge.

 

We guarantee that this charge will never exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your prior contract year’s average benefit amount (we currently charge 0.25%). The rate that applies to your contract is fixed at issue.

 

Other Charges

 

Annual Contract Charge

 

We will deduct an annual contract charge of $25 from your Contract Value to compensate us for certain administrative expenses incurred in connection with the contract. We will deduct the charge on each contract anniversary and at full surrender. We will waive this charge if your Contract Value at the time of deduction is $10,000 or more.

 

We will allocate the annual contract charge among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in the Separate Account at the time the charge is taken. If there are insufficient assets allocated to the Separate Account, we will deduct any remaining portion of the charge from the Guarantee Account proportionally from all assets in the Guarantee Account.

 

Deductions for Premium Taxes

 

We will deduct charges for any premium tax or other tax levied by any governmental entity from premium payments or Contract Value when the premium tax is incurred or when we pay proceeds under the contract (proceeds include surrenders, partial surrenders, income payments and death benefit payments).

 

The applicable premium tax rates that states and other governmental entities impose on the purchase of an annuity are subject to change by legislation, by administrative interpretation, or by judicial action. These premium taxes generally depend upon the law of your state of residence. The tax generally ranges from 0.0% to 3.5%.

 

Portfolio Charges

 

Each Portfolio incurs certain fees and expenses. These include management fees and other expenses associated with the daily operation of each Portfolio, as well as Rule 12b-1 fees and/or service share fees, if applicable. To pay for these expenses, the Portfolio makes deductions from its assets. A Portfolio may also impose a redemption charge on Subaccount assets that are redeemed from the Portfolio. Portfolio expenses, including any redemption charges, are more fully described in the prospectus for each Portfolio. Portfolio expenses are the responsibility of the Portfolio or Fund. They are not fixed or specified under the terms of the contract and are not the responsibility of the Company.

 

Transfer Charges

 

We reserve the right to impose a charge of up to $10 per transfer. This charge represents the costs we incur for effecting any such transfer. We will not realize a profit from imposing this charge.

 

THE CONTRACT

 

The contract is an individual flexible deferred variable annuity contract. Your rights and benefits are described below and in the contract. There may be differences in your contract (such as differences in fees, charges, and benefits) because of requirements of the state where we issued your contract. We will include any such differences in your contract.

 

This contract is no longer offered and sold and, therefore, the optional benefits and features described in this prospectus are no longer available to purchase under the contract. Please refer to your contract and your contract data pages to determine the benefits and features available under your contract.

 

Even though this contract is no longer available for new sales, additional premium payments may be made in accordance with the terms of the contract and as described in the “Premium Payments” provision.

 

Generally, you must maintain a minimum amount of Contract Value after a partial surrender to keep your contract in effect. For example, if your partial surrender request would reduce your Contract Value to less than $1,000, we will surrender your contract in full.

 

This contract may be used with certain tax qualified retirement plans. The contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit; the purchase of this contract does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. Accordingly, if this contract is purchased as a Qualified Contract, you should consider purchasing the contract for its death benefit, income benefits, and other non-tax-related benefits. Please consult a tax adviser

 

23


Table of Contents

for information specific to your circumstances in order to determine whether this contract is an appropriate investment for you.

 

Purchasing the contract through a tax-free “Section 1035” exchange. Section 1035 of the Code generally permits you to exchange one annuity contract for another in a “tax-free exchange.” Therefore, you can use the proceeds from another annuity contract to make premium payments for this contract. Before making an exchange, you should carefully compare this contract to your current contract. You may have to pay a surrender charge under your current contract to exchange it for this contract, and this contract has its own surrender charges which would apply to you. The fees and charges under this contract may be higher (or lower), and the benefits may be different, than those of your current contract. In addition, you may have to pay federal income and penalty taxes on the exchange if it does not qualify for Section 1035 treatment. You should not exchange another contract for this contract unless you determine, after evaluating all of the facts, that the exchange is in your best interest. Please note that the person who sells you this contract generally will earn a commission on the sale.

 

Ownership

 

As owner, you have all rights under the contract, subject to the rights of any irrevocable beneficiary. Two persons may apply for a contract as joint owners. Joint owners have equal undivided interests in their contract. A joint owner may not be named for a Qualified Contract. That means that each may exercise any ownership rights on behalf of the other, except for ownership changes. Joint owners also have the right of survivorship. This means if a joint owner dies, his or her interest in the contract passes to the surviving owner. You must have our approval to add a joint owner after we issue the contract. We may require additional information if joint ownership is requested after the contract is issued.

 

Subject to certain restrictions imposed by electable rider options and as otherwise stated below, before the Maturity Date, you may change:

 

    your Maturity Date to any date at least ten years after your last premium payment;

 

    your Optional Payment Plan;

 

    the allocation of your investments among the Subaccounts and/or the Guarantee Account (subject to certain restrictions listed in your contract and in the “Transfers” provision); and

 

    the owner, joint owner, primary beneficiary, contingent beneficiary (unless the primary beneficiary or contingent beneficiary is named as an irrevocable beneficiary), and contingent Annuitant upon written notice to our Home Office, and provided the Annuitant is living at the time of the request. If you change a beneficiary, your plan selection will no longer be in effect unless you request that it continue. In addition, you may change any non-natural owner to another non-natural owner. Changing the owner or joint owner may have tax consequences and you should consult a tax adviser before doing so.

 

We must receive your request for a change at our Home Office in a form satisfactory to us. The change will take effect as of the date you sign the request. The change will be subject to any payment made before we recorded the change.

 

Assignment

 

An owner of a Non-Qualified Contract may assign some or all of his or her rights under the contract with our consent. However, an assignment may terminate certain death benefits provided by rider option. An assignment must occur before the Maturity Date and while the Annuitant is still living. Once proper notice of the assignment is recorded by our Home Office, the assignment will become effective as of the date the written request was signed.

 

Qualified Contracts, IRAs and Tax Sheltered Annuities may not be assigned, pledged or otherwise transferred except where allowed by law.

 

We are not responsible for the validity or tax consequences of any assignment. We are not liable for any payment or settlement made before the assignment is recorded. Assignments will not be recorded until our Home Office receives sufficient direction from the owner and the assignee regarding the proper allocation of contract rights.

 

Amounts pledged or assigned will be treated as distributions and will be included in gross income to the extent that the Contract Value exceeds the investment in the contract for the taxable year in which it was pledged or assigned.

 

Assignment of the entire Contract Value may cause the portion of the contract exceeding the total investment in the contract and previously taxed amounts to be included in gross income for federal income tax purposes each year that the assignment is in effect.

 

Amounts assigned may be subject to an IRS tax penalty equal to 10% of the amount included in gross income.

 

24


Table of Contents

Premium Payments

 

You may make premium payments at any frequency and in the amount you select, subject to certain limitations. You must obtain our approval before you make total premium payments for an Annuitant age 79 or younger that exceed $2,000,000 in the aggregate in any variable annuity contracts issued by the Company or any of its affiliates. If the Annuitant is age 80 or older at the time of payment, the total amount not subject to prior approval is $1,000,000 in the aggregate in any variable annuity contracts issued by the Company or any of its affiliates. Premium payments may be made at any time prior to the Maturity Date, the surrender of the contract, or the death of the owner (or joint owner, if applicable), whichever comes first. We reserve the right to refuse to accept a premium payment for any lawful reason and in a manner that does not unfairly discriminate against similarly situated purchasers.

 

The minimum initial premium payment is $10,000. We may accept a lower initial premium payment in the case of certain group sales. Each additional premium payment must be at least $1,000 for Non-Qualified Contracts ($200 if paid by electronic fund transfers), $50 for IRA Contracts, and $100 for other Qualified Contracts.

 

Valuation Day and Valuation Period

 

We will value Accumulation and Annuity Units once daily as of the close of regular trading (currently 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time) for each day the New York Stock Exchange is open except for days on which a Portfolio does not value its shares. If a Valuation Period contains more than one day, the unit values will be the same for each day in the Valuation Period. Premium payments are credited to a contract on the basis of accumulation unit value next determined after receipt of a premium payment.

 

Allocation of Premium Payments

 

We place premium payments into the Subaccounts, each of which invests in shares of a corresponding Portfolio, and/or the Guarantee Account, according to your instructions. You may allocate premium payments in the Subaccounts plus the Guarantee Account at any one time. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or in all markets. The percentage of premium payment which you can put into any one Subaccount or guarantee period must equal a whole percentage and cannot be less than $100.

 

Upon allocation to the appropriate Subaccounts, we convert premium payments into Accumulation Units. We determine the number of Accumulation Units credited by dividing the amount allocated to each Subaccount by the value of an Accumulation Unit for that Subaccount on the Valuation Day on which we receive any additional premium payment at our Home Office. The number of Accumulation Units determined in this way is not changed by any subsequent change in the value of an Accumulation Unit. However, the dollar value of an Accumulation Unit will vary depending not only upon how well the Portfolio’s investments perform, but also upon the expenses of the Separate Account and the Portfolios.

 

We allocate any premium payments we receive that are not

accompanied with new instructions in accordance with any

prior valid instructions. You may change the allocation of subsequent premium payments at any time, without charge, by sending us acceptable notice. The new allocation will apply to any new premium payments made after we receive notice of the change at our Home Office.

 

Bonus Credits

 

The Bonus Credit is an amount we add to each premium payment we receive. If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 4% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. If the Annuitant is age 81 or older at the time of issue, we will not pay any Bonus Credits. The Annuitant cannot be age 81 or older at the time of application, unless we approve an Annuitant of an older age. We fund the Bonus Credits from our General Account. We apply the Bonus Credits when we apply your premium payment to your Contract Value, and allocate the credits on a pro-rata basis to the investment options you select in the same ratio as the applicable premium payment. We do not consider Bonus Credits as “premium payments” for purposes of the contract. You should know that over time and under certain circumstances (such as an extended period of poor market performance), the costs associated with the Bonus Credit may exceed the sum of the Bonus Credit and any related earnings. You should consider this possibility before purchasing the contract. The Bonus Credit is referred to as an “enhanced premium amount” in your contract.

 

Valuation of Accumulation Units

 

Partial surrenders, surrenders and payment of a death benefit all result in the cancellation of an appropriate number of Accumulation Units. We cancel Accumulation Units as of the end of the Valuation Period on which we receive notice or instructions with regard to the surrender, partial surrender or payment of a death benefit. We value Accumulation Units for each Subaccount separately. The Accumulation Unit value at the end of every Valuation Day equals the Accumulation Unit value at the end of the preceding Valuation Day multiplied by the net investment factor (described below). We arbitrarily set the Accumulation Unit value at the inception of the Subaccount

 

25


Table of Contents

at $10. On any Valuation Day, we determine your Subaccount value by multiplying the number of Accumulation Units attributable to your contract by the Accumulation Unit value for that day.

 

The net investment factor is an index used to measure the investment performance of a Subaccount from one Valuation Period to the next. The net investment factor for any Subaccount for any Valuation Period reflects the change in the net asset value per share of the Portfolio held in the Subaccount from one Valuation Period to the next, adjusted for the daily deduction of the administrative expense charges and mortality and expense risk charges from assets in the Subaccount. If any “ex-dividend” date occurs during the Valuation Period, we take into account the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distribution so that the unit value is not impacted. Also, if we need to reserve money for taxes, we take into account a per share charge or credit for any taxes reserved for which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount.

 

The value of an Accumulation Unit may increase or decrease based on the net investment factor. Changes in the net investment factor may not be directly proportional to changes in the net asset value of the Portfolio because of the deduction of Separate Account charges. Though the number of Accumulation Units will not change as a result of investment experience, the value of an Accumulation Unit may increase or decrease from Valuation Period to Valuation Period. See the Statement of Additional Information for more details.

 

26


Table of Contents

BENEFITS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT

 

The following table summarizes information about the benefits available under the contract.

 

Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations

Basic Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued on or after the later of May 15, 2001, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

  

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the Basic Death Benefit will be equal to the greater of: (1) the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and (2) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the death benefit will be equal to the greatest of: (1) the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where: (a) is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and (b) is premium payments received after such contract anniversary. The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary. (2) the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and (3) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death.

   Standard    No additional fee   

•  We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

27


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations

Basic Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued prior to May 15, 2001, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

  

The death benefit equals the sum of (a) and (b) where: (a) the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and (b) is the excess, if any, of the unadjusted death benefit as of the date of the Annuitant’s death over the Contract Value as of the date of the Annuitant’s death, with interest credited on that excess from the date of the Annuitant’s death to the date of distribution.

 

The rate credited may depend on applicable law or regulation. Otherwise, we will set it.

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greater of: (1) the Contract Value as of the date of death; and (2) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greatest of: (1) the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where: (a) is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and (b) is premium payments received after such contract anniversary. The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment for any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary. (2) the Contract Value as of the date of death; and (3) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date of death.

   Standard    No additional fee   

•  We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

•  The unadjusted death benefit varies based on the Annuitant’s age at the time we issued the contract and on the Annuitant’s age at the time of death.

 

28


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit    Adds an extra feature to the Basic Death Benefit. Under the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, the amount we pay as of the date we receive due proof of death of any Annuitant will be the greater of: (a) the Basic Death Benefit and (b) the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit as calculated under the rider.    Optional   

0.35% of the prior

year’s average

Guaranteed

Minimum Death

Benefit

  

•  We will adjust the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

   Permits you to systematically transfer on a monthly or quarterly basis a set dollar amount from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or the Guarantee Account, if available, to any combination of other available Subaccounts (as long as the total number of Subaccounts used does not exceed the maximum number allowed under the contract).    Optional    No additional fee   

•  You may not transfer from one interest rate guarantee period under the Guarantee Account to another

 

•  We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the program at any time and for any reason.

Portfolio Rebalancing Program   

Automatically rebalances your assets on a quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis to return to the percentages specified in your allocation instructions.

 

   Optional    No additional fee   

•  The program does not include allocations to the Guarantee Account

 

•  We reserve the right to exclude specific Subaccounts from Portfolio Rebalancing.

 

•  We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the program at any time and for any reason.

Guarantee Account Interest Sweep Program    Under the program, you could instruct us to transfer interest earned on your assets in the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts to which you are allocating premium payments, in accordance with your allocation instructions in effect on the date of the transfer any time before the Maturity Date.    Optional    No additional fee   

•  The minimum amount in the Guarantee Account required to elect this option is $1,000, but may be reduced at our discretion.

 

•  You can participate in the interest sweep program at the same time you participate in either the Dollar Cost Averaging program or the Portfolio Rebalancing program. If any interest sweep transfer is scheduled for the same day as a Portfolio Rebalancing transfer, the interest sweep transfer will be processed first.

 

•  We may limit the amount you may transfer from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts for any particular allocation. We will not process an interest sweep transfer if that transfer would exceed the amount permitted to be transferred.

 

 

29


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
Systematic Withdrawal Program    Allows you to take Systematic Withdrawals of a specified dollar amount (in equal installments of at least $100) on a monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual basis.    Optional    No additional fee   

•  To participate in the program, your Contract Value initially must be at least $10,000

 

•  Your Systematic Withdrawals in a contract year may not exceed the amount which is not subject to a surrender charge.

 

•  A Systematic Withdrawal program will terminate automatically when a Systematic Withdrawal would cause the remaining Contract Value to be less than $1,000.

 

 

TRANSFERS

 

Transfers Before the Maturity Date

 

All owners may transfer all or a portion of their assets between and among the Subaccounts of the Separate Account and the Guarantee Account (if available) on any Valuation Day prior to the Maturity Date, subject to certain conditions imposed by the contract and as stated below. Owners may not, however, transfer assets in the Guarantee Account from one interest rate guarantee period to another interest rate guarantee period.

 

We process transfers among the Subaccounts and between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account as of the end of the Valuation Period that we receive the transfer request in good order at our Home Office. There may be limitations placed on multiple transfer requests made at different times during the same Valuation Period involving the same Subaccounts or the Guarantee Account. We may postpone transfers to, from, or among the Subaccounts and/or the Guarantee Account under certain circumstances. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus.

 

Transfers from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts

 

We may limit and/or restrict transfers from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or in all markets. For any allocation from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts, the limited amount will not be less than any accrued interest on that allocation plus 25% of the original amount of that allocation. Unless you are participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program (see the “Dollar Cost Averaging Program” provision), you may make such transfers only during the 30 day period beginning with the end of the preceding interest rate guarantee period applicable to that particular allocation. We may also limit the amount that you may transfer to the Subaccount.

 

Transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account

 

We may restrict certain transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or in all markets. In addition, we reserve the right to prohibit or limit transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account during the six month period following the transfer of any amount from the Guarantee Account to any Subaccount. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the Guarantee Account available under your contract.

 

Transfers Among the Subaccounts

 

All owners may submit 12 Subaccount transfers each calendar year by voice response, Internet, telephone, facsimile, U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service. Once such 12 Subaccount transfers have been executed, a letter will be sent notifying owners that they may submit additional transfers only in writing by U.S. Mail or by overnight delivery service, and transfer requests sent by the Internet, same day mail, courier service, telephone or facsimile will not be accepted under any circumstances. Once we receive your mailed transfer request at our Home Office, such transfer cannot be cancelled. We also will not cancel transfer requests that have not yet been received, i.e., you may not call to cancel a transfer request sent by U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service. If you wish to change a transfer request sent by U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service, such change must also be sent in writing by U.S. Mail or by overnight delivery service. We will process that transfer request as of the Valuation Day the new transfer request is received at our Home Office.

 

30


Table of Contents

Currently, we do not charge for transfers. However, we reserve the right to assess a charge of up to $10 per transfer. The minimum transfer amount is $100 or the entire balance in the Subaccount or interest rate guarantee period if the transfer will leave a balance of less than $100.

 

We also reserve the right to not honor your transfer request if your transfer is a result of more than one trade involving the same Subaccount within a 30 day period. We will generally invoke this right when either the Portfolio(s) or we see a pattern of frequent transfers between the same Portfolios within a short period of time (i.e., transfers among the same Subaccounts occur within five to 15 days of each other).

 

In addition, we may not honor transfers made by third parties. See the “Transfer by Third Parties” provision of this prospectus.

 

If a transfer request is not processed, a letter will be sent notifying you that your transfer request was not honored. If we do not honor a transfer request, we will not count that request as a transfer for purposes of the 12 transfers allowed each calendar year as described in the previous paragraphs.

 

When thinking about a transfer of assets, you should consider the inherent risks involved. Frequent transfers based on short-term expectations may increase the risk that you will make a transfer at an inopportune time. Also, because certain restrictions on transfers are applied at the discretion of the Portfolios in which the Subaccount invests, it is possible that owners will be treated differently and there could be inequitable treatment among owners if a Portfolio does not apply equal treatment to all shareholders. See the “Special Note on Frequent Transfers” provision of this prospectus.

 

These restrictions will apply to all owners and their designated third party(ies), unless such transfer is being made pursuant to:

 

  (1)   a Dollar Cost Averaging program;

 

  (2)   a Portfolio Rebalancing program;

 

  (3)   the terms of an approved Fund substitution or Fund liquidation; or

 

  (4)   a Portfolio’s refusal to allow the purchase of shares, either on behalf of an individual owner or on the entire Separate Account, in which case, the Portfolio’s refusal to allow the purchase of shares will not be considered a transfer for calculation of the 12 transfers allowed per calendar year by voice response, Internet, telephone, facsimile, U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service.

 

Sometimes, we will not honor transfer requests. We will not honor a transfer request if:

 

  (1)   any Subaccount that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or to redeem shares of the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests; or

 

  (2)   the transfer would adversely affect Unit Values.

 

The affected Portfolio(s) determine whether items (1) or (2) above apply.

 

We will treat all owners equally with respect to transfer requests.

 

Telephone/Internet Transactions

 

All owners may make their first 12 transfers in any calendar year among the Subaccounts or between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account by calling or electronically contacting us. Transactions that can be conducted over the telephone and Internet include, but are not necessarily limited to:

 

  (1)   the first 12 transfers of assets among the Subaccounts or between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account in any calendar year (this includes any changes in premium payment allocations when such changes include a transfer of assets);

 

  (2)   Dollar Cost Averaging; and

 

  (3)   Portfolio Rebalancing.

 

We will employ reasonable procedures to confirm that instructions we receive are genuine. Such procedures may include, but are not limited to:

 

  (1)   requiring you or a third party you authorized to provide some form of personal identification before we act on the telephone and/or Internet instructions;

 

  (2)   confirming the telephone/Internet transaction in writing to you or a third party you authorized; and/or

 

  (3)   tape recording telephone instructions or retaining a record of your electronic request.

 

We reserve the right to limit or prohibit telephone and Internet transactions.

 

We will delay making a payment or processing a transfer request if:

 

  (1)   the disposal or valuation of the Separate Account’s assets is not reasonably practicable because the New York Stock Exchange is closed;

 

  (2)   on nationally recognized holidays, trading is restricted by the New York Stock Exchange;

 

  (3)   an emergency exists making the disposal or valuation of securities held in the Separate Account impracticable; or

 

  (4)   the SEC by order permits postponement to protect our owners.

 

31


Table of Contents

Rules and regulations of the SEC will govern as to when the conditions described in (3) and (4) above exist. If we are closed on days when the New York Stock Exchange is open, Contract Value may be affected since owners will not have access to their account.

 

Confirmation of Transactions

 

We will not be liable for following instructions that we reasonably determine to be genuine. We will send you a confirmation of any transfer we process. Systematic transactions, such as those related to portfolio rebalancing or dollar cost averaging, generally will be reported in quarterly statements. You are responsible for verifying transfer confirmations and notifying us of any errors within 30 days of receiving the confirmation statement or, for systematic transactions not reported on a trade confirmation, the quarterly statement.

 

Special Note on Reliability

 

Please note that the Internet or our telephone system may not always be available. Any computer or telephone system, whether it is ours, yours, your service provider’s, or your registered representative’s, can experience unscheduled outages or slowdowns for a variety of reasons. These outages or slowdowns may delay or prevent our processing your request. Although we have taken precautions to help our systems handle heavy use, we cannot promise complete reliability under all circumstances. If you are experiencing problems, you can make your transaction request by writing our Home Office.

 

Transfers by Third Parties

 

As a general rule and as a convenience to you, we allow you to give third parties the right to conduct transfers on your behalf. However, when the same third party possesses this ability on behalf of many owners, the result can be simultaneous transfers involving large amounts of assets. Such transfers can disrupt the orderly management of the Portfolios underlying the contract, can result in higher costs to owners, and are generally not compatible with the long-range goals of owners. We believe that such simultaneous transfers effected by such third parties are not in the best interests of all beneficial shareholders of the Portfolios underlying the contracts, and the management of the Portfolios share this position.

 

We have instituted procedures to assure that the transfer requests that we receive have, in fact, been made by the owners in whose names they are submitted.

 

Consequently, we may refuse transfers made by third parties on behalf of an owner in a number of circumstances, which include but are not limited to:

 

  (1)   transfers made on behalf of many owners by one third party (or several third parties who belong to the same firm) where the transfer involves the same Subaccounts and large amounts of assets;

 

  (2)   when we have not received adequate authorization from the owner allowing a third party to make transfers on his or her behalf; and

 

  (3)   when we believe, under all facts and circumstances received, that the owner or his or her authorized agent is not making the transfer.

 

We require documentation to provide sufficient proof that the third party making the trade is in fact duly authorized by the owner. This information includes, but is not limited to:

 

  (1)   documentation signed by the owner or a court authorizing a third party to act on the owner’s behalf;

 

  (2)   passwords and encrypted information;

 

  (3)   additional owner verification when appropriate; and

 

  (4)   recorded conversations.

 

We will not be held liable for refusing a transfer made by a third party when we have a reasonable basis for believing such third party is not authorized to make a transfer on the owner’s behalf or we have a reasonable basis for believing the third party is acting in a fraudulent manner.

 

Special Note on Frequent Transfers

 

The Separate Account does not accommodate frequent transfers of Contract Value among Subaccounts. When owners or someone on their behalf submit requests to transfer all or a portion of their assets between Subaccounts, the requests result in the purchase and redemption of shares of the Portfolios in which the Subaccounts invest. Frequent Subaccount transfers, therefore, cause corresponding frequent purchases and redemptions of shares of the Portfolios.

 

Frequent purchases and redemptions of shares of the Portfolios can dilute the value of a Portfolio’s shares, disrupt the management of the Portfolio’s investment portfolio, and increase brokerage and administrative costs. Accordingly, when an owner or someone on their behalf engages in frequent Subaccount transfers, other owners and persons with rights under the contracts (such as Annuitants and beneficiaries) may be harmed.

 

The Separate Account discourages frequent transfers, purchases and redemptions. To discourage frequent Subaccount transfers, we adopted the policy described in the “Transfers Among the Subaccounts” section. This policy requires owners who request more than 12 Subaccount transfers in a calendar year to submit such requests in writing by U.S. Mail or by overnight delivery

 

32


Table of Contents

service (the “U.S. Mail requirement”). The U.S. Mail requirement creates a delay of at least one day between the time transfer decisions are made and the time such transfers are processed. This delay is intended to discourage frequent Subaccount transfers by limiting the effectiveness of abusive “market timing” strategies (in particular, “time-zone” arbitrage) that rely on “same-day” processing of transfer requests.

 

In addition, we will not honor transfer requests if any Subaccount that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or redeem shares of the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests or if the transfer would adversely affect Accumulation Unit values. Whether these restrictions apply is determined by the affected Portfolio(s), and although we apply the restrictions uniformly when we receive information from the Portfolio(s), we cannot guarantee that the Portfolio(s) will apply their policies and procedures in a uniform basis.

 

There can be no assurance that the U.S. Mail requirement will be effective in limiting frequent Subaccount transfers or that we can prevent all frequent Subaccount transfer activity that may adversely affect owners, other persons with material rights under the contract, or Portfolio shareholders generally. For instance, imposing the U.S. Mail requirement after 12 Subaccount transfers may not be restrictive enough to deter an owner seeking to engage in abusing market timing strategies.

 

We may revise our frequent Subaccount transfer policy and related procedures, at our sole discretion, at any time and without prior notice, as we deem necessary or appropriate to better detect and deter frequent transfer activity that may adversely affect owners, other persons with material rights under the Policies, or Portfolio shareholders generally, to comply with state or federal regulatory requirements, or to impose additional or alternative restrictions on owners engaging in frequent Subaccount transfers. For example, we may invoke our right to refuse transfers if the transfer involves the same Subaccount within a 30 day period and/or we may change our procedures to monitor for a different number of transfers within a specified time period or to impose a minimum time period between each transfer.

 

There are inherent risks that changing our policies and procedures in the future may not be effective in limiting frequent Subaccount transfers. We will not implement any policy and procedure at the contract level that discriminates among owners, however, we may be compelled to adopt policies and procedures adopted by the Portfolios on behalf of the Portfolios and we will do so unless we cannot service such policies and procedures or we believe such policies and procedures contradict state or federal regulations or such policies and procedures contradict with the terms of your contract.

 

As stated in the previous paragraph, each of the Portfolios in which the Subaccounts invest may have its own policies and procedures with respect to frequent purchases and redemption of Portfolio shares. The prospectuses for the Portfolios describe any such policies and procedures. For example, a Portfolio may assess redemption fees (which we reserve the right to collect) on shares held for a relatively short period of time. The frequent trading policies and procedures of a Portfolio may be different, and more or less restrictive, than the frequent trading policies and procedures of other Portfolios and the policies and procedures we have adopted to discourage frequent Subaccount transfers. Owners should be aware that we may not have the operational capability to monitor owners’ Subaccount transfer requests and apply the frequent trading policies and procedures of the respective Portfolios that would be affected by the transfers. Accordingly, owners and other persons who have material rights under the contracts should assume that the sole protection they may have against potential harm from frequent Subaccount transfers is the protection, if any, provided by the policies and procedures we have adopted to discourage frequent Subaccount transfers.

 

Under SEC rules, we are required to enter into a written agreement with each Portfolio or its principal underwriter that will obligate us to provide promptly, upon request by the Portfolio, certain information to the Portfolio about the trading activity of individual contract owners. Under these circumstances, we may be required to provide your tax identification number or social security number to the Fund and/or its manager. We must then execute any instructions from the Portfolio to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers by a specific contract owner of Accumulation Units or Annuity Units of the Subaccount that invests in that Portfolio, where such contract owner has been identified by the Portfolio as having engaged in transactions (indirectly through such Subaccount) that violate policies established for that Portfolio for the purpose of eliminating or reducing any dilution of the value of the outstanding shares of the Portfolio. We will inform any contract owners whose future purchases and transfers of a Subaccount’s units have been restricted or prohibited by a Portfolio.

 

Owners and other persons with material rights under the contracts also should be aware that the purchase and redemption orders received by the Portfolios generally are “omnibus” orders from intermediaries such as broker-dealers, retirement plans or separate accounts funding variable insurance contracts. These omnibus orders reflect the aggregation and netting of multiple orders from individual retirement plan participants and/or individual owners of variable insurance contracts. The omnibus nature of these orders may limit the Portfolios’ ability to apply their respective frequent trading policies and procedures. We

 

33


Table of Contents

cannot guarantee that the Portfolios will not be harmed by transfer activity relating to the retirement plans and/or other insurance companies that may invest in the Portfolios. In addition, if a Portfolio believes an omnibus order we submit may reflect one or more Subaccount transfer requests from owners engaged in frequent transfer activity, the Portfolio may reject a portion of or the entire omnibus order. If a Portfolio rejects part of an omnibus order it believes is attributable to transfers that exceed its market timing policies and procedures, it will return the amount to us and we will credit the amount to the contract owner as of the Valuation Day of our receipt of that amount. You may realize a loss if the unit value on the Valuation Day we credit the amount back to your account has increased since the original date of your transfer.

 

We apply our policies and procedures without exception, waiver, or special arrangement.

 

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

 

The Dollar Cost Averaging program permits you to systematically transfer on a monthly or quarterly basis a set dollar amount from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or the Guarantee Account (if available) to any combination of other available Subaccounts (as long as the total number of Subaccounts used does not exceed the maximum number allowed under the contract). The Dollar Cost Averaging method of investment is designed to reduce the risk of making purchases only when the price of units is high, but you should carefully consider your financial ability to continue the program over a long enough period of time to purchase Accumulation Units when their value is low as well as when it is high. Dollar Cost Averaging does not assure a profit or protect against a loss.

 

You may participate in the Dollar Cost Averaging program by:

 

  (1)   electing it on your application; or

 

  (2)   contacting an authorized sales representative; or

 

  (3)   contacting us at (800) 352-9910.

 

To use the program, you must transfer at least $100 from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust. — Government Money Market Fund and/or interest rate guarantee period with each transfer.

 

The Dollar Cost Averaging program will begin 30 days after we receive all required forms with your instructions and any necessary premium payment unless we allow an earlier date. We will discontinue your participation in the Dollar Cost Averaging program:

 

    on the business day we receive your request to discontinue the program in writing or by telephone (assuming we have your telephone authorization form on file); or

 

    when the assets of the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or interest rate guarantee period from which transfers are being made are depleted.

 

If you Dollar Cost Average from the Guarantee Account, we reserve the right to determine the amount of each automatic transfer. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the availability of the Guarantee Account under your contract. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining portion of an allocation used for Dollar Cost Averaging to a new guarantee period upon termination of the Dollar Cost Averaging program for that allocation. You may not transfer from one interest rate guarantee period to another interest rate guarantee period.

 

We also reserve the right to credit a higher rate of interest on premium payments allocated to the Guarantee Account that participate in the Dollar Cost Averaging program. We refer to this higher rate of interest as Enhanced Dollar Cost Averaging. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the availability of the Dollar Cost Averaging program or the Enhanced Dollar Cost Averaging program under your contract. If you terminate the Dollar Cost Averaging program prior to the depletion of assets from the Guarantee Account, we have the right to credit the remaining assets in the Guarantee Account the current interest rate being credited to all other Guarantee Account assets not participating in the Enhanced Dollar Cost Averaging program as of that Valuation Day.

 

There is no additional charge for Dollar Cost Averaging. A transfer under this program is not a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or calculating the maximum number of transfers we may allow in a calendar year via the Internet, telephone or facsimile.

 

We may, from time to time, offer various Dollar Cost Averaging programs. We reserve the right to discontinue new Dollar Cost Averaging programs or to modify such programs at any time and for any reason. We also reserve the right to prohibit simultaneous participation in the Dollar Cost Averaging program and Systematic Withdrawal program.

 

Owners considering participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program should call (800) 352-9910 to verify the availability of Dollar Cost Averaging.

 

34


Table of Contents

Portfolio Rebalancing Program

 

Once your premium payment has been allocated among the Subaccounts, the performance of each Subaccount may cause your allocation to shift. You may instruct us to automatically rebalance on a quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis your assets among the Subaccounts to return to the percentages specified in your allocation instructions. Your percentage allocations must be in whole percentages. The program does not include allocations to the Guarantee Account. You may elect to participate in the Portfolio Rebalancing program at any time by submitting the completed Portfolio Rebalancing form to our Home Office.

 

Subsequent changes to your percentage allocations may be made at any time by written or telephone instructions to the Home Office. Once elected, Portfolio Rebalancing remains in effect from the date we receive your written request until you instruct us to discontinue Portfolio Rebalancing. There is no additional charge for using Portfolio Rebalancing, and we do not consider a Portfolio Rebalancing transfer a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or calculating the maximum number of transfers permitted in a calendar year via the Internet, telephone or facsimile. We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the Portfolio Rebalancing program at any time and for any reason. We also reserve the right to exclude specific Subaccounts from Portfolio Rebalancing. Portfolio Rebalancing does not guarantee a profit or protect against a loss.

 

Guarantee Account Interest Sweep Program

 

You may instruct us to transfer interest earned on your assets in the Guarantee Account (if available) to the Subaccounts to which you are allocating premium payments, in accordance with your allocation instructions in effect on the date of the transfer any time before the Maturity Date. You must specify the frequency of the transfers (either monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually).

 

The minimum amount in the Guarantee Account required to elect this option is $1,000, but may be reduced at our discretion. The transfers under this program will take place on the last calendar day of each period.

 

You may participate in the interest sweep program at the same time you participate in either the Dollar Cost Averaging program or the Portfolio Rebalancing program. If any interest sweep transfer is scheduled for the same day as a Portfolio Rebalancing transfer, we will process the interest sweep transfer first.

 

We limit the amount you may transfer from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts for any particular allocation. See the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus. We will not process an interest sweep transfer if that transfer would exceed the amount permitted to be transferred.

 

You may cancel your participation in the interest sweep program at any time by writing or calling our Home Office at the address or telephone number listed on page 1 of this prospectus. We will automatically cancel your participation in the program if your assets in the Guarantee Account are less than $1,000 or such lower amount as we may determine. There is no additional charge for the interest sweep program. We do not consider interest sweep transfers a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or for calculating the maximum number of transfers permitted in a calendar year. The interest sweep program does not assure a profit or protect against a loss.

 

SURRENDERS AND PARTIAL SURRENDERS

 

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders

 

We will allow you to surrender your contract or to partially surrender a portion of your Contract Value at any time before the Maturity Date upon your written request, subject to the conditions discussed below.

 

We will not permit a partial surrender that is less than $100 or a partial surrender which would reduce your Contract Value to less than $1,000. If your partial surrender request would reduce your Contract Value to less than $1,000, we will surrender your contract in full. Other limits and restrictions may apply to Qualified Contracts.

 

The amount payable on surrender of the contract is the Surrender Value at the end of the Valuation Period during which we receive the request. The Surrender Value equals:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value (after deduction of any charge for the optional rider(s) and the annual contract charge, if applicable) on the Valuation Day we receive a request for surrender; less

 

  (2)   any applicable surrender charge; less

 

  (3)   any applicable premium tax.

 

We may pay the Surrender Value in a lump sum or under one of the Optional Payment Plans specified in the contract, based on your instructions.

 

If you are taking a partial surrender, you may indicate in writing, electronically, or by calling our Home Office, from which Subaccounts or interest rate guarantee periods we are to take your partial surrender. If you do not so specify, we will deduct the amount of the partial surrender first from the Subaccounts on a pro rata basis in proportion to your assets allocated to the Separate Account. We will deduct any

 

35


Table of Contents

remaining amount from the Guarantee Account. We will take deductions from the Guarantee Account from the amounts (including any interest credited to such amounts) which have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time.

 

A Portfolio may impose a redemption charge. The charge is retained by or paid to the Portfolio. The charge is not retained by or paid to us. The redemption charge may affect the number and/or value of Accumulation Units withdrawn from the Subaccount that invests in that Portfolio and may affect Contract Value. When taking a partial surrender, any applicable surrender charges and/or applicable premium tax will be taken from the amount surrendered, unless otherwise requested.

 

We will delay making a payment if:

 

  (1)   the disposal or valuation of the Separate Account’s assets is not reasonably practicable because the New York Stock Exchange is closed;

 

  (2)   on nationally recognized holidays, trading is restricted by the New York Stock Exchange;

 

  (3)   an emergency exists making the disposal or valuation of securities held in the Separate Account impracticable; or

 

  (4)   the SEC by order permits postponement of payment to protect our owners.

 

Rules and regulations of the SEC will govern as to when the conditions described in (3) and (4) above exist. If we are closed on days when the New York Stock Exchange is open, Contract Value may be affected since owners will not have access to their account.

 

For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, partial surrenders from the Subaccounts may further reduce or restrict the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account (see the “Guarantee Account” provision of this prospectus).

 

Please remember that partial surrenders will reduce your death benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and applicable premium tax) reduces your Contract Value. See the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus.

 

Partial surrenders and surrenders may also be subject to income tax and, if taken prior to age 5912, an additional 10% penalty tax. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus.

 

Restrictions on Distributions from Certain Contracts

 

Under Code Section 403(b) tax sheltered annuities, distributions of (1) salary reduction contributions made in years beginning after December 31, 1988; (2) earnings on those contributions; and (3) earnings on amounts held as of the last year beginning before January 1, 1989, are not allowed prior to age 5912, severance from employment, death or disability. Salary reduction contributions (and, effective for plan years beginning in January 1, 2024, qualified nonelective contributions, qualified matching contributions, and earnings attributable to such amounts) may also be distributed upon hardship, but would generally be subject to penalties. For contracts issued after 2008, amounts attributable to nonelective contributions may be subject to distribution restrictions specified in the employer’s Section 403(b) plan.

 

If your contract was issued pursuant to a 403(b) plan, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance. We will defer such payments you request until all information required under the tax law has been received. By requesting a surrender or transfer, you consent to the sharing of confidential information about you, the contract, and transactions under the contract and any other 403(b) contracts or accounts you have under the 403(b) plan among us, your employer or plan sponsor, any plan administrator or recordkeeper, and other product providers.

 

Section 830.105 of the Texas Government Code permits participants in the Texas Optional Retirement Program to surrender their interest in a variable annuity contract issued under the Texas Optional Retirement Program only upon:

 

  (1)   termination of employment in the Texas public institutions of higher education;

 

  (2)   retirement;

 

  (3)   death; or

 

  (4)   the participant’s attainment of age 7012.

 

If your contract is issued to a Texas Optional Retirement Program, you must furnish us proof that one of these four events has occurred before we distribute any amounts from your contract.

 

36


Table of Contents

Systematic Withdrawal Program

 

The Systematic Withdrawal program allows you to take Systematic Withdrawals of a specified amount (in equal installments of at least $100) on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis. Your payments can begin at any time after 30 days from the date your contract is issued (unless we allow an earlier date). To participate in the program, your Contract Value initially must be at least $10,000 and you must submit a completed Systematic Withdrawal form to our Home Office. You can obtain the form from our Home Office.

 

Your Systematic Withdrawals in a contract year may not exceed the amount which is not subject to a surrender charge. See the “Surrender Charge” provision of this prospectus. We will deduct the Systematic Withdrawal amounts first from any gain in the contract and then from premiums paid. You may provide specific instructions as to which Subaccounts and/or interest rate guarantee periods from which we are to take Systematic Withdrawals. If you have not provided specific instructions, or if your specific instructions cannot be carried out, we will process the withdrawals by cancelling Accumulation Units on a pro-rata basis from all of the Subaccounts in which you have an interest. To the extent that your assets in the Separate Account are not sufficient to accomplish this withdrawal, we will take the remaining amount of the withdrawal from any assets you have in the Guarantee Account. We will take deductions from the Guarantee Account from the amounts (including any interest credited to such amounts) that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time.

 

After your Systematic Withdrawals begin, you may change the frequency and/or amount of your payments, subject to the following:

 

    you may request only one such change in a calendar quarter; and

 

    if you did not elect the maximum amount you could withdraw under this program at the time you elected the current series of Systematic Withdrawals, then you may increase the remaining payments up to the maximum amount.

 

A Systematic Withdrawal program will terminate automatically when a Systematic Withdrawal would cause the remaining Contract Value to be less than $1,000. If a Systematic Withdrawal would cause the Contract Value to be less than $1,000, then we will not process that Systematic Withdrawal transaction. If any of your Systematic Withdrawals would be or become less than $100, we reserve the right to reduce the frequency of payments to an interval that would result in each payment being at least $100. You may discontinue Systematic Withdrawals at any time by notifying us in writing at our Home Office or by telephone. You may request that we pay any remaining payments in a lump sum. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus.

 

Each Systematic Withdrawal is subject to Federal income taxes on any portion considered gain for tax purposes. In addition, you may be assessed a 10% IRS penalty tax on Systematic Withdrawals if you are under age 5912 at the time of the withdrawal.

 

Both partial surrenders at your specific request and partial surrenders under a Systematic Withdrawal program will count toward the limit of the free amount that you may surrender in any contract year under the free withdrawal privilege. See the “Surrender Charge” provision of this prospectus. Partial surrenders under a Systematic Withdrawal program may also reduce your death benefit. See the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus. Your Systematic Withdrawal amount could be affected if you take an additional partial surrender.

 

There is no charge for participation in the Systematic Withdrawal program, however, we reserve the right to prohibit participation in Systematic Withdrawal and Dollar Cost Averaging programs at the same time. We also reserve the right to discontinue and/or modify the Systematic Withdrawal program upon 30 days written notice to owners.

 

DEATH OF OWNER AND/OR ANNUITANT

 

Death Benefit at Death of Any Annuitant Before the Maturity Date

 

If the Annuitant dies before the Maturity Date, regardless of whether the Annuitant is also an owner or joint owner of the contract, the amount of proceeds available for the designated beneficiary (as defined below) is the death benefit. This death benefit may be referred to as the “Annual Estate ProtectorSM” in our marketing materials. Upon receipt of due proof of the Annuitant’s death (generally, due proof is a certified copy of the death certificate or a certified copy of the decree of a court of competent jurisdiction as to the finding of death), a death benefit will be paid in accordance with your instructions, subject to distribution rules and termination of contract provisions discussed in the contract and elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

The death benefit choices we offer are:

 

  (1)   the Basic Death Benefit; and

 

  (2)   the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

 

37


Table of Contents

We automatically provide the Basic Death Benefit to you. The Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is available to you for an additional charge.

 

The death benefit varies based on:

 

  (1)   the Annuitant’s age on the date the contract is issued;

 

  (2)   the Annuitant’s age on the date of his or her death;

 

  (3)   the number of contract years that elapse from the date the contract is issued until the date of the Annuitant’s death; and

 

  (4)   whether any premium taxes are due at the time the death benefit is paid.

 

Basic Death Benefit

 

For contracts issued on or after the later of May 15, 2001, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, the Basic Death Benefit will be as follows:

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the Basic Death Benefit will be equal to the greater of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (2)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the death benefit will be equal to the greatest of:

 

  (1)   the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and

 

  (b)   is premium payments received after such contract anniversary.

 

The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary.

 

  (2)   the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (3)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death.

 

We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

Please refer to Appendix B in this prospectus for an example of the Basic Death Benefit calculation.

 

For contracts issued prior to May 15, 2001, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, the Basic Death Benefit will be as follows:

 

The death benefit equals the sum of (a) and (b) where:

 

  (a)   the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (b)   is the excess, if any, of the unadjusted death benefit as of the date of the Annuitant’s death over the Contract Value as of the date of the Annuitant’s death, with interest credited on that excess from the date of the Annuitant’s death to the date of distribution. The rate credited may depend on applicable law or regulation. Otherwise, we will set it.

 

The unadjusted death benefit varies based on the Annuitant’s age at the time we issued the contract and on the Annuitant’s age at the time of death.

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greater of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value as of the date of death; and

 

  (2)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

38


Table of Contents

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greatest of:

 

  (1)   the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and

 

  (b)   is premium payments received after such contract anniversary.

 

The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment for any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary.

 

  (2)   the Contract Value as of the date of death; and

 

  (3)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date of death.

 

We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders in (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

Please refer to Appendix B in this prospectus for an example of the Basic Death Benefit calculation.

 

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

 

The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is available to contracts with Annuitants age 75 or younger at the time the contract is issued. If the owner elects the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit at the time of application, upon the death of the Annuitant, we will pay to the designated beneficiary, the greater of:

 

  (1)   the Basic Death Benefit; and

 

  (2)   the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

 

The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit may also be referenced in our marketing materials as the “Six Percent EstateProtectorSM.”

 

If the Annuitant dies on the first Valuation Day, the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit will be equal to the premium payments received.

 

If the Annuitant dies after the first Valuation Day, then at the end of each Valuation Period until the contract anniversary on which the Annuitant attains age 80, the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit equals the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the total of all premium payments we receive, multiplied by two, adjusted for any partial surrenders taken prior to or during that Valuation Period; and

 

  (b)   is the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit of the preceding Valuation Period, with assets in the Subaccounts increased by an effective annual rate of 6% (an “increase factor”); this does not include assets allocated to the Subaccount investing in the available Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund, plus any additional premium payments we received during the current Valuation Period, adjusted for any partial surrenders taken during the current Valuation period.

 

We will adjust the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit for partial surrenders proportionally by the same percentage that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

For assets in the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund, the increase factor is equal to the lesser of:

 

  (1)   the net investment factor of the Subaccount for Valuation Period, minus one; and

 

  (2)   a factor for the Valuation Period equivalent to an effective annual rate of 6%.

 

For assets allocated to the Guarantee Account, the increase factor is equal to the lesser of:

 

  (1)   the factor for the Valuation Period equivalent to the credited rate(s) applicable to such allocations; and

 

  (2)   a factor for the Valuation Period equivalent to an effective annual rate of 6%.

 

After the Annuitant attains age 80, the increase factor will be zero (0). The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is effective on the Contract Date (unless another effective date is shown on the contract data page) and will remain in effect while the contract is in force and before income payments begin, or until the contract anniversary following the date we receive your written request to terminate the benefit. If we receive your request to terminate the benefit within 30 days following any contract anniversary, we will terminate the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit as of that contract anniversary.

 

We charge you for the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We deduct this charge against the Contract Value at each contract

 

39


Table of Contents

anniversary after the first and at the time you fully surrender the contract. At full surrender, we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge. Currently, this charge is equal to an annual rate of 0.25% of your prior contract year’s average Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We guarantee that this charge will not exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your prior contract year’s average Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. The rate charged to your contract will be fixed at the time your contract is issued. See the “Charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit” provision of this prospectus.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Please refer to Appendix B for an example of the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit calculation.

 

When We Calculate the Death Benefit

 

We will calculate the Basic Death Benefit and the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit on the date we receive due proof of death at our Home Office. Until we receive complete written instructions satisfactory to us from the beneficiary, the assets will remain allocated to the Separate Account and/or the Guarantee Account, according to your last instructions. This means that the calculated death benefit will fluctuate with the performance of the Subaccounts in which you are invested.

 

Death of an Owner or Joint Owner Before the Maturity Date

 

In certain circumstances, federal tax law requires that distributions be made under this contract upon the first death of:

 

    an owner or joint owner (or the Annuitant if any owner is a non-natural entity); or

 

    the Annuitant.

 

The discussion below describes the methods available for distributing the value of the contract upon death.

 

At the death of any owner (or Annuitant, if the owner is a non-natural entity), the person or entity first listed below who is alive or in existence on the date of that death will become the designated beneficiary:

 

  (1)   owner or joint owner;

 

  (2)   primary beneficiary;

 

  (3)   contingent beneficiary; or

 

  (4)   owner’s estate.

 

We then will treat the designated beneficiary as the sole owner of the contract. If there is more than one designated beneficiary, we will treat each one separately in applying the tax law’s rules described below.

 

Distribution Rules: Distributions required by federal tax law differ depending on whether the designated beneficiary is the spouse of the deceased owner (or the spouse of the deceased Annuitant, if the contract is owned by a non-natural entity).

 

    Spouses — If the designated beneficiary is the spouse of the deceased, the spouse may continue the contract as the new owner. If the deceased was the Annuitant, and there was no surviving contingent Annuitant, the spouse will automatically become the new Annuitant. At the death of the spouse, this provision may not be used again, even if the spouse remarries. In such case, the entire interest in the contract will be paid within 5 years of such spouse’s death to the beneficiary named by the spouse. If no beneficiary is named, such payment will be made to the spouse’s estate. The amount payable will be equal to the death benefit on the date we receive due proof of the Annuitant’s death. Any increase in the Contract Value will be allocated to the Subaccounts and/or the Guarantee Account using the premium allocation in effect at that time. Any death benefit payable subsequently (at the death of the new Annuitant) will be calculated as if the spouse had purchased a contract for the new Contract Value on the date we received due proof of death. Any death benefit will be based on the new Annuitant’s age as of the date we receive due proof of death of the original owner, rather than the age of the previously deceased Annuitant. All other provisions will continue as if the spouse had purchased the contract on the original Contract Date.

 

    Non-Spouses — If the designated beneficiary is not the spouse of the deceased person, this contract cannot be continued in force indefinitely. Instead, upon the death of any owner (or Annuitant, if the owner is a non-natural entity), payments must be made to (or for the benefit of) the designated beneficiary under one of the following payment choices:

 

  (1)   receive the Surrender Value in one lump sum payment upon receipt of due proof of death (see the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus);

 

  (2)   receive the Surrender Value at any time during the five year period following the date of death. At the end of the five year period, we will pay in a lump sum payment any Surrender Value still remaining;

 

40


Table of Contents
  (3)   apply the Surrender Value to provide a monthly income benefit under Optional Payment Plan 1 or 2. The first monthly income benefit payment must be made no later than one year after the date of death. Also, the monthly income benefit payment period must be either the lifetime of the designated beneficiary or a period not exceeding the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy; or.

 

  (4)   elect a “stretch” payment choice, as described in the “Stretch Payment Choices” provision below.

 

If your contract is a Qualified Contract, not all elections will satisfy required minimum distribution rules. Note that effective for owners who die on or after January 1, 2020, subject to certain exceptions, most non-spouse designated beneficiaries must now complete death benefit distributions within ten years of the owner’s death in order to satisfy required minimum distribution rules. Consult a tax adviser before making an election.

 

Stretch Payment Choices

 

The following payment choice is available to designated beneficiaries of Non-Qualified Contracts:

 

A designated beneficiary of a Non-Qualified Contract may apply the death proceeds of the contract to provide for an annual payment equal to the Minimum Annual Income, described below, for the life expectancy of the designated beneficiary. The first income payment must be made no later than 350 days after the original owner’s date of death. The income payment period must be a period not exceeding the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy. Payments will continue annually on the distribution date until the death of the designated beneficiary or the Contract Value is reduced to $0. Upon death of the designated beneficiary, the person or entity named by the designated beneficiary or, if no one is named, the designated beneficiary’s estate may receive the remaining Contract Value. The recipient may take the Contract Value as a lump sum or continue to receive the annual payment on the distribution date equal to the Minimum Annual Income, or until the Contract Value is reduced to $0.

 

The Minimum Annual Income is the amount withdrawn each year to satisfy Section 72(s)(2)(B) of the Code. The Minimum Annual Income will be re-determined each year for the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy using the Single Life Table in Section 1.401(a)(9)-9(b) of the Income Tax Regulations, as amended. After death, the Minimum Annual Income is calculated using the designated beneficiary’s remaining life expectancy. We may offer alternative calculations of Minimum Annual Income based on amortization or annuitization calculations methods described in guidance published by the Internal Revenue Service.

 

Special rules for this payment choice only:

 

    This payment choice cannot be selected if the Minimum Annual Income would be less than $100.

 

    The designated beneficiary must elect a distribution date on which payments will be made. The first distribution date must be no later than 350 days after the owner’s date of death.

 

    Amounts paid to satisfy the Minimum Annual Income will not be subject to surrender charges. Surrender charges will apply to amounts withdrawn above the Minimum Annual Income.

 

    Optional death benefit riders are not available with this payment choice.

 

    Additional premium payments may not be added with this payment choice.

 

Under this payment choice, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Contract Value.

 

The following payment choice is available to designated beneficiaries of Qualified Contracts or any beneficiary receiving death proceeds from any other individual retirement plan:

 

An inherited owner may apply death proceeds to provide for an annual payment equal to the Minimum Annual Income, described below. For purposes of this provision, an inherited owner is any designated beneficiary receiving death proceeds from a Qualified Contract or any beneficiary receiving death proceeds from any other individual retirement plan. A surviving spouse may elect to be treated as an inherited owner in lieu of exercising spousal continuation. The inherited owner will be named the Annuitant at election of the payment choice.

 

Payments under this payment choice will continue annually on the distribution date selected by the inherited owner, subject to the special rules stated below, until the death of the inherited owner or the Contract Value is reduced to $0. Upon death of the inherited owner, the person or entity named by the inherited owner or, if no one is named, the inherited owner’s estate may receive the remaining Contract Value. The recipient may take the Contract Value as a lump sum or continue to receive the annual payment on the distribution date equal to the Minimum Annual Income until the Contract Value is reduced to $0.

 

The Minimum Annual Income is the amount withdrawn each year to satisfy Section 408(b)(3) of the Code. The Minimum Annual Income will be based on the applicable distribution

 

41


Table of Contents

period for required minimum distributions after death, as provided in Section 1.401(a)(9)-5 A-5 of the Income Tax Regulations.

 

Special rules for this payment choice only:

 

    This payment choice cannot be selected if the Minimum Annual Income would be less than $100.

 

    The inherited owner must elect a distribution date on which payments will be made. If the inherited owner is the surviving spouse of the original IRA owner within the meaning of Section 401(a)(9)(B)(iv) of the Code, then the first distribution date elected must be the later of either: (i) December 15th of the year in which the deceased would have reached their required beginning date (as described under the “Qualified Retirement Plans” provision) or (ii) December 15th of the year following the original IRA owner’s death. If the inherited owner is not the surviving spouse of the original IRA owner, then the first distribution date elected must be within 350 days from the date of death. If the surviving spouse dies before the first distribution date, the first distribution date under this rider will be determined by treating death of the surviving spouse as death of the original IRA owner and the surviving spouse’s designated beneficiary as the inherited owner.

 

    Amounts paid to satisfy the Minimum Annual Income will not be subject to surrender charges. Surrender charges will apply to amounts withdrawn above the Minimum Annual Income.

 

    Optional death benefit riders are not available with this payment choice.

 

    Additional premium payments may not be added with this payment choice

 

This payment choice will not satisfy required minimum distribution rules for designated beneficiaries other than “eligible designated beneficiaries” as defined in Section 401(a)(9)(H) of the Code. Consult a tax adviser before making this payment choice.

 

Under this payment choice, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Contract Value.

 

If no choice is made by the designated beneficiary within 30 days following receipt of due proof of death, we will pay the Surrender Value within 5 years of the date of death. Due proof of death must be provided within 90 days of the date of death. We will not accept any premium payments after the non-spouse’s death. If the designated beneficiary dies before we distributed the entire Surrender Value, we will pay in a lump sum payment of any Surrender Value still remaining to the person named by the designated beneficiary. If no person is so named, we will pay the designated beneficiary’s estate.

 

Under payment choices 1 or 2, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Surrender Value. Under payment choice 3, this contract will terminate when we apply the Surrender Value to provide a monthly income benefit.

 

Spendthrift Provision. An owner may, by providing written notice to our Home Office in a manner acceptable to the Company, choose the method of payment of death proceeds under the contract by selecting any payment choice, including any Optional Payment Plan, that a designated beneficiary may have chosen. A designated beneficiary (other than the surviving spouse) cannot change the payment choice that the owner has selected. The owner may also specify at the time of electing an income payment option that any payments remaining to be made at the owner’s death cannot be commuted or assigned. While living, the owner may revoke any such limitations on the rights of the designated beneficiary by providing written notice of such revocation to our Home Office in a manner acceptable to the Company. If the payment choice selected by the owner does not apply to a designated beneficiary, the limitations imposed by this paragraph shall not apply to such designated beneficiary. For example, a payment choice based on an individual’s life does not apply to the owner’s estate and the estate would be free to make its own payment choice as designated beneficiary after the owner’s death.

 

Amount of the proceeds: The amount of proceeds we will pay will, in part, vary based on the person who dies, as shown below:

 

Person who died   Amount of
Proceeds Paid
Owner or Joint Owner
(who is not the Annuitant)
  Surrender Value
Owner or Joint Owner (who is the Annuitant)   Death Benefit
Annuitant   Death Benefit

 

Upon receipt of due proof of death, the designated beneficiary will instruct us how to treat the proceeds subject to the distribution rules discussed above.

 

Death of an Owner, Joint Owner, or Annuitant On or After the Maturity Date

 

On or after the Maturity Date, if an owner, joint owner, Annuitant or designated beneficiary dies while the contract is in force, payments that are already being made under the contract will be made at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution in effect at the time of death, notwithstanding any other provision in the contract.

 

42


Table of Contents

INCOME PAYMENTS

 

The Maturity Date is the date income payments begin under the contract, provided the Annuitant is still living on that date. The Maturity Date must be a date at least thirteen months from the date the contract is issued. The owner selects the contract’s initial Maturity Date at issue. Thereafter, until income payments begin, the owner may elect to extend the Maturity Date in one-year increments, so long as the new Maturity Date is not a date beyond the latest permitted Maturity Date. The latest Maturity Date we currently permit may not be a date beyond the younger Annuitant’s 90th birthday, unless we consent to a later date. We reserve the right to discontinue to allow the deferral of the Maturity Date at any time and without prior notice. Any consent for a new Maturity Date will be provided on a non-discriminatory basis.

 

An owner may request to change the Maturity Date by sending written notice to our Home Office prior to the Maturity Date then in effect. If you change the Maturity Date, the Maturity Date will mean the new Maturity Date selected, provided such Maturity Date is not a date beyond the latest permitted Maturity Date. If income payments have not commenced upon reaching the latest permitted Maturity Date, we will begin making payments to the named payee. Income payments will be made in the form of a Life Income with a 10 Year Period Certain.

 

A Maturity Date that occurs or is scheduled to occur at an advanced age (e.g., past age 85) may, in certain circumstances, have adverse income tax consequences. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus. Contracts issued to qualified retirement plans provide for income payments to start on the date and under the option specified by the plan.

 

We will pay a monthly income benefit to the owner beginning on the Maturity Date provided the Annuitant is still living. We will pay the monthly income benefit in the form of Life Income with 10 Years Certain plan with variable payments, using the gender (where appropriate) and settlement age of the Annuitant instead of the payee, unless you make another election as described below. Payments made pursuant to one of these plans are not redeemable. As described in your contract, the settlement age may be less than the Annuitant’s age. This means payments may be lower than they would have been without the adjustment. You may also choose to receive Surrender Value of your contract on the date immediately preceding the Maturity Date in a lump sum, in which case we will cancel the contract. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus.

 

Once the contract reaches the Maturity Date, the contract owner will no longer be able to withdraw any Contract Value from the contract.

 

Payments will continue for the life of the Annuitant under the Life Income with 10 Years Certain plan, if he or she lives longer than 10 years. If the Annuitant dies before the end of 10 years, we will discount the remaining payments for the 10 year period at the same rate used to calculate the monthly income payment. If the remaining payments are variable income payments, we will assume the amount of each payment that we discount equals the payment amount on the date we receive due proof of death. We will pay this discounted amount in a lump sum.

 

The contract provides optional forms of annuity payments (“Optional Payment Plans”), each of which is payable on a fixed basis. Optional Payment Plan 1 and Optional Payment Plan 5 also are available on a variable basis.

 

If you elect fixed income payments, the guaranteed amount payable will earn interest at a minimum rate of 3% compounded yearly. We may increase the interest rate which will increase the amount we pay to you or the payee.

 

If you elect variable income payments, the dollar amount of the first variable income payment will depend on the annuity purchase rates described in your contract for the Optional Payment Plan you choose. These rates vary based on the Annuitant’s settlement age and if applicable, gender, upon the settlement age and gender of a second person you designate (if applicable). Under such tables, the longer the life expectancy of the Annuitant or the longer the period for which we guarantee to make payments under the option, the smaller the amount the first variable income payment will be. After your first income payment, the dollar amount of your income payments will vary based on the investment performance of the Subaccount(s) in which you invest and the contract’s assumed interest rate.

 

The assumed interest rate is an assumption we make regarding the investment performance of the Portfolios you select. This rate is simply the total return, after expenses, you need to keep your variable income payments level. We assume an effective annual rate of 3%. This means that if the annualized investment performance, after expenses, of your Subaccounts, measured between the day that the last payment was made and the day on which we are calculating the new payment, is less than 3%, then the dollar amount of your variable income payment will decrease. Conversely, if the annualized investment performance, after expenses, of your Subaccounts, measured between the day that the last payment was made and the day on which we are calculating the new payment, is greater than 3%, then the dollar amount of your income payment will increase.

 

We will make income payments monthly unless you elect to receive payments quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. Under the monthly income benefit and all of the Optional Payment

 

43


Table of Contents

Plans, if any payment made more frequently than annually would be or becomes less than $100, we reserve the right to reduce the frequency of payments to an interval that would result in each payment being at least $100. If the annual payment payable at maturity is less than $20, we will pay the Surrender Value in a lump sum. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus. Upon making such a payment, we will have no future obligation under the contract.

 

The amount of your income payments will depend on four things:

 

    your Surrender Value on the Valuation Day immediately preceding the Maturity Date;

 

    the settlement age on the Maturity Date, and if applicable, the gender of the Annuitant;

 

    the specific payment plan you choose; and

 

    if you elect variable income payments, the investment performance of the Portfolios selected.

 

As provided in your contract, we may adjust the age used to determine income payments, and we may deduct premium taxes from your payments.

 

Optional Payment Plans

 

The following Optional Payment Plans are available under the contract:

 

Optional Payment Plan 1 — Life Income with Period Certain. This option guarantees periodic monthly payments for the lifetime of the payee with a minimum number of years of payments. If the payee lives longer than the minimum period, payments will continue for his or her life. The minimum period can be 10, 15, or 20 years. The payee selects the designated period. If the payee dies during the minimum period, we will discount the amount of the remaining guaranteed payments at the same rate used in calculating income payments. We will pay the discounted amount in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

Optional Payment Plan 2 — Income for a Fixed Period. This option provides for periodic payments to be made for a fixed period not longer than 30 years. Payments can be made annually, semi-annually, quarterly, or monthly. If the payee dies, we will discount the amount of the remaining guaranteed payments to the date of the payee’s death at the same rate used in calculating income payments. We will pay the discounted amount in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

Optional Payment Plan 3 — Income of a Definite Amount. This option provides periodic payments of a definite amount to be paid. Payments can be made annually, semi-annually, quarterly, or monthly. The amount paid each year must be at least $120 for each $1,000 of proceeds. Payments will continue until the proceeds are exhausted. The last payment will equal the amount of any unpaid proceeds. If the payee dies, we will pay the amount of the remaining proceeds with earned interest in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

Optional Payment Plan 4 — Interest Income. This option provides for periodic payments of interest earned from the proceeds left with us. Payments can be made annually, semi-annually, quarterly, or monthly. If the payee dies, we will pay the amount of remaining proceeds and any earned but unpaid interest, in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided. This plan is not available to contracts issued as Qualified Contracts.

 

Optional Payment Plan 5 — Joint Life and Survivor Income. This option provides for us to make monthly payments to two payees for a guaranteed minimum of 10 years. Each payee must be at least 35 years old when payments begin. Payments will continue as long as either payee is living. If both payees die before the end of the minimum period, we will discount the amount of the remaining payments for the 10 year period at the same rate used in calculating income payments. We will pay the discounted amount in a lump sum to the survivor’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

If the payee is not a natural person, our consent must be obtained before selecting an Optional Payment Plan. Fixed income payments, if selected, will begin on the date we receive due proof of the Annuitant’s death, or on the Maturity Date. Variable income payments will begin within seven days after the date payments would begin under the corresponding fixed option. Payments under Optional Payment Plan 4 (Interest Income) will begin at the end of the first interest period after the date proceeds are otherwise payable.

 

All payments under Option Payment Plan 2 (Income for a Fixed Period), Optional Payment Plan 3 (Income of a Definite Amount) and Optional Payment Plan 4 (Interest Income) may be redeemed by the payee upon written request to our Home Office. Payments made under Optional Payment Plan 1 (Life Income with Period Certain) and Optional Payment Plan 5 (Joint Life and Survivor Income) are not redeemable. If payments under Optional Payment Plans 2, 3 or 4 are variable income payments, and a request for redemption is received in good order, the payment will be made within seven days in accordance with the “Surrenders and Partial Surrenders” provision. If payments under Optional Payment Plan 2,

 

44


Table of Contents

Optional Payment Plan 3 or Optional Payment 4 are fixed income payments, and a request for redemption is received in good order, the payment will generally be made within seven days, however, some states require us to reserve the right to defer payments from the Guarantee Account for up to six months from the date we receive the request for payment.

 

If your contract is a Qualified Contract, Optional Payment Plans 2 and 3 may not satisfy minimum required distribution rules. Optional Payment Plan 4 is not available to contracts issued as Qualified Contracts. Optional Payment Plan 5 may not satisfy required distribution rules for all designated beneficiaries. Consult a tax adviser before electing one of these options.

 

Variable Income Payments

 

The monthly amount of your first variable income payment will equal your Contract Value as of the Maturity Date, less any premium taxes, multiplied by the monthly payment rate for the payment plan you choose (at an assumed interest rate of 3%), divided by 1,000. We determine subsequent payments based on Annuity Units.

 

On the Maturity Date, we determine the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount. This number will not change unless you make a transfer. On the Maturity Date, the number of Annuity Units for a Subaccount is the portion of the first payment from that Subaccount divided by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount on the day the first payment is due. Each subsequent variable income payment will equal the sum of payments for each Subaccount. The payment for a Subaccount is the number of Annuity Units for that Subaccount multiplied by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount seven days before the monthly anniversary of the Maturity Date.

 

Following the Maturity Date, the Annuity Unit value of each Subaccount for any Valuation Period will equal the Annuity Unit value for the preceding Valuation Period multiplied by the product of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the net investment factor for the Valuation Period for which we are calculating the Annuity Unit value; and

 

  (b)   is an assumed interest rate factor equal to .99991902 raised to a power equal to the number of days in the Valuation Period.

 

The assumed interest rate factor in (b) above is the daily equivalent of dividing by one plus the assumed investment interest rate of 3%. We may offer a plan that has a different assumed investment interest rate. If we do, the assumed interest rate factor we use in (b) above would change.

 

Transfers After the Maturity Date

 

If we are making variable income payments, the payee may change the Subaccounts from which we are making the payments three times each calendar year. The transfer will be effective as of the end of the Valuation Period during which we receive written request at our Home Office. We reserve the right to limit the number of transfers, if necessary, for the contract to continue to be treated as an annuity under the Code. We also reserve the right to refuse to execute any transfer if any of the Subaccounts that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or redeem shares of the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests or if the transfer would adversely affect Annuity Unit values. If the number of Annuity Units remaining in a Subaccount after a transfer is less than 1, we will transfer the remaining balance in addition to the amount requested for the transfer. We will not allow a transfer into any Subaccount unless the number of Annuity Units of that Subaccount after the transfer is at least 1. The amount of the income payments as of the date of the transfer will not be affected by the transfer. We will not charge for transfers made after the Maturity Date.

 

We do not permit transfers between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account after the Maturity Date. We also do not permit transfers in the Guarantee Account from one interest rate guarantee period to another interest rate guarantee period.

 

TAX MATTERS

 

Introduction

 

This part of the prospectus discusses the federal income tax treatment of the contract. The federal income tax treatment of the contract is complex and sometimes uncertain. The federal income tax rules may vary with your particular circumstances.

 

This discussion is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. It does not address all of the federal income tax rules that may affect you and your contract. This discussion also does not address other federal tax consequences, or state or local tax consequences, associated with a contract. As a result, you should always consult a tax adviser about the application of tax rules to your individual situation.

 

Taxation of Non-Qualified Contracts

 

This part of the discussion describes some of the federal income tax rules applicable to Non-Qualified Contracts. A Non-Qualified Contract is a contract not issued in connection with a qualified retirement plan receiving special tax treatment under the Code, such as an individual retirement annuity or a Section 401(k) plan.

 

45


Table of Contents

Tax deferral on earnings. The federal income tax law generally does not tax any increase in an owner’s Contract Value until there is a distribution from the contract. However, certain requirements must be satisfied in order for this general rule to apply, including:

 

    an individual must own the contract (or the tax law must treat the contract as owned by an individual);

 

    the investments of the Separate Account must be “adequately diversified” in accordance with Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) regulations;

 

    the owner’s right to choose particular investments for a contract must be limited; and

 

    the contract’s Maturity Date must not occur near the end of the Annuitant’s life expectancy.

 

Contracts not owned by an individual — no tax deferral and loss of interest deduction. As a general rule, the Code does not treat a contract that is owned by an entity (rather than an individual) as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. The entity owning the contract generally pays tax each year on the annual increase in Contract Value. Contracts issued to a corporation or a trust are examples of contracts where the owner is taxed on the contract’s earnings.

 

There are several exceptions to this rule. For example, the Code treats a contract as owned by an individual if the nominal owner is a trust or other entity that holds the contract as an agent for an individual. However, this non-qualified exception does not apply in the case of any employer that owns a contract to provide deferred compensation for its employees.

 

In the case of a contract issued after June 8, 1997 to a taxpayer that is not an individual, or a contract held for the benefit of an entity, the entity will lose its deduction for a portion of its otherwise deductible interest expenses. This disallowance does not apply if the nonnatural owner pays tax on the annual increase in the Contract Value. Entities that are considering purchasing the contract, or entities that will benefit from someone else’s ownership of a contract, should consult a tax adviser.

 

Investments in the Separate Account must be diversified. For a contract to be treated as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes, the investments of the Separate Account must be “adequately diversified.” The IRS has issued regulations that prescribe standards for determining whether the investments of the Separate Account, including the assets of each Portfolio in which the Separate Account invests, are adequately diversified. If the Separate Account fails to comply with these diversification standards, the owner could be required to pay tax for the year of such failure and each subsequent year on the untaxed income accumulated in the contract.

 

Although we do not control the investments of all of the Funds, we expect that the Funds will comply with the IRS regulations so that the Separate Account will be considered “adequately diversified.”

 

Restrictions on the extent to which an owner can direct the investment of assets. In some circumstances, owners of variable contracts who possess excessive control over the investment of the underlying separate account assets may be treated as the owners of those assets and may be subject to tax currently on income and gains produced by those assets. Although published guidance in this area does not address certain aspects of the contract, we believe that the owner of a contract should not be treated as the owner of the Separate Account assets. We reserve the right to modify the contract to bring it into conformity with applicable standards should such modification be necessary to prevent an owner of the contract from being treated as the owner of the underlying Separate Account assets. However, there is no assurance such efforts would be successful.

 

Age at which income payments must begin. Federal income tax rules do not expressly identify a particular age by which income payments must begin. However, those rules do require that an annuity contract provide for amortization, through income payments of the contract’s premiums paid and earnings. We believe that these rules are satisfied by providing guaranteed annuity purchase rates in the contract that the owner may exercise at any time after the first policy year. If income payments begin or are scheduled to begin at a date that the IRS determines does not satisfy these rules, interest and gains under the contract could be taxable each year as they accrue.

 

No guarantees regarding tax treatment. We make no guarantees regarding the tax treatment of any contract or of any transaction involving a contract. However, the remainder of this discussion assumes that your contract will be treated as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes and that the tax law will not impose tax on any increase in your Contract Value until there is a distribution from your contract.

 

Partial and total surrenders. A partial surrender occurs when you receive less than the total amount of the contract’s Surrender Value. In the case of a partial surrender, you will pay tax on the amount you receive to the extent your Contract Value before the partial surrender exceeds your “investment in the contract.” (This term is explained below.) This income (and all other income from your contract) is ordinary income. The Code imposes a higher rate of tax on ordinary income than it does on capital gains.

 

46


Table of Contents

A surrender occurs when you receive the total amount of the contract’s Surrender Value. In the case of a surrender, you will generally pay tax on the amount you receive to the extent it exceeds your “investment in the contract.”

 

Your “investment in the contract” generally equals the total of your premium payments under the contract, reduced by any amounts you previously received from the contract that you did not include in your income.

 

Your contract imposes charges relating to the death benefit, including any death benefit provided under an optional rider. It is possible that all or a portion of these charges could be treated as partial surrenders from the contract.

 

In the case of Systematic Withdrawals, the amount of each Systematic Withdrawal should be considered a distribution and taxed in the same manner as a partial surrender from the contract.

 

Assignments and pledges. The Code treats any assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) any portion of your Contract Value as a partial surrender of such amount or portion.

 

Gifting a contract. If you transfer ownership of your contract — without receiving full and adequate consideration — to a person other than your spouse (or to your former spouse incident to divorce), you will pay tax on your Contract Value to the extent it exceeds your “investment in the contract.” In such a case, the new owner’s “investment in the contract” will be increased to reflect the amount included in your income.

 

Taxation of income payments. The Code imposes tax on a portion of each income payment (at ordinary income tax rates) and treats a portion as a nontaxable return of your “investment in the contract.” We will notify you annually of the taxable amount of your income payment.

 

Pursuant to the Code, you will pay tax on the full amount of your income payments once you have recovered the total amount of the “investment in the contract.” If income payments cease because of the death of the Annuitant(s) and before the total amount of the “investment in the contract” has been recovered, the unrecovered amount generally will be deductible.

 

If proceeds are left with us (Optional Payment Plan 4), they are taxed in the same manner as a surrender. The owner must pay tax currently on the interest credited on these proceeds. This treatment could also apply to Optional Payment Plan 3 depending on the relationship of the amount of the periodic payments to the period over which they are paid.

 

Taxation of the death benefit. We may distribute amounts from your contract because of the death of an owner, a joint owner, or an Annuitant. The tax treatment of these amounts depends on whether the owner, joint owner, or Annuitant dies before or after the Maturity Date.

 

Taxation of Death Benefit if Paid Before the Maturity Date:

 

    the death benefit is taxed to the designated beneficiary in the same manner as an income payment would have been taxed to the owner if received under an Optional Payment Plan;

 

    if not received under an Optional Payment Plan, the death benefit is taxed to the designated beneficiary in the same manner as a surrender or a partial surrender would have been taxed to the owner, depending on the manner in which the death benefit is paid.

 

Taxation of Death Benefit if Paid After the Maturity Date:

 

    The death benefit is includible in income to the extent it exceeds the unrecovered “investment in the contract.”

 

Penalty taxes payable on surrenders, partial surrenders or income payments. The Code may impose a penalty tax equal to 10% of the amount of any payment from your contract that is included in your gross income. The Code does not impose the 10% penalty tax if one of several exceptions applies. These exceptions include partial and total surrenders or income payments that:

 

    you receive on or after you reach age 5912;

 

    you receive because you became disabled (as defined in the tax law);

 

    are received on or after the death of an owner; or

 

    you receive as a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the taxpayer.

 

Systematic Withdrawals may qualify for this last exception if structured in accordance with IRS guidelines. If they do, any modification of the Systematic Withdrawals, including additional partial surrenders apart from the Systematic Withdrawals, could result in certain adverse tax consequences. In addition, premium payments or a transfer between the Subaccounts may result in payments not qualifying for this exception.

 

Other exceptions may be applicable under certain circumstances and special rules may be applicable in connection with the exceptions enumerated above. You should consult a tax adviser with regard to exceptions from the penalty tax.

 

Medicare Tax. Distributions from Non-Qualified Contracts will be considered “investment income” for purposes of the Medicare tax on investment income. Thus, in certain circumstances, a 3.8% tax may be applied to some or all of the

 

47


Table of Contents

taxable portion of distributions (e.g. earnings) to individuals whose income exceeds certain threshold amounts. Please consult a tax adviser for more information.

 

Special rules if you own more than one contract. In certain circumstances, you may have to combine some or all of the Non-Qualified Contracts you own in order to determine the amount of an income payment, a total surrender, or a partial surrender that you must include in income. For example:

 

    if you purchase a contract described by this prospectus and also purchase at approximately the same time an immediate annuity, the IRS may treat the two contracts as one contract;

 

    if you purchase two or more deferred annuity contracts from the same life insurance company (or its affiliates) during any calendar year, the Code treats all such contracts as one contract for certain purposes.

 

The effects of such aggregation are not clear. However, it could affect:

 

    the amount of a surrender, a partial surrender or an income payment that you must include in income; and

 

    the amount that might be subject to a penalty tax.

 

Section 1035 Exchanges

 

Under Section 1035 of the Code, the exchange of one annuity contract for another annuity contract generally is not taxed (unless cash is distributed). To qualify as a nontaxable exchange however, certain conditions must be satisfied, e.g., the obligee(s) under the new annuity contract must be the same obligee(s) as under the original contract. We do not permit an owner to partially exchange this contract for another annuity contract.

 

If this contract has been purchased in whole or part by exchanging part of a life insurance or annuity contract, certain subsequent transactions may cause the IRS to retrospectively treat the partial Section 1035 exchange as taxable. We intend to administer the contract without regard to the partially exchanged funding contract and disclaim any responsibility for monitoring events that could cause the IRS to examine the completed partial Section 1035 exchange. Owners contemplating any transaction, involving this contract or a partially exchanged contract funding this contract, within 180 days of a partial Section 1035 exchange are strongly advised to consult a tax adviser.

 

Upon the death of a non-spousal joint owner, the contract provides the surviving joint owner with the option of using the proceeds of this contract to purchase a separate annuity contract with terms and values that are substantially similar to those of this contract. Exercise of this option will not qualify as a tax-free exchange under Section 1035.

 

Beginning in 2010, the owner may exchange the contract under Section 1035 of the Code for a long-term care contract. We believe that the provisions of the Pension Protection Act of 2006 establishing annuity to long-term care Section 1035 exchanges would permit the owner to exchange a portion of the contract to pay the annual or other periodic premium for a long-term care contract issued by us or another insurance company. The IRS has issued limited guidance on such transactions, including on the allocation of basis that would be required to effect them. It is possible that the IRS could take a narrow view of the 2006 legislation and treat under certain circumstances partial Section 1035 exchanges to pay long-term care premiums as taxable withdrawals from the contract. Currently, we do not permit an owner to partially exchange this contract to purchase a long-term care contract or pay long-term care premiums. If all or a portion of the contract is used to purchase long-term care insurance in a Section 1035 exchange, the amount so used representing income on the contract would not be tax-deductible as a medical expense and the amount so used representing investment in the contract may not be tax-deductible as a medical expense. Any owner contemplating the use of the contract to fund long-term care insurance or long-term care expenses should consult a tax adviser.

 

Qualified Retirement
Plans

 

We also designed the contracts for use in connection with certain types of retirement plans that receive favorable treatment under the Code. Contracts issued to or in connection with retirement plans that receive special tax treatment are called “Qualified Contracts.” We may not offer all of the types of Qualified Contracts described herein in the future. Prospective purchasers should contact our Home Office for information on the availability of Qualified Contracts at any given time.

 

The federal income tax rules applicable to qualified retirement plans are complex and varied. As a result, this prospectus makes no attempt to provide more than general information about use of the contract with the various types of qualified retirement plans. Persons intending to use the contract in connection with a qualified retirement plan should obtain advice from a tax adviser.

 

The contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit. The purchase of this contract as an investment of a qualified retirement plan does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. If you are purchasing this contract as a Qualified Contract, you should consider purchasing this contract for its death benefits, income benefits and other non-tax benefits. Please consult a tax adviser for information specific to your circumstances in order to determine whether this contract is an appropriate investment for you.

 

48


Table of Contents

Types of Qualified Contracts. The types of Qualified Contracts currently being offered include:

 

    Traditional Individual Retirement Annuities (IRAs) permit individuals to make annual contributions of up to the lesser of a specified dollar amount for the year or the amount of compensation includible in the individual’s gross income for the year. Certain employers may establish Simplified Employee Pensions (SEPs), which have higher contribution limits, on behalf of their employees. The Internal Revenue Service has not reviewed the contract for qualification as an IRA, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether death benefits such as those in the contract comport with IRA qualification requirements.

 

    Roth IRAs permit certain eligible individuals to make non-deductible contributions to a Roth IRA. Distributions from a Roth IRA generally are not taxed, except that, once aggregate distributions exceed contributions to the Roth IRA, income tax and a 10% IRS penalty tax may apply to distributions made: (1) before age 5912 (subject to certain exceptions); or (2) during the five taxable years starting with the year in which the first contribution is made to any Roth IRA. A 10% penalty may apply to amounts attributable to a conversion from an IRA if they are distributed during the five taxable years beginning with the year in which the conversion was made.

 

    Traditional individual retirement accounts and Roth individual retirement accounts have the same contribution limits and tax treatment of distributions as the corresponding type of individual retirement annuity, discussed above. The contract may be owned by the custodian or trustee of an individual retirement account established for the benefit of the Annuitant. Only the owner, acting through its authorized representative(s), may exercise contract rights. When held by an individual retirement account, the contract is not issued as an individual retirement annuity or administered as such by us. Annuitants must look to the custodian or trustee, as contract owner, for satisfaction of their rights to benefits under the terms of the individual retirement account.

 

    Corporate pension and profit-sharing plans under Section 401(a) of the Code allow corporate employers to establish various types of retirement plans for employees, and self-employed individuals to establish qualified plans (“H.R. 10 or Keough plans”) for themselves and their employees.

 

    403(b) Plans allow employees of certain tax-exempt organizations and public schools to exclude from their gross income the premium payments made, within certain limits, to a contract that will provide an annuity for the employee’s retirement. Distributions of: (1) salary reduction contributions made in years beginning after December 31, 1988; (2) earnings on those contributions; and (3) earnings on amounts held as of the last year beginning before January 1, 1989, are not allowed prior to age 5912, severance from employment, death or disability. Salary reduction contributions (and, effective for plan years beginning in January 1, 2024, qualified nonelective contributions, qualified matching contributions, and earnings attributable to such amounts) may also be distributed upon hardship, but would generally be subject to a 10% IRS penalty tax. For contracts issued after 2008, amounts attributable to nonelective contributions may be subject to distribution restrictions specified in the employer’s 403(b) Plan. Under recent IRS regulations we are obligated to share information concerning certain contract transactions with the employer sponsoring the 403(b) plan in which the owner is participating and possibly other product providers. We generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that these transactions comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance.

 

Terms of qualified retirement plans and Qualified Contracts. The terms of a qualified retirement plan may affect your rights under a Qualified Contract. When issued in connection with a qualified retirement plan, we will amend a contract as generally necessary to conform to the requirements of the type of plan. However, the rights of any person to any benefits under qualified retirement plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the plans themselves, regardless of the terms and conditions of the contract. In addition, we are not bound by the terms and conditions of qualified retirement plans to the extent such terms and conditions contradict the contract, unless we consent.

 

Employer qualified plans. Qualified plans sponsored by an employer or employee organization are governed by the provisions of the Code and the Employee Retirement Income Security Act, as amended (“ERISA”). ERISA is administered primarily by the U.S. Department of Labor. The Code and ERISA include requirements that various features be contained in an employer qualified plan with respect to: participation; vesting; funding; nondiscrimination; limits on contributions and benefits; distributions; penalties; duties of fiduciaries; prohibited transactions; withholding; reporting and disclosure.

 

49


Table of Contents

In the case of certain qualified plans, if a participant is married at the time benefits become payable, unless the participant elects otherwise with written consent of the spouse, the benefits must be paid in the form of a qualified joint and survivor annuity. A qualified joint and survivor annuity is an annuity payable for the life of the participant with a survivor annuity for the life of the spouse in an amount that is not less than one-half of the amount payable to the participant during his or her lifetime. In addition, a married participant’s beneficiary must be the spouse, unless the spouse consents in writing to the designation of a different beneficiary.

 

If this contract is purchased as an investment of a qualified plan, the owner will be either an employee benefit trust or the plan sponsor. Plan participants and beneficiaries will have no ownership rights in the contract. Only the owner, acting through its authorized representative(s) may exercise contract rights. Participants and beneficiaries must look to the plan fiduciaries for satisfaction of their rights to benefits under the terms of the qualified plan.

 

Where a contract is purchased by an employer-qualified plan, we assume no responsibility regarding whether the contract’s terms and benefits are consistent with the requirements of the Code and ERISA. It is the responsibility of the employer, plan trustee, plan administrator and/or other plan fiduciaries to satisfy the requirements of the Code and ERISA applicable to the qualified plan. This prospectus does not provide detailed tax or ERISA information. Various tax disadvantages, including penalties, may result from actions that conflict with requirements of the Code or ERISA, and the regulations pertaining to those laws. Federal tax laws and ERISA are continually under review by Congress. Any changes in the laws or in the regulations pertaining to the laws may affect the tax treatment of amounts contributed to employer qualified plans and the fiduciary actions required by ERISA.

 

IRAs and Roth IRAs. The Code permits individuals to make annual contributions to IRAs of up to the lesser of a specified dollar amount for the year or the amount of compensation includible in the individual’s gross income for the year. The contributions may be deductible in whole or in part, depending on the individual’s income. The Code also permits certain eligible individuals to make non-deductible contributions to a Roth IRA in cash or as a rollover or transfer from another Roth IRA or other IRA. A rollover from or conversion of an IRA to a Roth IRA is generally subject to tax. You should consult a tax adviser before combining any converted amounts with any other Roth IRA contributions, including any other conversion amounts from other tax years.

 

The Internal Revenue Service has not reviewed the contract for qualification as an IRA, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether a death benefit provision such as the provision in this contract comports with IRA qualification requirements. We may, however, endorse the contract to satisfy the IRA or Roth IRA qualification rules and submit the endorsement to the IRS for approval as to form. If you purchased the contract with such an endorsement, the accompanying disclosure statement will indicate the status of the endorsement’s approval under the IRS IRA Prototype Program.

 

You will be the owner of a contract issued as an IRA or Roth IRA, and will be responsible for exercising your rights as owner in accordance with applicable tax rules, including limitations for contributions and distributions. The contract may also be held in an IRA custodial account or trust as an investment. In that event the custodian or trustee, with your cooperation, is responsible for satisfaction of the IRA qualification requirements. We have no responsibility beyond that pertaining to nonqualified contracts for contracts held in an IRA account or trust.

 

The death benefit and Qualified Contracts. Pursuant to IRS regulations, IRAs and 403(b) Plans may not invest in life insurance contracts. We do not believe that these regulations prohibit the death benefit, including that provided by any death benefit rider option, from being provided under the contracts when we issue the contracts as Traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, SEPs or 403(b) Plans. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that the presence of the death benefit under a contract issued as a Traditional IRA, a Roth IRA, a SEP or 403(b) Plan could disqualify a contract and result in increased taxes to the owner.

 

It is also possible that the death benefit could be characterized as an incidental death benefit. If the death benefit were so characterized, this could result in currently taxable income to purchasers. In addition, there are limitations on the amount of incidental death benefits that may be provided under qualified retirement plans, such as in connection with a Section 403(b) plan.

 

Treatment of Qualified Contracts compared with Non-Qualified Contracts. Although some of the federal income tax rules are the same for both Qualified and Non-Qualified Contracts, many of the rules are different. For example:

 

    the Code generally does not impose tax on the earnings under either Qualified or Non-Qualified Contracts until the earnings are distributed;

 

    the Code does not limit the amount of premium payments and the time at which premium payments can be made under Non-Qualified Contracts. However, the Code does limit both the amount and frequency of premium payments made to Qualified Contracts;

 

50


Table of Contents
    the Code does not allow a deduction for premium payments made for Non-Qualified Contracts, but sometimes allows a deduction or exclusion from income for premium payments made to a Qualified Contract;

 

    Under most qualified retirement plans, the owner must begin receiving payments from the contract in certain minimum amounts by a certain date, generally April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the owner attains their applicable age for Traditional IRAs and SEPs and April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the calendar year in which the employee (except for a 5 percent owner) retires or attains their applicable age for other Qualified Contracts (referred to as the “required beginning date”). If the owner attains age 72 before or during 2022, the applicable age is 72. If the owner attains age 72 after 2022 and age 73 before 2033, the applicable age is 73. If the owner attains age 74 after 2032, the applicable age is 75. The actuarial value of certain benefit guarantees and certain death benefits may be included with the contract’s cash value in determining the required minimum distribution amount. The presence of such death benefits may require the owner to withdraw a larger amount each year than would be required based only on the contract value. We are required to annually determine and report to the owner the fair market value for traditional individual retirement annuities while the owner is alive. This computation is based in part on future economic performance and conditions and is made under the guidance of our actuarial department in accordance with income tax regulations and guidelines published by the Society of Actuaries. It is possible that, using different assumptions or methodologies, the amount required to be withdrawn would be more or less than the amount we report to you as the required minimum distribution. Roth IRAs do not require any distributions during the owner’s lifetime. The death benefit under your contract may increase the amount of the minimum required distribution that must be taken from your contract.

 

The federal income tax rules applicable to qualified retirement plans and Qualified Contracts vary with the type of plan and contract. For example, federal tax rules limit the amount of premium payments that can be made, and the tax deduction or exclusion that may be allowed for the premium payments.

 

These limits vary depending on the type of qualified retirement plan and the circumstances of the plan participant, e.g., the participant’s compensation.

 

Amounts received under Qualified Contracts. Federal income tax rules generally include distributions from a Qualified Contract in your income as ordinary income. Premium payments that are deductible or excludible from income do not create “investment in the contract.” Thus, under many Qualified Contracts there will be no “investment in the contract” and you include the total amount you receive in your income. There are exceptions. For example, you do not include amounts received from a Roth IRA if certain conditions are satisfied. In addition, failure to comply with the minimum distribution rules applicable to certain qualified retirement plans, will result in the imposition of an excise tax. This excise tax generally equals 25% of the amount by which a minimum required distribution exceeds the actual distribution from the qualified retirement plan. The excise tax is reduced to 10% if a distribution of the shortfall is made within two years and to the date the excise tax is imposed. Please note important changes to the required minimum distribution rules. Under IRAs and defined contribution retirement plans, most non-spouse beneficiaries will no longer be able to satisfy these rules by “stretching” payouts over life. Instead, those beneficiaries will have to take their post-death distributions within ten years. Certain exceptions apply to “eligible designated beneficiaries,” which include disabled and chronically ill individuals, individuals who are ten or less years younger than the deceased individual, and children who have not reached the age of majority. This change applies to distributions to designated beneficiaries of individuals who die on and after January 1, 2020. Consult a tax adviser if you are affected by these new rules.

 

Federal penalty taxes payable on distributions. The Code may impose a penalty tax equal to 10% of the amount of any payment from your Qualified Contract that is includible in your income. The Code does not impose the penalty tax if one of several exceptions apply. The exceptions vary depending on the type of Qualified Contract you purchase. For example, in the case of an IRA, exceptions provide that the penalty tax does not apply to a partial surrender, surrender, or annuity payment:

 

    received on or after the owner reaches age 5912;

 

    received on or after the owner’s death or because of the owner’s disability (as defined in the tax law);

 

    received as a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the taxpayer; or

 

    received as reimbursement for certain amounts paid for medical care.

 

51


Table of Contents

These exceptions, as well as certain others not described here, generally apply to taxable distributions from other qualified retirement plans. However, the specific requirements of the exception may vary.

 

Moving money from one Qualified Contract or qualified retirement plan to another.Rollovers and transfers: In many circumstances you may move money between Qualified Contracts and qualified retirement plans by means of a rollover or a transfer. Special rules apply to such rollovers and transfers.

 

An IRA owner may make only one rollover in a 12 month period to avoid being taxed on distributions received during that period from all of his or her IRAs (including Roth IRAs). The rule does not apply to direct transfers between IRA issuers or custodians. If you have received an IRA distribution and are contemplating making a rollover contribution, you should consult a tax adviser.

 

If you do not follow the applicable rules, you may suffer adverse federal income tax consequences, including paying taxes which you might not otherwise have had to pay. You should always consult a qualified tax adviser before you move or attempt to move assets between any Qualified Contract or plan and another Qualified Contract or plan. If your contract was issued pursuant to a 403(b) plan, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance.

 

Direct rollovers: The direct rollover rules apply to certain payments (called “eligible rollover distributions”) from Section 401(a) plans, Section 403(b) plans, H.R. 10 plans, and Qualified Contracts used in connection with these types of plans. The direct rollover rules do not apply to distributions from IRAs. The direct rollover rules require federal income tax equal to 20% of the taxable portion of an eligible rollover distribution to be withheld from the amount of the distribution, unless the owner elects to have the amount directly transferred to certain Qualified Contracts or plans. Certain restrictions apply to the ability to rollover any after-tax amounts.

 

Prior to receiving an eligible rollover distribution from us, we will provide you with a notice explaining these requirements and the procedure for avoiding 20% withholding by electing a direct rollover.

 

IRA conversions: If this contract is issued as an IRA, you may convert the contract to a Roth IRA. If you do so, the fair market value of your contract will be treated as a distribution from your IRA. This fair market value will include the contract’s cash value together with the actuarial value of certain benefit

guarantees, such as certain death benefits. This computation is based in part on future economic performance and conditions and is made under the guidance of our actuarial department in accordance with income tax regulations. The methodology followed is similar to that used to determine the actuarial value of such benefit guarantees for required minimum distribution purposes, as described above in the “Treatment of Qualified Contracts compared with Non-Qualified Contracts” section. We will determine and report the fair market value of your contract to you and the Internal Revenue Service to satisfy our reporting obligations using assumptions and calculation methodologies based on our interpretation of the Code. It is possible that, using different assumptions or methodologies, your actual tax liability would be more or less than the income reported by us. You should always consult a tax adviser before you convert an IRA to a Roth IRA.

 

Disclosure Pursuant to Code and ERISA Requirements. The ongoing fees and expenses of the contracts and the charges you may pay when you surrender or take withdrawals from your contract, as well as the range of fees and expenses of the Portfolios that you will pay indirectly when your assets are allocated to the Portfolios, are discussed in the “Fee Tables” provision of the prospectus. More detail concerning each Portfolio’s fees and expenses is included in the prospectus for each Portfolio.

 

The Company may receive fees from the investment adviser or distributor of a Portfolio for certain administrative and other services we provide to you or to the Portfolio relating to the allocation of your assets to the Portfolio, and the amount of these fees may vary from Portfolio to Portfolio. Furthermore, the Company or our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation may receive Rule 12b-1 fees in varying amounts from the Portfolios or their distributors for distribution and related services. Additional information on the fees payable to the Company and Capital Brokerage Corporation by the Portfolios and their advisers and distributors, including the range of such fees, is included in the “Subaccounts” provision of the prospectus.

 

When you purchase a contract through a broker-dealer, the broker-dealer is paid a commission and may be paid a separate marketing allowance. The maximum aggregate amount of such compensation is 6.5% of a contract owner’s aggregate premium payments. The broker-dealer firm generally pays a portion of such commission to its representative who assisted you with the purchase, and that amount will vary depending on the broker-dealer and the individual representative. The Company has no agreement with any broker-dealer and any representative of a broker-dealer that limits the insurance and investment products or other securities they offer to those issued by the Company.

 

52


Table of Contents

By signing the application for the contract, you acknowledge receipt of these disclosures and approve the purchase of the contract, the Asset Allocation Program, and the investments made pursuant to the Asset Allocation Program.

 

Federal Income Tax Withholding

 

We will withhold and remit to the IRS a part of the taxable portion of each distribution made under a contract unless the distributee notifies us at or before the time of the distribution that he or she elects not to have any amounts withheld. In certain circumstances, federal income tax rules may require us to withhold tax. At the time you request a partial or total surrender, or income payment, we will send you forms that explain the withholding requirements.

 

See the “Annuity Purchases by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations” section below for special withholding rules applicable to payees other than U.S. citizens or residents and to payments made overseas.

 

State Income Tax Withholding

 

If required by the law of your state, we will also withhold state income tax from the taxable portion of each distribution made under the contract, unless you make an available election to avoid withholding. If permitted under state law, we will honor your request for voluntary state withholding.

 

Tax Status of the Company

 

Under existing federal income tax laws, we do not pay tax on investment income and realized capital gains of the Separate Account. We do not anticipate that we will incur any federal income tax liability on the income and gains earned by the Separate Account. We, therefore, do not impose a charge for federal income taxes. If federal income tax law changes and we must pay tax on some or all of the income and gains earned by the Separate Account, we may impose a charge against the Separate Account to pay the taxes.

 

Federal Estate, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

 

While no attempt is being made to discuss in detail the Federal estate tax implications of the contract, a purchaser should keep in mind that the value of an annuity contract owned by a decedent and payable to a beneficiary who survives the decedent is included in the decedent’s gross estate. Depending on the terms of the annuity contract, the value of the annuity included in the gross estate may be the value of the lump sum payment payable to the designated beneficiary or the actuarial value of the payments to be received by the beneficiary. Consult an estate planning advisor for more information.

 

Under certain circumstances, the Code may impose a generation-skipping (“GST”) tax when all or part of an annuity contract is transferred to, or a death benefit is paid to, an individual two or more generations younger than the Owner. Regulations issued under the Code may require us to deduct the tax from your Contract, or from any applicable payment, and pay it directly to the IRS.

 

The potential application of these taxes underscores the importance of seeking guidance from a qualified adviser to help ensure that your estate plan adequately addresses your needs and those of your beneficiaries under all possible scenarios.

 

Definition of Spouse Under Federal Law

 

The contract provides that upon your death, a surviving spouse may have certain continuation rights that he or she may elect to exercise for the contract’s death benefit. All contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

 

Annuity Purchases by Residents of Puerto Rico

 

The IRS has announced that income received by residents of Puerto Rico under life insurance or annuity contracts issued by a Puerto Rico branch of a United States life insurance company is U.S. — source income that is generally subject to United States federal income tax.

 

Annuity Purchases by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

 

The discussion above provides general information regarding U.S. federal income tax consequences to annuity purchasers that are U.S. citizens or residents. Purchasers (and beneficiaries) that are not U.S. citizens or residents will generally be subject to U.S. federal withholding tax on taxable distributions from annuity contracts at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. In addition, such purchasers may be subject to state and/or municipal taxes and taxes that may be imposed by the purchaser’s country of citizenship or residence. Special withholding rules apply to entity purchasers (including foreign corporations, partnerships, and trusts) that are not U.S. residents. We reserve the right to make all payments due to owners or beneficiaries to such persons and shall not be

 

53


Table of Contents

obligated to pay any foreign financial institution on behalf of any individual. Prospective purchasers are advised to consult with a qualified tax adviser regarding U.S. state, and foreign taxation with respect to an annuity contract purchase.

 

Foreign Tax Credits

 

We may benefit from any foreign tax credits attributable to taxes paid by certain funds to foreign jurisdictions to the extent permitted under federal tax law.

 

Changes in the Law

 

This discussion is based on the Code, IRS regulations, and interpretations existing on the date of this prospectus. Congress, the IRS, and the courts may modify these authorities, however, sometimes retroactively.

 

REQUESTING PAYMENTS

 

To request a payment, you must provide us with notice in a form satisfactory to us. We will ordinarily pay any partial surrender or total surrender proceeds from the Separate Account within seven days after receipt at our Home Office of a request in good order. We will also ordinarily make payment of lump sum death benefit proceeds from the Separate Account within seven days from the receipt of due proof of death and all required forms. We will determine the amount of the payment as of the end of the Valuation Period during which our Home Office receives the payment request or due proof of death and all required forms.

 

In most cases, when we pay the death benefit in a lump sum, we will pay these proceeds to your designated beneficiary directly in the form of a check. We may also provide your designated beneficiary the option to establish an interest bearing draft account, called the “Secure Access Account,” in the amount of the death benefit.

 

When establishing the Secure Access Account we will send the designated beneficiary a draft account book within seven days after we receive all the required documents, and the designated beneficiary will have immediate access to the account simply by writing a draft for all or any part of the amount of the death benefit payment. Any interest credited to amounts in the Secure Access Account is currently taxable to the designated beneficiary.

 

The Secure Access Account is part of our General Account. It is not a bank account and it is not insured by the FDIC or any other government agency. As part of our General Account, it is subject to the claims of our creditors. We receive a benefit from all amounts left in the Secure Access Account.

 

We require a positive election from the designated beneficiary to establish the Secure Access Account for the designated beneficiary. The Secure Access Account is not available in all states. We may discontinue offering the Secure Access Account at any time, for any reason and without notice.

 

We will delay making a payment from the Subaccount or applying Subaccount value to a payment plan if:

 

  (1)   the disposal or valuation of the Subaccount is not reasonably practicable because:

 

    the SEC declares that an emergency exists (due to the emergency the disposal or valuation of the Separate Account’s assets is not reasonably practicable);

 

    the New York Stock Exchange is closed for other than a regular holiday or weekend;

 

    trading is restricted by the SEC; or

 

  (2)   the SEC, by order, permits postponement of payment to protect our owners.

 

In addition, if, pursuant to SEC rules, a money market fund that a subaccount invests in suspends payment of redemption proceeds in connection with a liquidation of that fund, we will delay payment of any transfer, partial withdrawal, surrender, loan, or death benefit from the subaccount until the fund is liquidated.

 

State law requires that we reserve the right to defer payments from the Guarantee Account for a partial or total surrender for up to six months from the date we receive your request at our Home Office. We also may defer making any payments attributable to a check or draft that has not cleared until we are satisfied that the check or draft has been paid by the bank on which it is drawn.

 

If mandated under applicable law, we may be required to reject a premium payment and/or block an owner’s account and thereby refuse to pay any requests for transfers, partial surrenders, or death benefits until instructions are received from the appropriate regulators. We may also be required to provide additional information about you or your account to government regulators.

 

SALES OF THE CONTRACTS

 

This contract is no longer offered or sold. However, the following section provides detail concerning the manner in which contracts were sold and the compensation arrangements applicable to those sales. Although certain compensation practices no longer apply (e.g., no commissions are paid in connection with new contract sales because such sales have

 

54


Table of Contents

been suspended), certain of the compensation practices remain relevant to in-force contracts. Most notably, selling firms continue to be compensated with respect to subsequent premium payments made under the in-force contracts.

 

We have entered into an underwriting agreement with Capital Brokerage Corporation for the distribution and sale of the contracts. Pursuant to this agreement, Capital Brokerage Corporation serves as principal underwriter for the contracts, offering them on a continuous basis. Capital Brokerage Corporation is located at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. Capital Brokerage Corporation will use its best efforts to sell the contracts, but is not required to sell any specific number or dollar amount of contracts.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation was organized as a corporation under the laws of the state of Washington in 1981 and is an affiliate of ours. Capital Brokerage Corporation is registered as a broker-dealer with the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as well as with the securities commissions in the states in which it operates, and is a member of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”) (formerly, NASD, Inc.).

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation offers the contracts through its registered representatives who are registered with FINRA and with the states in which they do business. More information about Capital Brokerage Corporation and the registered representatives is available at http://www.finra.org or by calling (800) 289-9999. You also can obtain an investor brochure from FINRA describing its Public Disclosure Program. Registered representatives with Capital Brokerage Corporation are also licensed as insurance agents in the states in which they do business and are appointed with the Company.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation also enters into selling agreements with an affiliated broker-dealer and unaffiliated broker-dealers to sell the contracts. The registered representatives of these selling firms are registered with FINRA and with the states in which they do business, are licensed as insurance agents in the states in which they do business and are appointed with us.

 

We pay compensation to Capital Brokerage Corporation for promotion and sales of the contracts by its registered representatives as well as by affiliated and unaffiliated selling firms. This compensation consists of sales commissions and other cash and non-cash compensation. The maximum commission we may pay for the sale of a contract is 7.0% of a contract owner’s aggregate premium payments.

 

The maximum commission consists of three parts — commissions paid to internal and external wholesalers of Capital Brokerage Corporation (“wholesalers” are individuals employed by the Company and registered with Capital Brokerage Corporation that promote the offer and sale of the contracts), commissions paid to the affiliated and unaffiliated brokerage firms (“selling firms”) that employ the registered representative who sold your contract, and an amount paid to the selling firm for marketing and other payments related to the sale of the contract. Wholesalers with Capital Brokerage Corporation each may receive a maximum commission of 0.5% of your aggregate premium payments.

 

After commission is paid to the wholesalers of Capital Brokerage Corporation, a commission is then paid to the selling firm. A maximum commission of 5.5% of your aggregate premium payments. The exact amount of commission paid to the registered representative who sold you your contract is determined by the brokerage firm that employs the representative is employed.

 

All selling firms receive commissions as described above based on the sale of, and receipt of premium payments, on the contract. Unaffiliated selling firms receive additional compensation, including marketing allowances and other payments. The maximum marketing allowance paid to a selling firm on the sale of a contract is 1.0% of premium payments received. At times, Capital Brokerage Corporation may make other cash and non-cash payments to selling firms, (as well as receive payments from selling firms) for expenses relating to the recruitment and training of personnel, periodic sales meetings, the production of promotional sales literature and similar expenses. These expenses may also relate to the synchronization of technology between the Company, Capital Brokerage Corporation and the selling firm in order to coordinate data for the sale and maintenance of the contract. In addition, registered representatives may be eligible for non-cash compensation programs offered by Capital Brokerage Corporation or an affiliated company, such as conferences, trips, prizes and awards. The amount of other cash and non-cash compensation paid by Capital Brokerage Corporation or its affiliated companies ranges significantly among the selling firms. Likewise, the amount received by Capital Brokerage Corporation from the selling firms ranges significantly.

 

The commissions listed above are maximum commissions paid, and reflect situations where we pay a higher commission for a short period of time for a special promotion.

 

No specific charge is assessed directly to contract owners or the Separate Account to cover commissions and other incentives or payments described above. We do, however, intend to recoup commissions and other sales expenses and incentives we pay through fees and charges deducted under the contract and any other corporate revenue.

 

55


Table of Contents

All commissions, special marketing allowances and other payments made or received by Capital Brokerage Corporation to or from selling firms come from or are allocated to the general assets of Capital Brokerage Corporation or one of its affiliated companies. Therefore, regardless of the amount paid or received by Capital Brokerage Corporation or one of its affiliated companies, the amount of expenses you pay under the contract does not vary because of such payments to or from such selling firms.

 

Even though your contract costs are not determined based on amounts paid to or received from Capital Brokerage Corporation or the selling firm, the prospect of receiving, or the receipt of, additional cash or non-cash compensation as described above may create an incentive for selling firms and/or their registered representative to sell you this product versus a product with respect to which a selling firm does not receive additional compensation, or a lower level of additional compensation. You may wish to take such compensation arrangements, which may be referred to as “revenue sharing arrangements,” into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the contracts.

 

During 2023, 2022, and 2021, $23.1 million, $26.3 million, and $32.2 million was paid to Capital Brokerage Corporation for new purchase payments received. In 2023, 2022, and 2021, no underwriting commissions were paid to Capital Brokerage Corporation.

 

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

 

Owner Questions

 

The obligations to owners under the contracts are ours. Please direct your questions and concerns to us at our Home Office.

 

State Regulation

 

As a life insurance company organized and operated under the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia, we are subject to provisions governing life insurers and to regulation by the Virginia Commissioner of Insurance.

 

Our books and accounts are subject to review and examination by the State Corporation Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia at all times. That Commission conducts a full examination of our operations at least every five years.

 

Evidence of Death, Age, Gender, Marital Status or Survival

 

We may require proof of the age, gender, marital status or survival of any person or persons before actions on any applicable contract provision.

 

Records and Reports

 

As presently required by the 1940 Act and applicable regulations, we are responsible for maintaining all records and accounts relating to the Separate Account. At least once each year, we will send you a report showing information about your contract for the period covered by the report. The report will show the total Contract Value and a break-down of the assets of each Subaccount and the Guarantee Account. The report also will show premium payments and charges made during the statement period. We will no longer send you paper copies of shareholder reports for the Portfolios of the Funds offered under the contract (“Reports”) unless you specifically request paper copies from us, and instead we will make the Reports available on a website. In addition, you will receive a written confirmation when you make premium payments, transfers, or take partial surrenders.

 

Other Information

 

We have filed a Registration Statement with the SEC, under the Securities Act of 1933 as amended, for the contracts being offered by this prospectus. This prospectus does not contain all the information in the Registration Statement, its amendments and exhibits. Please refer to the Registration Statement for further information about the Separate Account, the Company, and the contracts offered. Statements in this prospectus about the content of contracts and other legal instruments are summaries. For the complete text of those contracts and instruments, please refer to those documents as filed with the SEC and available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov.

 

Unclaimed Property

 

Every state has unclaimed property laws which generally declare annuity contracts to be abandoned after a period of inactivity of three to five years from the contract’s maturity date or date the death benefit is due and payable. For example, if the payment of a death benefit has been triggered, but, if after a thorough search, we are still unable to locate the beneficiary of the death benefit, or the beneficiary does not come forward to claim the death benefit in a timely manner, the death benefit will be paid to the abandoned property division or unclaimed property office of the state in which the beneficiary or the contract owner last resided, as shown on our books and records, or to our state of domicile. This “escheatment” is revocable, however, and the state is obligated to pay the death benefit if your beneficiary steps forward to claim it with the proper documentation. To prevent such escheatment, it is important that you update your beneficiary designations, including full names and complete addresses, if and as they change.

 

56


Table of Contents

Legal Proceedings

 

We face the risk of litigation and regulatory investigations and actions in the ordinary course of operating our businesses, including the risk of class action lawsuits. Our pending legal and regulatory actions include proceedings specific to us and others generally applicable to business practices in the industries in which we operate. In our insurance operations, we are, have been, or may become subject to class actions and individual suits alleging, among other things, issues relating to sales or underwriting practices, payment of contingent or other sales commissions, claims payments and procedures, product design, product disclosure, administration, additional premium charges for premiums paid on a periodic basis, denial or delay of benefits, charging excessive or impermissible fees on products and recommending unsuitable products to customers. Plaintiffs in class action and other lawsuits against us may seek very large or indeterminate amounts, which may remain unknown for substantial periods of time. In our investment-related operations, we are subject to litigation involving commercial disputes with counterparties. We are also subject to litigation arising out of our general business activities such as our contractual and employment relationships and securities lawsuits. In addition, we are also subject to various regulatory inquiries, such as information requests, subpoenas, books and record examinations and market conduct and financial examinations from state, federal and international regulators and other authorities. A substantial legal liability or a significant regulatory action against us could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Moreover, even if we ultimately prevail in the litigation, regulatory action or investigation, we could suffer significant reputational harm, which could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

Cost of Insurance Litigation

 

TVPX ARX INC., et al. In September 2018, we were named as a defendant in a putative class action lawsuit pending in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Virginia captioned TVPX ARX INC., et al v. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Plaintiff alleges unlawful and excessive cost of insurance (“COI”) charges were imposed on policyholders. The complaint asserts claims for breach of contract, alleging that we improperly considered non-mortality factors when calculating COI rates and failed to decrease COI charges in light of improved expectations of future mortality, and seeks unspecified compensatory damages, costs, and equitable relief.

 

On October 29, 2018, we filed a Motion to Enjoin in the Middle District of Georgia, and a Motion to Dismiss and Motion to Stay in the Eastern District of Virginia. We moved to enjoin the prosecution of the Eastern District of Virginia action on the basis that it involves claims released in a prior nationwide class action settlement (the “McBride settlement”) that was approved by the Middle District of Georgia. Plaintiff filed an amended complaint on November 13, 2018. On December 6, 2018, we moved the Middle District of Georgia for leave to file our counterclaim, which alleges that plaintiff breached the covenant not to sue contained in the prior settlement agreement by filing its current action. On March 15, 2019, the Middle District of Georgia granted our Motion to Enjoin and denied our Motion for Leave to file our counterclaim. As such, plaintiff is enjoined from pursuing its COI class action in the Eastern District of Virginia.

 

On March 29, 2019, plaintiff filed a Notice of Appeal in the Middle District of Georgia, notifying the Court of its appeal to the United States Court of Appeals for the Eleventh Circuit from the Order granting our Motion to Enjoin. On March 29, 2019, we filed our Notice of Cross-Appeal in the Middle District of Georgia, notifying the Court of our cross-appeal to the Eleventh Circuit from the portion of the order denying our Motion for Leave to file our counterclaim. On April 8, 2019, the Eastern District of Virginia dismissed the case without prejudice, with leave for plaintiff to refile an amended complaint only if a final appellate court decision vacates the injunction and reverses the Middle District of Georgia’s opinion. On May21, 2019, plaintiff filed its appeal and memorandum in support in the Eleventh Circuit. We filed our response to plaintiff’s appeal memorandum on July 3, 2019. The Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals heard oral argument on plaintiff’s appeal and our cross-appeal on April 21, 2020. On May 26, 2020, the Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals vacated the Middle District of Georgia’s order enjoining plaintiff’s class action and remanded the case back to the Middle District of Georgia for further factual development as to whether we had altered how we calculate or charge COI since the McBride settlement. The Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals did not reach a decision on our counterclaim.

 

On June 30, 2021, after the completion of discovery, we filed our renewed motion to enforce the class action settlement and release, and renewed our motion for leave to file a counterclaim in the Middle District of Georgia. On March 24, 2022, the Court denied our motions. On April 11, 2022, we appealed the Court’s denial to the United States Court of Appeals for the Eleventh Circuit. On June 22, 2022, we filed our opening brief in the Eleventh Circuit. Plaintiff filed its respondent’s brief on September 20, 2022, and our reply brief was filed on November 10, 2022. The appeal was orally argued on August 17, 2023, and we are awaiting a decision from the Eleventh Circuit. We intend to continue to vigorously defend this action.

 

57


Table of Contents

North Carolina Audit

 

On May 31, 2019, the Company and certain affiliates received draft audit reports from the North Carolina Department of Revenue that examined tax credits received for investing in certain renewal energy projects from the period beginning January 1, 2014 and ending December 31, 2016. The Department of Revenue alleges that these tax credits were improper transactions because the Genworth entities were not bona fide partners of the investor/promotor Stonehenge Capital Company, LLC. On July 15, 2019, we responded to the Department of Revenue, stating that we intend to contest the disallowance of the credits. On July 17, 2019, the Department of Revenue replied that their position regarding their audit conclusions has not changed and that they will proceed with finalizing the audit. On July 24, 2019, we received Notices of Proposed Adjustments and tax assessments for the Company and certain of the affiliates totaling $4.4 million from the Department of Revenue. On August 27, 2019, we submitted our NC-Form 242 Objection to these tax assessments. On December 5, 2019, we received Notices of Proposed Adjustments and tax assessments for the Company and Genworth Life Insurance Company totaling approximately $600,000. On January 14, 2020, we submitted our NC-Form 242 Objection to these tax assessments. We intend to continue to vigorously defend our position and any legal proceedings that may arise.

 

PBI Data Breach Litigation

 

Starting in June 2023, various Genworth entities (including the Company) have been named as defendants in certain putative class action lawsuits in the United States District Courts for the Eastern District of Virginia and the District of Massachusetts. These cases include Burkett, Jr. v. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. The actions relate to the data security events involving the MOVEit file transfer system (“MOVEit Cybersecurity Incident”), which PBI Research Services (“PBI”), a third-party vendor, uses in the performance of its services. Our life insurance companies use PBI to, among other things, satisfy applicable regulatory obligations to search various databases to identify the deaths of insured persons under life insurance policies, and to identify the deaths of long-term care insurance and annuity policies which can impact premium payment obligations and benefit eligibility. Plaintiffs seek to represent various classes and subclasses of Genworth policyholders and agents whose data was accessed or potentially accessed by the MOVEit Cybersecurity Incident, alleging that Genworth breached its purported duty to safeguard their sensitive data from cybercriminals. The complaints assert claims for, inter alia, negligence, negligence per se, breach of contract, unjust enrichment, and violations of various consumer protection and privacy statutes, and they seek, inter alia, declaratory and injunctive relief, compensatory and punitive damages, restitution, attorneys’ fees and costs. On October 4, 2023, the Joint Panel on Multidistrict Litigation issued an order consolidating all actions relating to the MOVEit Cybersecurity Incident before a single federal judge in the United States District Court for the District of Massachusetts. We intend to vigorously defend these actions.

 

McHugh Litigation

 

In February 2024, the Company was named as defendant in a putative class action lawsuit in the Superior Court of the State of California, Sacramento County, captioned James Fox, individually and on behalf of the class v. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Co. Plaintiff, the holder of a lapsed California life insurance policy, seeks to represent a class of current and former California policyholders and beneficiaries whose policies were allegedly wrongfully terminated. The complaint alleges that the Company wrongfully terminated hundreds of California life insurance policies by failing to provide the policyholders with the notices and grace periods mandated by the contract and by the California Insurance Code as interpreted by the California Supreme Court in McHugh v Protective Life Ins. Co. The complaint asserts causes of action for breach of contract, violation of the California Insurance Code, unfair competition, and bad faith, and it seeks, inter alia, declaratory and injunctive relief, compensatory damages, restitution, attorneys’ fees, and costs. We intend to vigorously defend this action.

 

At this time, we cannot determine or predict the ultimate outcome of any of the pending legal and regulatory matters specifically identified above or the likelihood of potential future legal and regulatory matters against us. Except as disclosed above, we also are not able to provide an estimate or range of reasonably possible losses related to these matters. Therefore, we cannot ensure that the current investigations and proceedings will not have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations. In addition, it is possible that related investigations and proceedings may be commenced in the future, and we could become subject to additional unrelated investigations and lawsuits. Increased regulatory scrutiny and any resulting investigations or proceedings could result in new legal precedents and industry-wide regulations or practices that could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

The Company shall, and may through insurance coverage, indemnify any directors or officers who are a party to any proceeding by reason of the fact that he or she was or is a director or officer of the Company against any liability incurred

 

58


Table of Contents

by him or her in connection with such proceeding unless he or she engaged in willful misconduct or a knowing violation of the criminal law or any federal or state securities law. Such indemnification covers all judgments, settlements, penalties, fines and reasonable expenses incurred with respect to such proceeding. If the person involved is not a director or officer of the Company, the Company may indemnify, or contract to indemnify, to the same extent allowed for its directors and officers, such person who was, is or may become a party to any proceeding, by reason of the fact that he or she is or was an employee or agent of the Company, or is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation is not in any pending or threatened lawsuits that are reasonably likely to have a material adverse impact on us or on the Separate Account.

 

Although it is not anticipated that these developments will have a material adverse impact on the Separate Account, on our ability to meet our obligations under the contracts, or on the ability of Capital Brokerage Corporation to perform under its principal underwriting agreement, there can be no assurance at this time.

 

59


Table of Contents

APPENDIX A — PORTFOLIOS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT

 

The following is a list of Portfolios currently available under the contract. More information about the Portfolios is available in the prospectuses for the Portfolios, which may be amended from time to time and can be found online at www.genworth.com/CommonwealthExtra. You can also request this information at no cost by calling (800) 352-9910.

 

The current expenses and performance information below reflects fees and expenses of the Portfolios, but does not reflect the other fees and expenses that your contract may charge. Expenses would be higher and performance would be lower if these charges were included. Each Portfolio’s past performance is not necessarily an indication of future performance. You may obtain updated Portfolio performance information by calling (800) 352-9910.

 

              Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
 
Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
    1-Year     5-Year     10-Year  
US Equity Large Cap Value  

AB VPS Relative Value Portfolio — Class B

Alliance Bernstein, L.P.

    0.86%*       11.72%       11.57%       9.05%  
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Invesco V.I. Capital Appreciation Fund — Series I shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

    0.80%*       35.37%       16.40%       11.56%  
US Fixed Income  

Invesco V.I. Core Plus Bond Fund — Series I shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

    0.61%*       6.14%       1.89%       2.73%  
US Equity Mid Cap  

Invesco V.I. Discovery Mid Cap Growth Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

    1.12%       12.85%       12.47%       9.52%  
Moderate Allocation  

Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund — Series I shares (formerly,

Invesco V.I. Conservative Balanced Fund — Series I shares)1

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

    0.57%       10.56%       9.93%       7.06%  
US Fixed Income  

Invesco V.I. Global Strategic Income Fund — Series I shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

    0.92%*       8.88%       1.30%       1.50%  
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Alger Large Cap Growth Portfolio — Class I-2 Shares

Fred Alger Management, LLC

    0.84%*       32.67%       14.14%       11.03%  
US Equity Small Cap Growth  

Alger Small Cap Growth Portfolio — Class I-2 Shares

Fred Alger Management, LLC

    1.02%       16.49%       7.96%       7.05%  
US Fixed Income  

Federated Hermes High Income Bond Fund II — Primary Shares

Federated Investment Management Company

    0.81%*       12.71%       4.75%       4.13%  
Moderate Allocation  

Federated Hermes Managed Volatility Fund II — Primary Shares

Federated Advisory Services Company (FASC), an affiliate of the Co- Advisers, Federated Investment Management Company (FIMCO) and Federated Equity Management Company of Pennsylvania (FEMCOPA)

    0.97%*       8.68%       6.15%       4.19%  
Moderate Allocation  

VIP Asset Manager Portfolio — Initial Class

Fidelity Management & Research Company (FMR) (subadvised by FMR Investment Management (UK) Limited (FMR UK), Fidelity Management & Research (Hong Kong) Limited (FMR HK), and Fidelity Management & Research (Japan) Limited (FMR Japan))

    0.53%       12.94%       7.48%       5.40%  
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

VIP Contrafund® Portfolio — Initial Class

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

    0.56%       33.45%       16.65%       11.61%  
US Equity Large Cap Value  

VIP Equity-Income PortfolioSM — Initial Class

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

    0.47%       10.65%       12.30%       8.58%  
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

VIP Growth Portfolio — Initial Class

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

    0.58%       36.24%       19.64%       14.80%  

 

  1    The Invesco V.I. Conservative Balanced Fund - Series I shares merged into the Invesco V.I. Equity and Income Fund - Series I shares effective on or about April 29, 2024.

 

A-1


Table of Contents
            Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
US Equity Large Cap Value  

VIP Growth & Income Portfolio — Initial Class

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

  0.49%   18.72%   14.79%   10.27%
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

VIP Growth Opportunities Portfolio — Initial Class

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

  0.59%   45.65%   19.09%   15.73%
US Equity Mid Cap  

VIP Mid Cap Portfolio — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

  0.82%   14.80%   12.17%   7.85%
Global Equity Large Cap  

VIP Overseas Portfolio — Initial Class

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, FMR Japan, Fidelity International Investment Advisors (FIA), and Fidelity International Investment Advisors (UK) Limited (FIA UK))

  0.73%   20.55%   9.99%   4.91%
Global Equity Large Cap  

Templeton Foreign VIP Fund — Class 1 Shares

Templeton Investment Counsel, LLC

  0.82%*   21.09%   5.54%   1.54%
US Money Market  

Goldman Sachs Government Money Market Fund — Service Shares

Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.

  0.43%*   4.79%   1.64%   1.02%
US Equity Large Cap Value  

Goldman Sachs Large Cap Value Fund — Institutional Shares

Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.

  0.71%*   13.01%   11.45%   7.61%
US Equity Mid Cap  

Goldman Sachs Mid Cap Value Fund — Institutional Shares

Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.

  0.84%*   11.42%   13.36%   8.10%
Moderate Allocation  

Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Institutional Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

  0.62%   15.41%   9.64%   7.99%
US Equity Mid Cap  

Janus Henderson Enterprise Portfolio — Institutional Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

  0.72%   18.07%   13.42%   12.10%
US Fixed Income  

Janus Henderson Flexible Bond Portfolio — Institutional Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

  0.57%*   5.50%   1.79%   1.91%
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Janus Henderson Forty Portfolio — Institutional Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

  0.55%   39.96%   16.92%   13.73%
Global Equity Large Cap  

Janus Henderson Global Research Portfolio — Institutional Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

  0.61%   26.78%   13.33%   9.01%
Technology Sector Equity  

Janus Henderson Global Technology and Innovation Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

  0.97%*   54.27%   20.05%   16.86%
Global Equity Large Cap  

Janus Henderson Overseas Portfolio — Institutional Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

  0.89%   10.87%   11.20%   3.63%
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Janus Henderson Research Portfolio — Institutional Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

  0.57%   43.17%   16.83%   12.49%
US Equity Large Cap Blend  

ClearBridge Variable Dividend Strategy Portfolio — Class I

Franklin Templeton Fund Advisor, LLC (subadvised by ClearBridge Investments, LLC)

  0.75%   14.20%   13.52%   10.33%
US Equity Large Cap Value  

ClearBridge Variable Large Cap Value Portfolio — Class I

Franklin Templeton Fund Advisor, LLC (subadvised by ClearBridge Investments, LLC)

  0.72%   15.09%   13.02%   8.99%
US Equity Small Cap  

MFS® New Discovery Series — Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

  1.12%*   14.25%   10.81%   7.41%
US Fixed Income  

Total Return Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

  0.75%   5.93%   1.08%   1.71%

 

A-2


Table of Contents
            Average Annual Total
Returns (as of 12/31/2023)
Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
US Fixed Income  

Income V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

  1.38%*   4.68%   0.46%   1.16%
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Premier Growth Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

  0.91%   46.28%   18.47%   13.41%
Real Estate Sector Equity  

Real Estate Securities V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc. (subadvised by CenterSquare Investment Management LLC)

  1.00%   13.50%   7.63%   7.94%
US Equity Large Cap Blend  

S&P 500® Index V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

  0.31%   25.96%   15.32%   11.68%
US Equity Small Cap  

Small-Cap Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc. (sub-advised by Champlain Investment Partners, LLC, Kennedy Capital Management LLC, Palisade Capital Management, LP, SouthernSun Asset Management, LLC, and Westfield Capital Management Company, L.P.)

  1.28%   13.55%   10.84%   7.68%
Moderate Allocation  

Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

  0.65%   15.48%   6.16%   4.92%
US Equity Large Cap Growth  

U.S. Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

  0.91%   27.91%   16.03%   11.37%

 

* The Portfolio is subject to an expense reimbursement or fee waiver arrangement. The annual expenses shown reflect temporary fee reductions.

 

A-3


Table of Contents

APPENDIX B

 

Examples — Death Benefit Calculations

 

Basic Death Benefit

 

The purpose of this example is to show how the Basic Death Benefit works based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

Example: Assuming an owner:

 

  (1)   purchases a contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   makes no additional premium payments and takes no partial surrenders;

 

  (3)   is not subject to premium taxes; and

 

  (4)   the Annuitant is age 70 on the Contract Date then:

 

Annuitant’s
Age
    End of
Year
    Contract
Value
    Basic
Death Benefit
 
  71        1     $ 103,000     $ 103,000  
  72        2       110,000       110,000  
  73        3       80,000       110,000  
  74        4       120,000       120,000  
  75        5       130,000       130,000  
  76        6       150,000       150,000  
  77        7       160,000       160,000  
  78        8       130,000       160,000  
  79        9       90,000       160,000  
  80       10       170,000       170,000  
  81       11       140,000       170,000  
  82       12       190,000       190,000  
  83       13       150,000       170,000  

 

 

Partial surrenders will reduce the Basic Death Benefit by the proportion the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and any premium tax assessed) reduces the Contract Value. For example:

 

Date     Premium
Payment
    Contract
Value
    Basic
Death Benefit
 
  3/31/09     $ 50,000     $ 50,000     $ 50,000  
  3/31/17         50,000       50,000  
  3/31/18               35,000       50,000  

 

If a partial surrender of $17,500 is taken on March 31, 2018, the Basic Death Benefit immediately after the partial surrender will be $25,000 ($50,000 to $25,000) since the Contract Value is reduced 50% by the partial surrender ($35,000 to $17,500). This is true only if the Basic Death Benefit immediately prior to the partial surrender (as calculated above) is not the Contract Value on the date we receive due proof of the Annuitant’s death. It also assumes that surrender charge applies, and that no premium tax applies to the partial surrender. This example is based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

B-1


Table of Contents

A Statement of Additional Information containing more detailed information about the contract and the Separate Account can be found online at www.genworth.com/CommonwealthExtra, and is available free by writing us at the address below or by calling (800) 352-9910.

 

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

Annuity New Business

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

 

The Statement of Additional Information is incorporated by reference into this prospectus.

 

Reports and other information about Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1 are available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov, and copies of this information may be obtained, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by electronic request at publicinfo@sec.gov.

 

EDGAR contract identifier number C000026720.


Table of Contents

Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1

Prospectus For

Flexible Premium Variable Deferred Annuity Contracts

Form P1152 1/99

 

Issued by:

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

Telephone: (800) 352-9910

 

 

 

This prospectus, dated May 1, 2024, describes an individual flexible premium variable deferred annuity contract (the “contract” or “contracts”) offered to individuals and qualified and nonqualified retirement plans. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company (the “Company,” “we,” “us,” or “our”) issues the contract. This contract may be referred to as “RetireReadySM Extra II” in our marketing materials. This contract (RetireReadySM Extra II) is no longer offered or sold.

 

This prospectus describes all material features and benefits of the contract and provides details about Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1 (the “Separate Account”) and the Guarantee Account that you should know before investing. Please read this prospectus carefully before investing and keep it for future reference.

 

The contract offers you the opportunity to accumulate Contract Value and provides for the payment of periodic annuity benefits. We may pay these annuity benefits on a variable or fixed basis.

 

You may allocate your premium payments and automatic bonus credits we provide you to the Separate Account, the Guarantee Account (if available), or both. If we apply bonus credits to your contract, we will apply them with your premium payment to your Contract Value, and allocate the credits on a pro-rata basis to the investment options you select in the same ratio as the applicable premium payment. You should know that over time and under certain circumstances (such as an extended period of poor market performance), the costs associated with the bonus credit may exceed the sum of the bonus credit and any related earnings. You should consider this possibility before purchasing the contract. The bonus credit is referred to as an “enhanced premium amount” in your contract. Each Subaccount of the Separate Account invests in shares of Portfolios of the Funds listed in Appendix A of this prospectus.

 

The Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) has not approved or disapproved these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

 

Additional information about certain investment products, including variable annuities, has been prepared by the SEC’s staff and is available at investor.gov.

 

This contract:

 

    Is NOT a bank deposit

 

    Is NOT FDIC insured

 

    Is NOT insured or endorsed by a bank or any federal government agency

 

    Is NOT available in every state

 

    MAY go down in value.

 

Except for amounts in the Guarantee Account, both the value of a contract before the Maturity Date and the amount of monthly income afterwards will depend upon the investment performance of the Portfolio(s) you select. You bear the investment risk of investing in the Portfolios.

 

This contract has optional benefits that were made available to contract owners at the time they purchased the contract. Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the optional benefits are no longer available to purchase under the contract. Please note that some optional benefits may have requirements that differ from or are in addition to the base contract. Please refer to your contract or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the specific options you have elected.

 

We may offer other contracts with features that are substantially similar to those offered in this contract and in this prospectus. These other contracts may be priced differently and may have been offered exclusively to customers of one or more particular financial institutions or brokerage firms.

 

1


Table of Contents

The contract was offered to customers of various financial institutions and brokerage firms. No financial institution or brokerage firm is responsible for the guarantees under the contract. Guarantees under the contract are the sole responsibility of the Company.

 

In the future, additional portfolios managed by certain financial institutions or brokerage firms may be added to the Separate Account. These portfolios may be offered exclusively to purchasing customers of the particular financial institution or brokerage firm.

 

This contract may be used with certain tax qualified retirement plans. The contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit; the purchase of this contract does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. Please consult a tax adviser for information specific to your circumstances.

 

To contact our Home Office, call us at (800) 352-9910, or write us at:

 

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

 

This prospectus does not constitute an offering in any jurisdiction in which such offering may not lawfully be made.

 

2


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

 

Definitions

     5  

Important Information You Should Consider About the Contract

     6  

Overview of the Contract

     10  

Fee Tables

     12  

Example

     14  

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

     14  

The Company

     15  

Financial Condition of the Company

     16  

The Separate Account

     16  

The Portfolios

     17  

Subaccounts

     18  

Voting Rights

     20  

The Guarantee Account

     20  

Charges and Other Deductions

     21  

Transaction Expenses

     22  

Surrender Charge

     22  

Exceptions to the Surrender Charge

     22  

Deductions from the Separate Account

     23  

Charges for the Death Benefit Rider Options

     23  

Other Charges

     23  

The Contract

     24  

Ownership

     24  

Assignment

     25  

Premium Payments

     25  

Valuation Day and Valuation Period

     25  

Allocation of Premium Payments

     25  

Bonus Credits

     26  

Valuation of Accumulation Units

     26  

Benefits Available Under the Contract

     27  

Transfers

     30  

Transfers Before the Maturity Date

     30  

Transfers from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts

     30  

Transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account

     30  

Transfers Among the Subaccounts

     30  

Telephone/Internet Transactions

     31  

Confirmation of Transactions

     32  

Special Note on Reliability

     32  

Transfers by Third Parties

     32  

Special Note on Frequent Transfers

     32  

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

     34  

Portfolio Rebalancing Program

     35  

Guarantee Account Interest Sweep Program

     35  

 

3


Table of Contents

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders

     35  

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders

     35  

Restrictions on Distributions From Certain Contracts

     36  

Systematic Withdrawal Program

     37  

Death of Owner and/or Annuitant

     37  

Death Benefit at Death of Any Annuitant Before the Maturity Date

     37  

Basic Death Benefit

     38  

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

     39  

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit

     40  

When We Calculate the Death Benefit

     41  

Death of an Owner or Joint Owner Before the Maturity Date

     41  

Death of an Owner, Joint Owner, or Annuitant On or After the Maturity Date

     43  

Income Payments

     44  

Optional Payment Plans

     45  

Variable Income Payments

     46  

Transfers After the Maturity Date

     46  

Tax Matters

     47  

Introduction

     47  

Taxation of Non-Qualified Contracts

     47  

Section 1035 Exchanges

     49  

Qualified Retirement Plans

     50  

Federal Income Tax Withholding

     54  

State Income Tax Withholding

     54  

Tax Status of the Company

     54  

Federal Estate, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

     54  

Definition of Spouse Under Federal Law

     54  

Annuity Purchases by Residents of Puerto Rico

     55  

Annuity Purchases by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

     55  

Foreign Tax Credits

     55  

Changes in the Law

     55  

Requesting Payments

     55  

Sales of the Contracts

     56  

Additional Information

     57  

Owner Questions

     57  

State Regulation

     57  

Evidence of Death, Age, Gender, Marital Status or Survival

     57  

Records and Reports

     57  

Other Information

     58  

Unclaimed Property

     58  

Legal Proceedings

     58  

Appendix A

     A-1  

Portfolios Available Under the Contract

     A-1  

Appendix B

     B-1  

Examples — Death Benefit Calculations

     B-1  

 

4


Table of Contents

DEFINITIONS

 

The following terms are used throughout the prospectus:

 

Accumulation Unit — An accounting unit of measure we use to calculate the value in the Separate Account before income payments commence.

 

Annuitant — The person named in the contract upon whose age and, where appropriate gender, we determine monthly income benefits.

 

Annuity Unit — An accounting unit of measure we use to calculate the amount of the second and each subsequent variable income payment.

 

Bonus Credit — The “enhanced premium amount” described in your contract. For contracts that qualify, it is the amount we will add to each premium payment we receive. The Bonus Credit is not considered a “premium payment” under the contract.

 

Code — The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

Contract Date — The date we issue your contract and your contract becomes effective. Your Contract Date is shown in your contract. We use the Contract Date to determine contract years and anniversaries.

 

Contract Value — The total value of all your Accumulation Units in the Subaccounts and any amounts you hold in the Guarantee Account.

 

Fund — Any open-end management investment company or any unit investment trust in which the Separate Account invests.

 

General Account — Assets of the Company other than those allocated to the Separate Account or any other segregated asset account of the Company.

 

Guarantee Account — Part of our General Account that provides a guaranteed interest rate for a specified interest rate guarantee period. The General Account is not part of and does not depend on the investment performance of the Separate Account.

 

Home Office — Our office located at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

 

Maturity Date — The date on which your income payments will commence, provided the Annuitant is living on that date. The Maturity Date is stated in your contract, unless changed by you in writing in a form acceptable to us. The owner selects the contract’s initial Maturity Date at issue. The latest Maturity Date we currently permit may not be a date beyond the younger Annuitant’s 90th birthday, unless we consent to a later date.

 

Portfolio — A division of a Fund, the assets of which are separate from other Portfolios that may be available in the Fund. Each Portfolio has its own investment objective.

 

Separate Account — Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, a separate account we established to receive Subaccount allocations. The Separate Account is divided into Subaccounts, each of which invests in shares of a separate Portfolio.

 

Subaccount — A division of the Separate Account which invests exclusively in shares of a designated Portfolio. A Subaccount may be referred to as an Investment Subdivision in the contract and/or marketing materials.

 

Surrender Value — The value of the contract as of the date we receive your written request to surrender at our Home Office, less any applicable surrender charge, premium tax, any optional death benefit charge and contract charge.

 

Valuation Day — Each day on which the New York Stock Exchange is open for regular trading, except for days that the Subaccount’s corresponding Portfolio does not value its shares.

 

Valuation Period — The period that starts at the close of regular trading on the New York Stock Exchange on any Valuation Day and ends at the close of regular trading on the next succeeding Valuation Day.

 

5


Table of Contents

IMPORTANT INFORMATION YOU SHOULD CONSIDER ABOUT THE CONTRACT

 

   
Fees and Expenses   Location in Prospectus
Charges for Early Withdrawals  

If you withdraw money from your contract within eight years following your last premium payment, you may be assessed a surrender charge of up to 8% of the value of the premium payment withdrawn.

 

For example, if you purchased the contract and withdrew a $100,000 initial premium payment sooner than one complete year after making the payment, you could be assessed a surrender charge of up to $8,000 on the premium payment withdrawn.

 

Fee Tables

 

Charges and Other Deductions — Surrender Charge

Transaction Charges   In addition to surrender charges, you may also be charged for other transactions. We currently do not assess a transfer charge. However, we reserve the right to assess a transfer charge of $10 for each transfer among the Subaccounts after the first transfer in the calendar month.  

Fee Tables

 

Charges and Other Deductions — Other Charges

Ongoing Fees and Expenses
(annual charges)
  The table below describes the fees and expenses that you may pay each year, depending on the options you choose. Please refer to your contract data page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.  

Fee Tables

 

Charges and Other Deductions

 

     

Annual Fee

   Minimum    Maximum

Base contract1

   1.55%    1.55%

Investment options (Portfolio fees and expenses)2

   0.31%    2.005%

Optional benefits available for an additional charge (for a single optional benefit, if elected)3

   0.20%    0.25%

 

1    The base contract expense consists of the mortality and expense risk charge and administrative expense charge, each of which is expressed as an annual percentage charge that is assessed as a percentage of average daily net assets in the Separate Account.

 

2    As a percentage of Portfolio assets. These expenses are as of December 31, 2023, and will vary from year to year.

 

3    The minimum fee is the current fee for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit Rider, which is assessed as a percentage of the average Contract Value for the prior contract year. The maximum fee is the current fee for the Optional Death Benefit Rider, which is assessed as a percentage of the Contract Value at the time of the deduction.

 

6


Table of Contents

Because your contract is customizable, the choices you make affect how much you will pay. To help you understand the cost of owning your contract, the following table shows the lowest and highest cost you could pay each year, based on current charges. This estimate assumes that you do not take withdrawals from the contract, which could add surrender charges that substantially increase costs.

 

 

   
Lowest Annual Cost:    Highest Annual Cost:

$1,746

   $3,586

Assumes:

  

Assumes:

•  Investment of $100,000

•  5% annual appreciation

•  Least expensive combination of contract classes and Portfolio fees and expenses

•  No optional benefits

•  No sales charges

•  No additional premium payments, transfers, or withdrawals

 

  

•  Investment of $100,000

•  5% annual appreciation

•  Most expensive combination of contract classes, optional benefits and Portfolio fees and expenses

•  No sales charges

•  No additional premium payments, transfers, or withdrawals

 

     
Risks        Location in Prospectus

Risk of Loss

 

•  You can lose money by investing in this contract.

 

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

The Contract — Valuation of Accumulation Units

Not a Short-Term Investment

 

•  This contract is not a short-term investment and is not appropriate for an investor who needs ready access to cash.

 

•  A surrender charge can apply whenever you make a withdrawal of premium payments less than eight completed years after we received the premium payment.

 

•  The benefits of tax deferral mean that the contract is more beneficial to investors with a long time horizon.

 

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

Charges and Other Deductions

Risks Associated with Investment Options

 

•  An investment in this contract is subject to the risk of poor investment performance, which can vary depending on the performance of the investment options available under the contract (i.e., the Portfolios).

 

•  Each Portfolio (and the Guarantee Account) has its own unique risks.

 

•  You should review the prospectuses for the Portfolios and the section of this prospectus concerning the Guarantee Account before making an investment decision.

 

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

The Guarantee Account

 

Appendix A — Portfolios Available Under the Contract

 

7


Table of Contents
     
Risks         Location in Prospectus

Insurance Company Risks

 

•  An investment in the contract is subject to the risks related to the Company, including that any obligations (including under the Guarantee Account), guarantees, or benefits are subject to the claims-paying ability of the Company. More information about the Company, including its financial strength ratings, can be obtained by calling our Home Office at (800) 352-9910 or writing to us at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

  

Principal Risks of Investing in the Contract

 

The Company

     
Restrictions         Location in Prospectus

Investments

 

•  We reserve the right, subject to applicable law, to make additions, deletions, and substitutions for the Portfolios of the Funds.

 

•  For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation.

 

•  We reserve the right to limit transfers if frequent or large transfers occur, and to limit transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account.

  

The Separate Account — Subaccounts

 

The Guarantee Account

 

Transfers

Optional Benefits

 

•  We reserve the right to modify certain of our optional benefits. For example, we reserve the right to discontinue new Dollar Cost Averaging programs or to modify such programs at any time and for any reason.

 

  

Transfers

 

 

8


Table of Contents
Taxes         Location in Prospectus

Tax Implications

 

•  You should consult with a tax professional to determine the tax implications of an investment in and payments received under the contract.

 

•  If you purchase the contract through a qualified retirement plan or individual retirement account (IRA), you do not receive any additional tax benefit.

 

•  Withdrawals will be subject to ordinary income tax and may be subject to tax penalties.

 

  

Tax Matters

Conflicts of Interest         Location in Prospectus

Investment Professional Compensation

 

•  Your registered representative may receive compensation for selling and servicing this contract to you in the form of cash compensation (e.g., commissions), non-cash compensation (e.g., conferences, trips, prizes, and awards), and special marketing allowances.

 

•  The prospect of receiving such compensation may create an incentive for selling firms and/or their registered representative to sell you this contract versus another product with respect with which a selling firm does not receive additional compensation, or a lower level of additional compensation. You may wish to take such compensation arrangements into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the contracts.

 

  

Sales of the Contracts

Exchanges

 

•  Some investment professionals may have a financial incentive to offer you the contract in place of the one you own. Similarly, some investment professionals may have a financial incentive to offer you a different contract in place of this one. You should only exchange your current contract if you determine, after comparing the features, fees, and risks of both contracts, that it is better for you to purchase the new contract rather than continue to own your existing contract.

  

Sales of the Contracts

 

9


Table of Contents

OVERVIEW OF THE CONTRACT

 

The following is intended as a summary. Please read each section of this prospectus for additional detail.

 

This annuity is a contract between you, as the owner of the contract, and the Company. The contract is designed for retirement savings and/or other long-term investment purposes. You should consider the contract in conjunction with any other annuity contract or life insurance policy you own.

 

What are the phases of the contract?The contract has two phases — the accumulation phase and the annuity phase.

 

During the accumulation phase you can apply premium payments to the investment options available under your contract, and we provide the basic death benefit at no additional cost. The accumulation phase is the “savings” phase of the contract, in that premium payments you have made can grow on a tax-deferred basis during this phase.

 

The annuity phase is also known as the “income” phase of the contract, because it is during that phase that the Contract Value you have accumulated is applied to an annuity payment option under which you receive regular payments (generally monthly). You can choose fixed or variable income payments. If you choose variable income payments, we will base each periodic income payment upon the number of Annuity Units to which you become entitled at the time you decide to annuitize and on the value of each unit on the date the payment is determined. Once you begin taking annuity payments under the contract, you receive a stream of income payments. You will no longer have Contract Value in the contract, and you will be unable to make withdrawals.

 

Who is the contract appropriate for? The contract is designed for investors who intend to accumulate funds for retirement or other long-term financial planning purposes, and thus is best suited for those with a long investment horizon. Although you have the ability to make partial surrenders and/or surrender the contract at any time during the accumulation phase, the contract should not be viewed as a highly liquid investment. In that regard, withdrawals taken in the near term can result in you being assessed a surrender charge, which can be a significant amount. In addition, if you participate in a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit, withdrawals can markedly reduce the benefit’s value. Failure to hold the contract for the long-term would mean that you lose the opportunity for the performance of your chosen investment options to grow on a tax-deferred basis. Thus, the contract’s features are appropriate for an investor who does not have significant liquidity needs with respect to money dedicated to the contract, has a long investment horizon, and has purchased the contract for retirement purposes or other long-term financial planning purposes. The contract is not intended for those who intend to engage in frequent trading among the Subaccounts.

 

What type of contract is this? The contract is an individual flexible premium variable deferred annuity contract. We may issue it as a contract qualified under the Code (“Qualified Contract”), or as a contract that is not qualified under the Code (“Non-Qualified Contract”). This prospectus only provides disclosure about the contract. Certain features described in this prospectus may vary from your particular contract. See “The Contract” provision of this prospectus.

 

What is a Bonus Credit? The Bonus Credit is an amount we add to each premium payment we receive. For contracts issued on or after the later of October 29, 2002 or the date on which state insurance authorities approve the applicable contract modifications, and if the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 5% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. For contracts issued prior to October 29, 2002 or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve the applicable contract modifications, and if the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 4% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. If the Annuitant is age 81 or older at the time the contract is issued, we will not pay any Bonus Credits. (The Annuitant cannot be age 81 or older at the time of application unless we approve an Annuitant of an older age.) Bonus Credits are not considered “premium payments” for purposes of the contract. See the “Bonus Credits” provision of this prospectus.

 

What are my variable investment choices? Through its Subaccounts, the Separate Account uses your premium payments to purchase shares, at your direction, in one or more Portfolios. In turn, each Portfolio holds securities consistent with its own particular investment objective. See “The Separate Account” provision of this prospectus and Appendix A (which provides certain information about the underlying Portfolios corresponding to each Subaccount). Additional information about each Portfolio is provided in Appendix A to this prospectus, entitled “Portfolios Available Under the Contract.”

 

What is the Guarantee Account? The Guarantee Account is part of our General Account and pays interest at declared rates we guarantee for selected periods of time. We also guarantee the principal, after any deductions of applicable contract charges. Since the Guarantee Account is part of the General Account, we assume the risk of investment gain or loss on amounts allocated to it.

 

The Guarantee Account is not part of and does not depend on the investment performance of the Separate Account. Generally, you may transfer assets between the Guarantee Account and the

 

10


Table of Contents

Separate Account subject to certain restrictions. For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 to confirm whether the Guarantee Account is available under your contract. See “The Guarantee Account” and the “Transfers” provisions of this prospectus.

 

May I surrender the contract or take partial surrenders? Yes, subject to contract requirements and restrictions imposed under certain retirement plans. If you surrender the contract or take a partial surrender, we may assess a surrender charge. In addition, you will ordinarily be subject to income tax (except for qualified distributions from a Roth IRA or Roth account in an employer-sponsored retirement plan) and, if you are younger than age 5912 at the time of the surrender or partial surrender, a 10% IRS penalty tax. A surrender or a partial surrender may also be subject to tax withholding. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus. Certain withdrawals, depending on the amount and timing, may negatively impact the benefits and guarantees provided by your contract. For example, a partial surrender may reduce the death benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and premium tax) reduces your Contract Value. See the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus. You should carefully consider whether a withdrawal under a particular circumstance will have any negative impact to your benefits or guarantees. The impact of withdrawals generally on your benefits and guarantees is discussed in the corresponding sections of the prospectus describing such benefits and guarantees.

 

What optional benefits are available under this contract? The following optional death benefits were available by rider in addition to the Basic Death Benefit provided under the contract: (i) the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit; and (ii) the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit. Each of these optional death benefits was available at an additional charge if elected when the owner applied for the contract. The Basic Death Benefit is provided to you automatically and at no additional charge. Because this contract is no longer offered or sold, these optional riders are no longer available to be purchased or added under the contract.

 

Please see the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus for more information about these optional death benefit riders and their features.

 

Will I pay taxes on my contract earnings? The Code has certain rules that apply to the contract. These tax treatments apply to earnings included in the contract’s withdrawals, death benefits, and annuity options. You are generally not taxed on

contract earnings until you take money from your contract. This is known as tax deferral. Tax deferral is automatically provided by tax-qualified retirement plans. There is no additional tax deferral provided when a variable annuity contract is used to fund a tax-qualified retirement plan. Investors should only consider buying the contract to fund a qualified plan for the contract’s other features, such as the optional guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus.

 

11


Table of Contents

FEE TABLES

 

The following tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering or making withdrawals from the contract. Please refer to your contract data page for information about the specific fees you will pay each year based on the options you have elected.

 

The first table describes the fees and expenses that you will pay at the time that you buy the contract, surrender or make withdrawals from the contract, or transfer Contract Value between investment options. State premium taxes may also be deducted.

 

Transaction Expenses
Maximum Surrender Charge (as a percentage of premium payments withdrawn or
surrendered
):
  6%
Schedule of Surrender Charges (as a percentage of premium payments withdrawn or
surrendered
):
  Number of Completed Years
Since We Received the
Premium Payment
  Surrender Charge
as a Percentage of the
Premium Payment
Surrendered1
  0   8%
  1   8%
  2   7%
  3   6%
  4   5%
  5   4%
  6   3%
  7   2%
    8 or more   0%

Transfer Charge

  $10.002

 

1    A surrender charge is not assessed on any amounts representing gain. In addition, you may partially surrender the greater of 10% of your total premium payments or any amount surrendered to meet minimum distribution requirements under the Code each contract year without incurring a surrender charge. If you are making a withdrawal from this contract to meet annual minimum distribution requirements under the Code, and the minimum distribution amount attributable to this contract for the calendar year ending at or before the last day of the contract year exceeds the free withdrawal amount, you may withdraw the difference free of surrender charges. The free withdrawal amount is not cumulative from contract year to contract year. The surrender charge will be assessed from the amount surrendered unless otherwise requested.

 

2    We currently do not assess a transfer charge. However, we reserve the right to assess a transfer charge for each transfer among the Subaccounts.

 

12


Table of Contents

The next tables describe the fees and expenses you will pay each year during the time you own the contract, not including underlying Portfolio fees and expenses.

 

If you choose to purchase an optional benefit, you will pay additional charges, as shown below.

 

Annual Contract Expenses

         

Administrative Expenses

   $25

An annual contract charge is taken on each contract anniversary and at the time the contract is surrendered. We will not assess this charge if your Contract Value is more than $10,000 at the time the charge is assessed.

Base Contract Expenses
(as a percentage of your average daily net assets in the Separate Account):

   1.55%

The 1.55% base contract expense is the sum of a mortality and expense risk charge of 1.30% and an administrative expense charge of 0.25%.

Optional Benefit Expenses1

    
     Maximum Charge      Current Charge  
                   

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Rider2

     0.35%        0.25%  

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit Rider3

     0.35%        0.20%  

 

1    The charges for the optional death benefits are taken in arrears on each contract anniversary and at the time of surrender.

 

2    This charge is a percentage of your average benefit amount for the prior contract year.

 

3    This charge is a percentage of your average Contract Value for the prior contract year.

 

The next item shows the minimum and maximum total operating expenses charged by the Portfolios that you may pay periodically during the time that you own the contract. A complete list of Portfolios available under the contract, including their annual expenses, may be found in Appendix A.

 

Annual Portfolio Expenses              

These are expenses that are deducted from Portfolio assets, including management fees, distribution and/or service (12b-1) fees, and other expenses as of December 31, 2023.1

     
     Minimum      Maximum  

Before fee waivers and expense reimbursements

     0.31      2.005

 

1    Shown as a percentage of average net assets for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2023.

 

13


Table of Contents

Example

 

This Example is intended to help you compare the cost of investing in the contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. These costs include transaction expenses, annual contract expenses, and annual Portfolio expenses.

 

The Example assumes that you invest $100,000 in the contract for the time periods indicated. The Example also assumes that your investment has a 5% return each year and assumes the most expensive combination of annual Portfolio expenses and optional benefits available for an additional charge. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your costs would be as follows, assuming maximum expenses:

 

     1 Year     3 Years     5 Years     10 Years  
If you surrender
your contract at
the end of the
applicable time
period:
    $11,705       $19,916       $27,360       $46,573  
If you annuitize
at the end of the
applicable time
period:
    $3,760       $12,859       $22,092       $45,776  
If you do not
surrender your
contract:
    $4,505       $13,616       $22,860       $46,573  

 

The above Example assumes the following maximum expenses:

 

    Separate Account charges of 1.55% (deducted daily at an effective annual rate of the assets in the Separate Account);

 

    a charge of 0.35% for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Rider (an annual rate as a percentage of the prior contract year’s average benefit amount); and

 

    charge of 0.35% for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit Rider (an annual rate as a percentage of prior contract year’s average Contract Value).

 

If the optional riders are not elected, the expense figures shown above would be lower.

 

PRINCIPAL RISKS OF INVESTING IN THE CONTRACT

 

There are risks associated with investing in the contract. You can lose money in a variable annuity, including potentially the loss of your original investment. The value of your investment and any returns will depend on the performance of the Portfolios you select (and the Guarantee Account, if you select that option). Each Portfolio has its own unique risks.

 

Variable annuities are not short-term investment vehicles. The surrender charge applies for several years, and therefore the contract should be purchased only for the long-term. In addition, full or partial surrenders are subject to income tax to the extent they consist of earnings, and may be subject to a 10% income tax penalty if taken before age 5912. Accordingly, you should carefully consider your income and liquidity needs before purchasing a contract.

 

Investment Risk. You bear the risk of any decline in the Contract Value caused by the performance of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. Those Portfolios could decline in value very significantly, and there is a risk of loss of your entire amount invested. The risk of loss varies with each Portfolio. The investment risks are described in the prospectuses for the Portfolios.

 

Insurance Company Insolvency. It is possible that we could experience financial difficulty in the future and even become insolvent, and therefore unable to provide all of the guarantees and benefits that we promise that exceed the value of the assets in the Separate Account. Similarly, our experiencing financial difficulty could interfere with our ability to fulfill our obligations under the Guarantee Account.

 

Tax Consequences. Withdrawals are generally taxable to the extent of any earnings in the contract, and prior to age 5912 a tax penalty may apply. In addition, even if the contract is held for years before any withdrawal is made, withdrawals are taxable as ordinary income rather than capital gains.

 

Cybersecurity and Certain Business Continuity Risks. Our operations support complex transactions and are highly dependent on the proper functioning of information technology and communication systems. Any failure of or gap in the systems and processes necessary to support complex transactions and avoid systems failure, fraud, information security failures, processing errors, cyber intrusion, loss of data and breaches of regulation may lead to a materially adverse effect on our results of operations and corporate reputation. In addition, we must commit significant resources to maintain and enhance our existing systems in order to keep pace with applicable regulatory requirements, industry standards and customer preferences. If we fail to maintain secure and well-functioning information systems, we may not be able to rely on information for product pricing, compliance obligations, risk management and underwriting decisions. In addition, we cannot assure investors or consumers that interruptions, failures or breaches in security of these processes and systems will not

 

14


Table of Contents

occur, or if they do occur, that they can be timely detected and remediated. The occurrence of any of these events may have a materially adverse effect on our businesses, results of operations and financial condition.

 

Because our variable product business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners, our business is vulnerable to disruptions from utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from information systems failure (e.g., hardware and software malfunctions), and cyberattacks. These risks include, among other things, the theft, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, interference with or denial of service, attacks on websites and other operational disruption and unauthorized release of confidential customer information. Such systems failures and cyberattacks affecting us, any third party administrator, the Funds, intermediaries and other affiliated or third-party service providers may adversely affect us and your Contract Value. For instance, systems failures and cyberattacks may interfere with our processing of contract transactions, including the processing of orders from our website or with the Funds, impact our ability to calculate Accumulation Unit values, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential customer or business information, impede order processing, subject us and/or our service providers and intermediaries to regulatory fines and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. Cybersecurity risks may also impact the issuers of securities in which the Funds invest, which may cause the Funds underlying your contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that we or the Funds or our service providers will avoid losses affecting your contract due to cyberattacks or information security breaches in the future. There may be an increased risk of cyberattacks during periods of geo-political or military conflict (such as Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and the Israel-Hamas conflict).

 

Natural and Man-Made Disasters. We are also exposed to risks related to natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes, such as (but not limited to) storms, fires, floods, earthquakes, public health crises, malicious acts, geopolitical disputes, military actions, and terrorist acts, any of which could adversely affect our ability to conduct business. A natural or man-made disaster or catastrophe, including a pandemic (such as COVID-19), could affect the ability or willingness of our employees or the employees of our service providers to perform their job responsibilities. Even if our employees and the employees of our service providers are able to work remotely, those remote work arrangements could result in our business operations being less efficient than under normal circumstances and could lead to delays in our processing of contract-related transactions, including orders from contract owners. Catastrophic events may negatively affect the computer and other systems on which we rely, may interfere with our ability to receive, pick up and process mail, may interfere with our ability to calculate Contract Value, or may have other possible negative impacts. These events may also impact the issuers of securities in which the Portfolios invest, which may cause the Portfolios underlying your contract to lose value. There can be no assurance that we or the Portfolios or our service providers will be able to successfully avoid negative impacts associated with natural and man-made disasters and catastrophes.

 

We outsource certain critical business functions to third parties and, in the event of a natural or man-made disaster, rely upon the successful implementation and execution of the business continuity planning of such entities. While we monitor the business continuity activities of these third parties, successful implementation and execution of their business continuity strategies are largely beyond our control. If one or more of the third parties to whom we outsource such critical business functions experience operational failures, our ability to administer the contract could be impaired.

 

Unknown Risks and Uncertainties Associated With Artificial Intelligence. Our inability to anticipate and leverage new technology developments, such as artificial intelligence, could adversely affect the future success of our business. We may not be successful in anticipating or responding to these developments on a timely and cost-effective basis, and our investments in these capabilities may not deliver the benefits anticipated or perform as expected. Poor implementation of new technologies, including artificial intelligence, by us or our third-party service providers, could subject us to additional risks we cannot adequately mitigate, which could have a material adverse impact to our business, results of operations, and financial condition.

 

THE COMPANY

 

We are a stock life insurance company operating under a charter granted by the Commonwealth of Virginia on March 21, 1871. We principally offer life insurance policies and annuity contracts. We do business in 49 states, the District of Columbia and Bermuda. Our principal offices are at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. We are obligated to pay all amounts promised under the contract.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation serves as principal underwriter for the contracts and is a broker/dealer registered with the SEC. Genworth North America Corporation (formerly, GNA Corporation) directly owns the stock of Capital Brokerage Corporation and the Company. Genworth North America Corporation is indirectly owned by Genworth Financial, Inc., a public company.

 

15


Table of Contents

FINANCIAL CONDITION OF THE COMPANY

 

Many factors, such as investment performance, interest rates, and equity market conditions, can affect an insurance company’s financial condition. We know it is important for you to understand how this market environment may impact your Contract Value and our ability to meet the guarantees under your contract.

 

Assets in the Separate Account. You assume all of the investment risk for Contract Value allocated to the Subaccounts. Your Contract Value in the Subaccounts is part of the assets of the Separate Account. These assets may not be charged with liabilities arising from any other business that we may conduct. The assets of the Separate Account will, however, be available to cover the liabilities of our General Account to the extent that the Separate Account assets exceed the Separate Account liabilities arising under the contracts supported by it. This means that, with very limited exceptions, all assets in the Separate Account attributable to your Contract Value and that of all other contract owners would receive a priority of payment status over other claims in the event of an insolvency or receivership. See “The Separate Account” provision of this prospectus.

 

Assets in the General Account. You also may be permitted to make allocations to the Guarantee Account, which is part of our General Account. In addition, any guarantees under the contract that exceed your Contract Value, such as the guaranteed minimum death benefits associated with the death benefit rider options, are paid from our General Account (not the Separate Account). Therefore, any amounts that we may pay under the contract in excess of your value in the Separate Account are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability and our long-term ability to make such payments. We issue (or have issued) other types of insurance policies and financial products as well, and we also pay our obligations under these products from our assets in the General Account. In the event of an insolvency or receivership, payments we make from our General Account to satisfy claims under the contract would generally receive the same priority as our other policy holder obligations. This means that in the event of an insolvency or receivership, you may receive only a portion, or none, of the payments you are due under the contract. See “The Guarantee Account” provision of this prospectus.

 

Our Financial Condition. As an insurance company, we are required by state insurance regulation to hold a specified amount of reserves in order to meet all the contractual obligations of our General Account to our contract owners. In order to meet our claims-paying obligations, we regularly monitor our reserves to ensure we hold sufficient amounts to cover actual or expected contract and claims payments. In addition, we actively hedge our investments in our General Account. However, it is important to note that there is no guarantee that we will always be able to meet our claims paying obligations, and that there are risks to purchasing any insurance product.

 

State insurance regulators also require insurance companies to maintain a minimum amount of capital, which acts as a cushion in the event that the insurer suffers a financial impairment, based on the inherent risks in the insurer’s operations. These risks include those associated with losses that we may incur as the result of defaults on the payment of interest or principal on our General Account assets, which include, but are not limited to, bonds, mortgages, general real estate investments, and stocks, as well as the loss in value of these investments resulting from a loss in their market value.

 

The market effects on our investment portfolio have caused us to re-evaluate product offerings. We continue to evaluate our investment portfolio to mitigate market risk and actively manage the investments in the portfolio.

 

How to Obtain More Information. We encourage both existing and prospective contract owners to read and understand our financial statements. We prepare our financial statements on a statutory basis. Our audited financial statements, as well as the financial statements of the Separate Account, are located in the Statement of Additional Information. If you would like a free copy of the Statement of Additional Information, call (800) 352-9910 or write to our Home Office at the address listed on page 1 of this prospectus. In addition, the Statement of Additional Information is available on our website at www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra2 or on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov. You may obtain our audited statutory financial statements and any unaudited statutory financial statements that may be available by visiting our website at www.genworth.com.

 

You also will find on our website information on ratings assigned to us by one or more independent rating organizations. These ratings are opinions of an operating insurance company’s financial capacity to meet the obligations of its insurance and annuity contracts based on its financial strength and/or claims-paying ability.

 

THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

 

We established the Separate Account as a separate investment account on August 19, 1987. The Separate Account may invest in mutual funds, unit investment trusts, managed separate accounts, and other portfolios. We use the Separate Account to support the contract as well as for other purposes permitted by law.

 

16


Table of Contents

Currently, there are multiple Subaccounts of the Separate Account available under the contract. Each Subaccount invests exclusively in shares representing an interest in a separate corresponding Portfolio of the Funds.

 

The assets of the Separate Account belong to us. Nonetheless, we do not charge the assets in the Separate Account attributable to the contracts with liabilities arising out of any other business which we may conduct. The assets of the Separate Account will, however, be available to cover the liabilities of our General Account to the extent that the assets of the Separate Account exceed its liabilities arising under the contracts supported by it. Income and both realized and unrealized gains or losses from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to the income, gains, or losses arising out of any other business we may conduct. The Company is obligated to pay all amounts promised to contract owners under the contracts. Guarantees made under the contract, including any rider options, are based on the claims paying ability of the Company to the extent that the amount of the guarantee exceeds the assets available in the Separate Account.

 

We registered the Separate Account with the SEC as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (“1940 Act”). The Separate Account meets the definition of a separate account under the Federal securities laws. Registration with the SEC does not involve supervision of the management or investment practices or policies of the Separate Account by the SEC. You assume the full investment risk for all amounts you allocate to the Separate Account.

 

If permitted by law, we may deregister the Separate Account under the 1940 Act in the event registration is no longer required; manage the Separate Account under the direction of a committee; or combine the Separate Account with one of our other separate accounts. Further, to the extent permitted by applicable law, we may transfer the assets of the Separate Account to another separate account.

 

The Portfolios

 

There is a separate Subaccount which corresponds to each Portfolio of a Fund offered in this contract. You select the Subaccounts to which you allocate premium payments and Contract Value. In addition, you currently may change your future premium payment allocation without penalty or charges. In addition, there are limitations on the number of transfers that may be made each calendar year. See the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus for additional information.

 

Each Fund is registered with the SEC as an open-end management investment company under the 1940 Act. The assets of each Portfolio are separate from other portfolios of a Fund and each Portfolio has separate investment objectives and policies. As a result, each Portfolio operates as a separate Portfolio and the investment performance of one Portfolio has no effect on the investment performance of any other Portfolio.

 

Certain Portfolios may invest substantially all of their assets in portfolios of other funds. As a result, you will pay fees and expenses at both portfolio levels. This will reduce your investment return. These arrangements are referred to as “funds of funds” or “master-feeder funds.” Funds of funds or master-feeder structures may have higher expenses than Portfolios that invest directly in debt or equity securities.

 

Certain Portfolios may employ hedging strategies to provide for downside protection during sharp downward movements in equity markets. The cost of these hedging strategies could limit the upside participation of the Portfolio in rising equity markets relative to other Portfolios. You should consult with your registered representative to determine which combination of investment choices is appropriate for you.

 

Information regarding each Portfolio, including (i) its name; (ii) its type (e.g., money market fund, bond fund, balanced fund, etc.); (iii) its investment adviser and any sub-adviser; (iv) current expenses; and (v) performance is available in Appendix A to this prospectus. Each Portfolio has issued a prospectus that contains more detailed information about the Portfolio. Before choosing a Subaccount to which you will allocate your premium payments and Contract Value, carefully read the prospectus for each Portfolio, along with this prospectus. You may obtain the most recent prospectus for each Portfolio by calling us at (800) 352-9910, or writing us at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. You may also obtain copies of the prospectus for each Portfolio on our website at www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra2. There is no assurance that any of the Portfolios will meet these objectives. We do not guarantee any minimum value for the amounts you allocate to the Separate Account. You bear the investment risk of investing in the Portfolios.

 

The investment objectives and policies of certain Portfolios are similar to the investment objectives and policies of other portfolios that may be managed by the same investment adviser or manager. The investment results of the Portfolios, however, may be higher or lower than the results of such other portfolios. There can be no assurance, and no representation is made, that the investment results of any of the Portfolios will be comparable to the investment results of any other Portfolio, even if the other Portfolio has the same investment adviser or manager, or if the other Portfolio has a similar name.

 

17


Table of Contents

Subaccounts

 

You may allocate premium payments and Contract Value to Subaccounts that invest in the Portfolios in addition to the Guarantee Account (if available) at any one time. We will purchase shares of the Portfolios at net asset value and direct them to the appropriate Subaccounts. We will redeem sufficient shares of the appropriate Portfolios at net asset value to pay death benefits and surrender or partial surrender proceeds; to make income payments; or for other purposes described in the contract. We automatically reinvest all dividend and capital gain distributions of the Portfolios in shares of the distributing Portfolios at their net asset value on the date of distribution. In other words, we do not pay Portfolio dividends or Portfolio distributions out to owners as additional units, but instead reflect them in unit values.

 

Shares of the Portfolios are not sold directly to the general public. They are sold to us, and they may also be sold to other insurance companies that issue variable annuity contracts and variable life insurance policies. In addition, they may be sold to retirement plans.

 

When a Fund sells shares in any of its Portfolios both to variable annuity and to variable life insurance separate accounts, it engages in mixed funding. When a Fund sells shares in any of its Portfolios to separate accounts of unaffiliated life insurance companies, it engages in shared funding.

 

Each Fund may engage in mixed and shared funding. Therefore, due to differences in redemption rates or tax treatment, or other considerations, the interests of various shareholders participating in a Fund could conflict. A Fund’s Board of Directors will monitor for the existence of any material conflicts, and determine what action, if any, should be taken. See the prospectuses for the Portfolios for additional information.

 

We reserve the right, subject to applicable law, to make additions, deletions and substitutions for the Portfolios of the Funds. We may substitute shares of other portfolios for shares already purchased, or to be purchased in the future, under the contract. This substitution might occur if shares of a Portfolio should no longer be available, or if investment in any Portfolio’s shares should become inappropriate for the purposes of the contract in the judgment of our management. In addition, the new Portfolios may have higher fees and charges than the ones they replaced. No substitution or deletion will be made without prior notice to you and before approval of the SEC, in accordance with the 1940 Act.

 

We also reserve the right to establish additional Subaccounts, each of which would invest in a separate Portfolio of a Fund, or in shares of another investment company, with a specified investment objective. We may also eliminate one or more Subaccounts if, in our sole discretion, marketing, tax, or investment conditions warrant. We will not eliminate a Subaccount without prior notice to you and before approval of the SEC. Not all Subaccounts may be available to all classes of contracts.

 

There are a number of factors that are considered when deciding what Portfolios are made available in your variable annuity contract. Such factors include:

 

  (1)   the investment objective of the Portfolio;

 

  (2)   the Portfolio’s performance history;

 

  (3)   the Portfolio’s holdings and strategies it uses to try and meet its objectives; and

 

  (4)   the Portfolio’s servicing agreement.

 

The investment objective is critical because we want to have Portfolios with diverse objectives so that an investor may diversify his or her investment holdings, from a conservative to an aggressive investment portfolio, depending on the advice of his or her investment adviser and risk assessment. There is no assurance, however, that a Portfolio will achieve its stated investment objective. When selecting a Portfolio for our products, we also consider the Portfolio’s performance history compared to its peers and whether its holdings and strategies are consistent with its objectives. Please keep in mind that past performance does not guarantee future results. Finally, it is important for us to be able to provide you with a wide array of the services that facilitate your investment program relating to your allocation in Subaccounts that invest in the Portfolios. The Company does not provide investment advice and does not recommend or endorse any particular Subaccount or Portfolio. You bear the entire risk of any decline in your Contract Value resulting from the investment performance of the Subaccounts you have chosen.

 

Payments from Funds and Fund Affiliates. We have entered into agreements with either the investment adviser or distributor of each of the Funds and/or, in certain cases, a Portfolio, under which the Portfolio, the adviser or distributor may make payments to us and/or to certain of our affiliates. We consider these payments and fees among a number of factors when deciding to add or keep a Portfolio on the menu of Portfolios that we offer through the contract. These payments may be made in connection with certain administrative and other services we provide relating to the Portfolios. Such administrative services we provide or obtain include but are not limited to: accounting transactions for variable owners and then providing one daily purchase and sale order on behalf of each Portfolio; providing copies of Portfolio prospectuses,

 

18


Table of Contents

Statements of Additional Information and any supplements thereto; forwarding proxy voting information, gathering the

information and providing vote totals to the Portfolio on behalf of our owners; and providing customer service on behalf of the Portfolios, including the provision of teleservicing support in connection with the Portfolios and the provision of office space, equipment, facilities and personnel as may be reasonably required or beneficial in order to provide these services to contract owners. The amount of the payments is based on a percentage of the average annual aggregate net amount we have invested in the Portfolio on behalf of the Separate Account and other separate accounts funding certain variable insurance contracts that we and our affiliates issue. These percentages differ, and some Portfolios, investment advisers or distributors pay us a greater percentage than other Portfolios, advisers or distributors based on the level of administrative and other services provided. The availability of these types of arrangements may create an incentive for us to seek and to add as an investment option under the contract funds or portfolios (and classes of shares of such portfolios) that pay us higher amounts. Other funds or portfolios (or available classes of shares of such portfolios) with substantially similar investment objectives may have lower fees and better overall investment performance than the Funds and Portfolios offered through your contract.

 

We may realize a profit from payments received from a Portfolio or from the adviser and/or the distributor. We may use the proceeds of such payment to pay for the services described above or for any corporate purpose, including payment of expenses (i) that we and/or our affiliates incur in promoting, marketing and administering the contracts, and (ii) that we incur, in our role as intermediary, in maintaining the Portfolios as investment options and facilitating the Subaccounts’ investment in the Portfolios

 

The amount received from certain Portfolios for the assets allocated to the Portfolios from the Separate Account during 2023 ranged from 0.15% to 0.25% of annualized average daily net assets. The Portfolios that pay a service fee to us are:

 

Advanced Series Trust (formerly, The Prudential Series Fund):

AST International Equity Portfolio — Class I Shares

 

Eaton Vance Variable Trust:

VT Floating-Rate Income Fund

 

PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust:

High Yield Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

International Bond Portfolio (U.S. Dollar Hedged) — Administrative Class Shares

Long-Term U.S. Government Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Total Return Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

 

The Prudential Series Fund:

PSF Mid-Cap Growth Portfolio — Class II Shares

PSF PGIM Jennison Blend Portfolio — Class II Shares

PSF PGIM Jennison Growth Portfolio — Class II Shares

 

State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc.:

Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

 

As noted above, an investment adviser or distributor of a Portfolio, or its affiliates, may make payments to us and/or certain of our affiliates. These payments may be derived, in whole or in part, from the profits the investment adviser or sub-adviser receives on the advisory fee deducted from Portfolio assets. Contract owners, through their indirect investment in the Portfolios, bear the costs of these advisory fees (see the prospectuses for the Portfolios for more information). The amount received from the adviser and/or the distributor for the assets allocated to the Portfolios from the Separate Account during 2023 ranged from 0.076% to 0.35%. Payment of these amounts is not an additional charge to you by the Funds or by us, but comes from the Fund’s investment adviser or distributor. These payments may vary by Portfolio. Therefore, the amount of such payments paid to us may be greater or smaller based on the Portfolios you select.

 

In addition to the asset-based payments for administrative and other services described above, the investment adviser or the distributor of the Fund may also pay us or our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation, to participate in periodic sales meetings, for expenses relating to the production of promotional sales literature and for other expenses or services. The amount paid to us, or our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation, may be significant. Payments to participate in sales meetings may provide a Fund’s investment adviser or distributor with greater access to our internal and external wholesalers to provide training, marketing support and educational presentations.

 

In consideration of services provided and expenses incurred by Capital Brokerage Corporation in distributing shares of the Funds, Capital Brokerage Corporation also receives Rule 12b-1 fees from AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc., AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds), Columbia Funds Variable Series Trust II, Eaton Vance Variable Trust, Federated Hermes Insurance Series, Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund, Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust, Janus Aspen Series, Legg Mason Partners Variable Equity Trust, MFS® Variable Insurance Trust, MFS® Variable Insurance Trust II, and The Prudential Series Fund. See the prospectuses for the Portfolios for additional information. These payments range up to 0.25% of Separate Account assets invested in the particular Portfolio. Certain Portfolios may accrue Rule 12b-1 fees at a higher rate (as disclosed in the prospectus for the Portfolio), but payments to us and/or Capital

 

19


Table of Contents

Brokerage Corporation may be made in a lower amount. Not all of the Portfolios may pay the same amount of Rule 12b-1 fees or shareholder servicing fees. Therefore, the amount of such fees paid to us and/or Capital Brokerage Corporation may be greater or smaller based on the Portfolios you select.

 

Voting Rights

 

As required by law, we will vote the shares of the Portfolios held in the Separate Account at special shareholder meetings based on instructions from you. However, if the law changes and we are permitted to vote in our own right, we may elect to do so. Further, in certain limited circumstances, we may override a contract owner’s voting instructions consistent with SEC order.

 

Whenever a Fund calls a shareholder meeting, owners with voting interests in a Portfolio will be notified of issues requiring the shareholders’ vote as soon as possible before the shareholder meeting. Persons having a voting interest in the Portfolio will be provided with proxy voting materials, reports, other materials, and a form with which to give voting instructions.

 

We will determine the number of votes which you have the right to cast by applying your percentage interest in a Subaccount to the total number of votes attributable to the Subaccount. In determining the number of votes, we will recognize fractional shares.

 

We will vote Portfolio shares for which no instructions are received (or instructions are not received timely), as well as shares of the Portfolio that the Company itself owns, in the same proportion to those that are received. Therefore, because of proportional voting, a small number of contract owners may control the outcome of a vote. We will apply voting instructions to abstain on any item to be voted on a pro-rata basis to reduce the number of votes eligible to be cast.

 

THE GUARANTEE ACCOUNT

 

Amounts in the Guarantee Account are held in, and are part of, our General Account. The General Account consists of our assets other than those allocated to this and other Separate Accounts. Subject to statutory authority, we have sole discretion over the investment of assets of the General Account. The assets of the General Account are chargeable with liabilities arising out of any business we may conduct.

 

Due to certain exemptive and exclusionary provisions of the federal securities laws, we have not registered interests in the Guarantee Account under the Securities Act of 1933 (the “1933 Act”), and we have not registered either the Guarantee Account or our General Account as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Accordingly, neither the interests in the Guarantee Account nor our General Account are generally subject to regulation under the 1933 Act and the 1940 Act. Disclosures relating to the interests in the Guarantee Account and the General Account, may however, be subject to certain generally applicable provisions of the federal securities laws relating to the accuracy of statements made in a registration statement. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or markets.

 

Generally, you may allocate your premium payments and/or transfer assets to the Guarantee Account. For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, we may limit the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. Currently, for such contracts, no more than 25% of your Contract Value, as determined at the time of allocation, may be allocated to the Guarantee Account. In addition, where permitted by state law, we will refuse new premium payments or transfers into the Guarantee Account when your assets in the Guarantee Account are equal to or greater than 25% of your Contract Value at the time of allocation. We generally exercise our right to limit or refuse allocations to the Guarantee Account when interest rate periods are low for prolonged periods of time. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the Guarantee Account available under your contract. Amounts allocated to the Guarantee Account are credited interest (as described below). Assets in the Guarantee Account are subject to some, but not all, of the charges we assess in connection with your contract. See the “Charges and Other Deductions” provision of this prospectus.

 

Each time you allocate premium payments or transfer assets to the Guarantee Account, we establish an interest rate guarantee period. For each interest rate guarantee period, we guarantee an interest rate for a specified period of time. At the end of an interest rate guarantee period, a new interest rate will become effective, and a new interest rate guarantee period for one year will commence for the remaining portion of that particular allocation.

 

We determine the interest rates at our sole discretion. The determination made will be influenced by, but not necessarily correspond to, interest rates available on fixed income investments which we may acquire with the amounts we receive as premium payments or transfers of assets under the contracts. You will have no direct or indirect interest in these investments. We also will consider other factors in determining interest rates for a guarantee period including, but not limited to, regulatory and tax requirements, sales commissions, and administrative expenses borne by us, general economic trends,

 

20


Table of Contents

and competitive factors. Amounts you allocate to the Guarantee Account (if available) will not share in the investment performance of our General Account. We cannot predict or guarantee the level of interest rates in future guarantee periods. However, the interest rates for any interest rate guarantee period will be at least the guaranteed interest rate shown in your contract.

 

We will notify you in writing at least 5 days prior to the expiration date of any interest rate guarantee period about the then currently available interest rate guarantee periods and the guaranteed interest rates applicable to such interest rate guarantee periods. A new one year interest rate guarantee period will commence automatically unless we receive written notice prior to the end of the 30-day period following the expiration of the interest rate guarantee period (“30-day window”) of your election of a different interest rate guarantee period from among those being offered by us at that time, or instructions to transfer all or a portion of the remaining amount to one or more Subaccounts subject to certain restrictions. See the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus. During the 30-day window, the allocation will accrue interest at the new interest rate guarantee period’s interest rate.

 

To the extent permitted by law, we reserve the right at any time to offer interest rate guarantee periods that differ than those available when we issued the contract, and to credit a higher rate of interest on premium payments allocated to the Guarantee Account participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program than would otherwise be credited if not participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program. See the “Dollar Cost Averaging Program” provision of this prospectus. Such a program may not be available to all contracts. We also reserve the right, at any time, to stop accepting premium payments or transfers of assets to a particular interest rate guarantee period. Since the specific interest rate guarantee periods available may change periodically, please contact our Home Office at the address listed on page 1 of this prospectus to determine the interest rate guarantee periods currently being offered.

 

CHARGES AND OTHER DEDUCTIONS

 

We sell the contracts through registered representatives of broker-dealers. These registered representatives are also appointed and licensed as insurance agents of the Company. We pay commissions to the broker-dealers for selling the contracts. We intend to recover commissions, marketing, administrative and other expenses and costs of contract benefits, and other incentives we pay, through fees and charges imposed under the contracts and other corporate revenue. See the “Sales of the Contracts” provision of this prospectus for more information.

 

All of the charges described in this section apply to assets allocated to the Separate Account. Assets in the Guarantee Account are subject to all of the charges described in this section except for the mortality and expense risk charge and the administrative expense charge.

 

We will deduct the charges described below to cover our costs and expenses, services provided, and risks assumed under the contracts. We incur certain costs and expenses for the distribution and administration of the contracts and for providing the benefits payable thereunder. Our administrative services include:

 

    processing applications for and issuing the contracts;

 

    maintaining records;

 

    administering income payments;

 

    furnishing accounting and valuation services (including the calculation and monitoring of daily Subaccount values);

 

    reconciling and depositing cash receipts;

 

    providing tax forms;

 

    providing contract confirmations and periodic statements;

 

    providing toll-free inquiry services; and

 

    furnishing telephone and internet transaction services.

 

The risks we assume include:

 

    the risk that the death benefit will be greater than the Surrender Value;

 

    the risk that the actual life-span of persons receiving income payments under the contract will exceed the assumptions reflected in our guaranteed rates (these rates are incorporated in the contract and cannot be changed);

 

    the risk that more owners than expected will qualify for waivers of the surrender charges; and

 

    the risk that our costs in providing the services will exceed our revenues from contract charges (which cannot be changed by us).

 

We designed the Bonus Credit as part of the overall sales load structure for the contracts. When the contracts were designed, we set the Bonus Credit level and the level of the surrender charge to reflect the overall level of sales load and distribution expenses associated with the contracts. Although there is no specific charge for the Bonus Credit, we may use a portion of the surrender charge and mortality and expense risk charge to

 

21


Table of Contents

help recover the cost of providing the Bonus Credit under the contract. We may realize a profit from this feature.

 

The amount of the charges may not necessarily correspond to the costs associated with providing the services or benefits indicated by the designation of the charge. For example, the surrender charge we collect may not fully cover all of the sales and distribution expenses we actually incur. We also may realize a profit on one or more of the charges. We may use any such profits for any corporate purpose, including the payment of sales expenses.

 

Transaction Expenses

 

Surrender Charge

 

We assess a surrender charge on partial and total surrenders of each premium payment taken within the first eight years after receipt, unless you meet the exceptions as described below. You pay this charge to compensate us for the losses we experience on contract distribution costs.

 

We calculate the surrender charge separately for each premium payment. For purposes of calculating this charge, we assume that you withdraw premium payments on a first-in, first-out basis. We deduct the surrender charge proportionately from the Subaccounts. However, if there are insufficient assets in the Subaccounts, we will deduct the charge from all assets in the Guarantee Account. Charges taken from the Guarantee Account will be taken first from assets that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time. The surrender charge is as follows:

 

Number of Completed

Years Since We

Received the

Premium Payment

  Surrender Charge
as a Percentage of
the Premium Payment
Surrendered
0   8%
1   8%
2   7%
3   6%
4   5%
5   4%
6   3%
7   2%
8 or more   0%

 

Exceptions to the Surrender Charge

 

We do not assess the surrender charge:

 

    of amounts of Contract Value representing gain (as defined below) or Bonus Credits;

 

    of free withdrawal amounts (as defined below);

 

    on total or partial surrenders taken under Optional Payment Plan 1, Optional Payment Plan 2 (for a period of 5 or more years), or Optional Payment Plan 5; or

 

    if a waiver of surrender charge provision applies.

 

You may surrender any gain in your contract (including any Bonus Credits) free of any surrender charge. We calculate gain in the contract as: (a) plus (b) minus (c) minus (d), but not less than zero where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the Valuation Day we receive your partial or total surrender request;

 

  (b)   is the total of any partial surrenders previously taken, including surrender charges;

 

  (c)   is the total of premium payments made; and

 

  (d)   is the total of any gain previously surrendered.

 

In addition to any gain, you may partially surrender an amount equal to the greater of 10% of your total premium payments or any amount surrendered to meet minimum distribution requirements under the Code each contract year without a surrender charge (the “free withdrawal amount”). If you are making a withdrawal from this contract to meet annual minimum distribution requirements under the Code, and the minimum distribution amount attributable to this contract for the calendar year ending at or before the last day of the contract year exceeds the free withdrawal amount, you may withdraw the difference free of surrender charges. We will deduct amounts surrendered first from any gain in the contract and then from premiums paid. The free withdrawal amount is not cumulative from contract year to contract year. (For tax purposes, a surrender is usually treated as a withdrawal of earnings first.).

 

Further, we will waive the surrender charge if you annuitize the contract under Optional Payment Plan 1 (Life Income with Period Certain), Optional Payment Plan 2 (Income for a Fixed Period) provided that you select a fixed period of 5 years or more, or Optional Payment Plan 5 (Joint Life and Survivor Income). See the “Optional Payment Plans” provision of this prospectus.

 

We also will waive surrender charges arising from a surrender occurring before income payments begin if, at the time we receive the surrender request, we have received due proof that the Annuitant has a qualifying terminal illness, or has a qualifying confinement to a state licensed or legally operated hospital or inpatient nursing facility for a minimum period as set forth in the contract (provided the confinement began, or the illness was diagnosed, at least one year after the contract was issued). If you surrender the contract under the terminal illness waiver, please remember that we will pay your Contract Value,

 

22


Table of Contents

which could be less than the death benefit otherwise available. All Annuitants must be age 80 or younger on the Contract Date to be eligible for this waiver. The terms and conditions of the waivers are set forth in your contract.

 

Deductions from the Separate Account

 

We deduct from the Separate Account an amount, computed daily, at an annual rate of 1.55% of the daily net assets of the Separate Account. The charge consists of an administrative expense charge at an effective annual rate of 0.25% and a mortality and expense risk charge at an effective annual rate of 1.30%. These deductions from the Separate Account are reflected in your Contract Value.

 

Charges for the Death Benefit Rider Options

 

Charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

 

We charge you for expenses related to the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We deduct this charge against the Contract Value at each contract anniversary and at the time you fully surrender the contract. This charge is assessed in order to compensate us for the increased risks and expenses associated with providing the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We will allocate the annual charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in the Separate Account at the time we take the charge. If the assets in the Separate Account are not sufficient to cover the charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, we will deduct the charge first from your assets in the Separate Account, if any, and then from your assets in the Guarantee Account (from the amounts that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time). At full surrender, we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge.

 

We guarantee that this charge will never exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your prior contract year’s average benefit amount (we currently charge 0.25%). The rate that applies to your contract is fixed at issue.

 

Charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit

 

We charge you for expenses related to the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit. At the beginning of each contract year after the first contract year, we deduct a charge against the average of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value at the beginning of the previous contract year; and

 

  (2)   the Contract Value at the end of the previous contract year.

 

At surrender, the charge is made against the average of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value at the beginning of the current contract year; and

 

  (2)   the Contract Value at surrender.

 

The charge at surrender will be a pro rata portion of the annual charge.

 

We currently charge an annual rate of 0.20% of your average Contract Value as described above. However, we guarantee that this charge will never exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your prior contract year’s average Contract Value. The rate that applies to your contract will be fixed at issue. We will allocate the annual charge among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in all Subaccounts at the time we take the charge. If there are not sufficient assets in the Subaccounts to cover the charge, we will deduct the charge first from your assets in the Separate Account, if any, and then from your assets in the Guarantee Account. Deductions from the Guarantee Account will be taken first from the amounts (including any interest earned) that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time.

 

Other Charges

 

Annual Contract Charge

 

We will deduct an annual contract charge of $25 from your Contract Value to compensate us for certain administrative expenses incurred in connection with the contract. We will deduct the charge on each contract anniversary and at full surrender. We will waive this charge if your Contract Value at the time of deduction is $10,000 or more.

 

We will allocate the annual contract charge among the Subaccounts in the same proportion that your assets in each Subaccount bear to your total assets in the Separate Account at the time the charge is taken. If there are insufficient assets allocated to the Separate Account, we will deduct any remaining portion of the charge from the Guarantee Account proportionally from all assets in the Guarantee Account.

 

Deductions for Premium Taxes

 

We will deduct charges for any premium tax or other tax levied by any governmental entity from premium payments or Contract Value when the premium tax is incurred or when we pay proceeds under the contract (proceeds include surrenders, partial surrenders, income payments and death benefit payments).

 

The applicable premium tax rates that states and other governmental entities impose on the purchase of an annuity are

 

23


Table of Contents

subject to change by legislation, by administrative interpretation, or by judicial action. These premium taxes generally depend upon the law of your state of residence. The tax generally ranges from 0.0% to 3.5%.

 

Portfolio Charges

 

Each Portfolio incurs certain fees and expenses. These include management fees and other expenses associated with the daily operation of each Portfolio, as well as Rule 12b-1 fees and/or service share fees, if applicable. To pay for these expenses, the Portfolio makes deductions from its assets. A Portfolio may also impose a redemption charge on Subaccount assets that are redeemed from the Portfolio. Portfolio expenses, including any redemption charges, are more fully described in the prospectus for each Portfolio. Portfolio expenses are the responsibility of the Portfolio or Fund. They are not fixed or specified under the terms of the contract and are not the responsibility of the Company.

 

Transfer Charges

 

We reserve the right to impose a charge of up to $10 per transfer. This charge represents the costs we incur for effecting any such transfer. We will not realize a profit from imposing this charge.

 

THE CONTRACT

 

The contract is an individual flexible deferred variable annuity contract. Your rights and benefits are described below and in the contract. There may be differences in your contract (such as differences in fees, charges, and benefits) because of requirements of the state where we issued your contract. We will include any such differences in your contract.

 

This contract is no longer offered and sold and, therefore, the optional benefits and features described in this prospectus are no longer available to purchase under the contract. Please refer to your contract and your contract data pages to determine the benefits and features available under your contract.

 

Even though this contract is no longer available for new sales, additional premium payments may be made in accordance with the terms of the contract and as described in the “Premium Payments” provision.

 

Generally, you must maintain a minimum amount of Contract Value after a partial surrender to keep your contract in effect. For example, if your partial surrender request would reduce your Contract Value to less than $1,000, we will surrender your contract in full.

 

This contract may be used with certain tax qualified retirement plans. The contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit; the purchase of this contract does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. Accordingly, if this contract is purchased as a Qualified Contract, you should consider purchasing the contract for its death benefit, income benefits, and other non-tax-related benefits. Please consult a tax adviser for information specific to your circumstances in order to determine whether this contract is an appropriate investment for you.

 

Purchasing the contract through a tax-free “Section 1035” exchange. Section 1035 of the Code generally permits you to exchange one annuity contract for another in a “tax-free exchange.” Therefore, you can use the proceeds from another annuity contract to make premium payments for this contract. Before making an exchange, you should carefully compare this contract to your current contract. You may have to pay a surrender charge under your current contract to exchange it for this contract, and this contract has its own surrender charges which would apply to you. The fees and charges under this contract may be higher (or lower), and the benefits may be different, than those of your current contract. In addition, you may have to pay federal income and penalty taxes on the exchange if it does not qualify for Section 1035 treatment. You should not exchange another contract for this contract unless you determine, after evaluating all of the facts, that the exchange is in your best interest. Please note that the person who sells you this contract generally will earn a commission on the sale.

 

Ownership

 

As owner, you have all rights under the contract, subject to the rights of any irrevocable beneficiary. Two persons may apply for a contract as joint owners. Joint owners have equal undivided interests in their contract. A joint owner may not be named for a Qualified Contract. That means that each may exercise any ownership rights on behalf of the other, except for ownership changes. Joint owners also have the right of survivorship. This means if a joint owner dies, his or her interest in the contract passes to the surviving owner. You must have our approval to add a joint owner after we issue the contract. We may require additional information if joint ownership is requested after the contract is issued.

 

Subject to certain restrictions imposed by electable rider options and as otherwise stated below, before the Maturity Date, you may change:

 

    your Maturity Date to any date at least ten years after your last premium payment;

 

24


Table of Contents
    your Optional Payment Plan;

 

    the allocation of your investments among the Subaccounts and/or the Guarantee Account (subject to certain restrictions listed in your contract and in the “Transfers” provision); and

 

    the owner, joint owner, primary beneficiary, contingent beneficiary (unless the primary beneficiary or contingent beneficiary is named as an irrevocable beneficiary), and contingent Annuitant upon written notice to our Home Office, and provided the Annuitant is living at the time of the request. If you change a beneficiary, your plan selection will no longer be in effect unless you request that it continue. In addition, you may change any non-natural owner to another non-natural owner. Changing the owner or joint owner may have tax consequences and you should consult a tax adviser before doing so.

 

We must receive your request for a change at our Home Office in a form satisfactory to us. The change will take effect as of the date you sign the request. The change will be subject to any payment made before we recorded the change.

 

Assignment

 

An owner of a Non-Qualified Contract may assign some or all of his or her rights under the contract with our consent. However, an assignment may terminate certain death benefits provided by rider option. An assignment must occur before the Maturity Date and while the Annuitant is still living. Once proper notice of the assignment is recorded by our Home Office, the assignment will become effective as of the date the written request was signed.

 

Qualified Contracts, IRAs and Tax Sheltered Annuities may not be assigned, pledged or otherwise transferred except where allowed by law.

 

We are not responsible for the validity or tax consequences of any assignment. We are not liable for any payment or settlement made before the assignment is recorded. Assignments will not be recorded until our Home Office receives sufficient direction from the owner and the assignee regarding the proper allocation of contract rights.

 

Amounts pledged or assigned will be treated as distributions and will be included in gross income to the extent that the Contract Value exceeds the investment in the contract for the taxable year in which it was pledged or assigned.

 

Assignment of the entire Contract Value may cause the portion of the contract exceeding the total investment in the contract and previously taxed amounts to be included in gross income for federal income tax purposes each year that the assignment is in effect.

 

Amounts assigned may be subject to an IRS tax penalty equal to 10% of the amount included in gross income.

 

Premium Payments

 

You may make premium payments at any frequency and in the amount you select, subject to certain limitations. You must obtain our approval before you make total premium payments for an Annuitant age 79 or younger that exceed $2,000,000 in the aggregate in any variable annuity contracts issued by the Company or any of its affiliates. If the Annuitant is age 80 or older at the time of payment, the total amount not subject to prior approval is $1,000,000 in the aggregate in any variable annuity contracts issued by the Company or any of its affiliates. Premium payments may be made at any time prior to the Maturity Date, the surrender of the contract, or the death of the owner (or joint owner, if applicable), whichever comes first. We reserve the right to refuse to accept a premium payment for any lawful reason and in a manner that does not unfairly discriminate against similarly situated purchasers.

 

The minimum initial premium payment is $10,000. We may accept a lower initial premium payment in the case of certain group sales. Each additional premium payment must be at least $1,000 for Non-Qualified Contracts ($200 if paid by electronic fund transfers), $50 for IRA Contracts, and $100 for other Qualified Contracts.

 

Valuation Day and Valuation Period

 

We will value Accumulation and Annuity Units once daily as of the close of regular trading (currently 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time) for each day the New York Stock Exchange is open except for days on which a Portfolio does not value its shares. If a Valuation Period contains more than one day, the unit values will be the same for each day in the Valuation Period. Premium payments are credited to a contract on the basis of accumulation unit value next determined after receipt of a premium payment.

 

Allocation of Premium Payments

 

We place premium payments into the Subaccounts, each of which invests in shares of a corresponding Portfolio, and/or the Guarantee Account, according to your instructions. You may allocate premium payments in the Subaccounts plus the Guarantee Account at any one time. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or in all markets. The percentage of premium payment which you can put into any one Subaccount or guarantee period must equal a whole percentage and cannot be less than $100.

 

25


Table of Contents

Upon allocation to the appropriate Subaccounts, we convert premium payments into Accumulation Units. We determine the number of Accumulation Units credited by dividing the amount allocated to each Subaccount by the value of an Accumulation Unit for that Subaccount on the Valuation Day on which we receive any additional premium payment at our Home Office. The number of Accumulation Units determined in this way is not changed by any subsequent change in the value of an Accumulation Unit. However, the dollar value of an Accumulation Unit will vary depending not only upon how well the Portfolio’s investments perform, but also upon the expenses of the Separate Account and the Portfolios.

 

We allocate any premium payments we receive that are not accompanied with new instructions in accordance with any prior valid instructions. You may change the allocation of subsequent premium payments at any time, without charge, by sending us acceptable notice. The new allocation will apply to any new premium payments made after we receive notice of the change at our Home Office.

 

Bonus Credits

 

The Bonus Credit is an amount we add to each premium payment we receive. For contracts issued on or after the later of October 29, 2002 or the date on which state insurance authorities approve the applicable contract modifications, and if the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 5% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. For contracts issued prior to October 29, 2002 or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve the applicable contract modifications, and if the Annuitant is age 80 or younger when the contract is issued, we will add 4% of each premium payment to your Contract Value. If the Annuitant is age 81 or older at the time of issue, we will not pay any Bonus Credits. The Annuitant cannot be age 81 or older at the time of application, unless we approve an Annuitant of an older age. We fund the Bonus Credits from our General Account. We apply the Bonus Credits when we apply your premium payment to your Contract Value, and allocate the credits on a pro-rata basis to the investment options you select in the same ratio as the applicable premium payment. We do not consider Bonus Credits as “premium payments” for purposes of the contract. You should know that over time and under certain circumstances (such as an extended period of poor market performance), the costs associated with the Bonus Credit may exceed the sum of the Bonus Credit and any related earnings. You should consider this possibility before purchasing the contract. The Bonus Credit is referred to as an “enhanced premium amount” in your contract.

 

Valuation of Accumulation Units

 

Partial surrenders, surrenders and payment of a death benefit all result in the cancellation of an appropriate number of Accumulation Units. We cancel Accumulation Units as of the end of the Valuation Period on which we receive notice or instructions with regard to the surrender, partial surrender or payment of a death benefit. We value Accumulation Units for each Subaccount separately. The Accumulation Unit value at the end of every Valuation Day equals the Accumulation Unit value at the end of the preceding Valuation Day multiplied by the net investment factor (described below). We arbitrarily set the Accumulation Unit value at the inception of the Subaccount at $10. On any Valuation Day, we determine your Subaccount value by multiplying the number of Accumulation Units attributable to your contract by the Accumulation Unit value for that day.

 

The net investment factor is an index used to measure the investment performance of a Subaccount from one Valuation Period to the next. The net investment factor for any Subaccount for any Valuation Period reflects the change in the net asset value per share of the Portfolio held in the Subaccount from one Valuation Period to the next, adjusted for the daily deduction of the administrative expense charges and mortality and expense risk charges from assets in the Subaccount. If any “ex-dividend” date occurs during the Valuation Period, we take into account the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distribution so that the unit value is not impacted. Also, if we need to reserve money for taxes, we take into account a per share charge or credit for any taxes reserved for which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount.

 

The value of an Accumulation Unit may increase or decrease based on the net investment factor. Changes in the net investment factor may not be directly proportional to changes in the net asset value of the Portfolio because of the deduction of Separate Account charges. Though the number of Accumulation Units will not change as a result of investment experience, the value of an Accumulation Unit may increase or decrease from Valuation Period to Valuation Period.

 

26


Table of Contents

BENEFITS AVAILABLE UNDER THE CONTRACT

 

The following table summarizes information about the benefits available under the contract.

 

Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations

Basic Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued on or after the later of May 15, 2001, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

  

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the Basic Death Benefit will be equal to the greater of: (1) the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and (2) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the death benefit will be equal to the greatest of: (1) the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where: (a) is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and (b) is premium payments received after such contract anniversary. The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary. (2) the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and (3) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death.

   Standard    No additional fee   

•  We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

27


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations

Basic Death Benefit

 

(for contracts issued prior to May 15, 2001, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications)

  

The death benefit equals the sum of (a) and (b) where: (a) the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and (b) is the excess, if any, of the unadjusted death benefit as of the date of the Annuitant’s death over the Contract Value as of the date of the Annuitant’s death, with interest credited on that excess from the date of the Annuitant’s death to the date of distribution.

 

The rate credited may depend on applicable law or regulation. Otherwise, we will set it.

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greater of: (1) the Contract Value as of the date of death; and (2) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greatest of: (1) the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where: (a) is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and (b) is premium payments received after such contract anniversary. The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment for any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary. (2) the Contract Value as of the date of death; and (3) premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date of death.

   Standard    No additional fee   

•  We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

•  The unadjusted death benefit varies based on the Annuitant’s age at the time we issued the contract and on the Annuitant’s age at the time of death.

 

28


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit    Adds an extra feature to the Basic Death Benefit. Under the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, the amount we pay as of the date we receive due proof of death of any Annuitant will be the greater of: (a) the Basic Death Benefit and (b) the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit as calculated under the rider.    Optional    0.35% of the prior year’s average Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit   

•  We will adjust the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit    Adds an extra feature to our Basic Death Benefit and, if applicable, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, in the form of an additional death benefit amount equal to a percentage of earnings under the contract.    Optional    0.35% of your average Contract Value for the prior contract year   

•  Once you purchase the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit, you cannot terminate it. This means that regardless of any changes in your circumstances, we will continue to assess a charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit.

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

   Permits you to systematically transfer on a monthly or quarterly basis a set dollar amount from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or the Guarantee Account, if available, to any combination of other available Subaccounts (as long as the total number of Subaccounts used does not exceed the maximum number allowed under the contract).    Optional    No additional fee   

•  You may not transfer from one interest rate guarantee period under the Guarantee Account to another

 

•  We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the program at any time and for any reason.

 

•  We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the program at any time and for any reason.

Portfolio Rebalancing Program   

Automatically rebalances your assets on a quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis to return to the percentages specified in your allocation instructions.

 

   Optional    No additional fee   

•  The program does not include allocations to the Guarantee Account

 

•  We reserve the right to exclude specific Subaccounts from Portfolio Rebalancing.

 

•  We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the program at any time and for any reason.

Guarantee Account Interest Sweep Program    Under the program, you could instruct us to transfer interest earned on your assets in the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts to which you are allocating premium payments, in accordance with your allocation instructions in effect on the date of the transfer any time before the Maturity Date.    Optional    No additional fee   

•  The minimum amount in the Guarantee Account required to elect this option is $1,000, but may be reduced at our discretion.

 

•  You can participate in the interest sweep program at the same time you participate in either the Dollar Cost Averaging program or the Portfolio Rebalancing program. If any interest sweep transfer is scheduled for the same day as a Portfolio Rebalancing transfer, the interest sweep transfer will be processed first.

 

 

29


Table of Contents
Name of Benefit    Purpose    Is Benefit
Standard
or
Optional
   Maximum Fee    Brief Description of
Restrictions/Limitations
                   

 

•  We may limit the amount you may transfer from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts for any particular allocation. We will not process an interest sweep transfer if that transfer would exceed the amount permitted to be transferred.

 

Systematic Withdrawal Program    Allows you to take Systematic Withdrawals of a specified dollar amount (in equal installments of at least $100) on a monthly, quarterly, semiannual or annual basis.    Optional    No additional fee   

•  To participate in the program, your Contract Value initially must be at least $10,000

 

•  Your Systematic Withdrawals in a contract year may not exceed the amount which is not subject to a surrender charge.

 

•  A Systematic Withdrawal program will terminate automatically when a Systematic Withdrawal would cause the remaining Contract Value to be less than $1,000.

 

 

TRANSFERS

 

Transfers Before the Maturity Date

 

All owners may transfer all or a portion of their assets between and among the Subaccounts of the Separate Account and the Guarantee Account (if available) on any Valuation Day prior to the Maturity Date, subject to certain conditions imposed by the contract and as stated below. Owners may not, however, transfer assets in the Guarantee Account from one interest rate guarantee period to another interest rate guarantee period.

 

We process transfers among the Subaccounts and between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account as of the end of the Valuation Period that we receive the transfer request in good order at our Home Office. There may be limitations placed on multiple transfer requests made at different times during the same Valuation Period involving the same Subaccounts or the Guarantee Account. We may postpone transfers to, from, or among the Subaccounts and/or the Guarantee Account under certain circumstances. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus.

 

Transfers from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts

 

We may limit and/or restrict transfers from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or in all markets. For any allocation from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts, the limited amount will not be less than any accrued interest on that allocation plus 25% of the original amount of that allocation. Unless you are participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program (see the “Dollar Cost Averaging Program” provision), you may make such transfers only during the 30 day period beginning with the end of the preceding interest rate guarantee period applicable to that particular allocation. We may also limit the amount that you may transfer to the Subaccount.

 

Transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account

 

We may restrict certain transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account. The Guarantee Account may not be available in all states or in all markets. In addition, we reserve the right to prohibit or limit transfers from the Subaccounts to the Guarantee Account during the six month period following the transfer of any amount from the Guarantee Account to any Subaccount. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the Guarantee Account available under your contract.

 

Transfers Among the Subaccounts

 

All owners may submit 12 Subaccount transfers each calendar year by voice response, Internet, telephone, facsimile, U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service. Once such 12 Subaccount transfers have been executed, a letter will be sent notifying owners that they may submit additional transfers only in writing

 

30


Table of Contents

by U.S. Mail or by overnight delivery service, and transfer requests sent by the Internet, same day mail, courier service, telephone or facsimile will not be accepted under any circumstances. Once we receive your mailed transfer request at our Home Office, such transfer cannot be cancelled. We also will not cancel transfer requests that have not yet been received, i.e., you may not call to cancel a transfer request sent by U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service. If you wish to change a transfer request sent by U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service, such change must also be sent in writing by U.S. Mail or by overnight delivery service. We will process that transfer request as of the Valuation Day the new transfer request is received at our Home Office.

 

Currently, we do not charge for transfers. However, we reserve the right to assess a charge of up to $10 per transfer. The minimum transfer amount is $100 or the entire balance in the Subaccount or interest rate guarantee period if the transfer will leave a balance of less than $100.

 

We also reserve the right to not honor your transfer request if your transfer is a result of more than one trade involving the same Subaccount within a 30 day period. We will generally invoke this right when either the Portfolio(s) or we see a pattern of frequent transfers between the same Portfolios within a short period of time (i.e., transfers among the same Subaccounts occur within five to 15 days of each other).

 

In addition, we may not honor transfers made by third parties. See the “Transfer by Third Parties” provision of this prospectus.

 

If a transfer request is not processed, a letter will be sent notifying you that your transfer request was not honored. If we do not honor a transfer request, we will not count that request as a transfer for purposes of the 12 transfers allowed each calendar year as described in the previous paragraphs.

 

When thinking about a transfer of assets, you should consider the inherent risks involved. Frequent transfers based on short-term expectations may increase the risk that you will make a transfer at an inopportune time. Also, because certain restrictions on transfers are applied at the discretion of the Portfolios in which the Subaccount invests, it is possible that owners will be treated differently and there could be inequitable treatment among owners if a Portfolio does not apply equal treatment to all shareholders. See the “Special Note on Frequent Transfers” provision of this prospectus.

 

These restrictions will apply to all owners and their designated third party(ies), unless such transfer is being made pursuant to:

 

  (1)   a Dollar Cost Averaging program;

 

  (2)   a Portfolio Rebalancing program;

 

  (3)   the terms of an approved Fund substitution or Fund liquidation; or

 

  (4)   a Portfolio’s refusal to allow the purchase of shares, either on behalf of an individual owner or on the entire Separate Account, in which case, the Portfolio’s refusal to allow the purchase of shares will not be considered a transfer for calculation of the 12 transfers allowed per calendar year by voice response, Internet, telephone, facsimile, U.S. Mail or overnight delivery service.

 

Sometimes, we will not honor transfer requests. We will not honor a transfer request if:

 

  (1)   any Subaccount that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or to redeem shares of the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests; or

 

  (2)   the transfer would adversely affect Unit Values.

 

The affected Portfolio(s) determine whether items (1) or (2) above apply.

 

We will treat all owners equally with respect to transfer requests.

 

Telephone/Internet Transactions

 

All owners may make their first 12 transfers in any calendar year among the Subaccounts or between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account by calling or electronically contacting us. Transactions that can be conducted over the telephone and Internet include, but are not necessarily limited to:

 

  (1)   the first 12 transfers of assets among the Subaccounts or between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account in any calendar year (this includes any changes in premium payment allocations when such changes include a transfer of assets);

 

  (2)   Dollar Cost Averaging; and

 

  (3)   Portfolio Rebalancing.

 

We will employ reasonable procedures to confirm that instructions we receive are genuine. Such procedures may include, but are not limited to:

 

  (1)   requiring you or a third party you authorized to provide some form of personal identification before we act on the telephone and/or Internet instructions;

 

  (2)   confirming the telephone/Internet transaction in writing to you or a third party you authorized; and/or

 

  (3)   tape recording telephone instructions or retaining a record of your electronic request.

 

31


Table of Contents

We reserve the right to limit or prohibit telephone and Internet transactions.

 

We will delay making a payment or processing a transfer request if:

 

  (1)   the disposal or valuation of the Separate Account’s assets is not reasonably practicable because the New York Stock Exchange is closed;

 

  (2)   on nationally recognized holidays, trading is restricted by the New York Stock Exchange;

 

  (3)   an emergency exists making the disposal or valuation of securities held in the Separate Account impracticable; or

 

  (4)   the SEC by order permits postponement to protect our owners.

 

Rules and regulations of the SEC will govern as to when the conditions described in (3) and (4) above exist. If we are closed on days when the New York Stock Exchange is open, Contract Value may be affected since owners will not have access to their account.

 

Confirmation of Transactions

 

We will not be liable for following instructions that we reasonably determine to be genuine. We will send you a confirmation of any transfer we process. Systematic transactions, such as those related to portfolio rebalancing or dollar cost averaging, generally will be reported in quarterly statements. You are responsible for verifying transfer confirmations and notifying us of any errors within 30 days of receiving the confirmation statement or, for systematic transactions not reported on a trade confirmation, the quarterly statement.

 

Special Note on Reliability

 

Please note that the Internet or our telephone system may not always be available. Any computer or telephone system, whether it is ours, yours, your service provider’s, or your registered representative’s, can experience unscheduled outages or slowdowns for a variety of reasons. These outages or slowdowns may delay or prevent our processing your request. Although we have taken precautions to help our systems handle heavy use, we cannot promise complete reliability under all circumstances. If you are experiencing problems, you can make your transaction request by writing our Home Office.

 

Transfers by Third Parties

 

As a general rule and as a convenience to you, we allow you to give third parties the right to conduct transfers on your behalf. However, when the same third party possesses this ability on behalf of many owners, the result can be simultaneous transfers involving large amounts of assets. Such transfers can disrupt the orderly management of the Portfolios underlying the contract, can result in higher costs to owners, and are generally not compatible with the long-range goals of owners. We believe that such simultaneous transfers effected by such third parties are not in the best interests of all beneficial shareholders of the Portfolios underlying the contracts, and the management of the Portfolios share this position.

 

We have instituted procedures to assure that the transfer requests that we receive have, in fact, been made by the owners in whose names they are submitted.

 

Consequently, we may refuse transfers made by third parties on behalf of an owner in a number of circumstances, which include but are not limited to:

 

  (1)   transfers made on behalf of many owners by one third party (or several third parties who belong to the same firm) where the transfer involves the same Subaccounts and large amounts of assets;

 

  (2)   when we have not received adequate authorization from the owner allowing a third party to make transfers on his or her behalf; and

 

  (3)   when we believe, under all facts and circumstances received, that the owner or his or her authorized agent is not making the transfer.

 

We require documentation to provide sufficient proof that the third party making the trade is in fact duly authorized by the owner. This information includes, but is not limited to:

 

  (1)   documentation signed by the owner or a court authorizing a third party to act on the owner’s behalf;

 

  (2)   passwords and encrypted information;

 

  (3)   additional owner verification when appropriate; and

 

  (4)   recorded conversations.

 

We will not be held liable for refusing a transfer made by a third party when we have a reasonable basis for believing such third party is not authorized to make a transfer on the owner’s behalf or we have a reasonable basis for believing the third party is acting in a fraudulent manner.

 

Special Note on Frequent Transfers

 

The Separate Account does not accommodate frequent transfers of Contract Value among Subaccounts. When owners or someone on their behalf submit requests to transfer all or a portion of their assets between Subaccounts, the requests result

 

32


Table of Contents

in the purchase and redemption of shares of the Portfolios in which the Subaccounts invest. Frequent Subaccount transfers, therefore, cause corresponding frequent purchases and redemptions of shares of the Portfolios.

 

Frequent purchases and redemptions of shares of the Portfolios can dilute the value of a Portfolio’s shares, disrupt the management of the Portfolio’s investment portfolio, and increase brokerage and administrative costs. Accordingly, when an owner or someone on their behalf engages in frequent Subaccount transfers, other owners and persons with rights under the contracts (such as Annuitants and beneficiaries) may be harmed.

 

The Separate Account discourages frequent transfers, purchases and redemptions. To discourage frequent Subaccount transfers, we adopted the policy described in the “Transfers Among the Subaccounts” section. This policy requires owners who request more than 12 Subaccount transfers in a calendar year to submit such requests in writing by U.S. Mail or by overnight delivery service (the “U.S. Mail requirement”). The U.S. Mail requirement creates a delay of at least one day between the time transfer decisions are made and the time such transfers are processed. This delay is intended to discourage frequent Subaccount transfers by limiting the effectiveness of abusive “market timing” strategies (in particular, “time-zone” arbitrage) that rely on “same-day” processing of transfer requests.

 

In addition, we will not honor transfer requests if any Subaccount that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or redeem shares of the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests or if the transfer would adversely affect Accumulation Unit values. Whether these restrictions apply is determined by the affected Portfolio(s), and although we apply the restrictions uniformly when we receive information from the Portfolio(s), we cannot guarantee that the Portfolio(s) will apply their policies and procedures in a uniform basis.

 

There can be no assurance that the U.S. Mail requirement will be effective in limiting frequent Subaccount transfers or that we can prevent all frequent Subaccount transfer activity that may adversely affect owners, other persons with material rights under the contract, or Portfolio shareholders generally. For instance, imposing the U.S. Mail requirement after 12 Subaccount transfers may not be restrictive enough to deter an owner seeking to engage in abusing market timing strategies.

 

We may revise our frequent Subaccount transfer policy and related procedures, at our sole discretion, at any time and without prior notice, as we deem necessary or appropriate to better detect and deter frequent transfer activity that may adversely affect owners, other persons with material rights under the Policies, or Portfolio shareholders generally, to comply with state or federal regulatory requirements, or to impose additional or alternative restrictions on owners engaging in frequent Subaccount transfers. For example, we may invoke our right to refuse transfers if the transfer involves the same Subaccount within a 30 day period and/or we may change our procedures to monitor for a different number of transfers within a specified time period or to impose a minimum time period between each transfer.

 

There are inherent risks that changing our policies and procedures in the future may not be effective in limiting frequent Subaccount transfers. We will not implement any policy and procedure at the contract level that discriminates among owners, however, we may be compelled to adopt policies and procedures adopted by the Portfolios on behalf of the Portfolios and we will do so unless we cannot service such policies and procedures or we believe such policies and procedures contradict state or federal regulations or such policies and procedures contradict with the terms of your contract.

 

As stated in the previous paragraph, each of the Portfolios in which the Subaccounts invest may have its own policies and procedures with respect to frequent purchases and redemption of Portfolio shares. The prospectuses for the Portfolios describe any such policies and procedures. For example, a Portfolio may assess redemption fees (which we reserve the right to collect) on shares held for a relatively short period of time. The frequent trading policies and procedures of a Portfolio may be different, and more or less restrictive, than the frequent trading policies and procedures of other Portfolios and the policies and procedures we have adopted to discourage frequent Subaccount transfers. Owners should be aware that we may not have the operational capability to monitor owners’ Subaccount transfer requests and apply the frequent trading policies and procedures of the respective Portfolios that would be affected by the transfers. Accordingly, owners and other persons who have material rights under the contracts should assume that the sole protection they may have against potential harm from frequent Subaccount transfers is the protection, if any, provided by the policies and procedures we have adopted to discourage frequent Subaccount transfers.

 

Under SEC rules, we are required to enter into a written agreement with each Portfolio or its principal underwriter that will obligate us to provide promptly, upon request by the Portfolio, certain information to the Portfolio about the trading activity of individual contract owners. Under these circumstances, we may be required to provide your tax identification number or social security number to the Fund and/or its manager. We must then execute any instructions from the Portfolio to restrict or prohibit further purchases or transfers by

 

33


Table of Contents

a specific contract owner of Accumulation Units or Annuity Units of the Subaccount that invests in that Portfolio, where such contract owner has been identified by the Portfolio as having engaged in transactions (indirectly through such Subaccount) that violate policies established for that Portfolio for the purpose of eliminating or reducing any dilution of the value of the outstanding shares of the Portfolio. We will inform any contract owners whose future purchases and transfers of a Subaccount’s units have been restricted or prohibited by a Portfolio.

 

Owners and other persons with material rights under the contracts also should be aware that the purchase and redemption orders received by the Portfolios generally are “omnibus” orders from intermediaries such as broker-dealers, retirement plans or separate accounts funding variable insurance contracts. These omnibus orders reflect the aggregation and netting of multiple orders from individual retirement plan participants and/or individual owners of variable insurance contracts. The omnibus nature of these orders may limit the Portfolios’ ability to apply their respective frequent trading policies and procedures. We cannot guarantee that the Portfolios will not be harmed by transfer activity relating to the retirement plans and/or other insurance companies that may invest in the Portfolios. In addition, if a Portfolio believes an omnibus order we submit may reflect one or more Subaccount transfer requests from owners engaged in frequent transfer activity, the Portfolio may reject a portion of or the entire omnibus order. If a Portfolio rejects part of an omnibus order it believes is attributable to transfers that exceed its market timing policies and procedures, it will return the amount to us and we will credit the amount to the contract owner as of the Valuation Day of our receipt of that amount. You may realize a loss if the unit value on the Valuation Day we credit the amount back to your account has increased since the original date of your transfer.

 

We apply our policies and procedures without exception, waiver, or special arrangement.

 

Dollar Cost Averaging Program

 

The Dollar Cost Averaging program permits you to systematically transfer on a monthly or quarterly basis a set dollar amount from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or the Guarantee Account (if available) to any combination of other available Subaccounts (as long as the total number of Subaccounts used does not exceed the maximum number allowed under the contract). The Dollar Cost Averaging method of investment is designed to reduce the risk of making purchases only when the price of units is high, but you should carefully consider your financial ability to continue the program over a long enough period of time to purchase Accumulation Units when their value is low as well as when it is high. Dollar Cost Averaging does not assure a profit or protect against a loss.

 

You may participate in the Dollar Cost Averaging program by:

 

  (1)   electing it on your application; or

 

  (2)   contacting an authorized sales representative; or

 

  (3)   contacting us at (800) 352-9910.

 

To use the program, you must transfer at least $100 from the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or interest rate guarantee period with each transfer.

 

The Dollar Cost Averaging program will begin 30 days after we receive all required forms with your instructions and any necessary premium payment unless we allow an earlier date. We will discontinue your participation in the Dollar Cost Averaging program:

 

    on the business day we receive your request to discontinue the program in writing or by telephone (assuming we have your telephone authorization form on file); or

 

    when the assets of the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund and/or interest rate guarantee period from which transfers are being made are depleted.

 

If you Dollar Cost Average from the Guarantee Account, we reserve the right to determine the amount of each automatic transfer. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the availability of the Guarantee Account under your contract. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining portion of an allocation used for Dollar Cost Averaging to a new guarantee period upon termination of the Dollar Cost Averaging program for that allocation. You may not transfer from one interest rate guarantee period to another interest rate guarantee period.

 

We also reserve the right to credit a higher rate of interest on premium payments allocated to the Guarantee Account that participate in the Dollar Cost Averaging program. We refer to this higher rate of interest as Enhanced Dollar Cost Averaging. Please refer to your contract data pages or call us at (800) 352-9910 for information about the availability of the Dollar Cost Averaging program or the Enhanced Dollar Cost Averaging program under your contract. If you terminate the Dollar Cost Averaging program prior to the depletion of assets from the Guarantee Account, we have the right to credit the remaining assets in the Guarantee Account the current interest

 

34


Table of Contents

rate being credited to all other Guarantee Account assets not participating in the Enhanced Dollar Cost Averaging program as of that Valuation Day.

 

There is no additional charge for Dollar Cost Averaging. A transfer under this program is not a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or calculating the maximum number of transfers we may allow in a calendar year via the Internet, telephone or facsimile.

 

We may, from time to time, offer various Dollar Cost Averaging programs. We reserve the right to discontinue new Dollar Cost Averaging programs or to modify such programs at any time and for any reason. We also reserve the right to prohibit simultaneous participation in the Dollar Cost Averaging program and Systematic Withdrawal program.

 

Owners considering participating in a Dollar Cost Averaging program should call (800) 352-9910 to verify the availability of Dollar Cost Averaging.

 

Portfolio Rebalancing Program

 

Once your premium payment has been allocated among the Subaccounts, the performance of each Subaccount may cause your allocation to shift. You may instruct us to automatically rebalance on a quarterly, semi-annual, or annual basis your assets among the Subaccounts to return to the percentages specified in your allocation instructions. Your percentage allocations must be in whole percentages. The program does not include allocations to the Guarantee Account. You may elect to participate in the Portfolio Rebalancing program at any time by submitting the completed Portfolio Rebalancing form to our Home Office.

 

Subsequent changes to your percentage allocations may be made at any time by written or telephone instructions to the Home Office. Once elected, Portfolio Rebalancing remains in effect from the date we receive your written request until you instruct us to discontinue Portfolio Rebalancing. There is no additional charge for using Portfolio Rebalancing, and we do not consider a Portfolio Rebalancing transfer a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or calculating the maximum number of transfers permitted in a calendar year via the Internet, telephone or facsimile. We reserve the right to discontinue or modify the Portfolio Rebalancing program at any time and for any reason. We also reserve the right to exclude specific Subaccounts from Portfolio Rebalancing. Portfolio Rebalancing does not guarantee a profit or protect against a loss.

 

Guarantee Account Interest Sweep Program

 

You may instruct us to transfer interest earned on your assets in the Guarantee Account (if available) to the Subaccounts to which you are allocating premium payments, in accordance with your allocation instructions in effect on the date of the transfer any time before the Maturity Date. You must specify the frequency of the transfers (either monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or annually).

 

The minimum amount in the Guarantee Account required to elect this option is $1,000, but may be reduced at our discretion. The transfers under this program will take place on the last calendar day of each period.

 

You may participate in the interest sweep program at the same time you participate in either the Dollar Cost Averaging program or the Portfolio Rebalancing program. If any interest sweep transfer is scheduled for the same day as a Portfolio Rebalancing transfer, we will process the interest sweep transfer first.

 

We limit the amount you may transfer from the Guarantee Account to the Subaccounts for any particular allocation. See the “Transfers” provision of this prospectus. We will not process an interest sweep transfer if that transfer would exceed the amount permitted to be transferred.

 

You may cancel your participation in the interest sweep program at any time by writing or calling our Home Office at the address or telephone number listed on page 1 of this prospectus. We will automatically cancel your participation in the program if your assets in the Guarantee Account are less than $1,000 or such lower amount as we may determine. There is no additional charge for the interest sweep program. We do not consider interest sweep transfers a transfer for purposes of assessing a transfer charge or for calculating the maximum number of transfers permitted in a calendar year. The interest sweep program does not assure a profit or protect against a loss.

 

SURRENDERS AND PARTIAL SURRENDERS

 

Surrenders and Partial Surrenders

 

We will allow you to surrender your contract or to partially surrender a portion of your Contract Value at any time before the Maturity Date upon your written request, subject to the conditions discussed below.

 

We will not permit a partial surrender that is less than $100 or a partial surrender which would reduce your Contract Value to less than $1,000. If your partial surrender request would reduce your Contract Value to less than $1,000, we will surrender your contract in full. Other limits and other restrictions may apply to Qualified Contracts.

 

35


Table of Contents

The amount payable on surrender of the contract is the Surrender Value at the end of the Valuation Period during which we receive the request. The Surrender Value equals:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value (after deduction of any charge for the optional rider(s) and the annual contract charge, if applicable) on the Valuation Day we receive a request for surrender; less

 

  (2)   any applicable surrender charge; less

 

  (3)   any applicable premium tax.

 

We may pay the Surrender Value in a lump sum or under one of the Optional Payment Plans specified in the contract, based on your instructions.

 

If you are taking a partial surrender, you may indicate in writing, electronically, or by calling our Home Office, from which Subaccounts or interest rate guarantee periods we are to take your partial surrender. If you do not so specify, we will deduct the amount of the partial surrender first from the Subaccounts on a pro rata basis in proportion to your assets allocated to the Separate Account. We will deduct any remaining amount from the Guarantee Account. We will take deductions from the Guarantee Account from the amounts (including any interest credited to such amounts) which have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time.

 

A Portfolio may impose a redemption charge. The charge is retained by or paid to the Portfolio. The charge is not retained by or paid to us. The redemption charge may affect the number and/or value of Accumulation Units withdrawn from the Subaccount that invests in that Portfolio and may affect Contract Value. When taking a partial surrender, any applicable surrender charges and/or applicable premium tax will be taken from the amount surrendered, unless otherwise requested.

 

We will delay making a payment if:

 

  (1)   the disposal or valuation of the Separate Account’s assets is not reasonably practicable because the New York Stock Exchange is closed;

 

  (2)   on nationally recognized holidays, trading is restricted by the New York Stock Exchange;

 

  (3)   an emergency exists making the disposal or valuation of securities held in the Separate Account impracticable; or

 

  (4)   the SEC by order permits postponement of payment to protect our owners.

 

Rules and regulations of the SEC will govern as to when the conditions described in (3) and (4) above exist. If we are closed on days when the New York Stock Exchange is open, Contract Value may be affected since owners will not have access to their account.

 

For contracts issued on or after the later of September 2, 2003, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, partial surrenders from the Subaccounts may further reduce or restrict the amount that may be allocated to the Guarantee Account (see the “Guarantee Account” provision of this prospectus).

 

Please remember that partial surrenders will reduce your death benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and applicable premium tax) reduces your Contract Value. See the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus.

 

Partial surrenders and surrenders may also be subject to income tax and, if taken prior to age 5912, an additional 10% penalty tax. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus.

 

Restrictions on Distributions from Certain Contracts

 

Under Code Section 403(b) tax sheltered annuities, distributions of (1) salary reduction contributions made in years beginning after December 31, 1988; (2) earnings on those contributions; and (3) earnings on amounts held as of the last year beginning before January 1, 1989, are not allowed prior to age 5912, severance from employment, death or disability. Salary reduction contributions (and, effective for plan years beginning in January 1, 2024, qualified nonelective contributions, qualified matching contributions, and earnings attributable to such amounts) may also be distributed upon hardship, but would generally be subject to penalties. For contracts issued after 2008, amounts attributable to nonelective contributions may be subject to distribution restrictions specified in the employer’s Section 403(b) plan.

 

If your contract was issued pursuant to a 403(b) plan, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance. We will defer such payments you request until all information required under the tax law has been received. By requesting a surrender or transfer, you consent to the sharing of confidential information about you, the contract, and transactions under the contract and any other 403(b) contracts or accounts you have under the 403(b) plan among us, your employer or plan sponsor, any plan administrator or recordkeeper, and other product providers.

 

Section 830.105 of the Texas Government Code permits participants in the Texas Optional Retirement Program to surrender their interest in a variable annuity contract issued under the Texas Optional Retirement Program only upon:

 

  (1)   termination of employment in the Texas public institutions of higher education;

 

  (2)   retirement;

 

36


Table of Contents
  (3)   death; or

 

  (4)   the participant’s attainment of age 7012.

 

If your contract is issued to a Texas Optional Retirement Program, you must furnish us proof that one of these four events has occurred before we distribute any amounts from your contract.

 

Systematic Withdrawal Program

 

The Systematic Withdrawal program allows you to take Systematic Withdrawals of a specified amount (in equal installments of at least $100) on a monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual basis. Your payments can begin at any time after 30 days from the date your contract is issued (unless we allow an earlier date). To participate in the program, your Contract Value initially must be at least $10,000 and you must submit a completed Systematic Withdrawal form to our Home Office. You can obtain the form from our Home Office.

 

Your Systematic Withdrawals in a contract year may not exceed the amount which is not subject to a surrender charge. See the “Surrender Charge” provision of this prospectus. We will deduct the Systematic Withdrawal amounts first from any gain in the contract and then from premiums paid. You may provide specific instructions as to which Subaccounts and/or interest rate guarantee periods from which we are to take Systematic Withdrawals. If you have not provided specific instructions, or if your specific instructions cannot be carried out, we will process the withdrawals by cancelling Accumulation Units on a pro-rata basis from all of the Subaccounts in which you have an interest. To the extent that your assets in the Separate Account are not sufficient to accomplish this withdrawal, we will take the remaining amount of the withdrawal from any assets you have in the Guarantee Account. We will take deductions from the Guarantee Account from the amounts (including any interest credited to such amounts) that have been in the Guarantee Account for the longest period of time.

 

After your Systematic Withdrawals begin, you may change the frequency and/or amount of your payments, subject to the following:

 

    you may request only one such change in a calendar quarter; and

 

    if you did not elect the maximum amount you could withdraw under this program at the time you elected the current series of Systematic Withdrawals, then you may increase the remaining payments up to the maximum amount.

 

A Systematic Withdrawal program will terminate automatically when a Systematic Withdrawal would cause the remaining Contract Value to be less than $1,000. If a Systematic Withdrawal would cause the Contract Value to be less than $1,000, then we will not process that Systematic Withdrawal transaction. If any of your Systematic Withdrawals would be or become less than $100, we reserve the right to reduce the frequency of payments to an interval that would result in each payment being at least $100. You may discontinue Systematic Withdrawals at any time by notifying us in writing at our Home Office or by telephone. You may request that we pay any remaining payments in a lump sum. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus.

 

Each Systematic Withdrawal is subject to Federal income taxes on any portion considered gain for tax purposes. In addition, you may be assessed a 10% IRS penalty tax on Systematic Withdrawals if you are under age 5912 at the time of the withdrawal.

 

Both partial surrenders at your specific request and partial surrenders under a Systematic Withdrawal program will count toward the limit of the free amount that you may surrender in any contract year under the free withdrawal privilege. See the “Surrender Charge” provision of this prospectus. Partial surrenders under a Systematic Withdrawal program may also reduce your death benefit. See the “Death of Owner and/or Annuitant” provision of this prospectus. Your Systematic Withdrawal amount could be affected if you take an additional partial surrender.

 

There is no charge for participation in the Systematic Withdrawal program, however, we reserve the right to prohibit participation in Systematic Withdrawal and Dollar Cost Averaging programs at the same time. We also reserve the right to discontinue and/or modify the Systematic Withdrawal program upon 30 days written notice to owners.

 

DEATH OF OWNER AND/OR ANNUITANT

 

Death Benefit at Death of Any Annuitant Before the Maturity Date

 

If the Annuitant dies before the Maturity Date, regardless of whether the Annuitant is also an owner or joint owner of the contract, the amount of proceeds available for the designated beneficiary (as defined below) is the death benefit. This death benefit may be referred to as the “Annual Estate ProtectorSM” in our marketing materials. Upon receipt of due proof of the Annuitant’s death (generally, due proof is a certified copy of the death certificate or a certified copy of the decree of a court of competent jurisdiction as to the finding of death), a death benefit will be paid in accordance with your instructions,

 

37


Table of Contents

subject to distribution rules and termination of contract provisions discussed in the contract and elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

The death benefit choices we offer are:

 

  (1)   the Basic Death Benefit;

 

  (2)   the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit; and

 

  (3)   the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit.

 

We automatically provide the Basic Death Benefit to you. The Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit and the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit are available to you for an additional charge.

 

The death benefit varies based on:

 

  (1)   the Annuitant’s age on the date the contract is issued;

 

  (2)   the Annuitant’s age on the date of his or her death;

 

  (3)   the number of contract years that elapse from the date the contract is issued until the date of the Annuitant’s death; and

 

  (4)   whether any premium taxes are due at the time the death benefit is paid.

 

Basic Death Benefit

 

For contracts issued on or after the later of May 15, 2001, or the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, the Basic Death Benefit will be as follows:

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the Basic Death Benefit will be equal to the greater of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (2)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and any premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the death benefit will be equal to the greatest of:

 

  (1)   the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and

 

  (b)   is premium payments received after such contract anniversary.

 

The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary.

 

  (2)   the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (3)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death.

 

We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) in the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

Please refer to Appendix B in this prospectus for an example of the Basic Death Benefit calculation.

 

For contracts issued prior to May 15, 2001, or prior to the date on which state insurance authorities approve applicable contract modifications, the Basic Death Benefit will be as follows:

 

The death benefit equals the sum of (a) and (b) where:

 

  (a)   the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (b)   is the excess, if any, of the unadjusted death benefit as of the date of the Annuitant’s death over the Contract Value as of the date of the Annuitant’s death, with interest credited on that excess from the date of the Annuitant’s death to the date of distribution. The rate credited may depend on applicable law or regulation. Otherwise, we will set it.

 

The unadjusted death benefit varies based on the Annuitant’s age at the time we issued the contract and on the Annuitant’s age at the time of death.

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies before his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greater of:

 

  (1)   the Contract Value as of the date of death; and

 

38


Table of Contents
  (2)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 80 or younger on the date the contract is issued and he or she dies after his or her first contract anniversary, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the greatest of:

 

  (1)   the greatest sum of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on any contract anniversary occurring prior to the Annuitant’s 80th birthday; and

 

  (b)   is premium payments received after such contract anniversary.

 

The sum of (a) and (b) above is reduced for an adjustment for any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) taken since the applicable contract anniversary.

 

  (2)   the Contract Value as of the date of death; and

 

  (3)   premium payments received, reduced for an adjustment due to any partial surrenders (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed).

 

If the Annuitant is age 81 or older on the date the contract is issued, the unadjusted death benefit will be equal to the Contract Value as of the date of death.

 

We will adjust the death benefit for partial surrenders in (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) the same proportion as the percentage that the partial surrender (including any surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

Please refer to Appendix B in this prospectus for an example of the Basic Death Benefit calculation.

 

Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit

 

The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is available to contracts with Annuitants age 75 or younger at the time the contract is issued. If the owner elects the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit at the time of application, upon the death of the Annuitant, we will pay to the designated beneficiary, the greater of:

 

  (1)   the Basic Death Benefit; and

 

  (2)   the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

 

The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit may also be referenced in our marketing materials as the “Six Percent EstateProtectorSM.”

 

If the Annuitant dies on the first Valuation Day, the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit will be equal to the premium payments received.

 

If the Annuitant dies after the first Valuation Day, then at the end of each Valuation Period until the contract anniversary on which the Annuitant attains age 80, the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit equals the lesser of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the total of all premium payments we receive, multiplied by two, adjusted for any partial surrenders taken prior to or during that Valuation Period; and

 

  (b)   is the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit of the preceding Valuation Period, with assets in the Subaccounts increased by an effective annual rate of 6% (an “increase factor”); this does not include assets allocated to the Subaccount investing in the available Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund, plus any additional premium payments we received during the current Valuation Period, adjusted for any partial surrenders taken during the current Valuation period.

 

We will adjust the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit for partial surrenders proportionally by the same percentage that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charges and premium taxes assessed) reduces the Contract Value.

 

For assets in the Subaccount investing in the Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust — Government Money Market Fund, the increase factor is equal to the lesser of:

 

  (1)   the net investment factor of the Subaccount for Valuation Period, minus one; and

 

  (2)   a factor for the Valuation Period equivalent to an effective annual rate of 6%.

 

For assets allocated to the Guarantee Account, the increase factor is equal to the lesser of:

 

  (1)   the factor for the Valuation Period equivalent to the credited rate(s) applicable to such allocations; and

 

  (2)   a factor for the Valuation Period equivalent to an effective annual rate of 6%.

 

After the Annuitant attains age 80, the increase factor will be zero (0). The Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is effective on the Contract Date (unless another effective date is shown on the contract data page) and will remain in effect while the contract is in force and before income payments begin, or until the contract anniversary following the date we receive your written request to terminate the benefit. If we receive your request to terminate the benefit within 30 days following any

 

39


Table of Contents

contract anniversary, we will terminate the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit as of that contract anniversary.

 

We charge you for the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We deduct this charge against the Contract Value at each contract anniversary after the first and at the time you fully surrender the contract. At full surrender, we will charge you a pro-rata portion of the annual charge. Currently, this charge is equal to an annual rate of 0.25% of your prior contract year’s average Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. We guarantee that this charge will not exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your prior contract year’s average Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit. The rate charged to your contract will be fixed at the time your contract is issued. See the “Charge for the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit” provision of this prospectus.

 

Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

Please refer to Appendix B for an example of the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit calculation.

 

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit

 

The Optional Enhanced Death Benefit (which may be referred to as “Earnings Protector” in our marketing materials) adds an extra feature to our Basic Death Benefit and, if applicable, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit.

 

You may only elect the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit at the time of application. Once elected, the benefit will remain in effect while your contract is in force until income payments begin. You cannot otherwise terminate this benefit.

 

We charge you an additional amount for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit. Currently, this amount is an annual rate of 0.20% of the average of:

 

  (1)   your Contract Value at the beginning of the previous contract year; and

 

  (2)   your Contract Value at the end of the previous contract year.

 

The charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit is taken on each contract anniversary. We guarantee that this charge will not exceed an annual rate of 0.35% of your average Contract Value, as described above. The rate that applies to your contract will be fixed at issue. See the “Charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit” provision of this prospectus.

 

In addition, to be eligible for this rider, the Annuitant cannot be older than age 75 at the time the contract is issued unless we approve a different age. Because this contract is no longer offered and sold, the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit is no longer available to purchase under the contract.

 

The Optional Enhanced Death Benefit varies based on the age of the Annuitant at issue. Your optional Enhanced Death Benefit will never be less than zero.

 

If the Annuitant is age 70 or younger at the date the contract is issued, the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit equals 40% of (a) minus (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value as of the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (b)   premiums paid, not previously surrendered.

 

This death benefit cannot exceed 70% of premiums paid adjusted for partial surrenders. Premiums, other than the initial premium, paid within 12 months of death are not included in this calculation.

 

If the Annuitant is older than age 70 at the time the contract is issued, the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit equals 25% of (a) minus (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the date we receive due proof of death; and

 

  (b)   premiums paid, not previously surrendered.

 

This death benefit cannot exceed 40% of premiums paid, adjusted for partial surrenders. Premiums, other than the initial premium, paid within 12 months of death are not included in this calculation.

 

Under both age scenarios listed above, we take partial surrenders first from gain and then from premiums paid. For purposes of this benefit, we calculate gain as (a) plus (b) minus (c) minus (d), but not less than zero, where:

 

  (a)   is the Contract Value on the date we receive your partial surrender request;

 

  (b)   is the total of any partial surrenders, excluding surrender charges, previously taken;

 

  (c)   is the total of premiums paid; and

 

  (d)   is the total of any gain previously surrendered.

 

Please refer to Appendix B for an example of the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit calculation.

 

There are important things you should consider before you purchase the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit. These include:

 

   

The Optional Enhanced Death Benefit does not guarantee that any amounts under the benefit will

 

40


Table of Contents
 

become payable at death. Market declines resulting in your Contract Value being less than your premiums paid and not previously surrendered may result in no Enhanced Death Benefit being payable.

 

    Once you purchase the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit, you cannot terminate it. This means that regardless of any changes in your circumstances, we will continue to assess a charge for the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit.

 

    Please take advantage of the guidance of a qualified financial adviser in evaluating the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit option, as well as the other aspects of the contract.

 

When We Calculate the Death Benefit

 

We will calculate the Basic Death Benefit, the Optional Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit, and Optional Enhanced Death Benefit on the date we receive due proof of death at our Home Office. Until we receive complete written instructions satisfactory to us from the beneficiary, the assets will remain allocated to the Separate Account and/or the Guarantee Account, according to your last instructions. This means that the calculated death benefit will fluctuate with the performance of the Subaccounts in which you are invested.

 

Death of an Owner or Joint Owner Before the Maturity Date

 

In certain circumstances, federal tax law requires that distributions be made under this contract upon the first death of:

 

    an owner or joint owner (or the Annuitant if any owner is a non-natural entity); or

 

    the Annuitant.

 

The discussion below describes the methods available for distributing the value of the contract upon death.

 

At the death of any owner (or Annuitant, if the owner is a non-natural entity), the person or entity first listed below who is alive or in existence on the date of that death will become the designated beneficiary:

 

  (1)   owner or joint owner;

 

  (2)   primary beneficiary;

 

  (3)   contingent beneficiary; or

 

  (4)   owner’s estate.

 

We then will treat the designated beneficiary as the sole owner of the contract. If there is more than one designated beneficiary, we will treat each one separately in applying the tax law’s rules described below.

 

Distribution Rules: Distributions required by federal tax law differ depending on whether the designated beneficiary is the spouse of the deceased owner (or the spouse of the deceased Annuitant, if the contract is owned by a non-natural entity).

 

    Spouses — If the designated beneficiary is the spouse of the deceased, the spouse may continue the contract as the new owner. If the deceased was the Annuitant, and there was no surviving contingent Annuitant, the spouse will automatically become the new Annuitant. At the death of the spouse, this provision may not be used again, even if the spouse remarries. In such case, the entire interest in the contract will be paid within 5 years of such spouse’s death to the beneficiary named by the spouse. If no beneficiary is named, such payment will be made to the spouse’s estate. The amount payable will be equal to the death benefit on the date we receive due proof of the Annuitant’s death. Any increase in the Contract Value will be allocated to the Subaccounts and/or the Guarantee Account using the premium allocation in effect at that time. Any death benefit payable subsequently (at the death of the new Annuitant) will be calculated as if the spouse had purchased a contract for the new Contract Value on the date we received due proof of death. Any death benefit will be based on the new Annuitant’s age as of the date we receive due proof of death of the original owner, rather than the age of the previously deceased Annuitant. All other provisions will continue as if the spouse had purchased the contract on the original Contract Date.

 

    Non-Spouses — If the designated beneficiary is not the spouse of the deceased person, this contract cannot be continued in force indefinitely. Instead, upon the death of any owner (or Annuitant, if the owner is a non-natural entity), payments must be made to (or for the benefit of) the designated beneficiary under one of the following payment choices:

 

  (1)   receive the Surrender Value in one lump sum payment upon receipt of due proof of death (see the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus);

 

  (2)   receive the Surrender Value at any time during the five year period following the date of death. At the end of the five year period, we will pay in a lump sum payment any Surrender Value still remaining;

 

  (3)  

apply the Surrender Value to provide a monthly income benefit under Optional Payment Plan 1 or

 

41


Table of Contents
 

2. The first monthly income benefit payment must be made no later than one year after the date of death. Also, the monthly income benefit payment period must be either the lifetime of the designated beneficiary or a period not exceeding the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy; or.

 

  (4)   elect a “stretch” payment choice, as described in the “Stretch Payment Choices” provision below.

 

If your contract is a Qualified Contract, not all elections will satisfy required minimum distribution rules. Note that effective for owners who die on or after January 1, 2020, subject to certain exceptions, most non-spouse designated beneficiaries must now complete death benefit distributions within ten years of the owner’s death in order to satisfy required minimum distribution rules. Consult a tax adviser before making an election.

 

Stretch Payment Choices

 

The following payment choice is available to designated beneficiaries of Non-Qualified Contracts:

 

A designated beneficiary of a Non-Qualified Contract may apply the death proceeds of the contract to provide for an annual payment equal to the Minimum Annual Income, described below, for the life expectancy of the designated beneficiary. The first income payment must be made no later than 350 days after the original owner’s date of death. The income payment period must be a period not exceeding the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy. Payments will continue annually on the distribution date until the death of the designated beneficiary or the Contract Value is reduced to $0. Upon death of the designated beneficiary, the person or entity named by the designated beneficiary or, if no one is named, the designated beneficiary’s estate may receive the remaining Contract Value. The recipient may take the Contract Value as a lump sum or continue to receive the annual payment on the distribution date equal to the Minimum Annual Income, or until the Contract Value is reduced to $0.

 

The Minimum Annual Income is the amount withdrawn each year to satisfy Section 72(s)(2)(B) of the Code. The Minimum Annual Income will be re-determined each year for the designated beneficiary’s life expectancy using the Single Life Table in Section 1.401(a)(9)-9(b) of the Income Tax Regulations, as amended. After death, the Minimum Annual Income is calculated using the designated beneficiary’s remaining life expectancy. We may offer alternative calculations of Minimum Annual Income based on amortization or annuitization calculations methods described in guidance published by the Internal Revenue Service.

 

Special rules for this payment choice only:

 

    This payment choice cannot be selected if the Minimum Annual Income would be less than $100.

 

    The designated beneficiary must elect a distribution date on which payments will be made. The first distribution date must be no later than 350 days after the owner’s date of death.

 

    Amounts paid to satisfy the Minimum Annual Income will not be subject to surrender charges. Surrender charges will apply to amounts withdrawn above the Minimum Annual Income.

 

    Optional death benefit riders are not available with this payment choice.

 

    Additional premium payments may not be added with this payment choice.

 

Under this payment choice, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Contract Value.

 

The following payment choice is available to designated beneficiaries of Qualified Contracts or any beneficiary receiving death proceeds from any other individual retirement plan:

 

An inherited owner may apply death proceeds to provide for an annual payment equal to the Minimum Annual Income, described below. For purposes of this provision, an inherited owner is any designated beneficiary receiving death proceeds from a Qualified Contract or any beneficiary receiving death proceeds from any other individual retirement plan. A surviving spouse may elect to be treated as an inherited owner in lieu of exercising spousal continuation. The inherited owner will be named the Annuitant at election of the payment choice.

 

Payments under this payment choice will continue annually on the distribution date selected by the inherited owner, subject to the special rules stated below, until the death of the inherited owner or the Contract Value is reduced to $0. Upon death of the inherited owner, the person or entity named by the inherited owner or, if no one is named, the inherited owner’s estate may receive the remaining Contract Value. The recipient may take the Contract Value as a lump sum or continue to receive the annual payment on the distribution date equal to the Minimum Annual Income until the Contract Value is reduced to $0.

 

The Minimum Annual Income is the amount withdrawn each year to satisfy Section 408(b)(3) of the Code. The Minimum Annual Income will be based on the applicable distribution period for required minimum distributions after death, as provided in Section 1.401(a)(9)-5 A-5 of the Income Tax Regulations.

 

42


Table of Contents

Special rules for this payment choice only:

 

    This payment choice cannot be selected if the Minimum Annual Income would be less than $100.

 

    The inherited owner must elect a distribution date on which payments will be made. If the inherited owner is the surviving spouse of the original IRA owner within the meaning of Section 401(a)(9)(B)(iv) of the Code, then the first distribution date elected must be the later of either: (i) December 15th of the year in which the deceased would have reached their required beginning date (as described under the “Qualified Retirement Plans” provision) or (ii) December 15th of the year following the original IRA owner’s death. If the inherited owner is not the surviving spouse of the original IRA owner, then the first distribution date elected must be within 350 days from the date of death. If the surviving spouse dies before the first distribution date, the first distribution date under this rider will be determined by treating death of the surviving spouse as death of the original IRA owner and the surviving spouse’s designated beneficiary as the inherited owner.

 

    Amounts paid to satisfy the Minimum Annual Income will not be subject to surrender charges. Surrender charges will apply to amounts withdrawn above the Minimum Annual Income.

 

    Optional death benefit riders are not available with this payment choice.

 

    Additional premium payments may not be added with this payment choice

 

This payment choice will not satisfy required minimum distribution rules for designated beneficiaries other than “eligible designated beneficiaries” as defined in Section 401(a)(9)(H) of the Code. Consult a tax adviser before making this payment choice.

 

Under this payment choice, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Contract Value.

 

If no choice is made by the designated beneficiary within 30 days following receipt of due proof of death, we will pay the Surrender Value within 5 years of the date of death. Due proof of death must be provided within 90 days of the date of death. We will not accept any premium payments after the non-spouse’s death. If the designated beneficiary dies before we distributed the entire Surrender Value, we will pay in a lump sum payment of any Surrender Value still remaining to the person named by the designated beneficiary. If no person is so named, we will pay the designated beneficiary’s estate.

 

Under payment choices 1 or 2, the contract will terminate upon payment of the entire Surrender Value. Under payment choice 3, this contract will terminate when we apply the Surrender Value to provide a monthly income benefit.

 

Spendthrift Provision. An owner may, by providing written notice to our Home Office in a manner acceptable to the Company, choose the method of payment of death proceeds under the contract by selecting any payment choice, including any Optional Payment Plan, that a designated beneficiary may have chosen. A designated beneficiary (other than the surviving spouse) cannot change the payment choice that the owner has selected. The owner may also specify at the time of electing an income payment option that any payments remaining to be made at the owner’s death cannot be commuted or assigned. While living, the owner may revoke any such limitations on the rights of the designated beneficiary by providing written notice of such revocation to our Home Office in a manner acceptable to the Company. If the payment choice selected by the owner does not apply to a designated beneficiary, the limitations imposed by this paragraph shall not apply to such designated beneficiary. For example, a payment choice based on an individual’s life does not apply to the owner’s estate and the

estate would be free to make its own payment choice as designated beneficiary after the owner’s death.

 

Amount of the proceeds: The amount of proceeds we will pay will, in part, vary based on the person who dies, as shown below:

 

Person who died   Amount of
Proceeds Paid
Owner or Joint Owner
(who is not the Annuitant)
  Surrender Value
Owner or Joint Owner (who is the Annuitant)   Death Benefit
Annuitant   Death Benefit

 

Upon receipt of due proof of death, the designated beneficiary will instruct us how to treat the proceeds subject to the distribution rules discussed above.

 

Death of an Owner, Joint Owner, or Annuitant On or After the Maturity Date

 

On or after the Maturity Date, if an owner, joint owner, Annuitant or designated beneficiary dies while the contract is in force, payments that are already being made under the contract will be made at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution in effect at the time of death, notwithstanding any other provision in the contract.

 

43


Table of Contents

INCOME PAYMENTS

 

The Maturity Date is the date income payments begin under the contract, provided the Annuitant is still living on that date. The Maturity Date must be a date at least thirteen months from the date the contract is issued. The owner selects the contract’s initial Maturity Date at issue. Thereafter, until income payments begin, the owner may elect to extend the Maturity Date in one-year increments, so long as the new Maturity Date is not a date beyond the latest permitted Maturity Date. The latest Maturity Date we currently permit may not be a date beyond the younger Annuitant’s 90th birthday, unless we consent to a later date. We reserve the right to discontinue to allow the deferral of the Maturity Date at any time and without prior notice. Any consent for a new Maturity Date will be provided on a non-discriminatory basis.

 

An owner may request to change the Maturity Date by sending written notice to our Home Office prior to the Maturity Date then in effect. If you change the Maturity Date, the Maturity Date will mean the new Maturity Date selected, provided such Maturity Date is not a date beyond the latest permitted Maturity Date. If income payments have not commenced upon reaching the latest permitted Maturity Date, we will begin making payments to the named payee. Income payments will be made in the form of a Life Income with a 10 Year Period Certain.

 

A Maturity Date that occurs or is scheduled to occur at an advanced age (e.g., past age 85) may, in certain circumstances, have adverse income tax consequences. See the “Tax Matters” provision of this prospectus. Contracts issued to qualified retirement plans provide for income payments to start on the date and under the option specified by the plan.

 

We will pay a monthly income benefit to the owner beginning on the Maturity Date provided the Annuitant is still living. We will pay the monthly income benefit in the form of Life Income with 10 Years Certain plan with variable payments, using the gender (where appropriate) and settlement age of the Annuitant instead of the payee, unless you make another election as described below. Payments made pursuant to one of these plans are not redeemable. As described in your contract, the settlement age may be less than the Annuitant’s age. This means payments may be lower than they would have been without the adjustment. You may also choose to receive Surrender Value of your contract on the date immediately preceding the Maturity Date in a lump sum, in which case we will cancel the contract. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus.

 

Once the contract reaches the Maturity Date, the contract owner will no longer be able to withdraw any Contract Value from the contract.

 

Payments will continue for the life of the Annuitant under the Life Income with 10 Years Certain plan, if he or she lives longer than 10 years. If the Annuitant dies before the end of 10 years, we will discount the remaining payments for the 10 year period at the same rate used to calculate the monthly income payment. If the remaining payments are variable income payments, we will assume the amount of each payment that we discount equals the payment amount on the date we receive due proof of death. We will pay this discounted amount in a lump sum.

 

The contract provides optional forms of annuity payments (“Optional Payment Plans”), each of which is payable on a fixed basis. Optional Payment Plan 1 and Optional Payment Plan 5 also are available on a variable basis.

 

If you elect fixed income payments, the guaranteed amount payable will earn interest at a minimum rate of 3% compounded yearly. We may increase the interest rate which will increase the amount we pay to you or the payee.

 

If you elect variable income payments, the dollar amount of the first variable income payment will depend on the annuity purchase rates described in your contract for the Optional Payment Plan you choose. These rates vary based on the Annuitant’s settlement age and if applicable, gender, upon the settlement age and gender of a second person you designate (if applicable). Under such tables, the longer the life expectancy of the Annuitant or the longer the period for which we guarantee to make payments under the option, the smaller the amount the first variable income payment will be. After your first income payment, the dollar amount of your income payments will vary based on the investment performance of the Subaccount(s) in which you invest and the contract’s assumed interest rate.

 

The assumed interest rate is an assumption we make regarding the investment performance of the Portfolios you select. This rate is simply the total return, after expenses, you need to keep your variable income payments level. We assume an effective annual rate of 3%. This means that if the annualized investment performance, after expenses, of your Subaccounts, measured between the day that the last payment was made and the day on which we are calculating the new payment, is less than 3%, then the dollar amount of your variable income payment will decrease. Conversely, if the annualized investment performance, after expenses, of your Subaccounts, measured between the day that the last payment was made and the day on which we are calculating the new payment, is greater than 3%, then the dollar amount of your income payment will increase.

 

We will make income payments monthly unless you elect to receive payments quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. Under the monthly income benefit and all of the Optional Payment

 

44


Table of Contents

Plans, if any payment made more frequently than annually would be or becomes less than $100, we reserve the right to reduce the frequency of payments to an interval that would result in each payment being at least $100. If the annual payment payable at maturity is less than $20, we will pay the Surrender Value in a lump sum. See the “Requesting Payments” provision of this prospectus. Upon making such a payment, we will have no future obligation under the contract.

 

The amount of your income payments will depend on four things:

 

    your Surrender Value on the Valuation Day immediately preceding the Maturity Date;

 

    the settlement age on the Maturity Date, and if applicable, the gender of the Annuitant;

 

    the specific payment plan you choose; and

 

    if you elect variable income payments, the investment performance of the Portfolios selected.

 

As provided in your contract, we may adjust the age used to determine income payments, and we may deduct premium taxes from your payments.

 

Optional Payment Plans

 

The following Optional Payment Plans are available under the contract:

 

Optional Payment Plan 1 — Life Income with Period Certain. This option guarantees periodic monthly payments for the lifetime of the payee with a minimum number of years of payments. If the payee lives longer than the minimum period, payments will continue for his or her life. The minimum period can be 10, 15, or 20 years. The payee selects the designated period. If the payee dies during the minimum period, we will discount the amount of the remaining guaranteed payments at the same rate used in calculating income payments. We will pay the discounted amount in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

Optional Payment Plan 2 — Income for a Fixed Period. This option provides for periodic payments to be made for a fixed period not longer than 30 years. Payments can be made annually, semi-annually, quarterly, or monthly. If the payee dies, we will discount the amount of the remaining guaranteed payments to the date of the payee’s death at the same rate used in calculating income payments. We will pay the discounted amount in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

Optional Payment Plan 3 — Income of a Definite Amount. This option provides periodic payments of a definite amount to be paid. Payments can be made annually, semi-annually, quarterly, or monthly. The amount paid each year must be at least $120 for each $1,000 of proceeds. Payments will continue until the proceeds are exhausted. The last payment will equal the amount of any unpaid proceeds. If the payee dies, we will pay the amount of the remaining proceeds with earned interest in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

Optional Payment Plan 4 — Interest Income. This option provides for periodic payments of interest earned from the proceeds left with us. Payments can be made annually, semi-annually, quarterly, or monthly. If the payee dies, we will pay the amount of remaining proceeds and any earned but unpaid interest, in a lump sum to the payee’s estate, unless otherwise provided. This plan is not available to contracts issued as Qualified Contracts.

 

Optional Payment Plan 5 — Joint Life and Survivor Income. This option provides for us to make monthly payments to two payees for a guaranteed minimum of 10 years. Each payee must be at least 35 years old when payments begin. Payments will continue as long as either payee is living. If both payees die before the end of the minimum period, we will discount the amount of the remaining payments for the 10 year period at the same rate used in calculating income payments. We will pay the discounted amount in a lump sum to the survivor’s estate, unless otherwise provided.

 

If the payee is not a natural person, our consent must be obtained before selecting an Optional Payment Plan. Fixed income payments, if selected, will begin on the date we receive due proof of the Annuitant’s death, or on the Maturity Date. Variable income payments will begin within seven days after the date payments would begin under the corresponding fixed option. Payments under Optional Payment Plan 4 (Interest Income) will begin at the end of the first interest period after the date proceeds are otherwise payable.

 

All payments under Option Payment Plan 2 (Income for a Fixed Period), Optional Payment Plan 3 (Income of a Definite Amount) and Optional Payment Plan 4 (Interest Income) may be redeemed by the payee upon written request to our Home Office. Payments made under Optional Payment Plan 1 (Life Income with Period Certain) and Optional Payment Plan 5 (Joint Life and Survivor Income) are not redeemable. If payments under Optional Payment Plans 2, 3 or 4 are variable income payments, and a request for redemption is received in good order, the payment will be made within seven days in accordance with the “Surrenders and Partial Surrenders” provision. If payments under Optional Payment Plan 2,

 

45


Table of Contents

Optional Payment Plan 3 or Optional Payment 4 are fixed income payments, and a request for redemption is received in good order, the payment will generally be made within seven days, however, some states require us to reserve the right to defer payments from the Guarantee Account for up to six months from the date we receive the request for payment.

 

If your contract is a Qualified Contract, Optional Payment Plans 2 and 3 may not satisfy minimum required distribution rules. Optional Payment Plan 4 is not available to contracts issued as Qualified Contracts. Optional Payment Plan 5 may not satisfy required distribution rules for all designated beneficiaries. Consult a tax adviser before electing one of these options.

 

Variable Income Payments

 

The monthly amount of your first variable income payment will equal your Contract Value as of the Maturity Date, less any premium taxes, multiplied by the monthly payment rate for the payment plan you choose (at an assumed interest rate of 3%), divided by 1,000. We determine subsequent payments based on Annuity Units.

 

On the Maturity Date, we determine the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount. This number will not change unless you make a transfer. On the Maturity Date, the number of Annuity Units for a Subaccount is the portion of the first payment from that Subaccount divided by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount on the day the first payment is due. Each subsequent variable income payment will equal the sum of payments for each Subaccount. The payment for a Subaccount is the number of Annuity Units for that Subaccount multiplied by the Annuity Unit value for that Subaccount seven days before the monthly anniversary of the Maturity Date.

 

Following the Maturity Date, the Annuity Unit value of each Subaccount for any Valuation Period will equal the Annuity Unit value for the preceding Valuation Period multiplied by the product of (a) and (b), where:

 

  (a)   is the net investment factor for the Valuation Period for which we are calculating the Annuity Unit value; and

 

  (b)   is an assumed interest rate factor equal to .99991902 raised to a power equal to the number of days in the Valuation Period.

 

The assumed interest rate factor in (b) above is the daily equivalent of dividing by one plus the assumed investment interest rate of 3%. We may offer a plan that has a different assumed investment interest rate. If we do, the assumed interest rate factor we use in (b) above would change.

 

Transfers After the Maturity Date

 

If we are making variable income payments, the payee may change the Subaccounts from which we are making the payments three times each calendar year. The transfer will be effective as of the end of the Valuation Period during which we receive written request at our Home Office. We reserve the right to limit the number of transfers, if necessary, for the contract to continue to be treated as an annuity under the Code. We also reserve the right to refuse to execute any transfer if any of the Subaccounts that would be affected by the transfer is unable to purchase or redeem shares of the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests or if the transfer would adversely affect Annuity Unit values. If the number of Annuity Units remaining in a Subaccount after a transfer is less than 1, we will transfer the remaining balance in addition to the amount requested for the transfer. We will not allow a transfer into any Subaccount unless the number of Annuity Units of that Subaccount after the transfer is at least 1. The amount of the income payments as of the date of the transfer will not be affected by the transfer. We will not charge for transfers made after the Maturity Date.

 

We do not permit transfers between the Subaccounts and the Guarantee Account after the Maturity Date. We also do not permit transfers in the Guarantee Account from one interest rate guarantee period to another interest rate guarantee period.

 

46


Table of Contents

TAX MATTERS

 

Introduction

 

This part of the prospectus discusses the federal income tax treatment of the contract. The federal income tax treatment of the contract is complex and sometimes uncertain. The federal income tax rules may vary with your particular circumstances.

 

This discussion is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. It does not address all of the federal income tax rules that may affect you and your contract. This discussion also does not address other federal tax consequences, or state or local tax consequences, associated with a contract. As a result, you should always consult a tax adviser about the application of tax rules to your individual situation.

 

Taxation of Non-Qualified Contracts

 

This part of the discussion describes some of the federal income tax rules applicable to Non-Qualified Contracts. A Non-Qualified Contract is a contract not issued in connection with a qualified retirement plan receiving special tax treatment under the Code, such as an individual retirement annuity or a Section 401(k) plan.

 

Tax deferral on earnings. The federal income tax law generally does not tax any increase in an owner’s Contract Value until there is a distribution from the contract. However, certain requirements must be satisfied in order for this general rule to apply, including:

 

    an individual must own the contract (or the tax law must treat the contract as owned by an individual);

 

    the investments of the Separate Account must be “adequately diversified” in accordance with Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) regulations;

 

    the owner’s right to choose particular investments for a contract must be limited; and

 

    the contract’s Maturity Date must not occur near the end of the Annuitant’s life expectancy.

 

Contracts not owned by an individual — no tax deferral and loss of interest deduction. As a general rule, the Code does not treat a contract that is owned by an entity (rather than an individual) as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. The entity owning the contract generally pays tax each year on the annual increase in Contract Value. Contracts issued to a corporation or a trust are examples of contracts where the owner is taxed on the contract’s earnings.

 

There are several exceptions to this rule. For example, the Code treats a contract as owned by an individual if the nominal owner is a trust or other entity that holds the contract as an agent for an individual. However, this non-qualified exception does not apply in the case of any employer that owns a contract to provide deferred compensation for its employees.

 

In the case of a contract issued after June 8, 1997 to a taxpayer that is not an individual, or a contract held for the benefit of an entity, the entity will lose its deduction for a portion of its otherwise deductible interest expenses. This disallowance does not apply if the nonnatural owner pays tax on the annual increase in the Contract Value. Entities that are considering purchasing the contract, or entities that will benefit from someone else’s ownership of a contract, should consult a tax adviser.

 

Investments in the Separate Account must be diversified. For a contract to be treated as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes, the investments of the Separate Account must be “adequately diversified.” The IRS has issued regulations that prescribe standards for determining whether the investments of the Separate Account, including the assets of each Portfolio in which the Separate Account invests, are adequately diversified. If the Separate Account fails to comply with these diversification standards, the owner could be required to pay tax for the year of such failure and each subsequent year on the untaxed income accumulated in the contract.

 

Although we do not control the investments of all of the Funds, we expect that the Funds will comply with the IRS regulations so that the Separate Account will be considered “adequately diversified.”

 

Restrictions on the extent to which an owner can direct the investment of assets. In some circumstances, owners of variable contracts who possess excessive control over the investment of the underlying separate account assets may be treated as the owners of those assets and may be subject to tax currently on income and gains produced by those assets. Although published guidance in this area does not address certain aspects of the contract, we believe that the owner of a contract should not be treated as the owner of the Separate Account assets. We reserve the right to modify the contract to bring it into conformity with applicable standards should such modification be necessary to prevent an owner of the contract from being treated as the owner of the underlying Separate Account assets. However, there is no assurance such efforts would be successful.

 

Age at which income payments must begin. Federal income tax rules do not expressly identify a particular age by which income payments must begin. However, those rules do require that an annuity contract provide for amortization, through income payments of the contract’s premiums paid and earnings.

 

47


Table of Contents

We believe that these rules are satisfied by providing guaranteed annuity purchase rates in the contract that the owner may exercise at any time after the first policy year. If income payments begin or are scheduled to begin at a date that the IRS determines does not satisfy these rules, interest and gains under the contract could be taxable each year as they accrue.

 

No guarantees regarding tax treatment. We make no guarantees regarding the tax treatment of any contract or of any transaction involving a contract. However, the remainder of this discussion assumes that your contract will be treated as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes and that the tax law will not impose tax on any increase in your Contract Value until there is a distribution from your contract.

 

Partial and total surrenders. A partial surrender occurs when you receive less than the total amount of the contract’s Surrender Value. In the case of a partial surrender, you will pay tax on the amount you receive to the extent your Contract Value before the partial surrender exceeds your “investment in the contract.” (This term is explained below.) This income (and all other income from your contract) is ordinary income. The Code imposes a higher rate of tax on ordinary income than it does on capital gains.

 

A surrender occurs when you receive the total amount of the contract’s Surrender Value. In the case of a surrender, you will generally pay tax on the amount you receive to the extent it exceeds your “investment in the contract.”

 

Your “investment in the contract” generally equals the total of your premium payments under the contract, reduced by any amounts you previously received from the contract that you did not include in your income.

 

Your contract imposes charges relating to the death benefit, including any death benefit provided under an optional rider. It is possible that all or a portion of these charges could be treated as partial surrenders from the contract.

 

In the case of Systematic Withdrawals, the amount of each Systematic Withdrawal should be considered a distribution and taxed in the same manner as a partial surrender from the contract.

 

Assignments and pledges. The Code treats any assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) any portion of your Contract Value as a partial surrender of such amount or portion.

 

Gifting a contract. If you transfer ownership of your contract — without receiving full and adequate consideration — to a person other than your spouse (or to your former spouse incident to divorce), you will pay tax on your Contract Value to the extent it exceeds your “investment in the contract.” In such a case, the new owner’s “investment in the contract” will be increased to reflect the amount included in your income.

 

Taxation of income payments. The Code imposes tax on a portion of each income payment (at ordinary income tax rates) and treats a portion as a nontaxable return of your “investment in the contract.” We will notify you annually of the taxable amount of your income payment.

 

Pursuant to the Code, you will pay tax on the full amount of your income payments once you have recovered the total amount of the “investment in the contract.” If income payments cease because of the death of the Annuitant(s) and before the total amount of the “investment in the contract” has been recovered, the unrecovered amount generally will be deductible.

 

If proceeds are left with us (Optional Payment Plan 4), they are taxed in the same manner as a surrender. The owner must pay tax currently on the interest credited on these proceeds. This treatment could also apply to Optional Payment Plan 3 depending on the relationship of the amount of the periodic payments to the period over which they are paid.

 

Taxation of the death benefit. We may distribute amounts from your contract because of the death of an owner, a joint owner, or an Annuitant. The tax treatment of these amounts depends on whether the owner, joint owner, or Annuitant dies before or after the Maturity Date.

 

Taxation of Death Benefit if Paid Before the Maturity Date:

 

    the death benefit is taxed to the designated beneficiary in the same manner as an income payment would have been taxed to the owner if received under an Optional Payment Plan;

 

    if not received under an Optional Payment Plan, the death benefit is taxed to the designated beneficiary in the same manner as a surrender or a partial surrender would have been taxed to the owner, depending on the manner in which the death benefit is paid.

 

Taxation of Death Benefit if Paid After the Maturity Date:

 

    The death benefit is includible in income to the extent it exceeds the unrecovered “investment in the contract.”

 

Penalty taxes payable on surrenders, partial surrenders or income payments. The Code may impose a penalty tax equal to 10% of the amount of any payment from your contract that is included in your gross income. The Code does not impose the 10% penalty tax if one of several exceptions applies. These exceptions include partial and total surrenders or income payments that:

 

    you receive on or after you reach age 5912;

 

48


Table of Contents
    you receive because you became disabled (as defined in the tax law);

 

    are received on or after the death of an owner; or

 

    you receive as a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the taxpayer.

 

Systematic Withdrawals may qualify for this last exception if structured in accordance with IRS guidelines. If they do, any modification of the Systematic Withdrawals, including additional partial surrenders apart from the Systematic Withdrawals, could result in certain adverse tax consequences. In addition, premium payments or a transfer between the Subaccounts may result in payments not qualifying for this exception.

 

Other exceptions may be applicable under certain circumstances and special rules may be applicable in connection with the exceptions enumerated above. You should consult a tax adviser with regard to exceptions from the penalty tax.

 

Medicare Tax. Distributions from Non-Qualified Contracts will be considered “investment income” for purposes of the Medicare tax on investment income. Thus, in certain circumstances, a 3.8% tax may be applied to some or all of the taxable portion of distributions (e.g. earnings) to individuals whose income exceeds certain threshold amounts. Please consult a tax adviser for more information.

 

Special rules if you own more than one contract. In certain circumstances, you may have to combine some or all of the Non-Qualified Contracts you own in order to determine the amount of an income payment, a total surrender, or a partial surrender that you must include in income. For example:

 

    if you purchase a contract described by this prospectus and also purchase at approximately the same time an immediate annuity, the IRS may treat the two contracts as one contract;

 

    if you purchase two or more deferred annuity contracts from the same life insurance company (or its affiliates) during any calendar year, the Code treats all such contracts as one contract for certain purposes.

 

The effects of such aggregation are not clear. However, it could affect:

 

    the amount of a surrender, a partial surrender or an income payment that you must include in income; and

 

    the amount that might be subject to a penalty tax.

 

Section 1035 Exchanges

 

Under Section 1035 of the Code, the exchange of one annuity contract for another annuity contract generally is not taxed (unless cash is distributed). To qualify as a nontaxable exchange however, certain conditions must be satisfied, e.g., the obligee(s) under the new annuity contract must be the same obligee(s) as under the original contract. We do not permit an owner to partially exchange this contract for another annuity contract.

 

If this contract has been purchased in whole or part by exchanging part of a life insurance or annuity contract, certain subsequent transactions may cause the IRS to retrospectively treat the partial Section 1035 exchange as taxable. We intend to administer the contract without regard to the partially exchanged funding contract and disclaim any responsibility for monitoring events that could cause the IRS to examine the completed partial Section 1035 exchange. Owners contemplating any transaction, involving this contract or a partially exchanged contract funding this contract, within 180 days of a partial Section 1035 exchange are strongly advised to consult a tax adviser.

 

Upon the death of a non-spousal joint owner, the contract provides the surviving joint owner with the option of using the proceeds of this contract to purchase a separate annuity contract with terms and values that are substantially similar to those of this contract. Exercise of this option will not qualify as a tax-free exchange under Section 1035.

 

Beginning in 2010, the owner may exchange the contract under Section 1035 of the Code for a long-term care contract. We believe that the provisions of the Pension Protection Act of 2006 establishing annuity to long-term care Section 1035 exchanges would permit the owner to exchange a portion of the contract to pay the annual or other periodic premium for a long-term care contract issued by us or another insurance company. The IRS has issued limited guidance on such transactions, including on the allocation of basis that would be required to effect them. It is possible that the IRS could take a narrow view of the 2006 legislation and under certain circumstances treat partial Section 1035 exchanges to pay long-term care premiums as taxable withdrawals from the contract. Currently, we do not permit an owner to partially exchange this contract to purchase a long-term care contract or pay long-term care premiums. If all or a portion of the contract is used to purchase long-term care insurance in a Section 1035 exchange, the amount so used representing income on the contract would not be tax-deductible as a medical expense and the amount so used representing investment in the contract may not be tax-deductible as a medical expense. Any owner contemplating the use of the

 

49


Table of Contents

contract to fund long-term care insurance or long-term care expenses should consult a tax adviser.

 

Qualified Retirement
Plans

 

We also designed the contracts for use in connection with certain types of retirement plans that receive favorable treatment under the Code. Contracts issued to or in connection with retirement plans that receive special tax treatment are called “Qualified Contracts.” We may not offer all of the types of Qualified Contracts described herein in the future. Prospective purchasers should contact our Home Office for information on the availability of Qualified Contracts at any given time.

 

The federal income tax rules applicable to qualified retirement plans are complex and varied. As a result, this prospectus makes no attempt to provide more than general information about use of the contract with the various types of qualified retirement plans. Persons intending to use the contract in connection with a qualified retirement plan should obtain advice from a tax adviser.

 

The contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit. The purchase of this contract as an investment of a qualified retirement plan does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. If you are purchasing this contract as a Qualified Contract, you should consider purchasing this contract for its death benefits, income benefits and other non-tax benefits. Please consult a tax adviser for information specific to your circumstances in order to determine whether this contract is an appropriate investment for you.

 

Types of Qualified Contracts. The types of Qualified Contracts currently being offered include:

 

    Traditional Individual Retirement Annuities (IRAs) permit individuals to make annual contributions of up to the lesser of a specified dollar amount for the year or the amount of compensation includible in the individual’s gross income for the year. Certain employers may establish Simplified Employee Pensions (SEPs), which have higher contribution limits, on behalf of their employees. The Internal Revenue Service has not reviewed the contract for qualification as an IRA, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether death benefits such as those in the contract comport with IRA qualification requirements.

 

    Roth IRAs permit certain eligible individuals to make non-deductible contributions to a Roth IRA. Distributions from a Roth IRA generally are not taxed, except that, once aggregate distributions exceed contributions to the Roth IRA, income tax and a 10% IRS penalty tax may apply to distributions made: (1) before age 5912 (subject to certain exceptions); or (2) during the five taxable years starting with the year in which the first contribution is made to any Roth IRA. A 10% penalty may apply to amounts attributable to a conversion from an IRA if they are distributed during the five taxable years beginning with the year in which the conversion was made.

 

    Traditional individual retirement accounts and Roth individual retirement accounts have the same contribution limits and tax treatment of distributions as the corresponding type of individual retirement annuity, discussed above. The contract may be owned by the custodian or trustee of an individual retirement account established for the benefit of the Annuitant. Only the owner, acting through its authorized representative(s), may exercise contract rights. When held by an individual retirement account, the contract is not issued as an individual retirement annuity or administered as such by us. Annuitants must look to the custodian or trustee, as contract owner, for satisfaction of their rights to benefits under the terms of the individual retirement account.

 

    Corporate pension and profit-sharing plans under Section 401(a) of the Code allow corporate employers to establish various types of retirement plans for employees, and self-employed individuals to establish qualified plans (“H.R. 10 or Keough plans”) for themselves and their employees.

 

   

403(b) Plans allow employees of certain tax-exempt organizations and public schools to exclude from their gross income the premium payments made, within certain limits, to a contract that will provide an annuity for the employee’s retirement. Distributions of: (1) salary reduction contributions made in years beginning after December 31, 1988; (2) earnings on those contributions; and (3) earnings on amounts held as of the last year beginning before January 1, 1989, are not allowed prior to age 5912, severance from employment, death or disability. Salary reduction contributions (and, effective for plan years beginning in January 1, 2024, qualified nonelective contributions, qualified matching contributions, and earnings attributable to such amounts) may also be distributed upon hardship, but would generally be subject to a 10% IRS penalty tax. For contracts issued after 2008, amounts attributable to nonelective contributions may be subject to distribution restrictions specified in the employer’s 403(b) Plan. Under recent IRS regulations we are obligated to share information concerning certain contract transactions with the employer sponsoring the 403(b) plan in which the owner is participating and

 

50


Table of Contents
 

possibly other product providers. We generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that these transactions comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance.

 

Terms of qualified retirement plans and Qualified Contracts. The terms of a qualified retirement plan may affect your rights under a Qualified Contract. When issued in connection with a qualified retirement plan, we will amend a contract as generally necessary to conform to the requirements of the type of plan. However, the rights of any person to any benefits under qualified retirement plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the plans themselves, regardless of the terms and conditions of the contract. In addition, we are not bound by the terms and conditions of qualified retirement plans to the extent such terms and conditions contradict the contract, unless we consent.

 

Employer qualified plans. Qualified plans sponsored by an employer or employee organization are governed by the provisions of the Code and the Employee Retirement Income Security Act, as amended (“ERISA”). ERISA is administered primarily by the U.S. Department of Labor. The Code and ERISA include requirements that various features be contained in an employer qualified plan with respect to: participation; vesting; funding; nondiscrimination; limits on contributions and benefits; distributions; penalties; duties of fiduciaries; prohibited transactions; withholding; reporting and disclosure.

 

In the case of certain qualified plans, if a participant is married at the time benefits become payable, unless the participant elects otherwise with written consent of the spouse, the benefits must be paid in the form of a qualified joint and survivor annuity. A qualified joint and survivor annuity is an annuity payable for the life of the participant with a survivor annuity for the life of the spouse in an amount that is not less than one-half of the amount payable to the participant during his or her lifetime. In addition, a married participant’s beneficiary must be the spouse, unless the spouse consents in writing to the designation of a different beneficiary.

 

If this contract is purchased as an investment of a qualified plan, the owner will be either an employee benefit trust or the plan sponsor. Plan participants and beneficiaries will have no ownership rights in the contract. Only the owner, acting through its authorized representative(s) may exercise contract rights. Participants and beneficiaries must look to the plan fiduciaries for satisfaction of their rights to benefits under the terms of the qualified plan.

 

Where a contract is purchased by an employer-qualified plan, we assume no responsibility regarding whether the contract’s terms and benefits are consistent with the requirements of the Code and ERISA. It is the responsibility of the employer, plan trustee, plan administrator and/or other plan fiduciaries to satisfy the requirements of the Code and ERISA applicable to the qualified plan. This prospectus does not provide detailed tax or ERISA information. Various tax disadvantages, including penalties, may result from actions that conflict with requirements of the Code or ERISA, and the regulations pertaining to those laws. Federal tax laws and ERISA are continually under review by Congress. Any changes in the laws or in the regulations pertaining to the laws may affect the tax treatment of amounts contributed to employer qualified plans and the fiduciary actions required by ERISA.

 

IRAs and Roth IRAs. The Code permits individuals to make annual contributions to IRAs of up to the lesser of a specified dollar amount for the year or the amount of compensation includible in the individual’s gross income for the year. The contributions may be deductible in whole or in part, depending on the individual’s income. The Code also permits certain eligible individuals to make non-deductible contributions to a Roth IRA in cash or as a rollover or transfer from another Roth IRA or other IRA. A rollover from or conversion of an IRA to a Roth IRA is generally subject to tax. You should consult a tax adviser before combining any converted amounts with any other Roth IRA contributions, including any other conversion amounts from other tax years.

 

The Internal Revenue Service has not reviewed the contract for qualification as an IRA, and has not addressed in a ruling of general applicability whether a death benefit provision such as the provision in this contract comports with IRA qualification requirements. We may, however, endorse the contract to satisfy the IRA or Roth IRA qualification rules and submit the endorsement to the IRS for approval as to form. If you purchased the contract with such an endorsement, the accompanying disclosure statement will indicate the status of the endorsement’s approval under the IRS IRA Prototype Program.

 

You will be the owner of a contract issued as an IRA or Roth IRA, and will be responsible for exercising your rights as owner in accordance with applicable tax rules, including limitations for contributions and distributions. The contract may also be held in an IRA custodial account or trust as an investment. In that event the custodian or trustee, with your cooperation, is responsible for satisfaction of the IRA qualification requirements. We have no responsibility beyond that pertaining to nonqualified contracts for contracts held in an IRA account or trust.

 

The death benefit and Qualified Contracts. Pursuant to IRS regulations, IRAs and 403(b) Plans may not invest in life insurance contracts. We do not believe that these regulations

 

51


Table of Contents

prohibit the death benefit, including that provided by any death benefit rider option, from being provided under the contracts when we issue the contracts as Traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, SEPs or 403(b) Plans. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that the presence of the death benefit under a contract issued as a Traditional IRA, a Roth IRA, a SEP or 403(b) Plan could disqualify a contract and result in increased taxes to the owner.

 

It is also possible that the death benefit could be characterized as an incidental death benefit. If the death benefit were so characterized, this could result in currently taxable income to purchasers. In addition, there are limitations on the amount of incidental death benefits that may be provided under qualified retirement plans, such as in connection with a Section 403(b) plan.

 

Treatment of Qualified Contracts compared with Non-Qualified Contracts. Although some of the federal income tax rules are the same for both Qualified and Non-Qualified Contracts, many of the rules are different. For example:

 

    the Code generally does not impose tax on the earnings under either Qualified or Non-Qualified Contracts until the earnings are distributed;

 

    the Code does not limit the amount of premium payments and the time at which premium payments can be made under Non-Qualified Contracts. However, the Code does limit both the amount and frequency of premium payments made to Qualified Contracts;

 

    the Code does not allow a deduction for premium payments made for Non-Qualified Contracts, but sometimes allows a deduction or exclusion from income for premium payments made to a Qualified Contract;

 

    Under most qualified retirement plans, the owner must begin receiving payments from the contract in certain minimum amounts by a certain date, generally April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the owner attains their applicable age for Traditional IRAs and SEPs and April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the calendar year in which the employee (except for a 5 percent owner) retires or attains their applicable age for other Qualified Contracts (referred to as the “required beginning date”). If the owner attains age 72 before or during 2022, the applicable age is 72. If the owner attains age 72 after 2022 and age 73 before 2033, the applicable age is 73. If the owner attains age 74 after 2032, the applicable age is 75. The actuarial value of certain benefit guarantees and certain death benefits may be included with the contract’s cash value in determining the required minimum distribution amount. The presence of such death benefits may require the owner to withdraw a larger amount each year than would be required based only on the contract value. We are required to annually determine and report to the owner the fair market value for traditional individual retirement annuities while the owner is alive. This computation is based in part on future economic performance and conditions and is made under the guidance of our actuarial department in accordance with income tax regulations and guidelines published by the Society of Actuaries. It is possible that, using different assumptions or methodologies, the amount required to be withdrawn would be more or less than the amount we report to you as the required minimum distribution. Roth IRAs do not require any distributions during the owner’s lifetime. The death benefit under your contract may increase the amount of the minimum required distribution that must be taken from your contract.

 

The federal income tax rules applicable to qualified retirement plans and Qualified Contracts vary with the type of plan and contract. For example, federal tax rules limit the amount of premium payments that can be made, and the tax deduction or exclusion that may be allowed for the premium payments. These limits vary depending on the type of qualified retirement plan and the circumstances of the plan participant, e.g., the participant’s compensation.

 

Amounts received under Qualified Contracts. Federal income tax rules generally include distributions from a Qualified Contract in your income as ordinary income. Premium payments that are deductible or excludible from income do not create “investment in the contract.” Thus, under many Qualified Contracts there will be no “investment in the contract” and you include the total amount you receive in your income. There are exceptions. For example, you do not include amounts received from a Roth IRA if certain conditions are satisfied. In addition, failure to comply with the minimum distribution rules applicable to certain qualified retirement plans, will result in the imposition of an excise tax. This excise tax generally equals 25% of the amount by which a minimum required distribution exceeds the actual distribution from the qualified retirement plan. The excise tax is reduced to 10% if a distribution of the shortfall is made within two years and to the date the excise tax is imposed. Please note important changes to the required minimum distribution rules. Under IRAs and defined contribution retirement plans, most non-spouse beneficiaries will no longer be able to satisfy these rules by “stretching” payouts over life. Instead, those beneficiaries will have to take their post-death distributions within ten years. Certain exceptions apply to “eligible designated beneficiaries,”

 

52


Table of Contents

which include disabled and chronically ill individuals, individuals who are ten or less years younger than the deceased individual, and children who have not reached the age of majority. This change applies to distributions to designated beneficiaries of individuals who die on and after January 1, 2020. Consult a tax adviser if you are affected by these new rules.

 

Federal penalty taxes payable on distributions. The Code may impose a penalty tax equal to 10% of the amount of any payment from your Qualified Contract that is includible in your income. The Code does not impose the penalty tax if one of several exceptions apply. The exceptions vary depending on the type of Qualified Contract you purchase. For example, in the case of an IRA, exceptions provide that the penalty tax does not apply to a partial surrender, surrender, or annuity payment:

 

    received on or after the owner reaches age 5912;

 

    received on or after the owner’s death or because of the owner’s disability (as defined in the tax law);

 

    received as a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the taxpayer; or

 

    received as reimbursement for certain amounts paid for medical care.

 

These exceptions, as well as certain others not described here, generally apply to taxable distributions from other qualified retirement plans. However, the specific requirements of the exception may vary.

 

Moving money from one Qualified Contract or qualified retirement plan to another.Rollovers and transfers: In many circumstances you may move money between Qualified Contracts and qualified retirement plans by means of a rollover or a transfer. Special rules apply to such rollovers and transfers.

 

An IRA owner may make only one rollover in a 12 month period to avoid being taxed on distributions received during that period from all of his or her IRAs (including Roth IRAs). The rule does not apply to direct transfers between IRA issuers or custodians. If you have received an IRA distribution and are contemplating making a rollover contribution, you should consult a tax adviser.

 

If you do not follow the applicable rules, you may suffer adverse federal income tax consequences, including paying taxes which you might not otherwise have had to pay. You should always consult a qualified tax adviser before you move or attempt to move assets between any Qualified Contract or plan and another Qualified Contract or plan. If your contract was issued pursuant to a 403(b) plan, we generally are required to confirm, with your 403(b) plan sponsor or otherwise, that surrenders or transfers you request comply with applicable tax requirements and to decline requests that are not in compliance.

 

Direct rollovers: The direct rollover rules apply to certain payments (called “eligible rollover distributions”) from Section 401(a) plans, Section 403(b) plans, H.R. 10 plans, and Qualified Contracts used in connection with these types of plans. The direct rollover rules do not apply to distributions from IRAs. The direct rollover rules require federal income tax equal to 20% of the taxable portion of an eligible rollover distribution to be withheld from the amount of the distribution, unless the owner elects to have the amount directly transferred to certain Qualified Contracts or plans. Certain restrictions apply to the ability to rollover any after-tax amounts.

 

Prior to receiving an eligible rollover distribution from us, we will provide you with a notice explaining these requirements and the procedure for avoiding 20% withholding by electing a direct rollover.

 

IRA conversions: If this contract is issued as an IRA, you may convert the contract to a Roth IRA. If you do so, the fair market value of your contract will be treated as a distribution from your IRA. This fair market value will include the contract’s cash value together with the actuarial value of certain benefit guarantees, such as certain death benefits. This computation is based in part on future economic performance and conditions and is made under the guidance of our actuarial department in accordance with income tax regulations. The methodology followed is similar to that used to determine the actuarial value of such benefit guarantees for required minimum distribution purposes, as described above in the “Treatment of Qualified Contracts compared with Non-Qualified Contracts” section. We will determine and report the fair market value of your contract to you and the Internal Revenue Service to satisfy our reporting obligations using assumptions and calculation methodologies based on our interpretation of the Code. It is possible that, using different assumptions or methodologies, your actual tax liability would be more or less than the income reported by us. You should always consult a tax adviser before you convert an IRA to a Roth IRA.

 

Disclosure Pursuant to Code and ERISA Requirements. The ongoing fees and expenses of the contracts and the charges you may pay when you surrender or take withdrawals from your contract, as well as the range of fees and expenses of the Portfolios that you will pay indirectly when your assets are allocated to the Portfolios, are discussed in the “Fee Tables” provision of the prospectus. More detail concerning each Portfolio’s fees and expenses is included in the prospectus for each Portfolio.

 

53


Table of Contents

The Company may receive fees from the investment adviser or distributor of a Portfolio for certain administrative and other services we provide to you or to the Portfolio relating to the allocation of your assets to the Portfolio, and the amount of these fees may vary from Portfolio to Portfolio. Furthermore, the Company or our affiliate Capital Brokerage Corporation may receive Rule 12b-1 fees in varying amounts from the Portfolios or their distributors for distribution and related services. Additional information on the fees payable to the Company and Capital Brokerage Corporation by the Portfolios and their advisers and distributors, including the range of such fees, is included in the “Subaccounts” provision of the prospectus.

 

When you purchase a contract through a broker-dealer, the broker-dealer is paid a commission and may be paid a separate marketing allowance. The maximum aggregate amount of such compensation is 6.5% of a contract owner’s aggregate premium payments. The broker-dealer firm generally pays a portion of such commission to its representative who assisted you with the purchase, and that amount will vary depending on the broker-dealer and the individual representative. The Company has no agreement with any broker-dealer and any representative of a broker-dealer that limits the insurance and investment products or other securities they offer to those issued by the Company.

 

By signing the application for the contract, you acknowledge receipt of these disclosures and approve the purchase of the contract, the Asset Allocation Program, and the investments made pursuant to the Asset Allocation Program.

 

Federal Income Tax Withholding

 

We will withhold and remit to the IRS a part of the taxable portion of each distribution made under a contract unless the distributee notifies us at or before the time of the distribution that he or she elects not to have any amounts withheld. In certain circumstances, federal income tax rules may require us to withhold tax. At the time you request a partial or total surrender, or income payment, we will send you forms that explain the withholding requirements.

 

See the “Annuity Purchases by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations” section below for special withholding rules applicable to payees other than U.S. citizens or residents and to payments made overseas.

 

State Income Tax Withholding

 

If required by the law of your state, we will also withhold state income tax from the taxable portion of each distribution made under the contract, unless you make an available election to avoid withholding. If permitted under state law, we will honor your request for voluntary state withholding.

 

Tax Status of the Company

 

Under existing federal income tax laws, we do not pay tax on investment income and realized capital gains of the Separate Account. We do not anticipate that we will incur any federal income tax liability on the income and gains earned by the Separate Account. We, therefore, do not impose a charge for federal income taxes. If federal income tax law changes and we must pay tax on some or all of the income and gains earned by the Separate Account, we may impose a charge against the Separate Account to pay the taxes.

 

Federal Estate, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

 

While no attempt is being made to discuss in detail the Federal estate tax implications of the contract, a purchaser should keep in mind that the value of an annuity contract owned by a decedent and payable to a beneficiary who survives the decedent is included in the decedent’s gross estate. Depending on the terms of the annuity contract, the value of the annuity included in the gross estate may be the value of the lump sum payment payable to the designated beneficiary or the actuarial value of the payments to be received by the beneficiary. Consult an estate planning advisor for more information.

 

Under certain circumstances, the Code may impose a generation-skipping (“GST”) tax when all or part of an annuity contract is transferred to, or a death benefit is paid to, an individual two or more generations younger than the Owner. Regulations issued under the Code may require us to deduct the tax from your Contract, or from any applicable payment, and pay it directly to the IRS.

 

The potential application of these taxes underscores the importance of seeking guidance from a qualified adviser to help ensure that your estate plan adequately addresses your needs and those of your beneficiaries under all possible scenarios.

 

Definition of Spouse Under Federal Law

 

The contract provides that upon your death, a surviving spouse may have certain continuation rights that he or she may elect to exercise for the contract’s death benefit. All contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal

 

54


Table of Contents

marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

 

Annuity Purchases by Residents of Puerto Rico

 

The IRS has announced that income received by residents of Puerto Rico under life insurance or annuity contracts issued by a Puerto Rico branch of a United States life insurance company is U.S. — source income that is generally subject to United States federal income tax.

 

Annuity Purchases by Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

 

The discussion above provides general information regarding U.S. federal income tax consequences to annuity purchasers that are U.S. citizens or residents. Purchasers (and beneficiaries) that are not U.S. citizens or residents will generally be subject to U.S. federal withholding tax on taxable distributions from annuity contracts at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. In addition, such purchasers may be subject to state and/or municipal taxes and taxes that may be imposed by the purchaser’s country of citizenship or residence. Special withholding rules apply to entity purchasers (including foreign corporations, partnerships, and trusts) that are not U.S. residents. We reserve the right to make all payments due to owners or beneficiaries directly to such persons and shall not be obligated to pay any foreign financial institution on behalf of any individual. Prospective purchasers are advised to consult with a qualified tax adviser regarding U.S. state, and foreign taxation with respect to an annuity contract purchase.

 

Foreign Tax Credits

 

We may benefit from any foreign tax credits attributable to taxes paid by certain funds to foreign jurisdictions to the extent permitted under federal tax law.

 

Changes in the Law

 

This discussion is based on the Code, IRS regulations, and interpretations existing on the date of this prospectus. Congress, the IRS, and the courts may modify these authorities, however, sometimes retroactively.

 

REQUESTING PAYMENTS

 

To request a payment, you must provide us with notice in a form satisfactory to us. We will ordinarily pay any partial surrender or total surrender proceeds from the Separate Account within seven days after receipt at our Home Office of a request in good order. We will also ordinarily make payment of lump sum death benefit proceeds from the Separate Account within seven days from the receipt of due proof of death and all required forms. We will determine the amount of the payment as of the end of the Valuation Period during which our Home Office receives the payment request or due proof of death and all required forms.

 

In most cases, when we pay the death benefit in a lump sum, we will pay these proceeds to your designated beneficiary directly in the form of a check. We may also provide your designated beneficiary the option to establish an interest bearing draft account, called the “Secure Access Account,” in the amount of the death benefit.

 

When establishing the Secure Access Account we will send the designated beneficiary a draft account book within seven days after we receive all the required documents, and the designated beneficiary will have immediate access to the account simply by writing a draft for all or any part of the amount of the death benefit payment. Any interest credited to amounts in the Secure Access Account is currently taxable to the designated beneficiary.

 

The Secure Access Account is part of our General Account. It is not a bank account and it is not insured by the FDIC or any other government agency. As part of our General Account, it is subject to the claims of our creditors. We receive a benefit from all amounts left in the Secure Access Account.

 

We require a positive election from the designated beneficiary to establish the Secure Access Account for the designated beneficiary. The Secure Access Account is not available in all states. We may discontinue offering the Secure Access Account at any time, for any reason and without notice.

 

We will delay making a payment from the Subaccount or applying Subaccount value to a payment plan if:

 

  (1)   the disposal or valuation of the Subaccount is not reasonably practicable because:

 

    the SEC declares that an emergency exists (due to the emergency the disposal or valuation of the Separate Account’s assets is not reasonably practicable);

 

    the New York Stock Exchange is closed for other than a regular holiday or weekend;

 

    trading is restricted by the SEC; or

 

  (2)   the SEC, by order, permits postponement of payment to protect our owners.

 

55


Table of Contents

In addition, if, pursuant to SEC rules, a money market fund that a subaccount invests in suspends payment of redemption proceeds in connection with a liquidation of that fund, we will delay payment of any transfer, partial withdrawal, surrender, loan, or death benefit from the subaccount until the fund is liquidated.

 

State law requires that we reserve the right to defer payments from the Guarantee Account for a partial or total surrender for up to six months from the date we receive your request at our Home Office. We also may defer making any payments attributable to a check or draft that has not cleared until we are satisfied that the check or draft has been paid by the bank on which it is drawn.

 

If mandated under applicable law, we may be required to reject a premium payment and/or block an owner’s account and thereby refuse to pay any requests for transfers, partial surrenders, or death benefits until instructions are received from the appropriate regulators. We may also be required to provide additional information about you or your account to government regulators.

 

SALES OF THE CONTRACTS

 

This contract is no longer offered or sold. However, the following section provides detail concerning the manner in which contracts were sold and the compensation arrangements applicable to those sales. Although certain compensation practices no longer apply (e.g., no commissions are paid in connection with new contract sales because such sales have been suspended), certain of the compensation practices remain relevant to in-force contracts. Most notably, selling firms continue to be compensated with respect to subsequent premium payments made under the in-force contracts.

 

We have entered into an underwriting agreement with Capital Brokerage Corporation for the distribution and sale of the contracts. Pursuant to this agreement, Capital Brokerage Corporation serves as principal underwriter for the contracts, offering them on a continuous basis. Capital Brokerage Corporation is located at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. Capital Brokerage Corporation will use its best efforts to sell the contracts, but is not required to sell any specific number or dollar amount of contracts.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation was organized as a corporation under the laws of the state of Washington in 1981 and is an affiliate of ours. Capital Brokerage Corporation is registered as a broker-dealer with the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as well as with the securities commissions in the states in which it operates, and is a member of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”) (formerly, NASD, Inc.).

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation offers the contracts through its registered representatives who are registered with FINRA and with the states in which they do business. More information about Capital Brokerage Corporation and the registered representatives is available at http://www.finra.org or by calling (800) 289-9999. You also can obtain an investor brochure from FINRA describing its Public Disclosure Program. Registered representatives with Capital Brokerage Corporation are also licensed as insurance agents in the states in which they do business and are appointed with the Company.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation also enters into selling agreements with an affiliated broker-dealer and unaffiliated broker-dealers to sell the contracts. The registered representatives of these selling firms are registered with FINRA and with the states in which they do business, are licensed as insurance agents in the states in which they do business and are appointed with us.

 

We pay compensation to Capital Brokerage Corporation for promotion and sales of the contracts by its registered representatives as well as by affiliated and unaffiliated selling firms. This compensation consists of sales commissions and other cash and non-cash compensation. The maximum commission we may pay for the sale of a contract is 7.0% of a contract owner’s aggregate premium payments.

 

The maximum commission consists of three parts — commissions paid to internal and external wholesalers of Capital Brokerage Corporation (“wholesalers” are individuals employed by the Company and registered with Capital Brokerage Corporation that promote the offer and sale of the contracts), commissions paid to the affiliated and unaffiliated brokerage firms (“selling firms”) that employ the registered representative who sold your contract, and an amount paid to the selling firm for marketing and other payments related to the sale of the contract. Wholesalers with Capital Brokerage Corporation each may receive a maximum commission of 0.5% of your aggregate premium payments.

 

After commission is paid to the wholesalers of Capital Brokerage Corporation, a commission is then paid to the selling firm. A maximum commission of 5.5% of your aggregate premium payments. The exact amount of commission paid to the registered representative who sold you your contract is determined by the brokerage firm that employs the representative is employed.

 

All selling firms receive commissions as described above based on the sale of, and receipt of premium payments, on the contract. Unaffiliated selling firms receive additional compensation, including marketing allowances and other payments. The maximum marketing allowance paid to a selling

 

56


Table of Contents

firm on the sale of a contract is 1.0% of premium payments received. At times, Capital Brokerage Corporation may make other cash and non-cash payments to selling firms, (as well as receive payments from selling firms) for expenses relating to the recruitment and training of personnel, periodic sales meetings, the production of promotional sales literature and similar expenses. These expenses may also relate to the synchronization of technology between the Company, Capital Brokerage Corporation and the selling firm in order to coordinate data for the sale and maintenance of the contract. In addition, registered representatives may be eligible for non-cash compensation programs offered by Capital Brokerage Corporation or an affiliated company, such as conferences, trips, prizes and awards. The amount of other cash and non-cash compensation paid by Capital Brokerage Corporation or its affiliated companies ranges significantly among the selling firms. Likewise, the amount received by Capital Brokerage Corporation from the selling firms ranges significantly.

 

The commissions listed above are maximum commissions paid, and reflect situations where we pay a higher commission for a short period of time for a special promotion.

 

No specific charge is assessed directly to contract owners or the Separate Account to cover commissions and other incentives or payments described above. We do, however, intend to recoup commissions and other sales expenses and incentives we pay through fees and charges deducted under the contract and any other corporate revenue.

 

All commissions, special marketing allowances and other payments made or received by Capital Brokerage Corporation to or from selling firms come from or are allocated to the general assets of Capital Brokerage Corporation or one of its affiliated companies. Therefore, regardless of the amount paid or received by Capital Brokerage Corporation or one of its affiliated companies, the amount of expenses you pay under the contract does not vary because of such payments to or from such selling firms.

 

Even though your contract costs are not determined based on amounts paid to or received from Capital Brokerage Corporation or the selling firm, the prospect of receiving, or the receipt of, additional cash or non-cash compensation as described above may create an incentive for selling firms and/or their registered representative to sell you this product versus a product with respect to which a selling firm does not receive additional compensation, or a lower level of additional compensation. You may wish to take such compensation arrangements, which may be referred to as “revenue sharing arrangements,” into account when considering and evaluating any recommendation relating to the contracts.

 

During 2023, 2022, and 2021, $23.1 million, $26.3 million, and $32.2 million was paid to Capital Brokerage Corporation for new purchase payments received. In 2023, 2022, and 2021, no underwriting commissions were paid to Capital Brokerage Corporation. This contract (RetireReadySM Extra II) is no longer offered or sold.

 

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

 

Owner Questions

 

The obligations to owners under the contracts are ours. Please direct your questions and concerns to us at our Home Office.

 

State Regulation

 

As a life insurance company organized and operated under the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia, we are subject to provisions governing life insurers and to regulation by the Virginia Commissioner of Insurance.

 

Our books and accounts are subject to review and examination by the State Corporation Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia at all times. That Commission conducts a full examination of our operations at least every five years.

 

Evidence of Death, Age, Gender, Marital Status or Survival

 

We may require proof of the age, gender, marital status or survival of any person or persons before actions on any applicable contract provision.

 

Records and Reports

 

As presently required by the 1940 Act and applicable regulations, we are responsible for maintaining all records and accounts relating to the Separate Account. At least once each year, we will send you a report showing information about your contract for the period covered by the report. The report will show the total Contract Value and a break-down of the assets of each Subaccount and the Guarantee Account. The report also will show premium payments and charges made during the statement period. We will no longer send you paper copies of shareholder reports for the Portfolios of the Funds offered under the contract (“Reports”) unless you specifically request paper copies from us, and instead we will make the Reports available on a website. In addition, you will receive a written confirmation when you make premium payments, transfers, or take partial surrenders.

 

57


Table of Contents

Other
Information

 

We have filed a Registration Statement with the SEC, under the Securities Act of 1933 as amended, for the contracts being offered by this prospectus. This prospectus does not contain all the information in the Registration Statement, its amendments and exhibits. Please refer to the Registration Statement for further information about the Separate Account, the Company, and the contracts offered. Statements in this prospectus about the content of contracts and other legal instruments are summaries. For the complete text of those contracts and instruments, please refer to those documents as filed with the SEC and available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov.

 

Unclaimed Property

 

Every state has unclaimed property laws which generally declare annuity contracts to be abandoned after a period of inactivity of three to five years from the contract’s maturity date or date the death benefit is due and payable. For example, if the payment of a death benefit has been triggered, but, if after a thorough search, we are still unable to locate the beneficiary of the death benefit, or the beneficiary does not come forward to claim the death benefit in a timely manner, the death benefit will be paid to the abandoned property division or unclaimed property office of the state in which the beneficiary or the contract owner last resided, as shown on our books and records, or to our state of domicile. This “escheatment” is revocable, however, and the state is obligated to pay the death benefit if your beneficiary steps forward to claim it with the proper documentation. To prevent such escheatment, it is important that you update your beneficiary designations, including full names and complete addresses, if and as they change.

 

Legal Proceedings

 

We face the risk of litigation and regulatory investigations and actions in the ordinary course of operating our businesses, including the risk of class action lawsuits. Our pending legal and regulatory actions include proceedings specific to us and others generally applicable to business practices in the industries in which we operate. In our insurance operations, we are, have been, or may become subject to class actions and individual suits alleging, among other things, issues relating to sales or underwriting practices, payment of contingent or other sales commissions, claims payments and procedures, product design, product disclosure, administration, additional premium charges for premiums paid on a periodic basis, denial or delay of benefits, charging excessive or impermissible fees on products and recommending unsuitable products to customers. Plaintiffs in class action and other lawsuits against us may seek very large or indeterminate amounts, which may remain unknown for substantial periods of time. In our investment-related operations, we are subject to litigation involving commercial disputes with counterparties. We are also subject to litigation arising out of our general business activities such as our contractual and employment relationships and securities lawsuits. In addition, we are also subject to various regulatory inquiries, such as information requests, subpoenas, books and record examinations and market conduct and financial examinations from state, federal and international regulators and other authorities. A substantial legal liability or a significant regulatory action against us could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Moreover, even if we ultimately prevail in the litigation, regulatory action or investigation, we could suffer significant reputational harm, which could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

Cost of Insurance Litigation

 

TVPX ARX INC., et al. In September 2018, we were named as a defendant in a putative class action lawsuit pending in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Virginia captioned TVPX ARX INC., et al v. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Plaintiff alleges unlawful and excessive cost of insurance (“COI”) charges were imposed on policyholders. The complaint asserts claims for breach of contract, alleging that we improperly considered non-mortality factors when calculating COI rates and failed to decrease COI charges in light of improved expectations of future mortality, and seeks unspecified compensatory damages, costs, and equitable relief.

 

On October 29, 2018, we filed a Motion to Enjoin in the Middle District of Georgia, and a Motion to Dismiss and Motion to Stay in the Eastern District of Virginia. We moved to enjoin the prosecution of the Eastern District of Virginia action on the basis that it involves claims released in a prior nationwide class action settlement (the “McBride settlement”) that was approved by the Middle District of Georgia. Plaintiff filed an amended complaint on November 13, 2018. On December 6, 2018, we moved the Middle District of Georgia for leave to file our counterclaim, which alleges that plaintiff breached the covenant not to sue contained in the prior settlement agreement by filing its current action. On March 15, 2019, the Middle District of Georgia granted our Motion to Enjoin and denied our Motion for Leave to file our counterclaim. As such, plaintiff is enjoined from pursuing its COI class action in the Eastern District of Virginia.

 

On March 29, 2019, plaintiff filed a Notice of Appeal in the Middle District of Georgia, notifying the Court of its appeal to the United States Court of Appeals for the Eleventh Circuit from the Order granting our Motion to Enjoin. On March 29,

 

58


Table of Contents

2019, we filed our Notice of Cross-Appeal in the Middle District of Georgia, notifying the Court of our cross-appeal to the Eleventh Circuit from the portion of the order denying our Motion for Leave to file our counterclaim. On April 8, 2019, the Eastern District of Virginia dismissed the case without prejudice, with leave for plaintiff to refile an amended complaint only if a final appellate court decision vacates the injunction and reverses the Middle District of Georgia’s opinion. On May21, 2019, plaintiff filed its appeal and memorandum in support in the Eleventh Circuit. We filed our response to plaintiff’s appeal memorandum on July 3, 2019. The Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals heard oral argument on plaintiff’s appeal and our cross-appeal on April 21, 2020. On May 26, 2020, the Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals vacated the Middle District of Georgia’s order enjoining plaintiff’s class action and remanded the case back to the Middle District of Georgia for further factual development as to whether we had altered how we calculate or charge COI since the McBride settlement. The Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals did not reach a decision on our counterclaim.

 

On June 30, 2021, after the completion of discovery, we filed our renewed motion to enforce the class action settlement and release, and renewed our motion for leave to file a counterclaim in the Middle District of Georgia. On March 24, 2022, the Court denied our motions. On April 11, 2022, we appealed the Court’s denial to the United States Court of Appeals for the Eleventh Circuit. On June 22, 2022, we filed our opening brief in the Eleventh Circuit. Plaintiff filed its respondent’s brief on September 20, 2022, and our reply brief was filed on November 10, 2022. The appeal was orally argued on August 17, 2023, and we are awaiting a decision from the Eleventh Circuit. We intend to continue to vigorously defend this action.

 

North Carolina Audit

 

On May 31, 2019, the Company and certain affiliates received draft audit reports from the North Carolina Department of Revenue that examined tax credits received for investing in certain renewal energy projects from the period beginning January 1, 2014 and ending December 31, 2016. The Department of Revenue alleges that these tax credits were improper transactions because the Genworth entities were not bona fide partners of the investor/promotor Stonehenge Capital Company, LLC. On July 15, 2019, we responded to the Department of Revenue, stating that we intend to contest the disallowance of the credits. On July 17, 2019, the Department of Revenue replied that their position regarding their audit conclusions has not changed and that they will proceed with finalizing the audit. On July 24, 2019, we received Notices of Proposed Adjustments and tax assessments for the Company and certain of the affiliates totaling $4.4 million from the Department of Revenue. On August 27, 2019, we submitted

our NC-Form 242 Objection to these tax assessments. On December 5, 2019, we received Notices of Proposed Adjustments and tax assessments for the Company and Genworth Life Insurance Company totaling approximately $600,000. On January 14, 2020, we submitted our NC-Form 242 Objection to these tax assessments. We intend to continue to vigorously defend our position and any legal proceedings that may arise.

 

PBI Data Breach Litigation

 

Starting in June 2023, various Genworth entities (including the Company) have been named as defendants in certain putative class action lawsuits in the United States District Courts for the Eastern District of Virginia and the District of Massachusetts. These cases include Burkett, Jr. v. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. The actions relate to the data security events involving the MOVEit file transfer system (“MOVEit Cybersecurity Incident”), which PBI Research Services (“PBI”), a third-party vendor, uses in the performance of its services. Our life insurance companies use PBI to, among other things, satisfy applicable regulatory obligations to search various databases to identify the deaths of insured persons under life insurance policies, and to identify the deaths of long-term care insurance and annuity policies which can impact premium payment obligations and benefit eligibility. Plaintiffs seek to represent various classes and subclasses of Genworth policyholders and agents whose data was accessed or potentially accessed by the MOVEit Cybersecurity Incident, alleging that Genworth breached its purported duty to safeguard their sensitive data from cybercriminals. The complaints assert claims for, inter alia, negligence, negligence per se, breach of contract, unjust enrichment, and violations of various consumer protection and privacy statutes, and they seek, inter alia, declaratory and injunctive relief, compensatory and punitive damages, restitution, attorneys’ fees and costs. On October 4, 2023, the Joint Panel on Multidistrict Litigation issued an order consolidating all actions relating to the MOVEit Cybersecurity Incident before a single federal judge in the United States District Court for the District of Massachusetts. We intend to vigorously defend these actions.

 

McHugh Litigation

 

In February 2024, the Company was named as defendant in a putative class action lawsuit in the Superior Court of the State of California, Sacramento County, captioned James Fox, individually and on behalf of the class v. Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Co. Plaintiff, the holder of a lapsed California life insurance policy, seeks to represent a class of current and former California policyholders and beneficiaries whose policies were allegedly wrongfully terminated. The complaint alleges that the Company wrongfully terminated

 

59


Table of Contents

hundreds of California life insurance policies by failing to provide the policyholders with the notices and grace periods mandated by the contract and by the California Insurance Code as interpreted by the California Supreme Court in McHugh v Protective Life Ins. Co. The complaint asserts causes of action for breach of contract, violation of the California Insurance Code, unfair competition, and bad faith, and it seeks, inter alia, declaratory and injunctive relief, compensatory damages, restitution, attorneys’ fees, and costs. We intend to vigorously defend this action.

 

At this time, we cannot determine or predict the ultimate outcome of any of the pending legal and regulatory matters specifically identified above or the likelihood of potential future legal and regulatory matters against us. Except as disclosed above, we also are not able to provide an estimate or range of reasonably possible losses related to these matters. Therefore, we cannot ensure that the current investigations and proceedings will not have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations. In addition, it is possible that related investigations and proceedings may be commenced in the future, and we could become subject to additional unrelated investigations and lawsuits. Increased regulatory scrutiny and any resulting investigations or proceedings could result in new legal precedents and industry-wide regulations or practices that could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

The Company shall, and may through insurance coverage, indemnify any directors or officers who are a party to any proceeding by reason of the fact that he or she was or is a director or officer of the Company against any liability incurred by him or her in connection with such proceeding unless he or she engaged in willful misconduct or a knowing violation of the criminal law or any federal or state securities law. Such indemnification covers all judgments, settlements, penalties, fines and reasonable expenses incurred with respect to such proceeding. If the person involved is not a director or officer of the Company, the Company may indemnify, or contract to indemnify, to the same extent allowed for its directors and officers, such person who was, is or may become a party to any proceeding, by reason of the fact that he or she is or was an employee or agent of the Company, or is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation is not in any pending or threatened lawsuits that are reasonably likely to have a material adverse impact on us or on the Separate Account.

 

Although it is not anticipated that these developments will have a material adverse impact on the Separate Account, on our ability to meet our obligations under the contracts, or on the ability of Capital Brokerage Corporation to perform under its principal underwriting agreement, there can be no assurance at this time.

 

60


Table of Contents

Appendix A — Portfolios Available Under the Contract

 

The following is a list of Portfolios currently available under the contract. More information about the Portfolios is available in the prospectuses for the Portfolios, which may be amended from time to time and can be found online at www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra2. You can also request this information at no cost by calling (800) 352-9910. Depending on the optional benefits you choose, you may not be able to invest in certain Portfolios.

 

The current expenses and performance information below reflects fees and expenses of the Portfolios, but does not reflect the other fees and expenses that your contract may charge. Expenses would be higher and performance would be lower if these charges were included. Each Portfolio’s past performance is not necessarily an indication of future performance. You may obtain updated Portfolio performance information by calling (800) 352-9910.

 

           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
US Equity Large Cap Growth
 

AB VPS Large Cap Growth Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

0.91%*

 

34.78%

 

17.56%

 

14.60%

US Equity Large Cap Value
 

AB VPS Relative Value Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

0.86%*

 

11.72%

 

11.57%

 

9.05%

US Equity Small Cap
 

AB VPS Small Cap Growth Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

1.15%*

 

17.72%

 

10.29%

 

8.26%

Global Equity Large Cap

 

AB VPS Sustainable Global Thematic Portfolio — Class B

AllianceBernstein, L.P.

 

1.17%*

 

15.70%

 

13.27%

 

9.33%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Invesco V.I. American Franchise Fund — Series I shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

0.86%

 

40.93%

 

16.16%

 

11.70%

US Equity Mid Cap  

Invesco V.I. American Value Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.14%

 

15.29%

 

12.45%

 

6.98%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Invesco V.I. Capital Appreciation Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.05%*

 

35.03%

 

16.10%

 

11.28%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

Invesco V.I. Core Equity Fund — Series I shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

0.80%

 

23.36%

 

12.95%

 

7.79%

US Equity Mid Cap  

Invesco V.I. Discovery Mid Cap Growth Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.12%

 

12.85%

 

12.47%

 

9.52%

Global Equity Large Cap  

Invesco V.I. Global Fund — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.07%

 

34.45%

 

12.02%

 

8.21%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

Invesco V.I. Main Street Fund® — Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.05%*

 

22.83%

 

13.28%

 

9.74%

US Equity Small Cap  

Invesco V.I. Main Street Small Cap Fund® —Series II shares

Invesco Advisers, Inc.

 

1.13%

 

17.82%

 

12.79%

 

8.66%

 

A-1


Table of Contents
           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
US Equity Large Cap Blend  

BNY Mellon Sustainable U.S. Equity Portfolio, Inc. — Initial Shares

BNY Mellon Investment Adviser, Inc. (subadvised by Newton Investment Management Limited)

 

0.67%

 

23.82%

 

15.13%

 

10.46%

Global Equity Large Cap  

Columbia Variable Portfolio — Overseas Core Fund — Class 2

Columbia Management Investment Advisers, LLC

 

1.04%

 

15.32%

 

7.96%

 

3.37%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

CTIVP® - Principal Blue Chip Growth Fund - Class 1

Columbia Management Investment Advisers, LLC (subadvised by Principal Global Investors, LLC)

 

0.70%

 

39.54%

 

15.67%

 

13.48%

US Fixed Income  

VT Floating-Rate Income Fund

Eaton Vance Management

 

1.17%

 

11.21%

 

4.13%

 

3.22%

US Fixed Income  

Federated Hermes High Income Bond Fund II — Service Shares

Federated Investment Management Company

 

1.06%*

 

12.47%

 

4.49%

 

3.87%

US Equity Mid Cap

 

Federated Hermes Kaufmann Fund II — Service Shares

Federated Equity Management Company of Pennsylvania (subadvised by Federated Global Investment Management Corp.)

 

1.80%*

 

14.86%

 

7.04%

 

8.39%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

VIP Contrafund® Portfolio — Service Class 2

Fidelity Management & Research Company (FMR) (subadvised by FMR Investment Management (UK) Limited (FMR UK), Fidelity Management & Research (Hong Kong) Limited (FMR HK), and Fidelity Management & Research (Japan) Limited (FMR Japan))

 

0.81%

 

33.12%

 

16.36%

 

11.33%

US Equity Large Cap Growth

 

VIP Dynamic Capital Appreciation Portfolio —Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.87%

 

28.72%

 

16.93%

 

11.38%

US Equity Large Cap Value

 

VIP Equity-Income PortfolioSM — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.72%

 

10.38%

 

12.01%

 

8.31%

US Equity Large Cap Growth

 

VIP Growth Portfolio — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.83%

 

35.89%

 

19.34%

 

14.51%

US Equity Large Cap Value

 

VIP Growth & Income Portfolio — Service Class 2

FMR (subadvised by FMR UK, FMR HK, and FMR Japan)

 

0.74%

 

18.41%

 

14.50%

 

10.00%

US Money Market  

Goldman Sachs Government Money Market Fund — Service Shares

Goldman Sachs Asset Management, L.P.

 

0.43%*

 

4.79%

 

1.64%

 

1.02%

 

A-2


Table of Contents
           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
Moderate Allocation  

Janus Henderson Balanced Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.87%

 

15.13%

 

9.37%

 

7.73%

US Equity Mid Cap  

Janus Henderson Enterprise Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.97%

 

17.78%

 

13.14%

 

11.82%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Janus Henderson Forty Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.80%

 

39.65%

 

16.64%

 

13.45%

Global Equity Large Cap  

Janus Henderson Global Research Portfolio —Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.86%

 

26.47%

 

13.05%

 

8.74%

Technology Sector Equity  

Janus Henderson Global Technology and Innovation Portfolio — Service Shares

Janus Henderson Investors US LLC

 

0.97%*

 

54.27%

 

20.05%

 

16.86%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

ClearBridge Variable Growth Portfolio — Class II (formerly, ClearBridge Variable Aggressive Growth Portfolio — Class II)

Franklin Templeton Partners Fund Advisor, LLC (subadvised by ClearBridge Investments, LLC)

 

1.10%

 

24.13%

 

8.05%

 

6.38%

US Equity Large Cap Value  

ClearBridge Variable Large Cap Value Portfolio — Class I

Franklin Templeton Partners Fund Advisor, LLC (subadvised by ClearBridge Investments, LLC)

 

0.72%

 

15.09%

 

13.02%

 

8.99%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

MFS® Investors Trust Series — Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

 

1.03%*

 

18.66%

 

13.27%

 

10.00%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

MFS® Massachusetts Investors Growth Stock Portfolio — Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

 

0.98%*

 

23.70%

 

16.39%

 

12.44%

US Equity Small Cap  

MFS® New Discovery Series —

Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

 

1.12%*

 

14.25%

 

10.81%

 

7.41%

Utilities Sector Equity  

MFS® Utilities Series — Service Class Shares

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

 

1.04%*

 

-2.33%

 

8.05%

 

6.13%

US Fixed Income

 

High Yield Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

 

0.77%

 

12.22%

 

4.83%

 

4.15%

Global Fixed Income  

International Bond Portfolio (U.S. Dollar Hedged) — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

 

1.28%

 

9.02%

 

1.64%

 

3.06%

US Fixed Income

 

Long-Term U.S. Government Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

 

2.005%

 

3.99%

 

-1.30%

 

2.06%

US Fixed Income

 

Total Return Portfolio — Administrative Class Shares

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

 

0.75%

 

5.93%

 

1.08%

 

1.71%

 

A-3


Table of Contents
           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
Global Equity Large Cap  

AST International Equity Portfolio — Class I Shares

PGIM Investments LLC and AST Investment Services, Inc. (subadvised by LSV Asset Management, Jennison Associates LLC, Massachusetts Financial Services Company, J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc., and PGIM Quantitative Solutions LLC)

 

1.06%

 

17.75%

 

10.39%

 

6.08%

US Equity Mid Cap  

PSF Mid-Cap Growth Portfolio — Class II Shares

PGIM Investments LLC (subadvised by J.P. Morgan Investment Management, Inc.)

 

1.06%

 

23.04%

 

14.74%

 

9.39%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

PSF PGIM Jennison Blend Portfolio — Class II Shares1

PGIM Investments LLC (subadvised by Jennison Associates LLC)

 

0.86%

 

31.98%

 

14.25%

 

10.08%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  
 

PSF PGIM Jennison Growth Portfolio — Class II Shares

PGIM Investments LLC (subadvised by Jennison Associates LLC)

 

1.02%

 

52.89%

 

17.81%

 

13.87%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

NASDAQ — 100® Fund

Security Investors, LLC known as Guggenheim Investments

 

1.77%*

 

53.22%

 

20.24%

 

15.86%

US Fixed Income  

Income V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

1.38%*

 

4.68%

 

0.46%

 

1.16%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

Premier Growth Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.91%

 

46.28%

 

18.47%

 

13.41%

Real Estate Sector Equity

 

Real Estate Securities V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc. (subadvised by CenterSquare Investment Management LLC)

 

1.00%

 

13.50%

 

7.63%

 

7.94%

US Equity Large Cap Blend  

S&P 500® Index V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.31%

 

25.96%

 

15.32%

 

11.68%

US Equity Small Cap

 

Small-Cap Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc. (sub-advised by Champlain Investment Partners, LLC, Kennedy Capital Management LLC, Palisade Capital Management, LP, SouthernSun Asset Management, LLC,
and Westfield Capital Management, L.P.)

 

1.28%

 

13.55%

 

10.84%

 

7.68%

Moderate Allocation  

Total Return V.I.S. Fund2 — Class 3 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.90%

 

15.21%

 

5.90%

 

4.66%

US Equity Large Cap Growth  

U.S. Equity V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.91%

 

27.91%

 

16.03%

 

11.37%

 

  1    The PSF PGIM Jennison Focused Blend Portfolio—Class II Shares merged into the PSF PGIM Jennison Blend Portfolio—Class II Shares effective December 8, 2023.
  2    For contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006, only Class 3 Shares of the Total Return V.I.S. Fund will be available. If your contract was issued prior to May 1, 2006, Class 1 Shares of the Total Return V.I.S. Fund are available.

 

A-4


Table of Contents

The following Portfolio is not available to contracts issued on or after May 1, 2006:

 

           

Average Annual Total
Returns

(as of 12/31/2023)

Type   Portfolio Company and Adviser/Subadviser   Current
Expenses
  1-Year   5-Year   10-Year
Moderate Allocation  

Total Return V.I.S. Fund — Class 1 Shares

SSGA Funds Management, Inc.

 

0.65%

 

15.48%

 

6.16%

 

4.92%

 

 

* The Portfolio is subject to an expense reimbursement or fee waiver arrangement. The annual expenses shown reflect temporary fee reductions.

 

A-5


Table of Contents

APPENDIX B

 

Examples — Death Benefit Calculations

 

Basic Death Benefit

 

The purpose of this example is to show how the Basic Death Benefit works based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

Example: Assuming an owner:

 

  (1)   purchases a contract for $100,000;

 

  (2)   makes no additional premium payments and takes no partial surrenders;

 

  (3)   is not subject to premium taxes; and

 

  (4)   the Annuitant’s age is 70 on the Contract Date then:

 

Annuitant’s
Age
    End of
Year
    Contract
Value
    Unadjusted
Death Benefit
 
  71        1     $ 103,000     $ 103,000  
  72        2       110,000       110,000  
  73        3       80,000       110,000  
  74        4       120,000       120,000  
  75        5       130,000       130,000  
  76        6       150,000       150,000  
  77        7       160,000       160,000  
  78        8       130,000       160,000  
  79        9       90,000       160,000  
  80       10       170,000       170,000  
  81       11       140,000       170,000  
  82       12       190,000       190,000  
  83       13       150,000       170,000  

 

Partial surrenders will reduce the unadjusted death benefit by the proportion that the partial surrender (including any applicable surrender charge and any premium tax assessed) reduces the Contract Value. For example:

 

Date     Premium
Payment
    Contract
Value
    Unadjusted
Death Benefit
 
  3/31/09     $ 50,000     $ 50,000     $ 50,000  
  3/31/17         50,000       50,000  
  3/31/18               35,000       50,000  

 

If a partial surrender of $17,500 is taken on March 31, 2018, the unadjusted death benefit immediately after the partial surrender will be $25,000 ($50,000 to $25,000) since the Contract Value is reduced 50% by the partial surrender ($35,000 to $17,500). This is true only if the unadjusted death benefit immediately prior to the partial surrender (as calculated above) is not the Contract Value on the date of the Annuitant’s death. It also assumes that no premium tax applies to the partial surrender. This example is based on purely hypothetical values and is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

Optional Enhanced Death Benefit

 

The following example shows how the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit works based on purely hypothetical values. It is not intended to depict investment performance of the contract.

 

This example assumes an owner purchases a contract with an Annuitant age 65 at the time of issue, and that he takes no partial surrenders before the Annuitant’s death.

 

Date     Premium     Contract
Value
    Gain     Death
Benefit
   

Optional Enhanced

Death Benefit

 
  8/01/09     $ 100,000     $ 100,000     $ 0     $ 100,000     $ 0  
  8/01/24               300,000       200,000       300,000       70,000  

 

The Annuitant’s death and notification of the death occur on 8/01/24. At that time, 40% of the earnings or “gain” ($200,000) is $80,000. However, since the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit cannot exceed 70% of the premiums paid ($100,000) under this age scenario, the Optional Enhanced Death Benefit in this example will be $70,000.

 

B-1


Table of Contents

A Statement of Additional Information containing more detailed information about the contract and the Separate Account can be found online at www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra2, and is available free by writing us at the address below or by calling (800) 352-9910.

 

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

Annuity New Business

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

 

The Statement of Additional Information is incorporated by reference into this prospectus.

 

Reports and other information about Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1 are available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov, and copies of this information may be obtained, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by electronic request at publicinfo@sec.gov.

 

EDGAR contract identifier number C000026721.


Table of Contents

Statement of Additional Information For

Flexible Premium Variable Deferred Annuity Contracts

 

Form P1152 1/99

 

Issued by:

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1

11011 West Broad Street

Glen Allen, Virginia 23060

Telephone Number: (800) 352-9910

 

 

 

This Statement of Additional Information is not a prospectus. It should be read in conjunction with the prospectus, dated May 1, 2024, for the Flexible Premium Variable Deferred Annuity Contracts issued by Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company through its Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1. The terms used in the current prospectus for the Flexible Premium Variable Deferred Annuity Contracts are incorporated into this Statement of Additional Information.

 

For a free copy of the prospectus:

Call:   (800) 352-9910
Or write:   Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company
    11011 West Broad Street
    Glen Allen, Virginia 23060
Or visit:  

www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra (for RetireReadySM Extra contracts)

www.genworth.com/CommonwealthExtra (for Commonwealth Extra contracts)

www.genworth.com/RetireReadyExtra2 (for RetireReadySM Extra II contracts)

Or:   contact your financial representative

 

The date of this Statement of Additional Information is May 1, 2024.

 

B-1


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

The Company

     B-3  

The Separate Account

     B-3  

Additional Information About the Guarantee Account

     B-3  

The Contracts

     B-3  

Transfer of Annuity Units

     B-3  

Net Investment Factor

     B-4  

Termination of Participation Agreements

     B-4  

Tax Matters

     B-5  

Taxation of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

     B-5  

IRS Required Distributions

     B-5  

General Provisions

     B-5  

Using the Contracts as Collateral

     B-5  

The Beneficiary

     B-6  

Non-Participating

     B-6  

Misstatement of Age or Gender

     B-6  

Incontestability

     B-6  

Statement of Values

     B-6  

Trust as Owner or Beneficiary

     B-6  

Written Notice

     B-6  

Legal Developments Regarding Employment-Related Benefit Plans

     B-6  

Regulation of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

     B-6  

Experts

     B-6  

Financial Statements

     B-7  

 

B-2


Table of Contents

The Company

 

We are a stock life insurance company operating under a charter granted by the Commonwealth of Virginia on March 21, 1871. We are licensed as a life insurer to do business in Bermuda, the District of Columbia, and all states except for New York. We are wholly-owned by Genworth Life Insurance Company, which is wholly-owned by Genworth North America Corporation, which is indirectly wholly-owned by Genworth Financial, Inc.

 

We have a 34.5% investment in an affiliate, Genworth Life Insurance Company of New York.

 

Our principal offices are located at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

 

Our principal products are life insurance and fixed deferred and immediate annuities. Life insurance products provide protection against financial hardship after the death of an insured. Deferred annuities are investment vehicles intended for contract owners who want to accumulate tax-deferred assets for retirement, desire a tax-efficient source of income and seek to protect against outliving their assets. Immediate annuities provide a fixed amount of income for either a defined number of years, the annuitant’s lifetime or the longer of a defined number of years or the annuitant’s lifetime. In March 2016, we suspended sales of traditional life insurance and fixed annuity products. We continue, however, to service our existing retained and reinsured blocks of business.

 

We also have other products that have not been actively sold since 2011, but we continue to service our existing blocks of business. Those products include variable annuities, including group variable annuities offered through retirement plans, variable life insurance and funding agreements. Most of our variable annuities include guaranteed minimum death benefits. Some of our group and individual variable annuity products include guaranteed minimum benefit features such as guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits and certain types of guaranteed annuitization benefits.

 

We are subject to regulation by the State Corporation Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia. We file an annual statement with the Virginia Commissioner of Insurance on or before March 1 of each year covering our operations and reporting on our financial condition as of December 31 of the preceding year. Periodically, the Commissioner of Insurance examines our liabilities and reserves and those of the Variable Account and assesses their adequacy, and a full examination of our operations is conducted by the State Corporation Commission, Bureau of Insurance of the Commonwealth of Virginia, at least every five years.

 

We are also subject to the insurance laws and regulation of other states within which we are licensed to operate.

 

Capital Brokerage Corporation serves as principal underwriter for the contracts and is a broker/dealer registered with the SEC. Genworth North America Corporation (formerly, GNA Corporation) directly owns the stock of Capital Brokerage Corporation and the Company. Genworth North America Corporation is indirectly owned by Genworth.

 

The Separate Account

 

In accordance with the board resolution establishing the Separate Account, such Separate Account will be divided into Subaccounts, each of which shall invest in the shares of a designated mutual fund portfolio, unit investment trust, managed separate account and/or other portfolios (the “Eligible Portfolios”), and net premiums under the contracts shall be allocated to Subaccounts which will invest in the Eligible Portfolios set forth in the contracts in accordance with the instructions received from contract owners.

 

Additional Information About the Guarantee Account

 

The initial interest rate guarantee period for any allocation you make to the Guarantee Account will be one year or longer. Subsequent interest rate guarantee periods will each be at least one year. We may credit additional rates of interest for specified periods from time to time.

 

The Contracts

 

Transfer of Annuity Units

 

At your request, Annuity Units may be transferred once per calendar year from the Subaccounts in which they are currently held (subject to certain restrictions described in the contract).

 

The number of Annuity Units to be transferred is (a) times (b) divided by (c) where:

 

  (a)   is the number of Annuity Units in the current Subaccount desired to be transferred;

 

  (b)   is the Annuity Unit Value for the Subaccount in which the Annuity Units are currently held; and

 

  (c)   is the Annuity Unit Value for the Subaccount to which the transfer is made.

 

If the number of Annuity Units remaining in an Subaccount after the transfer is less than 1, the Company will transfer the remaining Annuity Units in addition to the amount requested. We will not transfer Annuity Units into any Subaccount unless

 

B-3


Table of Contents

the number of Annuity Units of that Subaccount after the transfer is at least 1. The amount of the income payment as of the date of the transfer will not be affected by the transfer (however, subsequent variable income payments will reflect the investment experience of the selected Subaccounts).

 

Net Investment Factor

 

The net investment factor measures investment performance of the Subaccounts during a Valuation Period. Each Subaccount has its own net investment factor for a Valuation Period. The net investment factor of a Subaccount for a Valuation Period is (a) divided by (b) minus (c) where:

 

  (a)   is the result of:

 

  (1)   the value of the net assets of that Subaccount at the end of the preceding Valuation Period; plus

 

  (2)   the investment income and capital gains, realized or unrealized, credited to the net assets of that Subaccount during the Valuation Period for which the net investment factor is being determined; minus

 

  (3)   the capital losses, realized or unrealized, charged against those assets during the Valuation Period; minus

 

  (4)   any amount charged against that Subaccount for taxes (this includes any amount we set aside during the Valuation Period as a provision for taxes attributable to the operation or maintenance of that Subaccount); and

 

  (b)   is the value of the net assets of that Subaccount at the end of the preceding Valuation Period; and

 

  (c)   is a factor for the Valuation Period representing the mortality and expense risk charge and the administration expense charge.

 

We will value the assets in the Separate Account at their fair market value in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and applicable laws.

 

Termination of Participation Agreements

 

The participation agreements pursuant to which the Funds sell their shares to the Separate Account contain varying provisions regarding termination. The following summarizes those provisions:

 

AB Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon six months’ advance written notice.

 

AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds). This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon six months’ advance written notice.

 

The Alger American Fund. This agreement may be terminated at the option of any party upon six months’ written notice to the other parties, unless a shorter time is agreed to by the parties.

 

Allspring Variable Trust. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon six months’ advance written notice.

 

BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon 60 days’ advance written notice.

 

BNY Mellon. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon 180 days’ advance written notice.

 

Columbia Funds Variable Series Trust II. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon sixty days’ advance written notice.

 

Eaton Vance Variable Trust. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon six months’ advance written notice.

 

Federated Hermes Insurance Series. This agreement may be terminated by any of the parties upon 180 days written notice to the other parties.

 

Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund. These agreements provide for termination upon 90 days’ advance notice by either party.

 

Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon 60 days’ advance written notice to the other parties, unless a shorter period of time is agreed upon by the parties.

 

Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust. This agreement may be terminated at the option of any party upon six months’ written notice to the other parties.

 

Janus Aspen Series. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon six months’ advance written notice.

 

Legg Mason Partners Variable Equity Trust. This agreement may be terminated at the option of any party upon one year advance written notice to the other parties.

 

Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon 180 days’ notice unless a shorter time is agreed to by the parties.

 

MFS® Variable Insurance Trust and MFS® Variable Insurance Trust II. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon six months’ advance written notice.

 

B-4


Table of Contents

PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon six months’ advance written notice, unless a shorter time is agreed to by the parties.

 

The Prudential Series Fund. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon 60 days’ advance written notice.

 

Rydex Variable Trust. This agreement may be terminated by the parties upon six months’ advance written notice.

 

State Street Variable Insurance Series Funds, Inc. This agreement may be terminated at the option of any party upon six months’ written notice to the other parties, unless a shorter time is agreed to by the parties.

 

Tax Matters

 

Taxation of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

 

We do not expect to incur any federal income tax liability attributable to investment income or capital gains retained as part of the reserves under the contracts. See the “Tax Matters” section of the prospectus. Based upon these expectations, no charge is being made currently to the Separate Account for federal income taxes. We will periodically review the question of a charge to the Separate Account for federal income taxes related to the Separate Account. Such a charge may be made in future years if we believe that we may incur federal income taxes. This might become necessary if the tax treatment of the Company is ultimately determined to be other than what we currently believe it to be, if there are changes made in the federal income tax treatment of annuities at the corporate level, or if there is a change in the Company’s tax status. In the event that we should incur federal income taxes attributable to investment income or capital gains retained as part of the reserves under the contracts, the Contract Value would be correspondingly adjusted by any provision or charge for such taxes.

 

We may also incur state and local taxes (in addition to premium taxes) in several states. At present, these taxes, with the exception of premium taxes, are not significant. If there is a material change in applicable state or local tax laws causing an increase in taxes other than premium taxes (for which we currently impose a charge), charges for such taxes attributable to the Separate Account may be made.

 

IRS Required Distributions

 

In order to be treated as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes, Section 72(s) of the Code requires any Non-Qualified Contract to provide that:

 

  (a)   if any owner dies on or after the Maturity Date but prior to the time the entire interest in the contract has been distributed, the remaining portion of such interest will be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution being used as of the date of that owner’s death; and

 

  (b)   if any owner dies prior to the Maturity Date, the entire interest in the contract will be distributed:

 

  (1)   within five years after the date of that owner’s death; or

 

  (2)   as income payments which will begin within one year of that owner’s death and which will be made over the life of the owner’s “designated beneficiary” or over a period not extending beyond the life expectancy of that beneficiary. The “designated beneficiary” generally is the person who will be treated as the sole owner of the contract following the death of the owner, joint owner or, in certain circumstances, the Annuitant. However, if the “designated beneficiary” is the surviving spouse of the decedent, these distribution rules will not apply until the surviving spouse’s death (and this spousal exception will not again be available). If any owner is not an individual, the death of the Annuitant will be treated as the death of an owner for purposes of these rules.

 

The Non-Qualified Contracts contain provisions which are intended to comply with the requirements of Section 72(s) of the Code, although no regulations interpreting these requirements have yet been issued. We intend to review such provisions and modify them if necessary to assure that they comply with the requirements of Section 72(s) when clarified by regulation or otherwise.

 

Other rules apply to Qualified Contracts.

 

General Provisions

 

Using the Contracts as Collateral

 

A Non-Qualified Contract can be assigned as collateral security. We must be notified in writing if a contract is assigned. Any payment made before the assignment is recorded at our Home Office will not be affected. We are not responsible for the validity of an assignment. Your rights and the rights of a beneficiary may be affected by an assignment. The basic benefits of a Non-Qualified Contract are assignable. Additional benefits added by rider may or may not be available and/or eligible for assignments. Assigning a contract as collateral may have adverse tax consequences. See the “Tax Matters” provision of the prospectus.

 

B-5


Table of Contents

A Qualified Contract may not be sold, assigned, transferred, discounted, pledged or otherwise transferred except under such conditions as may be allowed under applicable law.

 

The Beneficiary

 

You may select one or more primary and contingent beneficiaries during your lifetime upon application and by filing a written request with our Home Office. Each change of beneficiary revokes any previous designation.

 

Non-Participating

 

The contract is non-participating. No dividends are payable.

 

Misstatement of Age or Gender

 

If the Annuitant’s age or gender, if applicable, was misstated on the contract data page, any contract benefits or proceeds, or availability thereof, will be determined using the correct age and gender.

 

Incontestability

 

We will not contest the contract.

 

Statement of Values

 

At least once each year, we will send you a statement of values within 30 days after each report date. The statement will show Contract Value, premium payments and other financial transactions made by you during the report period.

 

Trust as Owner or Beneficiary

 

If a trustee is named as the owner or beneficiary of this contract and subsequently exercises ownership rights or claims benefits hereunder, we will have no obligation to verify that a Trust is in effect or that the trustee is acting within the scope of his/her authority. Payment of contract benefits to the trustee shall release us from all obligations under the contract to the extent of the payment. When we make a payment to the trustee, we will have no obligation to ensure that such payment is applied according to the terms of the trust agreement.

 

Written Notice

 

Any written notice should be sent to us at our Home Office at 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060. The contract number and the Annuitant’s full name must be included.

 

We will send all notices to the owner at the last known address on file with us.

 

Legal Developments Regarding Employment-Related Benefit Plans

 

On July 6, 1983, the Supreme Court held in Arizona Governing Committee for Tax Deferred Annuity v. Norris, 463 U.S. 1073 (1983), that optional annuity benefits provided under an employee’s deferred compensation plan could not, under Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, vary between men and women on the basis of sex. The contract contains guaranteed annuity purchase rates for certain Optional Payment Plans that distinguish between men and women. Accordingly, employers and employee organizations should consider, in consultation with legal counsel, the impact of Norris, and Title VII generally, on any employment-related insurance or benefit program for which a contract may be purchased.

 

Regulation of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company

 

Besides federal securities laws and Virginia insurance law, we are subject to the insurance laws and regulations of other states within which it is licensed to operate. Generally, the Insurance Department of any other state applies the laws of the state of domicile in determining permissible investments. Presently, we are licensed to do business in the District of Columbia, Bermuda, and all states, except New York.

 

Experts

 

The statutory financial statements of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company as of December 31, 2023 and 2022, and for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2023, and the financial statements of the Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1 (comprised of the subaccounts listed in the appendix of the report) as of December 31, 2023 and for each of the years or periods listed in the appendix of the report, which were included in Form N-VPFS dated April 23, 2024, have been incorporated by reference into this Statement of Additional Information and in the registration statement in reliance upon the reports of KPMG LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, appearing elsewhere herein, and upon the authority of said firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

 

The audit report covering the Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company’s December 31, 2023 financial statements states that Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company prepared its financial statements using statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Virginia State Corporation Commission, Bureau of Insurance (statutory accounting practices), which is a basis of accounting other than U.S. generally accepted accounting principles. Accordingly, the

 

B-6


Table of Contents

audit report states that Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company’s financial statements are not intended to be and, therefore, are not presented fairly in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles and further states that those financial statements are presented fairly, in all material respects, in accordance with the statutory accounting practices.

 

The business address for KPMG LLP is 1021 East Cary Street, Suite 2000, Richmond, Virginia 23219.

 

Financial Statements

 

The statutory financial statements of the Company and the financial statements of the Separate Account, which were included in Form N-VPFS dated April 23, 2024, have been incorporated by reference into this Statement of Additional Information. You should distinguish the financial statements of the Company from the financial statements of the Separate Account. Please consider the financial statements of the Company only as bearing on our ability to meet our obligations under the contracts. You should not consider the financial statements of the Company as affecting the investment performance of the assets held in the Separate Account.

 

B-7


Table of Contents

PART C

 

OTHER INFORMATION

 

Item 27. Exhibits

 

 (a)    Resolution of Board of Directors of The Life Insurance Company of Virginia authorizing the establishment of the Separate Account. Previously filed on May 1, 1998 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 9 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration
No. 033-76334.
 (a)(i)    Resolution of the Board of Directors of GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company authorizing the change in name of Life of Virginia Separate Account 4 to GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4. Previously filed on June 2, 2000 with Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-31172.
 (a)(ii)    Resolution of the Board of Directors of GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company authorizing the change in name of GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company to Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on January 3, 2006 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (a)(iii)    Resolution of the Board of Directors of GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company authorizing the change in name GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4 to Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1. Previously filed on January 3, 2006 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (b)    Not Applicable.
 (c)    Underwriting Agreement dated December 1, 2001 between GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company and Capital Brokerage Corporation. Previously filed on September 30, 2002 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 8 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (c)(i)    Dealer Sales Agreement dated December 1, 2001. Previously filed on September 30, 2002 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 8 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (d)    Contract Form P1152. Previously filed on December 18, 1998 with Pre-Effective Filing No. 1 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (d)(i)    IRA Endorsement. Previously filed on May 1, 1998 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 9 to Form  N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 033-76334.
 (d)(ii)    IRA Endorsement P5364 8/07. Previously filed on November 27, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 25 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (d)(iii)    Pension Endorsement. Previously filed on May 1, 1998 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 9 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 033-76334.
 (d)(iv)    Roth IRA Endorsement P5365 8/07. Previously filed on November 27, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 25 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (d)(v)    Section 403(b) Endorsement. Previously filed on May 1, 1998 with Post-Effective Amendment No.  9 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 033-76334.
 (d)(vi)    Optional Death Benefit Rider. Previously filed on January 27, 1999 with Pre-Effective Amendment No. 2 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-63531.

 

C-1


Table of Contents
 (d)(vii)    Optional Enhanced Death Benefit Rider. Previously filed on September 2, 2000 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-31172.
 (d)(viii)    Optional Enhanced Death Benefit Rider P5153 12/00. Previously filed on February 28, 2001 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 4 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (d)(ix)    Monthly Income Benefit Endorsement P5154 12/00. Previously filed on February 28, 2001 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 4 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (d)(x)    Optional Enhanced Death Benefit Rider P5161 3/01. Previously filed on April 30, 2001 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 5 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (d)(xi)    Death Provisions Endorsement P5232 1/03. Previously filed on February 18, 2003 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 8 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (d)(xii)    Annual Step-Up Death Benefit Rider P5233 1/03. Previously filed on February 18, 2003 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 8 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (d)(xiii)    Rollup Death Benefit Rider P5234 1/03. Previously filed on February 18, 2003 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 8 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (d)(xiv)    Greater of Annual Step-Up and Rollup Death Benefit Rider P5235 1/03. Previously filed on February 18, 2003 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 8 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (d)(xv)    Earnings Protector Death Benefit Rider P5240 1/03. Previously filed on February 18, 2003 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 8 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (d)(xvi)    GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company Guarantee Account Rider. Previously filed on June 24, 2003 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 9 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (d)(xvii)    Guaranteed Income Rider. Previously filed on April 27, 2005 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (d)(xviii)    Payment Protection with Commutation Immediate and Deferred Variable Annuity Rider. Previously filed on September 1, 2006 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 27 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (d)(xix)    Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit for Life Rider. Previously filed on September 1, 2006 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 27 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (d)(xx)    Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Rider. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (d)(xxi)    Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Rider. Previously filed on November 27, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 25 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.

 

C-2


Table of Contents
 (d)(xxii)    Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit for Life Rider. Previously filed on June  27, 2008 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 32 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life  & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-47732.
 (e)    Application. Previously filed on April 7, 2006 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (f)(i)    Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on January 3, 2006 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (f)(ii)    By-Laws of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on January 3, 2006 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 19 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (g)    Reinsurance Agreement. Previously filed on April 26, 2004 with Post Effective Amendment No.  13 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(i)(a)    Amended and Restated Fund Participation Agreement among Variable Insurance Products Funds, Fidelity Distributors Corporation and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on April 25, 2008 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 26 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(i)(b)    First Amendment to Amended and Restated Fund Participation Agreement among Variable Insurance Products Funds, Fidelity Distributors Corporation and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on April 25, 2008 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 26 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(ii)    Participation Agreement between Janus Capital Corporation and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on April 27, 2005 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 17 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(iii)    Fund Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and Federated Insurance Series. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(iv)(a)    Participation Agreement between The Alger American Fund, Fred Alger and Company, Inc., and The Life Insurance Company of Virginia. Previously filed on September 28, 1995 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 3 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 033-76334.
 (h)(iv)(b)    Amendment to Fund Participation Agreement between The Alger American Fund, Fred Alger and Company, Inc. and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on April 30, 1999 with Post Effective Amendment No. 1 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-63531.
 (h)(v)(a)    Participation Agreement between Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(v)(b)    Amendment to Fund Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and Goldman Sachs Variable Insurance Trust. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.

 

C-3


Table of Contents
 (h)(vi)    Fund Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and Legg Mason Partners Variable Equity Trust and Legg Mason Partners Variable Income Trust. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(vii)    Participation Agreement between GE Investments Funds, Inc. and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on April 7, 2006 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(viii)(a)    Participation Agreement between AIM Variable Insurance Funds, Inc. and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on April 27, 2005 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 17 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(viii)(b)    Amendment to Fund Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and AIM Variable Insurance Funds. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(ix)    Amendment to Fund Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and Dreyfus. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(x)(a)    Participation Agreement between MFS® Variable Insurance Trust and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on April 27, 2005 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 17 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(x)(b)    Amendment to Fund Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and MFS Variable Insurance Trust. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xi)(a)    Participation Agreement between PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on April 27, 2005 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 17 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xi)(b)    Fund Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xii)    Participation Agreement between The Prudential Series Fund, Inc. and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xiii)    Participation Agreement between Rydex Variable Trust and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on April 27, 2005 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 17 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xiv)    Participation Agreement between Van Kampen Life Investment Trust and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xv)(a)    Participation Agreement between AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on April 27, 2005 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 17 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.

 

C-4


Table of Contents
 (h)(xv)(b)    Amendment to Fund Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xvi)    Participation Agreement between Nations Separate Account Trust and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on April 26, 2004 with Post Effective Amendment No. 13 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xvii)    Participation Agreement between Merrill Lynch Variable Series Funds, Inc. and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on April 27, 2005 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 17 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xviii)    First Amendment to the Participation Agreement between BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc., BlackRock Distributors, Inc. and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on April 25, 2008 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 26 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xix)    Fund Participation Agreement between Evergreen Variable Annuity Trust and GE Life and Annuity Assurance Company. Previously filed on November 15, 2004 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 15 to Form N-4 for GE Life & Annuity Separate Account 4, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xx)    Amended and Restated Fund Participation Agreement between Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, Franklin/Templeton Distributors, Inc., Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and Capital Brokerage Corporation. Previously filed with Post-Effective Amendment No. 20 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xxi)(a)    Participation Agreement between Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed with Post-Effective Amendment No. 59 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-31172.
 (h)(xxi)(b)    Amendment to Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and Lincoln Variable Insurance Products Trust. Filed herewith.
 (h)(xxii)    Fund Participation Agreement between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and Eaton Vance Variable Trust. Previously filed on April 23, 2007 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 23 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xxiii)    Fund Participation Agreement between Wells Fargo Variable Trust and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Previously filed on April  27, 2011 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 34 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (h)(xxiv)    Form of Fund Participation Agreement Amendment between Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and Fund Company to distribute summary prospectuses pursuant to Rule 498. Previously filed on April 27, 2011 with Post-Effective Amendment No. 34 to Form N-4 for Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Registration No. 333-62695.
 (i)    Not Applicable.
 (j)    Not Applicable.
 (k)    Opinion and Consent of Michael D. Pappas, Counsel for Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company. Filed herewith.
 (l)    Consents of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm. Filed herewith.
 (m)    Not Applicable.
 (n)    Not Applicable.
 (o)    Not Applicable.
 (p)    Power of Attorney. Filed herewith.

 

C-5


Table of Contents

Item 28. Directors and Officers of the Depositor

 

Jamala M. Arland

   Director, President and Chief Executive Officer

Thomas J. McInerney

   Director, Chairperson of the Board and Senior Vice President

Kelly A. Saltzgaber

   Director, Senior Vice President and Chief Investment Officer

Gregory S. Karawan

   Director and Senior Vice President

Jerome T. Upton

   Director and Senior Vice President

James J. Buddle

   Director

Eleanor L. Kitzman

   Director

Jose D. Saenz

   Director

Angela R. Simmons

   Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

Vidal J. Torres

   Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary

Michael Powers

   Senior Vice President and Chief Information Officer

Keith A. Willingham

   Vice President and Controller

Garway A.D. Bright

   Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer

Scott G. Goodman

   Vice President and Appointed Actuary

Lisa J. Baldyga

   Treasurer

 

The principal business address for those listed above is Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company, 11011 West Broad Street, Glen Allen, Virginia 23060.

 

Item 29. Persons Controlled by or Under Common Control With the Depositor or Registrant

 

LOGO

 

C-6


Table of Contents

Item 30. Indemnification

 

Sections 13.1-876 and 13.1-881 of the Code of Virginia, in brief, allow a corporation to indemnify any person made party to a proceeding because such person is or was a director, officer, employee, or agent of the corporation, against liability incurred in the proceeding if: (1) he conducted himself in good faith; and (2) he believed that (a) in the case of conduct in his official capacity with the corporation, his conduct was in its best interests; and (b) in all other cases, his conduct was at least not opposed to the corporation’s best interests and (3) in the case of any criminal proceeding, he had no reasonable cause to believe his conduct was unlawful. The termination of a proceeding by judgment, order, settlement or conviction is not, of itself, determinative that the director, officer, employee, or agent of the corporation did not meet the standard of conduct described. A corporation may not indemnify a director, officer, employee, or agent of the corporation in connection with a proceeding by or in the right of the corporation, in which such person was adjudged liable to the corporation, or in connection with any other proceeding charging improper personal benefit to such person, whether or not involving action in his official capacity, in which such person was adjudged liable on the basis that personal benefit was improperly received by him. Indemnification permitted under these sections of the Code of Virginia in connection with a proceeding by or in the right of the corporation is limited to reasonable expenses incurred in connection with the proceeding.

 

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company’s Articles of Incorporation provide that Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company shall, and may through insurance coverage, indemnify any directors or officers who are a party to any proceeding by reason of the fact that he or she was or is a director or officer of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company against any liability incurred by him or her in connection with such proceeding, unless he or she engaged in willful misconduct or a knowing violation of the criminal law or any federal or state securities law. Such indemnification covers all judgments, settlements, penalties, fines and reasonable expenses incurred with respect to such proceeding. If the person involved is not a director or officer of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company, Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company may indemnify, or contract to indemnify, to the same extent allowed for its directors and officers, such person who was, is or may become a party to any proceeding, by reason of the fact that he or she is or was an employee or agent of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company, or is or was serving at the request of Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise.

 

* * *

 

Item 31. Principal Underwriter

 

(a) Capital Brokerage Corporation is the principal underwriter of the contracts as defined in the Investment Company Act of 1940, and is also the principal underwriter for flexible premium variable annuity and variable life insurance policies issued through Genworth Life & Annuity VL Separate Account 1, Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1, Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 2, Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 3, Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 4 and Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company.

 

C-7


Table of Contents

(b)

 

Name

  

Address

  

Positions and Offices with Underwriter

Maria O. Tabb

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

   Director, Chairperson of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer

M. Brandon Armor

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

   Director

Vidal J. Torres, Jr.

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

   Director, Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary

Garway A.D. Bright

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

  

Director

Kellie T. Carter

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

  

Director

James J. Namorato

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

   Senior Vice President and Chief Compliance Officer

Lisa J. Baldyga.

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

   Vice President and Treasurer

James D. Beam

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

   Vice President and Assistant Secretary

Craig L. Pichette

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

  

Vice President

Bonnie C. Turner

  

11011 W. Broad St.

Glen Allen, VA 23060

   Financial & Operations Principal

 

(c)

 

(1)

Name of

Principal Underwriter

  

(2)

Net Underwriting
Discounts and
Commissions

    

(3)

Compensation
on Redemption

    

(4)

Brokerage
Commissions

  

(5)

Compensation

Capital Brokerage Corporation

   Not Applicable      Not Applicable      7%    $23.1 million

 

Item 33. Management Services

 

Not Applicable.

 

Item 34. Fee Representation

 

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company hereby represents that the fees and charges deducted under the contract, in the aggregate, are reasonable in relation to the services rendered, the expenses expected to be incurred, and the risks assumed by Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company.

 

STATEMENT PURSUANT TO RULE 6C-7 OF THE INVESTMENT COMPANY ACT OF 1940

 

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company offers and will offer contracts to participants in the Texas Optional Retirement Program. In connection therewith, Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company and the Genworth Life & Annuity VA Separate Account 1 rely on 17 C.F.R. Section 270.6c-7 and represent that the provisions of paragraphs (a)-(d) of the Rule have been or will be complied with.

 

SECTION 403(B) OF THE INTERNAL REVENUE REPRESENTATIONS

 

Genworth Life and Annuity Insurance Company represents that in connection with its offering of contracts as funding vehicles for retirement plans meeting the requirements of Section 403(b) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, it is relying on a no-action letter dated November 28, 1988, to the American Council of Life Insurance (Ref. No. IP-6-88) regarding Sections 22(e), 27(c)(1), and 27(d) of the Investment Company Act of 1940, and that paragraphs numbered (1) through (4) of that letter will be complied with.

 

C-8


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

 

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933 and the Investment Company Act of 1940, the Registrant certifies that it meets the requirements of Securities Act Rule 485(b) for effectiveness of this Registration Statement and has duly caused this post-effective amendment to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, duly authorized, in the County of Henrico, and Commonwealth of Virginia, on the 26th day of April 2024.

 

GENWORTH LIFE & ANNUITY VA SEPARATE ACCOUNT 1  (REGISTRANT)
By:   /S/ MICHAEL D. PAPPAS   
 

Michael D. Pappas

Vice President

GENWORTH LIFE AND ANNUITY INSURANCE COMPANY (DEPOSITOR)

By:   /S/ MICHAEL D. PAPPAS   
 

Michael D. Pappas

Vice President

 

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed below by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

Name

  

Title

 

Date

/S/ JAMALA M. ARLAND*    

Jamala M. Arland

  

Director, President and Chief Executive Officer

  April 26, 2024

/S/ THOMAS J. MCINERNEY*    

Thomas J. McInerney

  

Director, Chairperson of the Board and Senior Vice President

  April 26, 2024

/S/ KELLY A. SALTZGABER*    

Kelly A. Saltzgaber

  

Director, Senior Vice President and Chief Investment Officer

  April 26, 2024

/S/ GREGORY S. KARAWAN*    

Gregory S. Karawan

  

Director and Senior Vice President

  April 26, 2024

/S/ JEROME T. UPTON*    

Jerome T. Upton

  

Director and Senior Vice President

  April 26, 2024

/S/ JAMES J. BUDDLE*    

James J. Buddle

  

Director

  April 26, 2024

/S/ ELEANOR L. KITZMAN*    

Eleanor L. Kitzman

  

Director

  April 26, 2024

/S/ JOSE D. SAENZ*    

Jose D. Saenz

  

Director

  April 26, 2024

/S/ ANGELA R. SIMMONS*    

Angela R. Simmons

  

Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

  April 26, 2024

/S/ KEITH A. WILLINGHAM*    

Keith A. Willingham

  

Vice President and Controller

  April 26, 2024
*By:   

/S/ MICHAEL D. PAPPAS    

Michael D. Pappas   

 

Pursuantto Power of Attorney
executed on March 29, 2024

  April 26, 2024

 

C-9


ATTACHMENTS / EXHIBITS

ATTACHMENTS / EXHIBITS

LVIP FPA AMENDMENT

OPINION

CONSENT

POWER OF ATTORNEY